JP2016209598A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably setting operation of movable means.SOLUTION: Movable means includes a plurality of visual confirmation parts configured to visibly recognize a light emission mode from a back side from a front. A back side of the movable means includes light emission means including a light emission part allowing the visual confirmation parts to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode. A specific movable pattern is determined, at least by movable pattern determination means, as a movable pattern in which the movable means can be moved by movable control means. When the movable pattern determination means determines the specific movable pattern, the visual confirmation part allows the light emission part to emit light with positioning of the movable part in a light emission position as a position opposing the light emission part of the light emission means as an opportunity, and light emission control is performed at least by light emission control means with a specific light emission pattern emitted when the movable means is moved from the light emission position by a specific quantity. Thus, an effect, where operation of the light emission means and the movable means can be suitably set, is provided.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 177

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include variable means that operates with a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can perform a wide variety of performance operations by operating a plurality of variable means.

JP 2008-012194 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, with the diversification of the variable means, it may be difficult to suitably move each variable means in the variable means having a complicated configuration.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably setting the operation of the variable means.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is movable within a predetermined movable range and has a plurality of visual recognition parts configured such that the light emission mode from the back side is visible from the front side; A light emitting means provided on the back side of the movable means, and having a light emitting part capable of emitting the visual recognition part in a predetermined light emission mode from the back side of the movable means; a movable control means capable of controlling the movable means; A movable pattern determining means capable of determining at least a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern moved by the movable control means; and when the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means, the visual recognition unit The light emitting unit emits light when the movable unit is located at a light emitting position that is opposite to the light emitting unit, and the movable means is movable by a predetermined amount from the light emitting position. And at least emission controllable light emission control means in a particular emission pattern for turning off if it.

  A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the movable means is constituted by a rotating body that is rotatable about a predetermined rotation axis.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the movable pattern determining means includes the specific movable pattern as the movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. One movable pattern can be determined from at least a plurality of movable patterns, and the light emission control means is configured to emit the light emission means with a predetermined light emission pattern different from the specific light emission pattern when the predetermined movable pattern is determined. Is controlled to emit light.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the movable means is movable within a predetermined movable range. The movable means includes a plurality of visual recognition parts configured such that a light emission mode from the back side is visible from the front side. On the back side of the movable means, there is provided a light emitting means having a light emitting portion capable of emitting the visual recognition portion in a predetermined light emission mode. The movable means is moved and controlled by the movement control means, and a specific movable pattern is determined at least by the movable pattern determining means as a movable pattern moved by the movement control means. When the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining unit, the light emitting unit is caused to emit light when the movable unit is positioned at the light emitting position that is a position opposite to the light emitting unit of the light emitting unit. The light emission is controlled by at least the light emission control means with a specific light emission pattern that emits light when moved by a predetermined amount from the light emission position.

  Thereby, since it can suppress that a light emission part light-emits in the state which the visual recognition part and the light emission part shifted | deviated, the appearance quality of a movable means can be improved in the state which the light emission means light-emitted. Therefore, there is an effect that the operations of the light emitting means and the movable means can be set appropriately.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis, so that the movable means rotates. During this time, the light emission position and the arrangement other than the light emission position are repeated alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be operated with a good appearance every time at a light emitting position where there is a possibility of being arranged a plurality of times.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, the following effects are produced. That is, the movable pattern determining means determines one movable pattern from a plurality of movable patterns including at least a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. When the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emission means is controlled to emit light with a predetermined light emission pattern different from the specific light emission pattern.

  Thereby, since it is possible to control light emission with different light emission patterns according to the movable pattern, it is possible to change the appearance of the movable means more greatly according to the light emission pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily discriminate from which the movable pattern is moved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a board surface and a board surface lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a board surface lower unit. (A) is a front view of a base member, a 1st out port, a 2nd out port, a lower left board member, and a lower right board member, (b) is a base member in the XVb-XVb line of Drawing 15 (a). It is sectional drawing of a lower left board member. It is a front perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a back perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a back perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an expansion-contraction production apparatus. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of an expansion-contraction production apparatus. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. It is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. It is a graph showing the distance from the reference | standard horizontal line of a projection part. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a back perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a slide operation unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a slide operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting operation unit. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a tilting operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an effect member and the 2nd drive. (A) And (b) is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (A) And (b) is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the swing angle of the effect member with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member. It is a front view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a front view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of the transmission member and torsion spring in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (A) And (b) is a front view of the transmission member and torsion spring in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a back surface perspective view of the transmission member in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a back surface perspective view of a movement contact member. (A) And (b) is a back surface perspective view of a transmission member, (c) And (d) is a top view of a transmission member. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the main body member of the production member typically. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a front view of the compound operation unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) is the fragmentary front view of the rotation arm member in 6th Embodiment, (b) is the fragmentary top view of the rotation arm member in the arrow LXIXb direction view of Fig.69 (a), (c) ) Is a partial front view of the rotating arm member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a switching device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of the tilting operation unit in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in a 1st control example, a special symbol reservation ball storage area, a special symbol reservation ball execution area, and a normal symbol reservation ball storage area. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) shows typically the content of RAM of the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed the 1st random number table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is set to ROM of the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the 1st type selection table, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed the 2nd random number table set to ROM of the main controller in the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller in the 1st control example, (b) was set in the fluctuation pattern selection table, It is the figure which showed typically the variation pattern table for jackpots, (c) is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation pattern table for deviation (normal), (d) is the fluctuation pattern for deviation (probability change). It is the figure which showed the table typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is typical about the content of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is the figure which showed typically the content of the entrance effect selection table in the 1st control example. It is the block diagram which showed typically the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the work RAM of the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is the figure which showed typically the content of the correction information table in a 1st control example. is there. It is the figure which showed the setting coordinate of the display area in a 1st control example. (A)-(c) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of power-on in the first control example. (A) to (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A in a 1st control example, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the display data table in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the transfer data table in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the drawing list | wrist in the 1st control example. It is an example of the timing chart of the fluctuation | variation display mode in the time-short game in the 1st control example. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the time shortening in a 1st control example. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the time shortening in a 1st control example. It is a timing chart in which the time effect in the first control example is set. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern reception process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production management process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the extended production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the specific time effect process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the entrance effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which shows the V interruption processing. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the special effect correction process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed round number command processing. (A) is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed notice command processing. (A) is the flowchart which showed the entrance effect command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the specific time production command processing which is done. (A) is the flowchart which showed the presentation mode change command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart showing stop command processing executed by the process. It is the flowchart which showed the error command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the presentation information correction process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) to (b) is an explanatory view of the control of the stepping motor in the first control example. (A) to (b) is a diagram showing whether or not detection by a slide position detection sensor is possible for each positional relationship between the slide position detection sensor and the light shielding plate. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a positional relationship between a tilting origin sensor and a sensor shielding unit when the effect member is at the origin position. (A) is the figure which showed the positional relationship of a tilting origin sensor and a sensor shielding part in case a production member performs a head swing operation | movement to the left direction of a front view, (b) is a figure where a production member is a front. It is the figure which showed the positional relationship of a tilt origin sensor and a sensor shielding part at the time of performing a head swing operation | movement to the visual right direction. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is typical about the content of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown in. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the operation scenario table prescribed | regulated to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the operation scenario table in a 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the included slide operation | movement table, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the tilting operation table contained in the operation scenario table in a 2nd control example. is there. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the initial stage operation table contained in the operation | movement scenario table in a 2nd control example, (b) is in ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the prescription | regulation of the prescription | regulation swing table. It is the figure which showed the correspondence of the number of operation steps of the slide operation | movement in the 2nd control example, and the swingable direction of an effect member. It is the figure which showed the correspondence of the number of operation steps of the swing operation | movement in the 2nd control example, and the number of operation steps of a slide operation | movement. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the origin return process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the execution command processing which is executed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the initial stage operation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the initial stage operation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the additional operation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the inclination direction setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the abnormality detection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the slide operation | movement process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) is typical about the content of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the timing production | presentation selection table prescribed | regulated to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the pressing-down period table prescribed | regulated to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the table for early stage difficulty level 3 contained in the pressing period table in a 3rd control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the sub display device during the timing effect, and (b) shows an example of the display contents when the player has successfully pressed the frame button in the timing effect. It is a figure. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content when a player fails to press a frame button in a timing production, (b) is a case where the production aspect of high difficulty is selected as a timing production. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the sub display apparatus in. (A) is the figure which showed the display content of the sub-display apparatus when a player achieved norm in a timing effect, (b) is the sub in the case where a player has not achieved norm in a timing effect. It is the figure which showed the display content of the display apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the change of the aspect of the fluctuation production in which the timing production in the 3rd control example was set. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the timing effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the middle panel setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the end stage setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the alerting | reporting mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary lighting unit in the fourth control example, and (b) is a side view of the rotary lighting unit in the fourth control example. (A)-(c) is the figure which illustrated the lighting state in which the visual quality deteriorates in the case of a 4th control example, when a rotating member is a low-speed rotation state. (A)-(c) is the figure which illustrated the lighting state with a good appearance quality in the case of a 4th control example, when a rotation member is a low-speed rotation state. (A)-(e) is the figure which showed an example of the lighting control in case the rotation member is a high-speed rotation state in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the lighting control process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of low speed performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the rotational speed identification process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of the acceleration performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of high speed performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine when the rotation lighting unit is in the retracted position in the fourth control example. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine when the rotation lighting unit is in the extended position in the fourth control example.

<First Embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 57, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first prize opening 64, a second prize opening 640, a first variable prize winning device 65, a second variable prize winning device 650, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, 13 is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG. The first variable winning device 65 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base member 310 of the board surface lower unit 300 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), jackpot B (short jackpot at 16R time), and jackpot C (short and short jackpot when 2R probability variation is present) are provided. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “16R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 16 rounds and becomes a short time state of a normal symbol. “Short-term jackpot with probability variation” is a jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol after a jackpot of two rounds, but the short-time state of a normal symbol is not granted. In addition, “16R short-time jackpot” is a state in which the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 16 rounds and then shifts to a low probability state of a special symbol, and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment) It is a big hit.

  In addition, the “high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol” indicates a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, a so-called probability variation state (probability variation state), in other words, a special gaming state. It is the state of the game that is easy to shift to. The high probability state (probability variation state) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which a hit probability of a normal symbol (second symbol) described later is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “special symbol low probability state” means a state where the probability variation state is not established, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state. The normal symbol time-short state (short time medium) means a game state in which the normal symbol (second symbol) is more likely to win and the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, the normal state of the pachinko machine 10 is a state of a game that is neither in the probability state of the special symbol nor in the short-time state of the normal symbol (the special symbol jackpot probability or the normal symbol (second symbol) is neither up nor hit probability) ).

  During the short time state of the normal symbol, not only the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is changed. A long opening time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the short-time state, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, in the short time state of the normal symbol, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 640a opens rather than usual. In addition, the normal symbol (second symbol) does not change the probability of hitting the normal symbol during the short time state of the normal symbol, and the electric combination is recovered at the time and once the electric combination 640a attached to the second winning prize opening 640 is opened. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count that the thing 640a opens. In addition, during the short time state of the normal symbol, the normal time (the first symbol) is not used for the time that the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released per time. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of 2 symbols) is increased as compared with the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays a normal symbol (second symbol) in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball of the through gate 67 The 2nd symbol display apparatus (not shown) comprised by these is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 12-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set to be shorter during the probability change or the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the short time state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal time. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the short-time state.

  It should be noted that the ball wins the second prize opening 640 during the time-shortening state by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning during the time-shortening state or increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per time When it is in the easy state, the time required for the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if the time required to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set shorter in the normal symbol than in the normal state in the short-time state, the normal symbol hit probability is made constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) winning lottery is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the first winning port 64 does not have the electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and the ball is in a state where the ball can always be won. On the other hand, the second winning opening 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a, and the electric accessory 640a is difficult to be opened in a normal time (when the time is not short), and a game ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening 640. Is in a difficult state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, so the first winning opening 64 without the electric winning combination 640a is present. Toward the left of the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball passes through the left side (so-called “left-handed”). It is advantageous for the player to aim to become.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory 640a. It is advantageous for the player to set a state and obtain a lot of jackpot lottery opportunities by winning at the second winning opening 640 and aiming to win the jackpot.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning port 64, and a first specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A second variable prize-winning device 650 is disposed on the left side of the variable display device 80, and the second variable prize-winning device 650 is formed in a circular shape having the same size as the other prize-winning holes 63, 64, 640 in the substantially central portion thereof. A specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning openings 65a and 650a that are normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning ports 65a and 650a are closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning ports 65a, 650a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid 65b (for opening and closing rightward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis). FIG. 15 shows only the outer shape). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid 65b is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the front side, and an open state in which the ball is likely to win the first specific winning opening 65a is temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

  Specifically, the second variable prize-winning device 650 is opened / closed to the left by using a front-opening triangular opening / closing plate disposed on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a and the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And a large opening solenoid (not shown). The second specific winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the small opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open / close plate to the left, and the ball is temporarily formed in an open state in which it is easy to win the second specific winning port 650a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the state.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to cause the second variable prize-winning device 650 to win a ball by making a left strike, eliminating the troublesomeness of switching between left strike and right strike each time the gaming state changes. can do.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are set for a predetermined time. A large opening provided separately from the specific winning ports 65a and 650a is triggered for a predetermined time when the ball wins into the specific winning ports 65a and 650a while the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are opened. A gaming state that is released a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, the number of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of plural (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, Not only on the left side of the variable display device 80, for example, it may be below the first winning port 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 314 and a second out port 315. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out port 314 or the second out port 315 (not shown). Guided to the road. The first out port 314 is disposed on the lower left side of the first winning port 64, while the second out port 315 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning port 64. That is, the second out port 315 is disposed on the opposite side of the first out port 314 with the first winning port 64 interposed therebetween.

  Therefore, a sphere that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end (the inner rail 61 or the outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side (right side in FIG. 2) in front of the first winning port 64 is the inner rail 61. Alternatively, it flows down along the inclination of the outer edge member 73 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second out port 315, while at the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area on the left side of the first winning port 64 in front view. The reached ball flows down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 314.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 102), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 100) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a vertical drive motor 431, an opening / closing drive motor 466, and other drive motors 531, 561, 631, 661, and 751.

  Here, various drive motors (vertical drive motor 431, open / close drive motor 466, and other drive motors 531, 561, 631, 661, 751) will be described. These various drive motors are composed of, for example, known stepping motors, and a plurality of these drive motors are provided in association with each accessory in order to operate each accessory mounted on the pachinko machine 10. These various drive motors are driven by corresponding motor control ICs (motor drivers). Specifically, a command including at least the number of rotation steps, the rotation direction (positive direction or negative direction), and the rotation speed from the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 to the motor control IC (motor driver). Is output. The control IC (motor driver) drives the corresponding drive motors based on the output command. The motor control IC (motor driver) may be a single IC that can set the operation for a plurality of drive motors, or a plurality of motor control ICs (motor drivers) may be provided. Alternatively, the drive motors corresponding to the different actors may be operated. When a motor control IC (motor driver) that can set the operation for a plurality of drive motors is adopted, information for specifying the type of the drive motor is included in the command for transmitting the number of rotation steps and the like. And output it.

  Here, the operation of the drive motor will be described using the vertical drive motor 431 as an example. When the control IC (motor driver) operates the vertical drive motor 431 based on the set command, the operation is performed on the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 each time the operation of one step is performed. A signal (execution signal) for notifying that it has been made is output. With this execution signal, the MPU 221 can grasp the progress of the set operation. The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a step counter (not shown). This step counter is provided for each accessory, and is a counter that counts how many steps each accessory has operated from the origin (retreat) position. That is, the origin (retreat) position is set to a 0 step position, and the value is updated by 1 each time an execution signal is received from the control IC. More specifically, the value is incremented by 1 each time the accessory moves one step in the direction (positive direction) from the origin (retreat) position to the end point (extension) position. Further, the value is subtracted by 1 every time one step operation is performed in the direction (negative direction) from the end point (extension) position to the origin (retraction) position. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the operation position of each accessory based on the value of the step counter.

  Here, the origin position refers to a specific arrangement that is set for each accessory, and is a position that shifts in origin return based on power-on. Specifically, each accessory is provided with an origin sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not it is the origin position. If the origin sensor is not on when the power is turned on, the origin sensor is turned on. The accessory is varied until it is detected (that is, various drive motors are driven). This origin position becomes the reference position for the operation of each accessory. Note that the above-described step counter is reset to 0 when the accessory reaches the origin position by the origin return (that is, when the origin sensor detects ON). As described above, the value of the step counter is updated one by one based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

  Next, an example of control of various drive motors (here, the vertical drive motor 431) by the motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. In order to make the explanation easy to understand, a stepping motor that rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, rotates once in four steps) will be described as an example. However, an actual vertical drive motor 431 has one step. The rotation angle can be set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once in one step.

  First, FIG. 135 (a) is a diagram showing an outline of a vertical drive motor 431 composed of a stepping motor. The vertical drive motor 431 is configured such that a portion corresponding to the excitation control data is excited by sending excitation control data from the sound lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC. Specifically, excitation is performed by the motor control IC by excitation control data constituted by a 4-digit binary number corresponding to “A, B, C, D” shown in FIG. Specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part of the vertical drive motor 431 (that is, any one of A, B, C, and D) is “1”, the excitation is performed and the excitation control data is “0”. If so, it is not excited. For example, if the excitation control data is “1100”, A and B are excited, and C and D are not excited. This excitation control data is defined in an excitation table (see FIG. 135 (b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 has an excitation counter used for selecting and setting one excitation control data from a plurality of excitation control data defined in the excitation table (see FIG. 135 (b)). Is provided. This excitation counter can be updated one by one in the positive direction starting from “0”, and when the value of the excitation counter becomes “3”, the value returns to “0” when the value is updated. It has become. Each time this excitation counter value is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, excitation of each part based on the excitation control data is immediately performed (that is, the vertical drive motor 431 operates without a time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). Furthermore, the excitation counter can also be updated in the negative direction. That is, the value can be updated in the order of “0” → “3” → “2” → “1” → “0” starting from “0”. In the case of updating in the negative direction, the rotation direction of the vertical drive motor 431 is opposite to that in the case of updating in the positive direction. The direction in which the excitation counter is updated (whether the direction is positive or negative) and the update frequency of the excitation counter are determined in advance for each type of accessory for which an operation is set. Note that the maximum value of the excitation counter changes according to the number of steps of the drive motor. Specifically, for example, in the case of a drive motor that rotates once in one step (that is, it takes 360 steps for one rotation of the motor), the excitation counter is updated in the range of “0” to “359”. It becomes a loop counter.

  Next, a specific example of excitation control data for exciting each part of the vertical drive motor 431 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 (b) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between an excitation table defining excitation control data and the state of the vertical drive motor 431 excited based on the excitation control data defined in the excitation table. As shown in FIG. 135 (b), excitation control data is defined for each excitation counter value in the excitation table.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), excitation control of “1100, 0110, 0011, 1001” in the order of excitation counters “0” to “3” as sequence data corresponding to the vertical drive motor 431. Each data is defined. Further, when “1100” that is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “0” is set, the positions of A and B of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited. Further, when “0110” which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “1” is set, the positions of B and C of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, so the excitation counter value is “0”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from this state. In addition, when “0011” that is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “2” is set, the positions of C and D of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, and the excitation counter value is “1”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise. When “1001”, which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “3”, is set, the positions A and D of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, so the excitation counter value is “2”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from this state. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 135, every time the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 in the positive direction, the vertical drive motor 431 rotates 90 degrees clockwise. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter is updated in the negative direction, the vertical drive motor 431 rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise.

  As described above, the control of the vertical drive motor 431 has been described with a simplified operation model. However, in the vertical drive motor 431 actually used in the present embodiment, the excitation counter is set to 1 every step (ie, the excitation counter is 1). It can be rotated by 1 degree (every update). That is, when changing each accessory, the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 as many times as the number of steps to be changed, and the excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter is set every time the excitation counter is updated. Each accessory can be varied accurately.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by setting a command to the motor driver, various drive motors can be driven at the rotation speed, the rotation direction, and the number of rotation steps specified by the command. Therefore, it is possible to realize a variety of performance operations using an accessory.

  Note that a unique operation pattern corresponding to the production is set for each accessory. This operation pattern defines a command to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) described above for each elapsed time.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the various drive motors have been operated is determined based on the number of steps in which the various drive motors are operated based on a command set for the motor driver. That is, based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of times the execution signal received from the motor driver is received each time one step of operation is set by the motor driver, has the operation set for each drive motor been completed? It is determined whether or not, but is not limited to this. For example, an elapsed time after setting a command for operating various drive motors may be measured, and it may be configured to determine whether the operation of the various drive motors has been completed based on the elapsed time. .

  Here, control of the vertical drive motor 431 and the open / close drive motor 466 controlled in cooperation with each other in the present embodiment will be described. Although details will be described in a first control example described later, in this embodiment, the vertical motion unit device (falling material) 400 is used as an effect (falling material scenario) in which the vertical motion unit device (falling material) 400 is movable. An effect is provided in which the lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved in the front view downward direction (falling direction) by the drive of the vertical drive motor 431. In the effect (falling combination scenario), after the lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved in the front downward direction (falling direction), the door member 470 is opened by the opening / closing drive motor 466, and the opening is performed. Production that is not done is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with an opening / closing drive motor 466 for opening and closing the door member 470 when the effect of opening the door member 470 is executed in the effect (falling combination scenario). On the other hand, control (energization stop control) is performed so that excitation for all positions A to D is turned off (see S1706 in FIG. 108). When the excitation for all positions is OFF, the static torque (so-called detent torque) of the opening / closing drive motor 466, that is, the torque for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is minimum. In this case, when the vertical drive motor 431 is driven and the slide member 450 is moved in the dropping direction, and the movement is finished, an inertial force downward in front view is generated on the door member 470.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the above-described torque for maintaining the door member 470 in a closed state (static torque) is configured to be smaller than the inertial force generated in the door member 470. Accordingly, when the slide member 450 is moved in the front downward direction (falling direction) without driving the opening / closing drive motor 466 to open the door member 470, the inertial force acting on the door member 470 causes the door to move. The member 470 can be opened. That is, when the door member 470 has finished moving in the front view downward direction together with the slide member 450 (that is, when the arm member 440 and the lens member 460 are disposed at the extended position), the door member 470 is viewed from the front view. Directional inertia force (that is, force that continues to move downward in the front view) acts to open the door member 470. Therefore, power consumption for driving the opening / closing motor 466 can be reduced.

  If the inertial force generated in the door member 470 due to the movement of the slide member 450 is not sufficient to open the door member 470, the opening / closing drive motor 466 may be driven to open. In this case, by using the inertial force generated in the door member 470 as the slide member 450 moves, the driving torque of the opening / closing drive motor 466 can be reduced, thereby reducing power consumption and opening / closing drive motor. The size of 466 can be reduced.

  Further, the case where the door member 470 is opened by driving the opening / closing motor 466 and the case where the door member 470 is opened without driving the opening / closing motor 466 may be switched according to the effect pattern. For example, when performing an effect pattern with a high degree of expectation, the door motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 in order to reliably open the door member 470, while opening and closing is performed when an effect pattern with a low degree of expectation is performed. The door member 470 may be opened without driving the motor 466 for use. Thereby, the malfunction that the door member 470 is not open | released can be suppressed in spite of a high expectation production pattern.

  Further, when the vertical drive motor 431 is driven and the slide member 450 is not movable in the dropping direction, that is, when the inertia force does not act on the door member 470, the torque for maintaining the door member 470 in a closed state (static torque) ) Is configured to have a torque sufficient to maintain the door member 470 in the closed state. For this reason, it is not necessary to excite the opening / closing drive motor 466 and maintain the door member 470 in the closed state even during a period when the falling combination scenario is not executed, and power consumption can be reduced. In addition, when the torque required to maintain the door member 470 in the closed state (static torque) is insufficient for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state, for example, a magnet is applied to the distal end portion of the door member 470. By providing, you may comprise so that the torque required in order to maintain the door member 470 in a closed state may decrease.

  On the other hand, when an effect in which the door member 470 is not opened is performed as an effect (falling combination scenario), excitation control is performed so that the opening / closing drive motor 466 for opening and closing the door member does not rotate. Specifically, the opening / closing drive motor 466 is stopped by continuing to excite the corresponding part (A to D) in the excitation table (FIG. 135B) based on the current excitation counter for a certain period of time. Torque to maintain the position (so-called holding torque) is generated, and the door member 470 is maintained in the closed state, whereby the slide member 450 is produced despite the effect that the door member 470 is not opened. It is possible to reliably prevent (suppress) the door member 470 from being opened by the momentum (inertia force) when the is moved in the dropping direction.

  In addition, when the opening / closing control of the door member 470 described above does not match the opening / closing state of the door member 470 controlled by the opening / closing control, an effect to be executed thereafter may be changed.

  Specifically, when an effect based on a dropped actor scenario in which the door member 470 is opened is performed, the opening / closing drive motor 466 is controlled to stop energization, and then the door member 470 is opened, The lens member 460 located on the back side of the door member 470 becomes visible. Then, the player can visually recognize the characters “Gekiatsu” displayed on the third symbol display device 81 through the lens member 460. By visually recognizing the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the lens member 460, the display is enlarged and displayed, and the player can feel the display more impressively.

  On the other hand, when the opening / closing drive motor 466 has been controlled to stop energization, but the door member 470 has not been opened, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is displayed with the letters “Gekiatsu”. Even though the door member 470 is opened and the lens member 460 can be visually recognized, an impression that a problem has occurred that the door member 470 is not opened is given. Therefore, in the production, the opening / closing drive motor 466 is controlled to stop energization, but the door member 470 is detected not to be opened by an origin sensor or the like that can detect the state. Thereafter, the effect is changed so that the characters “Gekiatsu” are not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, even if the door member 470 is not opened, the characters “Gekiatsu” are not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can recognize that the effect that the door member 470 is not opened is executed. It is possible to avoid giving the impression that the above-mentioned problem has occurred. In this case, a specific LED may be lit or notified to the hall computer through an external output terminal to notify the employee that the problem has occurred.

  Further, as a scenario in which the lens member 460 and the door member 470 of the vertical movement unit device (falling object) 400 are dropped, a scenario in which the lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved from a retracted position to a protruding position in one operation, and a plurality of operations (for example, 2 And a scenario for moving from the retracted position to the overhanging position. As a result, even if the door member 470 is not opened after the opening / closing drive motor 466 is controlled to stop energization, even if the door member 470 is opened by the second operation, By the operation, the door member 470 can be felt as an effect of moving from the retracted position to the extended position, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  Further, the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is changed by changing the driving speed of the vertical drive motor 431 between the falling combination scenario in which the door member 470 is opened and the falling combination scenario in which the door member 470 is not opened. You may comprise as follows. Specifically, in a falling combination scenario where the door member 470 is opened, the driving speed of the vertical drive motor 431 is increased so that the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is increased, while the door member 470 is opened. In the scenario where the falling combination is not performed, the driving speed of the vertical drive motor 431 is decreased so that the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is reduced. Thereby, opening and closing of the door member 470 can be controlled with high accuracy. It is not limited to changing the driving speed of the vertical drive motor 431 according to the scenario of the falling combination. For example, in the same falling combination scenario, the movement is made upward and the movement downward. The drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 may be changed.

  Further, the case where the door member 470 is opened by driving the opening / closing motor 466 and the case where the door member 470 is opened without driving the opening / closing motor 466 may be switched according to the effect pattern. For example, when performing an effect pattern with a high degree of expectation, the door motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 in order to reliably open the door member 470, while opening and closing is performed when an effect pattern with a low degree of expectation is performed. The door member 470 is opened without driving the motor 466. Thereby, the malfunction that the door member 470 is not open | released can be suppressed in spite of a high expectation production pattern.

  An RTC (real time clock) 292 is connected to the input / output port 225 in the present embodiment. The RTC 292 is used as a time measuring means for measuring time, and is provided with a dedicated internal power source (in this embodiment, a battery), so it can keep time even when no power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. Can continue. Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, it is possible to obtain the same time information in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 by setting the same time (for example, current time) in the time measuring means and manufacturing the pachinko machine 10. .

  By configuring in this way, in addition to the normal performance, regardless of the game situation of each pachinko machine 10, the performance (time) of a special mode according to the elapsed time periodically (5 minutes every hour) Production) can be executed synchronously by a plurality of pachinko machines 10. Further, during a specific time (every minute elapsed from the start of the time effect) in a period (hereinafter referred to as a time effect period) in which this time effect is executed (displayed), the specific time effect suggesting the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Is executed. Specifically, the specific time production (countdown production) is a total of 4 countdown characters ("3", "2", "1", "0"), one character at a time for 3 seconds each (12 seconds in total) After being displayed, a character image (such as a girl's image) is displayed for 8 seconds in total for 20 seconds, and a display (effect) mode is set according to the elapsed time from the start of the effect. For example, a display (effect) mode in which “3” is displayed as the countdown character at the start time of the effect (at the time when 0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect) is set. In addition, a display (production) mode in which “1” is displayed as a countdown character is set when 6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production. In this specific time effect (countdown effect), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state and not in a short time state (a so-called latent probabilistic state), a countdown character (“3, 2, 1 ... ") is displayed in red (if not in the latent probability changing state, it is displayed in black). Details will be specifically described in the first control example.

  Here, a state in which the gaming state is a probabilistic state and is not a short-time state (a so-called latent probability varying state) is a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, and a state of a game that is easy to shift to the special gaming state (that is, gaming This is an advantageous state for a person. On the other hand, since the latent probability changing state is not a short-time state, the normal symbol hit probability is the same as the normal state, and as described above, when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning prize opening 640 is in the closed state In many cases, it is difficult to win the second prize opening 640. In this case, as in the normal state, the ball is fired toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory 640a so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”). ) It is more advantageous for the player to aim at winning big wins by obtaining many opportunities for winning big wins by winning at the first winning opening 64. In this way, the latent probability changing state is the same operation (gaming method) as the normal state except that the probability of being a big hit as the internal state of the pachinko machine 10 is up, so that the player has the current gaming state It is difficult to determine whether it is a normal state or a latent probability changing state. Although the details will be described later, in the latent probability changing state, the same effect as in the normal state is selected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is difficult to determine whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability changing state from the displayed effect.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the countdown character (“3, 2, 1,...”) That is displayed is usually displayed in the specific time effect that is executed when the latent probability change state is present in the time effect period. It is displayed in a different color (red) from the state. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the gaming state is a latent probability changing state that is advantageous for the player in the specific time effect. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the contents of the specific time effect, and to improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, in order to improve the time measurement accuracy by the time measurement means (RTC), a correction means (such as a GPS or a radio timepiece) for correcting time information from the outside may be provided.

  Further, every time power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started up), the time information is corrected by a correction means for correcting the time information from the outside (for example, a GPS or a radio clock). Also good. Thereby, the time information by the time measuring means can be updated every time power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started up) without providing a dedicated internal power supply (battery in this embodiment). In addition, it is possible to reduce manufacturing costs and maintenance costs (such as replacement costs due to deterioration of the internal power supply) of the time measuring means. The correction of the time information by the correction means is not limited to every time power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started up), but may be executed periodically (for example, every hour).

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  Here, the display content displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 by the display control apparatus 114 is demonstrated. The third symbol is composed of the main symbols of the numbers “0” to “9”. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of special symbols performed by the main controller 110 described later is a big win, the variation display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured to generate a jackpot after it is over. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the special symbol lottery result is “big hit A” or “big hit C”, a variable display is displayed in which the main symbols of “1, 3, 4, 7, 9”, which are odd numbers, are aligned and stopped. Is called. Further, if “big hit B”, the variable display in which the main symbols of “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” which are even numbers are aligned is performed.

  The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts vertically, the upper 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and the lower third is the notice effect. The sub display area Ds displays the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The approximate center of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 (reserved balls), and the small area Ds2 is The area for displaying the notice effect image, and the small area Ds3 is the area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the second winning opening 640. It is.

  On the actual display screen, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbols displayed at the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbol are displayed so as to be visible, so a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub display area Ds, one “●” symbol is displayed for one reserved ball, and the reserved symbols corresponding to up to four reserved balls for each of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are displayed. Is displayed. That is, a maximum of eight reserved symbols are displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In the present embodiment, the same reserved symbol (design) is used for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, but this is not restrictive. The symbol 2 may be configured to be displayed as a white square symbol).

  Thereby, the reserved balls of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640, that is, the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be displayed easily. In addition, since the display mode of the holding ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is displayed differently depending on the type of the normal symbol, the player can easily determine that the holding ball has been generated for a long time. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 include not only the above-described main symbols, reserved symbols, etc., but also a notice display such as a character display or a character, A display of the number of fluctuations is displayed as appropriate. In addition, when the reserved symbol is not displayed, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds3, the reserved ball number is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the reserved ball number. You may make it display in the aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern) which changes only by the part. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Further, a sub display device 690 is connected to the display control device 114. The sub display device 690 is a display device (for example, a liquid crystal panel) having a resolution different from that of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, the resolution of the third symbol display device 81 is (horizontal 800 pixels (pixels) × vertical 600 pixels (pixels)), and the resolution of the sub display device 690 is (horizontal 400 pixels (pixels) × vertical). 300 pixels (pixels)) (see FIG. 82). The resolutions of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 may be different from those described above, and the resolution of the sub display device 690 and the third symbol display device 81 are the same resolution. Alternatively, the resolution of the sub display device 690 may be higher than that of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the display method that can be adopted as the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 is not limited to the method using the liquid crystal panel, and any type of display (for example, PDP method, CRT method, organic display) EL method, MEMS shutter method, etc.) may be employed.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 81, but the display control device 114 in this embodiment is different from the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. Display control is performed using one piece of image data including images to be displayed (image data with a resolution of 1200 pixels (pixels) × 600 pixels (pixels) in the present embodiment). Among the image data, image data of a portion corresponding to the resolution of the third symbol display device 81 (region of 800 pixels (pixels) × 600 pixels (pixels) in width) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image data (region of 400 pixels (pixels) × 300 pixels (pixels) in the horizontal direction) corresponding to the resolution of the sub display device 690 in the remaining portion is displayed on the sub display device 690. Note that the remaining data (region of 400 pixels (pixels) × 300 pixels (pixels) in length) is unused.

  This makes it easy to synchronize the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, and the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 are shifted. Can be suppressed.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, a housing structure for the units 300 to 700 in the back case 210 will be described.

  FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 as viewed from the front. FIG. 7 illustrates a state where the composite operation unit 500 is mounted on the back case 210.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 200 is opened on one side (the front side in FIG. 6) from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 211a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 thereof. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The operation unit 200 includes a vertical operation unit 400, a composite operation unit 500, a tilt operation unit 600, and a slide operation unit 700 that are housed in the internal space of the back case 210.

  Specifically, the composite operation unit 500 is disposed at the upper right portion of the region formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210 (see FIG. 7). In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700 are disposed below the region formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210. In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the vertical operation unit 400 is disposed on the front side of the composite operation unit 500 in a stacked state and accommodated in the back case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the combined operation unit 500) is disposed in a stacked state in which another operation unit (for example, the vertical operation unit 400) is superimposed on the front side. Therefore, the predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit in the front view.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the player can visually recognize the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13, a predetermined operation unit is provided. It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize only the necessary part and to shield the other part from the player by another operation unit. Thereby, since it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, an outline of operation modes of the vertical motion unit 400, the composite motion unit 500, the tilt motion unit 600 and the slide motion unit 700 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 are appropriately referred to.

  8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 8 shows a state in which the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) of the vertical operation unit 400 is arranged at the extended position, and in FIG. 9, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 26) of the combined operation unit 500 shows the extended state. FIG. 10 shows the state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the substantially center in the width direction.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the vertical movement unit 400 moves the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 440 is retracted above the opening 211a of the back case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 440 is lowered, and the lens member 460 (see FIG. 18) is in the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (ie, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). ).

  As shown in FIG. 9, the composite operation unit 500 is arranged at a projecting position where the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 22) projects downward, and the front plate member 546 is located at the center of the opening 211 a of the back case 210 (that is, The extended state disposed on the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and the revolving position in which the rotating arm member 550 is retreated upward, and the front plate member 546 of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 A reduced state (see FIG. 5) retracted upward can be formed. In the contracted state shown in FIG. 5, the front plate member 546 is retracted above the opening 211a of the back case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 10, the tilting operation unit 600 is configured such that the support member 720 (see FIG. 47) of the slide operation unit 700 is slid left and right, and the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhang shown in FIG. It is possible to move between positions. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the tilting operation unit 600 is retracted to the right outside the opening 211a of the back case 210 and is visually recognized by the player inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhang position shown in FIG. 10, the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

  FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 46) are opened and the internal sub display device 690 is visually recognized. That is, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the state of FIG. 10, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) visually recognized through the opening 211a and the sub display inside the tilting operation unit 600 are displayed. The player can visually recognize both the effect displayed on the device 690.

  Each of these operation units 400 to 700 is formed so as to be able to operate independently, and as described above, the operation units 400 to 700 are arranged in a stacked state (stacked). Those having different layers may be operated at the same time even if the operating member projects inward from the opening 211a of the back case 210. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 8 to FIG. 10, the operation units 400 to 700 are not only operated individually but also can be combined with each other, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 11, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the combined operation unit 500 is in the extended state, the arm member 440 and the lens member 460 of the vertical operation unit 400 are disposed at the extended position, and the door member 470. Is formed in an open state.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the front plate member 546 of the composite operation unit 500 is visually recognized through the lens member 460 of the vertical operation unit 400. Since the lens member 460 is subjected to magnifying lens processing, as will be described later, the front plate member 546 is enlarged.

  That is, from the state shown in FIG. 11, the rotary plate 520 (see FIG. 24) of the combined operation unit 500 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24), and the front plate member 546 is moved up and down. When the front plate member 546 is moved to a position away from the lens member 470 in front view (see FIG. 39), the front plate member 546 is visually recognized in a normal size. Thereby, the state in which the front plate member 546 is visually recognized in a normal size and the state in which the front plate member 546 is enlarged (see FIG. 11) can be switched, and the production effect can be improved.

  FIG. 12 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 12, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the combined operation unit 500 is in the extended state, the tilting operation unit 600 is placed in the retracted position and in the tilted state, and the tilting operation unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are placed. A state immediately before the contact is illustrated. When the tilting operation unit 600 is further tilted, the tilting operation unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are brought into contact with each other. In this case, by swinging the composite operation unit 500 clockwise in front view (see FIG. 39), it is possible to produce an effect that makes it appear as if force is applied from the tilt operation unit 600 to the composite operation unit 500. (The operations of the units can be linked to create a more complicated performance). Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  Next, the panel surface lower unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface 13 and the board surface lower unit 300. As shown in FIG. 13, a receiving opening 13 a that is opened along the lower edge of the inner rail 61 and through which the board surface lower unit 300 is inserted is formed in the lower part of the game board 13.

  FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the board surface lower unit 300. As shown in FIG. 14, the board surface lower unit 300 includes a base member 310 that is fitted and fixed in the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13, and a ball that is disposed on the lower left side of the base member 310 when viewed from the front. A lower left plate member 320 for guiding to 314, a lower right plate member 330 for guiding a sphere to the second out port 315 disposed at the lower right of the base member 310 when viewed from the front, and a lower left plate fixedly fastened to the base member 310 from the front. The member 320 and the lower right plate member 330 mainly include a front lid member 340 that is pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 343.

  The base member 310 has a plate-like main body 311 that is substantially the same shape as the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13 and has a slightly smaller cross-sectional shape than the receiving opening 13a, and a front side of the main body 311. The decorative front plate portion 312 formed in a thin plate shape in a covering manner, the movable effect member 313 attached to the substantially central portion in the width direction of the decorative front plate portion 312, and the left side of the movable effect member 313 in front view. A first out port 314 that is a rectangular hole, and a second out port 315 that is a rectangular hole formed on the right side of the movable effect member 313 when viewed from the front.

  The movable effect member 313 includes a rotation effect member 313a that is disposed at the center lower edge in the width direction of the game board 13 and is rotated by a driving device (not shown). Here, when the out port is disposed at the lower center edge of the game board 13 in the width direction, the movable effect member 313 cannot be disposed at the lower center edge of the game board 13 in the width direction. In the present embodiment, the first outlet 314 and the second outlet 315 are disposed at positions spaced left and right from the center of the game board 13 without arranging the outlet at the center lower edge in the width direction of the game board 13. Thereby, the space which arrange | positions the movable production | presentation member 313 in the width direction center lower edge of the game board 13 is securable.

  With reference to FIG. 15, the shape of the 1st out port 314, the 2nd out port 315, the lower left board member 320, and the lower right board member 330 is demonstrated. FIG. 15A is a front view of the base member 310, the first out port 314, the second out port 315, the lower left plate member 320, and the lower right plate member 330, and FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the base member 310 and the lower left plate member 320 taken along line XVb-XVb. In FIG. 15A, the outer shape of the front lid member 340 fastened and fixed to the base member 310 and the nail formed above the first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are illustrated.

  The first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are openings through which balls are discharged from the game area. Compared to the first out port 314, the second out port 315 has a shorter length in the width direction. The reason will be described later. In addition, a guide rib 315a extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the upper inner surface of the second out port 315. By the guide rib 315a, the sphere flowing into the second out port 315 splashes high, and the resistance applied to the sphere when colliding with the upper bottom surface of the second out port 315 can be suppressed. Moreover, the flow of the sphere discharged from the second out port 315 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction, and variations in the direction of the discharged sphere can be suppressed.

  Further, a buffer rib 322 of the lower left plate member 320 described later is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 13) (see FIG. 15A). Thereby, also in the present embodiment in which the vertical width of the game area increases toward the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the effect of suppressing the rebound of the ball falling on the lower left plate member 320 is not impaired. That is, the closer to the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the higher the falling height of the ball, so that the impact when the dropped ball collides with the lower left plate member 320 may increase. On the other hand, since the buffer rib 322 is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the cushion rib 322 is bent closer to the center in the width direction of the game board 13, so that the cushioning effect is reduced. The degree can be increased.

  Here, the relationship between the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 and the landing frequency of the falling sphere will be described. For example, if the falling height of a sphere landing on the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is high, but the frequency of the sphere reaching the position is extremely low, obstacles to the discharge of other spheres without bothering the bounce of the sphere. It may not be. In this case, if the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is increased, the space of the game area is unnecessarily suppressed. Therefore, it is preferable that the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is set not only by the drop height of the sphere, but also by the relationship between the drop height and the frequency at which the sphere lands at that position.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the sphere flowing down above the buffer ribs 322 and 332 starts to flow along paths c1 and c2, and then reaches a landing area z0 to z4 via a plurality of branches b1 to b10. In the following description, the probability that the sphere will flow down is equal (1/2) between the paths c1 and c2, and the probability of branching left and right at the branches b1 to b10 is equal to the left and right (1/2). Will be explained. It is assumed that the sphere never flows down from the upper right.

  The probability that a sphere will reach the landing area z0 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z0, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b5 and reach the path c11. It can be considered that the branch b5 is reached from the route c1 via the branch b1 and the route c2 is reached. Therefore, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c11 and the sphere reaches the landing area z0 is the probability of the sphere flowing down from the path c1 1/8 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 2), Since it is expressed by the sum of the probability of a sphere flowing down from the path c2 and 1/4 (= 1/2 × 1/2), it is 3/8 (“^” means a power). That is, the respective probabilities are the product of the probability 1/2 that the sphere will flow down the paths c1 and c2 and the number that is a power of 1/2 by the number of branches b1 to b10 through which the sphere passes before reaching the landing area z0. It is represented by

  The probability that a sphere will reach the landing area z1 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z1, the branch b3 flows down the left side to reach the path c15, the branch b4 flows down the left side and reaches the path c16, or the branch b6 flows down the right side to reach the path c14. Or it is necessary to flow down the right side at the branch b7 to reach the path c13.

  Up to the branch b3, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered. Since there are three branches before the sphere reaches the path c15, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c15 is 1/16 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 3). Also, until the branch b4, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered, and there are four branches until the sphere reaches the path c16, so the probability that the sphere reaches the path c16 is 1/32 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 4). Further, until the branch b6, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered. Since there are three branches before the sphere reaches the path c14, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c14 is 1/16. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 3).

  Up to the branch b7, both cases where the sphere flows down from the path c1 and the path c2 are conceivable. There are four branches and three branches before the sphere flowing down from the path c1 reaches the path c13. May exist. There are two branches until the sphere flowing down from the path c2 reaches the path c13. Therefore, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c13 is 3/32 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 4 + 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 3), which is the probability of the sphere flowing down from the path c1. This is 7/32 because it is expressed by the sum of the probability of the sphere flowing down from the path c2 and 1/8 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 2).

  Here, the probability that the sphere reaches the landing region z1 is 12/32 because it is the sum of the probability that the sphere reaches the paths c13 to c16 described above.

  The probability that a sphere will reach the landing area z2 will be described. The probability that the sphere reaches the landing area z2 can be expressed by the probability that the sphere reaches the route c12, which is equal to the probability that the sphere that reaches the branch b7 reaches the route c13. Therefore, the probability that the sphere reaches the landing area z2 is 7/32.

  The probability that a sphere will reach the landing area z3 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z3, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b9 to reach the path c17, or flow down the left side at the branch b10 to reach the path c18.

  Up to the branch b9, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered. Since there are six branches before the sphere reaches the path c17, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c17 is 1/128 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 6). Further, until the branch b10, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 is considered. Since there are seven branches before the sphere reaches the path c18, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c18 is 1/256. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 7).

  The probability of the sphere reaching the landing area z3 is 3/256 because it is the sum of the probability of the sphere reaching the paths c17 and c18 described above.

  The probability that a sphere will reach the landing area z4 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z4, it is necessary to flow down the right side at the branch b10 to reach the path c19. It is assumed that all the spheres that have flowed down on the right side of the branch b10 flow down along the path c19. The probability that the sphere reaches the path c19 is equal to the probability that the sphere that reaches the branch b10 reaches the path c18. Therefore, the probability that the sphere reaches the landing area z4 is 1/256 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 7).

  From these facts, the rate at which the sphere reaches each landing area z0 to z4 is (z0: z1: z2: z3: z4) = (96: 96: 56: 3: 1). This ratio has a correlation with the buffer ribs 322 and 332.

  For example, when comparing the landing area z1 and the landing area z3, the heights of the spheres falling on the landing areas z1 and z3 are the same, but the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is the landing area z3. It is smaller than z1. This is because the rate at which the sphere reaches the landing region z3 is 1/32 of the rate at which the sphere reaches the landing region z1. That is, even if the bounding of the falling sphere is not suppressed as much as the landing area z1, there is little possibility that the discharge of the sphere is delayed in the landing area z3. Therefore, in the landing region z3, the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward by reducing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 as compared with the landing region z1.

  For example, when comparing the landing area z2 and the landing area z4, the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is greater than the falling distance of the sphere to the landing area z2, but the falling distance of the sphere to the landing area z4 is longer. The landing area z2 is larger than the landing area z4. This is because the rate at which the sphere reaches the landing region z4 is 1/56 of the rate at which the sphere reaches the landing region z2. That is, even if the bounding of the falling sphere is not suppressed as much as the landing area z2, there is little possibility that the discharge of the sphere will be delayed in the landing area z4. Therefore, in the landing region z4, the position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward by reducing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 as compared with the landing region z2.

  In the above description, the probability of branching of the spheres of the branches b1 to b10 is equal to the left and right (1/2). However, by changing the width of the nail, the spheres at the branches b1 to b10 are changed. It is possible to adjust the probability of branching. For example, by reducing the distance between the nails in the flow path through which the left arrow of the branch b1 passes to the same extent as the diameter of the sphere, the probability of the sphere flowing down along the right arrow at the branch b1 is greater than ½. can do. In the other branches b2 to b10, the probability of branching of the sphere can be adjusted similarly.

  Thereby, the frequency with which a sphere reaches the paths c11 to c19 can be adjusted, and the degree of freedom in designing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 can be improved.

  Further, the buffer rib 322 is formed so as to be inclined downward as the upper surface goes rearward (see FIG. 15B). Thereby, the ball flow to the 1st out mouth 314 can be made quick.

  Returning to FIG. The lower left plate member 320 includes a long plate-like main body portion 321, buffer ribs 322 in which thin plates connected in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 321 extend in the front-rear direction, and the buffer ribs 322, a front plate 323 formed in a manner to connect the front surface of 322, a step portion 324 formed to protrude upward at the left end of the main body portion 321 when viewed from the front, and extends from the step portion 324 leftward when viewed from the front. And a shaft support hole 326 drilled in the front-rear direction at the right end of the main body 321 when viewed from the front.

  The buffer rib 322 is a portion through which a sphere toward the first out port 314 passes, and suppresses the rebound of the sphere falling in the vertical direction in the vertical direction. That is, since the buffer rib 322 is formed from a thin plate that is continuously provided in the left-right direction, the impact of the collision can be reduced by bending in the thickness direction when the buffer rib 322 is collided with the falling ball. Further, when the ball moves in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the buffer rib 322, the ball is braked by being caught between the buffer ribs 322. In addition, the buffer rib 322 has a formation height and an aspect ratio that increase toward the inner side in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) to the right of the front view.

  The connection front plate 323 improves the strength of the buffer rib 322 by connecting the buffer rib 322.

  The stepped portion 324 is a raised portion for dropping the sphere flowing down from the sphere flow rail portion 325 in the vertical direction. Thereby, it can suppress that the load of the left-right direction is applied to the buffer rib 322 from the ball | bowl which flows down the ball | bowl flow rail part 325. FIG. Thereby, it can prevent that the buffer rib 322 receives the load of the left-right direction, and bends in the left-right direction.

  That is, since the buffer rib 322 is formed from a thin wall portion extending in the front-rear direction, the buffer rib 322 may be broken when a load in the left-right direction is applied. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a ball that rolls on the upper surface of the ball flow rail 325 that has a speed in the left-right direction and that may apply a load in the left-right direction to the buffer rib 322 moves up and down from the step portion 324 to the buffer rib 322. It is formed so as to fall in the direction. Thereby, the position where the sphere lands on the buffer rib 322 can be moved to the right in the width direction as the speed of the sphere in the left-right direction increases.

  Accordingly, the load applied to the buffer rib 322 in the left-right direction when the ball lands on the buffer rib 322 can be reduced toward the left (outside) in the width direction. For this reason, as the shock absorber rib 322 moves to the left in the width direction, the risk of bending due to the load in the left-right direction of the sphere decreases, and the aspect ratio of the shock absorber rib 322 can be made smaller than that on the right in the width direction. . In this case, since the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 can be formed along the curved surface formed on the lower surface of the game board 13, the buffer rib 322 is disposed as compared with the case where the buffer rib 322 has the same length in the width direction. The position can be lowered downward.

  Here, with the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 kept constant at the left and right positions in the width direction (with the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 formed with the same curve as the lower surface of the buffer rib 322), the lower surface of the game board 13 It is also conceivable to form the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 along the curved surface. However, in this case, the arrangement position of the step portion 324 is increased, and the arrangement position of the ball flow rail portion 325 formed to be inclined downward toward the step portion 324 is also increased. In this case, the dead space between the ball flow rail portion 325 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 13) is increased, and the game area is suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 is larger, the action of reducing the momentum of the sphere (deceleration action) becomes larger. Therefore, the buffer rib 322 is formed in such a manner that the aspect ratio increases from the vicinity of the step portion 324 toward the center of the game area.

  The upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed with the same curve as that of the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 until the front of the step portion 324 so as not to affect the formation height of the step portion 324 (in the middle of the buffer rib 322 in the horizontal direction). It is also possible that the maximum height is formed. However, in this case, the sphere that has reached the landing area z1 is prevented from rolling to the left. For this reason, the sphere is likely to stay in the landing area z1, and it becomes difficult to smoothly discharge the sphere.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the height of the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 in the width direction of the buffer rib 322 is small, the sphere that has reached the landing region z1 is easily turned to the left (landing region z2 side). Move. Accordingly, since the sphere can flow to the landing area z2 before the sphere stays in the landing area z1, the discharge of the sphere can be made smooth.

  Further, the step portion 324 has a function of blocking a sphere that flows down the buffer rib 322 and flows to the left. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from bouncing back beyond the lateral width of the first out port 314 after colliding with the front lid member 340 (see FIG. 13).

  The shaft support hole 326 is a portion that is inserted and supported by the insertion shaft 343 of the front lid member 340.

  The lower right plate member 330 includes a long plate-like main body portion 331, buffer ribs 332 each having a thin wall portion extending in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 331, and extending in the front-rear direction. A connecting front plate 333 formed in a manner to connect the front surfaces of the buffer ribs 332, a recessed portion 324 formed to be depressed downward at the right end of the main body portion 331 when viewed from the front, and a right side when viewed from the recessed portion 324 A ball flow rail portion 335 extending to the front and a shaft support hole 336 drilled in the front-rear direction at the left end of the main body portion 331 when viewed from the front.

  The configuration of the lower right plate member 330 and the configuration of the lower left plate member 320 are common in many parts. That is, the main body 331 is the main body 321, the buffer rib 332 is the buffer rib 322, the connection front plate 333 is the connection front plate 323, the ball flow rail portion 335 is the ball flow rail portion 325, and the shaft support hole 336 is the shaft support hole 336. Since the technical idea is common to each of the support holes 326, the description of the common parts is omitted.

  The buffer ribs 332 are formed with shorter left and right widths than the buffer ribs 322. As a result, the left and right formation widths of the second out port 315 can be shortened, and the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward compared to the first out port 314, and accordingly, the first variable. The space for disposing the large opening solenoid 65b of the winning device 65 can be secured (the disposing position of the first variable winning device 65 can be lowered).

  Here, the reason why the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be made shorter than that of the buffer rib 322 is that the flow path of the sphere to the second out port 315 is restricted. That is, as shown in FIG. 14, the first variable winning device 65 is arranged at the upper right of the second out port 315 when viewed from the front, so that the ball flows into the first specific winning port 65a when the opening / closing plate is opened, When the opening / closing plate is closed, the ball is dropped vertically downward on the front side of the first variable winning device 65. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the sphere from flowing down from the upper right in the front view to the second out port 315. In other words, a non-flowing region where the flow of the sphere is restricted is formed in the upper right part of the second out port 315.

  Therefore, the flow direction of the sphere to the lower right plate member 330 is limited only to the vertical drop and the flow from the width direction (from the sphere flow rail portion 335) (flow from the diagonally upper right is restricted). . Therefore, since there is no inflow of the sphere from the upper right side, the direction in which the sphere jumps can be restricted, the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be reduced, and the formation width of the second out port 315 can be reduced. As a result, an arrangement space for the first variable winning device 65 can be secured.

  The recessed portion 334 is a recess for causing the ball that has flowed down the ball flow rail portion 335 to splash. Therefore, the formation width of the recessed portion 334 is a width that allows the ball to be placed without contacting the adjacent buffer rib 332.

  The sphere that has flowed down the ball flow rail portion 335 is dropped into the recessed portion 334, rebounds by contacting the upper surface of the recessed portion 334, and falls onto the buffer rib 332. Thereby, it can prevent that a load is applied to the buffer rib 332 from the width direction, and it can prevent that the buffer rib 332 breaks.

  The recessed portion 334 is formed in front of the fastening hole B through which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the base member 310 to the game board 13 is inserted. This makes it easier to use a fastening tool such as a screwdriver when screwing a fastening screw into the fastening hole B in order to fasten and fix the board surface lower unit 300 to the game board 13. That is, the recessed portion 334 has both an effect of preventing the buffer rib 332 from being broken and an effect of facilitating the fastening and fixing of the base member 310.

  The front lid member 340 has a plate-like main body part 341 in which the first winning opening 64 is formed at the uppermost part, an opening part 342 that is formed in the center of the main body part 341 and makes the rotation effect member 313a visible. It mainly includes a pair of insertion shafts 343 that are inserted through the shaft support holes 326 and 336.

  The main body portion 341 is formed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the flow direction of the sphere is limited by the side wall portion. That is, a sphere that has collided with the main body 341 from the right cannot penetrate to the left, while a sphere that collided with the main body 341 from the left cannot penetrate to the right.

  The insertion shaft 343 is a portion inserted through the shaft support holes 326 and 336. Therefore, the diameter of the insertion shaft 343 is slightly smaller than the shaft support holes 326 and 336.

  Next, the vertical operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 21. 16 is a front perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. 16 and 17 show a state in which the arm member 440 of the vertical operation unit 400 is disposed at the retracted position.

  18 is a front exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 19 is a rear exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the vertical motion unit 400 includes a base member 410 that includes a vertical groove 414 that is recessed from the back side to the front side on the right side in the rear view and that the recess extends in the vertical direction. The rotating crank member 420 rotated around the connecting hole 413 of the base member 410, the driving device 430 for generating the driving force of the rotating crank member 420, and the driving force transmitted from the rotating crank member 420 to the base member 410. The arm member 440 swings around the shaft portion 412 and the upper and lower grooves 414 of the base member 410 are arranged on the opposite side of the base member 410 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swing of the arm member 440. The slide member 450 and the slide hole 443 formed at the tip of the arm member 440 are suspended in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swing of the arm member 440. A lens member 460 is slidably formed mainly includes a pair of door member 470 which is respectively pivotally supported on the lens member 460, a.

  The base member 410 has a main body portion 411 that is formed in a plate shape that is long on the left and right sides, and a columnar projection that protrudes from the right end portion of the main body portion 411 toward the front side. A shaft portion 412 that is supported, a connecting hole 413 that is formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction and that connects the rotating crank member 420 and the transmission gear 432, and is formed from the back side to the front side on the right side of the main body portion 411 when viewed from the back side. The upper and lower groove portions 414 in which the hollows to be formed extend in the vertical direction, and the concave portions 415 that are recessed from the front to the back side on both right and left outer sides of the upper and lower groove portions 414 are mainly provided.

  The upper and lower groove portions 414 are portions in which the expansion / contraction effect device 540 of the composite operation unit 500 is accommodated on the back side in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). As will be described later, since the swinging angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is suppressed as the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves toward the contracted state, the combined operation unit 500 oscillates the expansion / contraction effect device 540, thereby Colliding with the left and right inner surfaces is prevented. The recessed portion 415 is a portion where the slide guide portion 452 of the slide member 450 is guided.

  The rotating crank member 420 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 421, a sliding protrusion 422 that protrudes in a columnar shape from one end of the main body portion 421 to the front side, and is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440. And an engagement portion 423 that is engaged with the fitting portion 432a of the transmission gear 432 and disables relative rotation between the transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420.

  When the sliding protrusion 422 is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440 and rotated, the driving force of the driving device 430 is transmitted to the arm member 440 and the arm member 440 is swung around the shaft portion 412. .

  The drive device 430 includes a vertical drive motor 431 fastened and fixed to the base member 410, a drive gear 431a that is rotationally driven by the vertical drive motor 431, a transmission gear 432 that meshes with the drive gear 431a, The transmission gear 432 mainly includes a fitting portion 432a that is formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connection hole 413 and whose inner side surface is fitted to the engaging portion 423 of the rotating crank member 420. .

  The fitting portion 432a is a portion having a depression having a cross-sectional shape in which a circular shape is arranged at each vertex of a triangle, and is inserted into the connection hole 413 of the base member 410, and at the leading end side thereof, the rotating crank member 420. The engaging portion 423 is fitted so as not to be relatively rotatable. As a result, the main body 411 of the base member 410 is formed so as to be sandwiched between the transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420, and as described above, the transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420 cannot be rotated relative to each other. The transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420 rotate in synchronization. That is, the driving force of the vertical drive motor 431 is transmitted to the rotating crank member 420 via the transmission gear 432.

  The arm member 440 includes a main body portion 441 formed in a long bar shape, a shaft support hole 442 that is drilled on the base end side (right side in front view) and is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 412, and a base end side A sliding hole 443 that is formed as a long hole in the swing end side that is the opposite end of the lens member 460 and the sliding projection 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and the sliding projection 422 of the rotating crank member 420 is inserted. The bottomed hole-shaped insertion portion 444 is mainly provided.

  The shape of the insertion portion 444 is set so that the rotating crank member 420 can rotate once in a state where the sliding protrusion 422 is inserted through the insertion portion 444. Therefore, the arm member 440 can perform a swinging operation regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 420.

  The slide member 450 includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 451, a slide guide portion 452 that extends rearward from the left and right ends of the main body portion 451, and is guided by the recessed portion 415 so as to be vertically slidable. A central guide recess 453 that is a recess extending in the vertical direction formed in the front surface at the center in the width direction of 451 and through which the sliding protrusion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and both left and right ends of the main body 451 And a both-end guide recessed portion 454 that is formed on the front surface and extends in the vertical direction and guides the stable slide portion 464 of the lens member 460.

  The lens member 460 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 461 having a circular opening at the center, a magnifying lens 462 having a magnifying lens process fitted into the opening of the main body portion 461, and the center in the width direction of the main body portion 461. A sliding projection 463 that protrudes toward the back side at the upper end and is slidably inserted into the sliding hole 443 of the arm member 440, and protrudes and slides toward the back side at both ends in the width direction of the main body 461. A stable slide portion 464 that is inserted into the both-end guide recessed portion 454 of the member 450 so as to be slidable up and down, and a lower shaft portion 473 and an upper side of the door member 470 that are rotatably disposed on the lower left side of the main body portion 461 when viewed from the front. A pair of rotary cylinders 465 through which the shaft portion 474 is inserted, and an opening / closing drive motor 466 that rotates the pair of rotary cylinders 465 in opposite directions by a transmission mechanism (not shown). To prepare for.

  With reference to FIG. 20, the moving operation of the vertical operation unit 400 will be described. FIG. 20 is a front view of the vertical operation unit 400. FIG. 20 illustrates a closed state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical operation unit 400 is disposed at the extended position.

  When the arm member 440 is swung from the retracted position (see FIG. 16) to the extended position (see FIG. 20), the sliding of the lens member 460 that is pivotally supported by the sliding hole 443 on the rocking end side of the arm member 440. The moving projection 463 (see FIG. 18) is slid along the central guide recess 453 of the slide member 450. Since the lens member 460 is guided in the vertical direction by the both-end guide recessed portion 454 of the slide member 450, and the slide member 450 is guided in the vertical direction by the recessed portion 415 of the base member 410, the lens is rotated by the swing of the arm member 440. The member 460 is slid in the vertical direction.

  Returning to FIG. 18 and FIG. The door member 470 is configured by splitting a circular plate into two parts, a lower main body part 471 formed on the lower side, an upper main body part 472 formed on the upper side of the lower main body part 471, and a lower side A lower shaft portion 473 that protrudes in a columnar shape on the back side at the lower end portion of the main body portion 471 and is inserted into the rotating cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to rotate relatively, and a circle on the back side at the lower end portion of the upper body portion 472. And an upper shaft portion 474 that protrudes in a columnar shape and is inserted into the rotating cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

  The lower main body 471 includes a guide protrusion 471a that protrudes from a side that is in contact with the upper main body 472, and the upper main body 472 is a side that is in contact with the lower main body 471. The receiving recessed portion 472a is provided to be recessed. By fitting the guide protrusion 471a and the receiving recess 472a, the lower main body 471 and the upper main body 472 can be relatively aligned in the closed state. In the present embodiment, since the guide projection 471a projects in a tapered shape, the guide projection 471a can be received and securely fitted into the recess 472a.

  The operation of the door member 470 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical movement unit 400. FIG. 21 illustrates an open state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical operation unit 400 is disposed at the extended position.

  The lower shaft portion 473 and the upper shaft portion 474 (see FIG. 19) are rotated by the rotation of the rotating cylinder 465 (see FIG. 18) of the lens member 460. Since the pair of rotating cylinders 465 are rotated in opposite directions by the driving force of the opening / closing drive motor 466 (see FIG. 19), the door member 470 is opened from the closed state (see FIG. 20) to the open state (see FIG. 21). In this case, the lower main body 471 and the upper main body 472 can be swung outward (opposite directions). Further, when the door member 470 is changed from the open state (see FIG. 21) to the closed state (see FIG. 20), the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be swung inward.

  Thereby, compared with the case where a single cover member is swung to cover the front side of the lens member 460, the time for rocking the lower main body 471 and the upper main body 472 can be halved.

  Next, the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. The compound operation unit 500 swings the turning arm member 550 from the retracted position (see FIG. 22) to the extended position (see FIG. 9), thereby arranging the expansion / contraction effect device 540 on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. Is a unit. In addition, the expansion / contraction production device 540 is formed to be swingable around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24) of the base member 510.

  22 is a front perspective view of the combined operation unit 500, and FIG. 23 is a rear perspective view of the combined operation unit 500. 22 and 23 show a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at a retracted position that is a terminal position formed outside the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  FIG. 24 is a front exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 500, and FIG. 25 is a rear exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the combined operation unit 500 is a unit that produces an effect by sliding and swinging the expansion / contraction production device 540, and includes a base member 510 that forms a skeleton, and the base member 510. The rotary plate 520 is formed to be rotatable around the first shaft portion 512 of the first, the first drive device 530 is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and generates the driving force of the rotary plate 520, and is fastened to the front of the rotary plate 520. An expansion / contraction effect device 540 that is fixed and formed to be expandable / contractable in the radial direction of the rotating plate 520, and one end portion is connected to the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and the other end on the opposite side is pivotally supported by the base member 510. In addition, a swing arm member 550 that forms a telescopic motion of the telescopic effect device 540 by a swing motion, and a driving force of the rotational arm member 550 fastened and fixed to the base member 510 The second driving device 560 to be generated, the rotating crank member 570 that transmits the driving force of the second driving device 560 to the rotating arm member 550, and the fastening and fixing from the front of the base member 510, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating And a front cover 580 for concealing a mechanism portion on the rotating shaft side such as the crank member 570.

  The base member 510 includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 511, a columnar first shaft portion 512 projecting forward from a substantially central lower portion in the width direction of the main body portion 511, and the first shaft portion 512. Three rows of arc-shaped holes 513 drilled along a central arc, and first through holes 514 drilled adjacent to the second arc-shaped holes 513b of the three rows of arc-shaped holes 513. A cylindrical second shaft portion 515 projecting forward from the main body portion 511 at a substantially intermediate position between the shaft portion 512 and the right end portion of the main body portion 511, and adjacent to the second shaft portion 515. The second through-hole 516 to be drilled, the columnar third shaft portion 517 projecting forward from the lower right end of the main body portion 511 when viewed from the front, and the forward bending from the edge of the main body portion 511 The bent wall portion 518 is mainly provided.

  The first shaft portion 512 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 522 of the rotating plate 520 and serves as the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 520. Therefore, the diameter of the first shaft portion 512 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522 of the rotating plate 520.

  The arc-shaped hole 513 includes a first arc-shaped hole 513a, a second arc-shaped hole 513b, and a third arc-shaped hole 513c from the side close to the first shaft portion 512.

  The first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c are elongated holes through which the insertion shaft 525 of the rotating plate 520 is inserted to guide the rotation of the rotating plate 520. Thereby, the load received by the first shaft portion 512 when the rotating plate 520 is rotated can be reduced, and the durability of the rotating plate 520 can be improved. 24 and 25 illustrate a state in which the collar is fastened to the tip of the insertion shaft 525. The first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c are provided between the collar and the main body 521. Arranged between them (inserted before the collar is fastened).

  The second arc-shaped hole 513b is a long hole in which the arc-shaped rack 526 of the rotating plate 520 is disposed and moved. The upper side of the substantially central part is opened, and the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 is arranged in the opened part. As a result, the meshing portion between the driving motor 531 of the first driving device 530 and the arc-shaped rack 526 of the rotating plate 520 can be disposed in the plate thickness portion of the main body 511, so that the thickness of the composite operation unit 500 can be increased. The vertical dimension (the dimension in the front-rear direction in FIG. 22) can be suppressed.

  The first through hole 514 and the second through hole 516 are through holes into which the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 and the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560 are inserted, respectively.

  The second shaft portion 515 is a columnar portion that serves as a central axis of rotation of the main body portion 571 with the lid portion 575 of the rotating crank member 570 fastened and fixed to the front side. Therefore, the diameter of the second shaft portion 515 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 571 of the rotating crank member 570.

  The third shaft portion 517 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 552 of the rotation arm member 550 and serves as a central axis of rotation of the rotation arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the third shaft portion 517 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550. Around the third shaft portion 517, a torsion spring 517a that generates a biasing force that moves the rotating arm member 550 toward the retracted position is wound.

  The torsion spring 517a is formed in such a manner that the arm portions extend from both ends of the coil portion wound around the third shaft portion 517, respectively. One arm portion is fixed to the lower right portion of the bent wall portion 518 when viewed from the front (near the first stopper portion 518a), and the other arm portion on the opposite side of the one arm portion is engaged with the rotating arm member 550. Locked to the stop 555.

  The bent wall portion 518 includes a first stopper portion 518a adjacent to the third shaft portion 517, a second stopper portion 518b formed on the right side of the first shaft portion 512, and a left side of the first shaft portion 512. And a third stopper portion 518c formed on the main body.

  The first stopper portion 518 a is a portion that restricts the rotation of the rotation arm member 550. That is, when the rotating arm member 550 is lowered to the extended position (see FIG. 9), it comes into contact with the first stopper portion 518a, and the lowering is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the second stopper portion 518b is disposed below the third stopper portion 518c. Since the lower surface of the rotating plate 520 is formed symmetrically with respect to the shaft support hole 522 (see FIG. 37), the rotating plate 520 rotates at a larger rotation angle in the direction of rotation toward the second stopper portion 512b. Can do. That is, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 described later is formed so that the maximum angle of the clockwise rotation of the front view is larger than that of the counterclockwise rotation of the front view.

  The rotating plate 520 includes a fan-shaped main body 521, a shaft support hole 522 formed in a circular shape in the thickness direction at the root of the main body 521, and a width slightly larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522. A rail receiving groove 523 that is linearly recessed on the front surface of the portion 521, a pair of telescopic stoppers 524 that are formed to project forward on both sides of the lower end portion of the rail receiving groove 523, and projecting from the back surface of the main body portion 521 A plurality of (three in this embodiment) insertion shafts 525 and an arc-shaped rack projecting in an arc shape centering on the shaft support hole 522 from the back surface of the main body 521 and gear teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral portion. 526 mainly.

  The shaft support hole 522 is inserted through the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510. Therefore, the rotating plate 520 is swung around the first shaft portion 512.

  The rail receiving groove 523 is a portion to which the slide rail 545 of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is fastened and fixed, and the expansion / contraction production device 540 performs an expansion / contraction operation along the extending direction of the rail reception groove 523. Therefore, the moving direction of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is changed depending on the posture of the rotating plate 520.

  The expansion / contraction stopper 524 is a part that abuts the inner surface of the slide plate 544 of the expansion / contraction production device 540 in the vertical direction and regulates the movement width of the slide plate 544. It is formed on both sides of the rail receiving groove 523, and is in contact with the inner surface of the slide plate 544 on both sides thereof, so that the slide rail 545 is prevented from receiving a load in a direction perpendicular to the expansion / contraction direction, and durability is improved. Can be achieved.

  The insertion shaft 525 is a portion that is inserted into the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c of the base member 510 and guides the rotation of the rotating plate 520, and has a diameter of the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third circle. It is formed slightly smaller than the width dimension of the arc-shaped hole 513c. In addition, a collar member having a diameter larger than the width dimension of the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c is fastened and fixed to the tip, so that the rotating plate 520 is connected to the base member 510 so that it cannot be pulled out.

  The arc-shaped rack 526 is inserted into the second arc-shaped hole 513 b of the base member 510 and meshed with the driving gear 532 of the first driving device 530. Since the engagement portion between the arc-shaped rack 526 and the first driving device 530 is formed in a region including the thickness portion of the base member 510, the dimension in the thickness direction of the combined operation unit 500 can be suppressed.

  The first drive device 530 mainly includes a drive motor 531 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and a drive gear 532 that is inserted into the first through hole 514 of the base member 510 and rotated about the shaft by the drive motor 531.

  Next, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a front exploded perspective view of the expansion / contraction production device 540, and FIG. 27 is a rear exploded perspective view of the expansion / contraction production device 540.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the expansion / contraction production device 540 includes a main body member 541 that forms a skeleton, and a pair of body members 541 that are fastened and fixed to the back surface of the main body member 541. The first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 through which the portion 551 is inserted, and the first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 are disposed so as to be slidable along the extending direction of the insertion holes 542d and 543d. The slide plate 544 is connected to the slide plate 544 and the rotary plate 520, and one end of the slide plate 544 is fitted into the rail receiving groove 523 to be fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member 541. The front plate member 546 fastened and fixed, the connecting sliding member 547 slidably supported by the shaft support portion 546c of the front plate member 546, and the connecting sliding member 547 Mainly includes a decorative member 548 front drooping portion 548b is formed to be movable in the front of the body member 541 is fixed.

  The main body member 541 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 541a that forms a skeleton, a columnar protrusion portion 541b that protrudes toward the back side at the center in the width direction of the main body portion 541a, and a rear surface of the protrusion portion 541b. A first raised fastening portion 541c that protrudes in a pair on the left side of the view, a second raised fastening portion 541d that protrudes in a pair on the right side in the rear view of the protrusion 541b, and a left upper portion in the rear view of the main body portion 541a. A guide fastening portion 541e that protrudes and a fastening hole 541f that is formed in a plurality (three in the present embodiment) on the front side of the main body portion 541a and to which the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed are mainly provided.

  The protruding portion 541 b is a portion that is inserted through the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the protrusion 541b is slightly smaller than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the arcuate hole 554. Further, since the protruding portion 541b is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 554, the main body member 541 can be interlocked when the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

  The first raised fastening portion 541c is a portion for fastening and fixing the first guide member 542, and the second raised fastening portion 541d is a portion for fastening and fixing the second guide member 543. The reason why the second raised fastening portion 541d is longer in the vertical direction than the first raised fastening portion 541c is that a position that does not interfere with the rotating arm member 550 is selected and disposed. Here, in the present embodiment, the rotating arm member does not pass through the lower left portion of the main body member 541 in the rotation locus (see FIGS. 37, 40, and 44). Therefore, it is possible to increase the arrangement interval of the pair of second raised fastening portions 541d as compared to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and the rigidity of the second raised fastening portion 541d can be improved.

  The guide fastening portion 541e is a portion to which the auxiliary fastening portion 542e of the first guide member 542 is fastened and fixed, and is a portion to which the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 is guided in the extended state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540. That is, even if the protrusion 541 b is not guided by the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the guide fastening portion 541 e guides to the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 in order to rotate the rotating arm member 550 upward. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 and the expansion / contraction effect member 540 are operated in conjunction with each other.

  The fastening hole 541f is a through hole to which the fastening portion 546b of the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed.

  The first guide member 542 includes a fastening plate portion 542a fastened and fixed to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and a back regulating portion extending upward from a position where the first guiding member 542 rides on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 542a to the back side. 542b, a guide rail portion 542c that protrudes in a wall shape from the left and right sides of the back surface restricting portion 542b to the back surface, and a portion that protrudes toward the back surface at the upper end portion of the back surface restricting portion 542b are formed to penetrate vertically. And an auxiliary fastening portion 542e that extends from the back surface regulating portion 542b and is fastened and fixed to the guide fastening portion 541e.

  The back surface restricting portion 542b is a portion disposed on the back surface of the rotating arm member 550 and is a portion that prevents the rotating arm member 550 from moving to the back surface and the protruding portion 541b from dropping off from the arcuate hole 554. is there.

  The guide rail portion 542c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 when the expansion / contraction production device 540 performs the expansion / contraction operation, and suppresses the deviation of the posture of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 542.

  The insertion hole 542d is a hole through which the slide bar 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 542d is slightly larger than the diameter of the slide bar 544e, the slide plate 544 is formed to be slidable relative to the first guide member 542.

  The second guide member 543 includes a fastening plate portion 543a that is fastened and fixed to the second raised fastening portion 541d, and a back surface regulating portion that extends upward from a position where the second guide member 543 rides on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 543a toward the back side. 543b, a guide rail portion 543c projecting like a wall from the left and right sides of the back surface restricting portion 543b to the back surface, and a portion projecting to the back side at the upper end portion of the back surface restricting portion 543b are formed to penetrate vertically. The insertion hole 543d is mainly provided.

  The back surface restricting portion 543b is a portion disposed on the back surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the rotating arm member 550 from moving to the back surface and the protruding portion 541b from dropping off from the arcuate hole 554. is there.

  The guide rail portion 543c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 when the expansion / contraction production device 540 performs the expansion / contraction operation, and suppresses the deviation of the posture of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 543.

  The insertion hole 543d is a hole through which the slide bar 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 543d is slightly larger than the diameter of the slide bar 544e, the slide plate 544 is formed to be slidable relative to the first guide member 543.

  The slide plate 544 includes a main body portion 544a formed in a rectangular plate shape, a recessed portion 544b formed with a wide recess extending in the vertical direction on the back surface of the main body portion 544a, and the recessed portion 544b. Both-end recessed portions 544c formed with recesses extending in the vertical direction on the front surfaces on the left and right sides, and rail receivers protruding in a semicircular shape toward the front side at the upper and lower ends of the both-end recessed portions 544c A portion 544d, a columnar slide bar 544e extending in the vertical direction inside the concave portions 544c at both ends, an effect auxiliary wall 544f protruding toward the front at a substantially vertical center of the main body 544a, The upper and lower ends of the recessed portion 544b mainly include stopper portions 544g that protrude toward the back at both left and right ends.

  The recessed portion 544 b is a portion that guides the slide plate 544 with respect to the expansion / contraction stopper 524 of the rotating plate 520. Therefore, the width of the inner surface of the recessed portion 544b is formed slightly larger than the width dimension of the expansion / contraction stopper 524.

  The both-end recessed portion 544c is a portion that accommodates a protruding portion in which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed. Thereby, the projection part by which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are drilled can be guided from the outside.

  The rail receiving portion 544d is a portion accommodated in the guide rail portions 542c and 543c of the guide members 542 and 543. Thereby, the wobbling of the guide members 542 and 543 with respect to the slide plate 544 can be suppressed.

  The slide bar 544e is a columnar bar that is inserted into the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543. As a result, the guide members 542 and 543 are formed to be slidable in the extending direction of the slide bar 544e (the vertical direction in FIG. 26).

  The effect assisting unit 544f is a part that is brought into contact with the rear hanging portion 548c of the decorative member 548 and moves the decorative member 548 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in the extended state. Thereby, the external appearance of the expansion / contraction production apparatus 540 can be changed.

  The stopper portion 544g is a portion that abuts on the expansion / contraction stopper 524 of the rotary plate 520 and defines the vertical movement end of the slide plate 544.

  The slide rail 545 is a commercially available mini rail member. One end is fastened and fixed along the rail receiving groove 523 of the rotating plate 520, and the other end opposite to the one end is fastened and fixed to the recessed portion 544 b of the slide plate 544.

  The front plate member 546 is an effect portion that can be visually recognized by the player, and has a plate-like main body portion 546a formed in substantially the same shape as the main body member 541 in a front view, and the main body portion 546a toward the back side. It mainly includes a fastening portion 546b that protrudes in accordance with the formation position of the fastening hole 541f, and a pair of shaft support portions 546c that protrude from the upper end portion of the main body portion 546a toward the back side.

  The fastening portion 546b is a portion for fixing the front plate member 546 to the main body member 541, and the fastening portion 546b is fastened and fixed by screwing through the fastening hole 541f.

  The shaft support portion 546c is a portion that supports the connecting sliding member 547 in a slidable manner. Therefore, the diameter of the shaft support portion 546c is slightly smaller than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b of the connecting sliding member 547.

  The connecting sliding member 547 is formed in a plate-like body portion 547a, a pair of sliding long holes 547b formed in a vertically extending elongated hole shape and drilled in the front-rear direction, and in the vertical direction. And a pair of insertion holes 547c.

  The sliding long hole 547b is a portion through which the shaft support portion 546c of the front plate member 546 is inserted. Therefore, the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b is formed slightly larger than that of the shaft support portion 546c. A collar member having an outer shape larger than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b is fastened and fixed to the distal end portion of the shaft supporting portion 546c, so that the connecting sliding member 547 is pivotally supported by the front plate member 546 so that it cannot be pulled out. The The insertion hole 547c is a circular hole through which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the decorative member 548 is inserted.

  The decorative member 548 is formed in a plate shape, and a main body portion 548a to which the connecting sliding member 547 is fastened and fixed from below, a front hanging portion 548b formed by hanging downward on the front side of the main body portion 548a, and a main body portion 548a. And a rear drooping portion 548c formed by drooping downward on the rear side of the main body.

  When the connecting sliding member 547 moves relative to the front plate member 546, the front hanging portion 548b is covered with the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43) and is separated from the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43). 37). Thereby, the external appearance of the expansion / contraction production | presentation member 540 can be changed and a production effect can be improved.

  The back drooping part 548c is a part that comes into contact with the effect auxiliary wall 544f of the slide plate 544 by the expansion / contraction operation of the expansion / contraction production device 540, and the decorative member 548 is brought into contact with the effect auxiliary wall 544f by the back dripping part 548c. Is moved relative to the front plate member 546.

  Returning to FIG. 24 and FIG. The rotating arm member 550 has a main body portion 551 that is formed in a long rod shape, a shaft support hole 552 that is formed in one end of the main body portion 551 in the front-rear direction, and a proximity to the shaft support hole 552. Then, the odd-shaped long hole 553 which is a specially shaped bottomed long hole formed on the back side of the main body 551 and the front side of the other end which is the end opposite to the one end. An arc-shaped hole 554 that is an arc-shaped bottomed long hole and a rear end projecting in the vicinity of the shaft support hole 552 of the main body 551, the tip of which is bent into a hook shape, and the other arm of the torsion spring 517a is locked The locking portion 555 is mainly provided.

  The shaft support hole 552 is a circular hole through which the third shaft portion 517 of the base member 510 is inserted. Therefore, the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the third shaft portion 517, thereby forming the rotating arm member 550 so as to be rotatable about the third shaft portion 517.

  The odd-shaped long hole 553 is a portion through which the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is inserted. The shape of the deformed long hole 553 will be described later.

  The arc-shaped hole 554 is a long hole through which the protruding portion 541b of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is inserted. Therefore, the width dimension of the arc-shaped hole 554 is slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 541b. In addition, the arc formed by the arc-shaped hole 554 coincides with the arc formed by the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 in the extended state (FIGS. 37 to 39). Until see).

  The arc-shaped hole 554 includes a mouth portion 554a that is open to the distal end portion of the other end portion of the rotating arm member 550 and has a wide width at the distal end portion.

  The second driving device 560 is a device that generates a driving force for rotating the rotating crank member 570, and is inserted into the driving motor 561 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and the second through hole 516 of the base member 510. And a drive gear 562 that is axially rotated by a drive motor 561.

  The drive gear 562 is meshed with the transmission gear teeth 572 of the rotating crank member 570. Thereby, when the drive gear 562 is rotated, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated accordingly.

  The rotating crank member 570 is a member that transmits a driving force to the rotating arm member 550, and has a ring-shaped main body portion 571 that is pivotally supported by the second shaft portion 515 and an outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 571. The transmission gear teeth 572 provided, the regulating umbrella portion 573 formed in a manner covering the front side of the transmission gear teeth 572, and the sliding projecting to the front side at a position eccentric from the center of the main body portion 571 The projection part 574 and the cover part 575 which is formed with a diameter larger than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body part 571 and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the second shaft part 515 are mainly provided.

  The transmission gear teeth 572 are meshed with the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560. As a result, the driving force of the driving motor 561 is transmitted to the rotating crank member 570.

  The restricting umbrella portion 573 suppresses the drive gear 532 from being displaced to the front side of the transmission gear tooth 572. Thereby, the meshing relationship between the drive gear 532 and the transmission gear teeth 572 can be optimized.

  The sliding protrusion 574 is a portion that is inserted into the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550. In other words, whether or not the transmission of the driving force is formed is determined by the relationship between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shape of the rotating arm member 550.

  The lid portion 575 is a portion for disposing the main body portion 571 on the base member 510 so that it cannot be pulled out.

  With reference to FIGS. 28 to 31, the relationship between the swing of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described. First, the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 (a) and 29 (a).

  FIGS. 28A and 29A are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570. FIG. FIG. 28A illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 29A illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the extended position. 28 (a) and 29 (a), the deformed elongated hole 553 and the sliding projection 574 are shown as hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the projection 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are shown as imaginary lines. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, in a state where the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position, a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding projection 574 and the rotating crank member 570 An upward orthogonal state in which the straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the shaft support hole 552 is orthogonal is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, in a state where the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the extended position, a straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding projection 574, and the rotating crank member 570. It is possible to form a downward orthogonal state in which the rotation axis and the straight line connecting the shaft support holes 552 are orthogonal to each other. FIG. 29 (a) shows a state in which the rotating crank member 570 has been rotated by a predetermined angle counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the downward orthogonal state described above.

  The deformed elongated hole 553 includes a transmission groove portion 553a in which a driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 by the movement of the sliding projection 574, and a first non-transmission wall portion connected from the upper end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a. 553b and a second non-transmission wall portion 553c coupled from the lower end of the transmission groove portion 553a, and a selection wall portion 553d that couples the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Prepare.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, the transmission groove portion 553a is a concave groove extending linearly to the left starting from the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 in the upward orthogonal state. The transmission groove portion 553a is formed with such a length that the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 can move from the upward orthogonal state to the downward orthogonal state, and the inner circumferential surface is formed slightly wider than the diameter of the sliding protrusion 574. Largely formed. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550 while the sliding protrusion 574 moves in the transmission groove 553a.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, the first non-transmission wall portion 553b is a sliding protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570 from the upper wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in the upward orthogonal state. It is a wall formed along the circumscribed circle of the portion 574. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front orthogonal state, the rotating crank member 570 rotates idly with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the driving force is transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm. Not transmitted to member 550.

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state where the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 28A), the first non-transmission wall portion 553b is moved. The direction is directed to the rotational axis of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed opposite to the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, the load applied to the sliding protrusion 574 due to the rotation of the rotation arm member 550 is the rotation of the rotation crank member 570. Directed to the axis. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed opposite to the first non-transmission wall 553b, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the second non-transmission wall portion 553c can be rotated from the lower wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in a state where the rotation arm member 550 is disposed at the extended position. This is a wall portion formed along the circumscribed circle of the sliding projection 574 around the rotation axis of the member 570. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the downward orthogonal state (the state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by a predetermined amount clockwise from the state of FIG. 29A), The rotating crank member 570 idles with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the driving force is not transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550.

  Note that when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise from the state illustrated in FIG. 29A, the moving direction of the second non-transmission wall portion 553 b is directed toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. It is done. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed opposite to the second non-transmission wall 553c (see FIG. 29B), the load applied to the sliding protrusion 574 by rotating the rotating arm member 550. Is directed to the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed opposite to the second non-transmission wall 553c, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating.

  The selection wall portion 553d is a wall portion formed from a smooth curved surface connecting the right end portion in front view of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and the right end portion in front view of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. It is formed above the curve obtained by extending the transmission wall portion 553b.

  The selection wall portion 553d is disposed to face the right portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, and is formed in such a manner that the distance from the second non-transmission wall portion 553c increases toward the left end portion of the selection wall portion 553d. Therefore, for example, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A), the sliding projection 574 exceeds the first non-transmission wall 553b and the second non-transmission. In the surplus portion D (see FIG. 32B) until the wall portion 553c is reached, no driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550, and rotation is not restricted. That is, the driving force is not transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 by the sliding protrusion 574 is not restricted.

  The right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the formation angle with the arc S1 is small), while the right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is The second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed so as to intersect with the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the angle formed between the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1.

  In this case, when the distance between the sliding projection 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 that is necessary to cope with the change amount changes. That is, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount in a state where the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d are in contact with each other is as follows. The swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 is smaller than that when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transmission wall 553c are in contact with each other. Accordingly, the swing arm member 550 swings with respect to the speed of the swing crank member 570 depending on whether the sliding protrusion 574 rotates along the second non-transmission wall portion 553c or the selection wall portion 553d. The speed can be changed.

  Returning to FIG. FIGS. 28 to 31 are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 illustrating the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 in time series. 28A, the above-described upward orthogonal state is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position), and in FIGS. 28 to 31, the rotating crank member 570 is counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The rotated state is illustrated in order, the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotating crank member 570 are illustrated by hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protruding portion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are illustrated by imaginary lines. .

  28 to 31, the expansion / contraction production device 540 detects the posture of expanding and contracting in the vertical direction by a position detection sensor (not shown), and the swinging is stopped in that posture. That is, in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b moves only in the vertical direction. In this case, swinging of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is prevented by resistance with the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 (see FIG. 25).

  In the state of FIG. 28A, the rotating crank member 570 is in an upward orthogonal state. In this case, the reference horizontal line O is set at a position that is vertically downward from the protrusion 541b by the distance h1. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is in the upward orthogonal state, the protruding portion 541b is disposed at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 vertically upward.

  From the state of FIG. 28 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (rotated by the angle T1 counterclockwise from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a))). The sliding projection 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and the projection 541 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2 <h1) (FIG. 28B). ))). During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding projection 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ). That is, the turning arm member 550 is swung.

  From the state of FIG. 28 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)) to the counterclockwise angle T2 (T2≈180 degrees> T1). ), The sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a of the odd-shaped long hole 553 (transmission area), enters the area facing the second non-transmission wall 553c, and the protrusion 541 is the reference. It reaches a state of being arranged at a position separated from the horizontal line O by a distance h3 (h3 <h2) vertically upward (see FIG. 29A). That is, the turning arm member 550 is swung.

  From the state of FIG. 28C, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the orthogonal state upward (see FIG. 28A)) counterclockwise by an angle T3 (T3> T2). ), The sliding protrusion 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and reaches the state of FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward.

  29A and 29B, when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the sliding protrusion 574 is secondly directed toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. It is pushed by the non-transmission wall portion 553c. In this case, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, and thereby the swing of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in front view from the state of FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b).

  Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state of FIG. 29A, it is conceivable to stop the rotating crank member 570. However, if the effect speed of the rotating arm member 550 is increased to a value just before reaching the extended position and the rotating crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second driving device 560, and the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is reduced. If it is moderate, the effect of production cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the rotating crank member 570 is not stopped in the state of FIG. 29A but is rotated to the state of FIG. The rotation of the member 550 can be stopped in the state shown in FIG. 29A (the protrusion 541 can be stopped at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward). Thereby, the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is maintained until the rotating arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotating crank member is moved from the state shown in FIG. 29A to the state shown in FIG. 570 can be decelerated. Therefore, it is not necessary to stop the rotating crank member 570 suddenly. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both improvement in the effect of the rotation arm member 550 and improvement in the durability of the second drive device 560.

  From the state of FIG. 29B, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the orthogonal state upward (see FIG. 28A)) to the angle T4 (T4≈270 degrees> T3 counterclockwise). ), The sliding projection 574 is slid by the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and reaches the state of FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward.

  That is, while the rotating crank member 570 is rotated ¼ turn counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 29A, the rotating arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture, and the protrusion 541b is in the same position. Maintained. In this embodiment, the rotation arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture and the protrusion 541b is maintained in the same position during the rotation of the rotation crank member 570 by 1/4 turn. It need not be limited to that. The length in which the front plate member 546 continues to be disposed at the lower position can be changed by changing the length of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A) of the deformed elongated hole 553. For example, by making the second non-transmission wall portion 553c longer than in the present embodiment, the length of the front plate member 546 that is continuously disposed at the lower position can be made longer than in the present embodiment.

  From the state of FIG. 30A, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the orthogonal state upward (see FIG. 28A)) counterclockwise by an angle T5 (T5> T4). ), The sliding projection 574 pushes up the selection wall 553d of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and the projection 541 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2> h3). (See FIG. 30B). During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding projection 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ).

  That is, when the turning arm member 550 and the turning crank member 570 are rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the selection wall portion 553d and the sliding projection portion 574 are brought into contact with each other, thereby turning the turning arm member. The driving force is transmitted to 550 (transmission region).

  From the state of FIG. 30 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)), and rotated counterclockwise by an angle T6 (T6> T5). The sliding protrusion 574 enters the region facing the first non-transmission wall 553b of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1> h2). The state (refer FIG. 31) arrange | positioned in the spaced apart position is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding projection 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ).

  31, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the region facing the first non-transmission wall 553b of the deformed elongated hole 553. The state of 28 (a) is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region).

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front in the state shown in FIG. 31, the sliding protrusion 574 is pushed by the second non-transmission wall portion 553c toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. . In this case, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, and thereby the swing of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG.

  Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state shown in FIG. 31, it is conceivable to stop the rotating crank member 570. However, if the effect speed of the rotating arm member 550 is increased to a value just before reaching the retracted position and the rotating crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second driving device 560, and the decrease in the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is moderated. If it is set, the effect of production cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rotation of the rotation arm member 550 is stopped in the state of FIG. 31 by rotating the rotation crank member 570 to the state of FIG. 28A without stopping in the state of FIG. Can do. Thus, the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is maintained until the rotating arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotating crank member 570 is decelerated from the state of FIG. 31 to the state of FIG. Can be made. Therefore, it is not necessary to stop the rotating crank member 570 suddenly. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both improvement in the effect of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 linked to the rotating arm member 550 and improvement in the durability of the second drive device 560.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, by rotating the rotating crank member 570 once in the same direction, the rotating arm member 550 can be reciprocally swung between the retracted position and the extended position.

  For these reasons, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise at a constant speed as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b is positioned at the reference horizontal line in a half period of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position vertically separated from O by a distance h1 to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3 <h1). The projection 541b is maintained at a position that is vertically separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 in a quarter period of the subsequent rotation cycle, and the projection 541b is maintained in the reference horizontal line O in a quarter period of the subsequent rotation cycle. Is moved upward from a position separated vertically by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3). Thereby, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (the moving speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction) can be doubled.

  Here, at the retracted position of the rotating arm member 550, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 can form an upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A). In the position, the turning arm member 550 and the turning crank member 570 can form a downward orthogonal state (see FIG. 29A). In addition, it is possible to form a downward orthogonal state by rotating the rotating crank member 570 by a predetermined amount clockwise from the state of FIG.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated half a turn (180 degrees) in order to swing the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position to the extended position. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the time required for the rotating arm member 550 to swing from the retracted position to the extended position (from FIG. 28A to FIG. 29A). The time required for swinging from the extended position to the retracted position (see FIG. 29 (a) through FIG. 31 to FIG. 28 (a)) can be made equal.

  With reference to FIGS. 32 to 35, the relationship between the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described. FIGS. 32 to 35 are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 illustrating the swing of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 in time series. 32 to 35 show a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, and the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotating crank member 570 are illustrated by hidden lines and expanded and contracted. The front plate member 546 and the protruding portion 541b of the rendering device 540 are illustrated with imaginary lines.

  32A, the above-described upward orthogonal state is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position), and in FIGS. 32B to 35, the rotating arm from FIG. 32A is used. The state in which the member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 are rotated by a predetermined amount is illustrated in order along the time series.

  In the state of FIG. 32A, the rotating crank member 570 is in an upward orthogonal state. In this case, the protrusion 541b is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 vertically upward.

  From the state of FIG. 32 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (rotated clockwise by an angle T11 from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a))). The protrusion 574 is moved in the region facing the first non-transmission wall 553b of the deformed elongated hole 553, and reaches the state of FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 vertically upward.

  Note that, when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. 32B, the movement of the sliding projection 574 is restricted, so that the swinging of the turning arm member 550 is restricted. The Therefore, the turning arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state of FIG.

  From the state of FIG. 32 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and rotated clockwise by an angle T12 (T12> T11). 33), as shown in FIG. 33 (a), the sliding projection 574 is slightly separated from the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is swung downward by the action of gravity. In this case, in the margin part D from the state of FIG. 32B until the sliding projection 574 reaches the second non-transmission wall 553c beyond the first non-transmission wall 553b, the rotating arm member 550 is provided. No driving force is transmitted (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h4 (h4 <h1).

  From the state shown in FIG. 33 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and rotated clockwise by an angle T13 (T13> T12). 33), the sliding protrusion 574 is brought into contact with the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 that swings downward by the action of gravity, as shown in FIG. The That is, from the state of FIG. 33 (b) to the state of FIG. 34 (a), the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). In the state of FIG. 33B, the protrusion 541 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O vertically upward by a distance h5 (h5 <h4).

  From the state of FIG. 33 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the orthogonal state upward (refer to FIG. 32 (a)) by an angle T14 (T14≈90 degrees> T13). Is rotated), the sliding projection 574 is accommodated in the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and the projection 541 is disposed at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward. This reaches the state (see FIG. 34 (a)). During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is brought into contact with the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, and the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region).

  Here, the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32B to 34A and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. Although the rotational direction of the dynamic crank member 570 is different, the rotational region (phase) of the rotating crank member 570 is the same.

  In this case, in the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32B to 34A, the inner periphery of the deformed elongated hole 553 in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is obtained. While the surface is not in contact, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (non-transmission region), while the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. The driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area).

  Therefore, the mode of transmission of the driving force to the rotating arm member 550 can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570. Thereby, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, two types of effects of the rotating arm member 550 can be formed.

  That is, in this embodiment, when the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 rotates between FIG. 32A and FIG. 34A, the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated, the rotating arm member 550 is oscillated by free fall depending on the gravitational acceleration until the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 (non-transmission region). On the other hand, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the rotating arm member 550 is swung at a speed depending on the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570 (transmission region).

  Thereby, even when the rotation speed of the rotation crank member 570 is constant, the rotation when the rotation crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase by reversing the rotation direction of the rotation crank member 570. Variations in the swing speed of the arm member 550 can be increased.

  Further, the increase in the variation of the swinging speed of the rotating arm member 550 is achieved by the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 (formation of the margin portion D), so that the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550. Other members such as a changeover switch for changing can be made unnecessary, and the member cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the margin portion D is formed on the pivot support hole 552 side of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, compared with the case where the margin portion D is formed on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552 with respect to the rotation shaft of the rotating crank member 570, the sliding projection portion 574 passes the margin portion D through a predetermined distance. The distance that the protrusion 541b moves downward can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the change in the operation of the rotating arm member 550 remarkable when the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is changed while suppressing the formation range of the margin portion D of the rotating crank member 570.

  From the state of FIG. 34 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)), and rotated clockwise by an angle T15 (T15> T14). ) And the sliding projection 574 is slid by the second non-transmission wall 553c of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and reaches the state of FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward.

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 34B, the sliding projection 574 is directed toward the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570 by the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Pressed. In this case, since the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted from moving, the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in front view from the state of FIG.

  From the state of FIG. 34 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (from an upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) by an angle T16 (T16≈180 degrees> T15). When it is rotated), the sliding projection 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and reaches the state of FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward.

  From the state of FIG. 35 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and rotated clockwise by an angle T17 (T17> T16). ) And the sliding projection 574 is moved in the transmission groove 553a (transmission region), and the projection 541 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2> h3) (FIG. 35). (See (b)). That is, the turning arm member 550 is swung.

  Here, when the rotation of the rotation crank member 570 and the swing of the rotation arm member 550 are always linked, it is difficult to shift the start timing of the rotation crank member 570 and the rotation arm member 550. . Therefore, when starting the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550, it is necessary to generate a large force corresponding to the rigidity of the force overcoming the inertia of each member. For this reason, a driving device having a large driving force is required, which may increase the size of the driving device.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the starting timing of the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 can be shifted. That is, for example, from the state of FIG. 34 (b) to the state of FIG. 35 (a), only the rotating crank member 570 is rotated until the state of FIG. 35 (a) is reached to the state of FIG. 35 (b). The rotating arm member 550 can be started by interlocking with the rotating crank member 570.

  Thereby, since the momentum of the rotating crank member 570 can be used for starting the rotating arm member 550, the driving force required for the second driving device 560 can be suppressed. Therefore, the second drive device 560 can be reduced in size.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front in the state shown in FIG. 35B, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a and reaches the state shown in FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding projection 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ). That is, the turning arm member 550 is swung.

  For these reasons, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed in the clockwise direction as shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the protrusion 541b becomes the reference in a period of 1/4 of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position separated by a distance h1 vertically upward from the horizontal line O to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3 <h1). The projection 541b is maintained at a position separated by a distance h3 vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O in a quarter period of the subsequent rotation cycle, and the projection 541b is vertical from the reference horizontal line O in a half period of the subsequent rotation cycle. The position is moved upward from a position separated by a distance h3 upward to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3). Thereby, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (the moving speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction) can be doubled.

  Further, the moving speed of the rotating arm member 550 is partially increased by the gravitational acceleration when moving downward, and on the other hand, when moving upward, the moving speed is always the same as the rotating speed of the rotating crank member 570. Is done. Thereby, the aspect of the speed change of the projection part 541b (extension / rendering effect apparatus 540) can be changed by the direction of movement of the projection part 541b (extension / rendering effect apparatus 540).

  With reference to FIG. 36, a description will be given of a change in the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b (the expansion / contraction effect device 540) when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise.

  FIG. 36 is a graph showing the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A). In the graph shown in FIG. 36, the horizontal axis indicates the swing angle in such a manner that the upper-right orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A) of the rotating crank member 570 is the left end, and increases in the right direction from there. The distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b is shown.

  In FIG. 36, the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise is indicated by a curve CC1, and the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise. The distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b is indicated by a curve CW1. The curves CC1 and CW1 correspond to the states of the protrusions 541b from FIG. 28 to FIG. 35, respectively. For comparison when the rotating crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase, A curve obtained by horizontally inverting the curve CC1 is shown as an imaginary line as a curve CC2. By comparing the curves CC1 and CW1, as described above, the ascending speed and the descending speed of the protrusion 541b moved up and down by the rotating arm member 550 are changed by reversing the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570. Can do.

  In addition, as a comparison target of the curve CW1, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise, it rotates until the sliding protrusion 574 contacts the second non-transmission wall 553c (see FIG. 28A). A case where the arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A) is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated by a broken line as a curve CW2. This corresponds to the case where the biasing force that causes the torsion spring 517a (see FIG. 23) to swing the rotating arm member 550 upward is set large. In this case, the period during which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position can be further extended.

  In the curves CC1 and CW1, the rotation crank member 570 and the rotation arm member 550 (in the angle range N1 in which the distance from the horizontal reference line O of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A) is maintained unchanged. A non-transmission region in which the driving force is not transmitted is formed between FIG. The width of the angle range N1 can be adjusted by the formation width of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A).

  In addition, in the curve CW1, an angle until the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28A) contacts the deformed long hole 553 (see FIG. 28A) of the rotating arm member 550. In the range N2, a non-transmission region where the driving force is not transmitted is formed between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550. The width of the angle range N2 can be adjusted by the formation width of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b (see FIG. 28A).

  As shown in FIG. 36, a curve between the angle T11 to the angle T14 and the angle T4 to the angle T6, which are cases where the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28A) is arranged in the same phase. The shapes of CW1 and CC1 are different (curve CW1 and curve CC2 obtained by horizontally inverting curve CC1 do not overlap).

  That is, when the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28A) rotates in a manner of lifting the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A) between the angle T4 and the angle T6, the angle is greater. Compared to the case where the rotating crank member 570 rotates in a mode of pushing down the rotating arm member 550 between 11 and the angle T14, the curve becomes gentler.

  This is because, in the curve CW1, the sliding protrusion 574 (see FIG. 28A) abuts on the second non-transmission wall 553c (see FIG. 28A) of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A). 28 (a)) is rotated, and in the curve CC1, the sliding projection 574 abuts against the selection wall portion 553d (see FIG. 28 (a)) of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is rotated. By.

  Returning to FIG. As described above, in the deformed long hole 553, the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the forming angle with the arc S1 is small). Thus, the right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is formed so as to intersect with the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the formation angle between the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1. The

  In this case, when the distance between the sliding projection 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 that is necessary to cope with the change amount changes. That is, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount in a state where the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d are in contact with each other is as follows. The swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 is smaller than that when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transmission wall 553c are in contact with each other.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, even when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the rotating crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase depending on the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570. The moving speed of the protrusion 541b can be changed.

  In FIG. 28 to FIG. 35, the case where the rotating crank member 570 is rotated in one direction has been described. However, the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 can be reversed halfway. As a timing for reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, the sliding projection 574 is disposed opposite to the first non-transmission wall 553b (for example, FIG. 28A, FIG. 31 and FIG. 32A). 32B, the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position), and the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed opposite the second non-transmission wall 553c (for example, FIG. 29A). 29 (b), FIG. 34 (b) and FIG. 35 (a), the rotating arm member 550 is preferably disposed at the extended position.

  In this case, since the rotation arm member 550 is not in contact with the rotation direction of the rotation crank member 570, the resistance loaded from the rotation arm member 550 to the rotation crank member 570 when the rotation direction of the rotation crank member 570 is reversed is reduced. Can be suppressed. Further, in the present embodiment, a position detection sensor (not shown) that detects the state where the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position and the state where it is disposed at the extended position is disposed. It is possible to facilitate the control of reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 while the moving arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position or the extended position.

  By reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, variations in the reciprocating motion of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the vertical direction can be increased.

  For example, from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 28A), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise by half a circle (see FIG. 29A), and then rotated. The case where the rotation arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position by reversing the direction of rotation of the dynamic crank member 570 and rotating it clockwise by a half turn is illustrated (see FIG. 28A). That is, the sliding projection 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552.

  In this case, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 (h3 <h1) from a position separated vertically by a distance h1 from the reference horizontal line O in a half period of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. ) And move down to a position separated by a distance. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) in which the horizontal axis is 0 degrees to 180 degrees. Next, the protrusion 541b extends from a position separated vertically by a distance h3 from the reference horizontal line O to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3) from the reference horizontal line O in a half period of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. Move up. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) with the horizontal axis from 180 degrees to 360 degrees.

  Accordingly, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 is moved upward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and the predetermined distance (h1-h3). The same period can be used.

  Further, for example, from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 32A), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated 1/4 turn clockwise (see FIG. 34A). Next, the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, and the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position by rotating counterclockwise by 1/4 turn (FIG. 32). (See (a)). That is, the sliding projection 574 moves on the side close to the shaft support hole 552.

  In this case, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 (h3) from a position separated vertically by a distance h1 from the reference horizontal line O in a quarter of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. Move downward to a position separated by <h1). In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along a curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) in which the horizontal axis is 0 degrees to 90 degrees. Next, the protrusion 541b is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1> h3) from a position separated by a distance h3 vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O in a quarter of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. Move up to position. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) with the horizontal axis of 270 to 360 degrees.

  Accordingly, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and is increased by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). The moving period can be made the same, and the predetermined period can be shortened as compared with the case where the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552.

  In addition, when the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves downward, it can be partially dropped (from the angle T11 to the angle T13), while the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves upward. When doing so, it is always moved at a speed along the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, even when the rotation speed of the rotation crank member 570 is the same, the movement mode of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 when the rotation crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase according to the movement direction of the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 ( The degree of speed change) can be changed. In other words, the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 in the range from the angle T11 to the angle T13 in FIG. 36 can be made different.

  Next, the difference in swing angle due to the difference in the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction production device 540 will be described. First, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the extended state will be described.

  37 to 39 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 37 to 39 illustrate the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the extended state (when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the extended position). 37 shows a state in which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. 38, the protrusion 541 starts from the state of FIG. FIG. 39 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved in a clockwise direction from the state of FIG. 37. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIGS. 37 to 39 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIG. Therefore, in FIGS. 37 to 39, the front plate member 546 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the extended state is formed in an arc shape centered on the first shaft portion 512, and is rotated. Along the extending direction of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the arm member 550. In other words, the arc-shaped hole 554 extends along the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the inner surface of the arc-shaped hole 554 is not disposed facing the swinging direction of the protrusion 541b, and the arc-shaped hole 554 does not function as a stopper for stopping the swinging of the protrusion 541b. Accordingly, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b depends on how the rotation of the rotating plate 520 is restricted. That is, the rotary plate 520 can swing until it contacts the third stopper portion 518c, the protrusion 541b can swing counterclockwise to the swing angle θ1, and the rotary plate 520 is in the second position. The protrusion 541b can swing to the swing angle θ2 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, until it comes into contact with the stopper 518b.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 39, when the protrusion 541b is swung to the left in the front view at a swing angle θ2, the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550. In this case, the expansion / contraction production device 540 is moved in the expansion / contraction direction independently of the rotating arm member 550, and the projection 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554, which may cause malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first raised fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e of the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 are provided with the turning arm member even when the protruding portion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 of the turning arm member 550. By being arranged so as to be able to engage with 550, the projection 541b and the arcuate hole 554 can be aligned. That is, it is possible to prevent the expansion / contraction effect device 540 from moving in the expansion / contraction direction independently of the rotating arm member 550.

  Thereby, the length of the rotating arm member 550 can be shortened while eliminating the defect that the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning area | region of the rotation arm member 550 can be suppressed, and the arrangement | positioning area | region of another movable member can be ensured by that much. Further, the material cost of the rotating arm member 550 can be reduced.

  Further, when the rotating arm member 550 swings in a state in which the protruding portion 541b is separated from the arc-shaped hole 554 (see FIG. 39), the positional relationship between the protruding portion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 is shifted, and the protruding portion 541b is circular. It becomes difficult to return to the arc-shaped hole 554, which may cause malfunction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding projection 574 abuts on the deformed elongated hole 553, thereby preventing the swing arm member 550 from swinging (see FIG. 39).

  In addition, the movement trajectory of the point farthest from the rotation axis of the sliding protrusion 574 (the point farthest from the rotation axis) is formed along the side surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 that contacts the sliding protrusion 574. Therefore, the rotating crank member 570 can be rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 39 while maintaining the posture of the rotating arm member 550.

  Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates counterclockwise, immediately after the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the overhanging position (FIG. )), The protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554, and then the protrusion 541b returns to the arcuate hole 554 until the rotating crank member 570 is arranged in the state shown in FIG. think of. Even after the protrusion 541b has returned to the arcuate hole 554, even if the rotating crank member 570 is further rotated and the rotating arm member 550 swings to the state shown in FIG. 30B, the protrusion 541b. Does not fail to return to the arcuate hole 554.

  In this case, when the rotation arm member 550 and the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are respectively swung, the rotation crank member 570 is controlled to stop or start in accordance with the positional relationship between the projection 541b and the arcuate hole 554. There is no need, and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 can be continued. In other words, it is only necessary to control the swinging timing of the expansion / contraction production device 540, and the rotating crank member 570 does not need to be controlled, and may be kept rotating. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a control load of a complicated operation of swinging the expansion / contraction effect device 540 and the turning arm member 550 at different timings.

  In the present embodiment, a tip portion 554a is formed so that the width of the arc-shaped hole 554 is increased toward the opening end portion (left end portion in FIG. 39) of the arc-shaped hole 554. Accordingly, it is possible to tolerate a large displacement (a displacement in the expansion / contraction direction of the expansion / contraction effect device 540) when the protrusion 541b returns to the arc-shaped hole 554, and the first raised fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e A large clearance with the rotating arm member 550 can be secured.

  Next, the swing angle in the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state that is a state between the extended state and the reduced state will be described. From the state in which the expansion / contraction production device 540 is in the extended state (see FIG. 37), the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arcuate hole 554 by swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise. Device 540 forms an intermediate state.

  40 to 42 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 40 to 42 illustrate the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state (when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed between the extended position and the retracted position). In this case, the radius formed by the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is shorter than that when the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 is in the extended state (see FIGS. 37 to 39). That is, the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b is changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction.

  40 shows a state in which the protruding portion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. 41, the protruding portion 541 is the front surface from the state of FIG. FIG. 42 shows a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved in the clockwise direction from the state of FIG. 40.

  The posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 40 to 42 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIG. Therefore, in FIGS. 40 to 42, the front plate member 546 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2.

  At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the movement of the arcuate hole 554 upward by the swinging arm member 550 swinging. Therefore, the arc-shaped hole 554 has a function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b and a function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546, as will be described later. As a result, functions can be consolidated.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 to 42, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the shape of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the intermediate state are the radius of curvature. Although the central axes of both coincide on the upper side, the radius of curvature and the posture are different from each other. Since the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 intersect at the formation angle α1 (see FIG. 42), the arc-shaped hole 554 serves as a stopper for stopping the swing of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 42). .

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b is not in contact with the arcuate hole 554. That is, since the rotary plate 520 can be swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, the protrusion 541b can be swung counterclockwise to the swing angle θ3 (angle θ3 = Angle θ1).

  As shown in FIG. 42, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the first stopper surface 554b of the arcuate hole 554. In this state, the guide fastening portion 541e is brought into contact with the upper side surface of the turning arm member 550, and the state change in the expansion / contraction direction of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is prevented. The movement is stopped.

  That is, the rotating plate 520 is not swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protrusion 541b can be swung clockwise to the swing angle θ4 (angle θ4 <angle θ2). . Accordingly, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed according to the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction. Thereby, the variation of the swing angle of the expansion / contraction production | presentation apparatus 540 can be increased by making the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction production | presentation apparatus 540 differ. 42, the guide fastening portion 541e is brought into contact with the main body portion 551 of the rotating arm member 550.

  Next, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the reduced state will be described. From the state in which the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in the intermediate state (see FIG. 40), the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arcuate hole 554 by swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise, and the expansion / contraction effect is achieved. Device 540 creates a reduced state.

  43 to 45 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 43 to 45 illustrate a case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms a reduced state (when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position). In this case, the radius formed by the swing trajectory of the protrusion 541b is shorter than when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the intermediate state (see FIGS. 40 to 42). That is, the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b is changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction.

  43 shows a state in which the protruding portion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510. In FIG. 44, the protruding portion 541 starts from the state of FIG. FIG. 45 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise from the state of FIG. 43. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIGS. 43 to 45 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIG. Therefore, in FIGS. 43 to 45, the front plate member 546 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

  At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the movement of the arcuate hole 554 upward by the swinging arm member 550 swinging. Therefore, the arc-shaped hole 554 has both a function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b and a function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546. As a result, functions can be consolidated.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b and the shape of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 are different from each other when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms a contracted state. The central axis of curvature radius is reversed. That is, the central axis of the radius of curvature of the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b is below the protrusion 541b, and the central axis of the radius of curvature of the arc-shaped hole 554 is disposed above the arc-shaped hole 554. In this case, the swing trajectory of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 intersect at a formation angle α2 (angle α2> angle α1), and the arc-shaped hole 554 functions as a stopper for stopping the swing of the protrusion 541b ( 44 and 45).

  As shown in FIG. 44, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the second stopper surface 554c of the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the rotating plate 520 is not swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c (see FIG. 41), and the protrusion 541b can be swung counterclockwise to a swing angle θ5. (Angle θ5 <angle θ1 = angle θ3).

  As shown in FIG. 45, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the third stopper surface 554d of the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the rotating plate 520 is not swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protrusion 541b can be swung clockwise to the swing angle θ6 (angle θ6 <angle θ4). <Angle θ2). Accordingly, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed according to the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction. Thereby, the variation of the rocking | fluctuation width of the expansion / contraction production apparatus 540 can be increased.

  Here, the formation angle α2 between the movement locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 in the reduced state is larger than the formation angle α1 between the movement locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 in the intermediate state. The

  In the relationship between the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554, if the formation angle is 90 degrees, the protrusion 541b is swung in a manner crossing the arc-shaped hole 554, and the protrusion 541b The rocking angle is minimized. On the other hand, if the formation angle is 0 degree (see FIGS. 37 to 39) in the relationship between the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554, the protrusion 541b extends along the extending direction of the arc-shaped hole 554. Thus, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b is maximized. Therefore, the swing angle of the projection 541b in the reduced state (formation angle α2) can be made smaller than the swing angle of the projection 541b in the intermediate state (formation angle α1) (formation angle α1 <formation angle α2). ).

  As described above, by changing the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction production device 540, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b is changed, and at this time, the inner peripheral surface (the first stopper surface 554b, the second stopper surface 554b) of the arc-shaped hole 554 is changed. The stopper surface 554c and the third stopper surface 554d) function as a stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540. Thereby, the inner peripheral surface of the arc-shaped hole 554 can be used as a part for restricting the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in each case where the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is different. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a space for disposing a stopper that restricts the swing angle of the protrusion 541b.

  In addition, the stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is retracted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position. Therefore, unlike the case where a fixed stopper is provided on the front side of the 3rd symbol display device 81, the stopper remains on the front surface of the 3rd symbol display device 81 even if the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position. Can be prevented. Thereby, when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position, other members can be disposed on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81, and therefore other movable members (for example, the slide operation unit 700). The overhanging space of the column member 720) can be secured.

  In addition, the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotation arm member 550 functions as a stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 and the second drive of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 by swinging the rotation arm member 550. And a function as a transmission device that transmits the driving force of the device 560 and causes the expansion / contraction production device 540 to perform expansion / contraction operation. As a result, the functions can be consolidated and the number of parts can be reduced.

  The tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. The tilt operation unit 600 is a unit that swings the effect member 620 (tilt operation) (see FIG. 12), and the slide operation unit 700 is a unit that slides the tilt operation unit 600 in the left-right direction. 46 is a front perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 47 is a rear perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700. 46 and 47, a state in which the column members 720 (see FIG. 47) of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 are arranged at the retracted position is illustrated.

  48 is a front exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 49 is a rear exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700. 48 and 49, the tilting operation unit 600 is illustrated without being disassembled for easy understanding.

  The slide operation unit 700 is formed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with one end fastened and fixed to a base member 710 formed in a plate shape elongated in the left-right direction and the slide plate 711 of the base member 710. A column member 720, and a slide rail 730 in which one end portion is fastened and fixed to the column member 720 and the other end portion to which the base member 610 of the tilting operation unit 600 is fastened and fixed is extendable in the vertical direction; A connecting member 740 that is formed to be slidable on the back rail 716 of the main body 710 and is pivotally supported by the pivotal support 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 and a driving force for moving the column member 720 in the left-right direction are generated. It mainly includes a drive device 750 and a back cover member 760 formed on the back side of the drive device 750 and fastened and fixed to the base member 710.

  The base member 710 is a member that forms a skeleton of the slide operation unit 700. The base member 710 is formed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, the slide plate 711 to which the column member 720 is fastened and fixed from the back side, and the back view of the base member 710. A shaft support hole 712 that is recessed in the lower left portion with a circular cross section and is supported by the fixed shaft portion 753a, and a shaft support hole that is recessed in the shape of a long hole extending in the left-right direction in the lower right portion of the base member 710 when viewed from the back. 712 and the slide shaft support hole 713 in which the moving shaft portion 754a is slidably supported, and the solenoid 712 is swingable up and down by a solenoid, and the locking portion 725 of the column member 720 in the left-right direction. A lever member 714 that restricts the movement of the base member 710, and an upper rolling member 742 of the connecting member 740 that rolls upward and protrudes in a cross-section downward arc shape toward the front side at the upper end of the base member 710. A front rail portion 715, a rear rail portion 716 that is recessed from the rear side in a circular arc shape in the front rail portion 715 and through which the insertion plate portion 741 b of the connecting member 740 is inserted, and a shaft that is pivoted on the lower left portion of the base member 710 when viewed from the rear side A slide origin detection sensor 717 disposed at a position on the right side of the shaft support hole 712 at a position where the vertical position coincides with the support hole 712, and a slide shaft support hole 713 and a vertical position at the lower right side of the base member 710 when viewed from the back. And a slide origin detection sensor 718 disposed at a position on the left side of the slide shaft support hole 713.

  Since the lever member 714 regulates the sliding movement of the column member 720 that is fastened and fixed to the slide plate 711 in the left-right direction, the driving force of the driving device 750 is not required when the tilting operation unit 600 is maintained at the retracted position. Can do.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the tilting operation unit 600 is moved along the formation direction (arc trajectory) of the front rail portion 715 and the back rail portion 716, the right and left of the column member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 The sliding movement in the direction can be caused by the action of gravity loaded on the tilting operation unit 600. For example, when the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 46), the moving direction of the tilting operation unit 600 is directed obliquely downward along the shape of the front rail portion 715. Therefore, even if the moving direction of the column member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 is the left-right direction along the moving direction of the slide plate 711, the column member 720 may be moved by gravity. In the present embodiment, the lever member 714 is swung downward to engage with the locking portion 725 of the column member 720 and the movement of the column member 720 in the left-right direction is restricted. Can be maintained in the retracted position. Therefore, the durability of the driving device 750 can be improved.

  The slide origin detection sensor 717 is used to detect whether or not the column member 720 is disposed at the origin position (sliding position) of the slide movement. The slide origin detection sensor 717 has a pair of light emitting units and light receiving units, and these light emitting units and light receiving units are provided side by side in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, the light emitting unit is arranged to emit light from the back side to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light emitting unit is configured to receive (detect) light emitted from the light emitting unit. A light receiving portion is arranged with a 10 mm gap on the front side of the. Although details will be described later, when the column member 720 that is moved in the left-right direction is moved to the origin position (retracted position), the lower end portion of the column member 720 is located between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the slide origin detection sensor 717. Configured to be located. Therefore, when the column member 720 is disposed at the origin position (retracted position), the light traveling from the light emitting unit to the light receiving unit is shielded by the lower end of the column member 720. Thereby, by determining whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting unit to the light receiving unit of the slide origin detection sensor 717 is blocked, it is determined whether or not the column member 720 is disposed at the origin position (retracted position). Can be determined.

  The slide position detection sensor 718 is used to detect whether or not the column member 720 is disposed at the extended position of the slide movement. The slide position detection sensor 718 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit that have the same positional relationship as the slide origin sensor 717. Although details will be described later, when the column member 720 that is moved in the left-right direction is moved to the extended position, the lower end portion of the column member 720 is positioned between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the slide position detection sensor 718. It is configured as follows. Therefore, when the column member 720 is disposed at the protruding position, the light traveling from the light emitting unit to the light receiving unit is shielded by the lower end of the column member 720. Accordingly, it is determined whether or not the column member 720 is disposed at the overhanging position by determining whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting unit to the light receiving unit of the slide position detection sensor 718 is blocked. Can do.

  The column member 720 includes a main body portion 721 formed in a plate shape that is long in the vertical direction, and a slide plate 711 of the base member 710 that is provided in the left-right direction at the lower end portion of the main body portion 721 and drilled in the front-rear direction. A first fastening portion 722 through which a screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted, and a second fastening in which the slide rail 730 is fastened and connected to the left end portion of the main body portion 721 in the front-rear direction and drilled in the front-rear direction. Part 723, a long hole extending in a direction parallel to the connecting direction of the second fastening part 723 and formed on the right side of the main body 721 in the front view, and the right of the main body 721 A hook-shaped locking portion 725 that protrudes upward from the lower end portion and meshes with the lever member 714, and a lower lid portion that is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the main body portion 721 and the belt 755 of the driving device 750 is sandwiched between the main body portion 721. 726 and main body 7 1, a rolling part 727 that protrudes from the rear side of the lower end part 1 and is formed to be able to roll on the inner peripheral surface of the slide recessed part 764 of the back cover member 760, and is suspended downward and forward from the upper end part of the main body part 721. And a coil spring 728 mainly connected to the flange-shaped portion 617 of the base member 610 at the lower end.

  The slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed to the support column member 720 in a posture capable of expanding and contracting in the connecting direction of the second fastening portion 723.

  The slide hole 724 is a long hole extending in a direction parallel to the connecting direction of the second fastening portion 723, and is a long hole through which the auxiliary member 615 of the tilting operation unit 600 is inserted. Therefore, the slide hole 724 can suppress the displacement of the tilting operation unit 600 that moves up and down in the left-right direction (the relative rotation of the tilting operation unit 600 with respect to the column member 720).

  The lower lid portion 726 is formed with a tooth profile extending in the front-rear direction on the upper surface side. This tooth profile is a shape that meshes with a tooth profile formed on the inner peripheral surface of the belt 755 of the driving device 750. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the support member 720 from slipping with respect to the belt 755 of the driving device 750.

  The lower lid portion 726 is provided with a shielding portion 726a on the lower surface side for shielding light emitted from the light emitting portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718. The shielding portion 726a has a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in the sliding direction (left-right direction) of the column member 720 (and the tilting operation unit 600), and the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the movable direction is the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718. It is formed thinner (about 1 mm) than the gap (about 10 mm) between the light emitting part and the light receiving part. The shielding portion 726a is movable between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718 by moving the column member 720 in the left-right direction. When the column member 720 (and the tilting operation unit 600) is at the origin position (retracted position), the shielding portion 726a is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717, and the slide origin Light irradiated from the light emitting unit of the detection sensor 717 to the light receiving unit is blocked. Further, when the column member 720 (and the tilting operation unit 600) is in the extended position, the shielding portion 726a is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide position detection sensor 718, and the slide position detection is performed. Light irradiated from the light emitting unit of the sensor 718 to the light receiving unit is blocked. Thus, when it is detected that the light receiving part (or light emitting part) of the slide origin detection sensor 717 is shielded by the shielding part 726a, the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the origin position (retracted position). Can be determined. Further, when it is detected that the light receiving part (or light emitting part) of the slide position detection sensor 718 is shielded by the shielding part 726a, it can be determined that the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the overhanging position. it can.

  The rolling part 727 is inserted into the slide recessed part 764 of the back cover 760 so as to be able to roll, thereby suppressing the frictional resistance and suppressing the inclination in the front-rear direction around the lower end part of the column member 720. be able to.

  The coil spring 728 is a biasing force that moves the tilting operation unit 600 upward. Since the urging force from the coil spring 728 is always applied to the tilting operation unit 600, the tilting operation unit 600 is suppressed from dropping downward due to gravity.

  The connecting member 740 is pivotally supported by a triangular plate-shaped main body member 741 that is rotatably supported by the shaft supporting protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 and a rolling shaft 741c that protrudes from the main body member 741. A pair of cylindrical upper rolling members 742 rolled on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 of the member 710 and a rolling shaft 741c of the main body member 741 are fastened and fixed from the front side to cover the front side of the front rail portion 715. The front cover member 743 arranged in a mode, and the lower half portion of the front cover member 743 disposed on the back side of the front cover member 743 are fitted and held on the front cover member 743, and the upper half portion rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. And a cylindrical lower rolling member 744 to be moved.

  The main body member 741 is a member formed in a triangular plate shape, and is a circular recess recessed from the back at the upper end, and is a shaft that is rotatably supported by the shaft support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600. A support 741a, a plate-like member projecting to the front side at the lower end, an insertion plate 741b that is slidably inserted into the back rail 716 of the base member 710, and an insertion plate from the shaft support 741a It mainly includes a pair of rolling shafts 741c that project in a columnar shape from the position symmetrical with respect to the perpendicular drawn to 741b to the front side and on which the upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported.

  Since the insertion plate portion 741b is inserted into the back rail portion 716 of the base member 710, the connecting member 740 is formed to be movable along the back rail portion 716. Therefore, the tilting operation unit 600 that is pivotally supported by the pivotal support portion 741a is also formed to be movable along the back rail portion 716.

  A pair of rolling shafts 741c are formed at positions symmetrical with respect to a perpendicular drawn from the shaft support portion 741a to the insertion plate portion 741b. Therefore, when the pair of rolling shafts 741c are brought into contact with the front rail portion 715 formed in an arc shape via the upper rolling portion 742, a load (from the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 to the connecting member 740 ( Force in the normal direction of the arc) passes through the shaft support 741a. Therefore, the shaft support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 can be stably held by the connecting member 740.

  The upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 741a and is in contact with the upper surface of the front rail portion 715. That is, when the connecting member 740 is slid along the front rail portion 715, the upper rolling portion 742 is rolled on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715. As a result, the frictional resistance generated when the connecting member 740 slides can be reduced, and the driving force required for the sliding movement can be suppressed.

  The lower rolling member 744 is externally fitted to the lower portion of the front cover member 743 so that the lower half portion is rotatable, and the upper end portion is in contact with the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. That is, when the connecting member 740 is slid along the front rail portion 715, the lower rolling portion 744 is rolled on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. Thereby, the frictional resistance generated between the connecting member 740 and the front rail portion 715 during the sliding movement can be reduced, and the driving force necessary for the sliding movement can be suppressed.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the upper rolling member 742 rolls with the upper surface of the front rail portion 715, and the lower rolling member 744 rolls with the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. Thereby, the state which pinched | interposed the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail part 715 with the upper side rolling member 742 and the lower side rolling member 744 of the connection member 740 can be maintained, suppressing a frictional resistance.

  Here, since the center of gravity is formed upward as described later, the tilting operation unit 600 may be tilted in the front-rear direction. In this case, since the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 are sandwiched between the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744, the connecting member 740 is against the tilt in both the front and rear directions of the tilting operation unit 600. , Resistance can be generated. As a result, the posture of the tilting operation unit 600 can be easily maintained.

  The front cover member 743 is pivotally supported from the front side of the rolling shaft 741c of the connecting member 740, thereby pivotally supporting the upper rolling member 742 so that it cannot be pulled out.

  The driving device 750 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 and generates a driving force for sliding the support member 720, a driving gear 752 pivotally supported by the driving motor 751, and a driving gear 752. A shaft fixed gear 753 around which the belt 755 is wound, and a shaft moving gear 754 which is disposed apart from the shaft fixed gear 753 and is wound around the belt 755 so that the rotary shaft 754a is slidably movable. The belt 755 wound around the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 and moved by the rotation of the shaft fixed gear 753, and a coil that generates a biasing force that moves the shaft moving gear 754 away from the shaft fixed gear 753. And a spring 756.

  The shaft fixing gear 753 is a columnar member serving as a rotating shaft, and includes a fixed shaft portion 753 a that is inserted into the shaft support hole 712 of the base member 710. The shaft moving gear 754 includes a moving shaft portion 754 a that is a cylindrical member as a rotating shaft and is inserted into the slide shaft support hole 713 of the base member 710.

  The shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 are formed as gears having the same shape. On the inner peripheral surface of the belt 755, a tooth profile that meshes with the gear teeth of the shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 is formed. Accordingly, slip between the belt 755 and the shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 can be suppressed, and the rotation amount of the shaft fixing gear 753 can be reliably transmitted to the belt 755.

  One end of the coil spring 756 is fixed to a bowl-shaped portion formed on the right side of the slide shaft support hole 713n of the base member 710, and the other end is fixed to a case covering the shaft moving gear 754. . As a result, an urging force for moving the shaft moving gear 754 to the opposite side of the shaft support hole 712 can be generated, and an appropriate tension can be applied to the belt 755. Therefore, the belt 755 can move the shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving. It is possible to prevent the gear 754 from falling off.

  The back cover member 760 is a member that covers the driving device 750 on the back surface of the base member 710, and has a main body portion 761 formed in a box shape whose front side is opened, and a fixed shaft portion 753 a on the bottom surface of the main body portion 761. A recessed portion 762 that is a recess for receiving, a moving recessed portion 763 that is extended in the same shape as the slide shaft support hole 713 and that receives a moving shaft portion 754a, and a rolling portion 727 that is extended in the left-right direction. And a slide concave portion 764 which is a depression.

  The slide recessed portion 764 is a recess in which the rolling portion 727 rolls on the upper and lower inner surfaces. While suppressing the frictional resistance of the sliding movement of the support | pillar member 720, it suppresses that the support | pillar member 720 inclines in the front-back direction. That is, when the column member 720 is tilted in the front-rear direction, the rolling portion 727 comes into contact with either the upper inner side surface or the lower inner side surface of the slide recessed portion 764. Thereby, the inclination to the front-back direction of the support | pillar member 720 can be suppressed.

  Next, the tilting operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. 50 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600, and FIG. 51 is a rear exploded perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600.

  The tilting operation unit 600 includes a plate-like base member 610 fastened and fixed to the other end of the slide rail 730, a box-like effect member 620 whose lower end is pivotally supported by the base member 610, A first driving device 630 that generates a driving force for swinging the effect member 620, a transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the first drive device 630 to the effect member 620, and a contact member 640 for transmission. A torsion spring 650 that generates a biasing force that moves the member 640 and a second driving device 660 that generates a driving force that opens and closes the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 of the rendering member 620 are mainly provided. .

  The base member 610 includes a main body 611 that is formed in a vertically long plate shape with the slide rail 730 fastened and fixed, and a shaft support portion of the connecting member 740 that protrudes in a columnar shape from the front side of the main body 611. The shaft support protrusion 612 on which the shaft 741a is supported, and a circular hole drilled in the front-rear direction vertically above the shaft support protrusion 612, and the swing shaft 626 of the effect member 620 are supported in a swingable manner. A first shaft support hole 613 and a circular hole drilled in the front-rear direction vertically above the first shaft support hole 613, and the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable. A biaxial support hole 614, an auxiliary member 615 formed on the back surface of the main body 611 and inserted into the slide hole 724 of the column member 720 so as to be vertically slidable, and an insertion hole through which the drive shaft of the first drive device 630 is inserted 616 and the lower end of the main body 611 It mainly includes a bowl-shaped bowl-shaped part 617 extending toward the surface side, and a tilting origin sensor 618 provided with a pair of light-emitting parts and a light-receiving part disposed on the upper left part of the back surface of the main body part 611. .

  The second shaft support hole 614 includes a lower receiving plate portion 614a that protrudes in a circular arc shape from the lower edge to the front side. The lower receiving plate portion 614a guides the rotation of the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640. The lower receiving plate portion 614a is formed with a left-right width that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 642 (see FIG. 53A).

  Since the auxiliary member 615 is inserted through the slide hole 724, the inclination of the base member 610 in the left-right direction can be suppressed, so that the base member 610 can be smoothly slid in the up-down direction.

  The hook-shaped portion 617 is a portion on which one end of the coil spring 728 is hooked and a biasing force is applied.

  With reference to FIG. 52, the production member 620 and the second drive device 660 will be described. 52 is an exploded front perspective view of the effect member 620 and the second drive device 660. FIG. The sub-display device 690 disposed inside the effect member 620 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are referred to as appropriate for the description of the effect member 620 and the second drive device 660.

  The effect member 620 is a box-like member in which the sub display device 690 is disposed, and extends to the front from the top and bottom of the rectangular plate-shaped main body member 621 and the main body member 621 and covers the main body member 621. An upper and lower cover member 622 that is bent in an aspect, and a left and right cover member 623 that is a plate-like member that is attached from both side surfaces of the upper and lower cover member 622 and forms a rectangular box shape with the upper and lower cover members 622 opened forward; A member that opens and closes the front opening, and is a member that opens and closes the front opening together with the first curtain member 624 connected to the fitting hole 665a of the second driving device 660 and moved. A second curtain member 625 that is moved by being pulled by the first curtain member 624, and a columnar swinging shaft portion that protrudes from the lower back of the main body member 621. 26 and a position on the lower left side of the back surface of the main body member 621, and when the effect member 620 is disposed at the origin position, the tilt origin sensor 618 is disposed at a position that shields light emitted from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion. The center of gravity position G (see FIG. 53) is formed above (higher position) than the swinging shaft portion 626. The center-of-gravity position G is formed on a straight line passing through the sliding shaft portion 621a and the swinging shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53) in the inverted state (see FIG. 53).

  The main body member 621 includes a cylindrical sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 51) that protrudes on the back side vertically above the swing shaft portion 626. The sliding shaft portion 621a is slidably inserted into the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 51).

  The upper and lower cover members 622 are members that accommodate the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 inside in a state where the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are opened by the driving force of the driving device 660. .

  The left and right cover members 623 are provided with slide grooves 623a that are formed in a groove shape on the inner side surface and in which the slide protrusions 625c of the second curtain member 625 can slide.

  The slide groove 623a is connected to a curved groove formed in an arc shape at the upper and lower ends of a linear groove extending vertically. Accordingly, the second curtain member 625 is slid and moved in such a manner that linear movement and curved movement occur in order along the shape of the slide groove 623a.

  The first curtain member 624 is a member that swings in the vertical direction about the opening / closing shaft 664 of the second drive device 660, and a main body 624a having a shape in which a plate material is bent in a C-shaped section, and the main body A fitting portion 624b that protrudes in the left-right direction from the end portion of 624a and is fitted into the fitting hole 665a of the second driving device 660 so as not to be relatively rotatable, and one end portion in the vicinity of the fitting portion 624b is a main body portion. And a connecting member 624c that is pivotally supported by 624 and whose other end is connected to the connecting protrusion 625b of the second curtain member 625.

  The second curtain member 625 is a member that is pulled by the first curtain member 624 and moved in the vertical direction. The main body 625a is formed in a plate shape with a C-shaped cross section, and the cross section of the main body 624a has a C-shaped cross section. A connecting protrusion 625b that protrudes in the left-right direction from the end and is connected to the other end of the connecting member 624c, and a slide groove of the left and right cover member 623 that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the bent portion of the main body 625a. And a slide protrusion 625c inserted through 623a.

  The second drive device 660 includes a drive motor 661 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the effect member 620, a drive gear 662 that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 661, and one gear that meshes with the drive gear 662. A pair of transmission gears 663 that rotate in opposite directions, and an opening / closing shaft that is inserted into the transmission gear 663 so as not to be relatively rotatable and is rotatably supported on the front side of the main body member 621 of the effect member 620 by an unillustrated shaft support mechanism. 664 and a transmission member 665 fixed to both ends of the pair of opening and closing shafts 664 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

  The transmission member 665 includes a fitting hole 665a into which the fitting portion 624b of the first curtain member 624 is fitted so as not to be relatively rotatable. As a result, the first curtain member 624 is swung up and down around the opening / closing shaft 664.

  Returning to FIG. 50 and FIG. The first drive device 630 includes a drive motor 631 that is inserted into the insertion hole 616 of the base member 610 and fastened and fixed to the base member, and a screw gear-shaped worm 632 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631. And a helical gear-shaped worm wheel 633 that meshes with the worm 632.

  The worm 632 is formed by a double thread. In this embodiment, since the number of teeth of the worm wheel 633 that meshes with the worm 632 is about 20, the worm wheel 633 rotates once while the worm 632 rotates ten times. Thereby, the rotation angle of the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 when the drive motor 631 is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution can be greatly reduced.

  The worm wheel 633 protrudes from the center of the rotation shaft, is inserted into the second shaft support hole 614 of the base member 610, and has a locking protrusion 633a that is locked to the tubular portion 643 of the transmission member 640 so as not to be relatively rotatable. Prepare. The transmission of the driving force between the worm 632 and the worm wheel 633 is structurally limited to one direction from the worm 632 to the worm wheel 633 (when the worm wheel 633 is actively rotated, the force is 632 in the axial direction). Thereby, the load which the drive motor 631 receives when stopping the worm wheel 633 can be reduced. Further, the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 can be stopped in a state where the power of the drive motor 631 is cut off, and the power consumption of the drive motor 631 can be suppressed.

  The transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a) and 53 (b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. 53 (a) and 53 (b), the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are appropriately referred to for the description of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. To do. 53A shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642. In this state, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 is applied to the transmission member 640. It is balanced in the swing direction. FIG. 53B shows a state in which the transmission member 640 is swung by a predetermined amount counterclockwise from the inverted state of FIG. 53A and the effect member 620 is swung by a predetermined amount.

  The transmission member 640 is a member that is swung by the rotation of the worm wheel 633 (see FIG. 50). A cylindrical portion 642 that extends in the direction and engages with the locking projection 633a of the first drive device 630, and a length that extends in the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 642 at the other end of the main body portion 641. The sliding hole 643 drilled as a hole, the contact part 644 spaced apart on both sides of the swinging direction of the main body part 641, and the contact part 644 and the front side surface of the main body part 641 are connected. And an arc-shaped front arc plate portion 645 having a wide width and an arc-shaped back arc plate portion 646 having an arc-shape having a width that connects the contact portion 644 and the rear side surface of the main body portion 641.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 645, and the back arc plate portion 646 are arranged so as to surround the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the torsion spring 650 from dropping (disengaging) from the transmission member 640.

  The cylindrical portion 642 is pivotally supported in the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) of the base member 610, and is locked to the locking protrusion 633a (see FIG. 50) of the first drive device 630 so as not to be relatively rotatable. The

  The sliding hole 643 is inserted through the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620. Thus, when the transmission member 640 is swung around the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) by the driving force of the first driving device 630 (see FIG. 50), the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is obtained. Is slid about the first shaft support hole 613 while the effect member 620 is slid about the first shaft support hole 613.

  By swinging the effect member 620 in this way, it is possible to suppress the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the drive motor 631 is rotated by the minimum unit of control resolution of the first drive device 630. For example, as a method of swinging the effect member 620, a method of directly connecting a gear to the swinging shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor to the gear can be considered. However, in this case, the angle P0 of the minimum unit of the control resolution of the drive motor (see FIG. 53 (a)) is shown to be several times larger than the actual angle P0 for easy understanding. When the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is shifted from the inverted state to the left and right direction, the amount of movement X1 increases as the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 moves away from the swinging shaft portion 626. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is more difficult to adjust as the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is separated from the swinging shaft portion 626, and the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is disposed directly above the swinging shaft portion 626. It is difficult to make the effect member 620 stationary in the inverted state.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the effect member 620 is coupled to the slide shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620. The length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the cylindrical portion 642 that is the swinging shaft of the transmission member 640 is the length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swinging shaft portion 626 that is the swinging shaft of the effect member 620. It is formed shorter than

  Therefore, even when the effect member 620 is long in the radial direction of the swing shaft portion 626, the angle P0 (see FIG. 53A), which is the minimum unit of the resolution of the control of the first drive device 630. In order to facilitate the operation, the movement amount X2 of the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 when the first driving device 630 is operated at an angle several times larger than the actual angle P0) is suppressed. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the effect member 620 stationary in an inverted state in which the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is disposed directly above the rocking shaft portion 626 that is the rocking shaft.

  Further, as a method of swinging the effect member 620, gear teeth are formed on the effect member 620 on an arc centered on the swing shaft portion 626, and a gear meshing with the gear teeth is rotated by a drive motor. A method of swinging the effect member 620 is conceivable. However, in this case, the greater the swing range of the effect member 620, the greater the range in which the gear teeth on the arc are formed in the left-right direction of the effect member 620. Therefore, when the effect member 620 is formed in a thin shape in the swinging direction, the gear teeth on the arc protrude from the effect member 620, which hinders the effect of the effect. Therefore, the design freedom of the effect member 620 is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the effect member 620 is the swing shaft portion 626 in which the cylindrical portion 642 that is the swing shaft is the swing shaft of the effect member 620. And is connected to the swinging shaft portion 621a at the center of the effect member 620 in the left-right direction. Since the effect member 620 swings following the transmission member 640, the formation range of the transmission member 640 with respect to the swing range of the effect member 620 can be suppressed near the center of the effect member 620 in the left-right direction. Thereby, even if the production member 620 is thin in the left-right direction, the transmission member 640 can be prevented from protruding from the production member 620, and the degree of freedom in design of the production member 620 can be improved.

  The lower surface of the slide shaft portion 621 a of the effect member 620 is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640. Thereby, the weight of the effect member 620 is loaded not only on the swinging shaft portion 626 but also on the transmission member 640. That is, a force that opposes the weight of the effect member 620 can be generated not only from the rocking shaft portion 626 but also from the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640. Therefore, the effect member 640 can be supported at two points of the swinging shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, and the radial force applied to the swinging shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be suppressed. .

  Here, since the inverted state shown in FIG. 53A is the normal state, the effect member 620 can be quickly returned to the inverted state after the transmission member 640 is swung and swung a predetermined amount from the inverted state. Is desirable.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), when the transmission member 640 is swung counterclockwise from the state illustrated in FIG. 53 (a) at a swing angle φ1, the effect member 620 is produced. Is rocked at a rocking angle φ2 (φ2 <φ1).

  That is, the swing angle of the effect member 620 is made smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 640 that is swung by the driving force of the first driving device 630 (see FIG. 50). Therefore, the effect member 620 can be easily returned to the inverted state (see FIG. 53A).

  In the present embodiment, a long-sliding slide hole 643 is formed in the axial diameter direction of the transmission member 640, and the slide shaft portion 621 a of the effect member 620 is inserted into the slide hole 643. The transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 have different swing axes, and the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640 has a shorter swing radius than the slide shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620. As the shaft is swung, the sliding shaft portion 621a moves away from the rocking shaft of the transmission member 640. Therefore, the arm length R1 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state (see FIG. 53A) is swung by a predetermined amount from the inverted state ( 54 (b)), the arm length R2 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is shortened.

  That is, the arm length of the transmission member 640 is shortened as it approaches the inverted state, and the arm length of the transmission member 640 is constant when the transmission member 640 is swung by a predetermined angle. As compared with the case of, it can be made smaller as the inverted state is approached. Therefore, without changing the rotation speed of the drive motor 631, the operating speed of the effect member 620 is increased near the predetermined stop position, while the operation speed of the effect member 620 is decreased near the inverted state, and the effect member 620 is inverted. It is possible to make it easy to stand still in the state (it is possible to easily stop and control the effect member 620 in a state where the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is disposed vertically above the first shaft support hole 613).

  Referring to FIG. 55, the effect member 620 swings with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 by changing the arm length from the sliding shaft portion 621 a of the effect member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640. The change in angle will be described.

  FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the swing angle of the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53A). 55, the rotation axis M1 corresponds to the swinging shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53A) that is the rotation shaft of the effect member 620, and the rotation shaft M2 is the cylindrical portion 642 that is the swinging shaft of the transmission member 640. (See FIG. 53A). The straight lines a1 to a4 are schematic representations of the arrangement of the transmission member 640, are straight lines drawn radially from the rotation axis M2, the straight line a1 passes through the rotation axis M1, and the straight lines a2 to a4 are the straight line a1. Are formed in such a manner that the forming angles are sequentially added by 15 degrees. That is, the angle formed by adjacent straight lines a1 to a4 is 15 degrees.

  An arc drawn with a radius equal to the arm length R1 (see FIG. 53A) around the rotation axis M2 is shown as an arc SR1, and the arm length R2 around the rotation axis M2 (see FIG. 54B) An arc drawn with a radius equal to is shown as arc SR2. The arc SR0 is an arc drawn with the rotation axis M1 as the center, and is an arc having a radius of a length obtained by adding the distance between the rotation axis M1 and the rotation axis M2 to the arm length R1.

  These arcs assume the locus of the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53A). In the present embodiment, a sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 53 (a)) as a connection position protrudes from the effect member 620, and the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR0. . In addition, when the connection position of the production member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR1 or the arc SR2, the production member 620 is formed with an elongated slot in the axial direction, and the transmission member 640 A case where a shaft inserted through the long hole is projected is assumed.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR0 is shown by the intersection point P10, the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR1 is shown by the intersection point P11, and the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR2 is the intersection point P12. Is illustrated.

  Similarly, an intersection point between the straight line a2 and the arc SR0 is illustrated as an intersection point P20, an intersection point between the straight line a2 and the arc SR1 is illustrated as an intersection point P21, and an intersection point between the straight line a2 and the arc SR2 is illustrated as an intersection point P22. An intersection point between the straight line a3 and the arc SR0 is illustrated as an intersection point P30, an intersection point between the straight line a3 and the arc SR1 is illustrated as an intersection point P31, and an intersection point between the straight line a3 and the arc SR2 is illustrated as an intersection point P32. An intersection point between the straight line a4 and the arc SR0 is illustrated as an intersection point P40, an intersection point between the straight line a4 and the arc SR1 is illustrated as an intersection point P41, and an intersection point between the straight line a4 and the arc SR2 is illustrated as an intersection point P42. The intersection point P10 and the intersection point P11 are arranged at the same position, and the intersection point P40 and the intersection point P42 are arranged at the same position.

  As shown in FIG. 55, an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P10 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20 is shown as an angle A10, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P11. The angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P21 is shown as an angle A11, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P12 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P22 is shown as an angle A12. Is done.

  Similarly, an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30 is shown as an angle A20, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P21, the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P31. An angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 is illustrated by an angle A21, and an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P22 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32 is illustrated by an angle A22. An angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P40 is shown as an angle A30, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P31 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P41. Are formed as an angle A31, and an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P42 is shown as an angle A32. Note that these angles correspond to the swing angle of the effect member 620.

  Here, the ratio of (distance between the rotation axis M1 and the rotation axis M2: arm length R1: arm length R2) is (1: 2.32: 2.54) in the present embodiment. When the angle is measured, the angle A32 is 11.07 degrees, the angle A31 is 10.77 degrees, and the angle A30 is 11.37 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a4 and the straight line a3, the swing angle of the effect member 640 is the largest when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are coupled along the arc SR0. When the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are coupled along the arc SR2, the above is formed (the angle A30 is closer to the angle A32 than the angle A31).

  The angle A22 is 10.87 degrees, the angle A21 is 10.59 degrees, and the angle A20 is 10.82 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a3 and the straight line a2, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are coupled along the arc SR0 is along the arc SR2. This is less than the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between the angle A22 and the angle A20 is smaller than the difference between the angle A20 and the angle A21 (the angle A20 is closer to the angle A22 than the angle A21).

  The angle A12 is 10.78 degrees, the angle A11 is 10.50 degrees, and the angle A10 is 10.53 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a2 and the straight line a1, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are coupled along the arc SR0 is along the arc SR1. It exceeds the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between the angle A12 and the angle A10 is larger than the difference between the angle A10 and the angle A11 (the angle A10 is closer to the angle A11 than the angle A12).

  From these, by setting the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) as the arc SR0, for example, when the transmission member 640 is swung at a constant speed, the effect member It can be seen that the degree of freedom in adjusting the angular velocity of 620 can be improved. In other words, the angular velocity when the transmission member 640 is arranged on the straight line a4 approaches the angular velocity (high speed side) when the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the arc SR2, and the transmission member 640 is on the straight line a1. When arranged, the angular velocity can approach the angular velocity (low speed side) when the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the arc SR1.

  Further, when the ratio of the respective angles is calculated, the angle A22 / angle A32 is 0.98, and the angle A12 / angle A22 is 0.99. The angle A21 / angle A31 is 0.98, and the angle A11 / angle A21 is 0.99. That is, when the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) is the arcs SR1 and SR2, the transmission member 640 is swung toward the inverted state at a constant speed. In this case, the reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 is as small as 1 to 2%.

  On the other hand, the angle A20 / angle A30 is 0.95, and the angle A10 / angle A20 is 0.97. That is, when the locus of the coupling position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) is an arc SR0 (an arc centered on the rotation axis M1), the transmission member 640 is inverted at a constant speed. The reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 when it is swung toward the state can be 3 to 5%. That is, the reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 can be increased as compared with the case where the locus of the connection position is the arcs SR1 and SR2 (arcs centered on the rotation axis M2).

  As shown in FIG. 53A, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is brought into contact with the lower end portion of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state. In the inverted state, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is formed vertically above the swinging shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640, so that the force due to the weight of the effect member 620 is the swing shaft portion. 626 and the tubular portion 642 are hung vertically downward. Therefore, since the force of the component in the direction in which the effect member 620 is swung is not generated by the weight of the effect member 620, the posture of the effect member 620 is maintained in the inverted state even when the power of the first drive device 630 is shut off. Can do. Thereby, durability improvement of the 1st drive device 630 can be aimed at.

  Further, since the force due to the weight of the effect member 620 is applied vertically downward to the swinging shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, the rotational resistance of the swinging shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be increased. It is possible to easily maintain the posture of the effect member 620 in the inverted state.

  The torsion spring 650 is an elastic spring in which an urging force is generated in a direction in which the coil portion 651 is rewound (a direction in which the transmission member 640 is pushed back) as the transmission member 640 swings. A coil portion 651 wound around, an urging arm portion 652 extending along both sides of the swinging direction of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640, an end portion of the coil portion 651, and an end portion of the urging arm portion 652 And a connecting arm portion 653 that connects the portion between the cylindrical portion 642 and the swinging shaft portion 626.

  The coil portion 651 is formed with an inner diameter that is approximately three times the diameter of the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620. Therefore, when the urging arm portion 652 is swung to cause a load to reduce the diameter of the coil portion 651, the amount of deformation of the coil portion 651 can be secured, and the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 are deformed. Can be prevented from concentrating.

  The urging arm portion 652 is surrounded by the main body portion 641, the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 645, and the back arc plate portion 646 of the transmission member 640. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the urging arm portion 652 from dropping (detaching) from the transmission member 640.

  Further, the urging arm portion 652 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower receiving plate portion 614a on the plane on which the transmission member 640 swings. Therefore, a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640 is generated from the biasing arm portion 652 disposed in the swinging direction of the transmission member 640, and the biasing arm portion disposed on the opposite side of the swinging direction of the transmission member 640. 652 is prevented from moving to the lower receiving plate portion 614a. Thereby, the torsion spring 650 is formed so as to be able to generate a biasing force in a direction to push back the transmission member 640 regardless of the swinging direction of the transmission member 640.

  A bent portion 653 a that is bent to the opposite side of the transmission member 640 is formed at the connecting portion of the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653. In this case, as described later, the bent portion 653a is expanded by the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 being pressed against the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 (see FIG. 54B). Thereby, the contact position between the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 becomes far from the cylindrical portion 642, and the moment applied to the transmission member 640 from the torsion spring 650 is increased. Can do.

  With reference to FIG. 54, the change in the urging force generated from the torsion spring 650 and pushing back the transmission member 640 will be described. FIGS. 54A and 54B are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are shown in phantom lines, and FIG. 53 is appropriately used to explain the change in the urging force generated from the torsion spring 650. refer.

  Further, in FIG. 54A, from the state of FIG. 53B, the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the urging arm portion 652 on the left side when viewed from the front is the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640. FIG. 54 (b) shows a state in which the inner surface starts to be pressed. In FIG. 54 (b), the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front, and the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pulled. The extended state is illustrated.

  In the state of FIG. 54A, a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640 is generated in the biasing arm portion 652 on the left side of the torsion spring 650 when viewed from the front. This urging force is the sum of the urging force generated from the coil portion 651 and the urging force generated from the bent portion 653a.

  That is, in the state of FIG. 53 (b), the transmission member 640 is not pressed against the bent portion 653a arranged on the left side in the front view among the pair of bent portions 653a. Only a biasing force starting from the coil portion 651 is generated in the portion 652 as a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640.

  On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 54A, in addition to the urging force starting from the coil portion 651, the urging force is generated by the deformation of the urging arm portion 652 starting from the bent portion 653a. Therefore, the spring constant of the urging arm portion 652 can be increased. Note that the deformation of the urging arm portion 652 starting from the bent portion 653a is shorter than the deformation starting from the coil portion 651, so the length of the portion subjected to the deformation is shortened. The urging force generated by the hit can be further increased.

  In the state of FIG. 54 (b), the angle formed by the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 is expanded by pushing the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 by the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640. Accordingly, the contact position length L1 which is the distance between the contact position of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 and the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the cylindrical portion 642 in the state of FIG. Compared to FIG. 54B, the similar contact position length L <b> 2 in the state of FIG. 54B is separated from the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. That is, the contact position length is extended. Thereby, since the arm length of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is increased, the moment applied to the transmission member 640 from the torsion spring 650 can be increased.

  Therefore, for example, when the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 is substantially the same in the state of FIG. 54A and the state of FIG. 54B, the load on the transmission member 640 is further increased in FIG. The moment that is generated can be increased. Therefore, the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 can be more easily pushed back.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is small when the swing angle from the retracted position of the transmission member 640 (the production member 620) is small, and the swing angle is large. As it is, it is increased elastically, and is increased beyond the elastic increase with the state of FIG. For this reason, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 required when the effect member 620 is at the maximum swing angle (see FIG. 54B) is determined, the torsion spring only increases elastically. Compared to the above, the biasing force when the swing angle is small can be set smaller (a soft spring can be used).

  Thereby, the degree to which the operation speed at the start of the swing of the effect member 620 is decelerated by the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 can be reduced, and the operation speed at the start of the operation of the effect member 620 can be increased. .

  Further, since the urging force is increased beyond the elastic increase with the state of FIG. 54 (a) as a boundary, the swing angle of the effect member 620 is equal to or greater than the state of FIG. 54 (a). The deceleration acceleration of the effect member 620 can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to delay the timing at which the effect member 620 starts to decelerate during the swinging motion of the effect member 620. Therefore, the swing angle at which the effect member 620 can be swung in a high speed state can be expanded, and the effect of the tilting operation unit 600 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the sliding operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 will be described. FIG. 56 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700. In FIG. 56, the state where the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the state where the tilting operation unit 600 is slid by a predetermined amount from the retracted position is illustrated by a solid line.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the connecting member 740 that connects the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700 that are slidably movable in the vertical direction is formed to be movable in the extending direction of the front rail portion 715. . Here, since the weight of the tilting operation unit 600 is loaded on the connecting member 740, when the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position, the tilting operation unit 600 is left in front view along the front rail portion 715 due to gravity. Is biased towards. Therefore, it is conceivable to fix the driving device 750 in order to maintain the tilting operation unit 600 in the retracted position.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lever member 714 is formed so as to be able to swing up and down, and when the lever member 714 is swinged downward, the lever member 714 is engaged with the locking portion 725 of the support member 720 and Slide movement in the direction is restricted.

  As a result, the tilting operation unit 600 can be mechanically maintained at the retracted position. Therefore, when the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position, the tilting operation unit 600 is stopped with the drive device 750 stopped. It can be maintained in the retracted position. Therefore, the durability of the driving device 750 can be improved.

  From the state where the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position, the support member 720 can be moved by swinging the lever member 714 upward and operating the driving device 750, and the tilting operation unit 600 can be moved in the horizontal direction. Can be moved to slide.

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the tilting operation unit 600 is placed in the retracted position in an inverted state, the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 is placed vertically below the center of gravity G of the tilting operation unit 600.

  Here, since the direction of the sliding movement of the tilting operation unit 600 is along the front rail portion 715, in FIG. 56, the tilting operation unit 600 moves while being slid by a predetermined amount from the retracted position (see the imaginary line in FIG. 56). Always has a vertical component.

  Therefore, if the center of gravity G of the tilting operation unit 600 and the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 are displaced in the vertical direction, a load may be applied in the direction in which the tilting operation unit 600 is rotated from the connecting member 740. This is the same when the tilting operation unit 600 is slid in the reverse direction.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 is arranged vertically below the center of gravity G, the vertical component of the force applied to the tilting operation unit 600 from the connecting member 740 and the center of gravity G are It is formed on the same line. Thereby, it can suppress that a load is applied to the direction which rotates the tilting operation unit 600 from the connection member 740, and the attitude | position of the tilting operation unit 600 can be stabilized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the influence of the tilting motion (swinging motion) of the tilting motion unit 600 on the slide motion of the slide motion unit 700 will be described. FIG. 57 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700. FIG. 57 shows a state where the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is swung to the state shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is disposed on the left side of the front view of the connection member 740 in a state where the effect member 620 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Therefore, the acceleration in the leftward direction when viewed from the front, which is applied to the connecting member 740, is increased.

  In this case, since the driving force necessary for sliding the tilting operation unit 600 from the retracted position can be suppressed, the drive motor 751 of the drive device 750 can be reduced in size.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, a tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact surface of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 is a flat surface has been described, but the tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment is the main body portion of the transmission member 2640. 2641 includes an abutting portion 2641a that comes into contact with the distal end portion of the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  58 (a), 58 (b), and 59 are front views of the transmission member 2640 and the torsion spring 650 in the second embodiment. 58A, 58B, and 59, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 58A illustrates an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 2640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 58B illustrates the inverted state of FIG. 58A. The transmission member 2640 is swung by a predetermined amount counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the bottom surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the tip of the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. In FIG. A state in which the transmission member 2640 is further swung counterclockwise as viewed from the front is illustrated from the state of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 58, when the transmission member 2640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 58A), the main body portion 2641 is pressed against the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 2641 is moved. The torsion spring 650 generates a biasing force that swings in the direction of returning to the inverted state. When the transmission member 2640 is swung and the urging arm portion 652 is deformed, the coil portion 651 is deformed to be reduced in diameter by the connecting arm portion 653 connected to the urging arm portion 652 on the deformed side. That is, as the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced, the urging force that swings the transmission member 2640 in the direction of returning to the inverted state is increased.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the contact position between the main body portion 2641 of the transmission member 2640 and the urging arm portion 652 (from the difference in the swing angle between the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the transmission member 2640 ( The tip position of the urging arm 652 is changed by the swinging of the transmission member 2640. That is, as the transmission member 2640 is swung, the distal end portion of the urging arm portion 652 is moved to the distal end side of the main body portion 2641 (the side closer to the sliding hole 643).

  Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 58B, when the transmission member 2640 is further rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front in a state where the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the distal end portion of the urging arm portion 642. The urging arm portion 642 is restricted by the abutting portion 2641a from moving toward the distal end side of the main body portion 2641.

  As shown in FIG. 59, when the transmission member 2640 is swung while the movement of the attached arm portion 642 is restricted by the abutting portion 2641a, the torsion spring 650 is deformed as a whole. That is, the base side (bending portion 653a side) of the urging arm portion 642 is moved downward by the amount that the urging arm portion 642 is restricted from moving toward the distal end side of the main body portion 2641. As a result, the connecting arm portion 653 is moved in the direction of reducing the diameter of the coil portion 651 (the direction in which the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 increases).

  That is, as compared with the case where the abutting portion 2641a is not provided, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 2640 is swung to the state shown in FIG. 59 can be increased. Thereby, the degree of change in the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 (the increasing ratio of the biasing force with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 2640) is increased in the state shown in FIG. 59 compared to the state shown in FIG. Can do. Therefore, when the swing angle of the transmission member 2640 is small, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 is suppressed, and the starting speed of the transmission member 2640 is increased while the swing angle is large (see FIG. 59). The biasing force of the torsion spring 650 can be increased nonlinearly (more than an elastic change), and a biasing force sufficient to return the transmission member 2640 to the inverted state can be obtained.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a tilting operation unit 3600 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact surface of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 has a constant width has been described, but the tilting operation unit 3600 in the third embodiment is the main body portion of the transmission member 3640. 3641 is provided with an inclined side surface 3641a that is inclined in such a manner that the side surface comes into contact with the tip of the torsion spring 650 and becomes wider as it approaches the tip. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 60A and 60B are front views of the transmission member 3640 and the torsion spring 650 in the third embodiment. In FIGS. 60A and 60B, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 60A illustrates an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 3640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 60B illustrates the inverted state of FIG. 60A. A state in which the transmission member 3640 is swung by a predetermined amount counterclockwise when viewed from the front is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the transmission member 3640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 60A), the main body portion 3641 is pressed against the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 3641 is moved. The torsion spring 650 generates a biasing force that swings in the direction of returning to the inverted state.

  When the transmission member 3640 is swung from the state shown in FIG. 60A to the state shown in FIG. 60B, the difference in the swing angle between the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the transmission member 3640 is caused. The contact position between the main body portion 3641 of the transmission member 3640 and the biasing arm portion 652 (the tip position of the biasing arm portion 652) is changed by the swinging of the transmission member 3640. That is, as the swing angle from the inverted state of the transmission member 3640 (see FIG. 60A) increases, the distal end portion of the urging arm portion 652 moves toward the distal end side of the main body portion 3641 (the side closer to the sliding hole 643). ).

  Therefore, the distal end portion of the urging arm portion 652 slides along the inclined side surface 3641a of the main body portion 3641. That is, when the transmission member 3640 is swung, the torsion spring 650 is deformed by the width of the transmission member 3640 being expanded by the inclined side surface 3641a in addition to the deformation caused by the swing angle of the transmission member 3640. . In this case, since the width of the transmission member 3640 is further increased toward the distal end portion of the transmission member 3640, the inclined side surface 3641a increases as the swing angle from the inverted state of the transmission member 3640 (see FIG. 60A) increases. As a result, the deformation of the torsion spring 650 is increased by increasing the width of the transmission member 3640. Therefore, as the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 increases, the increase rate of the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 (change in biasing force of the torsion spring 650 with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 3640) can be increased.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64, a tilting operation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is fixed has been described. However, in the tilting operation unit 4600 according to the fourth embodiment, the transmission member 4640 is added to the contact portion 644 and the contact portion 644 thereof. A moving contact member 4647 having a shorter width than the portion 644 is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  61A is a rear perspective view of the transmission member 4640 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 61B is a rear perspective view of the moving contact member 4647. FIG. In FIG. 61A, illustration of the moving contact member 4647 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the front circular arc plate portion 4645 of the transmission member 4640 has guide holes 4645a that are arranged symmetrically at intervals shorter than the arrangement interval of the contact portions 644 and drilled in the front-rear direction. Prepare. The guide hole 4645a is a through hole that guides the pair of rear protrusions 4647b of the moving contact member 4647 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the moving contact member 4647 includes a main body portion 4647a formed in a long plate shape, and a pair of rear surface protrusions projecting from both ends of the main body portion 4647a to the back surface side. It mainly includes a portion 4647b and a front protrusion 4647c protruding in a hemispherical shape from the approximate center of the main body portion 4647 to the front side.

  One end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the opposite side of the front projection 4647c of the main body 4647a, and the other end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the main body 641b (see FIG. 62 (c) and FIG. 62 (d)). For easy understanding, the coil spring 4648 is not shown in FIGS. 61 (a), 61 (b), 62 (a), and 62 (b).

  The rear protrusion 4647b is a portion that is inserted from the front side into the guide hole 4645a of the transmission member 4640, and has a sufficient length from the front arc plate portion 4645 (when it contacts with the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650). (Possible length) is formed in a protruding manner. The back projection 4647b is formed to be inclined at an angle that makes contact with the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 at the surface (line) (see FIG. 64B). As a result, the load applied to the urging arm 652 is reduced (stress concentration is suppressed) as compared with the case where the urging arm 652 and the rear protrusion 4647b are in contact with each other at a point, and the urging arm 652 is reduced. The durability of can be improved.

  The front protrusion 4647c is a portion that comes into contact with the main body member 4621 (see FIG. 63) of the effect member 4620, and the moving contact member 4647 is in a relationship with the escape opening 4621a formed in the main body member 4621. The front arc plate 4645 is separated (see FIG. 62C), or the moving contact member 4647 is brought close to the front arc plate 4645 (see FIG. 62D). In addition, since the front-end | tip of the front projection part 4647c is formed in a hemispherical shape, it can make it easy to get the front projection part 4647c on the surface of the main body member 4621 from the escape opening 4621a.

  62 (a) and 62 (b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member 4640, and FIGS. 62 (c) and 62 (d) are top views of the transmission member 4640. FIG. 62 (a) and 62 (c), the state in which the moving contact member 4647 is separated from the front circular arc plate portion 4645 is the moving contact member in FIGS. 62 (b) and 62 (d). The state where 4647 is brought close to the front circular arc plate portion 4645 is illustrated.

  FIG. 63 is a schematic front view schematically showing the main body member 4621 of the effect member 4620. Note that the transmission member 4640 that forms an inverted state with respect to the main body member 4621 is a center state 4640C, the state in which the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front is a counterclockwise rocking state 4640L, and the transmission member 4640 is The state of being swung in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is illustrated as an imaginary line as a clockwise wobbling state 4640R. Further, in the center state 4640C, the counterclockwise swing state 4640L, and the clock swing state 4640R, the illustration of the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 4645, and the rear arc plate portion 646 is omitted for easy understanding. .

  The main body member 4621 includes a relief opening 4621a formed in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 63, the relief opening 4621a has a region (a central state 4640C and a counterclockwise swing) where the front protrusion 4647c (see FIG. 62) moves when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front. In the moving state 4640L).

  When the front projection 4647c of the transmission member 4640 overlaps the relief opening 4621a in front view, the front projection 4647c is inserted into the relief opening 4621a, and the moving contact member 4647 is transmitted by the elastic force of the coil spring 4648. Of the main body 641 (see FIG. 62C). On the other hand, if the front protrusion 4647c does not overlap with the escape opening 4621a (overlap with the main body member 4621), the front protrusion 4647c is brought into contact with the side surface of the main body member 4621 of the effect member 4620, and the moving contact member 4647 is brought close to the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 4640 (see FIG. 62D).

  That is, the rear protrusion 4647b of the moving contact member 4647 protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise from the front side. It is. Therefore, the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 is generated when the transmission member 4640 is swung in the clockwise direction from the inverted state as compared with the case of being swung counterclockwise in the front view. The increase rate of the urging force (the degree of increase of the urging force with respect to the swing angle) can be increased.

  FIGS. 64A and 64B are front views of the transmission member 4640 and the torsion spring 650. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 4620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the main body portion 4647a of the moving contact member 4647 is easy to understand. Illustration is omitted. 64A illustrates an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 4640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 64B illustrates the inverted state of FIG. 64A. The transmission member 4640 is swung by a predetermined amount clockwise in front view, and the urging arm portion 652 on the left side in front view is in contact with the rear projection 4647b.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (b), while the swinging angle of the transmission member 4640 is small, the biasing arm portion 652 can be contacted from the opposite side (the contact portion 644 side) of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 4640. Thus, the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is rotated clockwise in front view can be increased.

  Thus, the urging force when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise when viewed from the front is improved while the starting speed is increased when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Can do. Therefore, the production member 4620 can be prevented from colliding with the inner surface of the back case 210.

  That is, in the state where the tilting operation unit 4600 is disposed at the retracted position, when the effect member 4620 is turned upside down, the inner surface of the back case 210 is brought close to the effect member 620 (see FIG. 5). Here, if the effect member 4620 is vibrated vigorously from the state of being counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 57) toward the inverted state, the effect member 4620 cannot be fully decelerated, and the rear case 210. There is a risk of the production member 4620 colliding with the inner surface of the.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the back projection 4647b protrudes at the timing when the effect member 4620 swings clockwise from the inverted state (see FIG. 62D), and the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 is increased. Can be increased. As a result, the effect member 4620 is sufficiently used when the effect member 4620 is tilted clockwise from the inverted state while maintaining the operation speed when the effect member 4620 is tilted counterclockwise from the inverted state. Can be slowed down.

  Also, the direction in which the rear protrusion 4647b is pushed back at the contact point between the rear protrusion 4647b and the biasing arm 652 disposed on the opposite side of the swinging direction of the transmission member 4640 (FIG. 64 (b) front view counterclockwise). ) Is energized. As a result, the transmission member 4640 is moved with a larger urging force than when the transmission member 4640 is pushed back only by the urging arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640 (right side in FIG. 64B). Can be pushed back. On the other hand, it is possible to improve the urging force generated by the urging arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 64, the distance from the position where the abutting portion 644 and the urging arm portion 652 arranged on the opposite side of the side close to the transmission member 4640 to the lower receiving plate portion 614a is located. As compared with the above, the distance from the lower receiving plate portion 614a to the bent portion 653a is short. In this case, it is easy to move the bent portion 653a with the force from the contact portion 644 using the lower receiving plate portion 614 as a fulcrum, but the reverse is difficult (the difference in the distance from the fulcrum to the action point is different). Because there is).

  Therefore, the urging force generated by the deformation of the urging arm portion 652 on the left side when viewed from the front when the abutting portion 644 and the urging arm portion 652 are abutted is generated by the deformation of the entire torsion spring 650. That is, the biasing arm portion 652 on the left side when viewed from the front and the rear protrusion 4647b are in contact with each other so that the bent portion 653a on the left side when viewed from the front is the left side when viewed from the front (the inner diameter of the coil portion 651). The deformation that is moved in the direction of narrowing) causes deformation of the connecting arm portion 653, the coil portion 651, and the urging arm portion 652 on the right side of the front view. In this case, since the coil portion 651 undergoes deformation whose inner diameter is reduced, a biasing force is generated in the coil portion 651 and the connecting arm portion 653 to increase the inner diameter of the coil portion 651, and the right side view (transmission member) The urging force of the urging arm 652 on the side of the swinging direction of 4640 pushes back the transmission member 640 can be improved.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the combined operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68.

  In the first embodiment, when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the extended position, the second non-transmission wall portion 553c has a shape along a circle around the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570. However, the rotating arm member 5550 in the fifth embodiment includes the recessed portion 5556 in which the non-transmission wall portion 5553c is recessed in the direction away from the rotating crank member 570. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  65 to 68 are front views of the combined operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 65, the state where the rotating arm member 5550 is disposed at the extended position and the sliding projection 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is disposed near the left end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is illustrated in FIG. 65, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the first recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c. 67, however, the state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 66 until the sliding projection 574 is disengaged from the recessed portion 5556 is shown in FIG. The state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the sliding projection 574 is accommodated in the two concave portions 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is illustrated. The

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c of the combined operation unit 5550 includes a recessed portion 5556 that is recessed in a direction away from the rotating crank member 570.

  The recessed portion 5556 includes a first wall portion 5556a having an arc shape (about ¼ of a circular shape) formed on the left side when viewed from the front, and an arc shape (about ¼ of the circular shape) formed on the right side when viewed from the front. The second wall portion 5556b of the rotating crank member 570 is configured to be slidable. That is, the recessed depth of the recessed portion 5556 from the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is equal to or less than the radius of the sliding projection 574, and the connecting portion of the recessed portion 5556 and the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is smooth. It is formed from a curved surface.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 65 to the state shown in FIG. 66, a gap is generated between the sliding projection 574 and the second non-transmission wall 5553c, The rotating arm member 5550 is swung until it is brought into contact with the sliding protrusion 574 by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the rotating crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the first recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is slid by the sliding protrusion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

  That is, between the state shown in FIG. 65 and the state shown in FIG. 66, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the urging force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not swung. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is disposed to face the first wall 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating The crank member 570 forms a non-transmission state.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the sliding projection 574 has a first recess from the left end of the second non-transmission wall 5553c. The rotating arm member 5550 is again swung to the extended position (pressed down) by being pressed against the second wall portion 5556b of the installation portion 5556. That is, during the period from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the second wall portion 5556b is pushed and moved by the sliding projection 574, so that the rotating arm member 5550 is swung. The driving force of the second driving device 560 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 5550 via the rotating crank member 570.

  Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is disposed to face the second wall 5556b, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating The crank member 570 forms a transmission state.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. 68, a gap is generated between the sliding projection 574 and the second non-transmission wall 5553c, The rotating arm member 5550 is swung until it is brought into contact with the sliding protrusion 574 by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the rotating crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the second recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is slid by the sliding protrusion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

  That is, between the state shown in FIG. 67 and the state shown in FIG. 68, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the urging force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not swung. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is disposed to face the first wall 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating The crank member 570 forms a non-transmission state.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the sliding protrusion 574 is rotated when it is disposed to face the first wall 5556a. When a non-transmission state is formed between the moving crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 and the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed to face the second wall portion 5556b, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member A transmission state is formed with 5550.

  If the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, the relationship between the first wall portion 5556a and the second wall portion 5556b is reversed. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 are disposed when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed to face the first wall 5556a. When the sliding projection 574 is disposed opposite to the second wall 5556b, a non-transmission state is formed between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550. The

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, in this embodiment, the rotating arm member 5550 is moved between the retracted position (see FIG. 22) and the extended position without switching the swinging direction of the rotating crank member 570. In addition to the swinging motion that swings between, the rotating arm member 5550 has a small width in the vicinity of the overhang position (the mode in which the lower end of the front plate member 546 is moved between the position U1 and the position U2). A swinging motion that is swung can be formed.

  Thus, the swing arm member 5550 can generate a swinging motion that is difficult to form by switching the driving direction of the driving device 560. That is, it is possible to form the swing arm member 5550 with a small swinging motion near the extended position by repeatedly switching the driving direction of the driving device 560 at short intervals. However, in this case, the width of the swinging operation depends on the switching speed of the driving direction of the driving device 560. Further, even if the driving direction of the driving device 560 is switched while the speed of the swinging operation of the rotating arm member 5550 is high, the inertia of the driving device 560 and the rotating arm member 5550 is large and the driving direction cannot be switched instantaneously. There is a possibility that the time required for switching the driving direction becomes longer.

  On the other hand, in the swinging operation in the vicinity of the extended position of the rotating arm member 5550 in this embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570, so that the time required for switching the driving direction is unnecessary. can do.

  Further, the operation speed of the operation of swinging the rotating arm member 5550 in the clockwise direction (upward swinging operation) depends on the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a, and the rotating arm member 5550 is bent in the direction of the front view. The operation speed of the clockwise swing operation (downward swing operation) depends on the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, by increasing the urging force of the torsion spring 517a and increasing the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570, the swinging speed of the rotating arm member 5550 near the protruding position can be increased.

  Accordingly, it is possible to achieve both speeding up of the swinging operation in the vicinity of the protruding position of the rotating arm member 5550 and shortening of the switching time of the swinging direction.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 69 to FIG. 71, a combined operation unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the turning arm member 550 of the combined operation unit 500 is integrally formed has been described. However, the turning arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment is formed by connecting two members. . By relatively swinging the two members, the posture of the arc-shaped hole 554 formed at the other end is changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  69 (a) and 69 (c) are partial front views of the turning arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 69 (b) shows the turning in the direction of the arrow LXIXb in FIG. 69 (a). It is a partial top view of the arm member 6550. 69A shows a state where a first posture is formed in which the tip of the tip swinging member 6556 is directed upward, and in FIG. 69B, the tip of the tip swinging member 6556 is downward. The state in which the oriented second posture is formed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the rotating arm member 6550 is connected to a main body portion 6551 pivotally supported by the third shaft portion 517 (see FIG. 71) and the other end portion of the main body portion 6551. It mainly includes a tip swing member 6556 and a switching device 6590 that is fixed to the upper surface of the other end of the main body portion 6551 and switches the posture of the tip swing member 6556. An arcuate hole 6554 is formed in the tip swinging member 6556.

  The main body portion 6551 is provided with a shaft support hole 6551a which is formed in the other end portion in the front-rear direction and serves as a swing center of the tip swing member 6556.

  The tip swinging member 6556 is formed in such a manner that the end portion on the side connected to the main body portion 6551 sandwiches the main body portion 6551 in the front and rear, and a shaft support hole 6556a drilled as the swing center of the tip swinging member 6556. The shaft support hole 6556a and a shaft support bar 6556b which is a bar inserted into the shaft support hole 6551a of the tip swinging member 6556, and an extension extending from the shaft support hole 6556a to the opposite side of the arcuate hole 6554. And a sliding shaft 6556c that protrudes in the front-rear direction from the end of the portion and is connected to the guide long hole 6591d of the switching device 6590.

  The arc-shaped hole 6554 includes a return portion 6554a that protrudes from the upper inner surface. The return portion 6554a is a portion that is slid by the projection 541b of the expansion / contraction effect member 6540, and when sliding from the tip end side of the arc-shaped hole 6554, resistance is suppressed, but sliding is performed in the opposite direction. When it is moved, it is a left-right asymmetrical protrusion whose sliding resistance is increased.

  70 (a) and 70 (b) are front perspective views of the switching device 6590. FIG. FIG. 70A illustrates a pushed-up state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed up from the switch member 6592, and FIG. 70B illustrates a pushed-down state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed down with respect to the switch member 6592. Is illustrated. Further, the pushed-up state corresponds to the state of FIG. 69 (c), and the pushed-down state corresponds to the state of FIG. 69 (a).

  The C-shaped member 6591 has an elongated plate-like main body portion 6591a in which a hole having an inner diameter through which the movable cylindrical portion 6592a can be inserted is formed in the center, and the same inner diameter as the inner diameter of the hole formed in the main body portion 6591a. A cylindrical guide portion 6591b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape and has a groove formed on the inner peripheral surface thereof, and extends downward from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6591a and is opposed to the front and rear direction of the main body portion 6551. A pair of arm portions 6591c, and a guide long hole 6591d that is a long hole that is drilled on the tip side of the arm portion 6591c and guides the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip swinging member 6556.

  The groove process formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guide part 6591b is a groove process for forming a knock mechanism in relation to the moving column part 6592a of the switch member 6592. The C-shaped member 6591 is switched between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state each time the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed in the direction in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed against the switch member 6592. In addition, illustration of other members, such as a spring member which forms urging | biasing force required in order to form a knock mechanism, is abbreviate | omitted, and in this embodiment, the cylindrical guide part 6591b is the pushing part 6541a (FIG. 71).

  The switch member 6592 includes a moving column portion 6592a that is inserted into the cylindrical guide portion 6591a and has a projection that is movable from the groove on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guide portion 6591a, and the movable column portion 6592a is a shaft. And a fixed plate portion 6592b that is rotatably connected and fixed to the upper surface of the main body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550.

  Here, in the knock mechanism, the relative positions in the axial direction are switched while the cylindrical member and the columnar member guided on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical member are relatively rotated. That is, when the cylindrical member and the columnar member do not rotate relative to each other, it is difficult to switch the relative position in the axial direction.

  On the other hand, the moving columnar portion 6592a of the switch member 6592 is connected to the fixed plate portion 6592b so as to be rotatable about the shaft. Therefore, when the C-shaped member 6591 is moved in the direction approaching the switch member 6592 (when pushed downward in FIG. 70 (a)), the movable column portion 6592a can rotate relative to the cylindrical guide portion 6591b. And the knock mechanism functions.

  Therefore, it is possible to switch between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state without relatively rotating the fixed plate portion 6592b fixed to the main body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550 and the C-shaped member 6591. Accordingly, the state of the switching device 6590 can be switched between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state while the state where the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip swinging member 6556 is inserted into the guide elongated hole 6591d of the C-shaped member 6591 is maintained. it can.

  71 (a) and 71 (b) are front views of the combined operation unit 6500. FIG. 71A shows a state in which the rotating arm member 6550 is disposed at the extended position and the switching device 6590 is pushed up. In FIG. K4, the rotating arm member 6550 is disposed at the extended position and switched. The device 6590 is shown in a depressed state. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is disposed at a position that is swung to the left end of the swingable range.

  71 (a) and 71 (b), the front view clock of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is obtained by switching the state of the switching device 6590 in a state where the rotating arm member 6550 is disposed at the extended position. The maximum swing angle can be switched.

  That is, when the switching device 6590 forms a pushed-up state (see FIG. 71A), the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 is brought into contact with the upper inner surface of the arcuate hole 6554, and The swing angle is limited.

  At this position, the inner surface of the arcuate hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a function as a stopper, and even when the swinging speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is high, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is arranged in the arrangement shown in FIG. It is possible to stop suddenly (the movement locus RI of the protrusion 541b is in contact with the return portion 6554a).

  On the other hand, when the switching device 6590 forms a pushed-down state (see FIG. 71 (b)), the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 does not collide with the arc-shaped hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a (the protrusion 541b). The movement locus RI is not in contact with the return portion 6554a). Therefore, the projection 541b of the expansion / contraction effect production device 6540 is moved along the arc-shaped hole 6554, and the projection 541b is discharged to the outside from the tip portion 554a of the arc-shaped hole 6554.

  Therefore, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is swung clockwise when viewed from the front until the rotating plate 520 comes into contact with the second stopper portion 518b (see FIG. 71 (b)). At this position, the second stopper portion 518b functions as a stopper, and the expansion / contraction effect device 540 can be stopped suddenly even when the swing effect of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is high.

  Thereby, a plurality of swing angles (two types in the present embodiment) can be formed when the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is swung clockwise in front view and the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is suddenly stopped. The variation of can be increased. The state of the switching device 6590 is switched by the telescopic effect member 6540 being swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that the cylindrical guide portion 6591b of the switching device 6590 is moved from the upper right portion when viewed from the front of the main body member 6541a to the right. It is generated by being pushed by the pushing portion 6541a extending in the direction. Therefore, since the second drive device 560 that causes the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 to swing is also used as a drive device that swings the tip swing member 6556, the number of drive devices disposed can be reduced.

  71 (a) and 71 (b), the swing range of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be changed by slightly swinging the tip swing member 6556. In this case, since the swing angle is small, the change can be made difficult for the player to notice.

  Here, when the turning arm member 6550 is visible to the player (see FIG. 71), if the swing angle of the telescopic effect device 6540 can be grasped from the change in the state of the turning arm member 6550, The feeling of expectation for the operation of the expansion / contraction production device 6540 is reduced, and the degree of attention of the expansion / contraction production device 6540 is reduced.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the angle at which the tip swing member 6556 is swung to change the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is small, and it may be difficult for the player to notice the change. it can. Thereby, the expectation to the operation | movement of the expansion / contraction production apparatus 6540 can be raised, and the attention degree of the expansion / contraction production apparatus 6540 can be improved.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a tilting operation unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the long hole-shaped sliding hole 643 is formed at the end of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is supported in the sliding hole 643 so as to be guided is described. In the tilting operation unit 7600 in the embodiment, a shaft support hole 7643 is formed at the end of the transmission member 7600, and the effect member 620 is supported by the shaft support hole 7643. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  72 (a) and 72 (b) are front views of the tilting operation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment. 72A illustrates an inverted state in which the shaft support hole 7743 of the transmission member 7640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642. FIG. 72B illustrates an inverted state from FIG. 72B. A state where the transmission member 7640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined angle is illustrated. 72 (a) and 72 (b), the outer shape of the effect member 620 is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding, and the transmission member 7640 and the base member 7610 on the back side thereof are visible. In addition, the torsion spring 650 and the shaft support protrusion 612 are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 72A, the base member 7610 includes a sliding hole 7613 formed in the front-rear direction, vertically below the second shaft support hole 614 of the main body 611. The sliding hole 7613 is a long hole through which the swinging shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 is inserted, and the longitudinal direction of the long hole is formed along the vertical direction. The swing shaft portion 626 is supported by the slide hole 7613 so as to be slidable.

  The transmission member 7640 is provided with a shaft support hole 7643 at the end opposite to the end where the cylindrical portion 642 of the main body portion 641 is formed. The shaft support hole 7643 is a portion that pivotally supports the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620, and is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sliding shaft portion 621a.

  The swinging motion of the effect member 620 occurs when the transmission member 7640 swings around the second shaft support hole 614 due to the rotation of the drive motor 631 of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 51).

  In the present embodiment, since the sliding shaft portion 621a is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 7643, when the transmission member 7640 swings, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 follows the swing locus of the transmission member 7640. (The sliding shaft portion 621a does not move in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641). On the other hand, since the swing shaft portion 626 is inserted through the slide hole 7613, when the transmission member 7640 swings, the swing shaft portion 626 slides relative to the base member 7610.

  Here, the difference between the swing angle of the transmission member 7640 and the swing angle of the effect member 620 will be described. As shown in FIG. 72B, when the transmission member 7640 swings from the inverted state by the transmission swing angle φ71, the effect member 620 swings by the effect swing angle φ72 (effect swing angle φ72 <transmission swing). Moving angle φ71). Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is swung in the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631, the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 7640. Thereby, the precision of the adjustment of the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the transmission member 7640 swings from the inverted state by the transmission swing angle φ71 can be made smaller than in the case of the first embodiment. explain.

  A connecting line J1 illustrated in FIG. 72B is a line drawn from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swinging shaft portion 626. The virtual connecting line J2 has the same length as the connecting line J1, and the swinging shaft part 626 is disposed above the sliding hole 7613 from a line drawn through the cylindrical part 642 in the longitudinal direction of the main body part 641. This is a line drawn to the center of the swing shaft portion 626 of FIG. 72 (a). The virtual angle φ73 that is the swing angle of the virtual connecting line J2 is the same as that of the first embodiment when the first shaft support hole 613 of the first embodiment is formed above the sliding hole 7613. This corresponds to the swing angle of the effect member 620 that swings as the transmission member 640 swings by the transmission swing angle φ71.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the effect swing angle φ72 is smaller than the virtual angle φ73, and according to the tilting operation unit 7600 of the seventh embodiment, the effect when the transmission member 7640 is swung by a predetermined angle. The swing angle of the member 620 can be made smaller than in the case of the first embodiment. Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is swung by the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 51), the swing amount of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than that, and the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be adjusted. Accuracy can be improved.

<First control example>
Next, control examples in the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 134. In the first control example, a control process (a process related to game control such as display effects) executed by the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be described. In this control example, control is performed so that the display image used when the power is turned on is corrected and used during normal performance. As a result, a common display image can be used at the time of turning on the power and at the time of normal performance, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 (see FIG. 79) in the display control device 114 can be saved.

  In this control example, in the effect in which a specific accessory (the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9)) is movable, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. It is controlled to correct the contents of the effect to be performed. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 is difficult to visually recognize in the effect that the specific accessory is movable, for example, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the sub display device 690. By doing so, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the display content is easily visible to the player.

  In this control example, inertial force is used to open the door member 470 associated with the vertical motion unit (falling object) 400. Specifically, as will be described later, an opening / closing drive that keeps the door member 470 closed in an effect in which the open state of the door member 470 is formed after the door member 470 associated with the vertical movement unit 400 moves. Control is performed so that the motor 466 is not excited (energization stop control). Then, when the door member 470 attached to the vertical movement unit (falling object) 400 is moved in the dropping direction, the door member 470 is opened by the inertial force generated in the door member 470. Thus, the door member 470 can be opened without driving the opening / closing drive motor 466, so that power consumption can be reduced.

  In this control example, a notice effect indicating the expectation that the variation display is a big hit in the variation display is displayed. This notice effect includes an effect including a display mode (countdown) of the same kind as the specific time effect suggesting the gaming state described above. Specifically, there is a countdown notice effect that is an effect in which an image (such as a girl's image) indicating the degree of expectation that is a big hit is displayed after the countdown character (“3, 2, 1,...”) Is displayed. include. A specific time effect (countdown effect) that suggests a gaming state, which is an effect including such a similar display mode (countdown), and a countdown notice effect that is one effect of a predictive effect that suggests a degree of expectation that will be a big hit If executed repeatedly, the player may be confused.

  Therefore, in this control example, when a countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) as a notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit, the same kind of display is displayed until the variable display in which the countdown notice effect is executed ends. Restriction (avoidance) is performed so that a specific time effect (countdown effect) that is an effect including a mode (countdown) is not executed. Thus, when the countdown notice effect is executed in the time effect period, the specific time effect (countdown effect) including the same display mode (countdown effect) as the countdown notice effect is not executed (displayed). Execution (display) can be restricted (avoided). As a result, in the time effect period, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is confused because the effect including the same type of display mode (countdown) is performed repeatedly.

  In this control example, a pitch effect that is displayed based on the winning ball entering the winning opening is displayed in order in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display area. Thereby, even when the interval between the game balls entering the winning opening is short, the period during which the ball effect is displayed can be lengthened, and the player can easily see the ball effect. be able to.

  The present control example is not limited to the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment, and may be executed by any of the pachinko machines 10 of the above-described embodiments, or a combination of the above-described embodiments. It may be executed by the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Control Example>
First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 73, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 102). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b each composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is synchronized with the timing of entering the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. Are stored respectively. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a sphere is normally used. The value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 102).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 75A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the random number counter C1 of the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). It is divided into two types: for a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the first per-random number table 202a (see FIG. 75 (a)) includes a first per-random number table for low probability and a first per-random number table for high probability, and is included in each table. The number of random numbers that are big hits is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first random number table 202a for the special symbol when the probability is low and the first random number table 202a for the special symbol when the probability is high are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, If the random number is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per-random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0” is the first per-random number table 202a for the low probability time. (See FIG. 75 (a)). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/400”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a type of special symbol loss, a special symbol winning opening (large opening) 65a that is not a big winning jackpot is provided. When this small hit is made, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 0.2 seconds elapses or until ten balls are won), and then closed and opened twice. Repeated. That is, the same opening / closing operation is performed as in the case of big hit C (2R probability change time short no big hit). Two random numbers “10, 11” are defined in the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 75A) as random numbers (decision values) that are small hits when the special symbol has a low probability. Among the total number of random number values of 400, the total number of random number values that are small hits is 2, so the probability that the first special symbol will be a small hit is “2/400”.

  Note that since the small hit is a kind of loss, the gaming state is not changed before and after the small hit. For example, if a small hit is made during the probability change state of a special symbol, the probability change state of the special symbol continues even after the end of the small hit, and the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) ), The normal state continues even after the end of the small hit. As described above, this small win is the same as the case where the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is a short and big hit at the time of 2R probability change, so it is a small hit in the normal state, and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed. It can be expected that the player who has visually recognized the action has won 2R probability change time short and big hit. Therefore, it is possible to expect a transition to a probable change state of a special symbol that is more advantageous than the normal state every time a small hit is made in the normal state, so that the game in the normal state is prevented from becoming monotonous ( Suppression). Further, even if the special symbol is not a big hit, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is executed with a part of the off (small hit), thereby increasing the chance for the player to win the prize ball. be able to. Therefore, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the player's ball is excessively reduced in a normal state or the like and excessively disadvantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “0-9” are the first random number table 202a (FIG. 75 (a) for high probability. ))). Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/40”. Further, only “10” is defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 75A) as a random number value (determination value) that is a small hit. Among the total number of random number values of 400, the total number of random number values that are small hits is 1, so the probability of hitting a small hit is “1/400”.

  Note that the probability of winning a small hit when the special symbol has a high probability is lower than that when the special symbol has a low probability. It is a big hit with a long opening period of the specific winning opening 65a (16R jackpot that is repeated 16 times until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won) to win a lot of prize balls This is because it is annoying even if it is a small hit to play a game in anticipation. In other words, in the normal state, it is expected that the 2R probability change time may have been short and big in the normal state (it may shift to an advantageous probability change state after the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a). However, in a state that is already in a probable change state, whether it is a small hit or a 2R probable change time short and big hit, almost no prize ball can be obtained, the current state (probability change state) is merely maintained. It is. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is configured so that the probability of winning a small hit in the high probability state of the special symbol is low. Thereby, the interest with respect to a player's game in the high probability state of a special symbol can be improved more.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value in the ROM 202 are provided. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 75B). Specifically, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 39”, the big hit A (16R probability variation big hit) is selected, and when it is “40 to 79”, the big hit B (16R Jackpot C) is selected, and in the case of “80 to 99”, jackpot C (short-to-short jackpot with 2R probability change) is selected.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot type set in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 75B) is three jackpots, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. The above jackpot type may be selected, or two or less types, for example, only one type of jackpot type may be selected. Further, the types and ratios of jackpot types selected for the jackpot of the special symbol 1 and the jackpot of the special symbol 2 may be set differently.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach has occurred, the final stop symbol stops other than the reach symbol. ”(For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and“ stop completely ”(for example, in the range of 0 to 89) that does not generate reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, the RAM 203 It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is 0 to 79 and the probability range is low, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 102) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 76) storing random number values for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Yes.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the variation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 76 (b)) and an out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 76 (c)). And at least a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 76D) is set. Although not shown in the drawing, a variation pattern table in the short-time gaming state is set in addition to this.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot variation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, “0-50” for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), “51-179” for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), various special reach (90 seconds). ) Is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 wins the variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set. It selects from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for use.

  FIG. 76C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place is set. If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set.

  Here, when the variation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  For outreach, “0 to 149” for various types of normal reach (30 seconds) and “150 to 197” for various types of superreach (60 seconds). For various types (90 seconds), “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of play in the normal gaming state, and obtains it from the out (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. Based on the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d2.

  FIG. 76D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be removed when the game state is a probability variation game state. This deviation (probable variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different from the aforementioned variation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” based on the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. , The outreach reach is determined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is prolonged when the probability-changing game state in which a big hit is easily made, and the player feels bored.

  In this control example, the variation pattern table 202d is provided with a variation pattern selection table for time reduction (not shown). The short time variation pattern selection table is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol when the gaming state is the short time gaming state. The variation pattern selection table for time reduction is defined so that a variation pattern of 0.6 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. This variation pattern of 0.6 seconds is composed of a period of 0.125 seconds in which symbols and the like are variably displayed and a period of 0.475 seconds in which the symbols and the like are stopped and displayed. Thus, in the short-time gaming state, one variation display is completed in a short time (0.6 seconds), so that the game turnover rate (efficiency) in the short-time gaming state can be improved. Further, by setting the period during which the symbols are variably displayed to be a very short period (0.125 seconds), it is possible to give the player an impression that the game rotation rate (efficiency) is very good.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. , Stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol is set by a second random number table (see FIG. 75 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is When the value matches the random number value set in the second hit random number table (see FIG. 75C), it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (c), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that a special symbol jackpot is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. In FIG. 5, the normal symbol variation display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second prize opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only once for “0.2 seconds × 1” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. The normal symbol variation display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the normal symbol having a low probability, and the release period of the second prize opening 640 is further reduced. However, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” becomes very long, so that the ball can easily enter the first winning opening 64. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened “only once per second × 2” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 102).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least the first per-random number table 202a, the first per-type selection table 202b, the second per-random number table 205c, and the variation pattern table 202d. Since the contents of each table provided in the ROM 202 are as described above with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol held ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, hour and minute counter 203h, jackpot flag 203i, counter buffer 203y, and other memory area 203z. doing.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1), and includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas stores values of a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball has won (start winning) at the first winning opening 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the big special lottery drawing of the original special symbol is performed. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the special symbol 1 or The special symbol 2 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From this, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is predicted. The prediction (prefetching) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or probability variation gaming state) at the time when the variation corresponding to the start winning is started. . Thereby, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning can be accurately predicted.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second winning port 640 (special symbol 2), and the first winning port 64 (special symbol 1) with respect to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a described above. ) Is changed to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2), and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding number 1). Among the vacant areas of (4 areas), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. As in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in other reserved areas are stored. Is shifted to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is a variable symbol display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (start winning) at the first winning opening 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S504 in FIG. 96). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 93).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 93 and S505 in FIG. 96). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual changed display held ball held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next-holding ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the retained ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls in the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d only in that the first winning opening (special symbol 1) is changed to the second winning port 640 (special symbol 2). Since the other points are the same, the detailed description is omitted. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 by the processing of S510 of FIG. 96, and is subtracted by 1 each time a special symbol variation display is executed (see S205 of FIG. 93). Further, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S206 in FIG. 93, S511 in FIG. 96). reference).

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the number of held balls (standby) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67. This is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The normal symbol retained ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the number of retained balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S804 in FIG. 99). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 98).

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 99). On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S803 in FIG. 99: No).

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol). If the value of the probability variation flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol state. If the value of the probability variation flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). The initial value of the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF. In the jackpot control process, the start timing of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) or the jackpot C (2R probability variation with time short and large jackpot) (the jackpot game of the jackpot game) When it is determined that it is (end timing), it is set to ON (see S1214 in FIG. 103). Then, in the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 95) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 94), it is referred to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probable variation state (S403 in FIG. 95, FIG. 94, see S303), and is set to off when the next jackpot game is started (see S1202 in FIG. 103).

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 95, S213) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 94, S208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 95, S213) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 94, S208), the value of the probability variation flag 203g is referred to. On the other hand, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the random number table 202a per one. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation flag 203g is OFF, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability. Is called.

  The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time-short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time-short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state. At this time, the short / medium counter 203h is set to 100 when the big hit B (short hit big at 16R) is executed at the start timing of the ending effect (ie, the end timing of the big hit game) by the big hit control process (FIG. 103). (See S1215). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the time is shortened in the normal symbol variation process (see S708 in FIG. 98), and is subtracted by 1 every time the variation time elapses in the special symbol variation process. (See S222 in FIG. 93). In addition, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is larger than 0 and the probability variation flag 203g described above is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the certain symbol certain variation state and the time reduction state.

  The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203i is on, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state is executed by the jackpot control process (S1206 in FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  The small hit flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not a small hit has occurred. When the small win flag 203j is turned on, a small hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened by the big hit control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is executed.

  The short time flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a special symbol (a high probability state of a normal symbol). If the value of the hour / short flag 203k is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol time-short state, and if the value of the hour / short flag 203k is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (normal symbol Low probability state). This time-short flag 203k has an initial value set to OFF, and when it is determined in the jackpot control process that it is the start timing of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) (the jackpot game end timing). Is set to ON (see S1214 in FIG. 103). Then, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 98), it is referred to (see S708, S715, and S719 in FIG. 98) to determine whether or not the gaming state is a short-time state, and the next jackpot game is started. In this case (see S1202 in FIG. 103).

  As described above, in the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), both the probability variation flag 203g and the hour / short flag 203k are set to ON, and the hour / short game is given together with the probability variation game. On the other hand, in the big hit C (2R probability change time short and no big hit), although the probability change flag 203g is set on, the time reduction flag 203k remains off and only the probability change game is given. The reason why the hour / short flag 203k is provided separately from the hour / short counter 203h is that the hour / short state of the normal symbol given by the big hit A (16R probability variation big hit) continues at least until the next big hit. is there. In other words, the time-shortening period varies depending on the timing of the big hit, so the time-shortening period is indefinite and the number of times cannot be set for the time-shortening counter 203h. Therefore, the fixed time (100 times) time-short state set after the end of jackpot B is counted by the time-shortage counter 203h, while the time-short state set after the end of jackpot A is set by the time-short flag 203g. It is configured. Thereby, it is possible to more accurately determine the short time state of the normal symbol.

  Here, in the probability variation game (the probability variation state of the special symbol), the probability that a big win is set by the lottery of the special symbol that is executed based on the entry to the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is set to a high probability. It is difficult to determine whether the current game is a normal game or a probable game unless the player suggests that the game is a probabilistic game by changing the production mode. . On the other hand, in the short-time game, since the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 are changed, it is easy to determine whether it is a normal game or a short-time game. .

  Therefore, when a time-short game is given together with a probability change game based on the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), the player can easily recognize that the game is a probability variation game. When only a probability variation game is awarded based on the jackpot), it is difficult to recognize that the game is a probability variation game (so-called latent probability variation state). Thereby, it is necessary for the player to guess whether the game state is a normal game or a probability-changing game, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, since the same winning opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a as in the case of the big win C is provided, the specific winning opening 65a is opened / closed in two rounds. Is not necessarily a big hit C. Therefore, it is possible to expect a big hit C every time two rounds of opening / closing operations are performed, so that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data. An area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the MPU 201 A stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the CPU, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Have.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 102), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 100) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a ballistic effect selection table 222b.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is already well known and will be described briefly. However, the sound lamp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and shows a rough variation indicated by the variation pattern command. More detailed variation content is determined from the variation pattern selection table 222a from the content (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode is determined from among a plurality of types by lottery.

  The entry effect selection table 222b is a table that defines the contents of the effect of the entry effect that is executed based on the game ball entering the second winning port 640 during the short-time game. Here, the entry effect is an effect that is executed in a manner corresponding to the number of fluctuations until the big hit, in order to suggest a degree of expectation that will be a big hit. More specifically, each time a winning information command is received from the main control device 110 during a short-time game, the stored contents of the winning information storage area 223a updated based on the winning information command are used to win a big hit in the reserved ball. Whether there is a corresponding holding ball and if there is a holding ball corresponding to the jackpot, the number of fluctuations until the big hit is determined, and the performance is executed in a manner according to the number of fluctuations until the big hit Is done.

  Also, one entry effect is executed in one display area of the display area in the third symbol display device 81 divided into four. Once the entry effect is started, the display contents of the previous entry effect are displayed. Can be displayed in different display areas corresponding to the new entry. That is, every time a ball enters the second entrance 640, the entry effects are displayed in order in the four display areas provided on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a maximum of four types Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the same time.

  The entry effect selection table 222b is defined in association with the number of fluctuations until the effect content of the entry effect is a big hit. This pitch effect selection table 222b is referred to when the game ball is determined to have entered the second winning opening 640 during the short-time game in the pitch effect setting process (see FIG. 115) described later. It is used to select the production contents of the production (see S2403 in FIG. 115).

  There are six types of entrance effects, from level 0 entrance effects to level 5 entrance effects (see FIG. 78), and as the number of fluctuations until the big hit is reduced, A high-level entry effect is selected. Thereby, the player can predict the number of times until the big hit (expected degree of big hit) by discriminating the level of the pitch effect, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  The display image of the entry effect in this control example is a display of a comment portion that displays a comment (for example, “Hurry”, “Chance?”, Etc.) according to the level, and a predetermined pattern (for example, “star”). It is composed of a level suggesting section for suggesting the level of the current entry effect depending on the number, and the display mode of each part (comment part and level suggesting part) is set according to the level of the entry effect. As comments to be displayed in the comment section, a plurality of comments corresponding to the level of the entrance effect are defined and selected according to the value of the effect counter 223i. On the other hand, in the level suggestion portion, the number of “star signs” symbols corresponding to the level of the pitching effect (that is, the number of times of change until the big hit) is displayed. For example, in the level 0 notice effect, there are zero “stars” (see 81a in FIG. 89 (a)), and in the level 1 notice effect, one “star” (see 81b in FIG. 89 (b)), In the level 2 notice effect, two “stars” are displayed (see 81c in FIG. 89 (b)). This makes it possible for the player to easily determine the level of the entering ball effect being executed. On the other hand, since the comment selected according to the value of the effect counter 223i is displayed in the comment part, the variation of the display mode in the entrance effect can be increased, and the player's interest can be improved. Note that the level suggesting part may not be provided, and the number of changes until the big hit may be suggested only by the comment part. Thereby, since the level of the entrance effect can be estimated only from the display of the comment part, attention can be paid to the display content of the entrance effect.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 78, the detailed content of the entrance effect selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 78 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the entry effect selection table 222b. As described above, in the pitch effect selection table 222b, the effect details of the pitch effect for suggesting the number of times of change until the big hit is determined in association with the number of times of change until the big hit.

  Specifically, when the number of changes until the big hit based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is larger than 4, that is, the lottery result corresponding to the big jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. If not, it is defined that a level 0 entry effect is selected. In addition, when the number of fluctuations to the big hit based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is 4, that is, the big lottery result of the second special symbol is stored in the fourth hold in the winning information storage area 223a. In this case, it is defined that a level 1 entry effect is selected.

  Similarly, if the number of changes to the big hit based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is 3, the level 2 entrance effect is 1 and the level 3 entrance effect is 1 time. If it is, it is prescribed that the level 4 entrance effect is selected, and if it is 0 times (if the change is a big hit), the level 5 entrance effect is selected. In this way, by configuring so as to execute different levels of ball entry effects according to the number of fluctuations until the big hit, it is possible to make the player predict the number of fluctuations until the big hit. Therefore, since the game can be performed while paying more attention to the display effect, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. FIG. 77 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. In the RAM 223, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a display area counter 223f, an effect At least a time storage area 223g, an effect mode storage area 233h, an avoidance flag 233i, an effect counter 223j, a power-off flag 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (the first area to the fourth area for the special symbol 1 and the first area to the fourth area for the special symbol 2). In each of these areas, winning information is stored. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information includes an area number among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area) of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. It is stored in order from the (first to fourth) small areas. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), And a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effect of the special symbol 1 held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of held balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or the main control device 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and holds it. When the number of balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1607 in FIG. 107). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol 1 held ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In addition, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, has the maximum number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect of the special symbol 2 held in the main controller 110 at the maximum. It is a counter that counts up to once. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a special symbol that is different from the reserved ball number symbol display of the special symbol 1 on the third symbol display device 81 by adding the reserved ball number by entering the second winning opening 640. The only difference is that it is used to display the reserved ball number symbol of symbol 2 and the others are the same.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110. , Its value is changed. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 203b of the main controller 110. Can be changed. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on in the variation pattern reception process executed when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1701 in FIG. 108), and the variation display flag in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is turned off when the setting is made (see S1802 in FIG. 109). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1604 in FIG. 107), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1807 in FIG. 109). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The display area counter 223f is used to specify a display area for displaying the above-described entrance effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into four (first area 81a, second area 81b, third area 81c, and fourth area 81d), and for each display area It is comprised so that a separate entrance effect can be displayed. The display area counter 223f determines a display area for displaying the current entry effect from these four display areas (the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d, see FIG. 89 or FIG. 90). Used for. This display area counter 223f is initialized to 1 when the sound lamp control device 113 is started up, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 1 to 4 in the entry effect setting process (see FIG. 115) described later.

  Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. When a new entry effect is selected, the new entry effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the value of the display area counter 223f. The display area is controlled to be displayed. Specifically, when the value of the display area counter 223f is 1, the display of the entrance effect is set in the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. When the value is 2, it is set in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81, and when the value is 3, it is set in the first area 81c of the third symbol display device 81. In some cases, control is performed so as to be set in the first area 81 a of the third symbol display device 81. The value of the display area counter 223f is configured so that the value is updated by 1 in ascending order and reaches the maximum value of 4 and then returns to 1 when it is further updated. Different display areas (first area 81a, second area 81b, third area 81c, and fourth area 81d) can be displayed simultaneously (see FIGS. 89 and 90). Since a plurality of different entrance effects can be displayed simultaneously, the display effects can be diversified.

  The effect time storage area 223g is an area for storing the start time of the time effect described above. Based on the start time of the time effect stored in the effect time storage area 223g and the current time acquired from the RTC 292, a time effect that is periodically executed (5 minutes every hour) and the time effect A specific time effect that is executed during the specific time being executed (from the start of each time effect until the elapse of 5 minutes every 1 minute has elapsed) is executed (see FIG. 91). This effect time storage area 223g is set in the time setting process (see FIG. 105) of the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Information indicating the start time of the time effect and the specific time effect is set relatively with reference to the power-on time. Specifically, when the power of the sound lamp control device 113 is turned on at 9:00, first, the first time effect is 9:55, 55 minutes after the power-on time (9:00). It is set as information indicating the start time of. Then, a time every hour (10:55, 11:55...) From the start time of the first time effect is set for 24 hours as information indicating the start time of the time effect. Also, from the start time of each time production until the lapse of 5 minutes every minute (9:56, 9:57, 9:58, 9:59, 10:56, 10:57 ... ) Is set as information indicating the start time (start timing) of the specific time effect. Furthermore, since the time effect period is 5 minutes, information indicating the time (10:00, 11:00...) 5 minutes after the start time of the time effect is the normal game period (effect mode A). It is set as information indicating the start time (see FIG. 91).

  In this control example, each time effect (time effect, specific time effect) is set to be executed based on the time when the power is turned on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it set the start time of (time production, specific time production). For example, 00 minutes per hour may be set as the start time of the time effect. Thereby, when turning on the power of a plurality of pachinko machines 10, even if the power-on time is deviated, the start time of the time effects is not shifted, and the time effects are executed in synchronization with the plurality of pachinko machines 10. can do.

  The effect mode storage area 223h is an area in which information indicating the current effect period is stored, and an effect corresponding to the effect period is selected and executed (displayed) based on the information in the effect mode storage area 223h. . In this control example, in addition to the time effect period described above, if it is determined that the game will be a big hit after the end of the time effect period as described above (variable display in which the winning prize information held is a big win or a big win) Three effect periods are set, namely, a time effect extension period that shifts to (when the game is being executed) and a normal game period that does not correspond to either the time effect period or the time effect extension period. For the sake of simplification of the following description, the normal game period is described as effect mode A, the time effect period as effect mode B, and the time effect extension period as effect mode C. In the effect mode storage area 223h, when the effect mode A is set as information for identifying these three effect modes, “00H” which is the value indicating the effect mode A is the effect mode storage area 223h. When the production mode B is set, “01H”, which is a value indicating the production mode B, is stored. When the production mode C is set, the value indicating the production mode C is stored. A certain “02H” is stored. Thus, by storing information corresponding to the production period (production mode) in the production mode storage area 223h, it is possible to easily identify which production period is the current production period.

  The avoidance flag 223i determines whether or not a countdown notice effect including a countdown display mode is executed (displayed) as a notice effect (time notice effect) executed (displayed) in the time effect period (effect mode B). It is a flag used to When this avoidance flag 223i is on, it indicates that the countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) as the time notice effect, and when it is off, it indicates that the countdown notice effect is not executed (displayed). When the avoidance flag 223i is on, the specific time effect (countdown effect) that is an effect including the same kind of display mode (countdown) is restricted (avoided). Thereby, when the countdown notice effect is executed as the time notice effect, the execution (display) of the effect can be limited (avoided) so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not executed (displayed). As a result, in the time effect period, it is possible to prevent the effect including the same type of display mode (countdown) from being performed repeatedly, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is confused.

  This avoidance flag 223i is turned on when the countdown notice effect is selected as the notice effect (time notice effect) selected in the effect mode B (time effect period) in the notice selection process (see FIG. 111). It is set (see S2007 in FIG. 111). And when the variable display in which the countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) is finished, it is set to off.

  In addition, without providing such an avoidance flag 223i, it is also possible to select and execute an effect having a different display mode between the normal notice effect and the time notice effect. Specifically, the countdown notice effect is selected in the normal notice effect, but the countdown notice effect may not be selected in the time notice effect. Thereby, it can suppress that the production | presentation including the same kind of display mode (countdown) is performed repeatedly in a time production period.

  The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selection of various effects (variation patterns, notice effects, etc.) and various lotteries in the audio lamp control device 113. Although not shown, the main process ( 106), it is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not an instantaneous power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110 and before the power-off process is executed (see S1518 in FIG. 106). Thereafter, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1308: Yes in FIG. 104) in the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 104), a certain time has elapsed since the power-off flag 223y was set on. This is a case where the voice lamp control device 113 starts up before (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is an instantaneous power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete because only a part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the work area information in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1309 in FIG. 104). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be normally operated.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 107) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S2501 in FIG. 116) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  Furthermore, a correction information table 234a3 is provided in the NAND flash memory 234a (see FIG. 79). In the correction information table 234a3, data (hereinafter referred to as correction) for correcting an image (hereinafter referred to as a power-on image) displayed on the display device (third symbol display device 81, sub display device 690) when the power is turned on. Information) is stored (see FIG. 80B). In this control example, the capacity of the character ROM 234 is reduced by diverting and displaying the power-on image for effects other than when the power is turned on. However, if the power-on image is displayed in the same display mode (position, size) in each effect other than when the power is turned on, the visibility of each effect may be impaired. Therefore, by using the correction information table 234a3, the power-on image is corrected to an appropriate display mode (position, size) in each effect other than when the power is turned on, so that the visibility of each effect is not lost. The time image is used for display.

  The power-on image is composed of three types of images, and the display mode (position and size) can be corrected for each of these various power-on images. Here, three types of images constituting the power-on image (hereinafter referred to as various power-on images) will be described. The power-on image is a main image at power-on, which is an image for notifying a player or the like that initialization processing accompanying power-on is performed, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The power-on variation image that is an image for informing the lottery result and a power-on title image that is an image for enabling the player or the like to easily identify the model of the pachinko machine 10. Has been. These various power-on images are displayed on each display device (the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-display device 690) in a display mode (position and size) predetermined at the time of power-on. This will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The correction information table 234a3 is referred to in the special effect correction process (see FIG. 121) or the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131), and correction information corresponding to the effect currently being executed (displayed) is stored in the correction information storage area 233m. Stored in The correction information stored in the correction information storage area 233m is referred to when the drawing list (see FIG. 87) is generated in the drawing process (see FIG. 134), and is used to set the display mode of various power-on images. Detailed information (display availability, display position (coordinates) or size (enlargement ratio)) is corrected based on the correction information. Thereby, it is possible to correct and display the display modes of various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, and power-on title image).

  Here, the contents of the correction information table 234a3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the correction information table 234a3. This correction information table 234a3 stores correction information corresponding to each effect of various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, and power-on title image), and correction for normal effects. Information, correction information for demonstration effects, correction information for moving an extendable accessory, and correction information for moving a tilted accessory are provided.

  As the correction information for each effect, for each image type of the power-on image, correction information corresponding to display availability (on or off), correction information corresponding to the coordinate correction amount, and correction information corresponding to the enlargement ratio Is prescribed. The correction information corresponding to whether display is possible (on or off) is a value for determining whether or not to display the corresponding image. When the value is on, the corresponding image is set to be displayed. When (corrected) and the value is OFF, the corresponding image is set (corrected) so as not to be displayed. The correction information corresponding to the coordinate correction amount is for correcting the display position (coordinate) of the corresponding image, and the coordinate correction amount is changed from the position (coordinate) where the corresponding image is displayed when the power is turned on. It is set (corrected) to be displayed at the moved position (coordinates) based on the corresponding correction information. Furthermore, the correction information corresponding to the enlargement factor is for correcting the size (enlargement factor) of the corresponding image, and this enlargement is performed in the lower right direction with the upper left corner of the corresponding image as the origin (reference point). Based on the rate, the image is set (corrected) to be enlarged (or reduced in the upper left direction).

  The correction information for normal performance is correction information used when the initialization process at the time of power-on is completed and a normal game is performed in the pachinko machine 10. The demonstration effect correction information is correction information used when the demonstration effect is executed (displayed). Further, the correction information for moving the expansion / contraction accessory is correction information used when an effect (expansion / contraction character scenario) movable by the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is executed (displayed). Further, the correction information for moving the tilting combination is correction information used when an effect (tilting combination scenario) in which the effect member 620 moves in the tilting operation unit 600 is executed (displayed).

  Specifically, in the correction information for normal presentation, the power-on main image and the power-on title image are set to off, and the power-on variation image is set to on. Then, the coordinate correction amount of the power-on variation image is set to (−600, −450), and the enlargement ratio is set to × 1 (same size). As a result, when the normal effect is executed, the main image at power-on and the title image at power-on are corrected so as to be hidden, and the fluctuation image at power-on is displayed at the position (coordinates) displayed at power-on. ) To (−600, −450) so that it is displayed at the same size as the moved position (coordinates). Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, the normal effect is performed on the power-on variation image displayed on the lower right side of the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is displayed in the upper left corner of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 83 (a)).

  Further, in the correction information for the demonstration effect, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are set to off, and the power-on title image is set to on. Then, the correction amount of the coordinates of the title image at power-on is set to (−700, 0), and the enlargement ratio is set to × 2 (2 times). As a result, when the demonstration effect is executed, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are corrected so as to be hidden, and the power-on title image is displayed at the position (coordinates) displayed when the power is turned on. ) To (−700, 0) moved position (coordinates) so that it is displayed in double size. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 to FIG. 83, a demonstration effect is performed on the power-on title image displayed in the center of the sub display device 690 when the power is turned on. Is enlarged and displayed at the center of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 83B).

  Here, the demonstration effect is when the next variation effect associated with entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. This is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in the correction information for moving the extendable accessory, the power-on main image and the power-on title image are set to off, and the power-on variation image is set to on. The coordinate correction amount of the power-on variation image is set to (200, -450), and the enlargement ratio is set to x1 (same size). As a result, when an effect (expandable character scenario) in which the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is executed is corrected so that the power-on main image and the power-on title image are not displayed. Then, the fluctuation image at power-on is corrected so as to be displayed at the same size as the position (coordinates) moved by (200, -450) from the position (coordinates) displayed at the time of power-on. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, a power-on variation image displayed in the upper left corner of the third symbol display device 81 when the normal effect is executed by this correction, When the telescopic combination scenario is executed, it is displayed in the upper left corner of the sub display device 690.

  Further, the correction information for moving the tilting accessory is set to the same information as the correction information for normal performance. As a result, when an effect (tilting role scenario) in which the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is moved is executed, the display modes (positions of various power-on images (positions) are the same as when the normal effect is executed. , Size) is corrected.

  Thus, when an effect other than when the power is turned on is executed, the display mode (position and size) of various power-on images is corrected based on the correction information in the correction information table 234a3 corresponding to the effect. Displayed. As a result, various power-on images can be diverted and displayed at various effects other than when the power is turned on, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, since various power-on images can be corrected and displayed in an appropriate display mode (position, size) for each production, the various power-on images can be used without impairing the visibility of each production. Can be displayed.

  In addition, you may correct | amend so that the position where the image at the time of various power activation is displayed moves according to operation | movement of the accessory moved by each production. Specifically, correction information for various power-on images corresponding to the elapsed time in one effect is defined. For example, when the effect that the fluctuation image at power-on is displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, the effect that the tilting operation unit 600 gradually slides (moves) from the right to the left is executed. Let's say. In this case, the power-on variation image is slide-displayed to the left in accordance with the operation of the tilting operation unit 600, so that the power-on variation image is slid and displayed at a position that does not become the back of the tilting operation unit 600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the fluctuation image at the time of power-on from becoming difficult to visually recognize due to the operation of the tilting operation unit 600. That is, the player can clearly see the power-on variation image. In addition, when the power-on variation image is moved and displayed to the area where the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, the image is moved to the sub display device 690 built in the tilting operation unit 600. The coordinates may be set so as to be displayed. With this configuration, the power-on variation image can be moved and displayed without impairing the visibility of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The object to be moved and displayed is not limited to the power-on variation image, but may be the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol, or the symbol or the like. There may be.

  Further, when various power-on images are moved, they may be moved back and forth between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. In this case, when the image is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, the resolution of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 is different. Adjustment (conversion) may be performed using a scaler (for example, a video scaler). As a result, it is possible to widen the range in which the various images can be moved when the power is turned on.

  Furthermore, correction information may be set so that various power-on images can be moved when the power is turned on. In this case, the correction information used when the power is turned on may be read together with the program in the first program storage area that is read first when the power is turned on. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an origin return operation is performed to move various accessories to the origin position when the power is turned on. Therefore, there are times when it becomes difficult for the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 to be visually recognized because the various accessories move by the return to origin operation. Therefore, by correcting the display position (coordinates) of the various power-on images according to the movable state of the various objects, it is easy to visually recognize the various power-on images even during the origin return operation of the various objects. It can be.

  Next, the image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 87) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 118B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b, a third symbol area 235d, and a power-on title image area 235f are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 receives image data corresponding to the power-on main image, the power-on variation image, and the power-on title image area 235f from the character ROM 234 when the power is turned on. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer to 235a (see FIG. 116).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 81 to FIG. 83, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 and the power-on image displayed in the display area will be described. First, FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between an image drawn by the display control device 114 and the display areas of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example includes a third symbol display device 81 and a sub display device 690, and images displayed on each display device (the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690) are constant. Control for updating every period (for example, 20 milliseconds) is executed by the display control device 114.

  Specifically, the display control device 114 updates (draws) image data of horizontal 1200 pixels (pixels) × vertical 600 pixels (pixels) every predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds). By setting these image data in each display device, the images displayed on each display device (the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690) are updated at regular intervals. Also, the image data corresponding to each pixel (pixel) is composed of three data: data corresponding to R (red), data corresponding to G (green), and data corresponding to B (blue). Yes. Each color data is composed of, for example, 8 bits, and the gradation (level) of each color can be set in increments of 8 bits (that is, 256 levels). That is, any of 256 levels from “00H” to “FFH” can be set as the setting value for each color.

  Each pixel provided in each display device is provided with a region capable of developing red, a region capable of developing green, and a region capable of developing blue, and image data is set. Thus, the gradation (level) of each color can be set. Note that each pixel (pixel) constituting each display device is sufficiently fine, and one pixel (pixel) constituting a region capable of developing red, a region capable of developing green, and blue can be developed. It is difficult to distinguish the region with the naked eye. Thus, the naked eye looks like a synthesized color of these three colors.

  The image data set for each pixel (pixel) will be described with a specific example. For example, if the R data is FFH (255 gradations) and the other color data is 00H (0 gradations), the pixel in which the image data is set is the maximum gradation (maximum level) red color. Is displayed (the pixel looks red with the maximum gradation). If R data and G data are 80H (128 gradations) and B data is 00H (0 gradations), 128/255 gradation red and 128/255 gradation green are used. As a result of the synthesis, the pixels for which the image data is set are displayed with the yellow appearance of the maximum gradation. Furthermore, if R data, G data, and B data are all FFH (255 gradations), the three colors R, G, and B are all set to the maximum gradation (255/255 gradations). As a result of combining these three colors, the pixels for which the data is set are displayed with a white appearance. On the other hand, if all the three colors of data are 00H, all the three colors are not displayed. As a result, the pixel for which the data is set is displayed with a black appearance.

  In this way, the display color of each pixel (pixel) constituting the display screen of each display device can be expressed in 256 steps for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). A clear image can be displayed on the apparatus. In this control example, each pixel is provided with a region capable of developing red, a region capable of developing green, and a region capable of developing blue. However, the colors necessary for image display are comprehensive. You may change in the range which can be expressed. For example, instead of the three colors of red, green, and blue, three colors of yellow, cyan, and magenta may be used. In addition to red, green, and blue, a region capable of developing yellow may be provided in each pixel (pixel), and 8-bit data corresponding to yellow may be added to the image data. By adding a region capable of developing yellow, the color expression can be made more vivid. In particular, since a color that contains a lot of yellow components and is frequently used for display effects or the like (for example, gold) can be expressed in a vivid manner, the interest of the display effects can be further improved.

  As shown in FIG. 81, coordinate data is associated with display data of each pixel constituting the image data. Here, the coordinate data is data for specifying a data setting position (setting pixel) in each display device. In the present embodiment, a range of 0 to 1200 can be designated as the horizontal coordinate, and a range of 0 to 600 can be designated as the vertical coordinate.

  In the horizontally long rectangular area shown in FIG. 81, the coordinates of the upper left corner position are defined as origin coordinates (0, 0), and the coordinates of the lower right corner position are defined as (1200, 600). In addition, image data defined in a rectangular area having four points of coordinates (0, 0), (800, 0), (0, 600), (800, 600) as vertexes is displayed in the third symbol display. This is a region (third symbol display device region) defining an image to be displayed on the device 81. Each coordinate is set so that the arrangement of each pixel (pixel) data in this area matches the position where the image data is actually set in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, image data defined in a rectangular area having four points (800, 0), (1200, 0), (800, 300), and (1200, 300) is transmitted to the sub display device 690. This is a region (sub display device region) that defines an image to be displayed. Further, the remaining rectangular areas having the vertices of (800, 300), (1200, 300), (800, 600), and (1200, 600) are spare areas (unused areas). The image data in this area is not used for display.

  As described above, the display control device 114 in this control example draws the image data to be set for the third symbol display device 81 and the image data to be set for the sub display device 690 as one image data, Whether to display on the third symbol display device 81 or on the sub display device 690 is changed according to the coordinates of the image data. This makes it easy to synchronize the images (effects) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, and the images (effects) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. ) Can be suppressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 may be drawn separately.

  Next, referring to FIG. 82, a power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 by the display control device 114 when the power is turned on will be described. Here, the main image when power is turned on is defined as image data of 450 pixels (pixels) × 200 pixels (pixels) in the horizontal direction, and the fluctuation image when power is turned on is equivalent to 100 pixels (pixels) × 100 pixels (pixels) in length. The title image at the time of power-on is defined as image data for 200 pixels (pixels) × 50 pixels (pixels) vertically. In order to simplify the explanation of the display positions (coordinates) of various power-on images, when the display positions (coordinates) of various power-on images are shown, the upper left corner of the image data of the various power-on images is displayed. The coordinates of the pixel (picture element) are representatively indicated (shown). For example, the main image when the power is turned on in FIG. 82 (a) is in a rectangular area with four points (100, 50), (550, 50), (100, 250), (550, 250) as vertices. The image data displayed on the screen. In this case, the coordinates (100, 50) of the pixel in the upper left corner of the image data of the main image when the power is turned on are representatively shown (shown) as the display position (coordinates) of the main image when the power is turned on. And the display position (coordinates) of the main image at power-on is expressed as (100, 50).

  Immediately after power-on, the display control device 114 first transfers image data corresponding to the power-on title image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on title image area 235f. Next, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b, and then stored in the resident video RAM 235. The remaining image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the display control device 114 first displays the power-on title image using the image data stored in the power-on title image area 235g. The display position (coordinates) of the title image at power-on is (900, 100), and the title image at power-on is displayed at the center of the sub display device 690 (see FIG. 82 (a)).

  Next, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. The display position (coordinates) of the main image at power-on is (100, 50), and the main image at power-on is displayed at the center of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 82 (a)). While these displays are being performed, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  Here, since the display screen resolution of the sub display device 690 is lower than that of the third symbol display device 81, the image data set for displaying the image on the sub display device 690 is the third symbol display device. The data amount is smaller than the image data for displaying an image on 81. Therefore, in the display control device 114, an image (title image at power-on) to be displayed on the sub display device 690 with a small amount of data for displaying an image is first stored in the resident video RAM. It is possible to shorten the time from when the image is input until the image is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the third symbol display device 81. A power-on variation image of the “○” symbol at the lower right position (the coordinates of (600, 450)) and a power-on variation image of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. Are repeatedly displayed alternately during the fluctuation period (see FIGS. 82B and 82C). Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", the image showing it will be displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is "out of special symbol", the image showing it will stop the changing effect It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and images indicating “o” and “x” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the main image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. .

  Furthermore, when this power-on variation image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the game that was being executed before the power failure when the power was cut off and recovered due to a power failure or the like during the execution of the game. Since the fluctuation or fluctuation result can be immediately confirmed by a simple fluctuation effect, the dissatisfaction felt by the player can be reduced.

  A simple character image or the like may be provided as an image displayed when the power is turned on and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, even in the simple variation effect displayed at the time of power-on, the variation of the effect can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the simple character image used here may be a character image used in the sub display device 690 during normal performance. As a result, a character image with a small data capacity displayed on the sub display device 690 can be used in common without providing a new simple character image, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved and resident. The image transfer time to the video RAM 235 can be shortened.

  Further, the images that have been transferred to the resident video RAM 235 may be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. As a result, even in the simple production that is executed from when the power is turned on until the normal game can be started, the variation of the production can be increased sequentially, so that the player's interest is improved. Can do.

  In addition, when transferring an image to the resident video RAM 235, an image compressed so as to have a low resolution by a known image compression technique is transferred, and thereafter, the transferred image is decompressed to the resident video RAM 235. May be. Then, when the compressed image is stored in the resident video RAM, the image may be displayed on the sub display device 690. Thereby, even if the image is compressed to a low resolution, the sub display device 690 with a low resolution can display the image without a sense of incongruity, and the time from when the power is turned on until the image is displayed. Can be shortened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, display screens during normal production and demonstration production will be described. FIG. 83 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of normal performance, and FIG. 83 (b) is a display of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of demonstration performance. It is the schematic diagram which showed the screen typically.

  At the time of normal performance, the display coordinates of the power-on variation image are (−600, −450) and displayed based on a correction information table 234a3 described later. Since the display coordinates of the power-on variation image at the time of power-on are (600, 450), the power-on variation image is displayed at the position (0, 0) during the normal performance (FIG. 83 (a). )reference). This power-on variation image is used as an indication of the variation result of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) during normal performance.

  Further, at the time of demonstration production, the display coordinates of the title image at the time of power-on are (−700, 0) and displayed based on a correction information table 234a3 described later. Since the display position of the title image at power-on at the time of power-on is (900, 100), the title image at power-on is displayed at the position (200, 100) at the time of demonstration production (FIG. 83 (b) )reference).

  Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols, which are numbered from “0” to “9” as the third symbol, are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started changing after the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 has entered the ball. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the production is not started immediately.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a correction information storage area 233m, a special effect correction flag 233n, a background image change flag 233p, and an effect mode flag 233r.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to ending effects and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B Or if it is either of big hit C, the stop symbol which shows each big hit will be finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  Further, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters the ball, the electric symbol 640a is opened as a normal symbol, and the ball becomes the second winning ball. As it becomes easier to enter the mouth 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of possessions or a state in which the possession is not decreased even if a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, is prepared with 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table.

  When the MPU 231 specifies to display any one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (in the sea, on the beach, the background for the preparation period, or the background dedicated to the time effect) according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 The rear image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified with the passage of time.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  The “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 85). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 87) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 86 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 86).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 86, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 87) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 86, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 116) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2505 in FIG. 116). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S4805 in FIG. 132 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2801 in FIG. 118B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2809 in FIG. 118 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 118) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 118 (b) S2810) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 119 to 127) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 128 to 130) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4701 in FIG. 132A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 132B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 57), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 87) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 87), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 118 (b)). ) (See S2803)), the pointer update process (see S4305 in FIG. 130) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (Refer to FIG. 87), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 87, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,... For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 ( Each time (see S2803 in FIG. 118B) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4307 in FIG. 128). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4913 in FIG. 133). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4914 in FIG. 133). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 134).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 118B) is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 134).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The correction information storage area 233m is an area for storing the correction information of the correction information table 234a3 described above. Based on the correction information stored in the correction information storage area 233m, various power-on images (main power-on images). The display mode (position, size) of the image, the power-on variation image, and the power-on title image) is corrected and displayed. The correction information storage area 233m is an initial value for all image types when the sound lamp control device 113 is turned on (display enable / disable, coordinate correction amount is (0, 0), and enlargement ratio is x1 (same size). )) Is set, various power-on images are displayed at the initial position (see FIG. 82) when the power is turned on. Then, the correction information in the correction information table 234a3 is set according to the gaming state (displayed effect). For example, if the normal effect is being executed, the correction information for the normal effect in the correction information table 234a3 is set (see S4604 in FIG. 131).

  The special effect correction flag 233n is correction information (expandable accessory) corresponding to the effect (expandable accessory scenario or tilted accessory scenario) of the extendable effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9). This is a flag for discriminating whether or not the correction information for moving or tilting accessory movement) is set in the correction information storage area 233m. When the special effect correction flag 233n is on, it indicates that the correction information for moving the extendable or moving tilted object is set in the correction information storage area 233m. This indicates that the correction information for moving an object or moving a tilted accessory is not set in the correction information storage area 233m. When the special effect flag 233n is on, correction information for normal effect or demonstration effect is not set in the correction information storage area 233m in the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131) (FIG. 131). S4602: See No). As a result, the telescopic accessory movable set in the correction information storage area 233m is movable even though the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is performing. It is possible to prevent the correction information for moving the object or the tilting accessory from being rewritten to the correction information for the normal effect or the demonstration effect by the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131). As a result, the display modes (positions and sizes) of various power-on images are being executed even though the effect of moving the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is being executed. However, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the problem that the display mode (position, size) corresponds to the normal effect or the demonstration effect, and to prevent (suppress) the player from being confused.

  This special effect correction flag 233n is set to ON in the special effect correction process (see FIG. 121) when the correction information for moving the extendable / decreasing feature is set in the correction information storage area 233m. (See S3205 in FIG. 121). Then, it is set to OFF when the variable display (effect) is stopped (see S4101 in FIG. 126 (b)). That is, the special effect correction flag 233n is set off when the movable effect of the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is stopped. By setting the special effect correction flag 233n to OFF, it is possible to set correction information for normal effect or demonstration effect in the correction information storage area 233m by the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131) (FIG. 131). 131, S4602: Yes). As described above, the correction information corresponding to the effect can be set in the correction information storage area 233m, so that various power-on images are corrected and displayed in display modes (position, size) suitable for each effect. Can do.

  The back image change flag 233p is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The rear image change flag 233p is set to ON when a rear image change command or an effect mode change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S4001 in FIG. 126 (a)). Then, it is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S4909 in FIG. 133), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S4910 in FIG. 133). Thereby, the back image corresponding to the back image change command and the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The effect mode flag 233r is a flag that is set and referred to in order to determine the current effect mode (effect period), and the back image is changed based on the effect mode set in the effect mode flag 233r. The effect mode flag 233r is set based on the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 (see S4002 in FIG. 126 (a)), and will be described later based on the set value of the effect mode flag 233r. In the normal image transfer setting process, rear image data is set (see S4911 in FIG. 133). Thus, the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 can be changed according to the effect mode set by the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88 to FIG. 90, the entering effect that is executed during the short-time game of this control example will be described. This entry effect is an effect that suggests the expectation that the change display during execution (change) will be a big hit based on the game ball entering the second prize opening 640. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a timing chart when the ball entering effect is executed. In the short-time game in this control example, the fluctuation display based on the second special symbol is 0.6 seconds (the period of 0.125 seconds in which the symbols are variably displayed, and the period of 0.475 seconds in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. It ends with. In this case, when the expectation level that is a big hit based on the execution of the fluctuation effect is displayed in one display area, the fluctuation effect is finished in a short time (0.6 seconds) (that is, the expectation level that is a big hit is displayed). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the degree of expectation that is a big hit.

  Therefore, in this control example, the ball entering effect indicating the degree of expectation that is a big hit is displayed in the four areas from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81 in order. While displaying the entrance effect in the area 81a, the next entrance effect can be displayed in the second area 81b. Thereby, the display period of the pitching effect indicating the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit can be lengthened, and it is possible to provide a game machine that makes it easy for the player to recognize the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit, that is, easy to understand.

  In addition, the pitching effect indicating the degree of expectation that is a big hit is that a game ball has entered the second winning slot 640 even when the second winning slot 640 has an upper limit (4 in this control example). Is displayed on the basis (so-called entry effect is also displayed at the time of overflow). As a result, even if the second prize opening 640 is held at the upper limit (4), it is possible to make the player want to continuously enter the game ball into the second prize opening 640. Can improve the interest of the elderly.

  Furthermore, the pitching effect indicating the degree of expectation that is a jackpot is an effect corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot. Specifically, as will be described later, based on the decrease in the number of remaining fluctuations until the big hit, the control is performed so as to achieve a high-expected entry effect (high-level entry effect). As a result, the level of the pitching effect (expected degree of jackpot) is gradually increased, so that the player can be gradually predicted that the jackpot will arrive, and the player's interest can be improved.

  Specifically, this will be described with reference to FIG. First, after the jackpot game is over, if the game state shifts to the short-time game state and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is 4 during the jackpot game, the variation based on the oldest winning game among the held balls A variation 1 is started. Here, if there is no jackpot winning information in the winning information of each holding ball, the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot is undecided (greater than 4). In this case, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, a level 0 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, if there is a first ball entering the second prize opening 640 (the lottery result is off) during the execution of the variation 1, the level 0 ball effect is the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. And the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol changes to 4 (see FIG. 89 (a)).

  Next, when the variation 1 ends, the variation 2 based on the reserved ball starts, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 3. If there is a second ball (the lottery result is a big win) at the second prize opening 640 during the execution of the fluctuation 2, the number of remaining fluctuations until the big win is four. In this case, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, a level 1 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, the level 1 entry effect is displayed in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81, and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol changes to four.

  Then, when the variation 2 ends and the variation 3 based on the reserved ball starts, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 3, and the number of remaining variations until the big hit decreases to 3. In this case, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, a level 2 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, if there is a third ball (the lottery result is off) at the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the variation 3, the level 2 ball effect is displayed in the third area 81c of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 89B), the reserved symbol of the second special symbol changes to 4. Further, if there is a fourth ball (overflow) in the second prize opening 640 during the execution of the variation 3, the remaining number of variations until the big hit is three. In this case, the level 2 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, the level 2 entry effect is displayed in the fourth area 81 d of the third display device 81.

  Next, when the variation 3 is finished and the variation 4 based on the retained ball is started, the number of retained balls of the second special symbol becomes 3, and the remaining number of variations until the big hit decreases to 2. In this case, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, a level 3 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). However, if there is no entry to the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the variation 4, the entry effect is not newly displayed, and the variation 4 is finished as it is.

  When the variation 4 is finished, the variation 5 based on the reserved ball is started, the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol is reduced to 2, and the remaining number of variations until the big hit is reduced to 1. In this case, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, a level 4 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Accordingly, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the variation 5, a level 4 entry effect is displayed in the first area 81a of the third display device 81 (see FIG. 90 (a)). ) And the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases to 3.

  When the variation 5 is completed, the variation 6 based on the reserved ball of the jackpot winning information is started, the number of retained balls of the second special symbol is reduced to 2, and the remaining number of variations until the jackpot is 0 (the relevant Fluctuation decreases to jackpot). In this case, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, a level 5 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the variation 6, a level 5 entry effect is displayed in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 90 (b)). With reference, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases to 3. Thereafter, when the variation 6 has ended, the jackpot game is executed.

  In this way, in this control example, the type of entry effect is configured to be changed according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot, so the player can play the jackpot before the fluctuation based on the jackpot is executed. Can be recognized in advance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, the level of the pitching effect gradually increases based on the decrease in the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot, so that the player can gradually feel the jackpot arrival, and the player's interest Can be improved.

  In this control example, the turnover rate (efficiency) of the game is improved by shortening (0.6 seconds) the variation time of one variation effect in the short-time game. However, since the variation time is short, the variation effect executed (displayed) in the variation time is also shortened. As a result, unless the game ball is continuously entered into the second winning opening 640, the variation effect is not continuously performed (that is, the period during which the variation effect is not executed (displayed) becomes long), and the game is not boring. There is a risk of becoming. Therefore, in this control example, the expectation level that is a big hit is displayed based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. As a result, the player wants to enter the game ball into the second prize opening 640, and can continuously make the game ball enter the second prize opening 640, so that the fluctuating effect can be achieved. It can be displayed continuously, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In this control example, the ballistic effect is performed according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ballistic effect in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot. May be executed, or the above-mentioned entrance effect may be performed regardless of the number of remaining fluctuations until the big hit. Thereby, the case where it becomes a big hit without predicting the arrival of the big hit can be provided, the game can be given unexpectedness, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, in this control example, the above-described entrance effect is configured to be displayed in order from each of the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the pitching effect based on one pitch is continuously displayed until four game balls enter the second winning port 640, and the gaming ball is displayed at the second winning port 640. Even when the pitching interval is very short, it is possible to secure time for displaying the pitching effect, and to suppress the problem that the player cannot visually recognize (recognize) the pitching effect. In addition, you may make it discriminate | determine the area | region where the entrance effect is not displayed, and display using the area | region which is not displayed preferentially. Thereby, it is possible to secure a longer time for displaying the entrance effect.

  Further, in the present control example, the upper limit is the suspension of the second winning opening 640, and even when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 (so-called overflow), a ball entering effect is performed. ing. As a result, even if the second prize opening 640 is held at the upper limit, the ball entry effect is displayed based on entering the ball, so the player holds the second prize opening 640 as the upper limit. Even if it is, it can be made to want to make a game ball enter into the 2nd prize opening 640 continuously, and the interest of a player can be improved. In addition, since the pitching effect is displayed more than the number of short-time games that have been given, it is possible to make the player feel that a lot of short-time games have been given.

  In this control example, the entrance effect is configured to be displayed in order (clockwise) in each of the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, it may be configured to display in reverse order (counterclockwise), or may be displayed randomly. Furthermore, the display order may be changed when a specific performance or variation is executed or when there is jackpot winning information. Thereby, the order of the displayed ball effects can be changed, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and prevent the player from getting bored early.

  In addition, the display order of the entrance effect displayed in each area (the first area 81a to the fourth area) of the third symbol display device 81 may be changed according to the degree of expectation that is a big hit. For example, when the expectation level that is a big hit is low, the entrance effect is displayed in order (clockwise) in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d, while the expectation level that is a big hit is high. Are displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise). Thereby, the player can recognize the expectation degree in the display order of the entry effect displayed in each area (the first area 81a to the fourth area), and each area (the first area 81a to the fourth area). It is no longer necessary to look closely at the contents of the pitching effect displayed on the player, so that the burden on the player can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91, each production period (each production mode) set in this control example will be described. In the present control example, as described above, the normal game period (effect mode A) in which the normal effect is executed (displayed) and the effect period set periodically (5 minutes per hour). At the end of the time effect period (effect mode B), which is a period in which the effect (time effect) of a special aspect corresponding to the elapsed time is executed (displayed), and at the end of the time effect period (effect mode B) Thereafter, there is provided a time effect extension period (effect mode C) for shifting to a case where it is determined that the game will be a big win (when the pending winning information is a big win or a variable display that is a big win is being executed). .

  FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing each effect period (normal game period, time effect period, time effect extension period) in this control example. As described above, in this control example, information indicating the start times of the normal game period (effect mode A) and the time effect period (effect mode B) is set in the effect time storage area 223g. This effect time storage area 223g is obtained by the RTC 292 (time measuring means) by the time setting process (see FIG. 105) in the startup process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. ), Information indicating the start time of the normal game period (effect mode A) and the time effect period (effect mode B) is set based on the time information (information indicating the power-on time) acquired from . Each effect period is set based on information indicating the start time of the effect time storage area 223g.

  Specifically, in the effect time storage area 223g, information indicating the time 55 minutes after the power-on time is set as information indicating the start time of the first time effect. As a result, the time effect period (effect mode B) is set 55 minutes after the power-on time. Note that a normal game period (effect mode A) is set for 55 minutes after the power is turned on. Since the time effect period is 5 minutes, information indicating the time five minutes after the start time of the time effect is set as information indicating the start time of the normal game period (effect mode A). As a result, when 5 minutes have elapsed from the start time of the time effect, the normal game period (effect mode A) is set. In this manner, information indicating the start time of the effect time storage area 223g is set so that the normal game period (55 minutes) and the time effect period (5 minutes) are set repeatedly, and 5 minutes every hour. The time production period (production mode B) is set.

  Here, when 5 minutes of the time effect period elapses, it is determined whether or not the reserved memory stored at that time or the special symbol that is changing is set to have a big hit determination result. If it is determined that a jackpot is set, a time effect extension period (effect mode C) is set by the time until the change ends. In this case, when the time effect extension period (effect mode C) ends, the normal game period (effect mode A) is set.

  Further, when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, the third symbol display device 81 is used regardless of whether or not the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is subsequently shifted. Is switched to the sign display mode that suggests the end of the time effect period. By switching to this sign display mode, the variable display of the 3rd symbol that has been executed (displayed) (regardless of whether it is a big hit or missed) is a display mode that is difficult for the player to see. Variable. Specifically, the image is reduced and continuously displayed in the lower right portion of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, regardless of the variation display that has been executed (displayed) until then, the third symbol indicating the disengagement is stopped and displayed at the center of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the third symbol indicating the disengagement in a pseudo manner). The symbol is displayed). Here, the third symbol that is pseudo-stopped in the sign display mode is displayed with a slight shaking, thereby notifying that it is not completely stopped. In this way, by switching to the indication display mode and displaying it as if the third symbol was stopped, the third symbol seems to have stopped and displayed at the same timing as the other pachinko machines 10. Can be made. Thereby, the display mode at the end of the time effect period can be set to the same display mode on the plurality of pachinko machines 10, and it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, even when the variation display of the third symbol is not executed (displayed), the display mode is similarly changed to the sign display mode. Can be switched. Thereby, since the display mode is switched to the precursor display mode regardless of whether or not the variable display is executed (displayed), the display mode at the end of the time effect period is the same as the display mode on the plurality of pachinko machines 10. can do.

  It should be noted that in the precursor display mode, the display mode in which the variation display of the third symbol that has been executed (displayed) is varied, and the display mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize is not limited to that described above. For example, it may be displayed in a manner in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that it is a variable display of the third symbol, or may not be displayed at all. Thereby, it can be made difficult to recognize that the 3rd symbol which shows pseudo detachment is displayed, and the effect of making the 3rd symbol appear as if it has been stopped and displayed can be further strengthened.

  Furthermore, at the timing when the time effect period (effect mode B) ends (that is, the timing of whether or not to shift to the time effect extension period (effect mode C)), the time effect period is indicated as “ After the characters “Super Fish Time”, the characters “End?” (Notification mode) are displayed. After that, when the time production extension period (production mode C) is set, the characters “super fish school time extension!” Are displayed to notify that the time production extension period (production mode C) has been entered. The background image of is displayed again. An effect executed (displayed) in the time effect extension period is called an extension effect.

  When shifting to the time effect extension period (effect mode C), the display of the third symbol that has been changed (reduced) to the display mode that is difficult to visually recognize by the player is switched to the sign display mode. It is changed (enlarged) and displayed in a display form that can be visually recognized again (see FIG. 83). When the change display of the third symbol is changed (enlarged) to a display mode that can be visually recognized again (in an enlarged manner), the player is notified (displayed) as if a new special symbol change has started. (Hereafter referred to as re-variation production). Thereby, in changing (enlarging) the variable display of the third symbol that has been changed (reduced) to the display form that is difficult for the player to visually recognize in the sign display form, it can be changed to a viewable (easy) form again. It can be varied (enlarged) without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is a period until the variable display that is a big hit ends (that is, until the big hit game is started). In the time effect extension period (effect mode C), the remaining time (for example, 115 seconds) of the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the jackpot game is started). Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81).

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the time production extension period (production mode C) is set, the case where the holding storage that is a big hit is set, or the case where the big hit variation has already started (being changed) ). Therefore, shifting to the time effect extension period (effect mode C) will notify the player of the jackpot. Here, in the time effect period, the same effect is executed in synchronism between the same pachinko machines 10, and an effect indicating whether or not to shift to the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is displayed at the same timing. . Thereby, by shifting to the time effect extension period (effect mode C), other (surrounding) players can also determine that the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit (that is, a big hit with the surrounding players) Therefore, the gambling feelings of other (surrounding) players can be beaten.

  On the other hand, when the time effect period (effect mode B) ends and the normal game period (effect mode A) is set, the “super fish school time end” is announced to notify the end of the time effect period (effect mode B)! Characters are displayed. This display is displayed until the variable display of the third symbol changed to the display mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize in the precursor display mode is stopped. Then, from the next variation, the reduced display of the third symbol is canceled, and the third symbol is variably displayed in the normal size. By comprising in this way, even if a time production period (production mode B) is complete | finished and it does not transfer to a time production extension period (production mode C) after that, it will be in a mode which is difficult to visually recognize by switching to a precursor display mode. The variable change display can be stopped without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  On the other hand, when the remaining display of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, if the variation display of the third symbol is not executed (displayed), the normal game period (effect mode A) is set. When set, the characters “Super fish time end!” For notifying the end of the time effect period (effect mode B) are displayed for a predetermined time (3 seconds). From the next variation, the third symbol is variably displayed in the normal size (see FIG. 83 (a)) without being reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the condition for setting the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is set to a big hit after that (the pending winning information is a big win or a variable display that is a big win is being executed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be a case where a holding memory for selecting a fluctuation pattern that becomes a super reach is set, or a lottery unrelated to a special symbol lottery is executed and a predetermined lottery result is obtained. You may comprise so that it may be set when it becomes. Thereby, although it transfers to the time production extension period (production mode C), the case where it is not a jackpot can be provided. Thereby, since the player pays attention to whether or not it is a big hit in the time effect extension period (effect mode C), it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  Here, in the time effect period (effect mode B), a specific time effect (countdown effect) is performed regularly (every minute) (see FIG. 91). Thereby, in the time production period, the same specific time production (countdown production) can be performed in synchronization with other (for example, adjacent) pachinko machines 10 installed, and a plurality of pachinko machines 10 can provide a sense of unity. The effect of the time effect for the purpose of providing a certain effect can be further enhanced.

  The specific time effect (countdown effect) is such that the content of the effect changes based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change state and not in a short-time state (in a so-called latent probability change state), a countdown character (“3, 2, 1 ... ") is displayed in red (if not in the latent probability changing state, it is displayed in black). Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the gaming state is a state of probability change and is not in a time-short state (so-called latent probability change state). Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the contents of the specific time effect, and to improve the interest of the player. In addition, the alerting | reporting aspect which alert | reports that it is a latent probability change state is not restricted to what was mentioned above. For example, you may make it display the design (image) and character for alert | reporting that it is a latent probability change state. In this case, as the symbols (images), various power-on images may be corrected and used. As a result, there is no need to separately prepare a symbol (image) for notifying that the latent probability changing state is present, so that the data capacity (ROM capacity) can be reduced.

  Further, in this control example, in addition to the above-described specific time effect (countdown effect), a countdown notice effect including the same type of display mode (countdown) is executed. This countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) on the basis of entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. That is, it may be executed (displayed) at a timing different from the specific time effect (countdown effect) executed regularly (every minute). Therefore, a countdown notice effect including a specific time effect (countdown effect) and the same type of display mode (countdown) may be executed at a different timing from other (for example, the adjacent) pachinko machine 10 of the same type. is there. Thereby, the game can be provided with unexpectedness, and the interest of the player can be improved. In the countdown notice effect, after the countdown character (“3, 2, 1...”) Is displayed, a character design suggesting a degree of expectation that is a big hit is displayed, or the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit (or This is an effect in which a pattern or a character suggesting a degree of expectation that is a big hit based on repeated hitting (or pressing) of the frame button 22 is displayed.

  In this control example, it is conceivable that the production timing of the specific time production (countdown production) is reached during the execution (display) of the countdown notice production. In this case, there is a possibility that an effect including the same type of display mode (countdown) is displayed in an overlapping manner (or overwritten), resulting in a gaming machine that is difficult for a player to understand. Therefore, in this control example, the avoidance flag 223i described above is set to ON during execution of the countdown notice effect (see S2007 in FIG. 111), and when the avoidance flag 223i is ON, the specific time effect ( The (countdown effect) is configured not to be executed (set) (see S2305: Yes in FIG. 114). Thereby, it can prevent (suppress) that the problem mentioned above generate | occur | produces, and it can be set as the game machine easy to understand for a player.

  In this control example, the countdown mode is taken as an example, and the configuration for avoiding (limiting) the effects including the countdown mode from being displayed redundantly has been described. However, the effect of avoiding (limiting) overlapping display is not limited to the effect including the countdown mode. Of the effects including the same type of aspect, the present invention can be similarly applied to other effects that can be displayed in duplicate. For example, when an effect suggesting that a button is pressed can be displayed in duplicate, it may be avoided (limited) that an effect suggesting that a button is pressed is displayed repeatedly.

  In this control example, if a countdown notice effect is being executed (displayed) in order to prevent duplicate effects (countdown effect and countdown notice effect) including the same type (countdown) from being displayed, Avoided (restricted) the time effect (countdown effect) not to be executed (displayed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the effects including the same type (countdown) may be adjusted (extended or shortened) or the start timing may be changed. For example, when a specific time effect (countdown effect) is executed after 20 seconds, it is assumed that a countdown notice effect (normally, the effect time is 30 seconds) is executed (set). In this case, the production time of the countdown notice effect may be shortened (for example, shortened to 15 seconds). Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the effects including the same type of the effects from being displayed in duplicate without rendering any one of the effects including the same type of effects. As a result, more effects can be displayed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Moreover, you may make it as follows by changing the start timing of any one among the productions containing the same kind of mode (countdown). For example, the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect) may be delayed until the countdown notice effect ends (or until a predetermined time elapses after the end).

  Furthermore, when delaying the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect), the display (effect) mode (that is, the start timing that would have been set (displayed) if not delayed) A specific time effect (countdown effect) may be started (displayed) from the display (effect mode) displayed on the other pachinko machine 10. Specifically, the case where the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed by 5 seconds will be described as an example. As described above, the specific time effect (countdown effect) is an effect in which the countdown character is counted down by 1 every 3 seconds from “3”. Therefore, when the delay time is 5 seconds, the display (production) mode (display (production) mode displayed on the other pachinko machine 10) displayed when the delay is not performed is “2” as the countdown character. Is a display (production) mode. In accordance with this, the specific time effect (countdown effect) started with a delay of 5 seconds is controlled to start from the display (effect) mode in which “2” is displayed as the countdown character. Thereby, the specific time effect (countdown effect) with the delayed start timing can be displayed in synchronization with the specific time effect (countdown effect) being executed (displayed) in the other pachinko machine 10. As a result, since the specific time effect (countdown effect) executed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is executed (displayed) without deviation, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  As a method of delaying the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect), there is provided means (time measuring means) for measuring a period in which the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed, and based on the measurement result There is a method of setting a display (effect) aspect of a specific time effect (countdown effect) that starts after being delayed. As another method, during a period in which the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed, a process (for example, an image display pointer update process) is performed as a control process. Even if it is, the method of processing so as not to output the image and sound related to the specific time effect (countdown effect) (for example, muting only the sound related to the specific time effect) may be mentioned.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 92 to 103. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the third symbol variation pattern and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). A gate passing process is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display or the third symbol performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol and the like performed on the display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Includes during the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. If the aspect is not changing (S202: No), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 2203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (variable display in the special symbol) (N203) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (that is, there is a special symbol 2 reserved memory) (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 102) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. They are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (that is, there is no special symbol 2 reserved ball) (S204: No), It is determined whether the value (N1) of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (that is, the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is stored) (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is not stored) (S209: No), the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 Since both have no holding balls, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and is changed by calculation. Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203e is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

  In the process of S208, a special symbol fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? It is determined whether or not (S213). The variation display variation time executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S214), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the change time of the change display being executed has elapsed (S213: Yes), the stop setting process is executed (S215), and this process ends. The stop setting process (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 93) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery of “special symbol big hit”, “special symbol small hit”, or “special symbol miss” ( This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Each value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 is acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability change is in progress (S302).

  When the probability change is in progress (S302: Yes), whether or not the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. Are obtained from the first random number table (see FIG. 75A) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared one by one with ten random values set in the first per-random number table (see FIG. 75A). As described above, 10 random numbers that are big wins of special symbols are set to “0-9”, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined to be a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random values may be used. By comprising in this way, it is comprised so that the random number value determined to be off in the 1st special symbol may be determined to be a win in the 2nd special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of random values to be set may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of jackpots can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can give you the expectation of jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability change is not in progress (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability game state) of the special symbol, the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 is displayed. Based on the value and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 75A), a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with one random number value stored in the first per-random number table for low probability. As a random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, one of “0” is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that hits this match, the big hit of the special symbol It is determined that If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). A display mode for jackpot time indicating the jackpot is set (S306).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C). In addition, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern for the big hit is determined from the first hit type selection table (see FIG. 75B) (S307). Specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is compared with a random value stored in the first hit type selection table. In this first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is any one of “0 to 39” is the big hit A (16R probability variation big hit), which is one of the values “40 to 79”. In this case, the jackpot type is jackpot B (short jackpot at 16R), and the jackpot type when it is any of “80 to 99” is jackpot C (short hitless at 2R probability change). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S310.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S305 that the symbol is out of the special symbol (S305: No), the display mode at the time of separation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of detachment is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S310.

  In the process of S310, a change pattern command for notifying each determined change pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S310), a stop type command is set (S311), and then this process is ended to display a special symbol. Return to variation processing.

  Next, the stop setting process (S215) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the stop setting process (S215). This stop setting process (S215) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92).

  In the stop setting process (S215), first, a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S261). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) of FIG. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Is called. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot C, the jackpot, or a loss.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on and the jackpot C is reached. In this case, the yellow LED is turned on. In addition, when it is a small hit, a purple LED is turned on, and when it is off, a red LED and a green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops. In addition, as long as it is the lighting mode which can identify not only the above-mentioned display color and lighting mode of LED but each big hit, the type of small hit, and a fluctuation state, other lighting modes may be sufficient.

  After the process of S261 is completed, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S262). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S262: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S263), the jackpot start is set (S264), and then the process proceeds to S265.

  On the other hand, in the process of S262, if the current lottery result is not a big win (S262: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a big hit (S266). If the current lottery result is a small hit (S266: Yes), the small hit flag 203j is set to ON (S267), the start of the small hit is set (S268), and then the process proceeds to S265.

  In the process of S266, if the current lottery result is out (S266: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more (S269). When it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S269: No), the process proceeds to S265. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more (S269: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S270), and the process proceeds to S265.

  In the process of S265, a stop command is set (S265), and this process ends.

  Next, start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 92), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640, and the starting winning is determined. Is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 96, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S502). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S503).

  And, there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S501: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (503: No), the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S501: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (5405).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 102) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the processing of S505, the RAM 203 stores the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a (S506). In the process of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing from S507 to S512, the same processing as that for the processing from S501 to S506 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640. The only difference with respect to the winning of the second winning opening 640 is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed, and the other processes are the same, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. When it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening 640 (S507: No), a pre-read process is executed after the process of S512 (S513). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 97, the pre-reading process (S513) which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 of FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this prefetch process (S513).

  In this prefetching process (FIG. 97, S513), it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 (S601). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S601; No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the change is a certain change (S602), and the gaming state Is a probable variation (S602: Yes), a lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 75A) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. In the process of S602, if the gaming state is not certain (S602: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 75A) (S604), and the process of S605 is performed. Move on to processing. In the process of S605, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the processes of S603 and S604 is set (S605), and this process is terminated. In the prefetch processing (S513), not only in the present embodiment, but also the type of variation pattern to be selected (outreach reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) is discriminated and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a winning information command. May be configured to be notified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 92), and the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device and the electric combination associated with the second winning opening 640 are displayed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 640a.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 98, S106), it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). The normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit, while the second symbol display device is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is performed. In the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S701: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol (S708).

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Includes during the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711.

  In the process of S709, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second per-random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 75 (c)).

  In the process of S708, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 is low. Based on the second random number table for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 75 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is a normal symbol win (S712), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (S712: Yes). The display mode for hitting is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S714). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S714: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit for the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S715). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol falls off The number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S715, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so the second winning opening 640 is obtained. Is set to 1 second and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the short time state of the normal symbol (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  If it is determined in step S712 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S712: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S719). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S719: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is displayed. Is set to 3 seconds (S720), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S719: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this process is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to easily enter the second winning hole 640.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has passed ( S722). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S720 or the processing of S721 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S722 (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S722 (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (refer to S1107) of the main process (refer to FIG. 102) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device is ended. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S713 or S718.

  Next, the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 98, S106) when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started is the normal symbol. It is determined whether it is a win (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S725), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S725, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 102) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S716 or S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the sphere has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 99, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S803: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005). If not stored (S1005: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S1012. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1114 of the main processing (FIG. 102). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), the information on occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Here, when the changing special symbol is stored, the power-on change image (see FIGS. 82B to 82C) is displayed on the display control device 114 in a variable manner with respect to the sound lamp control device 113. You are instructed to do so. Note that this change instruction may be executed, for example, in the initial setting (S1001) in the start-up process, or may be executed in another process. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 102), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 92) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) or the start winning process (see FIG. 96) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 103) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103). The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning apparatus 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). Details of the jackpot control process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 98), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S1106). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 94), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start in devices 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94) is completed, the first symbol display device 37A, The variation display being executed in 37B is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 94). , 37B are stopped (lighted).

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of a 2nd symbol display apparatus is performed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 98) or the process of S721, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 98), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighted display) in the display mode set by the processing of S713 or the processing of S718 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 98). )

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the processes after S1101 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1110, S1111).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1108, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 100 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1112 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1108 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can start from S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1101. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, various effects according to the jackpot are performed, and a special winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 103, S1104), it is first determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1201). Specifically, if the process of S264 of the stop setting process (see FIG. 95) is executed and the start of a special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. When the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1201 (S1201: Yes), both the probability variation flag 203g and the time reduction flag 203k are set to OFF (S1202), an opening command is set (S1203), This process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1201: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1204). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1204, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1204 that the special symbol is a big hit (S1204: Yes), the process of S1205 is executed. In the processing of S1205, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1205). If it is determined in the processing of S1205 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1206), and newly A round number command indicating the number of rounds to be started is set (S1207), and this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1205, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1205: No), whether or not the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied. It is determined (S1208). If the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1209), and then this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1208, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the 15th round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 is closed, and a waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) that is a ball throwing time has elapsed. It is determined as If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210: Yes), the big hit flag 203i is turned off (S1211), and an ending command is set (S1212). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is A or C (S1213). If the jackpot type is not A or C in the processing of S1213 (S1213: No), 100 is set in the hour / minute counter (S1217), and then this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot type is A or C in the process of S1213 (S1213: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is turned on (S1214), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is A (S1215). If the jackpot type is not A (S1215: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1215, if the jackpot type is A (S1215: Yes), the hour / short flag 203k is turned on (S1216), and then this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 115. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, referring to FIG. 104, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current power-off processing in S1514 is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 80). ) Is determined during execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (S1516: Yes in FIG. 106), it executes a power-off process in S1519. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1519 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1302: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1514 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1519, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1519, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1306). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process in S1519 is executed (see S1519 in FIG. 106). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1519 is executed, the process of S1308 with the power-off flag 223y being turned on is the current startup process. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1519 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1309), and the power-off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1310). The initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1311). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (S1312), a time setting process is executed (S1313), and the process proceeds to the main process. Details of the time setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag 223y is turned off, the process of S1308 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example. Or when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1311, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1312), and interrupt permission is set. (S1311), the time setting process is executed (S1313), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1309 is that when the process from S1304 to S1308 is reached via the process in S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1304. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the time setting process (S1313) executed in the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 described above will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the time setting process (S1313). This time effect setting process (S1313) is a process for setting, in the effect time storage area 223g, information indicating the start time at which the normal game period (effect mode A) and the time effect period (effect mode B) are executed. .

  In the time setting process (S1313), first, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1401). As the time information acquired here, a value of “hour, minute” is acquired. The RTC 292 is a time measuring unit having a battery therein, and is configured such that when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years. The RTC 292 also has a calendar function and is configured to be able to determine “year / month / day”. Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to control to change to a background image exclusively for Christmas or to display a special character such as Santa.

  Then, based on the time information (power-on time) acquired in the processing of S1401, the start time at which the normal game period (effect mode A), the time effect period (effect mode B), and the specific time effect are executed (set) is set. Each is calculated and set in the effect time storage area 223g (S1402), and this process is terminated.

  The information set in the effect time storage area 223g in the process of S1402 will be specifically described by taking as an example a case where the power of the sound lamp control device 113 is turned on at 9:00. In the effect time storage area 223g, 9:55, 55 minutes after the power-on time (9:00), is set as information indicating the start time of the first time effect. Then, a time every hour (10:55, 11:55...) From the start time of the first time effect is set for 24 hours as information indicating the start time of the time effect. Also, every minute from the start timing of the time production during the time production (9:56, 9:57, 9:58, 9:59, 10:56, 10:57, ...). It is set as information indicating the start time (start timing) of the specific time effect. Furthermore, since the time effect period is 5 minutes, information indicating the time (10:00, 11:00...) 5 minutes after the start time of the time effect is the normal game period (effect mode A). It is set as information indicating the start time (see FIG. 91).

  In this control example, each time effect (time effect, specific time effect) is set to be executed based on the time when the power is turned on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may set the start time of (time production, specific time production). For example, 00 minutes may be set as the time production start time. Thereby, when turning on the power of a plurality of pachinko machines 10, even if the power-on time is deviated, the start time of the time effects is not shifted, and the time effects are executed in synchronization with the plurality of pachinko machines 10. can do.

  In this control example, the RTC 292 is used as the time measuring means, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a counter may be provided as a time measuring means and the following may be performed. When measuring (clocking) the normal game period (55 minutes), the counter value should be counted up (or counted down) periodically (for example, every second) after the normal game period (55 minutes) is started. Measure (clock) with. Then, when the value of the counter becomes a value indicating 55 minutes (for example, 3300), it is determined that 55 minutes have passed. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide the RTC 292, and the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current process of S1501 was executed (S1501). If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1511 without performing the processes in S1502 to S1510. In S1501, it is determined whether 1 msec has passed or not, because S1502 to S1510 are mainly processes related to display (effects), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1511 and the variable display setting process of S1512 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1502). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1508 described later are set (S1503), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1504). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called.

  Further, when recovering from a power failure due to a power failure or the like, an effect permission command based on the game being executed at the time of power failure is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the startup process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 101). . The voice lamp control device 113 creates a display variation pattern command in the power-on notification process (S1504) based on the reception of the effect permission command including that the special symbol is changing, and the display control device. It transmits toward 114. The display control device 114 discriminates the fluctuation start command of the power-on fluctuation image by the simple command determination process (see FIG. 118B), and uses the power-on fluctuation image based on the fluctuation pattern based on the received command. The fluctuation display is executed (see FIG. 82 (b) or (c)). Since the display variation pattern command created here is for executing variation display using a power-on variation image, which is a simple image as described above, a variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 110) described later. ) Is simpler than the one selected by As a result, the processing load for creating the display variation pattern command can be reduced, and the power-on variation image can be displayed with good response when recovering from a power failure.

  Furthermore, after an effect permission command based on the game that was being executed when the power was turned off is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101), it is executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command for stopping the fluctuation display is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 based on the reception of the stop command. The display control device 114 determines that the display stop command has been received by the simple command determination process (see 118 (b)), and changes the power-on variation image (FIG. 82 (b) or FIG. 82) in the display mode based on the received command. (See (c)).

  Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the processing of S1505, a customer waiting effect processing is executed, and then a hold number display update processing is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number-of-holds ball counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set to the display control device 114.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1509, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1510). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1509 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1511). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S1512. In the process of S1512, a variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the variable display setting process (S1512) is finished, next, a synchronous effect management process for executing an effect based on the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 is executed (S1513), and a specific time in the time effect period (effect mode B). A specific time effect process for executing the effect is executed (S1514). Then, a pitch effect setting process for executing a pitch effect based on the game ball entering the second winning port 640 is executed (S1515), and the process proceeds to S1516. The details of the synchronized effect management process (S1513), the specific time effect process (S1514), and the entry effect setting process (S1515) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112, 113, 114, and 116, respectively.

  When the entry effect setting process (S1515) is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1516). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1516 (S1516: Yes), both the power interruption flag 223y and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1518), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1519). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1520), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1516 (S1516: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1517), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1517: No), the process returns to S1501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1517: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1511). This command determination processing (S1511) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S 1511), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main control device 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation pattern reception process (S1602) is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

  Details of the variation pattern reception process (S1602) will be described here with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern reception process (S1602). In this variation pattern reception process (S1602), a variation pattern is extracted based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, and various types of accessory (vertical motion unit device ( (Dropping object) 400, expansion / contraction production device (expanding / contracting object) 540, tilting operation unit (tilting tool) 600, etc.).

  In the variation pattern reception process, first, the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1701), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1702). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 109) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the extracted variation pattern type includes a falling combination scenario (S1703). If it is determined in the processing of S1703 that there is a falling combination scenario (S1703: Yes), the vertical movement unit apparatus (falling combination) 400 is a case where a moving effect is executed. A falling combination scenario for moving the (falling combination) 400 is set (S1704). The falling combination scenario set in the processing of S1704 defines the operation of the vertical movement unit device (falling combination) 400 for the same time as the variation time of the variation effect set based on the variation pattern type. is there. By driving the up / down drive motor 431 based on the falling combination scenario, the vertical operation unit device (falling combination) 400 and the changing effect can be moved synchronously (linked).

  When the processing of S1704 is completed, it is then determined whether or not there is an opening setting for the door member 470 of the vertical motion unit device (falling object) 400 (S1705). If it is determined in the process of S1705 that the door member 470 is set to be opened (S1705: Yes), the opening / closing drive motor 466 is not excited (off) so that the door member 470 is opened. Set (energization stop control). As a result, the stationary torque (so-called detent torque) of the opening / closing drive motor 466 for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is minimized, and the inertial force that moves the vertical motion unit device (falling object) 400 in the dropping direction. As a result, the door member 470 is opened. Although illustration is omitted, when the door member 470 is not set to be opened, that is, when the door member 470 is kept closed, the opening drive motor 466 is controlled to be excited so that the opening / closing drive motor 466 stops. . As a result, when the opening of the door member 470 is not set, the stationary torque of the opening drive motor 466, that is, the door member 470 is closed even if the vertical movement unit device (falling object) 400 moves in the dropping direction. The door member 470 is maintained in the closed state and is not opened because the excitation is performed so that the torque for maintaining the state (so-called holding torque) is maximized. Note that the torque (holding torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state does not have to be maximized, and the door member 470 is moved when the vertical motion unit device (falling object) 400 moves in the dropping direction. It is sufficient that the torque is such that the door member 470 is not opened by the inertial force generated in the motor. In this case, since the current for exciting the opening / closing drive motor 466 can be made weak, power consumption can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1705 that there is no release setting of the falling combination (S1705: No), the processing of S1706 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1707, and it is determined that there is no falling combination scenario. In this case (S1703: No), the processing from S1704 to S1706 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1707.

  When the processing of S1703, S1705, or S1706 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is an extendable character scenario (S1707). When it is determined in the processing of S1707 that there is an expansion / contraction character scenario (S1707: Yes), the drive motor 561 is configured so that the front plate member 546 of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) can move to the lower position. An expansion / contraction character scenario for performing excitation control is set, and the process proceeds to S1709. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1707 that there is no extendable combination scenario (S1707: No), the process of S1708 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1709.

  In the processing of S1709, it is determined whether or not there is a tilted character scenario (S1709). If it is determined in the processing of S1709 that there is a tilting role scenario (S1709: Yes), the drive motor 631 is subjected to excitation control so that the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) can move to the extended position. A tilted actor scenario is set (S1710), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1709 that there is no tilted-item scenario (S1709: No), the process of S1708 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 107, the description will be continued. If the variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of S1601 (S1601: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1603). When the stop type command is received (S1603: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1604), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1605). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 109) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1603: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1606). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1606: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) and the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the main controller 110 The value of the number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1607). In the processing of S1608, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set. After the process of S1607 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is executed when the ball wins (start winning prize) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, or a special symbol is drawn. Is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is released, so that every time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1607. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main controller 110. The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the special symbol lottery even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. To the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1607 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1606, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1606: No), it is then determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1608). If it is determined in the process of S1608 that a winning information command has been received (S1608: Yes), winning information (such as a special symbol lottery result) based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S1609), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when no winning information command is received (S1608: No), it is determined whether or not a command relating to jackpot is received (S1610). In the process of S1610, when a command related to the jackpot is received (S1610: Yes), a process corresponding to the received command related to the jackpot is executed (S1611), and this process ends. Examples of commands related to jackpots include an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command. In addition, as processing corresponding to the received command relating to the jackpot, for example, there is processing for setting a display opening command, a display round number command, and a display ending command.

  If it is determined in step S1610 that a command related to jackpot has not been received (S1610: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S1612). If it is determined in step S1612 that a stop command has been received (S1612: Yes), the variable display stop process being executed is executed (S1613), and the avoidance flag 223i is set to OFF (S1614). A display stop command is set (S1615), and this process ends.

  The display stop command set by the processing of S1615 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop command, the display control device 114 stops the variation effect being executed in a display mode based on the stop type set by the stop type command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1612 that a stop command has not been received (S1612: No), it is determined whether another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1616), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. Set the command to send to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the variable display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1512). This variable display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1801). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1801: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1806. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1802), and then the variation pattern type based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is set. A variation pattern selection process for selection is executed (S1803).

  Details of the variation pattern selection process (S1803) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1803). In this variation pattern selection process, a variation pattern type corresponding to the production mode is selected based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 and the production counter 223j counted by the sound lamp control device 113. is there.

  In the variation pattern selection process, first, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S1901). Next, it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (normal game period) (S1902). The effect mode is determined with reference to the value in the effect mode storage area 223h. As described above, if the value of the effect mode storage area 223h is “00H”, it indicates the effect mode A, “01H” indicates the effect mode B, and “02H”. It shows that it is production mode C.

  In the process of S1902, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode storage area 223h is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S1902: Yes), it is extracted in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108). Based on the changed variation pattern type and the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S1901, the corresponding change pattern of the normal game period (effect mode A) is selected from the change pattern selection table 222a (S1903). finish. Based on the variation pattern selected here, it is set as a variation pattern command for display in the variation display setting process described later (see S1804 in FIG. 109).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1902 that the current effect mode is not effect mode A (normal game period) (S1902: No), then the current effect mode is effect mode B (time effect period). It is determined whether or not (S1904).

  In the process of S1904, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode storage area 223h is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S1904: Yes), it is extracted in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108). Based on the changed variation pattern type and the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S1901, the corresponding change pattern of the time effect period (effect mode B) is selected from the change pattern selection table 222a (S1905), and this process is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1904, when it is determined that the current effect mode is not effect mode B (time effect period) (S1904: No), the current effect mode is effect mode C (time effect extension period). is there. In this case, based on the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108) and the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S1901, the corresponding time effect extension period (effect mode C) is set. A variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1906), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the variation pattern selection process (S1803), since the variation pattern corresponding to the current effect mode is selected, the variation display corresponding to each effect period (effect mode) is executed (displayed). Can do.

  Returning to FIG. 109, the description will be continued. When the processing of S1803 is completed, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated based on the variation pattern selected in the processing of S1803, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The setting is made (S1804). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started. When the process of S1804 is completed, next, a notice selection process for setting a notice effect based on the determination result (indicating an expected degree of jackpot) is executed (S1805). This notice selection process is also configured so that a notice effect according to the current effect mode is selected.

  Details of the notice selection process (S1805) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the advance notice selection process (S1805). This notice selection process (S1805) is a process for setting a notice effect based on the result of determination of success / failure according to the current effect mode, which is executed in the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 109).

  In the notice selection process (S1805), first, the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2001), and it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S2002). In the process of S2002, when it is determined that the current effect mode (value of the effect mode storage area 223h) is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S2002: Yes), it is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Based on the result of determining whether or not each holding ball is present and the value of the effect counter 223j, a normal notice effect that is a notice effect for the normal game period is selected (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2011.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2002 that the current effect mode is not effect mode A (normal game period) (S2002: No), then the current effect mode is effect mode B (time effect period). Whether or not (S2004).

  In the process of S2004, if it is determined that the current effect mode is effect mode B (time effect period) (S2004: No), the determination result of each holding ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a Based on the value of the effect counter 223j, a time notice effect that is a notice effect of the time effect period is selected (S2005), and the process proceeds to S2006.

  In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the time notice effect selected in the process of S2005 is a notice effect (countdown notice effect) including a countdown display mode (S2006). In the process of S2006, if it is determined that the selected time notice effect is a countdown notice effect (S2006: Yes), the avoidance flag 223i is turned on so as not to execute the specific time effect (countdown effect). (S2007), the process proceeds to S2011. By the process of S2007, the avoidance flag 223i is set to ON, so that it is possible to determine that the countdown notice effect is executed. When the avoidance flag 223i is on, the specific time effect (countdown effect) is controlled not to be executed in the specific time effect process (see FIG. 114) described later (S2305: Yes in FIG. 114). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) duplicate effects (countdown notice effect, specific time effect (countdown effect)) including the same type of display mode (countdown), and to confuse the player Can be prevented (suppressed).

  In the present embodiment, the avoidance flag 223i is set to ON when the countdown advance notice effect is executed based on the entry to the second winning opening 640, and the specific time effect is not executed. It is not limited to. For example, the timing at which the countdown notice effect is executed based on the entry to the second winning opening 640 is pre-read (estimated) based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. That is, the period during which the countdown notice effect is executed is prefetched (estimated). Based on the prefetching (estimation) result, it may be set so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not executed repeatedly during the period in which the countdown notice effect is executed. Thereby, the process for performing a specific time effect can be stopped before the timing when a specific time effect is started. As a result, preparation for executing the specific time effect (for example, image data transfer processing) can be omitted, and the processing load can be reduced.

  Further, preventing (suppressing) duplication is not limited to the display mode, and it may be possible to prevent (suppress) audio and music from duplicating. Furthermore, the sound may be prevented (suppressed) from being different from the display mode. For example, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the output of a voice “Please press the button” even though the button is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to preventing (suppressing) duplication of effects including the same type of display mode, and it is also possible to prevent the effects including the same type of display mode from being executed continuously (or frequently). Specifically, the avoidance flag 223i is set to ON so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not executed in the vicinity of the period during which the countdown notice effect is executed (for example, 1 minute before and after). Thereby, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easier to understand for the player.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2006, when it is determined that the selected time notice effect is other than the countdown notice effect (S2006: No), the process of S2007 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2011.

  In the process of S2004, if it is determined that the current effect mode is not effect mode B (time effect period) (S2004: No), then whether the current effect mode is effect mode C (time effect extension period)? It is determined whether or not (S2008). If it is determined that the current effect mode is the effect mode C (time effect extension period) in the processing of S2008 (S2008: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the change determination result is correct. (S2009).

  In the processing of S2009, when it is determined that the result of the determination of whether or not the change is correct (S2009: Yes), a super fish notice effect that is a notice effect that suggests that the change is a big hit is selected ( S2010) and the process proceeds to S2011.

  When the process of S2003, S2006, S2007, or S2010 is completed, a display notice command indicating the selected notice effect is set (S2011), and this process ends. The display notice command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and displayed in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display notice command, the display control device 114 displays a notice effect according to the command on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2008 that the current effect mode is not the effect mode C (time effect extension period) (S2008: No), or in the process of S2009, whether or not the change is appropriate is determined to be out of effect. If it is determined (S2009: No), since there is no notice effect to be executed, this process is terminated as it is. In the processes of S2003 and S2005, the notice effect may not be selected depending on the value of the effect counter 223j. In this case as well, this process ends without setting the display notice command.

  In this control example, in the time effect extension period (effect mode C), the specific time effect (countdown effect) that is executed periodically (every minute) in the time effect period (effect mode B) is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific time effect (countdown effect) may be executed in the same manner as the time effect period (effect mode B). In this case, the avoidance flag 223i described above may be used so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not performed at the same timing as the countdown notice effect as in the time effect period (effect mode B). Thereby, even during the time effect extension period (effect mode C), it is possible to prevent the countdown notice effect and the like from being executed repeatedly, and it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to understand for the player. Further, the display mode of the specific time effect periodically executed in the time effect extension period (effect mode C) may not include the countdown display mode. Thereby, even if the specific time effect is periodically executed in the time effect extension period (effect mode C), the effect including the same type of display mode (countdown) is not executed. Therefore, an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided for the player.

  Returning to FIG. 109, the description will be continued. When the processing of S1805 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1806). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1806: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1807), and then in the process of S1605 of the command determination process (see FIG. 107), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1808). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1809), and the process proceeds to S1810. In the processing of S1810, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1810). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the synchronous effect management process (S1513) which is one process in the main process (refer FIG. 106) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 is demonstrated. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1513). In this synchronous effect management process (S1513), time information is acquired from the RTC 292, and based on the time information, it is determined whether it is a normal game period, a time effect period, or a time effect extension period, and an effect indicating it. Execute the process to set the mode.

  In the synchronized effect management process (FIG. 112, S1513), first, time information of “hour, minute” is acquired from the RTC 292 (S2101). And it is discriminate | determined whether the value ("00H") which shows production mode A (normal game period) is set to production mode storage area 223h (S2102). When it is determined that the value indicating the effect mode A (“00H”) is set (S2102: Yes), the time data acquired in the processing of S2101 is the transition timing to the effect mode B (time effect period) ( It is determined whether or not the time production period has come (S2103). In the processing of S2103, when it is determined that it is the transition timing to the effect mode B (time effect period), that is, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the time effect (S2103: Yes), the effect mode storage area 223h. Is set to a value ("01H") indicating the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2104), a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode B (time effect period) is set (S2105), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2103 that it is not the time effect period, the processing of S2104 and S2105 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2102, when it is determined that the value (“00H”) indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is not set (S2102: No), the effect mode B ( It is determined whether or not a value ("01H") indicating a time performance period is set (S2106). In the process of S2106, when it is determined that the value ("01H") indicating the effect mode B (time effect period) is set (S2106: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S2101 is the end of the time effect. It is determined whether it is within 3 seconds from the start time, that is, within 3 seconds until the end timing of the time effect period (the start timing of the normal game period) (S2107).

  In the process of S2107, if it is determined that the time until the end timing of the time effect period (the start timing of the normal game period) is within 3 seconds (S2107: Yes), the extension effect for executing (displaying) the extension effect. A setting process is executed (S2108). Thereafter, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 106). The extension effect setting process (S2108) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2107, when it is determined that the acquired time data is not within 3 seconds from the end of the time effect, it is longer than 3 seconds until the end time of the time effect period (the start timing of the normal game period). , S2108 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  In the process of S2106, the value ("00H") indicating the effect mode B (time effect period) is not set in the effect mode storage area 223h, that is, the current effect mode is the effect mode C (time effect extension period). If it is determined that there is (S2106: No), it is determined whether it is outside the time effect extension period, that is, whether it is the end timing of the time effect extension period (effect mode C) (S2109). In the processing of S2109, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect extension period (S2109: Yes), a value (“00H”) indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223h. (S2110), a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S2111), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2109, when it is determined that the acquired time data is not the end timing of the time effect extension period (S2109: No), the processes of S2110 and S2111 are skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the extended effect setting process (S2108) which is one process in the synchronous effect management process (see FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extended effect setting process (S2108).

  In the extended effect setting process (FIG. 113, S2108), it is first determined whether or not a big hit game is being played (S2201). If it is determined that the game is a big hit game (S2201: Yes), a value ("00H") indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223h (S2202). Then, a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S2203), and this process is terminated.

  In the present control example, as described above, when a jackpot game is being executed at the time 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period (effect mode B) (S2201: Yes), it is normal after the jackpot game ends. Although control is performed to shift to the game period (effect mode A) (S2202 and S2203), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if a jackpot game is being executed 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period (effect mode B), if the jackpot game ends before the end of the time effect period (effect mode B) A time production period (production mode B) may be set. In addition, even if the jackpot game is executed at the time 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period (effect mode B), if it is determined that it will be a big hit after that (when the pending winning information is a big win) In other words, after the jackpot game is over, the time production extension period (production mode C) may be entered. Thereby, even if the jackpot game is being executed at the time point 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period (effect mode B), an extended effect or the like can be executed (displayed), so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2201 that the game is not a big hit game (S2201: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the time effect period (effect mode B) (S2204). In the process of S2204, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (effect mode B) (S2204: Yes), it is determined whether or not the re-change effect is set, that is, the extension effect is executed ( It is determined whether or not it is decided to shift to the production mode C (S2205). When the re-changing effect is set, that is, when it is determined that the extended effect is subsequently executed (shift to the effect mode C) (S2205: Yes), the effect mode is stored in the effect mode storage area 223h. A value indicating “C” (“02H”) is set (S2206), a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode C is set (S2207), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2205 that the re-changing effect is not set (S2205: No), then the normal game period (effect mode A) does not shift to the time effect extension period (effect mode C). ), The process proceeds to S2202. Thereby, at the end of the time effect period (effect mode B) (S2204: Yes), if the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is not shifted (S2205: No), the effect mode A (normal game period) is shifted to. (S2202 and S2203).

  In the process of S2204, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the time effect period (effect mode B) (that is, the time effect is continuously executed) (S2204: No), the winning information storage area 223a is hit. It is determined whether or not the winning information is stored, or whether or not the winning determination result in change is a win (S2208). In the processing of S2208, when it is determined that the winning information that is won in the winning information storage area 223a is stored or the winning / no-going determination in change is a winning (S2208: Yes), the winning change ends. The time until this is calculated and set as the production time (extended production time) of the time production extension period (S2209). Then, a re-variation effect is set (S2210), and this process ends.

  Here, the re-variation effect is an effect of notifying (displaying) the player that the transition from the time effect period to the time effect extension period has been made and as if a new special symbol change has started. . Specifically, the display mode in which the display mode of the fish school appears from the right is displayed, and the variable display of the third symbol changed (reduced) to the display mode that is difficult for the player to view is displayed again. It can be varied (enlarged) in a possible (easy) manner. As described above, in the present control example, when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, the display has been executed (displayed) until then by switching to the sign display mode. The variable display of the three symbols is changed to a display mode (reduced display) that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. In the re-variation effect, when changing (enlarging) the variation display of the third symbol that has been changed (reduced) to a display mode that is difficult for the player to view, A display mode in which the display mode of the fish school appears from the right is displayed. Thereby, the player pays attention to the display mode of the school of fish, and therefore, the variable display of the third symbol can be varied (enlarged) without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2208, when it is determined that the winning information that is won in the winning information storage area 223a is not stored and the result of the determination of whether or not the change is in error (S2208: No), the processing of S2209 and S2210 is performed. This process is terminated by skipping the process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the specific time effect process (S1514) which is one process in the main process (refer FIG. 106) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 is demonstrated. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the content of the specific time effect process (S1514). The specific time effect process (S1514) is a process for executing (displaying) the specific time effect in the time effect period (effect mode B).

  In the specific time effect process, first, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S2301). Next, with reference to the effect mode storage area 233h, it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302). In the process of S2302, when it is determined that the current effect mode is not the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302: No), it is not determined that the specific time effect is executed in the subsequent processes. Then, this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2302 that the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302: Yes), then, the time information (current time) acquired in the process of S2301; Based on the information indicating the start time of the specific time effect stored in the effect time storage area 223g, it is determined whether or not it is the specific time effect timing (S2303). In the process of S2303, when it is determined that it is not the specific time effect timing (S2303: No), this process is terminated as it is because the specific time effect is not executed.

  In the process of S2303, when it is determined that it is a specific time effect (S2303: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a demonstration effect is being executed (S2304). In the process of S2304, when it is determined that the demonstration effect is being executed (S2304: Yes), this process is ended as it is. Thus, the demonstration suggests whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation game state (latency probability variation state) during execution of the demonstration effect, that is, when the player is not playing a game. It is possible to prevent the specific time effect from being displayed, and to prevent (suppress) the suggestion of the gaming state to the player who is not playing the game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2304 that the demonstration effect is not being executed (S2304: No), it is then determined whether or not the avoidance flag 223i is on (S2305). If it is determined in the processing of S2305 that the avoidance flag 223i is on (S2305: Yes), it is a case where the countdown notice effect is being executed among the notice effects based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Therefore, in order not to display the specific time effect (countdown effect) that is an effect including the same type of display mode (countdown), this processing is terminated as it is (that is, the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not set). ).

  In the process of S2305, when it is determined that the avoidance flag 223i is off (S2305: No), a specific time effect command for display is set in order to execute a specific time effect (countdown effect). Exit.

  When the countdown notice effect based on the winning to the second prize opening 640 is executed during the execution of the specific time effect by the processing of S2305 (when the avoidance flag 223i is on), the countdown related to the specific time effect is performed. The production is controlled so as not to be executed (S2305: Yes). Thereby, since the countdown notice effect and the specific time effect (countdown effect), which are effects including the same type of display mode (countdown), are not executed redundantly, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115, a description will be given of the entrance effect setting process (S1515) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ball entry effect setting process (S1515). This pitch effect setting process (S1515) is a process for displaying a pitch effect based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 during a short-time game. In this entry effect, the type selected by the remaining number of changes until the big hit is changed. In addition, the area where the entrance effect is displayed is set in order from the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 to the fourth area 81d.

  In the entry effect setting process (S1515), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a time-short game (S2401). If it is determined in the process of S2401 that the game is not in the time-saving game, the ball entry effect based on the game ball having entered the second winning opening 640 is not executed (displayed), so this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the game is a short-time game (S2401: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 (S2402). In this control example, based on the fact that the main control device 110 has entered a game ball into the second winning opening 640, a ball entry command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 stores the fact that there is a ball entering the second winning port 640 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 by receiving the ball entering command, and in the process of S2402, the second winning port is stored. It is determined whether or not a ball has entered 640.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a sound lamp control device that indicates that a game ball has entered the second winning port 640 is provided by providing a ball detection switch that detects that a game ball has entered the second winning port 640. 113 may be detectable. Further, the entrance detection switch may also be used as a switch that detects entry into the second winning opening 640 used in the main controller 110. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of a gaming machine can be reduced.

  In the process of S2402, when it is determined that no game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 (S2402: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when the above-described winning command is received from the main controller 110 and it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the second winning opening 640 (S2402: Yes), the winning information is stored. The winning effect is selected based on the winning information stored in the area 223a and the winning effect selection table 222b (S2403). Then, based on the entrance effect selected in the processing of S2403 and the display area counter 223f, a display entrance effect command is set (S2404). The display entry effect command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display ballistic effect command, the display control device 114 displays the ballistic effect in the display area corresponding to the command (the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display apparatus 81).

  When the processing of S2404 is completed, the value of the display area counter 223f is incremented by 1 (S2405), and it is determined whether or not the value of the added display area counter 223f is 5 (S2406). In the process of S2406, when it is determined that the value of the display area counter 223f is 5 (S2406: Yes), the entry effect in the fourth area 81d (see FIG. 89 or FIG. 90) in the entry effect setting process. In order to set the next area for displaying the entrance effect as the first area 81a (see FIG. 89 or 90), the value of the display area counter 223f is initialized to 1 (S2407). This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2406 that the display area counter 223f is not 5 (that is, any of 2 to 4) (S2406: No), it is necessary to initialize the value of the display area counter 223f. Therefore, the process of S2407 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Here, a ball entry effect can be displayed in the area of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the display area counter 223f by the processing of S2404. Specifically, if the value of the display area counter 223f is 1, it is 3 in the first area 81a of the 3rd symbol display device 81, and 2 is 3 in the second area 81b of the 3rd symbol display device 81. In the case of, the entry effect is displayed in the first area 81 c of the third symbol display device 81, and in the case of 4, the entry effect is displayed in the fourth area 81 d of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the winning effect setting process (S1515) is executed by the processing of S2405 to S2407, and the value of the display area counter 223 can be updated each time the display winning effect command is set. The entrance effect can be displayed in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the display device 81. After the entrance effect is displayed in the fourth area 81d, the entrance effect is again displayed from the first area 81a. They can be displayed in order. As a result, the pitching effect based on one pitch is continuously displayed until four game balls enter the second winning port 640, and the gaming ball is displayed at the second winning port 640. Even when the interval for entering a ball is very short, it is possible to secure a time for displaying the entrance effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player cannot visually recognize (recognize) the entry effect.

  In this control example, the entrance effect is configured to be displayed in order (clockwise) in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to display in reverse order (counterclockwise), or may be displayed randomly. Furthermore, the display order may be changed when a specific performance or variation is executed or when there is jackpot winning information. Thereby, the order of the displayed ball effects can be changed, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and prevent the player from getting bored early.

  In addition, the display order of the entrance effect displayed in each area (the first area 81a to the fourth area) of the third symbol display device 81 may be changed according to the degree of expectation that is a big hit. For example, when the expectation level that is a big hit is low, the entrance effect is displayed in order (clockwise) in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d, while the expectation level that is a big hit is high. Are displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise). Thereby, the player can recognize the expectation degree in the display order of the entry effect displayed in each area (the first area 81a to the fourth area), and each area (the first area 81a to the fourth area). It is no longer necessary to look closely at the contents of the pitching effect displayed on the player, so that the burden on the player can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the ball entering effects are displayed in order from the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 to the four areas of the fourth area 81d, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display area of the third symbol display device may be further subdivided (for example, divided into six regions from the first region to the sixth region) and displayed in order, or the display of the third symbol display device may be displayed. The display may be performed by reducing the number of divided areas (for example, divided into two areas from the first area to the second area).

  In this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display area (the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d) of the third symbol display device 81 to be displayed. For example, the display control device 114 may be configured to make a selection. Thereby, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 116 to 134, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 116, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2501), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot processing (S2501) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2501) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. A predetermined amount of the control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2601). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2602). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601.

  In addition, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing in S2602, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2602, it is then stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2603). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2604), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S2501 in FIG. 116). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) (S2605), the boot program is finished and this boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2501), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 117, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2602. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S2603 to S2605 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred in the process of S2601 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S2601. The processing of S2603 to S2605 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2602.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2603 to S2605 without performing the processes of S2601 and S2602. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2502). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2503). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2503, then the power-on variation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2504). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2504, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2505). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 132A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S4702 in FIG. 132A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118 (b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (see FIG. 82), which are images when the power is turned on, are simply drawn. Command determination processing (see S2809 in FIG. 118B) and simple display setting processing (see S2810 in FIG. 118B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first winning opening 64, and an instruction to start the changing effect is sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a variation image at power-on (see FIG. 82) is immediately displayed during the variation rendering period to perform a simple variation rendering. Can do. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2505, interrupt permission is set (S2506). Thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2506, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 118B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 118B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 87) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 118B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2801), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2801: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (see FIG. 82 (a)), In order to display a normal effect image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2802) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2803) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2802), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 119 to 127.

  In the display setting process (S2803), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2802) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2804). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2803) or the simple display setting process (S2809). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  When the task process is finished, the effect information correction process is executed (S2805). In this effect information correction process (S2805), among the images for one frame determined in the task process described above, various power-on images (main image at power-on, power-on fluctuations) used for display at power-on. The display presence / absence, the display coordinate position, and the enlargement ratio of the sprite of the image and the title image at power-on are corrected. The effect information correction process (S2805) may be executed within the task process (S2804).

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2806). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2807). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S2804) and the effect information correction process (S2805), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and transfer setting process (S2806) The drawing list shown in FIG. 87 is generated from the transfer instruction set by the step, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2808). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the processing of S2808, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to the missed and chance chances) are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2801: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 82) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2809) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2810) is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 127, details of the above-described command determination process (S2802) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. First, FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 119, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2901), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2901: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2901: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2803) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2902), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S2903).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S2904). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2904: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2905), the process returns to S2901.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S2905) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3001).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3001, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3001 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S3001 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S3003). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S3003, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S3004), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3005). Then, when both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3006), an effect in which the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is moved is executed. A special effect correction process for correcting the effect screen is executed (S3007). When the process of S3007 is completed, the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing in S3005 is updated, and the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing in S3001 is updated. Then, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3002. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S2504, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Details of the special effect correction process (S3007) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing special effect correction processing (S3007). This special effect correction process (S3007) is performed when the effect of moving the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is executed. This is a process for correcting the display mode (position, size) of various power-on images displayed on the sub display device 690).

  In the special effect correction process (S3007), first, it is determined whether or not the effect based on the received variation pattern command is an effect that moves the expansion / contraction effect device (expandable effect object) 540 (whether there is an extendable effect scenario). (S3201). If it is determined in the process of S3201 that there is an expansion / contraction character scenario (S3201: Yes), the front member 546 of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) moves to the lower position in the change, and the third symbol This is a case where an effect that makes the display device 81 difficult to visually recognize (or cannot be visually recognized) is executed. In this case, the correction information for extending / contracting the movable object is set in the correction information storage area 233m from the correction information table 234a3 (S3202), and the process proceeds to S3205. Through the process of S3202, the power-on variation image (see FIG. 83A) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is corrected and displayed on the sub display device 690. Therefore, even when the front member 546 of the expansion / contraction device 540 moves to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily visually recognize the power-on variation image by looking at the sub display device 690. it can. Here, the power-on variation image is a “◯” symbol displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 83 (a). In addition to this “◯” symbol, a “x” symbol is also displayed as a variation image. This variation image notifies that the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is being variably displayed by alternately displaying the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol. Then, when the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed, a special symbol hit is notified, and when the symbol “X” is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is dismissed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that there is no telescopic character scenario (S3201: No), then the effect based on the received variation pattern command is an effect that moves the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9). It is determined whether or not (whether there is a tilted actor scenario) (S3203). In the process of S3203, when it is determined that there is a tilted actor scenario (S3203: Yes), the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) in which the sub display device 690 is provided moves in response to the change. This is a case where an effect that makes the display device 690 difficult to view is executed. In this case, the tilted accessory moving correction information is set in the correction information storage area 233m from the correction information table 234a3 (S3204), and the process proceeds to S3205. Even when the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) provided with the sub display device 690 is moved by the process of S3204 and an effect that makes the sub display device 690 difficult to view is executed, the player is The power-on variation image displayed on the symbol display device 81 can be easily seen.

  Further, in the above-described processing of S3202 and S3204, a display that is easy for the player to visually recognize is set by setting information for correcting the display mode (position, size) of the power-on variation image corresponding to the effect to be executed. It controls to become an aspect. Thereby, it is not necessary to hold an image in a display mode that is easy for the player to visually recognize for each effect to be executed, so the area of the ROM 234 can be saved.

  When the process of S3202 or S3204 is finished, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to ON (S3205), and this process ends. The special effect correction flag 233n that is turned on in the process of S3205 is a display mode (position and size) of various power-on images in accordance with the execution of the telescopic character scenario or the tilted character scenario in the special effect correction process (S3007). This is a flag indicating that information for correcting is set. When the special effect correction flag 233n is set to ON, in the effect information correction process to be described later, the correction information for the normal effect is executed in spite of the fact that the variation based on the expansion / contraction character scenario and the tilting character scenario is executed. Can be prevented (suppressed) from being stored in the correction information storage area 233m. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that there is no tilted character scenario (S3203: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  In addition, as described above, the tilting operation unit (tilting role) 600 includes the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 50), and these curtain members are included in the tilting operation unit. The sub display device 690 provided in the player can be switched between an open state in which the player can visually recognize it and a sub display device 690 in a closed state in which the player cannot easily visually recognize it. Therefore, when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are in the closed state, the image displayed on the sub display device 690 may be corrected to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In addition, whether or not the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are in the closed state depends on whether the first and second curtain members 625 and 625 are in the same manner as in the case of determining the operation of the telescopic and tilting actors. May be determined based on the origin sensor that detects the origin positions of the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625, and determined that these curtain members are the origin positions (closed state). In such a case, the display on the sub display device 690 may be switched to display on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, even when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are closed due to a malfunction or the like, that is, when it becomes difficult to visually recognize the sub display device 690, the display image of the sub display device 690 is corrected. And can be displayed on the third symbol display device.

  Further, in the above-described tilting operation unit (tilting tool) 600 and expansion / contraction effect device (extensible tool) 540, the correction information is changed based on the discrimination result of the origin sensor that detects the origin position. Also good. As a result, even when an accessory is malfunctioning, for example, when the operation is different from the accessory scenario, the state is accurately detected, and various effects are displayed on the game of the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690. Can be displayed at a position that can be visually recognized by a person.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves up and down and the case where the tilting operation unit 600 tilts are described, but the tilting operation unit 600 slides on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. When an operating scenario is set, processing similar to that executed in the special effect correction processing (S3007) may be executed. Even when the tilting operation unit 600 performs a sliding operation, a series of operation scenarios in which the sliding operation is performed is set by the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, since the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the change pattern for executing the slide operation by a display change pattern command, the slide operation correction information is set in the correction information storage area 233m. Here, the slide motion correction information is the power-on variation image (“○” symbol (or “×” shown in FIG. 83A) that is corrected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the slide motion. The display coordinates are set so that the variable display)) moves to a position that is not on the back side of the tilting operation unit 600 that slides. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation image (see FIG. 83A) is displayed on the upper left of the third symbol display device 81. However, when configured to display on the lower right, the tilting operation unit 600 is viewed from the right side. When the slide operation has been performed to the left, the display is set by sliding (moving) gradually to the left in accordance with the operation of the tilting operation unit 600. Such coordinate information is set in the slide motion correction information. Further, when the slide operation is displayed to the left in accordance with the operation of the tilt operation unit 600 and moved to the area where the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, the tilt operation unit 600 is displayed. The coordinates may be set so as to move to the sub display device 690 incorporated in the display. With this configuration, it is possible to display the change image (see FIG. 83 (a)) indicating that the special symbol is being changed by the player in an easy-to-see manner. In the present embodiment, the object to be moved and displayed is the variation image (see FIG. 83A), but it may be the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or may be a reserved symbol. It may be a design such as a character. Note that the above-described slide motion correction information is set in the display control device 114 in advance corresponding to the slide motion motion scenario set in the audio lamp control device 113, and coordinate information according to the slide motion timing. Is set to be variably set.

  In this control example, the display positions of various power-on images are corrected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image (character image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690 during a normal performance. Or a display position such as a variation pattern) may be corrected.

  Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2904 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2904: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2906). If there is a display variation type command (S2906: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2907), and the processing returns to S2901.

  Details of the stop type command process (S2907) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information (any one of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete miss, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command is handled. The stop type table is determined (S3101), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118B) is executed. The stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S3102).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3102 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S3103), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S3102 is described. In the task process (S2804) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S3102 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S3103, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. However, before the drawing on the third symbol display device 81 is performed, the normal video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3101, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S3102.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2906 that there is no display stop type command (S2906: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a jackpot related command among the unprocessed commands (S2908). In the process of S2908, when it is determined that there is a jackpot related command (S2908: Yes), the jackpot related command process is executed (S2909), and the process returns to S2901.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the details of the jackpot related command processing (S2909) will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related command processing (S2909). This jackpot related command processing (S2909) is processing corresponding to various commands (display opening command, display round number command, display ending command) for executing the jackpot effect received from the sound lamp control device 113. This is a process for execution.

  In the jackpot related command processing (S2909), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S3301). If it is determined that there is a display opening command in the process of S3301 (S3301: Yes), the opening command process (S3302) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3303.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S3302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In this opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3401 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3405), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3404, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3401, The drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of one frame image to be displayed next is specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3402. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required after the opening effect is finished until the round effect is started. There is a risk that time will be generated, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for 16 rounds). When image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display ending command is received, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. May occur, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the operation has stopped, and to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in this control example, when a display opening command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that point, and until the jackpot variation display is ended in the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect ends. As a result, when the opening effect is finished on the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately on the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for five rounds). ) Since the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when it is finished, the player will not feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started therefrom, Control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect ends before the variation effect that is a big hit ends in the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 ends, the opening effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so the player is concerned that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 122, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S3301 that there is no display opening command (S3301: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S3303). If there is a round number command for use (S3303: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S3304). This round number command process (S 3304) executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3501, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3505), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 122. If it is determined in the process of S3303 that there is no display round number command (S3303: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3305). If there is an ending command (S3305: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3306), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if there is no display ending command in the process of S3305 (S3305: No), the process of S3306 is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S3306) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124A is a flowchart showing the ending command process (S3306). This ending command process (S3306) executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer 233d. (S3601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3602).

  Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3605), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2908 that there is no jackpot related command (S2908: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notice command among the unprocessed commands (S2910), and the display notice is issued. If there is a command (S2910: Yes), a notice command process is executed (S2911), and the process returns to S2901.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 124B, details of the advance command processing (S2911) will be described. FIG. 124B is a flowchart showing the notice command process. This notice command processing executes a process corresponding to the display notice command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the advance command processing, first, the advance effect display data table indicated by the display advance command is determined, and the determined advance effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S3701). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3702).

  Then, based on the notice effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3705), the notice command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By this notice command processing (S2911), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the notice effect display data table, so that the notice effect set corresponding to the effect mode in the sound lamp control device 113 is the third symbol. It is displayed on the display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2910 that there is no display advance notice command (S2910: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ball effect command among unprocessed commands (S2912). If there is a display pitch effect command (S2912: Yes), the pitch effect command process is executed (S2913), and the process returns to S2901.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 125 (a), the details of the ball effect command processing (S2913) will be described. FIG. 125 (a) is a flowchart showing the incoming ball effect command processing (S2913). This incoming ball effect command process (S2913) is to execute processing corresponding to the incoming ball effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the entry effect command process, first, an entry effect display data table indicated by the display entry effect command is determined. Then, the determined entry effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and displayed in the display area (any one of the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d) indicated by the command. The buffer 233d is set (S3801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3802).

  Then, based on the entrance effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3801, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3805), the ball entering effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By this entry effect command processing (S2913), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the entry effect display data table and the display area indicated by the command, and is selected by the audio lamp control device 113. The entrance effect is displayed in order on each display area (first area 81a to fourth area 81d) of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the entrance effects are displayed in order in the four display areas (the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d) provided on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and up to four types of entrance effects. Can be simultaneously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display ball effect command in the process of S2912 (S2912: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display specific time effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2914). If there is a display specific time effect command (S2914: Yes), the specific time effect command process is executed (S2915), and the process returns to S2901.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 125B, details of the specific time effect command processing (S2915) will be described. FIG. 125B is a flowchart showing the specific time effect command process (S2915). This specific time effect command processing (S2915) is to execute processing corresponding to the display specific time effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the specific time effect command processing, first, the specific time effect display data table indicated by the display specific time effect command is determined, the determined specific time effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3902).

  Then, based on the specific time effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3901, the time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3905), the ball entering effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By the specific time effect command processing (S2915), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the specific time effect display data table, so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) selected in the sound lamp control device 113 is the first. It will be displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2914 that there is no display specific time effect command (S2914: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display effect mode change command among the unprocessed commands (S2916). If there is a display effect mode change command (S2916: Yes), the effect mode change command process is executed (S2917), and the process returns to S2901.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 126A, details of the effect mode change command process (S2917) will be described. FIG. 126 (a) is a flowchart showing the effect mode change command process (S2917). This effect mode change command process (S2917) executes a process corresponding to the display specific time effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the effect mode change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233p is set to ON (S4001), and the effect mode flag 233r corresponding to the effect mode type based on the received command is set to ON (S4002). Exit.

  By the rear image change flag 233p that is set to ON in the processing of S4001, the processing (S4910 to S4915) for changing the rear image in the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 133) described later is executed. Further, the effect mode flag 233r that is set to ON in S4002 is referred to in the process for changing the back image in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) (see S4911 in FIG. 133), and the effect mode flag 233r. The rear image is changed based on the set effect mode type. Thereby, the back image can be changed in accordance with the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113. As a result, the back image can be changed based on the change in the effect mode, and the player can easily recognize that the effect mode has been changed.

  Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2916 that there is no display effect mode command (S2916: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop command among the unprocessed commands (S2918). If there is a use stop command (S2918: Yes), stop command processing is executed (S2919), and the processing returns to S2901.

  Details of the stop command process (S2919) will be described with reference to FIG. 126 (b). FIG. 126 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop command process (S2919). This stop command process (S2919) executes a process corresponding to the display stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop command process, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to OFF (S4101), and this process ends. As described above, the special effect correction flag 233n set to OFF in the process of S4101 is an expansion / contraction effect device in the special effect correction process (S3007) executed when the variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. Correction information corresponding to the correction information storage area 233m when there is a telescopic combination scenario in which 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable or there is a tilting combination scenario in which the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is movable. The correction information of the table 234a3 is stored and set to ON.

  This stop command process is a process executed based on a stop command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 when each variation effect is stopped. Therefore, the special effect correction flag 233n is turned off when the changing effect based on the telescopic character scenario or the tilted character scenario is stopped. Thus, in the effect information correction process (see S2804) executed in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118B), the normal effect correction information or the demonstration effect correction information is set in the correction information storage area 233m. As a result, the image in which the coordinates and the like displayed based on the variation effect of the telescopic character scenario or the tilted character scenario are corrected is corrected to the original coordinates and displayed.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 119. If it is determined in the processing of S2918 that there is no display stop command (S2918: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2920), and there is an error command. If (S2920: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2921), and the process returns to S2901.

  Details of the error command process (S2921) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S4202). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4201, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S4202 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S4202 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 119. If it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of S2920 (S2920: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2922), and the processing returns to S2901.

  Examples of other unprocessed commands include a rear image change command. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  If a back image change command has been received, back image change command processing is executed (S2922). In this back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 223p for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S4703) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command is set to ON. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF, the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 223p set by the back image change command process is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the set back image discrimination flag. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back images A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the current time is determined from the set back image discrimination flag. The rear image type to be displayed is specified, and the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the rear image range is stored (for resident use) Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the back image change command processing, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the process of S2901, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2901: Yes). ), The processing of S2902 to S2922 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2901 to S2922 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S2901 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2809) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary for displaying a power-on image (see FIG. 82) from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, a display variation pattern command and a display command Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 120 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 120 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. For this command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Further, when the power interruption occurs during the change of the special symbol and then recovered, the special transmission transmitted in S1010 of the startup process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 described above when the power is turned on. In the process of S1504 of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the effect permission command including that the design is changing, the display control device When the display control device 114 receives the change start command of the power-on variation image output to 114 (reception processing in S1616 of the command determination processing (FIG. 107, S1511)), the simple command determination processing (S2809) In the simple display setting process (S2810) that is received at Setting the display data table-on change image on the display data table buffer 233 d) is set. It should be noted that at the timing at which the main controller 110 outputs an instruction to start changing the power-on change image corresponding to the special symbol that was changing when the power was turned off, the power-on change image is the power of the resident video RAM 235. Since it has already been transferred to the variation image area 235b at the time of insertion, the start of variation display is immediately executed (starts display) in the third symbol display device 81. In this case, the power-on variation images shown in FIGS. 82B to 82C are alternately displayed.

  It should be noted that an effect permission command based on the game that was being executed when the power was turned off is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101), and then executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command for stopping the fluctuation display is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 based on the reception of the stop command. The display control device 114 determines that the display stop command has been received by the simple command determination process (see 118 (b)), and changes the power-on variation image (FIG. 82 (b) or FIG. 82) in the display mode based on the received command. (See (c)).

  Note that if the display controller 114 completes the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 before receiving the display stop command for stopping the above-described power-on variation image, only the power-on variation image is displayed. Is displayed at the coordinate position for normal performance (see FIG. 83A) of the third symbol display device 81. This is because the display stop command for stopping the power-on variation image defines the stop mode of the power-on variation image, and therefore cannot select the normal effect stop mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display control device 114 may determine and display the stop mode based on the stop mode (big hit or miss) of the power-on variation image. Thereby, even when the fluctuation of the fluctuation image at the time of power-on is being executed, it is possible to switch from the point in time when the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is completed to the normal effect, and to improve the interest of the player. .

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 120A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3001. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3002, a process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2803), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 128, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S4301: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S4302 to S4304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S4302), and S4303 to S4304. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S4303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S4304).

  Details of the warning image setting process (S4304) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S4401).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S4401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 128. After the warning image setting process (S4304) or in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S4303: No), the process proceeds to S4305.

  In S4305, pointer update processing is executed (S4305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4501). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S4501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S4502). As a result, if it is End information (S4502: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4503). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S4503: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4505), and this processing is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a display data table for demonstration (S4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S4506), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 128, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S4306 together with the warning image previously expanded and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4308). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S4308: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S4309).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S4309: Yes), the confirmation display effect has not yet been produced and the decision display effect has been performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S4315 is used to identify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task processing (S2804), the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S4315 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4309, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S4309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S4316). If the demo display flag is off (S4316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S4317), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4318). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4321), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S4316, if the demo display flag is on (S4316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2810) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. 82) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, details of the effect information correction process (S2805), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing effect information correction processing (S2805). This effect information correction process (S2805) corrects the position at which various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, power-on title image) are displayed at the time of normal performance or demonstration performance. It is a process to use.

  In the effect information correction process (S2805), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If it is determined in the process of S4601 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: No), since the simple image at the time of power-on is displayed, the effect information is not corrected and the present information is not corrected. The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the simple image display flag 233c is off (S4601: Yes), the transfer of the resident image is completed in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 132A) described later, Since the normal effect can be executed, it is then determined whether or not the special effect correction flag 233n is off (S4602).

  In the process of S4602, if it is determined that the special effect correction flag 233n is on (S4602: No), the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable in the special effect correction process (see FIG. 121) described above. Since the correction information corresponding to the production based on the telescopic character scenario to be performed or the tilting character scenario in which the tilting action unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is movable is already stored in the correction information storage area 233m. This process is terminated without setting correction information.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4602 that the special effect correction flag 233n is off (S4602: Yes), the demonstration display flag is turned off in order to set correction information according to the currently executed effect. It is determined whether or not (S4603).

  If it is determined in the process of S4603 that the demo display flag is off (S4603: Yes), the demonstration effect is not executed, that is, the normal effect is executed, so the correction information storage area The normal effect correction information is set in the correction information table 234a3 to 233m (S4604), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4603 that the demonstration display flag is ON (S4603: No), this is a case where a demonstration effect is being executed, so that the demonstration is performed from the correction information table 234a3 to the correction information storage area 233m. The effect correction information is set (S4605), and this process is terminated.

  In this way, in the effect information correction process (S2805), correction information for correcting the display position of various power-on images according to the state of the pachinko machine 10 (when the power is turned on, during the normal effect, during the demonstration effect, etc.). Settings are being made. Thereby, in a plurality of states of the pachinko machine 10, a common image can be used to produce an effect, so that the capacity of the ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, since the display mode such as the display position and the enlargement ratio is corrected, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to visually recognize according to each effect.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133, the details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2806), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 132 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4701). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4701: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S4702), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S4701, that is, if it is off (S4701: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4702), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2806) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 132 (b). FIG. 132 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4702).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S4801), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S4801: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S4802). In the process of S4802, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S4802 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4802: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4802: Yes), the process proceeds to S4803. Also, as a result of the process of S4801, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4801: No), the process proceeds to S4803.

  In the process of S4803, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4803). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S4804), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing in S4803 (S4803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4805), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2809 in FIG. 118B) and the simple display setting process (see S2810 in FIG. 118B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 119 to 127) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 128 to 130) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) (see S4701: No in FIG. 132A).

  The MPU 231 executes the resident image transfer setting process to the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image, the power-on variation image, and the power-on title image that have already been transferred in the main process. All the resident object image data to be resident can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In this control example, various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, power-on title image) displayed when the power is turned on are corrected for normal display by correcting the display position. Also configured to be available. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare images to be used when the power is turned on and at the time of normal performance, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved.

  Further, in this control example, image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 is handled as one image data, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the coordinates or the sub display device. Whether to display to 690 is controlled. This eliminates the need to separately control (transfer, etc.) the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, thereby reducing the control load. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 may be provided.

  Further, since the sub display device 690 has a lower resolution than the third symbol display device 81, the data amount of the image displayed on the sub display device 690 is the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Less than the amount. Therefore, in the display control device 114, the image (title image at power-on) to be displayed on the sub-display device 690 having a small amount of image data is first stored in the resident video RAM. The time from when the image is displayed until the image is displayed can be shortened.

  Here, the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 is composed of one image data as described above. Therefore, when the power-on title image (see FIG. 82A), which is a power-on image, is first displayed on the sub display device 690 when the power is turned on, the area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 ( For the data in FIG. 81 (region of width 800 × length 600), 0 data may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the power is turned on, first, image data to be displayed on the sub display device 690 is matched with the resolution of the sub display device 690 (see FIG. 81, 400 × 300 image data). May be used to display on the sub-display device 690. In this case, when the images for displaying on the third symbol display device 690 (main image at power-on, fluctuation image at power-on, etc.) are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 and Using the image data to be displayed on the sub display device 690 (see FIG. 81, horizontal 1200 × vertical 600), the display is switched to the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. Thus, the data amount of the image set to be displayed on the sub display device 690 when the power is turned on can be reduced. Thus, the power-on image (power-on title image) is displayed on the sub display device 690 after the power is turned on. Can be shortened.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S4703), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2806) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4703).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4305) of the display setting process (S2803) executed previously is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4902). If it is transfer data information (S4902: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S4903, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S4904), and the process proceeds to step S4905.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data in the process of S4902 (S4902: No), the processes of S4903 and S4904 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4905. In the process of S4905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S4905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4905: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S4906).

  In the process of S4906, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S4906 (S4906: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4906: Yes), the process proceeds to S4907. Also, as a result of the process of S4905, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S4905: No), the process proceeds to S4907.

  In the process of S4907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4907). If the transfer start flag is on (S4907: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. (S4908), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4903 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S4913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4907: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag 223p is on (S4909). If the back image change flag 223p is not on but off (S4909: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change 223r flag is on (S4909: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 223p is set to off (S4910), it is provided for each back image type. Among the back image discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S4911). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The head address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4912), and the process proceeds to S4913.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S4909, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S4913, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4913). The determination in the process of S4913 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S4913 (S4913: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4913 (S4913: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S4914). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S4914, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4915), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, when the normal image transfer process is executed, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the back image is displayed. The image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, details of the above-described drawing process (S2807), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2804) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S2806), the drawing list shown in FIG. 87 is generated (S5001). That is, in the process of S5001, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2804). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2806), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S5002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S5002, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S5003). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 118B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the first control example, control is performed so that the display image used when the power is turned on is corrected and used during normal performance. As a result, since a common display image can be used at the time of power-on and at the time of normal production, the capacity of the ROM can be saved.

  Further, in the present control example, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 are provided in the effect that a specific accessory (the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9)) is movable. Control is performed so as to correct the content of the effect displayed on the screen. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 is difficult to visually recognize in the effect that the specific accessory is movable, for example, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the sub display device 690. By doing so, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the display content is easily visible to the player.

  Further, in the effect that the vertical movement unit 400 is movable and the door member 470 is opened, when the door member 470 is moved down, the opening / closing drive motor 466 for maintaining the door member 470 in a closed state is not excited. Control (energization stop control). Accordingly, the door member 470 is opened by the inertial force that acts on the door member 470 when the door member 470 is dropped and moved without driving the opening / closing drive motor 466, so that power consumption can be reduced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when a specific notice effect is executed based on a ball entering a winning opening in a time effect period that is periodically executed, the effect executed in the time effect period is limited. You are in control. Thereby, when the countdown effect which is a specific notice effect is executed, the countdown effect executed in the time effect period can be limited. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused by overlapping the countdown effects during the time effect period.

  In addition, the pitching effect displayed based on the winning ball entering the winning opening is sequentially displayed in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display area. Thereby, even when the interval between the game balls entering the winning opening is short, the period during which the ball effect is displayed can be lengthened, and the player can easily see the ball effect. be able to.

  The present control example is not limited to the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment, and may be executed by any of the pachinko machines 10 of the above-described embodiments, or a combination of the above-described embodiments. It may be executed by the pachinko machine 10.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 156. In the first control example described above, a ballistic effect that is executed in a short time state of a normal symbol, a time effect period (effect mode B) that is periodically (five minutes every hour), and the time effect period. The player's interest has been improved by executing various display effects such as a specific time effect performed during (effect mode B). In the first control example, the time production period and the start time of the specific time production are set when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Thereby, since each production | presentation (time production, specific time production, etc.) can be started at the same timing with respect to the several pachinko machine 10 which turned on the power collectively at the same timing, several pachinko machine 10 It is possible to perform a production with a sense of unity.

  In addition, in the second control example, a technique that can suitably control the operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and the like will be described. Here, as described above, the accessory such as the tilting operation unit 600 is driven by the drive motor constituted by a stepping motor or the like. It is known that this drive motor is more likely to cause individual differences and more likely to deteriorate over time, as compared with a display device (third symbol display device 81, sub display device 690). In other words, when image data is set for the display device, there is almost no problem such as display delay, but when operation data is set for the drive motor, the drive speed decreases due to deterioration over time. (Torque is reduced) and step-out may occur. That is, even if the same operation scenario is set, there may be variations in the number of operation steps and the operation speed, and therefore different operations may be executed in each pachinko machine 10.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, the operation status of the tilting operation unit 600, the slide operation unit 700, etc. is checked every time the power is turned on, and if there is a deterioration or the like, a correction value for correcting the operation scenario is obtained. Configured to set. Thereby, in each pachinko machine 10, operation | movement of the various accessories driven with a drive motor can be performed suitably.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. And a part of processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 for detecting the slide operation position of the slide operation unit 700 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the base member 710 of the slide operation unit 700 has a slide origin sensor 717 for detecting whether or not the column member 720 is at the origin position (retracted position), and whether or not it is at the extended position. A slide position sensor 718 for detection is provided (see FIG. 49). Since these are composed of the same type of sensors, only the slide position detection sensor 718 will be described here, and the description of the slide origin detection sensor 717 will be omitted.

  FIG. 136 (a) shows the positional relationship between the light shielding plate 726a and the slide position detection sensor 718 when the slide operation unit 700 is sliding in the direction from the origin (retracted position) to the extended position. FIG. As shown in FIG. 136 (a), the slide position detection sensor 718 is provided with a light shielding detector 718a. The light shielding detection unit 718a shows both the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit described above, and the light shielding plate 726a depends on whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the light shielding detection unit 718a is received by the light receiving unit. Whether or not is in the overhang position can be determined.

  In the example of FIG. 136 (a), the light shielding plate 726a is disposed in the right direction in front view with respect to the light shielding detection unit 718a. That is, the arrangement of the light shielding detector 718a and the light shielding plate 726a is shifted. In this case, since there is nothing to block between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the light shielding detection unit 718a, the light from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit. While the light receiving unit is receiving light, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is in the L (low) state. The output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is received by the sound lamp control device 113. If the output is L (low), it is determined that the column member 720 has not reached the overhang position.

  On the other hand, when the left end of the light shielding plate 726a hits the right end of the light shielding detection unit 718a, light emitted from the light emitting unit starts to be shielded by the light shielding plate 726a (see FIG. 136 (b)). As shown in FIG. 136 (c), when the light shielding plate 726a is disposed so as to completely overlap with the light shielding detector 718, the light emitted from the light emitting part of the light shielding detector 718a is completely shielded. . That is, the light receiving unit cannot receive light. In this case, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is set to H (high). When the sound lamp control device 113 detects that the output from the slide position detection sensor 718 is H (high), it determines that the column member 720 is in the extended position. Here, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is H (high) or L (low) based on the voltage value of the output signal. That is, if the voltage output from the slide position detection sensor 718 is 5V, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is determined as H (high). If the voltage is 0V, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is L. Is determined.

  Since the slide origin sensor 717 has the same configuration, the output is set to H (high) if the column member 720 is at the origin position (retreat position), and the output is L if it deviates from the origin position (retreat position). Set to (low). The sound lamp control device 113 only determines whether the output of each sensor is H or L, and the rough arrangement of the column member 720 (whether it is the origin position or the overhang position, or between these positions) Can be easily grasped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137 and FIG. 138, a tilt origin sensor 618 for detecting whether or not the effect member 620 of the tilt operation unit 600 is in the origin position (inverted state) will be described. The tilt origin sensor 618 is composed of the same kind of sensors as the slide origin sensor 717 and the slide position sensor 718 described above.

  FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a case where the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is at the origin position (inverted state). As shown in the figure, when the effect member 620 is in the origin position (inverted state), the sensor shielding part 627 provided on the effect member 620 side is the light emitting part of the tilt origin sensor 618 provided on the base member 610 side. The light emitted from the light emitting unit is blocked and does not reach the light receiving unit. That is, the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 is set to H (high). By outputting this H (high) signal to the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to notify that the effect member is at the origin position (inverted state).

  FIG. 138A is a diagram showing a positional relationship between the tilt origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding unit 627 when the effect member 620 tilts (swings) in the left direction when viewed from the front. FIG. 138 (b) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the tilt origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding unit 627 when the effect member 620 tilts (swings) in the right direction when viewed from the front. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (a), when the effect member 620 tilts (swings) in the left direction when viewed from the front, the sensor shielding portion 627 provided on the effect member 620 is also linked to the effect member 620. Variable in the upper left direction. As a result, the tilt origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding unit 627 are displaced from each other, so that the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the tilt origin sensor 618 can be received by the light receiving unit. As with the other sensors described above, while the light from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit, the output of the tilting origin sensor 618 is set to L (low). By outputting this H (high) signal to the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to notify that the effect member 620 has deviated from the origin position (inverted state).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 138 (b), when the effect member 620 tilts (swings) in the right direction when viewed from the front, the sensor shielding unit 627 provided on the effect member 620 also becomes the effect member 620. Interlocks with the lower right direction. As a result, the tilt origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding unit 627 are displaced from each other, so that the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the tilt origin sensor 618 can be received by the light receiving unit. Therefore, also in this case, the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 is set to L (low), and the sound lamp control device 113 is notified.

  In this manner, by using the tilt origin sensor 618, it is possible to easily detect whether or not the effect member 620 is at the origin position (inverted state) and notify the sound lamp control device 113.

  In this control example, the single tilt origin sensor 618 is used to determine whether or not the effect member 620 is at the origin position. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. Sensors for detecting whether or not the effect member 620 is at the maximum movable position when the tilting operation (swinging operation) is performed on the right side and the left side may be provided. With this configuration, when the tilting motion (swinging motion) reaches the maximum movable position, the swinging motion can be reliably stopped and the swinging direction can be reversed in the reverse direction (origin direction). it can. Therefore, since it can prevent (suppress) operating beyond the movable range of the production | presentation member 620 when performing swinging operation | movement, possibility that a failure and abnormal operation | movement will generate | occur | produce can be reduced.

<Electric Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 142. First, FIG. 139 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example.

  As shown in FIG. 139, in this control example, various sensors 230 are electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. Specifically, the various sensors 230 are provided with at least the tilt origin sensor 618, the slide origin detection sensor 717, and the slide position detection sensor 718 described above. In addition to these, various sensors such as a sensor for detecting the origin position of the vertical operation unit 400 and a sensor for detecting the origin position of the combined operation unit 500 are provided. Since the operation status of each accessory can be accurately grasped by the various sensors 230, the operation of the accessory can be suitably controlled.

  In this control example, as the other devices 228, the slide drive motor 751 for causing the slide operation unit 700 to perform the slide operation and the tilt operation (swinging operation) of the tilt operation unit 600 are performed. A tilting drive motor 661 is provided. Each motor can be driven by these motors.

  Next, the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 140A, in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example, an operation scenario table 222c and a swing area table 222d are added. Has been.

  The operation scenario table 222c is a data table that defines the operation content when performing an effect using each accessory. More specifically, it is a data table in which setting values (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction, etc.) set for various drive motors corresponding to each accessory are defined. Details of the operation scenario table 222c will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142 (a).

  FIG. 141 (a) is a block diagram showing the operation scenario table 222c. The operation scenario table 222c stores data for each type of accessory that can be driven (variable). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 141A, for example, when an effect for driving the slide operation unit 700 is set, a motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the slide drive motor 751 is set. When the slide operation table 222c1 that defines the setting value to be set or an effect for driving the tilting operation unit 600 is set, the setting is made for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the tilting drive motor 661. A tilting operation table 222c2 and the like defining the set values to be set are provided.

  These will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. 141 (b) and (c). FIG. 141 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the slide operation table 222c1 described above. As shown in FIG. 141 (b), the slide operation table 222c1 includes setting values set for the motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223n indicating the setting progress based on the operation scenario. (Operation speed, number of operation steps, and operation direction) are defined.

  Here, the operation speed indicates the frequency with which the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) for setting the operation of one step to the slide drive motor 751, and is a signal output per second ( Number of pulses) (pps, pulses per second). For example, if the operation speed is 100 pps, it means that a signal (pulse) is output 100 times per second from the motor driver to the slide drive motor 751. That is, the slide drive motor 751 is driven at a speed of 100 steps per second. The number of operation steps indicates the number of operations performed by the slide drive motor 751. In other words, a signal (pulse) for setting a one-step operation from the motor driver to the slide drive motor 751. ) Is output. For example, the number of operation steps 120 means that one step of operation is set 120 times for the slide drive motor 751. Furthermore, the operation direction means the drive direction of the slide drive motor 751 (motor rotation direction), and two types of directions, a positive direction and a negative direction, can be set. In the slide drive motor 751, the direction from the retracted position (origin position) to the extended position is a positive direction, and the direction from the extended position to the retracted position (origin position) is a negative direction. By setting these set values for the motor driver for driving the slide drive motor 751, the corresponding operation can be executed accurately.

  As shown in FIG. 141 (b), the value “01H” of the motion pointer 223n indicates that the strut member 720 of the slide motion unit 700 is slid from the retracted position (origin position) to the extended position (outward path). Motion). Specifically, 100 pps is defined as the operation speed, 120 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when it is time to drive the slide operation unit 700 in the production.

  120 steps means a design value of the number of steps up to the overhang position. That is, it means that the support member 720 reaches the detection position of the slide position detection sensor 718 (see FIG. 136 (c)) when the slide drive motor 751 is driven 120 steps in the designed operation. Here, the operation as designed means that the sliding drive motor 751 accurately executes the same operation without step-out or idling, and various gears for transmitting the driving force of the motor to the column member 720. It means the operation when etc. are rotated accurately.

  The value “02H” of the motion pointer 223n is associated with an operation (return path operation) for sliding the column member 720 of the slide operation unit 700 from the extended position to the retracted position (origin position). Specifically, 100 pps is defined as the operation speed, 120 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when it is time to retract the slide operation unit 700 to the origin position (retreat position) in the production. The timing of the retreat is defined in advance according to the type of effect.

  FIG. 141 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the tilting operation table 222c2 described above. Similarly to the slide operation table 222c1, the tilt operation table 222c2 has set values (operation speed, number of operation steps, and operation direction) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223n. It is prescribed. The operation pointer values “01H” and “02H” are associated with setting values for tilting (swinging) the effect member 620 leftward as viewed from the front. In other words, the motion pointer value “01H” includes a motion speed of 100 pps, a motion step number of 10 steps, and a forward motion direction as set values for tilting from the home position (inverted state) to the left in the front view. It is prescribed. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates 10 steps to the left in the front view at an operation speed of 100 pps.

  In addition, the operation pointer value “02H” includes a setting value for returning the effect member 620 tilted leftward in the front view to the origin position (inverted state), an operation speed of 100 pps, an operation step number of 10 steps, and a negative direction. The operation directions are respectively defined. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates 10 steps to the left in the front view at an operation speed of 100 pps. By setting a setting value corresponding to the operation pointer value “01H” and setting a setting value corresponding to the operation pointer value “02H” after the setting operation is completed, the effect member 620 is seen from the origin position to the right in the front view. After performing a tilting operation (swinging motion) of 10 steps in the direction, a returning operation to the home position (inverted state) is performed.

  Furthermore, setting values for tilting the head member 620 in the right direction in front view (swinging motion) are associated with the motion pointer values “03H” and “04H”. In other words, the operation pointer value “03H” includes an operation speed of 100 pps, an operation step number of 10 steps, and an operation direction in the positive direction as set values for tilting from the origin position (inverted state) to the right in the front view. It is prescribed. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates 10 steps to the right in the front view at an operation speed of 100 pps.

  In addition, the operation pointer value “02H” includes a setting value for returning the effect member 620 tilted leftward in the front view to the origin position (inverted state), an operation speed of 100 pps, an operation step number of 10 steps, and a negative direction. The operation directions are respectively defined. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates 10 steps to the left in the front view at an operation speed of 100 pps. By setting a setting value corresponding to the motion pointer value “03H” and setting the setting value corresponding to the motion pointer value “04H” after the setting operation is completed, the effect member 620 is moved from the origin position to the right in the front view. After performing a tilting operation (swinging motion) of 10 steps in the direction, a returning operation to the home position (inverted state) is performed.

  In this way, by defining the setting contents for the motor driver in association with the value of the operation pointer 223n, the value of the operation pointer 223n is updated, and only the setting value corresponding to the updated value is set. The operation of the effect member 620 can be easily set.

  In addition to the above-described slide motion table 222c1 (see FIG. 141 (b)) and tilting motion table 222c2 (see FIG. 141 (c)), the action scenario table 222c includes a driving accessory (vertical motion unit 400, A dedicated data table is defined for each type of composite operation unit 500 (not shown). By referring to the table corresponding to each accessory defined in the operation scenario table 222c and outputting the set value to the corresponding motor driver, the same operation can be executed every time in the corresponding rendering.

  In actuality, motors, gears, and the like may vary in operation due to individual differences, aging deterioration, and the like. Therefore, even if the set values defined in the operation scenario table 222c are set at the same timing, the target operation is performed. It may not be possible. Although details will be described later, in this control example, in order to absorb the influence of the above-described variation, the amount of movement of the accessory at the time of power-on is measured (analyzed) and the analysis result is obtained. Accordingly, the slide operation set value is corrected (corrected). That is, it is configured such that a correction value for correcting individual variation or the like is added (or subtracted) to the setting value defined in the operation scenario table 222c. Thereby, the operation | movement of the accessory in each pachinko machine 10 can be performed without a sense of incongruity even under the influence of individual difference and aged deterioration.

  Furthermore, in the operation scenario table 222c of this control example, an initial operation table 222c5 in which the setting contents for the motor driver corresponding to each accessory in the initial operation executed based on power-on of the pachinko machine 10 is specified. (See FIG. 141 (a)). By executing the initial operation based on the initial operation table 222c5, it is possible to determine whether or not each accessory operates normally. Further, when the initial operation is executed, the contents of the tilt operation (swing operation) of the tilt operation unit 600 and the slide operation of the slide operation unit 700 are analyzed, and a correction value for correcting the operation according to the analysis result. Is identified. Details of the initial operation table 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 142 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the initial operation table 222c5. As shown in FIG. 142 (a), the initial operation table 222c5 is associated with the value of the operation pointer 223n, and the type of the accessory for which the operation is set, and the motor driver corresponding to the accessory are set. Setting values (operation speed, number of operation steps, and operation direction) are defined.

  More specifically, the value “01H” of the action pointer 223n is associated with the slide action unit 700 as the type of the accessory, and the action content of 100 pps in the forward direction is defined as the action content. The number of operation steps is not determined, and the slide operation is repeated in the forward direction (the direction of the overhang position) until it is detected that the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 has become H (high). That is, the flow of setting one step operation, checking whether the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is H (high), and setting the one step operation again if the output remains L (low). The operation is repeated. The number of operation steps set until the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 becomes H (high) is counted by the correction counter 223w. After the operation is completed, the number of operation steps from the origin position to the overhang position is designed. The difference from the 120 step value is analyzed. A correction value for correcting the set value of the slide operation is calculated according to the analyzed difference. Here, when the operation of one step is repeatedly set, for example, a delay of, for example, 10 milliseconds is made with respect to the operation of one step so that the operation speed is the same as that when the operation of a plurality of steps is set during the normal game. Is set. In other words, one step operation is set every 10 milliseconds (at an operation speed of 100 pps). Thereby, since it can be set as the operation | movement aspect same as during a normal game, it can prevent misunderstanding that abnormality has generate | occur | produced from the appearance of operation | movement. In the following description, when an operation is set for each step toward various sensors, a delay is set so that the operation speed is the same as that during the normal game.

  The tilting motion unit 600 is associated with the values “02H” to “05H” of the motion pointer 223n as the type of the accessory for setting the initial motion. As the operation content corresponding to the value “02H” of the operation pointer 223n, an operation with 10 operation steps at an operation speed of 100 pps in the forward direction is defined. Further, as the operation content corresponding to the value “03H” of the operation pointer 223n, an operation until the tilt origin sensor 618 is detected at an operation speed of 100 pps in the negative direction is defined. Further, as the operation content corresponding to the value “04H” of the operation pointer 223n, an operation of 10 steps is defined in the negative direction at an operation speed of 100 pps, and as the operation content corresponding to the value “05H” of the operation pointer 223n, In addition, an operation that is continued until the tilt origin sensor 618 is detected at an operation speed of 100 pps is defined.

  To summarize the initial motion set for the tilting motion unit 600, when the slide motion unit 700 operates to the extended position and the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the initial motion is updated to “02H”, first, The effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is moved 10 steps to the left in the front view. When the operation of 10 steps is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the initial operation is updated to “03H” and the operation in the origin direction (that is, the operation in the right direction in the front view) is set. . This operation is repeatedly executed step by step until it is detected that the output of the tilting origin sensor 618 has become H (high), similar to the operation executed at the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223n.

  When it is detected that the output of the tilting origin sensor 618 has become H (high), the value of the action pointer 223n is updated to “04H”, and at the same time, a 10-step action (that is, the origin position) Is set in the direction in which the tilting operation is further performed after passing. When the operation of 10 steps is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223n is updated to “05H”, and the operation toward the origin (that is, the operation toward the left in the front view) is set. This operation is also repeatedly executed step by step until it is detected that the output of the tilting origin sensor 618 has become H (high), similarly to the operation executed at the value “03H” of the operation pointer 223n. By executing these operations, it is easy to determine whether or not the tilting operation (swinging operation) in the right direction in the front view and the left direction in the front view in which the effect member 620 can be driven in the normal gaming state can be normally executed. Can be confirmed.

  In the initial operation of the tilting operation unit 600, the number of operation steps until the effect member 620 that has moved away from the origin position by returning to the origin position by executing the tilting operation (swinging operation) is the correction counter 223w. After being returned to the origin position, the difference from the design value is analyzed. A correction value for correcting the set value of the slide operation is calculated according to the analyzed difference. That is, in this control example, when it is determined that any of the actual operation and the design operation is out of the tilt operation and the slide operation, the set value (operation speed) for the slide operation unit 700 is corrected. Is configured to do.

  The value “06H” of the action pointer 223n is associated with the slide action unit 700 as the type of the accessory, and the action at the action speed of 100 pps in the forward direction is defined as the action content. Similar to the operation when the value of the operation pointer 223n is “01H”, the operation of one step is repeatedly set until it is detected that the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 becomes H (high).

  Although illustration is omitted, the initial operation table 222c5 also defines initial operations corresponding to the other objects. By executing the initial operation using the initial operation table 222c5, it is possible to easily determine whether or not there is a defect in the accessory performing the effect operation in various effects when the power is turned on. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent (suppress) a game from being performed on the pachinko machine 10 in which a problem has occurred, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with peace of mind.

  In this control example, while the initial operation based on the initial operation table 222c5 is being executed, the initial operation is executed and the correction value for correcting the operation speed of the slide operation table 222c1 is calculated. The slide motion table 222c1 need not be defined in the motion scenario table 222c. Instead of calculating a correction value for correcting the operation speed, an operation scenario of the slide operation during the normal game is created based on the number of operation steps of the slide operation and the swing operation during the initial operation, and stored in the RAM 223. You may comprise so that it may store. In order to describe this modification more specifically, it is assumed that the number of operation steps to the extended position of the slide operation in the initial operation is 125 steps, and the number of operation steps required for one cycle of the swing operation is 45 steps. Assume the case where it is determined. In this case, first, the actual number of operation steps up to the overhang position determined by the initial operation is set as the number of operation steps of the slide operation. Then, the operation speed of the slide operation for executing the swing operation (3 × 45 steps) of 3 cycles (3 times) just before executing the slide operation of 125 steps is set as the operation speed during the normal game. Set. That is, 100 pps × 125 steps / (3 × 45 steps) = 93 pps is set as the operation speed. Then, when an effect that is executed in combination with a sliding motion and a swing motion during normal game is set, the number of motion steps calculated in the initial motion is 125 steps and the motion speed is 93 pps. What is necessary is just to set every time with respect to a slide operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably perform the specified number of times (three times) of swinging motion until the column member 720 slides to the extended position. Further, the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced as compared with the case where the slide operation table 222 c 1 is defined in the ROM 222.

  In this control example, the correction value is calculated based on the number of operation steps in the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the operation time required for the slide operation and the operation time required for the swing operation, a deviation from the design operation time is determined, and a correction value for correcting the deviation is calculated. May be. Further, in the above-described modified example, the setting content of the sliding motion is calculated based on the number of motion steps in the initial motion, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the operation time required for the slide operation and the operation time required for the swing operation, the number of operation steps of the slide operation so as to reach the extended position of the slide operation at the timing when the swing operation is completed three times. And the operation speed may be determined.

  Returning to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. The head swing area table 222d is a data table that is referred to when the effect member 620 of the tilting accessory 600 is tilted (swinged), and defines a direction in which the tilting operation is possible. Here, in this control example, the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the effect member 620 and the sliding operation of the support member 720 are executed in conjunction with each other. More specifically, while the support member 720 is performing a slide operation from the origin position to the extended position, the effect member 620 performs three reciprocating tilting operations (swinging operation) above the support member 720. It is controlled so that it is performed (the swinging motion in the left direction and the swinging motion in the right direction are performed three times each alternately). That is, the position at which the effect member 620 performs the swing motion varies according to the transition of the slide motion.

  Further, as described above, the tilting operation unit 600 including the effect member 620 is disposed in a lower portion of a region formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210 (see FIG. 5), and the column member 720 is the origin. In the state at the position or overhang position, the effect member 620 and the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212 are configured to be close to each other. Therefore, for example, the effect member 620 swings in the right direction in the front view near the origin position of the slide operation, or the effect member 620 swings in the left direction in the front view near the extended position of the slide operation. When the operation is performed, there is a possibility that the effect member 620 and the outer wall portion 212 collide with each other. Therefore, in this control example, by defining an operation direction in which the effect member 620 can execute the swing operation in the swing area table 222d, a collision (interference) between the effect member 620 and the outer wall portion 212 can be prevented. ing. When the sliding operation of the support member 720 and the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the effect member 620 are both regular operations (operations as designed), the effect member 620 and the outer wall 212 are An operation scenario is defined so that there is no possibility of collision (interference). The swing area table 222d is useful when, for example, an irregular situation occurs in which the slide operation stops midway due to a malfunction or the operation speed changes midway.

  Here, first, see FIG. 144 for the operation mode when the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the effect member 620 and the sliding operation of the column member 720 both perform regular operations (operations as designed). To explain. FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship between the number of operation steps of the swing operation of the effect member 620 and the number of operation steps of the slide operation of the column member 720. In this figure, the number of steps “0” indicates the origin position of each accessory (effect member 620, support member 720). Further, the range in which the number of steps of the swing motion is positive means that the effect member 620 is disposed on the left side of the front view from the origin position, and the range in which the number of steps is negative is from the origin position. Also means that the effect member 620 is arranged on the right side of the front view.

  As shown in FIG. 144, until the slide operation is performed for 10 steps, the swing operation to the left is performed for one step every time the slide operation is performed for one step. That is, a swinging motion in a direction away from the outer wall portion 212 arranged on the right side of the origin position of the sliding motion is executed. If the number of steps of the slide operation becomes 10 and the number of steps of the swing operation becomes 10 steps in the positive direction (see position a in FIG. 144), the direction of the swing operation is reversed and the negative direction Switch the direction of the swing motion. This swinging motion in the negative direction is executed beyond the origin position of the effect member 620. When the number of steps of the slide operation becomes 30, and the effect member 620 has reached the position advanced 10 steps in the negative direction (rightward in front view) from the origin position (see the position b in FIG. 144), the head swings again. Invert the direction of movement and switch to swinging movement in the forward direction.

  Thereafter, the slide operation proceeds while the direction of the swing operation is reversed every 20 steps (see positions c, d, and e in FIG. 144). Based on the fact that the number of operation steps of the slide operation becomes 120 steps (reaches the extended position of the slide operation) and the effect member 620 reaches the origin position from the negative direction (right side of the origin position). Is stopped. Even when returning to the origin position, the column member is returned to the origin position of the slide operation while maintaining the relationship shown in FIG.

  By executing the slide operation and the swing operation shown in FIG. 144, the same swing operation can be executed every time without causing the effect member 620 to collide with other components. On the other hand, since the effect member 620 and the column member 720 are driven by the drive motor, even if the same operation scenario is set due to individual differences of the drive motor and gears and aging deterioration, the correspondence relationship in FIG. there is a possibility. In addition, the slide operation and the swing operation may be temporarily stopped due to the influence of a failure or noise. Even in such a case, if the same set values (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction) as in normal operation are set, the effect member 620 collides (interferences) with the outer wall portion 212. May occur. Therefore, in this control example, by providing the swing region table 222d that defines the motion direction in which the swing motion can be performed according to the number of steps of the slide motion, it is possible to suppress problems that the effect member 620 interferes with other configurations. It is configured to do.

  Details of the swing area table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the swing area table 222d in this control example. In this control example, whenever the effect member 620 reaches the origin position of the swing motion, this swing area table 222d is referred to and the direction of the swing motion is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), the swing area table 222d has a direction (necking) in which the swing motion can be performed in association with the number of motion steps of the support column 720 (the progress of the slide motion). Swingable direction) is defined. In addition, the relationship between the number of slide operation steps and the swingable direction is a sliding motion in the direction from the origin position to the overhang position (outward path) or the direction from the overhang position to the origin position (return path) ) Is specified to distinguish whether it is a sliding motion.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the forward slide operation (the slide operation corresponding to the value “01H” of the operation pointer), the range of the operation step number “0-14” of the slide operation The swingable direction “left side” is associated. In other words, when it is detected that the effect member 620 has reached the origin position in an operation range that is relatively close to the origin position of the slide operation (the number of operation steps is 0 to 14), the effect member 620 is viewed from the front. Swinging to the right is prohibited (restricted). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the portion of the outer wall portion 212 on the right side of the origin position of the sliding operation from colliding with the effect member 620 and damaging the outer wall portion 212 and the effect member 620.

  Further, “both sides” is associated with the range of the number of operation steps “15 to 104” of the slide operation as the swingable direction. That is, when it is detected that the effect member 620 has reached the origin position within the range of the number of operation steps “15 to 104”, the swinging operation is performed without limitation on either the right side or the left side of the front view. Can be set. This is because, in the range of the number of operation steps, the outer wall portion 212 and the effect member 620 are sufficiently separated from each other, and there is no possibility of collision (interference) regardless of the operation direction.

  Further, the swingable direction “right side” is associated with the number of operation steps “105 to 120” of the slide operation. That is, when it is detected that the effect member 620 has reached the origin position in an operation range relatively close to the extended position of the slide operation (the number of operation steps is 105 to 120), the effect member 620 is moved to the front. Swinging to the left side of the view is prohibited (restricted). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the portion of the outer wall portion 212 on the left side of the protruding position of the sliding operation from colliding with the effect member 620 and damaging the outer wall portion 212 and the effect member 620.

  On the other hand, in the forward sliding motion (sliding motion corresponding to the motion pointer value “02H”), the swingable direction “right” is associated with the range of the number of motion steps “0 to 14”. The swingable direction “both sides” is associated with the number of motion steps “15 to 104”, and the swingable direction “left side” is associated with the number of motion steps “105 to 120”. Even during the forward slide operation, the direction member 620 can be operated without colliding with the outer wall 212 by setting the operation direction of the swing operation with reference to these correspondences.

  Summarizing the swingable directions, as shown in FIG. 143, an area for 15 steps (0 step to 14 steps) including the origin position of the slide operation (detection position of the slide origin detection sensor 717) is on the left side (front view). It is possible to set the swing motion only in the left direction. On the other hand, the region for 15 steps (104 steps to 120 steps) including the extended position of the slide operation (detection position of the slide position detection sensor 718) sets the swing operation only on the right side (right direction in front view). It becomes possible. And in the area | region other than the above, it is comprised so that a swing operation | movement can be set without the restriction | limiting of a direction. As described above, by defining the direction of the swing motion in correspondence with the number of steps of the slide motion, it is possible to prevent the effect member 620 from interfering with the other configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example, the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example includes a step counter 223k, an operation scenario flag 223m, an operation pointer 223n, and a swing direction flag. 223o, correction value storage area 223p, additional operation flag 223q, origin returning flag 223r, initial operation flag 223s, slide standby flag 223t, swing standby flag 223u, swing counter 223v, correction Counter 223w is added.

  The step counter 223k is a counter for counting the number of operation steps of each accessory driven by the drive motor. The count reference (position where the number of operation steps is 0) is set to the origin position of each accessory. The step counter 223k is configured to separately count the number of operation steps for each type of accessory. That is, the step counter 223k is the same as the counter for counting the number of operation steps of the effect member 620, the counter for counting the number of operation steps of the column member 720, etc. Separate counters are provided.

  Each time the step counter 223k receives an execution signal indicating that the operation of one step has been executed from any of the various drive motors provided in the pachinko machine 10, the step counter 223k sets the type of the drive motor that has output the execution signal. The corresponding counter value is updated by one (see S1622 in FIG. 149). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, an origin return operation is performed to return the various accessories to the origin position. When the various accessories return to the origin by the origin return operation, the step counter 223k 0 is set for the value. By this origin return operation, the position where the value of the step counter 223k becomes 0 can be reliably set as the origin position of each accessory, so that the operation status (drive position) of each accessory can be accurately grasped. it can.

  The operation scenario flag 223m is a flag indicating which operation scenario is set among the operation scenarios corresponding to the rendering operation of each accessory specified in the operation scenario table 222c. The operation scenario flag 223m is composed of, for example, 1 byte (8 bits), and the type of the operation scenario is associated with each bit. For example, the 0th bit of the motion scenario flag 223m corresponds to the slide motion table 222c1, and if this 0th bit is 1 (on), it means that the slide motion table 222c1 is set as the motion scenario. If 0 (off), it means that the slide operation table 222c1 is not set. Similarly, for the other bits, if the operation scenario corresponding to each bit is set, the corresponding bit is set to 1 (on), and if the corresponding operation scenario is not set, the corresponding bit is 0. Set to (Off).

  In the operation scenario flag 223m, when an operation scenario is specified based on the variation pattern command in the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108), the bit corresponding to the scenario is set to 1 (ON) ( (See S1704, S1708, and S1710 in FIG. 108). In addition, each time the variation effect for which the operation scenario is set ends, the bit corresponding to the set scenario is set to 0 (off). With this operation scenario flag 223m, it is possible to easily determine the type of operation scenario currently set.

  The action pointer 223n is a pointer used to identify the progress status of the set action scenario. As described above, each data table constituting the operation scenario table 222c is defined in association with the value of the operation pointer 223n and the operation content to be set (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction). In this control example, the operation with the set content of 1 is set in the drive motor, and when the operation according to the set content is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223n is updated.

  The operation pointer 223n can update the pointer value separately for each set operation scenario. That is, the operation pointer 223n is a generic name for different pointers provided for each operation scenario. Each pointer constituting the operation pointer 223 is set to “01H” as a corresponding operation scenario is newly set. Thereafter, each time the operation content corresponding to the pointer value is completed, the pointer value is updated (see S5312 in FIG. 150, S5411 in FIG. 151, S5505 in FIG. 152, S5710 and S5711 in FIG. 154), and after the update. The operation content corresponding to the pointer value is set. In addition, when the variation effect in which the corresponding operation scenario is set ends, the pointer value is reset to “00H”. By using the operation pointer 223n, the set operation scenario can be accurately grasped.

  The head swing direction flag 223o is a flag indicating the direction of the head swing operation. If the value of the swing direction flag 223o is on, it indicates that the swing operation in the positive direction (left direction in the front view) is being executed. If the value is off, the swing direction flag 223o is in the negative direction (right direction in the front view). This indicates that the head swing operation is being executed. The swing direction flag 223o corresponds to the action content indicated by the updated value of the action pointer 223n when the action scenario corresponding to the tilting action is set and the value of the action pointer 223n is updated. The value is updated (see S5507 in FIG. 152). That is, when the swinging motion in the positive direction is set as the operation content, the swinging direction flag 223o is set to ON, and when the swinging motion in the negative direction is set, the swinging direction flag 223o is set. Set to off. When the origin position is reached in the swing operation, the direction of the swing operation is specified with reference to the swing direction flag 223o. Then, based on the swing area table 222d, it is determined whether or not there is no problem even if it passes through the origin while maintaining the same swinging direction.

  The correction value storage area 223p is a storage area for storing a correction value for correcting variations in the action of an accessory due to aging deterioration or individual differences. More specifically, a correction value for correcting the operation speed of the column member 720 in accordance with the actual operation of the effect member 620 is stored. The correction value stored in the correction value storage area 223p is calculated during the execution of the initial operation that is executed based on the power being supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and is stored in the correction value storage area 223p. (See S5406 and S5409 in FIG. 151). The correction value is broadly divided into at least a correction value according to the actual swing motion status of the effect member 620 and a correction value according to the actual slide motion status of the column member 720. The number of steps of the slide operation can be corrected according to the correction value.

  The correction value according to the actual swinging motion of the effect member 620 is a design value of the number of steps when the effect member 620 swings the head from the origin position to the right in the front view and the left in the front view. (Since the swinging motion of the forward 10 steps and the backward 10 steps is performed in the left and right directions, a total of 40 steps) and the number of steps actually required to set a series of motions and return to the origin is there.

  On the other hand, the correction value according to the actual swinging motion of the support member 720 is the design value (120 steps) of the number of steps when the support member 720 performs the slide operation from the origin position to the overhang position. This is a ratio to the number of steps required to operate from the origin position to the overhang position in the sliding operation. By correcting the setting contents of the operation scenario with these correction values, the mode of the sliding motion of the support member 720 can be matched to the mode of the actual swinging motion of the effect member 620. In other words, when the actual number of steps required for the swing operation is larger than the design value, it is necessary to set a larger number of steps than the design value, and thus the execution period of the swing operation becomes longer. Even in this case, the correction value for delaying the operation speed of the slide operation is stored in the correction value in order to match the timing at which the three-way swing motion is completed with the timing at which the slide operation is extended. Stored in area 223p.

  On the other hand, when the actual number of steps required for the swing motion is smaller than the design value, the swing motion is completed with the number of steps smaller than the design value, and the execution period of the swing motion is shortened by mi. Even in this case, in order to match the timing at which the three reciprocating swing motion is completed and the timing at which the slide motion is reached, a correction value for increasing the slide motion speed is stored as a correction value. Stored in area 223p.

  When setting the slide operation, the swing operation is performed by setting a value obtained by multiplying the correction value stored in the correction value storage area 223p by the operation speed specified in the slide operation table 223c1 as a new operation speed. The completion timing can coincide with the timing to reach the extended position of the slide operation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operation quality when the effect member 620 and the column member 720 are operated simultaneously.

  The additional operation flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not it is an additional operation period that may be set after the number of operation steps specified in the operation scenario table 222c is exhausted. Here, in this control example, even when the number of operation steps specified in the operation scenario table 222c is exhausted, the corresponding sensor output does not become H (high), and additional operation is performed in the sensor direction. Is configured to set. This additional operation is repeatedly set step by step until the output of the corresponding sensor becomes H (high). The period during which this additional operation is set is called an additional operation period. By setting this additional operation period, even if the number of steps until the sensor is detected is deviated due to aging or individual differences, it is possible to move in the sensor direction without notifying the error immediately. it can. This additional operation flag 223q is an abnormality detection process executed when the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H (high) even after the number of operation steps specified in the operation scenario table 222c has elapsed (see FIG. 155). Is turned on, and when it is detected that the output of the corresponding sensor has become L (low) by the additional operation, it is set to off (see S5604 in FIG. 153).

The origin return in-progress flag 223r is in the process of performing an origin return operation (an operation for returning an accessory that has deviated from the origin position to the origin position) that is executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It is a flag indicating whether or not. If this origin return flag 223r is on, it indicates that the origin return operation is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the origin return operation is not being executed. The origin returning flag 223r is set in the origin returning process (see FIG. 146).
When the origin return operation is set, it is set to ON (see S5103 in FIG. 146). On the other hand, in the return to origin operation, it is set to OFF when it is determined that all the objects have returned to the origin position (see S5304 in FIG. 150). By using the origin returning flag 223r, it can be easily determined whether or not the origin returning operation is being performed.

  The initial operation in-progress flag 223s is a flag that indicates whether or not an initial operation that is executed to determine whether or not each accessory operates normally after the return to origin operation is completed. . If the initial operation flag 223s is on, it indicates that the initial operation is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the initial operation is not being executed. The initial operation in-progress flag 223s is set to ON after the origin return operation is completed (see S5304 in FIG. 150), and is set to OFF when all operations specified in the initial operation table 222c5 are completed. . By using the initial operation flag 223s, it can be easily determined whether or not the initial operation is being executed.

  The slide standby flag 223t is an effect in which the effect member 620 and the support member 720 operate in conjunction with each other, and the slide operation of the support member 720 to the protruding position ends before the swing operation of the effect member 620. This is a flag for determining whether or not the slide standby period is set. This slide standby period is a period for waiting for the slide operation until the swing operation is completed. When performing the operation of returning the slide operation from the extended position to the origin position, the swing operation of the effect member 620 is performed. And the sliding operation of the column member 720 are set at the same time.

  If the slide standby flag 223t is on, it indicates that the slide standby period is in progress, and if it is off, it indicates that the slide standby period is not in progress. This slide standby flag 223t is set to ON when it is determined in the slide operation process (see FIG. 156) that the slide operation has been completed and the swing operation has not been completed (see S5909 in FIG. 156). ). On the other hand, when both the sliding operation and the swinging operation are completed and an operation for returning from the overhang position to the origin position is set, it is set to OFF (see S5706 in FIG. 154).

  The swing standby flag 223u indicates that, in the effect in which the effect member 620 and the column member 720 operate in conjunction with each other, the swing operation of the effect member 620 ends before the slide operation to the protruding position of the column member 720. This is a flag for determining whether or not the swing waiting period is set in the case of being closed. The swing waiting period is a period for waiting for the swing operation until the slide operation is completed. When performing the operation of returning the slide operation from the extended position to the origin position, the swing of the effect member 620 is performed. It is set to start the operation and the sliding operation of the column member 720 simultaneously.

  If the swing standby flag 223u is on, it indicates that the above-described swing standby period is in progress, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not in the swing standby period. The swing standby flag 223u is set to ON when it is determined that the swing operation (tilt operation) is completed and the slide operation is not completed in the tilt direction setting process (see FIG. 154). (See S5703 in FIG. 154). On the other hand, when both the sliding operation and the swinging operation are completed and the operation for returning from the overhang position to the origin position is set, it is set to OFF (see S5910 in FIG. 156).

  The head swing counter 223s is a counter for counting the number of executions when the head swing operation is executed. This control example is configured to repeat the operation of returning to the original position three times after performing the swinging operation by 10 steps from the original position in the left-right direction based on the tilting operation table 222c2. However, if exactly the same operation is defined three times for the tilting operation table 222c2, the capacity of the ROM 222 may be compressed. Therefore, in this control example, only the operation content for one swing motion is defined in the tilt motion table 222c2, and one swing motion is completed (that is, the motion pointer defined in the tilt motion table 222c2). Each time the operation corresponding to the values “01H” to “04H” of 223n is completed), the number of swings is counted using the swing counter 223s. Then, when the number of counts is 3, the swing motion is finished, and when the number of counts is less than 3, the value of the operation pointer 223n is returned to “01H”, and “01H” to “ The operation corresponding to “04H” is sequentially set. As a result, the swinging motion can be repeated the same number of times (3 times) each time while reducing the data amount of the tilting motion table 222c2.

  The correction counter 223w is a counter for counting the number of steps of the actual swinging operation of the effect member 620 and the number of steps of the actual sliding operation of the column member 720 in the initial operation. By comparing the number of steps counted by the correction counter 223w with the design value of the number of steps, it is possible to analyze (determine) how much the actual operation deviates from the design value. That is, it is possible to analyze (discriminate) the influence of individual differences and aging degradation. A correction value for correcting the operation speed of the sliding operation is calculated according to the number of steps of each accessory counted by the correction counter 223w (see S5406 and S5409 in FIG. 151).

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 156. First, FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example. This start-up process is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, as in the first control example.

  Among the startup processes, the same processes as S1301 to S1313 executed in the startup process (see FIG. 104) in the first control example are executed in the processes of S1301 to S1313. The start-up process in the second control example is different in that an origin return process (S1321) is executed in addition to the start-up process in the first control example.

  This origin return process (S1321) is executed after the processes of S1301 to S1312 are executed as in the first control example, and is a process for returning an accessory that has deviated from the origin position to the origin position. Then, after the origin return process (S1321) is executed, a time setting process (S1313) is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 146, details of the above-described origin return processing (S1321) will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the origin return process (S1321). This origin return process (S1321) is a process for moving (moving) an accessory that is not at the origin position to the origin position when the power is turned on among the various accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the origin return process (S1321), first, is there an origin sensor (for example, slide origin detection sensor 717, tilt origin sensor 618, etc.) whose output is L (0 V) (that is, the light receiving portion of the sensor is not shielded). It is determined whether or not (S5101). If it is determined in step S5101 that there is an origin sensor with an output of L (0 V) (S5101: Yes), one of the objects (the production member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600, the column member of the slide operation unit 700). 720) is not at the origin position. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to S5102 in order to return (movable) the accessory that is deviated from the origin position to the origin position.

  In the process of S5102, the operation in the origin direction (movable) is set for the accessory corresponding to the sensor whose output is L (0 V) (S5102). Then, the origin returning flag 223r is set to ON (S5103), and this process is terminated. In the process of S5102, for example, an operation with the number of steps twice as many as the number of steps from the origin position to the overhang position in each accessory is set so as to surely return to the origin position.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5101 that there is no origin sensor with an output of L (0 V) (S5101: No), it means that all the features have already been in the origin position when the power is turned on. To do. That is, since there is no need to return (move) the accessory to the origin position, the processes of S5104 and S5105 for setting the initial operation of each accessory are executed.

  In the process of S5104, the start of the initial operation is set for various types of accessories (S5104), the initial operation in-progress flag 223s is set to ON (S5105), and this process ends. As described above, the initial operation is performed in order to check whether or not various accessories are operating normally. Since it is possible to check whether or not the various items are operating normally every time the power is turned on, it is possible to detect abnormalities of the various items at an early stage.

  By executing this origin return processing (S1321), all the objects can be returned (moved) to the origin position. When the return to the origin position is triggered, the step counter 223k of the corresponding accessory can be reset to 0, so that the number of operation steps of all the accessories can be accurately grasped after the origin return. Further, since the initial operation can be executed after the origin return, the same operation can be performed every time in the initial operation. Therefore, whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the initial operation can be easily determined from the appearance.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the main processing. This main process is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113, as in the first control example.

  Among the main processes, the processes of S1501 to S1520 are the same as the processes of S1501 to S1520 executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) in the first control example. The main process in the second control example is different in that an accessory action setting process (S1531) is executed in addition to the main process in the first control example.

  This accessory action setting process (S1531) is executed after the processes of S1501 to S1515 are executed as in the first control example. Then, after the execution of the accessory operation setting process (S1531), each process of S1516 to S1520 is executed. This accessory action setting process (S1531) is a process for setting the action of each accessory based on the selected variation pattern.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the details of the above-described accessory operation setting process (S1531) will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the accessory operation setting process (S1531). This accessory action setting process (S1531) is a process for setting the actions of various accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 as described above.

  In the accessory operation setting process (S1531), first, it is determined whether or not it is the operation start timing of the accessory (S5201). Here, the operation start timing of the accessory and the type of the accessory to be operated are defined for each variation pattern. In the process of S5201, it is determined whether or not the operation start timing has come based on the progress of the fluctuation pattern.

  In the process of S5201, if it is determined that it is not the operation start timing of the accessory (S5201: No), it is not necessary to set the operation of the accessory, so this process ends and returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5201 that it is the operation start timing of the accessory (S5201: Yes), the process proceeds to S5202 in order to set the operation of the accessory at the start timing.

  In the process of S5202, the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the operation to be started (slide operation, tilting (swinging) operation, initial operation, etc.) is set to “01H” (S5202). Then, the operation content corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223n is read from the table corresponding to the accessory to be operated this time in the operation scenario table 222c (S5203). Next, it is determined whether or not the operation content read in the process of S5203 is a slide operation of the support member 720 (S5204).

  In the process of S5204, when it is determined that the read operation content is a slide operation (S5204: Yes), the read operation content is stored in the correction value storage area 223p for the operation speed (pps). A value obtained by multiplying the correction value (both the correction value corresponding to the sliding motion and the correction value corresponding to the swing motion) is set as the operation speed (S5205), and the process proceeds to S5206. As described above, this correction value is a value calculated based on the actual number of operation steps of the swing motion of the effect member 620 in the initial operation and the actual number of operation steps of the column member 720. By correcting the operation speed of the slide operation with this correction value, the end timing of the swing motion can be matched with the operation end timing of the slide operation.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5204, when it is determined that the read operation content is not a slide operation (S5204: No), it is not necessary to correct the operation, so the process of S5205 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5206. .

  When the process of S5204 or S5205 is completed, an operation command is set based on the read operation content (or the corrected operation content) (S5206), and this process ends. The operation command set by the processing of S5206 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 223. In the command output process (S502) of the main process (see FIG. 147) executed by the MPU 221, various motors (vertical drive motor 431, open / close drive motor 466, slide drive motor 751, It is transmitted toward a control IC (not shown) of the tilting drive motor 661). Various motor control ICs (not shown) drive and control the various motors based on the received operation commands. As a result, various accessories corresponding to the various motors are moved.

  Next, a command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 147) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, as in the first control example, and as described above, the main control device 110 is a process for determining a command received from 110 and executing the corresponding control.

  Of the command determination processing (S1511), in each processing of S1601 to S1616, the same processing as the processing of S1601 to S1616 executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 107) in the first control example is executed. . The command determination process (S1511) in the second control example is different in that the process from S1621 to S1623 is executed in addition to the command determination process (S1511) in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same parts as those in the command determination process (see FIG. 107) in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the command determination process (S1511) in the second control example, first, the processes from S1601 to S1615 are executed as in the first control example. If it is determined in step S1612 that a stop command has not been received (S1612: No), various motors (vertical drive is also 431, opening / closing drive motor 466, slide drive motor 751, tilt drive) It is determined whether or not an execution signal (execution command) output from a control IC (not shown) of the motor 661) has been received (S1621). If it is determined in step S1621 that an execution command has not been received from the motor driver (control IC) corresponding to each accessory, the process of step S1616 is executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1621 that an execution command has been received from any of the motor drivers (control ICs) (S1621: Yes), the motor driver (object) that has output the operation command is associated. The step counter 223k is updated (S1622), an execution command process for controlling the operation of each accessory is executed according to the execution command (execution signal) (S1623), and this process ends. By updating (adding) the step counter 223k corresponding to the operation by the processing of S1622, the state (number of operation steps) of each operation (slide operation, swing operation, etc.) can be accurately determined.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 150 to 156, the details of the execution command process (S1623) will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing an execution command process (S 1623. This execution command process (S 1623) includes various motors (upper / lower drive 431, opening / closing drive motor 466, slide drive motor 751, tilting drive). This process is executed when an execution signal (execution command) transmitted from a control IC (not shown) of the drive motor 661) is received.

  In the execution command process (S1623), first, it is determined whether or not the origin returning flag 223r is on (S5301). In the process of S5301, if it is determined that the origin return flag 223r is on (S5301: Yes), the origin return process (see FIG. 145) executed in the above-described startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 145). In FIG. 146), this means that the origin return operation is being executed. Therefore, in this case, in order to determine whether or not the origin return operation has been completed, it is determined whether or not there is an origin sensor whose output is L (0 V) (that is, the light receiving portion of the sensor is not shielded). It is determined (S5302).

  If it is determined in the processing of S5302 that there is an origin sensor whose output is L (0 V) (S5302: Yes), one of the objects is deviated from the origin position (that is, returning (movable). ), And since the process of returning (moving) the accessory to the origin position is continued, this process is terminated as it is. When a plurality of accessories are returning to the origin, the operation stop is set in order from the accessory determined to have returned to the origin position in the process of S5302. Also, if there is an accessory that does not return to the home position even after the set number of home-return operations has elapsed, it is likely that the drive motor is not operating normally due to a failure, etc., so an error is reported. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5302 that there is no origin sensor with an output of L (0 V) (S5302: No), all the objects are at the origin position (that is, the return (movable) is finished). Since this is the case, the process of returning (moving) the accessory to the origin position is ended, and the start of the initial operation of various accessories is set (S5303). Then, the return-to-origin flag 223r is set to off, the initial operation in-progress flag 223s is set to on (S5304), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5301 that the origin returning flag 223r is not on (S5301: No), this is a case where all the objects have been returned (moved) to the origin position, and then the initial operation is in progress. It is determined whether or not the flag 223s is on (S5305). In the process of S5305, if it is determined that the initial operation flag 223s is on (S5305: Yes), it means that the initial operation of various types of accessories is being executed, and therefore the setting during the initial operation is performed. The initial operation process is executed (S5306), and this process ends. Details of the initial operation processing (S5306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5305 that the initial operation flag 223s is off (S5305: No), it is then determined whether or not the received execution command is a command corresponding to the tilting operation (S5307). ). In the process of S5307, when it is determined that the received execution command is a command corresponding to the tilting (swinging) operation (S5307: Yes), the tilting (swinging) operation is executed (the tilting drive motor 661 is turned on). In order to drive), a tilting operation process is executed (S5308), and this process ends. Details of the tilting operation processing (S5308) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 152 to 155.

  In the process of S5307, if it is determined that the received execution command is not a command corresponding to the tilting (swinging) operation (S5307: No), then, whether the received execution command is a command corresponding to the sliding operation or not. Is discriminated (S5309). In the process of S5309, when it is determined that the received execution command is a command corresponding to the slide operation (S5309: Yes), the slide operation is performed in order to execute the slide operation (drive the slide drive motor 751). The process is executed (S5310), and this process ends. Details of the slide operation processing (S5310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5309 that the received execution command is not a command corresponding to the slide operation (S5309: No), it is a case where an execution command for another accessory (motion) is received. In this case, in order to determine whether or not the operation of the accessory corresponding to the received execution command has been completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the accessory has reached the set number of steps. It is determined (S5311). In the process of S5311, when it is determined that the set number of steps has not been reached (S5311: No), this process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5311 that the set number of steps has been reached (S5311: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the received execution command (corresponding to the operation) ( S5312). Then, the operation content corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223n after the addition is read from the operation scenario table 222c (S5313), an operation command is set based on the read operation content (S5314), and this process ends.

  Next, details of the initial operation process (S5306) executed in the execution command process (see FIG. 150) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process (S5306). This initial operation process (S5306) is a process for executing an initial operation of various kinds of accessories.

  In the initial operation process (S5306), first, 1 is added to the value of the correction counter 223w (S5401). As described above, the correction counter 223w is used to count the actual number of operation steps of the column member 720 in the initial operation and the actual number of operation steps of the effect member 620. That is, the number of operation steps of the initial operation with respect to the slide operation executed while the value of the operation pointer 223n is “01H” is counted, and the correction corresponding to the slide operation is performed by the ratio with the design value 120 of the operation step number. Used to calculate a value. In addition, the number of operation steps of the initial operation corresponding to the swing operation performed between the values of the operation pointer 223n between “02H” and “05H” is counted, and the number of operation steps in one cycle of the swing operation is counted. It is used to calculate a correction value corresponding to the swing motion by a ratio with the design value of 40.

  In this control example, the value of the correction counter 223w is updated in each initial operation process (that is, after the initial operation of the swing operation is completed). After the initial operation is finished and the calculation of the correction value is finished, the update processing (S5401) of the correction counter 223w may be skipped. Thereby, the processing load in the initial operation process (S5306) can be reduced.

  When the processing of S5401 is completed, the value of the action pointer 223n corresponding to the initial action is read (S5402), and the action of the corresponding accessory is completed by referring to the initial action table 222c5 based on the read value of the action pointer 223n. It is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied (S5403). In the process of S5403, when it is determined that the condition for completing the operation of the corresponding accessory is not satisfied (S5403: No), an operation for one step is set for the corresponding accessory (S5404). This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5403 that the operation completion condition for the corresponding accessory has been established (S5403: Yes), then whether the value of the operation pointer 223n read in the process of S5402 is 01H or not. Is discriminated (S5405). In the process of S5405, if it is determined that the value of the motion pointer 223n is 01H (S5405: Yes), it means that the forward slide motion of the column member 720 is completed in the initial motion (FIG. 142 (a)). )reference). Therefore, in this case, the ratio of the design value (120 steps) of the number of operation steps of the slide operation to the actual number of operation steps (count value of the correction counter 223w) (the value of the correction counter 223w is divided by 120). (Value) is stored in the correction value storage area 223p as a correction value for the slide operation (S5406). Then, the value of the correction counter 223w is initialized (S5407), and the process proceeds to S5411.

  In the process of S5406, by initializing the correction counter 223w, it can be used to count the actual number of operation steps in the initial operation of the swing operation to be executed next. Therefore, the counter for counting the actual number of operation steps required for the slide operation and the counter for counting the actual number of operation steps required for the swing operation can be covered by a common counter (correction counter 223w). The capacity of the RAM 223 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5405, when it is determined that the value of the action pointer 223n is not “01H” (S5405: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the action pointer 223n is “05H” (S5406). ). In the process of S5406, if it is determined that the value of the action pointer 223n is 05H (S5408: Yes), the initial action of the swing action (the action corresponding to the values “02H” to “05H” of the action pointer 223n) is Since it means that all have been completed, a process of calculating a correction value corresponding to the swing motion is performed. That is, 40, which is the design value of the number of motion steps in one cycle of the swing motion, is actually set to the number of motion steps required for the swing motion in the initial motion (between the values “02H” to “05H” of the motion pointer 223n). The value divided by the counted value of the correction counter 223w) is stored in the correction value storage area 223p as a correction value for the tilting (swinging) operation (S5409). Then, the value of the correction counter value 223w is initialized (S5410), and the process proceeds to S5411.

  In the process of S5408, if it is determined that the value of the action pointer 223n is not “05H” (that is, “06H” or more) (S5408: No), the process directly proceeds to S5411.

  When the processing of S5407, S5408, or S5410 is finished, 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the initial operation (S5411), and the operation corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223n after the addition is set (S5412). This process ends.

  Next, details of the tilting operation process (S5308) executed in the above-described execution command process (see FIG. 150) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the tilting operation process (S5308). This tilting operation process (S5308) is a process for setting the tilting operation of the effect member 620 provided in the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9).

  In the tilting operation process (S5308), first, it is determined whether or not the additional operation flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) operation is on (S5501). As described above, the additional operation flag 223q moves in the sensor direction when the corresponding sensor output does not become H (high) despite the number of operation steps defined in the operation scenario table 222c being digested. It shows whether or not it is an additional operation period in which an additional operation is set.

  In the process of S5501, when it is determined that the additional operation flag 223q for the swing (tilting) operation is ON (S5501: Yes), it means that the additional operation period of the effect member 620 is in progress, so the origin sensor An additional operation process (S5502) for executing an additional operation is executed until (tilt origin sensor 618) is detected, and this process ends. Details of this additional operation processing (S5502) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5501 that the additional operation flag 223q for the swing (tilt) motion is off (S5501: No), then tilt for causing the effect member 620 to tilt (swing). It is determined whether or not the number of steps of the drive motor 661 has reached the set number of steps (S5503). That is, it is determined whether or not the tilting (swinging) operation (forward operation or backward operation) of the effect member 620 is completed.

  In the process of S5503, when it is determined that the number of operation steps of the tilting drive motor 661 has not reached the set number of steps (S5503: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S5505, when it is determined that the number of operation steps of the tilting drive motor 661 has reached the set number of steps (see the tilting operation table 222c2) (S5503: Yes), the operation pointer 223n of 1 is set. This means that the tilting (swinging) operation (outward movement operation or backward movement) of the effect member 620 corresponding to the value has been completed, and then the tilting (swinging) operation of the rendering member 620 is opposite to the origin position (the origin position). It is determined from the value of the current operation pointer 223n (S5504). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation pointer 223n is “01H” or “03H”.

  In the process of S5504, when it is determined that the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 is the forward operation (operation in the direction opposite to the origin position) (S5504: Yes), the effect member 620 is then moved backward. Processing (S5505 to S5507) for (movable operation in the direction of the origin position) is executed.

  In the processing of S5505, 1 is added to the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the tilting (swinging) motion (S5505), and the motion content corresponding to the value of the motion pointer 223n after the addition is stored in the motion scenario table 222c (tilting motion). Table 222c2) is read and set (S5506). Then, the value of the swing direction flag 223o is updated (inverted) to a value corresponding to the swing direction of the return path (S5507), and this process ends. For example, when the processing of S5507 is executed in a state where the value of the swing direction flag 223o is 1 (forward swing operation), the value of the swing motion flag 223o is updated (reversed) to 0, and the value is 0 When the processing of S5507 is executed in this state (forward swing operation), the value of the swing motion flag 223o is updated (reversed) to 1. Accordingly, the swing direction flag 223o can be updated as the operation direction of the swing operation is reversed, so that the operation direction can be accurately grasped.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5504, the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 was a return path operation (operation toward the origin position) (the value of the operation pointer 223 corresponding to the effect member 620 is “02H”, or “ 04H ”) (S5504: No), it is a case where the effect member 620 is moved in the direction of the origin position, and then the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) corresponding to the effect member 620 is output. Is H (5 V) or not (whether the effect member 620 is the origin position) or not (S5509).

  In the process of S5509, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is L (0 V) (S5508: No), the tilt drive motor 661 is not driven as set, the production member Since there is a high possibility that an abnormality such as the 620 being prevented from moving or the number of steps is shifted due to aging or the like, the abnormality detection process is executed (S5510) and the process is terminated. To do. Details of the abnormality detection process (S5510) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is H (5 V) in the process of S5509 (S5508: Yes), the tilt direction setting process is executed (S5509). Exit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 153, details of the additional operation processing (S5502) executed in the above-described tilting operation processing (see FIG. 152) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the additional operation process. This additional operation process (S5502) is moved to the origin position even if the effect member 620 provided in the tilt operation unit 600 completes the set number of operation steps in the tilt operation process (see FIG. 152) described above. This is a process that is executed when there is no possibility (abnormality may have occurred) (S5508: No), and the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position or error notification is performed.

  In the additional operation process (S5502), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is H (5 V) (S5601). In the process of S5601, if it is determined that the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is not H (5 V) (S5601: No), the previous additional operation process (S5502) or an abnormal operation process described later (FIG. This means that the effect member 620 is deviated from the origin position even after the one-step operation set in step 155) is executed. In this case, it is determined whether or not the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the tilting (swinging) operation is 10 or more (S5605).

  If it is determined in step S5605 that the value of the step counter 223k is smaller than 10, an additional operation for one step is set again to move the effect member 620 to the origin position (S5606). This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5605 that the value of the step counter 223k is 10 or more (S5605: Yes), the additional operation process (S5502) is repeatedly executed to return to the origin position, and the process of S5606 is performed. This is a case where the effect member 620 is not moved to the origin position even though the effect member 620 (inclination drive motor 661) is moved by 10 steps or more (added operation). In other words, if it is within the range of the normal operation, it means that the operation having the number of operation steps that can sufficiently reach the origin position is executed. Therefore, in this case, an error command is set (S5607), and this process ends.

  The setting of the error command is not limited to that described above, and the operation of the effect member 620 is a tilting (swinging) operation outside the normal movable (setting) range, and the tilting operation (movable) is further performed. If there is a risk of contact with another accessory, an error command may be set to end the process.

  Further, the number of operation steps determined as an error is not limited to 10 steps, and may be arbitrarily determined according to the type of the accessory or the driving motor. For example, when a driving motor that is relatively easily deteriorated (the number of operation steps is likely to be shifted) is employed, the number of operation steps until an error is determined may be increased (for example, 15 times). On the contrary, when a driving motor having a relatively accurate and long life is adopted, an error may be determined with a smaller number of operation steps (for example, 5 times).

  In the process of S5601, if it is determined that the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is H (5 V) (S5601: Yes), the process of S5606 executed in the previous additional operation process (S5502) ( Alternatively, the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position by the one-step operation set by the abnormality detection process (S5801). In this case, the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the tilting (swinging) motion is updated (S5602), and the motion content corresponding to the updated value of the motion pointer 223n is stored in the motion scenario table 222c (tilting motion table 222c2). Is read and set (S5603). Then, the additional operation flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) operation is set to OFF (S5604), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 154, details of the tilt direction setting process (S5509) executed in the tilt operation process (see FIG. 152) described above will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the tilt direction setting process. This tilt direction setting process (S5502) is executed when the effect member 620 provided in the tilt operation unit 600 reaches the origin position in the swing operation in the tilt operation process (see FIG. 152) described above (S5508: Yes). Process.

  In the tilt direction setting process (S5509), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the swing counter 223v is 3 (or greater than 3) (S5701). The value of the swing counter 223v is updated by the process of S5714 described later, and every time the swing operation of the effect member 620 is performed once (respectively regarded as one in the left and right reciprocations). Is added to 1 (see S5715). Therefore, when the value of the swing counter 223v is 3, it is a case where the swing motion of the effect member 620 is executed three times.

  If it is determined in the process of S5701 that the value of the swing counter 223v is 3 (S5701: Yes), the swinging (tilting) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed the specified number of times (3 times). Therefore, it is then determined whether or not the sliding motion of the column member 720 provided in the tilting operation unit 600 is the forward path (or the forward path) (S5702). In the process of S5702, when it is determined that the slide operation of the support member 720 is the return path (or the return path) (S5702: No), the swinging operation of the effect member 620 is not performed thereafter. This process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the sliding motion of the support member 720 is the forward path (the forward path) (S5702: Yes), the neck of the effect member 620 is completed after the sliding motion (forward path motion) of the support member 720 is completed. In order to execute the swing operation, the process proceeds to S5703.

  In the process of S5703, it is determined whether or not the sliding motion (forward motion) of the column member 720 has been completed (S5703). More specifically, if the slide standby flag 223t is on, it is determined that the slide operation (outward movement operation) of the column member 720 is completed, and if the slide standby flag 223t is off, the slide operation of the column member 720 ( It is determined that the outward movement) has not been completed.

  In the process of S5703, if the slide standby flag 223t is on and it is determined that the slide operation has been completed (S5703: Yes), the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the slide operation is set to 02H and tilted. 03H is set to the value of the action pointer 223n corresponding to the (swing) action (S5705). Then, based on the value of the motion pointer 223n set by the processing of S5705, the operation content is read from the motion scenario table (the slide motion table 222c1 and the tilting motion table 222c2) and set (S5706). By the processing of S5706, the column member 720 of the tilting operation unit 600 is moved in the backward direction, and the effect member 620 is set to swing (tilt) operation (3 reciprocations).

  When the process of S5706 is completed, the slide standby flag 223t is set to OFF (S5707), the value of the swing counter 223v is initialized to 0 (S5708), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5703, when it is determined that the slide standby flag 223t is off and the slide operation is not completed (S5703: No), in order to wait until the slide operation of the column member 720 is completed, The swing standby flag 223u is set to ON (S5704), the value of the swing counter 223v is initialized to 0 (S5708), and this process ends.

  In the process of S5701, when it is determined that the value of the swing counter 223v is not 3 (2 or less) (S5701: No), the process proceeds to S5709 in order to continue the swing (tilt) operation. .

  In the process of S5709, the swing direction before reaching the origin position is specified based on the value of the swing direction flag 223o (S5709). Then, based on the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the sliding operation and the swing area table 222d (see FIG. 142), the swingable direction is specified (S5710).

  When the processing of S5710 is completed, the swinging direction (traveling direction) after passing the origin is specified from the swinging direction before reaching the origin specified in the processing of S5709, and the swinging direction (traveling direction) after passing the origin is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the swingable direction specified in the process of S5710 matches (S5711). In the process of S5711, when it is determined that the swinging direction (traveling direction) after passing through the origin is not the swingable direction (S5711: No), the swinging direction (passing direction) after passing through the origin is the swingable direction. Then, the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swing (tilt) motion is updated three times (S5712), and the process proceeds to S5714.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5711, when it is determined that the swinging (tilting) direction (traveling direction) after passing through the origin is the swingable direction (S5711: Yes), the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swinging motion is set. The value is updated once (S5713), and the process proceeds to S5714.

  Here, the processing of S5712 and S5713 will be specifically described. When the tilt direction setting process (S5509) is executed, the effect member 620 is at the origin position as described above. In this case, the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swing motion is “02H” (when the swing direction is the left side) or “04H” (when the swing direction is the right side). . Therefore, when the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swing motion is updated three times, if 02H (the swing direction is the left side) is set, 01H (the swing direction is the left side) is set, and 04H ( If the swing direction is set to the right side), 03H (the swing direction is the right side) is set. In other words, the value is updated to the value for the forward movement in the same direction as the previously set swinging direction. Thereby, when the swinging (advancing) direction after passing through the origin is not the swingable direction, it is set so that the forward movement is performed again in the same direction.

  On the other hand, when the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swing motion is updated once, if 02H (the swing direction is the left side) is set, 03H (the swing direction is the right side) is set. When “04H” (the swing direction is the right side) is set, “01H” (the swing direction is the left side) is set. In other words, the value is updated to the value for the forward movement in the direction opposite to the previously set swing direction (direction passing through the origin position). As a result, when the swinging (advancing) direction after passing through the origin is a swingable direction, it is set so that the forward movement is performed in the opposite direction (direction passing through the origin position in the opposite direction). The head can be swung (tilted) in the left-right direction as the center.

  Note that the determination of whether or not the swinging (advancing) direction after passing through the origin in the processing of S5711 is a swingable direction is not limited to the above. For example, it is possible to pre-read (estimate) the position at which the column member 720 is moved before the production member 620 reaches the origin position, identify the swingable direction, and determine the swingable direction. Good. With this configuration, the swingable direction can be determined with higher accuracy. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the effect member 620 comes into contact with another configuration (other accessory, outer wall 212, etc.).

  When the processing of S5712 or S5713 is finished, the operation content is read and set based on the operation scenario table (tilting operation table 222c2) based on the updated value of the operation pointer 223n (S5714). Then, the value of the swing counter 223v is updated (S5715), and this process ends. The value of the swing counter 223v in the process of S5715 is incremented by 1 when the effect member 620 reciprocates left and right once (after reciprocating leftward and then reciprocating rightward). It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to add 1 each time the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, details of the abnormality detection setting process (S5510) executed in the above-described tilting operation process (see FIG. 152) will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the abnormality detection process. This abnormality detection process (S5510) is the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor) when the return path operation of the effect member 620 is completed in the tilt operation process (see FIG. 152) described above, that is, when the movement to the origin position is completed. 618) is a process executed when it is determined that the effect member 620 is displaced from the origin position.

  In the abnormality detection process (S5510), first, an operation command corresponding to the operation of one step is set for the accessory (in this case, the production member 620) in which the abnormality is detected (S5801). Then, the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the accessory whose operation has been set by the processing of S5801 is reset to 0 (S5802), the additional operation flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) operation is set to ON (S5803), This process ends. By the processing from S5801 to S5803, in the additional operation processing (FIG. 153) described above, an additional operation for a maximum of 10 steps is executed, and the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position (see S5606 in FIG. 153). Further, in the additional operation process (FIG. 153), even when the additional operation for 10 steps is executed, if the effect member 620 is not moved to the origin position, an error is notified (see S5607 in FIG. 153). .

  Next, the details of the slide operation process (S5310) executed in the execution command process (see FIG. 150) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the slide operation process. In the slide operation process (S5310), in the execution command process (see FIG. 150) described above, the execution command corresponding to the slide operation is received, that is, the operation for one step corresponding to the slide operation of the column member 720 is completed. This process is executed when

  In the slide motion process (S5310), first, it is determined whether or not the additional motion flag 223q for the slide motion is on (S5901). If it is determined in the process of S5901 that the additional operation flag 223q for the slide operation is ON (S5901: Yes), the return path operation of the column member 720 is completed, that is, the movement to the origin position is completed. Regardless, the origin sensor (slide origin detection sensor 717) determines that the column member 720 is not at the origin position, and an additional operation of 10 steps is executed. In this case, the above-described additional operation process (FIG. 153) is executed on the sliding operation object (the strut member 720) (S5902), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5901 that the additional operation flag 223q for the slide operation is OFF (S5901: No), then the number of steps set by the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation (slide operation table 222c1). It is determined whether or not the reference has been reached (S5903).

  If it is determined in step S5903 that the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation has not reached the set number of steps (see the slide operation table 222c1) (S5903: No), the slide operation is continued. This process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5903 that the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation has reached the set number of steps (S5903: Yes), the column member 720 is moved to the origin position or the overhang position. It is. In this case, in order to determine whether or not the column member 720 is moved to the origin position or the overhang position by the corresponding sensor (the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718), It is determined whether or not the output is H (5 V) (S5904).

  In the process of S5904, when it is determined that the output of the corresponding sensor is L (0 V), that is, the column member 720 is not moved to the origin position or the overhang position (S5904), the above-described abnormality detection process (Refer to FIG. 155) is executed for the sliding action object (the column member 720) (S5905), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5904, when it is determined that the output of the corresponding sensor is H (5 V), that is, the column member 720 is moved to the origin position or the overhang position (S5904: Yes), Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the slide motion is 01H (forward motion) (S5906).

  In the process of S5906, when it is determined that the value of the motion pointer 223n is “02H” (return trip operation) (S5906: No), the timing of ending the slide motion of the column member 720 provided in the slide motion unit 700 Therefore, this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5906, when it is determined that the value of the motion pointer 223n is 01H (forward path operation) (S5906: Yes), the process proceeds to S5907 in order to move the column member 720 in the backward path.

  In the process of S5907, it is determined whether or not the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed (S5907). In the process of S5907, it is determined whether or not the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed based on whether or not the swing standby flag 223u is on. Specifically, when the swing standby flag 223u is on, it is determined that the tilting (swing) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed, and when the swing standby flag 223u is off, It is determined that the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 is incomplete.

  In the process of S5907, when it is determined that the swing standby flag 223u is off, that is, the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 is incomplete (S5908: No), the sliding operation is completed. Is set to ON (S5908), and the process is terminated. The slide standby flag 223t set to ON by the process of S5908 is referred to when determining whether or not the slide operation is completed in the tilt direction setting process (see FIG. 154) (see S5703 of FIG. 154). .

  On the other hand, in the process of S5907, when it is determined that the swing standby flag 223u is on, that is, the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 is completed (S5908: Yes), the tilting operation unit 600 In order to perform the return path operation, the process proceeds to S5909.

  In the process of S5909, the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the slide motion is set to 02H (return motion), and the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the tilting (swinging) motion is set to “03H” (swing start motion to the right). The setting is made (S5909). Then, the operation content corresponding to the value of the updated operation pointer 223n is read and set from the slide operation table 222c1 and the tilt operation table 222c2, respectively (S5910). Thereafter, the swing standby flag 223u is set to OFF (S5911), and this process ends.

  As described above, in this control example, when the initial operation based on power-on is executed, the actual number of operation steps of the swing operation of the effect member 620 and the slide operation of the support member 720 is analyzed, and the design value is calculated. It is configured so that the difference can be determined. Then, by correcting the operation speed of the slide operation according to the difference from the design value, it is possible to match the timing at which the tilting operation of the effect member 620 and the slide operation of the column member 720 are finished. That is, it is possible to finish the predetermined operation content (three swinging motions) of the effect member 620 until the sliding motion is finished. Therefore, only the swing motion continues to be executed even when the slide motion ends, or the slide motion does not end even when the swing motion ends, and the slide motion is continued with the effect member 620 stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of variation in operation such as trapping. Therefore, in the case where the swinging motion of the effect member 620 and the sliding motion of the support column member 720 operate in combination, the operation quality can be improved.

  In this control example, the swingable direction in the swing motion is defined according to the number of steps of the slide motion. Then, when the origin position of the swing motion is reached during the execution of the swing motion of the effect member 620, the number of steps of the current slide motion is determined, and the reverse swing motion through the origin is performed. It is configured to determine if it can be executed. As a result, even when the correspondence between the number of operation steps of the sliding motion and the number of motion steps of the swing motion deviates from the correspondence shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the outer wall portion 212 and the like) and the effect member 620 interfere (collision).

  In this control example, the actual operation step number of the slide operation and the actual operation step number of the swing operation are analyzed in the initial operation, and the correction value is calculated. The calculation timing is not limited to this. For example, even when it is determined that the player is not playing a game (during demonstration production), the actual number of motion steps of the slide motion and the swing motion is analyzed and the correction value is calculated. Also good. As a result, even if the number of operation steps of the slide operation or the swing operation changes during the game, the correction value can be calculated in accordance with the changed operation in the demonstration production. In the production operation combined with the operation, the operation quality can be further improved. Further, for example, the operation scenario of the slide operation may be corrected during execution of the effect that is executed in combination with the slide operation and the swing operation. More specifically, for example, when the swing motion and the slide motion are executed in combination, the number of steps required for the first cycle of the swing motion is counted (or the motion time is counted). And the number of remaining operation steps (or operation time) required for performing the swing operation for a total of three periods (three times) may be calculated. Then, based on the remaining number of steps for performing the swing motion of three cycles (three times) (that is, for executing the remaining two cycles of swing motion) and the remaining number of motion steps of the slide motion Alternatively, the operation speed of the slide operation may be corrected. More specifically, for example, when the number of operation steps of the slide operation is 70 steps, when the operation of one cycle of the slide operation is completed, the swing operation remains for 80 steps (two cycles). become. In this case, a value (80 steps / 70 steps) corrected by multiplying the operation speed of the subsequent slide operation by the ratio of the number of remaining operation steps of the slide operation and the number of remaining operation steps of the swing operation. X100pps) may be set as a new operation speed. Further, in the initial operation, the actual operation step number required for the swing operation and the actual operation step number required for the slide operation are discriminated in advance, and the correction value is calculated in consideration of the discrimination result. May be. Specifically, this processing is performed so as to determine whether or not the swing counter 223v is 1 (whether one cycle of the swing operation has ended) in the tilt direction setting processing (see FIG. 154). In this configuration, when it is determined that one cycle is completed, a process for determining the number of remaining operation steps of the slide operation and the swing operation may be executed. Then, the operation speed of the slide operation may be corrected according to the calculated number of remaining operation steps. As a result, the slide operation can be corrected every time an effect is performed in which the slide operation and the swing operation are executed in combination, so that the slide operation can be more reliably reached before reaching the extended position. The swinging motion can be performed a specified number of times (three times). Further, in the above-described case, the slide operation table 222c1 may be eliminated. Then, based on the number of operation steps (or operation time) of the effect member 620 at the end of one cycle of the swing motion, the operation content of the column member 720 is calculated so as to match the remaining operation of the effect member 620. You may comprise as follows.

  In this control example, the operation speed of the slide operation is corrected based on the correction value. However, the operation speed of the slide operation and the operation speed of the swing operation may be corrected. good. Specifically, for example, the ratio of the actual number of operation steps of the slide operation to the design value is multiplied by the operation speed as the correction value of the slide operation, and the overhang position is reached when the operation as designed is executed. You may make time correspond with the time which reaches | attains an overhanging position by actual operation | movement. Specifically, for example, when the number of operation steps is 10% higher than the design value, the operation speed is increased by 10% to absorb (cancel) the increase in the number of steps with the operation speed, and the operation time as designed. You may comprise so that it may reach to an overhanging position. Similarly, a correction value may be calculated from the actual number of motion steps of the swing motion, and the time until the swing motion is reciprocated three times may be matched with the motion at the design value. Thereby, operation | movement of an accessory can be complete | finished in the same operation time every time, and the same number of swinging operations can be performed reliably.

  In this control example, when correcting the operation speed of the slide operation, the correction value is calculated based on the ratio between the number of design operation steps and the actual number of operation steps, but instead of calculating the correction value. Thus, a plurality of operation scenarios may be prepared in accordance with the deviation width between the design operation step number and the actual operation step number. The operation scenario corresponding to the deviation width may be selected by determining the deviation width between the design operation step number and the actual operation step number. Thus, when the slide operation is executed, it is not necessary to recalculate the operation speed from the correction value every time, and the operation scenario corresponding to the deviation width may be read and set. The load can be reduced.

  In this control example, the correction value for correcting the operation content of the slide operation is calculated. However, a selectable correction value may be defined in advance in the ROM 222 or the like. Then, a correction value corresponding to a deviation width between the designed number of operation steps and the actual number of operation steps may be selected and used as a correction value when the slide operation is set. Thereby, instead of the process of calculating the correction value, the correction value can be selected by a relatively light process of selecting the correction value corresponding to the deviation width, so the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reduced. be able to.

  In this control example, the correction value is calculated based on the ratio between the actual number of steps required for the slide operation and the swing operation and the design step number (Typ value). However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, the time required for the slide operation and the swing operation may be measured, and the correction value may be calculated based on the ratio to the design operation time. For example, while the design operation time of the sliding operation from the origin position to the overhang position by the support member 720 is 1.2 seconds (120 steps / 100 pps), it is 1 to actually reach the overhang position. When .5 seconds are required (when the required time is 1.25 times), 1.25 may be stored in the correction value storage area 223p as the correction value for the slide operation.

  In this control example, the swingable direction defined in the swing area table 222d is determined every time the origin position of the swing motion is reached in accordance with the number of steps of the sliding motion of the support column member 720. Although the configuration is such that the swing direction is determined, the configuration is not limited to this configuration. For example, for each step of the swing motion, the position coordinates of the effect member 620 taking into account the slide position are calculated, and it is determined whether or not the effect member 620 fits in the region between the origin position and the overhang position. You may comprise. More specifically, for example, when the effect member 620 performs a swinging motion in the right direction when viewed from the front, the horizontal coordinate (coordinate of the slide operation direction) of the end point of the upper right end of the effect member 620 disposed on the rightmost side. May be calculated for each step. When the calculated horizontal coordinate matches the horizontal coordinate of the right end (10 cm from the origin position to the right) of the effect member 620 when both the effect member 620 and the column member 720 are at the origin position, the right direction The head swinging direction may be closely watched, and the head swinging direction may be reversed in the direction of the origin (the left direction of the front view). Similarly, when the effect member 620 performs the swinging motion in the left direction when viewed from the front, the horizontal coordinates (coordinates of the slide operation direction) of the left end point of the upper surface of the effect member 620 disposed on the leftmost side are one step. You may comprise so that it may calculate for every. When the production member 620 matches the horizontal coordinate of the left end of the production member 620 (10 cm to the left from the overhang position) when the production member 620 is at the origin position and the column member 720 is in the overhang position, the head swings leftward. You may comprise so that a head swing direction may be reversed to an origin direction (front view right direction), paying attention to operation | movement.

  Hereinafter, the calculation method of a horizontal coordinate is demonstrated more concretely. In this modification, the width of the effect member 620 is 20 cm, the operation radius of the swing motion is 15 cm, and the rotation angle of the effect member 620 by swinging the motion in one step of the effect member 620 is 6 degrees ( That is, 60 degrees in 10 steps), and the horizontal distance from the origin position to the overhang position is 60 cm (that is, 1 step 0.5 cm). In this case, for example, when the 5-step effect member 620 is operated in the right direction, the effect member 620 is rotated 30 degrees (6 degrees × 5 steps). Thereby, the midpoint of the top surface of the effect member 620 is changed by 7.5 cm (15 steps as horizontal coordinates) in the right direction in the front view (15 cm × sin 30 °). The horizontal coordinate of the right end point on the top surface of the effect member 620 is about 8.7 cm (18 steps as horizontal coordinates) on the right side of the front view from the center of the top surface (10 cm × cos 30 °). That is, the right side of the rendering member 620 is the right side of 33 steps as the horizontal coordinate. Therefore, taking into account that the width of the right half of the effect member 620 at the origin position (inverted state) is 20 steps (10 cm), to the right when the number of operation steps of the slide operation is 13 steps or less from the origin position. It is only necessary to cancel the swinging motion and reverse the swinging direction to the left.

  In this way, the number of motion steps of the sliding motion and the number of motion steps of the swing motion are converted into horizontal coordinates, and the swing direction is compared with the left and right horizontal coordinate thresholds (limit coordinates that do not interfere with the outer wall 212). Thus, even when the swinging motion and the sliding motion are deviated from the designed motion, the swinging motion can be operated in a marginal range in which interference can be prevented (suppressed). Therefore, since the swinging motion with a more dynamic feeling can be realized, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the present control example, the effect member 620 is provided above the support member 720, and the correction method of the action scenario of the accessory in which the swinging operation and the sliding operation are performed integrally has been described. However, the present invention can be applied. The accessory is not limited to this configuration. It can be applied as long as it is a plurality of actors that operate in conjunction with each other. For example, the same members as the effect members 620 are provided on the right side and the left side of the game board 13, respectively, and these do not slide. You may comprise so that a head swing operation | movement may be performed synchronizing with each other.

  In this control example, the swingable direction is defined, and control is performed so that other components such as the production member 620 and the outer wall portion 212 do not collide (interference), but the swing motion is changed during the operation. The condition to do is not limited to this. For example, it may be determined whether or not the timing at which the slide member moves to the overhang position and the timing at which the effect member 620 reaches the origin position from the right side when viewed from the front are shifted. Then, when the timing is likely to deviate, the operation content (setting value) of the swing motion is corrected, the timing when the slide member reaches the overhanging position, and the effect member 620 reaches the origin position from the right side when viewed from the front. The timing to perform may coincide. More specifically, for example, the number of remaining steps until the end of the swing motion is determined at a predetermined position between the origin position of the slide operation and the overhang position (for example, 10 steps before the overhang position). To do. And you may comprise so that it may correct | amend to the operation speed which a swing operation | movement completes with the number of remaining steps. For example, if it is determined that there are only 5 steps left until the origin position of the swing motion with the remaining 10 slide operations, the motion speed of the swing motion is set to half (100 pps → 50 pps). Alternatively, correction may be made so that the swinging motion is performed for exactly 5 steps while the sliding motion is performed for 10 steps. Further, when the remaining number of steps of the swing operation is small with respect to the slide operation, a weight may be inserted instead of changing the operation speed. The weight may be put only once or may be put in a plurality of times. On the other hand, if it is determined that 20 steps of swinging motion to the origin position of the swing motion remain with the remaining 10 steps of slide motion, the motion speed of the swing motion is doubled (100 pps → By setting to 200 pps), the swinging motion may be corrected to be executed just 20 steps while the sliding motion is executed 10 steps. Further, instead of determining the timing for correcting the operation content of the swing motion based on the number of operation steps of the slide operation, it may be determined whether or not to correct the swing motion by determining the slide position with a sensor or the like. . Thus, by matching the timing at which the slide operation ends with the timing at which the swing operation ends, it is possible to improve the visual quality when the effect member 620 and the column member 720 operate in combination. it can. As another example of changing the swing motion during the operation, the slide motion position (number of remaining motion steps) and the number of swing motions are determined during the slide motion, and the remaining motion is determined. It may be determined whether or not the predetermined number of swings (three times) can be completed by the number of steps. If it is determined that the predetermined number of swings is not reached, the operation speed of the swing operation may be varied to correct the operation to achieve the predetermined number of swings. Note that the process for determining the number of remaining operation steps and the number of swings, and the process for correcting the motion speed of the swing motion are performed by setting the additional motion flag 223q in the process of S5901 in the slide motion processing (see FIG. 156). It may be executed after it is determined to be off (S5901: No).

  In this control example, in the additional operation processing (see FIG. 153), if the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H even if an additional one-step operation is performed in the sensor direction, an error command is set and an error is generated. Although it has been configured so as to notify, the method of notifying an error is not limited to this. For example, while displaying an image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality on the third symbol display device 81, the accessory that has detected the abnormality is operated in an operation mode dedicated for a certain period (for example, for 10 seconds) (for abnormality detection). It may be configured to stop the operation of the accessory that has not been detected other abnormalities. By comprising in this way, it can be discriminate | determined easily from the appearance which abnormalities generate | occur | produced to which role. That is, when an error is notified, a hall clerk or the like can easily determine that some abnormality has occurred in the accessory that continues to operate.

  In the present control example, it is assumed that the actors (the production member 620 and the column member 720) operate in combination, but instead of this, or in addition to this, the column member 720 and other configurations May be controlled in conjunction with each other. For example, the strut member 720 may be configured to switch the lighting pattern of the electrical decoration units 29 to 33 in conjunction with the slide operation. In this case, a lighting pattern may be set in accordance with the sliding operation of the column member 720. Moreover, you may comprise so that a lighting aspect may be switched whenever the support | pillar member 720 returns to an origin position. For example, every time the origin position and the overhang position are reciprocated once by a slide operation, the lighting colors of the electric decoration units 29 to 33 may be switched in the order of red → green → blue → red. By configuring in this way, the lighting color set at the time of the previous slide operation is simply stored and switched in accordance with the start of the slide operation, thus simplifying the lighting control of the lighting units 29 to 33 can do. Further, as compared with the case where the lighting pattern is switched in accordance with the progress of the slide operation, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the progress of the slide operation and the switching timing of the lighting pattern. Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance quality during the sliding operation. In addition, since it is sufficient to switch the lighting color in response to the return to the origin position, the sliding motor is changed by changing the driving motor for sliding the support member 720 or changing the mechanism such as the gear ratio. Even if the round-trip time is changed, the lighting control data before the change can be used as it is. That is, the step of changing the lighting pattern according to the changed configuration can be omitted, so that the work of the designer can be reduced.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 173. In the first control example described above, when displaying images on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690 during a normal game, the capacity of the character ROM 234 is increased by using various power-on images. The technology to reduce was explained.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, a control method that can further increase the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect that is one of the entertainment effects executed in the sub display device 690 will be described. Although details will be described later, the timing effect is an effect that suggests the timing of pressing (operating) the frame button 229 provided on the front frame 14 by the image displayed on the sub display device 690. This is a type of entertainment effect that is executed while the special symbol variation display is being executed. In this timing effect, points are added every time the timing suggested in the sub display device 690 matches the timing at which the player actually operates the frame button 229, and is acquired until the timing effect ends. If the score is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value (norm), the effect is to give a privilege to the player.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that a frame button 229 is provided instead of the frame button 22, and the sound lamp control device 113 is different. The configuration of the provided ROM 222 and RAM 223 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. is there. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 157, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, a frame button 229 is provided on the left side in front of the lending operation unit 40, and the frame button 22 is deleted. The frame button 229 is composed of four types of buttons: an upper button UB, a right button RB, a left button LB, and a lower button DB. These four types of buttons are used for timing effects. That is, the timing effect is configured to indicate the pressing (operation) timing of the frame button 229 and the type of button to be pressed (operating) (see FIGS. 163 and 164). Then, when both the timing suggested by the effect and the type of button match, the effect is such that points are added.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 163 to 165, the display mode of the timing effect will be described. First, FIG. 163 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the sub display device 690 when the timing effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 163, when the timing effect is executed, a plurality of display areas (display areas 901, 902, 903, 904a, 904b, 904c, 904d, 905) are displayed on the sub display device 690.

  Display areas 904a, 904b, 904c, 904d, and 905 displayed in the lower half of the display area of the sub display device 690 indicate to the player the timing of pressing (operating) the frame button 229 and the button type to be operated. This is a display area in which display is performed. As shown in FIG. 163, the display area 905 is composed of a vertically long rectangular-shaped pressing suggestion area 911a and four horizontally long rectangular scroll display areas 911b to 911e. The scroll display areas 911b to 911e are displayed vertically in this order.

  Each of the scroll display areas 911b to 911e is configured such that various images can be scroll-displayed in the left direction in the front view (the direction of the pressing suggestion area 911a). As various types of images to be scroll-displayed, as shown in FIG. 163, for example, scroll bars 912a to 912e, a continuous hitting bar 913a, and the like are provided. Points are added by pressing the corresponding type of button at the timing when the various scrolled images are scrolled to a position where the various images are overlapped with the pressing suggestion region 911a. The scroll bar is configured such that the corresponding point (10 points or 50 points) is added when the corresponding button type is pressed once at the timing when the scroll bar overlaps with the pressing suggestion area 911a. On the other hand, the continuous hitting bar is configured such that the corresponding point (50 points) is added when the corresponding button is pressed 10 times while it overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a.

  A balloon-type display area 901 pointing to the press suggestion area 911a is displayed above the press suggestion area 911a. In this display area 901, the characters “PUSH button at the timing when the bars overlap and aim for 1000 points!” Are displayed. Depending on the display contents of this display area 901, if the various buttons scroll-displayed in the scroll display areas 911b to 911e are scrolled to the position of the press suggestion area 911a, the point is added if the frame button 229 is pressed. The player can be easily understood.

  In addition, a substantially rectangular display area 902 is displayed on the upper right of the sub display device 690. This display area 902 is acquired when the type of image that can be scroll-displayed in each of the scroll display areas 911b to 911e, and when the corresponding type of button is pressed (operated) at the timing when the image overlaps the press suggestion area 911a. Correspondence with possible points is displayed. Specifically, the white scroll bar is displayed as 50 points, the hatched scroll bar is displayed as 10 points, and the scroll bar displaying the characters “continuous hit!” Is displayed. 50 points are displayed. By clearly indicating the correspondence between images and points in the display area 902, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having doubts regarding the increase or decrease in points, so that the player can perform timing performance with peace of mind. The game inside can be performed.

  A horizontally long display area 903 is displayed below the display area 902. In this display area 903, the total points acquired in the current timing effect and the norm are displayed. In the example of FIG. 163 (a), while the quota is 1000 points, 100 points have been acquired so far, so the display area 902 has the characters “point: 0100/1000”. Is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the current point with respect to the quota. Therefore, a game can be performed aiming at a quota, so that the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  In this control example, when the quota is achieved in the timing effect, the current gaming state is notified as a privilege. In this control example, as in the first control example, 2R probability variation jackpot is provided as the jackpot type. Also, as a kind of losing, the same opening operation as the 2R probability variation jackpot is provided, and it is not possible to identify whether the 2R probability variation jackpot is won or not based on the direction and the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a It is configured as follows. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize the gaming state after the 2R opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is executed. Therefore, in this control example, if the quota is achieved at the end of the timing production, the current gaming state (whether it is a special symbol probable state or a low-probability state) is reported as a timing production privilege. It is configured as follows. Thereby, a player who wants to know the current gaming state can be actively involved in the timing performance. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In addition, whether or not a privilege is given by skill of the player's pressing (operation) timing by making the privilege when the timing presentation is successful have no effect on the game result (notification of the current gaming state) Can decide. On the other hand, if a result (for example, jackpot) that has already been determined at the start of the change (before the timing effect is started) is set as a privilege, the timing effect is started. Before, the result of the timing effect (whether or not the mode for achieving the quota can be displayed) is determined. If there is a timing effect in which the quota cannot be achieved, the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect may be reduced. On the other hand, in this control example, the privilege given when the quota is achieved in the timing effect is set to “notification of gaming state” that does not affect the game result. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant a privilege purely according to the skill of pressing the frame button 229. That is, when a privilege is granted, it is possible to make the player feel more strongly that the player has acquired the privilege by himself. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  On the left side of the display area 905, circular display areas 904a to 904d are displayed vertically. The display areas 904a to 904d are displayed so that their vertical positions are substantially the same as the scroll display areas 911b to 911e, respectively. In addition, characters “upper”, “right”, “left”, and “lower” are displayed inside these display areas 904a to 904d, respectively. With these characters, the player can easily recognize the button type corresponding to the scroll display areas 911b to 911e whose vertical positions are substantially the same as the display areas 904a to 904d. That is, it is recognized that the scroll display area 911b whose vertical position is substantially the same as the display area 904a on which the characters “up” are displayed is a display area for indicating the timing of pressing (operating) the upper button UB. Can do. Similarly, the scroll display area 911c indicates the pressing (operation) timing of the right button RB, the scroll display area 911d indicates the pressing (operation) timing of the left button LB, and the scroll display area 911e indicates the down button DB. It is possible to easily recognize that the timing of pressing (operation) is suggested.

  By executing the timing effect, the frame button 229 can be operated with the aim of achieving the quota, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 163 (b) and FIG. 164 (a), a display mode when the operation of the frame button 229 is detected in the timing effect will be described. First, FIG. 163 (a) shows a display mode when the frame button 229 can be pressed (a point can be acquired) at the timing when the image scrolled in the timing effect overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a. ing.

  FIG. 163 (b) shows the display contents when the player presses the upper button UB at the timing when the white scroll bar 912a scroll-displayed in the slide display area 911b overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a. . As shown in FIG. 163 (b), when it is detected that the player has pressed the upper button UB, the display area 904a with the letters “up” (corresponding to the upper button UB) is turned on. This allows the player to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 has normally detected the player's operation (pressing), so that the game during the timing effect can be performed more safely.

  Further, on the left side of the display areas 904a to 904d, a display area 921 is formed to indicate that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 229 in a timely manner. Since the character “GREAT” is displayed in the display area 921, the player can easily recognize that the operation timing of the frame button 229 is correct. Further, below the display area 921, a character 922 indicating a point given as a result of successful pressing is displayed. With this character 922 of “+50”, the player can easily recognize the acquired points. In addition, the display of the display area 903 is updated according to the acquired points (0100/1000 → 0150/1000). With these display contents, the player can recognize that both the timing of pressing the frame button 229 and the button type match (successfully pressed). In addition, the earned (granted) points and the total points to date can be easily confirmed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 164 (a), a description will be given of display contents when the timing of pressing a button deviates from the suggestion display area 911a. FIG. 164 (a) is a diagram showing display contents when the pressing of the upper button UB is detected before the scroll bar 912a reaches the pressing suggestion area 911a. Also in this case, in order to notify that the depression of the upper button UB has been detected normally, the display area 904a with the letters “up” (corresponding to the upper button UB) is turned on.

  Further, on the left side of the display area 904a, a display area 921 is formed to indicate that the player has failed to press (operate) the frame button 229. Since the characters “BAD” are displayed in the display area 921, the player can easily recognize that the timing of pressing (operating) the frame button 229 is incorrect. Further, below the display area 921, a character 924 indicating that a penalty has been imposed due to the failure to press is displayed. The character “924” of “−10” makes it easy to recognize that the point has been subtracted due to a failure in pressing. Therefore, since the frame button 229 can be operated more carefully, the player's willingness to participate in the timing performance can be improved. In addition, the display of the display area 903 is updated in accordance with the subtracted point (0100/1000 → 0090/1000). With these display contents, it is possible to make the player recognize that the press of the frame button 229 has failed. Also, the subtracted points and the total points up to the present can be easily confirmed.

  Next, examples of modes with different difficulty levels will be described. Although details will be described later, in this control example, when the timing effect is executed, the difficulty level of the timing effect to be executed this time can be determined from a plurality of difficulty levels. Further, the determined difficulty level is not fixed, and may be reviewed in the middle of the production depending on the progress of the timing production, the participation situation of the player in the timing production, and the like.

  FIG. 164 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing effect with a high difficulty level. As shown in FIG. 164 (b), in this modified example, when the difficulty level is high, the appearance ratio of scroll bars with few points that can be acquired (scroll bars 915a to 915e to which 10 points are given when the pressing is successful) is high. Become. In other words, the quota cannot be achieved unless the frame button 229 is accurately pressed more times. Further, the scroll speed is increased as the difficulty level increases. Thus, it is difficult to match the timing of pressing the frame button 229. By providing a timing effect with a different degree of difficulty, it is possible to deal with both players who are good at pressing the frame button 229 at the same time, and players who are not good at it. That is, the difficulty level can be varied according to the skill of the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 165, a display mode when notifying the result of the timing effect will be described. FIG. 165 (a) shows a display that is displayed on the sub display device 690 when 1000 points that are the norm is achieved (for example, 1200 points are acquired) in the timing effect executed during the probabilistic state of the special symbol. It is the figure which illustrated the contents. As shown in FIG. 165 (a), when it is determined that the timing effect is completed and the quota is achieved, a result notification area 916 for notifying the result of the timing effect is formed inside the display area 905. Is done. As a result, in the notification area, the text “Normal has been achieved! This display allows the player to recognize that the current gaming state is a special symbol probability changing state. In the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the characters “Current state is low probability ...” are displayed instead of the characters “Current state is probable!”.

  On the other hand, FIG. 165 (b) exemplifies display contents displayed on the sub display device 690 when the timing effect is less than the normal 1000 points (for example, only 600 points can be obtained). FIG. As shown in FIG. 165 (b), even when it is determined that the timing effect has ended and the quota has not been achieved, a result notification area 916 for notifying the result of the timing effect is displayed inside the display area 905. It is formed. As a result, in the notification area, the characters “No quota has not been achieved ...” are displayed. That is, only the fact that the quota could not be achieved by the timing effect is notified, and the current gaming state is not notified (no privilege is given).

  As described above, by achieving the quota in the timing effect, the current game state is notified in the result notification area 916, so that a player who wants to know the current game state is actively involved in the timing effect. Can do.

  In this control example, when the score is achieved, the gaming state notification is set as a privilege, but the privilege in the timing effect is not limited to this. Any privilege that does not depend on the game result determined before execution of the timing effect is determined. For example, by achieving the quota, the display mode of the subsequent display effect (variation pattern effect) is special. You may comprise so that it may change into an aspect. By comprising in this way, in order to see the display effect of a special aspect, it can be made to participate in a timing effect actively.

  In this control example, when the difficulty level is changed, the type and number of scroll bars and the scroll speed are changed. However, the method of changing the difficulty level is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that the point of a norm may become high as difficulty becomes high. Further, for example, the button types to be used may increase as the difficulty level increases.

  In this control example, the point is added by detecting 10 presses while the continuous hitting bar overlaps with the press suggestion area 911a. However, the number of presses is not limited to 10 times. Absent. The number may be set to less than 10 times or may be set to a larger number. Further, the number of times of pressing may be changed according to the degree of difficulty. For example, the number of times of pressing may be increased as the degree of difficulty increases. Thereby, diversity can be given to the change method of a difficulty level.

<Electric Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 158 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 158, in this control example, a frame button 229 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. The frame button 229 is provided with four types of button types: an upper button UB, a right button RB, a left button LB, and a lower button DB. As described above, these four types of buttons are used for timing effects (see FIGS. 163 and 164).

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. In addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example, the ROM 222 in this control example is provided with a timing effect selection table 222d and a pressing period table 222e.

  The timing effect selection table 222d is a data table in which an aspect of a timing effect, which is a type of interest effect executed during the special symbol variation display, is defined. When executing the timing effect, the timing effect selection table 222d is referred to, and the display mode (degree of difficulty) of the sub display device 690 during the timing effect is set. The difficulty level refers to the ease of timing adjustment when the frame button 229 is pressed (operated) in accordance with the timing and button type suggested in the sub display device 690. The higher the difficulty level is, the more severe the timing of pressing (operating) the frame button 229, or the instruction of pressing (operating) more button types in a short period (see FIG. 164 (b)).

  Moreover, the timing effect of this control example is divided into three types of periods (an early period, a middle period, and an end period), and is configured so that a display mode can be set at a separate timing for each period. . More specifically, at the start of the timing effect, the mode of the early period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d, and the early period of the timing effect is started. Then, at the end of the early period, the mode of the middle period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d, and the middle period of the timing effect is started. Furthermore, the end stage period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d at the end of the middle period, and the end stage period of the timing effect is started.

  Details of the timing effect table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 160, in the timing effect table 222d, an effect mode of the timing effect is defined in association with the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ indicating the difficulty level of the timing effect. More specifically, as an aspect of the early period, the difficulty level counter 223γ value “4” is associated with the difficulty level 5 early stage effect, and the difficulty level counter 223γ value “3” is the difficulty level 4 The early stage production is associated. Although illustration is omitted, similarly, the difficulty level counter 223γ value “2” is associated with the difficulty level 3 early stage effect, and the difficulty level counter 223γ value “1” is the difficulty level 2 value. The opening stage effects are associated with each other, and the difficulty level counter 223γ is associated with the difficulty level 1 opening stage effect. In addition, it shows that difficulty is so high that the number of difficulty is large. That is, the difficulty level 5 opening effect is the most difficult mode, and the difficulty level 1 opening effect is the least difficult mode.

  The aspect of the middle period is defined similarly. That is, as an aspect of the middle period, a difficulty level counter 223γ value “4” is associated with a difficulty level 5 medium stage effect, and a difficulty level counter 223γ value “3” is a difficulty level 4 medium stage effect. The difficulty level counter 223γ value “2” is associated with the difficulty level 3 medium stage effect, and the difficulty level counter 223γ value “1” is associated with the difficulty level 2 medium stage effect. The difficulty level 1 middle board effect is associated with the value “0” of the difficulty level counter 223γ.

  Furthermore, the mode of the end period is similarly defined. That is, as an aspect of the middle period, an end stage effect for difficulty level 5 is associated with the value “4” of the difficulty level counter 223γ, and an end stage effect for difficulty level 4 is associated with the value “3” of the difficulty level counter 223γ. The difficulty level counter 223γ value “2” is associated with the difficulty level 3 end stage effect, and the difficulty level counter 223γ value “1” is associated with the difficulty level 2 end game effect. The difficulty level counter 223γ is associated with the difficulty level 1 end stage effect for the value “0”.

  Although details will be described later, the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is updated in a timely manner according to the game situation of the player. For example, when setting the aspect of the middle period, if it is determined that the player has acquired relatively few points (for example, less than 200) in the early period, the value of the difficulty counter is decremented by 1, and subtracted. An effect mode of difficulty corresponding to the later value is set. As a result, the mode of the mid-period can be set to a mode that is less difficult than the initial period, so that the player cannot acquire points for a long time, so participation in the production in the middle of the timing production It is possible to prevent (suppress) giving up. On the contrary, when it is determined that the player has acquired a relatively large number of points in the early period, 1 is added to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ. Thereby, when a player who is good at timing effects plays a game, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from continuing in a mode having a low difficulty level and extending the game.

  In this way, since it is possible to select effects with different difficulty levels from the timing effect selection table 222d according to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, the timing effect modes can be diversified. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved. Further, by providing different difficulty levels, it is possible to set a difficulty level suitable for the skill level of each player, so that the player's willingness to participate in timing effects can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 159 (a), the description will be continued. The pressing period table 222e indicates whether or not it is determined that when the frame button 229 is pressed, it is determined that the image such as the scroll bar has been pressed (successfully pressed) at the timing 911 that overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a. Is a data table defined in association with the elapsed time since the start of. When any button (up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, down button DB) constituting the frame button 229 is pressed during execution of the timing effect, the pressing period table 222e is referred to and this time It is discriminated whether the button is pressed successfully or unsuccessfully. If it is successful, an effect in which points are added is executed (see FIG. 163 (b)), and if it is unsuccessful, an effect in which points are subtracted (a penalty is imposed) is executed (FIG. 164 (a)). )reference). Details of the pressing period table 222e will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. FIG.

  FIG. 161 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the pressing period table 222e. As shown in FIG. 161, a plurality of data tables corresponding to the set period and the difficulty level are defined as the pressing period table 222e. For example, an opening difficulty level 1 table 222e1 is provided as a table corresponding to the opening degree effect for difficulty level 1 set in the opening period. When the difficulty level 1 opening effect is set, the opening level difficulty level 1 table 222e1 is set as the corresponding pressing period table. Similarly, the same applies to the initial stage effect for the difficulty level 2 to the initial stage effect for the difficulty level 5, and a table 222e2 for the initial difficulty level 2 and a table 222e5 for the initial difficulty level 5 are defined as the corresponding pressing period tables. ing.

  Further, the middle period is the same as the early period. Specifically, as the pressing period table corresponding to the difficulty level 1 middle stage production to the difficulty level 5 middle stage production, the middle stage difficulty 1 table 2226 to the middle stage difficulty level. 5 table 222e10 is provided.

  On the other hand, the end period has a different structure from the early period and the middle period. In other words, a plurality of pressing period tables are associated with one rendering mode for the last stage period. Here, the plurality of pressing period tables mean tables having different widths (period lengths) of ranges detected as successful. Even if the effect for the end stage period in the same mode is displayed, the difficulty level can be made different by changing the period in which the success is detected. That is, since the difficulty can be varied without increasing the display form of the timing effect, the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be reduced.

  Note that a table with a wide range in which success is detected is selected when it is determined that the player has acquired a small number of points (for example, less than 600 points) before reaching the final stage. If there are too few points earned by the end of the game, there is a risk that the player will give up on achieving the quota with the timing effect. Therefore, in this control example, when setting the end stage period, it is determined whether or not the point is less than 600 points, and if it is less than 600 points, a pressing period table with a wide range for detecting success is selected. It is configured. Thereby, since the player can acquire points more easily by widening the range to detect success, it is possible to participate in the timing performance without giving up until the end.

  On the other hand, a table with a narrow range in which success is detected is selected when it is determined that the player has acquired many points (for example, 900 points or more) before reaching the final stage. If there are too many points acquired until the end of the period, the player may feel a margin and the operation of the frame button 229 during the end of the period may be complicated. Therefore, in this control example, by selecting a table with a narrow range where success is detected, the operation of the frame button 229 can be executed while keeping a sense of tension until the end of the timing effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  When an effect in the final period corresponding to difficulty level 1 to difficulty level 3 is selected, a pressing period table in which the range where success is detected is a normal area and a pressing range where the range where detection is successful is relatively wide A period table may be selected. For example, when the end stage effect for difficulty level 1 is selected as the effect mode for the end stage period, either the end stage difficulty level 1 normal range table 222e13 or the end stage difficulty level 1 wide range table 222e18 is selected as the pressing period table. Selected.

  On the other hand, when the production of the end stage period corresponding to the difficulty level 4 and the difficulty level 5 is selected, the range where the success is detected is a normal-sized press period table and the range where the success is detected. In addition to a relatively wide pressing period table, there is a possibility that a pressing period table having a relatively narrow range where success is detected is selected. For example, when the end stage production for difficulty level 5 is selected as the production mode of the end stage period, the end stage difficulty level 5 narrow range table 222e13, the end stage difficulty level 5 normal range table 222e17, and the end stage difficulty level are used as the pressing period table. There is a possibility that the 5 wide range table 222e22 is selected.

  The timing effect is configured so that the pressing period table with a narrow range detected as a success is selected only when an effect in the end stage period corresponding to the difficulty level 4 or the difficulty level 5 is selected. This is because there is a high possibility that a good player is playing a game. When a player who is good at timing effects is playing a game, there is a risk that the timing effects in the normal detection range may be too easy. Therefore, in this case, in addition to displaying in a mode with a high degree of difficulty, the range for detecting success is narrowed so that even players who are good at timing effects can enjoy. Thereby, the willingness to participate with respect to a player's timing production can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the specific prescribed contents of each table constituting the pressing period table 222e will be described by taking the early difficulty level 3 table 222e3 as an example. In accordance with the setting of the opening difficulty level 3 table 222e3, the difficulty level 3 opening effect is set as an effect mode. The display mode of the difficulty level 3 opening effect is shown in FIG. The display mode shown in FIG. Therefore, the description of the opening difficulty level 3 table 222e will be made with reference to FIG. 163 as appropriate.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the early difficulty level 3 table 222e3. 162, in the early difficulty level 3 table 222e3, the type of pressing period (corresponding to the elapsed time since the start of the timing effect (the value of the timing effect pointer 223δ updated periodically) ( Whether it is a success period, a failure period, or a continuous hit period). The types of pressing periods are defined as a pressing period for the upper button UB, a pressing period for the right button RB, a pressing period for the left button LB, and a pressing period for the lower button DB, respectively.

  Specifically, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for all button types in the range of elapsed time from the start of the timing effect to 0 milliseconds to 1499 milliseconds (1.499 seconds). . If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined to have failed. Further, a success period is associated with the elapsed time in the range of 1500 milliseconds to 1699 milliseconds as a pressing period for the upper button UB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for other button types. Therefore, during this period, when the upper button UB is operated, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when other buttons are operated, it is determined to be failed. Note that the display content of the sub display device 690 during this period includes only the scroll bar scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911b (the scroll bar 912a in FIG. 163) overlaps the press-indication area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911b. The state where the scroll bar that is scroll-displayed in ˜911e does not reach the press suggestion area 911a is displayed.

  Further, in the range of elapsed time from 1700 milliseconds to 2199 seconds, failure periods are associated as pressing periods for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined to have failed. A success period is associated with the elapsed time in the range of 2200 milliseconds to 2399 milliseconds as a pressing period for the down button DB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for other button types. Therefore, during this period, when the lower button DB is pressed, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when another button is pressed, it is determined to be failed. Note that the display contents of the sub display device 690 during this period include only the scroll bar scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911e (the scroll bar 912e in FIG. 163) overlaps with the press-indicating area 911a, and other scroll display areas 911a. The state in which the scroll bar that is scroll-displayed in ˜911d does not reach the press suggestion area 911a is displayed.

  In the range of elapsed time from 2400 milliseconds to 2999 seconds, failure periods are associated as pressing periods for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined to have failed. A success period is associated with the elapsed time of 3000 milliseconds to 3199 milliseconds as a pressing period for the right button RB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the right button RB is pressed, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when another button is pressed, it is determined to be unsuccessful. Note that the display content of the sub display device 690 during this period is such that only the scroll bar scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911c (the scroll bar 912b in FIG. 163) overlaps the press-indication area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911b. , 911d and 911e are displayed in a state where the scroll bar that has been scroll-displayed does not reach the press-indicating area 911a.

  In the range of elapsed time from 3200 milliseconds to 3799 seconds, failure periods are associated as pressing periods for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined to have failed. In the range of elapsed time from 3800 milliseconds to 4999 milliseconds, a continuous hitting period is associated as a pressing period for the upper button UB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the upper button UB is pressed 10 times, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when other buttons are operated, it is determined to be unsuccessful. Note that the display content of the sub display device 690 during this period includes only the continuous hitting bar (the continuous hitting bar 913a in FIG. 163) scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911b, and the other scroll display area 911c. The state where the scroll bar that is scroll-displayed in ˜911e does not reach the press suggestion area 911a is displayed.

  In the range of the elapsed time from 5000 milliseconds to 5199 milliseconds, a continuous hitting period is associated as a pressing period for the upper button UB, and a successful period is associated as a pressing period for the right button RB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for other button types. Therefore, during this period, when the upper button UB is pressed down a total of 10 times or when the right button RB is pressed down, it is determined as successful and points are added, and when other buttons are operated, it is determined as failed. The Note that the display content of the sub display device 690 during this period includes a continuous hitting bar (the continuous hitting bar 913a in FIG. 163) scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911b and a scroll bar (see FIG. The scroll bar 912c) in 163 overlaps with the press suggestion area 911a, and the scroll bar scroll-displayed in the other scroll display areas 911d and 911e is not in the press suggestion area 911a.

  Although not shown in the figure, a pressing period corresponding to the button type is defined for the subsequent elapsed time. By using this early difficulty level 3 table 222e3, the pressing period can be updated in synchronization with the display form of the timing effect. Since the other tables defined in the pressing period table 222e have the same configuration, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (b). In the RAM 223 in this control example, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example, a timing effect permission flag 223α, a latent probability variation flag 223β, a difficulty counter 223γ, a timing effect pointer 223δ, and a repeated hit counter 223ε, A continuous hitting flag 223ζ and a score counter 223η are provided.

  The timing effect permission flag 223α is a flag indicating whether or not it is possible to set a timing effect as an entertainment effect when selecting a variation display mode. If this timing effect permission flag 223α is on, it indicates that the timing effect can be set as a variation effect mode, and if it is off, it indicates that the timing effect cannot be set.

  Here, as described above, in this control example, it is difficult to identify from the outside (from the player's perspective) whether the 2R probability variation big hit or the small win has come. In other words, when the specific winning opening 65a performs the 2R opening operation, the game state is not changed because the 2R probability change big hit and the special symbol is changed to the probability change state of the special symbol or only a small hit. I can't identify it. In other words, if the 2R opening operation by the specific winning opening 65a has not been executed once after the big hit A or the big win B is finished, the current gaming state is clear to the player. Therefore, even if the timing effect is executed in this case, there is a possibility that the player does not want to obtain a privilege of notifying the gaming state and does not participate in the timing effect. Therefore, in this control example, after the jackpot A or jackpot B is executed, if the 2R opening operation by the specific winning opening 65a has never been executed, the timing effect is set by setting the timing effect to OFF. It is configured not to be selected (see S1827 in FIG. 173).

  Further, the timing effect permission flag 223α is set to ON when the 2R probability variation big hit or the small hit is made (see S1824 in FIG. 173). Once the timing effect is executed, the timing effect permission flag 223α is reset to OFF (see FIG. 6412). Thereby, the opportunity that a timing effect is performed can be limited to only once for 2R opening operation by one specific prize opening 65a. Therefore, since it is possible to make the timing effect more seriously, the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect can be improved.

  The probability variation state flag 223β is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol has a high probability state. If the probability variation state flag 223β is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in a certain variation state, and if it is off, it indicates that the probability variation state is not established. The probability variation state flag 223β is set to ON when a variation pattern command corresponding to a 16R probability variation jackpot (big hit A) or a 2R probability variation jackpot (big hit C) is received (see S1823 and S1826 in FIG. 173), and the 16R time is shortened. When the variation pattern command corresponding to the big hit (big hit B) is received, it is set to OFF (see S1826 in FIG. 173). When the quota is achieved in the timing performance and the current gaming state is notified, the gaming state is notified with reference to the probability variation state flag 223β.

  The difficulty level counter 223γ is a counter for identifying the difficulty level of the effect set in each period of the timing effect (the early period, the middle period, and the final period). If the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 0, an effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 1 is selected. If the value is 1, an effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 2 is selected. The production mode corresponding to the difficulty level 3 is selected. If the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 3, an effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 4 is selected, and if the value is 4, an effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 5 is selected.

  The difficulty counter 223γ has an initial value set to 0. That is, it is reset to 0 when the power is turned on. Also, in the case of setting the production mode of the middle stage period of the timing production, when it is determined that the player has acquired a relatively large number of points (the difficulty level is too low for the player who is currently playing), 1 is added to the counter value (see S6203 in FIG. 170). Thereby, a difficulty level can be made higher than the production | presentation aspect of an early stage period as a production | presentation aspect selected in a middle stage period. On the other hand, in the case of setting the production mode in the middle period, the counter value is decremented by 1 when it is determined that the number of points acquired by the player is small (the difficulty level is too high for the player who is currently playing). (See S6207 in FIG. 170). Thereby, a difficulty level can be made lower than the production | presentation aspect of an early stage period as the production | presentation aspect selected in a middle stage period. As described above, by using the difficulty level counter 223γ, the difficulty level can be varied according to the skill level of the player, so that it is possible to match the difficulty level more suitable for the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  The timing effect pointer 223δ is a pointer for indicating an elapsed time since the start of the timing effect, and is updated every 1 millisecond. During execution of the timing effect, the timing effect pointer 223δ is referred to, and the type of the pressing period is determined. This timing effect pointer 223δ is periodically updated in the main process, for example.

  The repeated hit counter 223ε is a counter for counting how many times the corresponding button is pressed in the repeated hit period of the timing effect. It is determined whether or not consecutive hits are successful according to the value of the repeated hit counter 223ε. This repeated hit counter 223ε is incremented by 1 every time an operation of the corresponding button is detected in the consecutive hit period (see S6007 in FIG. 168), and is reset to 0 when the predetermined number of consecutive hits is reached in the repeat hit period (see FIG. S6011). It is also reset to 0 at the end of the continuous hit period. The number of consecutive hits can be accurately determined by this repeated hit counter 223ε.

  The consecutive hit success flag 223ζ is a flag indicating whether or not the predetermined number of consecutive hits has been reached in the consecutive hit period, and if it is on, it indicates that the number of consecutive hits has been reached. On the other hand, if it is OFF, it indicates that the number of repeated hits has not been reached or it is not the repeated hit period. The success flag 223ζ is set to ON when it is determined that the predetermined number of consecutive hits has been reached (see S6011 in FIG. 168), and is set to OFF when the continuous hit period ends. While the continuous hit success flag 223ζ is on, control is performed such that even if the button corresponding to the set continuous hit period is continuously pressed more than the specified number of times, it is not determined as a failure. As a result, the player can be struck repeatedly without worrying about the number of repeated strikes.

  The score counter 223η is a counter for counting the points (scores) acquired by the player in one timing effect. At the end of the timing effect, the value of the score counter 223η is compared with the norm of 1000 points to determine whether or not the norm has been achieved. The score counter 223η is updated every time the pressing of the frame button 229 is detected during the timing effect (see S6010, S6014, and S6016 in FIG. 168).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 166, a description will be given of a time change in the display mode when the variation pattern in which the timing effect is set is executed. First, as a premise, the timing effect has a certain probability (for example, 10) when the timing effect permission flag 223α is on and a variation effect (a variation effect in which reach occurs) having a variation time of 30 seconds or more is selected. % Probability).

  As shown in FIG. 166, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variation effect in which the timing effect is set, the reach effect is generated in the third symbol display device 81. Then, at the time when 5 seconds have elapsed from the occurrence of the reach effect (at the time when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation), the effect mode of the early stage period is selected, and the timing effect of the selected effect mode is started on the sub display device 690. Is done.

  When 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the timing effect (when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation), the early period ends, and the effect mode of the middle period is selected, and the intermediate period is started based on the selected content. . Furthermore, when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the mid-period period (when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of variation), the mid-period period is ended, and an effect mode of the end-period period is selected, and the end-period period is started based on the selected content. . Then, when 2 seconds elapse from the start of the end period, the end period is ended, and a notification of the result of the current timing effect (whether or not the quota is achieved) is set. This notification is performed for 1 second.

<Electric Configuration of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Control Example>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 173. First, FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example.

  Among the main processes, the processes of S1501 to S1511 and S1513 to S1520 are the same as the processes of S1501 to S1511 and S1513 to S1520 executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) in the first control example, respectively. Processing is executed. Further, in the main process in the third control example, when the process of S1510 ends, a timing effect process (S1541) for performing various settings during the timing effect is executed, and the process proceeds to S1511. In the process of S1511, the same process as the command determination process (S1511) in the first control example is executed. Next, instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 109) in the first control example, the variable display setting process 2 ( S1542 is executed. When the variable display setting process 2 is completed, the processes after S1513 are executed as in the first control example.

  Details of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1507) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Although the frame button input monitoring / production process itself was also executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) in the first control example, the detailed description thereof has been omitted, and will be described again.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1507), first, it is determined whether or not the timing effect is being performed (S6001). finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing effect is being performed (S6001: Yes), it is then determined whether or not pressing of the operation button (frame button 229) is detected (S6002). If it is determined that the pressing of the operation button (the frame button 229) has not been detected (S6002: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6002 that the pressing of the operation button (the frame button 229) has been detected (S6002: Yes), the pressing period table 222e corresponding to the button type in which the pressing has been detected is read (S6003). Thereafter, the pressing period type is specified based on the read pressing period table 222e and the value of the timing effect pointer 223δ (S6004).

  When the processing of S6004 is quantified, it is next determined whether or not it is a continuous hitting period (S6005). If it is determined that it is a continuous hitting period (S6005: Yes), then whether or not the continuous hitting success flag 223ζ is on is determined. Is discriminated (S6006). If it is determined that the consecutive hit success flag 223ζ is on (S6007: Yes), it means that the frame button has been pressed a predetermined number of times (10 times) during the consecutive hit period, and it is necessary to count the number of consecutive hits. Since there is no data, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6006 that the consecutive hit success flag 223ζ is off (S6006: No), 1 is added to the consecutive hit count counter 223ε (S6007), and whether or not the value after the addition is 10 or more. Is discriminated (S6008). That is, it is determined whether or not the predetermined number of times (10 times) has been achieved in one continuous hit period. In the process of S6008, when it is determined that the value of the repeated hit counter 223ε after the addition is smaller than 10 (S6008: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the updated number of consecutive hits counter 223ε is 10 or more (S6008: Yes), it means that the predetermined number of repeated hits has been achieved, and therefore a successful display command for display is set. As a result (S6009), an effect corresponding to success of successive hits is set, and 50 is added to the score counter 223η as a point (score) corresponding to success of consecutive hits (S6010). Thereafter, the repeated hit counter 223ε is reset, the consecutive hit success flag 223ζ is set to ON (S6011), and this process ends.

  In the process of S6005, when it is determined that it is not a continuous hit period (S6005: No), it is then determined whether or not it is a pressing success period (S6012), and it is not a pressing success period (a pressing failure period). If it is determined (S6012: No), a display failure effect command is set (S6013). With this display failure command, an effect is displayed that informs the player that the pressing timing of the frame button 229 has deviated from the timing suggested in the sub display device 690 (see FIG. 164 (a)). By notifying the pressing failure, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to correct the pressing timing of the frame button 229 and to make the next pressing more carefully. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved. When the processing of S6013 is completed, 10 is subtracted from the score counter 223η as a penalty for pressing failure (S6014), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S6014, if the score counter value is already 0, the points are not subtracted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6012 that the pressing has been successful (S6012: Yes), a successful display command for display is set (S6015) to notify the player that the pressing has been successful (see FIG. 163 (b)). By this notification, the player can recognize the successful timing, so that the frame button 229 can be operated at the same timing next time. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved. Then, a point (score) corresponding to the type of the bar that overlaps with the pressing suggestion area 911a when the pressing is successful is added to the success score counter 223η (S6016), and this processing is terminated.

  Next, details of the timing effect process (S1541) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This timing effect process (S1541) is a process for making various settings during the timing effect as described above.

  In this timing effect process (S1541), first, it is determined whether or not the timing effect is set (S6101). If it is determined that the timing effect is not set (S6101: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing effect is set (S6101: Yes), it is then determined whether 15 seconds have elapsed since the start of fluctuation (S6102), and it is determined that 15 seconds have elapsed. (S6102: Yes) means that it is the start timing of the timing effect, so in order to determine the timing effect mode this time, first, the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is read (S6103).

  When the process of S6103 is completed, an effect mode (degree of difficulty) corresponding to the read counter value is then selected from the timing effect selection table 222d (see FIG. 160) (S6104). For example, if the difficulty level counter 223γ is 4, the introductory effect for difficulty level 5 is selected as the effect mode, and if the difficulty level counter 223γ is 1, the introductory effect for difficulty level 2 is selected. Then, a display early stage mode command for notifying the display mode 114 of the effect mode selected in the process of S6104 is set (S6105). The display control device 114 starts the timing effect of the corresponding difficulty level in the sub display device 690 by receiving the display early stage mode command.

  When the processing of S6105 is completed, a table corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ read in S6103 is read from the pressing period table 222e (S6106), and the read table is stored in the pressing period storage area (S6107). This process ends. This pressing period storage area is provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (not shown). In the process of S6004 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 168), the pressing period table 222e stored in this pressing period storage area is referred to and it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 229 has been successful. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6102 that 15 seconds have not elapsed since the start of change (S6102: No), it is determined whether or not 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of change (S6108). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to shift to the middle stage period of the timing effect. In the process of S6108, when it is determined that 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change (it is a timing to shift to the middle period) (S6108: Yes), the middle stage setting process for setting the aspect of the middle period is executed. (S6109), this process is terminated. Details of the middle setting process (S6109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6108, when it is determined that it is not the timing when 20 seconds have passed since the start of the change (no timing for shifting to the middle period) (S6108: No), then, it is the timing when 25 seconds have passed since the start of the change. It is determined whether or not (S6110). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the transition timing from the middle period to the end period. In the process of S6110, when it is determined that 25 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation (S6110: Yes), an end stage setting process for setting the effect mode of the end stage period is executed (S6111), and this process ends. Details of the final stage setting process (S6111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6110, when it is determined that it is not the timing when 25 seconds have elapsed since the start of change (S6110: No), it is then determined whether it is the timing when 27 seconds have elapsed since the start of change (S6112). . That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to set a notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect. In the process of S6112, when it is determined that it is a timing when 27 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (S6112: Yes), a notification mode setting process for setting a notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect is performed. Execute (S6113), and this process is terminated. Details of the notification mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing when 27 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation (S6112: No), it is then determined whether it is the end timing of the continuous hitting period (S6114). When it is determined that it is not the end timing of the continuous hitting period (S6114: Yes), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the continuous hitting period (S6114: Yes), the continuous hitting success flag 223ζ is set to OFF (S6115), and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the details of the mid-board setting process (S1507) executed in the timing effect process (S1541, see FIG. 169) will be described. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing this mid-board setting process (S1507). In the middle setting process (S6109), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read (S6201), and it is determined whether or not the value of the score counter 223η is larger than 600 (S6202).

  When it is determined that the read value is larger than 600 (S6202: Yes), a relatively large number of points have been acquired in the early period, and there is a possibility that the difficulty level is too easy for the player who is currently playing. . Therefore, in this case, by adding 1 to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ (S6203), control is performed such that an effect having a higher difficulty level than the opening period is set as the effect mode of the middle period. Thereby, since it can change to the production mode (degree of difficulty) matched with the skill of the player in the middle of the timing production, the player's willingness to participate in the timing production can be improved. After the process of S6203 is completed, the process proceeds to S6209.

  If it is determined in the process of S6202 that the value of the score counter 223η is 600 or less (S6202: No), it is then determined whether the value of the read score counter 223η is less than 50 (S6204). When it is determined that the read value is smaller than 50 (S6204: Yes), it indicates that the player has extremely few points in the early period. That is, there is a possibility that the difficulty of the timing effect in the early stage period is too difficult, and the player cannot follow the timing effect or abandon the timing effect itself. In this case, by setting the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ to 0 (S6205), control is performed so that the production mode having the lowest difficulty level is selected as the production mode set after the middle period. As a result, players who were too difficult to match the timing of pressing due to the difficulty of the early period, or received an impression that would be difficult just by looking at the stage of the early period, abandoned the timing stage. It is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the timing production for the player who has been killed. When the process of S6205 ends, the process proceeds to S6209.

  In the process of S6204, when it is determined that the value of the read score counter 223η is 50 or more (S6204: No), it is then determined whether the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 200 (S6206). In the process of S6206, if it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 200 (S6206), the difficulty level is too high for the player, and the game will end at a point that is significantly lower than the norm at this pace. It means that the possibility is high. In this case, in the middle of the timing effect, the player may determine that the quota cannot be achieved and give up participation in the timing effect. In addition, although the timing presentation of this time has been participated until the end, there is a possibility that the acquired points are too low for the quota, and the participation in the timing presentation will be given up next time. Therefore, in order to prevent these situations, 1 is subtracted from the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ in the process of S6207 (S6207). Thereby, since the difficulty level after a middle stage period can be made easy, the willingness to participate with respect to a timing effect can be improved with respect to the player who could not acquire many points in the early stage period. When the process of S6207 ends, the process proceeds to S6209.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6206 that the read score counter 223η is 200 or more (S6206: No), the difficulty counter 223γ is read (S6208), and the process proceeds to S6209.

  In the process of S6209, based on the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, a middle stage effect mode is selected from the effect selection table 222d (S6209), and a display opening mode command for notifying the display control device 114 of the selected mode. Is set (S6210). Then, a data table corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e (S6211), the read table is stored in the pressing period storage area (S6212), and this process ends.

  By performing this mid-game setting process, the production mode after the mid-game period can be changed to a mode of difficulty more matched to the skill of the player according to the points acquired by the player in the early game period. The player's willingness to participate in the timing performance can be improved.

  Next, details of the end stage setting process (S6111) executed in the timing effect process (S1541, see FIG. 169) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This end stage setting process (S6111) is a process for setting the effect mode of the end stage period of the timing effect as described above.

  In the final stage setting process (S6111), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read (S6301), and it is determined whether or not the value is larger than 900 (S6302). That is, it is determined whether or not 900 points or more have been acquired before the end of the middle period. If it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is greater than 900 (S6302: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is greater than 3 (S6303).

  When it is determined that the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 3 or less (S6303: No), a table with a normal success period is read from the pressing period table 222e, and the process proceeds to S6309. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is greater than 3 (S6303: Yes), a table for a narrow range with a narrow success period corresponding to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e ( (S6304) and the process proceeds to S6309.

  As described above, the table having different success period lengths according to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is set to match the difficulty level with the player. That is, if a relatively high difficulty production mode (difficulty level 4 or difficulty level 5) is set even after the middle period, the player is highly likely to have a high skill level. Then, since the process moves to the process of S6303 when a relatively large number of points have been acquired, there is a possibility that the current difficulty level is too easy for the player. Therefore, in order to make the difficulty level more difficult for a player with high skill, the success range is configured to be narrower than the early period and the middle period. Thereby, since a highly difficult timing effect can be provided to a highly skilled player, the player's interest in the timing effect can be improved.

  On the other hand, if the difficulty level counter 223γ is 3 or less and the process proceeds to the process of S6303, there is a possibility that a lot of points are obtained in spite of a relatively low skill level. In this case, if the degree of difficulty is increased, there is a possibility that pressing of the frame button 229 will fail continuously in the final stage, and there is a possibility that a bad impression may be held for the timing effect. In particular, even if the quota of 1000 points was exceeded at the start of the final stage production, it failed continuously in the final stage period, and if the quota was divided at the end of the production by penalty accumulation, There is a possibility that the motivation for the timing effect is greatly reduced. Therefore, in this control example, when the difficulty level counter 223γ, which is assumed to be low in skill, is 3 or less, the range of the success period is kept normal even if a relatively large number of points are acquired. doing. Thereby, the motivation with respect to a timing effect can be improved with respect to the player with low skill.

  If it is determined in the process of S6302 that the value of the score counter 223η is 900 or less (S6302: No), it is then determined whether the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 600 (S6306). In the processing of S6305, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 600 (S6206: Yes), a table for a wide range corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e (S6307), The process proceeds to S6309. This is because when the score counter 223η is smaller than 600, the player has a relatively small number of points acquired by the middle period, and therefore it is highly likely that the level of difficulty is too high for the player. Therefore, in this case, by selecting a pressing period with a wide success period, there is a high possibility that the frame button 229 is determined to be successful when the frame button 229 is pressed. That is, the difficulty level can be matched to the player. In addition, by widening the success period in the final stage, it becomes easier to press down, so that the player can be given an illusion that he / she is in trouble (having a knack). Therefore, even if the quota is not reached, it is possible to make an illusion as if more points can be acquired next time from the response in the final period. Therefore, the willingness to participate in the next timing effect can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6306, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is 600 or more (S6305: No), the normal range table corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e, The process proceeds to S6309. In the process of S6309 executed after any of the processes of S6104, S6105, S6107, and S6108 is executed, the data table read from the press period table 222e is stored in the press period storage area (S6308), and this process is performed. Exit.

  By this end stage setting process, the range of the success period of the end stage period can be changed to a size more matched to the skill of the player according to the points acquired by the player before the end of the middle stage period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 172, details of the notification mode setting process (S6113) executed in the timing effect process (S1541, see FIG. 169) will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the notification mode setting process (S6113). This notification mode setting process is a process for setting a notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect as described above.

  In the notification mode setting process (S6113), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read (S6401), and it is determined whether or not the value is 1000 or more (S6402). That is, it is determined whether or not 1000 points that are the norm are achieved in the timing effect. In the process of S6402, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 1000 (that is, the normal cannot be achieved in the current timing effect) (S6402: No), the display control device 114 is then checked. A notification mode at the time of failure (see FIG. 165) is set (S6403).

  When the processing of S6303 ends, it is then determined whether or not the value of the score counter 223η is 50 or less (S6404). When the value of the score counter 223η is 50 or less (S6404: Yes), the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is set to 0 (S6405), and the process proceeds to S6412. When the value of the score counter 223η is 50 or less, there is a high possibility that the player has given up quickly just by visually recognizing the aspect of the early period. Therefore, in this case, in the next timing effect, the effect mode with the easiest difficulty level is selected, and it can be felt that the quota is likely to be achieved. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved in the next timing production.

  On the other hand, when the value of the score counter 223η is larger than 50 (S6404: No), 1 is subtracted from the value of the difficulty counter 223γ (S6406), and the process proceeds to S6412. If the value of the score counter 223η is larger than 50, it means that the quota was not satisfied after participating in the timing effect as such. Therefore, in this case, the player's willingness to participate is improved by lowering the difficulty level selected in the next timing effect by one step.

  In the process of S6402, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is 1000 or more (the timing production quota has been achieved), the probability variation state flag 223β is read (S6407), and the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol. Or not (whether or not the probability variation state flag 223β is on) is determined (S6408). If it is determined that the state is the probability variation state (S6408: Yes), the notification mode for notifying the display control device 114 of the probability variation state is set, and the process proceeds to S6411. On the other hand, in the process of S6408, when it is determined that the probability of the special symbol is not changed (the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S6408: No), a notification for informing the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol. A mode is set (S6409), and the process proceeds to S6411.

  In the process of S6411, 1 is added to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, and the process proceeds to S6412. When the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 4, which is the maximum value, the value is kept at 4. In the process of S6412, by setting the timing effect permission flag 223α to OFF, it is set so that the timing effect is not selected until the next 2R probability variation big hit or small hit (S6412), and this process ends. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the details of the variable display setting process 2 (S1542) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1542) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Of the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S1542), the processes of S1801 to S1810 are the same as the processes of S1801 to S1810 executed in the fluctuation display setting process (S1512, see FIG. 109) in the first control example. Processing is executed.

  Further, in the variation display setting process 2 (S1542) in this control example, when the processing of S1805 is completed, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command is notified by the variation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot). It is determined (S1821). In the processing of S1821, when it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to the jackpot C (S1821: Yes), it means that the special symbol is shifted to the probability variation state, so the probability variation state flag 223β is set to ON ( The process proceeds to S1823) and S1824.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1821 that the variation pattern does not correspond to the big hit C (S1821: No), it is then determined whether or not the variation pattern corresponds to the small hit (S1822). If it is determined that the corresponding variation pattern is present (S1822: Yes), the process proceeds to S1824. In the process of S1824, the timing effect permission flag 223α is set to ON so that the timing effect can be selected as an interesting effect in subsequent variable effects (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1806.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1822 that the variation pattern does not correspond to the small hit (S1822: No), it is then determined whether the variation pattern corresponds to the big hit A or the big hit B (S1825). In the process of S1825, when it is determined that neither the variation pattern corresponding to jackpot A nor the variation pattern corresponding to jackpot B (S1825: No), the process proceeds to S1806. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to either big hit A or big hit B (S1825: Yes), the probability variation state flag 223β is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit type (S1826). That is, if the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), the probability variation state flag 223β is set to ON, and if the jackpot B (16R time short hit), the probability variation state flag 223β is set to OFF. Next, the timing effect permission flag 223α is set to OFF (S1827), and the processes after S1806 are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, a timing effect that can acquire points by operating a plurality of types of buttons with good timing is configured to be executable, and when a quota is achieved, The game state is informed. Thereby, since the player who wants to know the present game state can be actively participated in the timing performance, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, whether or not a privilege is given by skill of the player's pressing (operation) timing by making the privilege when the timing presentation is successful have no effect on the game result (notification of the current gaming state) Can decide. On the other hand, if a result (for example, jackpot) that has already been determined at the start of the change (before the timing effect is started) is set as a privilege, the timing effect is started. Before, the result of the timing effect (whether or not the mode for achieving the quota can be displayed) is determined. If there is a timing effect in which the quota cannot be achieved, the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect may be reduced. On the other hand, in this control example, the privilege given when the quota is achieved in the timing effect is set to “notification of gaming state” that does not affect the game result. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant a privilege purely according to the skill of pressing the frame button 229. That is, when a privilege is granted, it is possible to make the player feel more strongly that the player has acquired the privilege by himself. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  Further, in the present control example, the difficulty level can be varied according to the player's point acquisition situation during execution of the timing effect. That is, it is configured to determine the skill of the player from the point acquisition situation, and to change to an effect mode with a difficulty level that matches the player more. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difficulty level from being too difficult, or conversely, the difficulty level from being too easy to reduce the willingness to participate in the timing performance. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  Further, in the present control example, when the timing effect ends, the difficulty level of the next timing effect is changed to a difficulty level that matches the player more according to the player's point acquisition situation. . By comprising in this way, the player's willingness to participate with respect to timing production can be improved more.

  In this control example, when three types of periods, an early period, a middle period, and an end period, are set, the production mode is selected according to the skill level of the player and the participation situation in the timing production. However, the period is not limited to three types. For example, you may comprise so that an effect aspect may be set with respect to five types of periods, respectively. By increasing the period, it is possible to more accurately determine the player's skill and the like, and provide an effect mode that matches the skill. Conversely, the period may be reduced. As a result, the number of processing times for determining the skill and the like of the player can be reduced, so that the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced.

  In this control example, when three types of periods, an early period, a middle period, and an end period, are set, the production mode is selected according to the skill level of the player and the participation situation in the timing production. However, the difficulty level of one or more periods may be fixed, and only the difficulty level of a part of the period may be variable according to the skill of the player. More specifically, for example, the difficulty level of the early period may be set to an effect mode that is relatively easy. As a result, the player who visually recognizes the aspect of the early stage period can have an impression that the quota can be easily achieved by the timing effect, so that the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect can be improved. .

  In this control example, it is configured that it is determined that consecutive hits are successful based on the operation of the 10-time frame button 229 during the consecutive hit period, and points are added. The determination criterion is not limited to 10 operations. An arbitrary value can be set according to the length of the continuous hit period and the length of the continuous hit bar. Further, the number of times that it is determined that consecutive hits are successful may be varied according to the set production mode. For example, in the case of a production mode with a low difficulty level (for example, a difficulty level of 1), the number of times that it is determined that consecutive hits are successful is set to a number less than 10 times (for example, 6 times), and conversely In the case of a production mode having a relatively high difficulty level (for example, difficulty level 4 or 5), the number of times that it is determined that consecutive hits are successful is set to a number more than 10 times (for example, 15 times). May be. As a result, not only the display pattern of the scroll bar and the range of the success period, but also the number of times that it is determined that consecutive hits were successful, the difficulty can be differentiated. Can be given.

  In this control example, it is determined that the consecutive hit is successful based on the operation of the frame button 229 a predetermined number of times (10 times) during the continuous hit period, and points are added. You may comprise so that it may also discriminate | determine from operation | movement with repeated hits. For example, by continuously pressing a button of a corresponding type for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds or more) between consecutive hit periods, it is determined that consecutive hits are successful, as in the case of repeated hits a predetermined number (10 times). Also good. Thereby, even a player who is not good at consecutive hits can be determined as consecutive hits simply by continuously pressing (holding down) the frame button 229, and points can be obtained, so the burden on the player can be reduced. . In this case, points given by performing a predetermined number of times (10 times) of continuous hits during the continuous hit period are simply points given when the frame button 229 is continuously pressed (long press) during the continuous hit period. Also, it may be configured to increase. By configuring in this way, high-skilled high-level players are aggressively hit repeatedly, and low-skilled players who are not good at continuous hits are long-pressed to earn even a few points. Can be made. That is, since various participation methods for the continuous hitting period can be provided according to the skill of the player, the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect can be improved.

In this control example, a plurality of periods are set as periods for setting the difficulty level of the timing effect. Instead, the difficulty level is set according to the number of times the frame button 229 has failed or succeeded. It may be configured to be fluidly variable. Thereby, the operation state of the player can be reflected in the difficulty level in real time.
Although the effect mode of the early period is configured to be set to the effect mode of the difficulty level corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, it is not limited to this. For example, in the early period, the difficulty counter 223
In this control example, the notification of the gaming state is a privilege for the timing effect, but is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that the lottery result of a special symbol may be alert | reported by a timing effect. In other words, the jackpot may be notified when the quota is achieved in the timing effect. In this case, when the timing effect is selected because the special symbol is not selected, the timing effect may be selected in the effect mode in which the quota cannot be achieved. More specifically, for example, in the case where the timing effect is executed in the case of a special symbol deviating, the total points that can be obtained by the scroll bar and the continuous hit bar that are scroll-displayed from the beginning period to the end period are It may be configured to be 900 to 990 points at maximum, and in the case of a special symbol, for example, a pattern that can acquire 1000 points to 1200 points at maximum may be selected. That is, as the effect mode defined for the timing effect selection table 222d, the jackpot effect mode corresponding to each period and each difficulty level and the off-line effect mode may be separately defined. In the timing effect process (see FIG. 169), when setting the effect mode of each period (S6104 in FIG. 169, S6209 in FIG. 170, S6104, S6105, S6107, S6108 in S of FIG. 171) You may comprise so that the effect aspect may be selected by discriminating the result of the fluctuating effect (whether it is a big hit or missed). By configuring in this way, the difficulty level in the timing effect can be matched with the skill of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect can be improved. In addition, by changing the upper limit of points that can be acquired in the mode for jackpots and the mode for losing, it is possible to prevent the quota from being achieved despite the fact that the special symbol lottery result is out ( Suppression). Therefore, even though the quota is achieved, the jackpot is not started, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust and to participate in the timing performance with peace of mind.

  In the present control example, the timing effect is configured to be set only after the jackpot A or the jackpot B is reached at least once after the jackpot or jackpot C, but the execution condition of the timing effect is as follows: It is not limited to this. For example, the ease of selecting a timing effect may be changed according to the number of reserved balls. Specifically, the timing effect may be more easily selected as the number of reserved balls increases, and may be configured to be less likely to be selected as the number of reserved balls decreases. As described above, in the timing effect of this control example, it is necessary to press a plurality of buttons (up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, and lower button DB) constituting the frame button 229 with good timing. For this reason, it is difficult to participate in the timing effect with one hand, and it is configured to make it easier for the person who participates using both hands to press down. That is, there is a possibility that a player who intends to achieve the quota with the timing effect will temporarily take his hand off the operation handle 51 and participate in the timing effect. Therefore, if you participate in the timing effect with a small number of reserved balls, you cannot increase the number of reserved balls during the timing effect, so there is a risk that the lottery of the special symbol will be interrupted after the end of the variable effect where the timing effect is set. is there. In other words, there is a possibility that the gaming efficiency will deteriorate. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which it is difficult to set the timing effect in a situation where there are few reserved balls, it is possible to cause the player to launch a ball in a situation where there are few reserved balls, so that the reserved balls can be easily stored. Therefore, game efficiency can be increased. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls is large, the number of held balls may further increase by continuously striking the ball during the fluctuation, and there is a possibility that a number of balls exceeding the upper limit of the number of held balls will be detected. is there. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of reserved balls from overflowing by increasing the frequency of occurrence of a timing effect that easily achieves a quota by participating with both hands.

  In the present control example, the timing button is configured such that an effect of pressing a plurality of buttons (up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, and lower button DB) constituting the frame button 229 with good timing is executed. However, the number of buttons is not limited to four. For example, an effect of pressing a single frame button with good timing may be executed as the timing effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to participate in the timing effect with the other hand while operating the handle 51 with one hand, so that it is possible to participate in the timing effect without reducing the game efficiency. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect. Further, by reducing the types of buttons operated in the timing effect, it is possible to make the game characteristics easier to understand. On the other hand, the types of buttons to be operated may be larger than in this control example. As the number of buttons to be operated increases, the difficulty level of the timing effect can be increased, so that a player having a high skill of the timing effect can be satisfied. It should be noted that the player's skill may be determined from the point acquisition status, the total points acquired in the previous timing effect, and the like, and the number of buttons used may be increased or decreased according to the skill. That is, when it is determined that the skill level is low or it has not participated at all in the previous time, for example, it is configured to execute a timing effect in a mode in which one type of button can participate, and for other players May set a mode of timing effect using four types of buttons. By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize that the difficulty level is clearly reduced from the appearance, so that it is possible to improve the willingness to participate for players with low skills.

  In the present control example, when a fluctuating effect with a timing effect set is executed, the timing effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed since the occurrence of reach, and is configured to be executed for 14 seconds. However, the start period and duration of the timing effect are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily set. For example, you may comprise so that a timing effect may be performed using all the fluctuation time. Even if the timing effect is executed on the sub display device 690, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, even if the timing effect is executed by spending all the variation time, It is possible to prevent (suppress) missing the lottery result. Therefore, since a longer period timing effect can be executed, the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In this control example, the timing effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect, but the execution period of the timing effect is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that a timing effect may be performed during a jackpot (special game state). In this case, it may be configured to notify the transition to the probable change state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends by achieving the quota with the timing effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the jackpot is a mere work for obtaining a prize ball, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the game with the jackpot. In this case, if the player is unable to achieve the quota regardless of the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), for example, the low probability state of the special symbol is reported during the timing effect notification period. You may comprise so that a reverse effect may be performed by jackpot ending and the probability change state of a special symbol may be alert | reported. Thereby, even when the quota cannot be achieved by the timing effect, the game can be performed in the hope that the reverse effect will occur in the ending period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .

<Fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 175 to 186, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described. In the first control example, the control example has been described in which each accessory performs a variable operation independently or in combination. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, a suitable control method of the accessory performed by combining the variable operation and the lighting operation will be described.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in terms of configuration is that a rotating lighting unit 800 is added as an accessory that performs a moving effect in a variable effect or the like. On the other hand, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. It is a point that has been. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, a front view of the game board 13 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186. FIG. 185 is a front view of the game board 13 when the above-described rotation lighting unit 800 is in the retracted position, and FIG. 186 is a front view of the game board 13 when the rotation lighting unit 800 is in the extended position. . When the rotating lighting unit 800 is outside the execution period of the effect of performing the variable operation, it is arranged at the retreat position shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the effect that the rotary lighting unit 800 performs the variable operation is set, the rotary lighting unit 800 is arranged at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 186 and the operation according to the effect (rotation operation and lighting operation). Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 185, the retracted position of the rotary lighting unit 800 is the lower left of the third symbol display device 81 as viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 185, when the rotary lighting unit 800 is arranged at the retracted position, the upper right part of the rotary lighting unit 800 is only slightly visible, and the majority is hidden behind other configurations and cannot be seen from the front. Become. On the other hand, the overhang position of the rotary lighting unit 800 is below the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. In this case, the player can visually recognize most of the rotary lighting unit 800 from the front.

  Next, the configuration of the rotary lighting unit 800 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 178. First, FIG. 175 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rotary lighting unit 800 in this control example, and FIG. 175 (b) is a side view of the rotary lighting unit 800 from the left side.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the rotary lighting unit 800 is provided with a substantially circular rotating member 820 that can rotate around the rotating shaft 822 on the front side, and on the back side thereof, the lighting that can be turned on and off. An apparatus 810 is provided. The rotating member 820 is provided with six through holes 821a to 821f. These through holes 821a to 821f are all formed in a circular shape having the same diameter, and are arranged at equal intervals (every 60 degrees) on the circumference centering on the rotation shaft 822. Thereby, every time the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees, the same shape (appearance) is obtained (symmetry is 6 times). The rotating member 820 is made of a translucent material (for example, PS material). For this reason, even when parts other than the back side of the through holes 821a to 821f are lit, a rough lighting state can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The lighting device 810 is provided with an insertion port 812 for inserting the rotating shaft 822 of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 175 (b)). Through this insertion hole 812, the rotating shaft 822 is physically connected to a drive motor for rotating the rotating member 810. That is, only the rotating member 810 is rotated by the drive motor, and the lighting device 810 is not rotated.

  The lighting device 810 includes a light guide plate on the front side, and an LED is provided on the back side of the light guide plate (inside the lighting device 810). By turning on the internal LED, the player can visually recognize the light of the LED through the light guide plate. Further, the LEDs are evenly arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so that all of the front side can be illuminated. By turning on all the LEDs, the front side of the lighting device 810 looks evenly illuminated.

  In addition, on the front side of the lighting device 810, a plurality of regions that can emit light in a circular shape locally are provided. That is, six circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are provided. The shapes of these circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are configured by circles having substantially the same diameter as the through holes 821a to 821f. Moreover, it arrange | positions at equal intervals (every 60 degree | times) at the circumference shape centering on the penetration hole 812. FIG. Since the circumference in which the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are arranged and the circumference in which the through-holes 821a to 821f are arranged have substantially the same diameter, any one of the rotation members 820 can be When the through-holes reach the front side of any of the circular lighting areas, all the through-holes are configured to completely overlap on the front side of all the circular lighting areas.

  In order to locally emit light from the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f, for example, the light guide plate is divided from the other regions at the circumferential portions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f, and the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are divided. A partition may be provided in the interior so that the light from the LED provided in is not leaked to other areas. And what is necessary is just to comprise LED provided in circular lighting area | regions 811a-811f so that lighting control is possible separately. With this configuration, if all the LEDs are turned on, the front side of the lighting device 810 looks as if it is turned on as a whole, while the LEDs provided in any one of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are independent. By turning on the light, it can be seen that only the area is lighted in a circle.

  Here, the LEDs provided in the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are configured by red LEDs and white LEDs, and the LEDs provided in other regions are configured by only white LEDs. . When the lighting device 810 is turned on as a whole, all the white LEDs are turned on so that the whole lighting device 810 looks white. On the other hand, when only part or all of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are lit, the red LED provided in the corresponding area is set to be lit.

  Next, a lighting control method of the lighting device 810 for each rotation speed of the rotating member 820 will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 178. Here, first, an outline of effects using the rotary lighting unit 800 will be described. In this control example, as an effect using the rotary lighting unit 800, each time the rotating member 820 rotates and the through-holes 821a to 821f and the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f overlap each other in the front and rear directions (that is, There is an effect that the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are turned on in red one by one every time the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees. In this effect, the degree of expectation that is a big hit in the variable effect is suggested by the number of circular lighting regions that are in the red lighting state. For this reason, the player can check the state of the rotary lighting unit 800 in expectation that as many circular lighting areas as possible will be lit. During this period, the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 is relatively slow (for example, a rotational speed that rotates 60 degrees per second) so that the number of circular lighting areas in which the player is lit can be easily recognized. ) Is set (low-speed rotation state is set).

  The low-speed rotation state described above continues until the rotation member 820 makes one rotation. When the rotating member 820 makes one rotation, the rotation speed is accelerated. When the rotation speed becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined speed (for example, one rotation or more per second), the lighting device 820 is switched to a fully lit state. Note that the rotation speed continues to be accelerated after the rotation speed becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined speed (for example, one rotation or more per second). When it is determined that the rotation speed has reached a relatively high speed (speed of 3 rotations per second) (high speed rotation state), intermittent lighting in the same phase on the front surface is set for the lighting device 810. (That is, it is set to repeat turning on and off at a constant frequency for all white LEDs). Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 178, the lighting frequency and the lighting period of this intermittent lighting are such that the rotating direction of the rotating member 810 that is rotating looks like reverse rotation due to the so-called wagon wheel effect. Is set.

  Then, after the appearance of reverse rotation, the number of circular lighting areas that are lit in the low-speed rotation state is turned on again according to the lighting frequency of intermittent lighting. Even in this high-speed rotation state, the number of lighting in the circular lighting area may be increased. Therefore, since the player can confirm the production until the end, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In the present control example, as the operation of the rotary lighting unit 800, only the rotation operation of the rotation member 820 is defined in the operation scenario. The lighting device 810 is configured to determine the rotation speed from the actual rotation operation of the rotating member 820 and switch the lighting mode. More specifically, in the operation scenario corresponding to the effect of operating the rotary lighting unit 800, first, an operation of moving the rotary lighting unit 800 from the retracted position (see FIG. 185) to the extended position (see FIG. 186). It is prescribed. As an operation when the movement to the overhanging position (see FIG. 186) is completed (the sensor detects that the overhanging position has been reached), the operation scenario includes a rotation operation of the rotating member 820 in a low-speed rotation state. Is stipulated. Further, an operation for accelerating the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is defined as an operation when a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed since the low-speed rotation state was set. Then, as an operation to be set after the operation of accelerating the rotation speed, an operation to decelerate the rotation speed and stop the rotation of the rotation member 820 when a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed in the high-speed rotation state is defined. As the subsequent operation, an operation for moving the rotary lighting unit 800 to the retracted position is defined. As described above, only the operation of the rotating member 820 is defined in the operation scenario, and the lighting operation of the rotating member 820 and the lighting device 810 are changed by changing the lighting mode of the lighting device 810 according to the speed of the rotating member 820. It is possible to suppress the deviation from the lighting control. That is, when the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 is changed, the lighting mode can be changed more reliably, so that the appearance quality of the rotary lighting unit 800 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, a lighting control method in a low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation) will be described. First, FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example of lighting control in which the visual quality is deteriorated in a low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation), and FIG. 177 is a diagram of low-speed rotation (during low-speed operation) in this control example. It is the figure which showed the lighting control example. That is, a control method that prevents the appearance as shown in FIG. 176 during low-speed rotation (during low-speed operation) and makes the appearance as shown in FIG. 177 will be described.

  FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating the lighting control that deteriorates the visual quality in the low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation) as described above. In this example, in the low-speed rotation state, it is a diagram illustrating a case where the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees with two circular lighting areas turned on.

  When the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f overlaps the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f, the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f can be visually recognized through the through holes 821a to 821f. FIG. 176 (a) shows a state in which the through-holes 821e and 821f overlap two circular lighting areas that are set to the lighting state, respectively.

  FIG. 176 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the rotation member 820 rotates and the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are shifted. In this bad example, since the next lighting position is turned on before the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f coincide with each other, it is halfway through the through holes 821a, 821e, and 821f. The red light in the circular lighting area leaks out at the half end. Therefore, the visual quality has deteriorated. This is because the through holes 821a to 821f continuously change according to the amount of rotation of the rotating member 820, whereas the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are fixed in position. That is, since the lighting position of each circular lighting region cannot continuously follow the through holes 821a to 821f, in the state where the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are shifted, The visual quality will deteriorate.

  In FIG. 176 (c), while the lighting state of each circular lighting area is maintained in the state of FIG. 176 (b), the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees, the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f, and the circular lighting areas 811a to 811a. The case where the position of 811f coincides again is shown. In this case, as in FIG. 176 (a), since the arrangement of the two circular lighting areas set in the lighting state and the through holes 821e and 821f overlap, the light from the circular lighting area is clearly cleaned from the front. It can be visually recognized. As described above, when one or a plurality of circular lighting regions are turned on at a rotational position where the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f do not coincide with each other, the visual quality deteriorates. (See FIG. 176 (b)). Therefore, in this control example, lighting control is performed so as to achieve the lighting state shown in FIG. 177 in order to improve the visual quality.

  FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating a lighting control method in a low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation) in the present control example. As shown in FIG. 177, in the present control example, control is performed so that the corresponding circular lighting areas are lit only when the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f match. (See FIGS. 177 (a) and (c)), and at other intermediate positions, all the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are set to the extinguished state. By constituting in this way, one or a plurality of circular lighting areas are turned on in a state where the positions of the through holes 821a to 821f and the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are shifted from each other, thereby preventing a halfway appearance. (Suppressed). Therefore, the appearance quality in the low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation) can be improved.

  In addition, it is comprised so that it can detect by the rotation sensor which is not shown in figure whether the arrangement | positioning of the through-holes 821a-821f and the position of circular lighting area | region 811a-811f correspond. This rotation sensor is configured such that the output becomes H every time the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees. For example, whether the through hole 821a matches (overlaps) the position of the circular lighting region 811a, or matches (overlaps) the circular lighting region 811b, matches the circular lighting region 811c. Whether it is in an overlapping (overlapping) state, coincident with (overlapping with) the circular lighting region 811d, or coincident with (overlapping with) the circular lighting region 811e, it coincides with the circular lighting region 811f. The output is set to H in the same manner even in the state of being overlapped (overlapped). On the other hand, when the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are shifted, the output is set to L.

  Next, a lighting control method in a high-speed rotation state (during high-speed operation) will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, at the time of high-speed rotation, settings are made so that all white LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off at a constant frequency (24 Hz). Also, the length of one lighting period is configured to be extremely short (for example, ON DUTY 0.5%), and the length of the arrangement of the rotating member 810 at the moment of lighting can be visually recognized (it cannot be recognized that it is rotating). It is comprised so that it may become this period.

  As shown in FIG. 178, in the high-speed rotation state, every time the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees, the entire lighting device 810 instantaneously lights in white (all lights up). In the high-speed rotation state, the rotating member 820 rotates three times per second (1080 degrees per second), whereas the lighting frequency is set to 24 Hz (24 times per second) (1080 degrees ÷ 24 = 45 degrees). On the other hand, since the lighting device 810 is turned off during a period other than the moment when it is lit momentarily, the appearance of the rotating member 820 is also invisible. Therefore, the rotating member 820 that is rotating cannot be continuously viewed from the player's line of sight, and is recognized as an appearance like a frame feed of 24 Hz.

  With reference to FIG. 178, the appearance of the rotary member 820 from the player's perspective will be described more specifically. When the lighting device 810 is momentarily fully lit in the arrangement shown in FIG. 178 (a), FIG. ) Is recognized by the player, but since the lighting period is instantaneous (ON DUTY 0.5%), the player can only recognize the arrangement of the rotating member 820 and cannot recognize the direction of rotation. . Thereafter, since the lighting device 810 is set in the extinguished state until the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees (see FIG. 178 (b)), the player cannot visually recognize the appearance of the rotating member 820 during this period.

  In the next 24 Hz period (that is, in the arrangement of FIG. 178 (b)), the lighting device 810 is instantaneously fully turned on again. Also in this case, since the lighting period is sufficiently short as in the arrangement of FIG. 178 (a), the player can recognize only the arrangement of the rotating member 820. Then, the light is turned off again until the next 24 Hz period (see FIG. 178 (d)). When the next 24Hz period is reached, all lights are instantaneously set and the player recognizes the arrangement of FIG. 178 (e). Is done. Thereafter, the arrangement of the rotating member 820 is recognized at 24 Hz by the same control.

  Here, as described above, the rotating member 820 is configured to have the same shape (appearance) every time it rotates 60 degrees (six-fold symmetry). Therefore, as shown in FIG. In particular, by recognizing only the arrangement of the rotating member 820, the rotational direction can be misidentified. In other words, the through hole 821a to the through hole 821f are rotated 45 degrees clockwise (in the positive direction) from the arrangement shown in FIG. 178 (a) to reach the arrangement shown in FIG. 178 (c). Regardless, the rotating member 820 can be recognized as if it rotated 15 degrees counterclockwise. This is because the through-hole 821a and the through-hole 821f cannot be distinguished from each other in appearance, so that it is closest to the position where the through-hole 821a is arranged in FIG. 178 (a) (different by 15 degrees). This is because the through-hole 821f in () can be recognized (misidentified) as the through-hole 821a.

  Similarly, by continuing to recognize that the rotation is in the direction with the smallest amount of apparent rotation, the original rotation direction and the rotation direction recognized by the player can be reversed. As described above, the configuration in which the rotation direction is changed only by switching the lighting control can change the rotation direction of the rotating member 820. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an excessive load from being applied to the drive motor by performing a sudden stop or a reversal in order to change the rotation direction, so that the drive motor is less likely to fail. it can. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 that can operate stably for a longer time can be provided.

  In this control example, every time the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees in the high-speed rotation state (that is, at 24 Hz), the lighting device 810 is set to full lighting. However, the frequency for lighting the lighting device 810 is limited to this. It is not a thing. In a high-speed rotation state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 820 from one full lighting to the next full lighting is larger than 30 degrees (that is, half of 60 degrees that is the interval between adjacent through holes) and 60 degrees It can be arbitrarily determined within a range smaller than (ie, the interval between adjacent through holes). That is, the angle when comparing the arrangement before rotation of one through hole and the arrangement after rotation of the through hole adjacent to the one through hole opposite to the rotation direction (that is, the left side) is It is only necessary that one through hole is smaller than the actual rotation angle. By configuring in this way, it can be mistaken for movement (rotation) in the direction of a small movement angle (movement distance is small), so every time the lighting device 810 is instantaneously set to full lighting, It can be seen as if the hole has moved to the position of the adjacent through hole adjacent to the opposite side. Therefore, since it can be made to feel that it is rotating reversely only by lighting control, without changing a rotation speed or a rotation direction, it prevents (suppresses) that an excessive load is applied to a drive motor. The pachinko machine 10 that can operate stably for a longer time can be provided.

<Electric Configuration in Fourth Control Example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 174, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example, the RAM 223 in this control example has a lighting state counter 223θ, a lighting position storage area 223ι, a lighting set flag 223κ, and an initial identified flag 223λ. In addition, a speed identification timer 223μ, a previous value storage area 223ν, and a speed storage area 223ξ are added.

  The lighting state counter 223θ is a counter indicating the type of lighting state of the lighting device 810, and can indicate different lighting states according to the counter value. Specifically, “01H” means a lighting state (see FIG. 177) for performing lighting control in a low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation), and “02H” indicates high-speed rotation from the low-speed rotation state. Meaning that the lighting state (all lighting state) at the time of acceleration of the rotational speed that transitions to the state, “03H” is the lighting state (see FIG. 178) in the high speed rotation state (at the time of high speed operation). Means. On the other hand, if the counter value is “00H”, it means that lighting control of the lighting device 810 is not performed. The lighting state counter 223θ is updated at the timing of switching the lighting state (see S6613 in FIG. 181, S6805 in FIG. 183, and S6909 in FIG. 184). The lighting state counter 223θ is referred to in a lighting control process (see FIG. 180) executed in the main process, and lighting control corresponding to the counter value is set.

  The lighting position storage area 223ι is an area in which information indicating the lighting state of each of the circular lighting areas 821a to 821f is stored. The lighting position storage area 223ι is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the 0th to 5th bits correspond to the circular lighting areas 821a to 821f, respectively. Each bit constituting the lighting position storage area 223ι indicates that the corresponding circular lighting area is in a lighting state if the value is 1 (on), and indicates that it is in a light-off state if it is off. The information stored in the lighting position storage area 223ι is obtained every time it detects that the output of the rotation sensor becomes H in the low-speed rotation state or the high-speed rotation state (the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the circular shape). Each time the positions of the lighting regions 811a to 811f overlap), the value is updated (see S6608 and S6610 in FIG. 181 and S6911 and S6912 in FIG. 184). Further, all values are cleared at the timing when the effect using the rotary lighting unit 800 ends.

  The lighting setting completion flag 223κ is a flag indicating whether or not the lighting state has been updated based on the output of the rotation sensor becoming H. If the lighting set flag 223κ is on, it indicates that the lighting state has been updated based on the output of the rotation sensor being H, and if it is off, the lighting state has not been updated. It shows that. When the H output of the rotation sensor is detected while the lighting setting flag 223κ is off, the lighting state is updated and the lighting setting flag 223κ is set to on (S6612 in FIG. 181 and FIG. 184). (See S6913). Further, when the L output of the rotation sensor is first detected after the lighting state is updated, it is set to OFF (see S6604 in FIG. 181 and S6910 in FIG. 184). By controlling the lighting state to be updated with reference to the lighting set flag 223κ, the lighting state is prevented from being updated a plurality of times while the output of the rotation sensor is H. be able to.

  The first identified flag 223λ is a flag indicating whether or not a reference value (the value of the speed identifying timer 223μ) for identifying the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 has been acquired. If the initial identification flag 223λ is on, it indicates that the reference value (the value of the speed identification timer 223μ) has been acquired to identify the rotational speed, and if it is off, the reference value has not been acquired. It shows that. If the first identified flag 223λ is on, the rotation speed is calculated based on the already acquired reference value (see S6701 in FIG. 182). On the other hand, if the initial identification flag 223λ is off, the flag is set on after the reference value for identifying the rotation speed is acquired (see S6703 in FIG. 182). By using the first identified flag 223λ, the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 can be accurately determined.

  The speed identifying timer 223μ is a timer used for calculating the rotational speed of the rotating member 820. The speed identification timer 223μ is updated periodically (every millisecond) in the main process, for example. The rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is calculated by determining the time from when the output of the rotation sensor becomes H until the next output becomes H based on the difference between the values of the speed identification timer 223μ.

  The previous value storage area 223ν is a storage area for storing the value of the speed identification timer 223μ at the time when the H output of the rotation sensor is detected. Next, when the rotation sensor becomes H output, the time required to rotate 60 degrees depending on the difference between the value stored in the previous value storage area 223ν and the current value of the speed identification timer 223μ. Is calculated. Based on the calculated time, the rotation speed is calculated (S6706 in FIG. 182). The data stored in the previous value storage area 223ν is overwritten with the current value of the speed identification timer 223μ after the rotation speed is calculated every time the rotation speed identification process (see FIG. 182) is executed. .

  The speed storage area 223ξ is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the rotational speed of the rotating member 820. The data stored in the speed storage area 223ξ is overwritten every time the rotational speed is calculated in the rotational speed identification process (see S6706 in FIG. 182). Based on the information corresponding to the rotational speed stored in the speed storage area 223ξ, the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 is determined, and lighting control of the lighting device 810 according to the rotational speed is performed.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 179 to 184, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. First, FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing a main process of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example. Of these main processes, the same processes as S1501 to S1520 in the first control example are executed in S1501 to S1520.

  In the main process in this control example, when the liquid crystal effect execution management process of S1510 is completed, the speed identification timer 223μ is updated by adding 1 (S1551), and the process proceeds to S1511. The speed identification timer 223μ is a timer used to calculate the speed of the rotating member 820 as described above.

  Further, in the main process in this control example, when the entrance effect setting process in S1515 is completed, a lighting control process for controlling the lighting state of the lighting device 810 is then executed (S1552). And after execution of lighting control processing (S1551), processing of S1516-S1520 is performed and this processing is ended.

  Next, the details of the lighting control process (S1552) will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 184. FIG. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the lighting control process (S1552). This lighting control process (S1552) is a process for controlling the lighting state of the lighting device 810 according to the speed of the rotating member 820.

  In the lighting control process (S1552), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the lighting state counter value 223θ is “01H” (S6501). When it is determined in the processing of S6501 that the lighting state counter value 223θ is 01H (S6501: Yes), the low-speed processing for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the low-speed rotation state. Is executed (S6502), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6501 that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not “01H” (S6501: No), then it is determined whether or not the value 223θ of the lighting state counter is “02H”. (S6503). If it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is “02H” (S6503: Yes), the lighting state in the acceleration state during the transition of the rotating member 820 from the low speed rotation state to the high speed rotation state is set. Acceleration processing for executing the processing is executed (S6504), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6503, when it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not “02H” (S6503: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is “03H” ( S6505). In the process of S6505, when it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is “03H” (S6505: Yes), high-speed processing for setting the lighting state of the rotating member 820 in the high-speed rotation state is executed. (S6506), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not “03H” (S6505: No), the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is “00H”, and it is not necessary to control the lighting device 810. This process is terminated.

  Next, details of the low-speed processing (S6502) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the low speed process (S6502). This low speed process (S6502) is a process for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the low speed rotation state as described above.

  In the low speed process (S6502), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the rotation sensor is H (high) (S6601), and when it is determined that the output is not H (output is L) (S6601). : No), next, it is determined whether or not the lighting set flag 223κ is ON (S6602). In the process of S6602, when it is determined that the lighting set flag 223κ is off (S6602: No), the through holes 821a to 821f are arranged at positions shifted from the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f. In addition, this means that the lighting device 810 has already been set to the extinguished state, and thus this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6602, when it is determined that the lighting setting flag 223κ is on (S6602: Yes), the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are in a state where any of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f is lit. This means that the through holes 821a to 821f are arranged at positions shifted from each other, so that all the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are turned off (S6603). This prevents the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f from being displaced from the through holes 821a to 821f in the state where the circular lighting region set to the lighting state exists (see FIG. 176 (b)). Since (suppression) can be performed, the quality of appearance can be improved. When the process of S6603 ends, the lighting set flag is set to OFF (S6604), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6601, when it is determined that the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lighting set flag 223κ is on (S6605), and the lighting set flag is set. If it is determined that 223κ is on (S6605: Yes), the lighting state has already been set, and it is not necessary to set the lighting state again.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lighting set flag 223κ is not on (that is, off) (S6605: No), the output of the rotation sensor is at the H position (the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f). It means that the positions of the through holes 821a to 821f overlap each other), but the lighting state is not set. Therefore, in this case, first, a rotational speed identification process for identifying the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 is executed (S6606). Details of this rotational speed identification processing (S6606) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S6606 is completed, it is determined whether or not the rotation speed is higher than one rotation per second (S6607). If it is determined that the rotation speed is one rotation per second or less (S6607: No), the range of the low-speed rotation state In order to set the lighting state illustrated in FIG. 177, first, the data of each bit in the lighting position storage area 223ι is shifted to the upper bit side (S6608), and then the shifted data Among these, it is determined whether or not the number of bits whose value is 1 (ON) matches the target value (expectation) of the current performance (S6609).

  In the process of S6609, when it is determined that the number of bits having a value of 1 (on) is less than the target value (S6609: No), the bit having the highest one of the bits having a value of 0 (off) is 1 Is set to 1 (S6610), and the process proceeds to S6611. By the processing of S6610, the number of circular lighting areas set in the lighting state can be increased by one. On the other hand, if the number of bits whose value is 1 (ON) matches the target value (expectation), the process of S6610 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6611.

  In the processing of S6611, the lighting position (circular lighting area) corresponding to the ON bit among the respective bits of the lighting position storage area 223ι is set to light red, and the lighting setting flag 223κ is set to ON. (S6611), this process ends.

  Further, in the process of S6607, when it is determined that the rotation speed is higher than one rotation per second (S6607: Yes), the rotation member 820 enters an acceleration state in the middle of transition from the low-speed rotation state to the high-speed rotation state. This means that all the white EDs provided in the lighting device 810 are set to the lighting state (S6612). Then, “02H” is set to the value of the lighting state counter 223θ (S6613), the first identified flag 223λ is set to OFF (S6614), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this low-speed processing, the lighting state described above with reference to FIG. 177 can be set in the low-speed rotation state, so that the visual quality can be improved.

  Next, the above-described rotational speed identification process (S6606) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This rotational speed identification process (S6606) is a process for identifying (calculating) the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 as described above. In this rotational speed identification process (S6606), first, it is determined whether or not the first identified flag 223λ is on (S6701).

  In the process of S6701, when it is determined that the first identified flag 223λ is not on (that is, off) (S6701: No), the value of the speed identification timer 223μ is stored in the previous value storage area 223ν ( (S6702), the first identified flag 223λ is set to ON (S6703), and this process ends. As described above, by storing the value of the speed identification timer 223μ in the previous value storage area 223ν, the time required for the rotating member 820 to rotate 60 degrees is easily calculated in the next rotational speed identification process. be able to.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6701 that the initial identification flag 223λ is on (S6701: Yes), the value of the speed identification timer 223μ is read (S6704), and the read value and the previous value storage area The difference from the value stored in is calculated (S6705). This difference represents the time from when the output of the rotation sensor becomes H last time until it becomes H again this time. That is, it means the time required for the rotating member 820 to rotate 60 degrees. When the processing of S6705 is completed, the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 is then calculated from the calculated difference (time required to rotate 60 degrees), stored in the speed storage area (S6706), and this processing is completed. To do. An appropriate lighting state can be set according to the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 calculated by this processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the above-described acceleration process (S6504) will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the acceleration processing (S6504). This acceleration process (S6504) is a process for setting the lighting state in the acceleration state during the transition from the low-speed rotation state to the high-speed rotation state.

  In the acceleration process (S6504), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6801), and if it is determined that the output is not H (that is, L) (S6801: No). ), This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the output is H in the process of S6801 (S6802: Yes), the above-described rotation is performed to determine whether or not the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 has reached the high-speed rotation speed. A speed identification process (S6802) is executed. Since this rotational speed identification process is merely the same process as the rotational speed identification process described with reference to FIG. 182, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the processing of S6802 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the calculated rotation speed is 3 rotations per second (S6803), and it is determined that the rotation speed is not 3 rotations per second (1 rotation per second or more and less than 3 rotations). (S6803: No), since it has not shifted to the high-speed rotation state, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6803 that the rotation speed of the rotating member is 3 rotations per second (S6803: Yes), it means that the high-speed rotation state has been entered. Switch. That is, a command for setting a lighting mode with a lighting frequency of 24 Hz and an on-duty of 0.5% is set for the LED driver of the lighting device 810 (S6804). Thereafter, by setting “03H” as the value of the lighting state counter 223θ, it indicates that the state has shifted to the high speed rotation state (S6805), the initial identified flag 223λ is set to OFF (S6806), and this processing is terminated. To do. By this acceleration processing, the transition to the high-speed rotation state can be immediately identified and the lighting state can be switched.

  Next, the high-speed processing (S6506) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This high speed process (S6506) is a process for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the high speed rotation state as described above. In this high-speed processing, first, it is determined whether or not the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6901). If it is determined that the output is not H (that is, L) (S6901: No), then Then, it is determined whether or not the lighting set flag 223κ is on (S6902).

  In the process of S6902, when it is determined that the lighting setting flag 223κ is off (S6902: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6902 that the lighting setting flag 223κ is on (S6902: Yes), the lighting state of the circular lighting area where the red LED lighting is set is canceled (turned off) (S6903). ), The lighting set flag 223κ is set to OFF (S6904), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6901 that the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6901), it is determined whether or not the lighting setting flag 223λ is ON, and the lighting setting flag 223λ is ON. If this is the case (S6905), it means that the lighting state has already been set, and it is not necessary to set the lighting state to be overlapped, so this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lighting set flag 223λ is not on (that is, off) (S6906: No), the lighting period in the high-speed rotation state (24 Hz, on-duty 0.5% period) (S6906). If it is not the lighting period (S6906: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the process of S6906 that the lighting period is in the high-speed rotation state (24 Hz, ON DUTY 0.5% period) (S6906: Yes), then the high-speed rotation state is completed from the rotation speed of the rotating member 820. In order to determine whether or not, a rotational speed identification process is executed (S6907). Since this rotation speed identification process (S6907) is the same as the rotation speed identification process (S6606) described above with reference to FIG. 182, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the rotational speed identification process (S6907) ends, it is then determined whether or not the calculated rotational speed is less than 3 revolutions per second (S6908), and if it is less than 3 revolutions per second (S698: Yes), This means that the high-speed rotation state has ended based on the operation scenario, and that the rotating member 820 has started to decelerate toward the stop of rotation, so the processing of S6909 to S6911 for setting the end of the lighting state is executed. That is, all the LEDs are set to be turned off (S6909), and “00H” is set to the lighting state counter 223θ to indicate that the lighting control state of the lighting device 810 has ended (S6910). Then, the lighting set flag 223κ is set to OFF and all the data in the lighting position storage area 223ι are cleared to 0 (S6911), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6908 that the rotation speed is not less than 3 rotations per second (the rotation speed in the high-speed rotation state is maintained) (S6908: No), first, the lighting position storage area The data of each bit of 223ι is shifted to the lower bit side (S6912). That is, data is shifted in the opposite direction to the low-speed rotation state. Then, with reference to the data after the shift, the red LED provided at the lighting position (circular lighting region) corresponding to the bit whose value is 1 (ON) is set to the ON state (S6913). Then, the lighting set flag 223κ is set to ON (S6914), and this process is terminated.

  By executing the processing of S6913, the red LEDs provided in the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are controlled separately from the white LEDs controlled in the lighting state illustrated in FIG. The expectation degree of jackpot can be displayed again. Further, since the red LED is in the lighting period of the white LED and is turned on only when the output of the rotation sensor is H, the red LED is turned on every time the rotating member 820 rotates 180 degrees. Is set. This is because the rotation angle of the rotating member 820 in one lighting cycle is 45 degrees, whereas the circular lighting areas are arranged at intervals of 60 degrees, and these least common multiples are 180 degrees. Here, as described above, when the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees clockwise in the high-speed rotation state, it looks like the player rotates 15 degrees counterclockwise. Therefore, when the rotating member 820 rotates 180 degrees clockwise, it looks like it has rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the player's perspective. Therefore, by executing the processing of S6912 and S6913, each time the appearance of rotation of one circular lighting area is advanced counterclockwise, the lighting position of the red LED is made to follow the appearance of the player counterclockwise. It can be moved around one piece. Therefore, in the high-speed rotation state, it is possible to make the appearance as if the rotation direction has been changed only by lighting control without changing the rotation direction or rotation speed of the rotation member 820. Moreover, the lighting effect of red LED which shows an expectation can also be performed according to having become the appearance which began to rotate to the opposite direction. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, the rotary lighting unit 800 that performs the combined rotation operation and lighting operation is added to the configuration. The rotating lighting unit 800 includes a rotating member 820 that rotates and a lighting device 810 having a fixed orientation, and the lighting device 810 has a circular shape through through holes 821a to 821f provided in the rotating member 820. An effect is provided in which the player visually recognizes the red light emitted from the lighting areas 811a to 811f, and notifies the degree of expectation for the jackpot according to the number of light emitting points. However, if one or a plurality of circular lighting regions are lit with the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f shifted, there is a possibility that a halfway appearance may occur. Therefore, in this control example, control is performed so that the corresponding circular lighting areas are lit only when the positions of the through holes 821a to 821f and the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f coincide with each other. The entire 810 is turned off. By configuring in this way, the appearance quality of the rotary lighting unit 800 can be improved.

  Further, in this control example, the rotation speed of the rotation member 820 can be determined according to the detection frequency of the rotation sensor, and the lighting control of the lighting device 810 can be changed according to the rotation speed. Rather than setting the rotation control of the rotating member 820 and the lighting control of the lighting device 810 independently according to the elapsed time, the lighting control of the lighting device 810 is changed by determining the actual rotation speed of the rotating member 820. Thus, lighting control that matches the actual operation of the rotating member 820 can be executed.

  In this control example, the lighting device 810 is disposed on the back side of the rotating member 820, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be disposed on the back side of the rotating member 820, and an image indicating the degree of expectation for jackpots may be displayed for each through-hole position. Thereby, compared with the case where the lighting device 810 is arranged, an effect with a higher degree of freedom can be executed, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In this control example, six through holes 821a to 821f are provided in the rotating member 820, but the number of through holes can be arbitrarily determined. Moreover, the structure which can visually recognize the lighting mode of the lighting device 810 from the front side of the rotating member 820 is not limited to the through-hole penetrating to the back side. For example, instead of the through hole, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or the like may be arranged so that the lighting state on the back side can be visually recognized. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may become easy to visually recognize the lighting mode of the back side rather than another part by making thickness thin compared with the other position of the rotation member 820. FIG.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front rail portion 715 is formed from a single arc shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the front rail portion 715 may be formed from a plurality of arcs, and the direction of the adjacent arcs may be reversed (wave shape). In this case, since the slide movement speed of the effect member 620 is intermittently changed and the posture of the effect member 620 is unstable, it is possible to perform an effect of rattling the effect member 620.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is vertically above the first shaft support 613 when the effect member 620 forms an inverted state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the center of gravity may be disposed obliquely above the first shaft support 613.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 of the lower left plate member 320 is horizontal in the left-right direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 may be inclined downward as it approaches the outside in the width direction. In this case, the speed of the sphere flowing into the upper surface of the lower left plate member 320 from the outside in the board surface width direction can be decelerated by the acceleration in the gravity direction, and the deceleration time of the sphere can be shortened.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is formed as a long hole has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sliding hole 643 may be formed in a circular shape, and the displacement of the sliding hole 643 and the sliding shaft portion 621a may be adjusted by extending and contracting the transmission member 640. In this case, the arrangement range of the transmission member 640 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the position of the contact part 644 can be switched between two positions has been described in the fourth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the position of the contact portion 644 may be continuously changed (movable). In this case, the change rate of the urging force of the torsion spring 650 can be continuously increased.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the posture of the tip swinging member 6556 changes at two positions has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the posture change of the tip swinging member 6556 may be caused in a plurality of stages. In this case, a plurality of types of swinging amounts of the expansion / contraction production device 6540 can be formed, and variations in production can be increased.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  In addition, you may naturally comprise each embodiment mentioned above, each control example, or it combining the part. Furthermore, although comprised with the some control apparatus, you may comprise with one integrated control apparatus or the control apparatus which integrated several.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<An example of the technical idea of changing the driving force transmission by the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550>
A crank member that is rotated about the first axis and has a protruding portion protruding from the first axis, and an insertion portion through which the protruding portion is inserted, and is spaced apart from the first position and the first position. An arm member formed to be movable between a second position and a driving device that generates a driving force for rotating the crank member around the first axis, wherein the insertion portion is inserted The driving force is transmitted to the arm member when the protruding portion comes into contact with an inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion facing the moving direction of the protruding portion, and the arm member is moved to the first position and the second position. A gaming machine comprising: a transmission area formed to be movable between positions; and a non-transmission area that is connected to the transmission area and that blocks transmission of the driving force. A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a crank member provided with a projecting portion protruding at a position eccentric from the rotation shaft, and an arm member provided with an insertion portion through which the projecting portion of the crank member is inserted are provided. There is a gaming machine in which an arm member operates in conjunction with rotation of a crank member (see, for example, JP 2009-000306 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the crank member and the arm member are always interlocked. For this reason, the arm member is driven from the start of the crank member, and the start timing of the crank member and the timing of driving the arm member cannot be shifted. In this case, when the crank member is started, a large force is required to overcome the inertia of the crank member and the arm member, and there is a problem that the drive device becomes large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the insertion portion of the arm member includes a transmission region and a non-transmission region coupled to the transmission region, the crank member is inserted into the non-transmission region. By starting the member, the timing for driving the arm member and the timing for starting the crank member can be shifted. That is, even if the crank member is started, the driving force is not transmitted to the arm member until the protrusion enters the transmission region from the non-transmission region. Thereby, the driving force required at the time of starting of a crank member can be suppressed, and size reduction of a drive device can be achieved.

  Note that the arm member may be stopped or moved while the protrusion moves in the non-transmission region. For example, when the arm member is moved, a case where the arm member is moved by gravity or an elastic force generated by an auxiliary elastic spring is exemplified.

  In addition, as an insertion part, the hollow of a bottomed recessed shape, the penetrated long hole, etc. are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A1, the crank member is formed so as to be able to rotate more than one rotation, and the insertion portion serves as the transmission region when the crank member is rotated in one rotation direction, while the crank member is A gaming machine A2 comprising a selection area that becomes the non-transmission area when rotated in another rotation direction opposite to the one rotation direction.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the crank member. Thus, by changing the direction of the driving force of the driving device without changing the rotation speed of the crank member, two speed modes of the arm member when the crank member is arranged in the same phase can be formed. The variation of the speed of the arm member can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A2, the insertion portion is separated from the projection portion and the inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion facing the movement direction of the projection portion when the crank member is rotated in the one rotation direction. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the selection area is formed by providing a margin part.

  In the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A2, the selection area is formed by providing the insertion part with a margin part, so that other modes for changing the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member are provided. A member can be made unnecessary and material cost can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, at least one of the first position or the second position is formed as an end position of the movement range of the arm member, and the first position or the When the arm member is disposed at one of the second positions, the arm member facing the other of the first position and the second position, which is formed as the terminal position, is opposite to the other of the first position and the second position. A gaming machine A4, wherein a bounce suppression mechanism that suppresses movement is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, when the arm member is disposed at either the first position or the second position formed as the terminal position of the movable range of the arm member, In order to suppress the movement of the arm member toward the other side on the opposite side, it is possible to suppress the driving force that the driving device needs to generate. Therefore, the durability of the drive device can be improved.

  In addition, as a bounce suppression mechanism, when using the magnetic attraction force, when the movement is suppressed by a claw-shaped member, and the load received by the projection of the crank member from the arm member is directed in the axial direction of the crank member. The case where the insertion part of a member is formed is illustrated.

  When attracted by a magnet, the magnet is necessary as a separate member, but various attractive forces can be generated depending on the internal composition of the magnet, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

  In order to suppress the movement with the claw-shaped member, a drive device that operates the claw-shaped member is necessary, but the movement of the arm member can be mechanically stopped with the claw-shaped member.

  When the insertion part of the arm member is formed in such a manner that the load received by the projection of the crank member from the arm member is directed to the axis of the crank member, there is no need to provide another member for suppressing the movement of the arm member, The bounce of the arm member can be mechanically suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A4, when the arm member is disposed in at least one of the first position or the second position, the outer shape of the insertion portion in the vicinity of the connection position of the non-transmission area with the transmission area is The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the bounce suppressing mechanism is formed by being substantially the same as a circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the crank member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the bounce suppression mechanism is formed by continuing the rotation of the crank member after the arm member is disposed at the first position or the second position. Thereby, the change from the moving state of the arm member to the stopped state can be formed smoothly.

  In the bounce suppression mechanism, the load applied from the insertion part to the protrusion is directed to the rotation shaft of the crank member, so that it is possible to suppress the load from being applied in the rotation direction of the crank member, and the load applied to the drive device is suppressed. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is disposed at the first position, the outer shape of the insertion portion near the connection position of the non-transmission area with the transmission area is It is substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis, and is loaded with an urging force that moves the arm member from the first position toward the second position, and the non-transmission region of the insertion portion At least one of an inner depression projecting inside the insertion section or an outer depression projecting outside the insertion section with a size capable of accommodating the projection is formed on the side surface on the first position side. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is disposed at the first position, the outer shape near the connection position of the insertion portion with the transmission area of the non-transmission area However, it is substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the crank member, and an urging force for moving the arm member from the first position toward the second position is loaded on the arm member. In this case, the protrusion of the crank member is disposed in the non-transmission region of the insertion portion, so that the movement of the arm member is prevented by the protrusion and the arm member is stopped. When the crank member is rotated and the protrusion is moved in the non-transmission region, the arm member is moved when the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess are arranged to face each other. That is, when the protrusion is disposed opposite to the inner recess, the inner recess is pushed out by the protrusion, and the arm member is moved to the opposite side of the crank member. Further, when the protruding portion is disposed opposite to the outer depression, the protruding portion is accommodated in the outer depression, and the arm member is moved to the crank member side.

  As a result, the movement of the movement of the crank member is different from the movement of the arm member that occurs when the protrusion of the crank member moves in the non-transmission area and the protrusion moves through the transmission area by rotating the crank member. Can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both the improvement of the durability of the driving device and the change in the movement width of the arm member.

  That is, in order to change the movement width of the arm member, it is necessary to reverse the direction of the driving force of the driving device in accordance with the movement width of the arm member. In this case, the control burden of the driving device becomes large, and it is difficult to perform an operation with a small movement width such as vibration.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, the protrusion of the crank member is moved in the non-transmission area, and the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess are arranged to face each other, so that the movement of the arm member having a different movement width is formed. The Therefore, the movement width of the movement of the arm member can be changed without reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device. Further, by narrowing the interval between adjacent inner dents or outer dents, the arm member can be operated with a small movement width such as vibration.

  In addition, the aspect which can accommodate a protrusion part may be an aspect in which the entire protrusion part is included in the recessed part, or an aspect in which a part of the protrusion part is included in the recessed part.

<An example of a technical idea for limiting the swinging width of the expansion / contraction production device 540 with the arc-shaped hole 554>
A movable member that is movable along a predetermined movement trajectory and can be arranged at a first position and a second position that are different from each other, moves corresponding to the movable member, and contacts the movable member to move the movable member. A stopper member that limits a movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the member and changes a movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or the second position. A gaming machine B1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a movable member formed to be movable and a stopper member that limits a movement width of the movable member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-016623). reference). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the stopper member is fixed so as not to move, the stopper member is prepared separately for the case where the movable member is arranged at the first position and the case where the movable member is arranged at the second position. There is a problem that the space for disposing the stopper member becomes wide.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the stopper member moves corresponding to the movable member, the movable member is disposed at the second position when the movable member is disposed at the first position. It can also be used as a stopper member. Thereby, the space which arrange | positions a stopper member can be suppressed.

  Moreover, since the stopper member changes the movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or the movable member is arranged at the second position, the variation of the movement width of the movable member is increased. be able to.

  Examples of the stopper member include a protruding portion that protrudes from the transmission member and contacts the movable member, an inner wall portion of a recess that is recessed in the transmission member and accommodates a part of the movable member, and the like.

  Examples of movement modes include linear movement, curved movement, meandering movement, vibration, swinging, and rotational movement. The movement width in each movement mode means, for example, an actual movement distance or a linear distance between two points in the case of linear movement, curved movement, meandering movement, vibration, and the like. Or the like means an actual moving distance, a moving angle, or the like.

  In the gaming machine B1, the movable member includes an intermediate member that is pivotally supported by the first shaft and that expands and contracts in the radial direction of the first shaft, and the first position and the second position are The extension length of the intermediate member is different, the predetermined movement trajectory is formed in an arc shape centered on the first axis, and the stopper member is formed when the intermediate member is in a predetermined extension / contraction state. A gaming machine B2 that extends along the predetermined movement locus of the movable member.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the movable member is pivotally supported about the first axis so as to be able to swing and can be extended and contracted in the radial direction of the first axis. A member is provided. Therefore, the curvature radius of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member around the first axis can be changed depending on the length of the intermediate member in the expansion / contraction direction.

  Here, the stopper member is extended along a predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member when the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion / contraction state (the curvature in the extending direction of the stopper member and the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion / contraction state). The curvature of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member is the same). In this case, when the intermediate member is in a predetermined stretched state, the movable member is moved along the stopper member, and the movable member can be moved in the extending direction of the stopper member. Therefore, the movement width (swing angle) of the movable member can be maximized.

  On the other hand, when the intermediate member is in an expanded / contracted state different from the predetermined expanded / contracted state, the curvature of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member and the curvature in the extending direction of the stopper member can be made different. The trajectory and the extending direction of the stopper member can be crossed. Therefore, the movement width of the movable member can be shortened. Therefore, the movement width of the movable member can be changed by changing the expansion / contraction state of the intermediate member.

  In the gaming machine B2, the movable member includes a protrusion protruding toward the stopper member, the stopper member includes an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted, and the protrusion is connected to the insertion portion. In the inserted state, the movable member and the stopper member are interlocked with the expansion / contraction direction of the intermediate member, and the movable member is brought into contact with the insertion portion.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, since the protrusion of the movable member is inserted into the insertion part of the stopper member, the movable member and the stopper member are interlocked with the expansion / contraction direction of the intermediate member. The drive device that expands and contracts the movable member and the drive device that moves the stopper member can be combined. Further, the insertion portion regulates the movement of the movable member by being in contact with the movable member. That is, the insertion portion of the stopper member has a function as a stopper for restricting the movement of the movable member and a function for interlocking the movable member and the stopper member. As a result, functions can be consolidated.

  In the gaming machine B3, when the intermediate member expands and contracts, the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the intermediate member is expanded and contracted, so that the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side. Thereby, the movement width of a movable member can be changed with the case where a 1st axis | shaft is arrange | positioned at the inner peripheral side of an insertion part, and the case where a 1st axis | shaft is arrange | positioned at the outer peripheral side of an insertion part.

  That is, when the first shaft is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement locus of the protrusion when the movable member is moved along the predetermined movement locus follows the shape of the insertion portion), The movement locus and the shape of the insertion portion are approximated, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be widened. On the other hand, when the first shaft is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement locus of the protrusion when the movable member is moved along the predetermined movement locus is substantially reversed from the shape of the insertion portion), the protrusion The angle formed by the movement locus and the inner wall surface of the insertion portion is increased, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the insertion portion is formed so that the posture can be changed while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member, and the contact position between the movable member and the insertion portion when the insertion portion is changed in posture. Is changed, and the moving width of the predetermined moving locus of the movable member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3 or B4, the contact position between the movable member and the insertion part is changed by changing the posture of the insertion part while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member. In this case, the movement width of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member can be changed while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the insertion portion includes a groove portion that allows the protrusion portion to enter and exit along the movement locus, and the protrusion portion is separated from the insertion portion via the groove portion. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that a state can be formed, and the movable member includes a positioning auxiliary portion that is engaged with the stopper member in the separated state.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines B3 to B5, it is possible to form a separated state in which the protruding portion is separated from the insertion portion through the groove portion, and the movable member is in the separated state A positioning auxiliary portion engaged with the stopper member is provided. Therefore, compared to the operation range of the movable member, the formation range of the stopper member can be reduced, the material cost of the stopper member can be reduced, and the displacement between the movable member and the stopper member in the separated state can be reduced. Can be prevented. That is, even if the protrusion is separated from the insertion portion of the stopper member, the positioning assisting portion suppresses the relative movement of the movable member with respect to the stopper member, so that the protrusion can be returned to the insertion portion again.

<An example of the technical idea of supporting the two-stage production member 620 supported upside down>
A base member, a movable member supported by a support portion formed on the base member so as to be displaceable and moving upward from a predetermined position, a driving device for generating a driving force for displacing the movable member, and a connection to the movable member And a transmission member that transmits the driving force generated from the driving device to the movable member, and the transmission member is pivotally supported by a shaft support portion formed on the base member, A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the length from the shaft support portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmission member is shorter than the length from the support portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmission member. .

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that drives a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on a base member and moves upward from a predetermined position by transmission of driving force by a gear (for example, JP, 2011-120640, A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the moving amount of the center of gravity of the movable member when the drive device is operated in the minimum unit of resolution of the control of the drive device (for example, one step in the case of a stepping motor) is the support portion of the movable member. To the center of gravity of the movable member. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity of the movable member becomes more difficult as the center of gravity of the movable member is separated from the support portion in the radial direction.

  In addition, when the center of gravity of the movable member is shifted to one side from the inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed directly above the support portion, the movable member is inverted by generating a driving force that displaces the movable member in the opposite direction. Even if the state is maintained, if the center of gravity shifts to the other side due to the driving force, the direction of the driving force and the direction of gravity coincide with each other, and the movable member is greatly displaced.

  Therefore, as the movable member becomes longer in the radial direction of the support portion, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to make the movable member stationary in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged right above the support portion.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving device to the movable member to move the movable member upward is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion of the base member and connected to the movable member. The length from the connection position of the movable member and the connection member to the shaft support portion is formed shorter than the length from the connection position of the movable member and the connection member to the support portion. Therefore, even when the movable member is elongated in the radial direction of the support portion, it is possible to suppress the movement amount of the center of gravity of the movable member when the drive device is operated with the minimum unit of resolution of control of the drive device. it can. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the movable member stationary in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed directly above the support portion.

  As a mode in which the movable member is supported by the base member, a mode in which the movable member is pivotally supported by the base member, a mode in which the movable member is slidably supported by the base member, A compound aspect etc. are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmission member has a shorter arm length from the shaft support portion to the connection position with the movable member as the movable member moves upward from the predetermined position. Machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, as the movable member displaced about the support portion moves upward from a predetermined position, the transmission member from the shaft support portion to the connection position with the movable member is improved. Arm length is shortened. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved as compared with the case where the arm length of the transmission member is constant.

  For example, when the rotational speed of the drive device that rotates the transmission member operates at a constant speed, the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at a predetermined first length, and the arm length of the transmission member is first. A description will be given assuming that the second length is fixed to be shorter than the first length. When the rotational speed of the driving device is constant, the transmission member is fixed at the first length compared to the case where the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at the second length. The moving speed of the center of gravity of the movable member is increased when the member is arranged in a predetermined phase.

  Here, in the vicinity of the predetermined position, the movable member is quickly operated at a speed generated when the transmission member is the first arm length, and the speed generated when the transmission member is the second arm length near the inverted state. Consider the case where you want to move the movable member slowly. As a method for that purpose, a method of changing the rotational speed of the driving device in the middle is conceivable, but it cannot be adopted when it is difficult to change the rotational speed of the driving device. In addition, even if the rotational speed of the drive device can be changed, a detection sensor for detecting the timing of the change is necessary to change the rotational speed in the middle, which increases the cost. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the arm length from the shaft support portion on which the transmission member is pivotally supported to the connection position between the transmission member and the movable member is determined so that the transmission member is at a predetermined position. It is formed in such a manner that it is shortened as it moves upward. Therefore, the transmission member can be set to the first arm length in the vicinity of the predetermined position, and the transmission member can be set to the second arm length in the vicinity of the inverted state, so that the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved. .

  The configuration in which the arm length from the shaft support portion to the connection position of the transmission member and the movable member is fixed is exemplified by a case where a protrusion protruding from the transmission member is inserted and connected to the movable member. The The arm length can be changed by forming a long hole in the transmission member, and when the protrusion protruding from the movable member is slidably inserted into the long hole of the transmission member. Examples include a case where a long hole is provided in a portion where the member is supported by the support portion, and an insertion shaft rod is formed through the long hole from the base member.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the movable member includes a protruding portion that protrudes in a direction parallel to the support portion, and the transmission member is a long hole that extends in a radial direction of the shaft support portion. A gaming machine C3 comprising an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted.

  In the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the insertion portion extends in the radial direction of the shaft support portion, and the projection portion of the transmission member is inserted into the insertion portion, whereby the transmission member and the movable member Are connected, the moving direction of the connecting position is limited to the radial direction of the shaft support portion. Therefore, as the transmission arm swings, the length from the shaft support portion to the connecting position of the transmission member with the movable member can be mechanically changed.

  In addition, as an insertion part, the elongate hole formed by penetration, the recessed part formed as a bottomed hollow, etc. are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C3, the shaft support portion is disposed vertically above the support portion, and the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed on a straight line connecting the support portion and the projection portion.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C3, when the movable member takes a posture in which the protruding portion is arranged vertically above the supporting portion, the center of gravity of the supporting portion, the shaft support portion, the protruding portion, and the movable member is It is formed on the vertical line. In this case, gravity applied to the center of gravity of the movable member is loaded vertically downward with respect to the support portion and the shaft support portion. For this reason, no force in the rotational direction is applied to the movable member, so that the posture of the movable member can be maintained even when the power of the driving device is interrupted. Thereby, the burden of a drive device can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C4, a gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the driving device, and the rotation of the driving device is decelerated by the worm gear.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the driving device, and the rotation of the driving device is decelerated by the worm gear. The movement width of the movable member when operating with the minimum unit of resolution can be greatly reduced. In addition, since the transmission direction of the force via the worm gear is limited to one direction from the drive device side to the transmission member side, it is possible to prevent the worm gear from rotating due to the load from the transmission member side. It is possible to reduce the load applied to the drive device when the vehicle is stopped.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the game machine includes an urging device that generates an urging force for moving the center of gravity of the movable member above the support portion in both directions in the displacement direction of the movable member, and the urging force is A gaming machine C6, wherein the center of gravity of the movable member is balanced in the displacement direction in an inverted state in which the movable member is disposed vertically above the support portion, and becomes larger as the movable member is displaced from the inverted state.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the biasing device generates a biasing force that moves the center of gravity of the movable member above the support, and the biasing force is based on the center of gravity of the movable member. It becomes larger as the movable member is displaced from the state (inverted state) arranged vertically above the support portion. That is, the urging force can be minimized in the inverted state.

  Therefore, when the movable member is moved upward from a predetermined position, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive device that moves the movable member upward from the state where the movable member is disposed at the predetermined position by increasing the biasing force.

  Further, the urging force is generated in both directions in the displacement direction of the movable member, and is balanced in the displacement direction in the inverted state. Therefore, when the movable member is moved up from a predetermined position and the drive device is controlled to stop, the posture of the movable member is inverted by the biasing force even if the movable member does not reach the inverted state or passes the inverted state. Can be directed to. Thereby, it can be made easy to stop a movable member in an inverted state.

  In the gaming machine C6, the movable member can form a first state in which the center of gravity is displaced by a predetermined amount from vertically above the support portion, and a second state in which the center of gravity is displaced by a predetermined amount or more. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that in the second state, the rate of change in the urging force when the displacement is the same is greater in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6, the movable member is larger than the predetermined amount from the inverted state than the first state on the inverted state where the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged vertically above the support portion. In the displaced second state, the rate of change of the urging force when the displacement is the same is larger. In this case, when starting the movable member from the state in which the movable member is arranged in the second state, it is possible to suppress a burden at the time of starting the drive device. Moreover, since the acceleration of a movable member when a movable member is arrange | positioned near an inverted state can be reduced, it can be made easy to stop a movable member in an inverted state.

<An example of a technical idea in which the spring constant of the torsion spring 650 changes during swinging>
A movable member formed to be movable between the first position and the second position, a drive device for generating a drive force for moving the movable member, and an urging force for returning the movable member to the first position. And a biasing device for generating the movable member, wherein the movable member is movable with respect to a change rate of a biasing force generated when the movable member is disposed in a first biasing region from the first position to a predetermined position. The rate of change in biasing force that occurs when the member is disposed in a second biasing region that is connected to the first biasing region and is formed away from the first position is increased. A gaming machine D1 characterized by that.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that uses an urging force of an urging device such as an elastic spring as an auxiliary force when the movable member is moved by the driving force generated by the driving device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-2011). -1264040). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the urging force of the urging device is proportionally increased by the amount of displacement of the movable member, and it is difficult to change the purpose of the urging device by the arrangement of the movable member. There was a problem that. That is, it is difficult to make the movement of the movable member smooth by suppressing the urging force in a certain area, and to improve the urging force and make the movement of the movable member abrupt in another area.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the change rate of the urging force urged toward the first position is such that the movable member is attached to the second portion as compared with the case where the movable member is disposed in the first urging region. The case where it is arranged in the force area is enlarged. That is, for example, when the movable member stopped at the second position is started toward the first position (second urging region), a sufficient urging force can be obtained by the urging device, while the movable member is in the first position. When arranged in the urging region, the change in the urging force is suppressed, and the operation of the movable member can be performed smoothly (slowly).

  In addition, as a mode in which the change rate of the urging force of the urging device is changed by the arrangement of the movable member, the number of urging devices that cause the movable member to generate an urging amount increases in the middle, A case where the spring constant of the elastic spring is changed by the arrangement of the movable member is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine D1, the biasing device is a pair of long members that intersect with the moving direction of the movable member and are respectively disposed on a pair of surfaces that sandwich the movable member in the moving direction. And the other end portion, which is an end portion on the opposite side of the one end portion, is formed from an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed, and the movable member is A main body sandwiched between a pair of long members; and formed on the opposite side of the main body portion with respect to the pair of long members and in contact with at least one of the pair of long members in the moving direction of the main body portion. An abutting portion formed so as to be able to come into contact, and the abutting portion is connected and fixed to the movable member, and when the movable member is disposed in the first urging region, the movable member is Among the long members, the movement of the movable member A biasing force is applied by being brought into contact with one long member on the side closer to the movable member, and the movable member has a biasing force due to a contact between the other long member and the contact portion. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being given.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the change in the change rate of the urging force by the urging device is shifted for each long member with respect to the contact timing between the movable member and the pair of long members. Can be formed. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the urging force of the urging device by the control or to prepare another member for improving the urging force.

  That is, since the other end of the pair of long members is restricted from moving, the one long member on the side closer to the movable member due to the movement of the movable member is pressed against the movable member and moved. The other long member on the opposite side does not receive a force from the movable member. Therefore, in the first urging region, when the movable member moves, the other long member disposed on the side opposite to the moving direction of the movable member remains in place.

  On the other hand, in the second urging region, the other long member is brought into contact with the contact portion by moving the movable member. Thereby, a biasing force is also generated from the other long member. Therefore, the biasing force applied to the movable member in the second biasing region can be increased.

  Examples of the elastic spring include a coil spring, a torsion spring, and a leaf spring.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging device is a pair of long members that intersect with the moving direction of the movable member and are respectively disposed on a pair of surfaces that sandwich the movable member in the moving direction. And the other end, which is an end opposite to the one end, is formed from an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed, and the movable member is A body portion sandwiched between the pair of long members; and at least one of the pair of long members formed on the opposite side of the body portion with respect to the pair of long members and moving in the body portion An abutting portion formed so as to be abuttable, and the abutting portion is connected and fixed to the movable member, and when the movable member is disposed in the first urging region, the movable member is Of the pair of long members, the movable member When the movable member is brought into contact with one long member that is closer to the movable member due to the movement and applied with an urging force, and the movable member is disposed in the second urging region, the one long member is disposed. The game machine D3 is characterized in that an intermediate portion of the game machine is pressed against a contact portion disposed on one long member side with respect to the main body portion.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the change in the change ratio of the urging force is formed by pressing the middle part of one long member against the contact part. That is, one of the long members that has already been deformed by the movement of the movable member is further deformed starting from the intermediate portion that is pressed against the contact portion, thereby causing a change in the change rate of the biasing force. Here, in the deformation starting from the intermediate portion, the length of the portion subjected to the deformation is shorter than the deformation starting from the other end, so the ratio of the change in the biasing force with respect to the moving amount of the movable member is Increase. Thereby, in the 2nd energizing field, change of energizing force to the amount of movement of the movable member can be increased. Therefore, the change rate of the urging force can be increased.

  In the gaming machine D3, the one long member includes a first bending point that is bent toward the abutting portion that is disposed to face the one long member, and the one long member is the first bending point. A gaming machine D4, which is pressed against the contact portion.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, since one long member is brought into contact with the contact portion disposed oppositely at the first bending point, the one long member is brought into contact. It is extended by contact with the part. Therefore, the tip portion of the urging device that applies the urging force to the movable member can be separated from the other end of the long member that is the starting point of the urging force and the first bending point. Therefore, the moment that the movable member is loaded from the urging device in the second urging region can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine D4, the movable member includes a tip enlarged region that is enlarged in the moving direction as the distance from the other end of the elongated member increases, and one of the movable member and the elongated member is expanded in the tip enlarged region. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the end of the game machine abuts against the game machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the movable member has a tip enlarged region, and the movable member and one end of the long member are brought into contact with each other in the tip enlarged region. Therefore, when one long member is extended by pressing one long member against the contact portion, the contact position between the movable member and the long member is separated from the other end of the long member. The amount of deformation of the long member is increased. Therefore, the urging force loaded from the urging device to the movable member can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D5, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that an arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D2 to D5, variations in the change in the biasing force generated by the long member can be increased. That is, for example, when the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion is narrowed, the timing at which the rate of change in the biasing force of the long member increases can be set earlier.

<An example of a technical idea in which a plurality of out openings are provided and the buffer rib 322 is formed on the lower plate 320>
Inside the game area in which the ball is allowed to flow down, the in-board role arranged in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the ball formed on one side in the width direction of the in-board role A first out port which is an opening for discharging from the area, and a second out port which is an opening formed on the other side in the width direction of the in-board accessory which is opposite to the one side in the width direction and which discharges a ball from the game area The first out port and the second out port include a lower plate portion extending from the lower surface of the opening to the front surface and having a guide surface on the upper surface, and the guide of the lower plate portion. The surface includes buffer ribs extending in a rib shape in the opening direction on the corresponding side in the first out port or the second out port, and is formed to be raised from the guide surface on the outer side in the width direction. The buffer rib has an aspect ratio that goes outward in the width direction. Gaming machine E1, characterized in that it is formed smaller.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of outlets are arranged (see, for example, JP-A-9-192301). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is preferable to reduce the size of each out port as the number of out ports increases. There was a problem that the discharge of game balls could be delayed.

  For example, when the height at which the sphere bounces up and down on the front side of the out mouth becomes equal to or greater than the vertical width of the out mouth, the sphere stays in front of the out mouth. Further, for example, when a side surface is disposed on the side surface in the width direction of the out port to form a wall, the ball that has flowed from the width direction to the front side of the out port collides with the side surface of the role and rebounds in the width direction. At this time, if the amount of rebounding in the width direction is equal to or greater than the lateral width of the out port, the ball stays in front of the out port.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the buffer rib is formed on the guide surface formed on the lower plate part, it is possible to suppress the rebound of the ball or to decelerate the ball. In other words, when the ball collides from the up and down direction, the buffer rib is bent and deformed, so that the buffer rib becomes a cushion and the rebound of the ball can be suppressed. Further, when the ball collides from the left and right direction, the ball is braked by being caught in the buffer rib.

  Here, the buffer rib extending in the opening direction is vulnerable to a load from the left-right direction and may be damaged by a collision of a ball from the left-right direction.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the guide surface includes the step portion on the outer side in the width direction, the sphere that flows down from the left and right direction toward the buffer rib falls from the top of the step portion to the buffer rib. . In this case, the vertical component of the direction of collision of the sphere with the buffer rib can be increased, and damage to the buffer rib can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the step portion has a function of stopping a sphere that moves in the left-right direction on the guide surface, it is possible to prevent the sphere that moves on the guide surface from bouncing over the lateral width of the out port.

  Since the buffer rib is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game area, a large rebound suppressing effect can be obtained in the vicinity of the center in the width direction of the game area where the falling balls tend to concentrate. Thereby, a ball | bowl can be discharged | emitted smoothly from an out port. Moreover, the arrangement | positioning position of an out port can be corrected below by match | combining the curve of the lower side of a game area | region, and the lower surface of a buffer rib.

  Here, the higher the formation height of the buffer ribs, the greater the effect of suppressing the ball rebound is because the amount of deflection of the buffer ribs increases. That is, the greater the amount of deflection of the buffer rib, the more effective the cushion effect is, and the bounce can be easily suppressed. For this reason, it is preferable for the bounce suppression effect to make the aspect ratio of the buffer rib constant in the left-right direction (the length in the vertical direction is constant).

  On the other hand, if the aspect ratio of the buffer rib is constant (the length in the vertical direction is constant), it is necessary to increase the height of the stepped portion, and the path of the sphere leading to the stepped portion is also upward As a result, the game area is narrowed, which is not preferable in terms of space efficiency.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the aspect ratio (length in the vertical direction) of the buffer ribs is reduced on the outer side in the width direction of the gaming area where the falling balls are difficult to concentrate, and the center in the width direction of the gaming area where the falling balls are likely to concentrate. Then, the aspect ratio (length in the vertical direction) of the buffer rib is increased. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both the improvement of the ball discharge efficiency and the securing of the game area.

  In addition, extending in the opening direction is not particularly limited, and means extending in the opening direction in a shape such as a straight line, a waveform, and a mountain shape.

  In the gaming machine E1, the guide surface includes an outer inclined portion that is inclined downward toward the outer side in the width direction of the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the guide surface has an outer inclined portion, so that the speed of the sphere flowing into the guide surface from the outside in the width direction can be decelerated by gravity acceleration. Deceleration time can be shortened.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a gaming machine E3 is characterized in that a non-flowing region where a ball cannot flow down is formed obliquely above at least one of the first out port and the second out port.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the flow of the sphere flowing in the diagonally downward direction from the non-flowing area toward the guide surface is limited, so the sphere flow down to the guide surface The number of paths can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to narrow the direction in which the ball that has flowed down bounces back. Thereby, the external shape of at least one of a 1st out port or a 2nd out port can be narrowed.

  In the gaming machine E3, in the non-flowing area, an opening / closing device disposed in the gaming area and capable of opening and closing to the front side is disposed above at least one of the first out port and the second out port. The gaming machine E4 is formed on the front side of the opening / closing device.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, a non-flowing region is formed by the opening / closing device. Thereby, the space which arises by suppressing the opening dimension of the direction desired to the non-flowing area | region side of a 1st out port or a 2nd out port can be utilized as an installation space of an opening / closing device.

  In the closed state, the opening / closing device causes the ball flowing down in front of the opening / closing device to flow downward in the gaming area, and in the open state, the ball flowing down in front of the opening / closing apparatus is moved backward in the gaming area. Has the function of flowing down. Therefore, it is possible to reliably form the non-flowing region as compared with the case where the ball flows down irregularly by colliding with a nail or the like.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the gaming machine E5 is provided with a direction adjusting rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction on the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, a direction adjusting rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction is provided on the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port. The resistance to the sphere flowing down while colliding with the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port can be suppressed.

<Characteristic F group> (The image when the power is turned on is also used during normal operation)
Display means capable of displaying a predetermined display form; display control means for causing the display means to display the display form; and storage means for storing display data corresponding to the display form displayed by the display control means. And setting means for reading the display data from the storage means and setting the display data as display data to be displayed on the display means by the display control means, and initial setting of the game is executed in the storage means The initial display data corresponding to the initial image to be displayed is stored, and the setting means reads the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting and sets it as display data to be displayed on the display means. In the effect executed after the completion of the initial setting, the display means reads the initial display data read in the initial setting. Gaming machine F1, characterized in that it is to be used as display data to be displayed.

  Here, conventionally, in gaming machines, various effect images are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. In such a gaming machine, generally, image information of an image to be displayed on a display device is stored in advance in a storage unit, and when displaying an image, the corresponding image information is read from the storage unit, and image processing is performed. In addition, the display device is configured to display the image (for example, JP-A-2006-223598). However, in the above-described gaming machine, the image information increases, so that the amount of image data used in the gaming machine increases, and the load due to the increase in the capacity of the storage means for storing and the processing to read out increases. There was a bug. Due to such problems, improvement in image display control has been demanded.

  According to the gaming machine F1, since the initial display data displayed at the time of initial setting is also used for effects after completion of the initial setting, the display data can be shared, the amount of display data can be reduced, and the image display There is an effect that control can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, the display means includes first display means and second display means different from the first display means, and the display control means is the first display means or the second display means. The display unit displays the display mode, and the setting unit reads the initial display data from the storage unit in the initial setting, and displays the display data on the first display unit and the second display unit. In the effect executed after the initial setting, the initial display data read in the initial setting is set as display data to be displayed on either the first display means or the second display means. A gaming machine F2 that is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, display data can be shared for the display means constituted by the first display means and the second display means, and display control can be performed. There is an effect that the load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the initial display data is set with a display area of the first display means and the second display means as one display area.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, the first display means and the second display means can be set as one display data, so that the display control can be simplified.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, an acquisition unit that acquires information, a determination unit that determines information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a determination result determined by the determination unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information, and the identification information is displayed as initial identification information displayed in the initial image and dynamic display after completion of the initial setting. A gaming machine F4 characterized by comprising normal identification information.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the initial identification information displayed in the initial image and the normal identification information. Since it is comprised, there exists an effect that it can be made to recognize that it is an initial setting by a player.

  In the gaming machine F4, the initial image includes a display image including the initial identification information displayed on the first display means and a game information image indicating a game content displayed on the second display means. A gaming machine F5 characterized by comprising at least an image.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F4, the initial image is composed of initial identification information displayed on the first display means and a display image including the game information image displayed on the second display means. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of the game content and the determination result at the same time during the initial setting.

  In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the initial identification information displayed during the initial setting on the first display means is configured with a data amount smaller than the normal identification information. F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, since the initial identification information is composed of display data smaller than the normal identification information, the control load at the time of initial setting can be reduced, and the initial identification information can be read and displayed quickly. effective.

  In any of the gaming machines F4 to F6, the second display means is configured with a display area smaller than the first display means, and when the game is not performed for a predetermined period, the second display means A game machine F7, wherein a display image including the game information image displayed as the initial image is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F4 to F6, when the game is not performed for a predetermined period, the display including the game information image on the second display means using the initial display data Since the image is displayed, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced and the game content can be notified.

  In the gaming machine F7, when the game is not performed for the predetermined period, the display data corresponding to the display image displayed on the first display means among the initial images is set to non-display. A gaming machine F8 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F7, the initial image displayed on the first display means is set to non-display, so that the first display means can display differently. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines F2 to F8, the setting means sets the initial display data read in the initial setting for the first display means in the effect executed after the initial setting. When the display data corresponding to the second display means is set to non-display and set to the second display means, the display data corresponding to the first display means is set to non-display. A gaming machine F9 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F2 to F8, the first display means and the second display means can independently display using the initial display data. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine F9, when the setting means sets the initial display data read in the initial setting for the first display means in the effect executed after the initial setting, A gaming machine F10 that is set to be displayed at a different display position.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F9, it can be shown to the player as if the display is different from the display displayed in the initial setting, and the initial display data can be used in a wide variety of ways. There is an effect that can be done.

<Characteristic G group> (Change the position of XX depending on the fluctuation contents between the shutter and the main liquid crystal)
First display means capable of displaying identification information, second display means different from the first display means, and the identification information displayed on the first display means or the second display means are dynamically displayed. Dynamic display means for displaying, privilege granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to a player when the specific identification information is displayed on the first display means or the second display means, and the dynamic A gaming machine G1 having switching display means for switching and displaying the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means between the first display means and the second display means.

  Here, for example, by providing a plurality of display means for effecting a gaming machine and performing a variation effect and a jackpot effect on each display means, a player can perform a synergistic effect using a plurality of display means. There is known a gaming machine that aims to improve the interest of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-081256). However, the above-described gaming machine has been required to improve convenience by using a plurality of display devices. Due to such problems, improvement in convenience has been demanded.

  According to the gaming machine G1, an effect (dynamic display of identification information) displayed on the first display means or the second display means is applied to either the first display means or the second display means by the switching display means. It can be switched and displayed. Thus, the identification information can be displayed at a position that is easily visible to the player according to the game state, and the convenience can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, first driving means that can be driven to a first position, which is a position that makes it difficult to visually recognize the identification information that is dynamically displayed on the first display means, and dynamic display on the second display means. Second switching means that can be driven to a second position, which is a position that makes it difficult to visually recognize the identification information, and the switching display means is configured such that the first driving means is at the first position. In this case, the identification information is displayed on the second display means, and when the second driving means is at the second position, the identification information is displayed on the first display means. A gaming machine G2 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, there is an effect that the first driving means and the second driving means can suppress a problem that prevents the identification information from being visually recognized.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the second display means has a moving means capable of moving on the front side of the first display means, and the second display means is moved by the moving means in the switching display means. The game machine G3 is switched so that the identification information is displayed on the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that prevents the identification information from being visually recognized by the second display means.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the display data of the display mode displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit is the display data displayed on one display area as the first display unit. A gaming machine G4, which is composed of composite display data corresponding to the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the display data of the first display means and the second display means can be set with the composite display data, so that the control load can be reduced. is there.

  In the gaming machine G4, coordinate information for setting each display area of the first display means and the second display means as one display area is set, and the composite display data is the A gaming machine G5 characterized by comprising display data displayed for each coordinate corresponding to the coordinate information.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4, there is an effect that display data to be displayed on the first display means and the second display means can be easily set.

<Feature H group> (drop control)
In the gaming machine, comprising: a movable member having a movable portion that is movable at least between the first position and the second position; and drive means for driving the movable member to the third position and the fourth position. A restricting means for restricting the movement from the position to the second position, and the movable from the third position to the fourth position in a state where the restriction by the restricting means is released based on the establishment of the first condition. The member is driven by the driving unit, and the movable member is driven from the third position to the fourth position in a state of being regulated by the regulating unit based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. A gaming machine H1 having drive control means to be driven by the means.

  Here, for example, by moving a movable accessory provided in the gaming machine, an indication of an expected degree of winning is made. In such a gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that improves the interest of the player by increasing the movable pattern of the movable accessory (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-079697). In this case, in order to increase the movable pattern of the movable accessory, it is necessary to use a large number of drive devices (for example, a motor), which causes a problem that power consumption increases. Due to such a problem, suppression of power consumption has been demanded.

  According to the gaming machine H1, by driving the driving means, the movable part can be moved by its driving vibration or the like, so that the power consumption is increased compared to the case where the movable part is moved electrically. There is an effect that can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine H1, the gaming machine H2 includes a moving means for moving the movable portion from the second position to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the movable member is driven to the fourth position by the driving means, so that even when the movable portion is moved to the second position, There is an effect that it can be returned to one position. In this case, the movable portion may be moved to the first position by inertia force (acceleration) that drives the movable member from the fourth position to the third position without providing the movable means.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player, and an effect that indicates whether or not the privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit is predetermined. And an effect execution means that executes in an effect period, and the drive control means moves the movable member to the third position when a move condition is established during a period in which the effect is executed by the effect execution means. To the fourth position, and when the effect indicating that the privilege is given by the privilege granting unit is executed, it is easy to drive in a state where the regulation by the regulation unit is released. A gaming machine H3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H1 or H2, in the effect that a privilege is easily given, the movable member is easily driven to the fourth position in a state where the regulation is released, so the movable part is the second. There is an effect that the player can be expected to receive a privilege when moving to a position.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the drive control means moves the movable member in the same operation in a state where the restriction by the restriction means is released and a state where the restriction is restricted. A gaming machine H4.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the determination as to whether or not the movable member is regulated by the difference in the operation of driving. Here, the operation refers to a difference in speed, drive pattern, drive direction, or the like.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the drive control means is a position between the third position and the fourth position when the movable member is driven from the third position to the fourth position. A gaming machine H5 that is temporarily stopped at a midway position for a predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the temporary stop makes it possible to easily move the movable portion to the second position by inertial force or the like when not excited. There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the fourth position is configured at a position below the third position, and the driving means reciprocates between the third position and the fourth position. A gaming machine H6 that is configured to be possible.

  According to the gaming machine H6, the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5 has an effect that the movable part can be easily moved by the lowered gravity.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the movable means is constituted by a stepping motor, and the restricting means energizes the stepping motor in a stopped state.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H6, the movable means and the regulating means can be configured by stepping motors, and the configuration can be simplified.

<Characteristic group I> (Avoid execution of similar effects)
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect, a specific period setting means for setting a specific period during which a specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, and the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, A specific condition determining means for determining whether or not a specific condition that can be executed is satisfied according to the execution period of the effect, and the effect executing means is controlled by the specific condition determining means. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied.

  Here, for example, when a certain amount of time has elapsed since turning on the power supply of the gaming machine, by shifting to a specific effect different from the normal general effect, by displaying a periodic effect that is periodically executed, A gaming machine aimed at improving the interest of a player has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252534). In this case, it is difficult to determine whether or not the regular production is being executed when the production with the sound and image similar to the regular production is executed in the regular production that is periodically executed. There was a defect that the player would be confused. Due to such problems, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand.

  According to the gaming machine I1, in the period of executing the specific effect, whether or not the execution is possible is determined before the execution, so that the confusion of the player due to the defect in the execution timing of the effect can be suppressed, and the game is performed in an easy-to-understand manner There is an effect that can be made.

  The gaming machine I1 has time measuring means capable of timing time information, and the specific period setting means starts the specific period based on the fact that the predetermined time information has been timed by the time measuring means. A gaming machine I2 which is at least set.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I1, the start of a specific period is set based on the timing of predetermined time information, so the specific period is also set at the same time for other gaming machines. There is an effect that it can be easily configured.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the effect executing means executes a normal effect other than the specific effect during the specific period, and the specific condition determining means is based on the normal effect being executed. A gaming machine I3 characterized by determining whether a specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, since the establishment of the specific condition is determined based on the normal performance, the specific performance is performed in consideration of the relationship between the specific performance and the normal performance. There is an effect that it can be executed.

  The gaming machine I3 has operation means that can be operated by the player and detection means for detecting that the operation means has been operated, and at least one of the specific effect and the normal effect is And an operation effect that causes the player to operate the operation means, and the specific condition is established when the operation effect of the specific effect and the normal effect are not synchronized. A gaming machine I4.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I3, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the specific production and the operation production of the normal production are executed at the same time, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, dynamic display executing means for performing dynamic display of identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the specific identification that gives a privilege advantageous to the player Special game state setting means for setting a special game state that is a game state in which information is easy to be displayed, and the specific effect includes a suggestion effect indicating whether or not the special game state is set. A gaming machine I5 that is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, it is possible to recognize that a special gaming state is set by a specific performance, and to be interested in a specific performance. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the specific period setting means sets the specific period for a predetermined period every time a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on. The execution means is for executing the specific effect when the specific condition is satisfied for each predetermined period based on the specific period being set, and the specific condition determining means performs the specific condition. The gaming machine I6 is characterized by having delay means for delaying the specific effect and executing the effect by the effect execution means when it is determined that is not established.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I2 to I5, even if the specific condition is not satisfied, the specific presentation is executed with a delay, so the player is confused There is an effect that can be suppressed.

<Feature J group> (0.125 seconds production)
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on establishment of the acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and storage means based on establishment of the start condition A discriminating unit for discriminating stored information; a display unit for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result discriminated by the discriminating unit; and an identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display unit. Based on the fact that information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the benefit granting means for giving a benefit that is advantageous to the player, the effect mode output means for outputting a predetermined effect, and before the start condition is established A pre-discriminating means for discriminating the acquired information, and an effect execution means for executing an output of the effect based on the discrimination result of the prior discriminating means to the effect mode output means. In the aspect output means, a plurality of output areas in which the output of the effect is set are set, and when the effect execution means executes the output of the new effect, the output that has output the effect first. A gaming machine J1 that outputs the new effect to the output area different from the area.

  Here, for example, in a pachinko machine, when the game ball wins the starting opening and the reserved memory number increases, the reserved random number information is determined in advance (prefetching), and the determination result is a predetermined result (big hit) A gaming machine is known that aims to increase the player's expectation as to whether or not the variable display corresponding to the hold will be a big hit by performing an effect suggesting that For example, JP2012-16499). In such a gaming machine, there is a problem that if the game time is increased by configuring the variation time to be short, the effect period such as the lottery result is shortened and it becomes difficult for the player to understand. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand even when the variation time is short.

  According to the gaming machine J1, a plurality of output areas in which an effect based on the determination result of the prior determination means (an effect that suggests the determination result of the hold) is set, and the output areas are set in advance. The next effect is output to an output area different from the output area from which the effect is output. As a result, even when the determination result of the prior discrimination means is newly acquired during the execution of the effect, the effect based on the determination result of the prior determination means is displayed in a different output area, so that the effect being executed is displayed. An effect based on the determination result of the new prior determination means can be executed without ending. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused.

  In the gaming machine J1, a predetermined order is set in the plurality of output areas, and when the effect execution means executes the new effect, the output area that has output the effect first is next. The game machine J2 is characterized in that the output of the new effect is executed for the output areas in the order corresponding to.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine J1, the effects are sequentially output according to the order set in the output area, so the output area of the latest effect and the new effect overlaps. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the effect mode output means is configured by display means for displaying a predetermined display mode as the predetermined effect, and the display area of the display means is divided into a plurality of small areas as the output area. A gaming machine J3 characterized in that an area is set.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are produced. That is, it is possible to display a plurality of effects simultaneously by effectively using the display area. Therefore, there is an effect that the production period can be set longer.

  In the gaming machine J2 or 3, the storage means is configured to be able to store the information up to a predetermined number, and the information acquisition means is stored in the storage means when the acquisition condition is satisfied. If the information is less than the predetermined number, the information is acquired, and the effect execution means first also applies when the acquisition condition is satisfied and the information is not acquired by the information acquisition means. The game machine J4 is characterized in that an effect output is executed for the output area corresponding to the next order of the output areas that have been output.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J2 or J3, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player think as if more information is acquired.

  In the gaming machine J3 or J4, when the information is acquired by the acquisition means, the content of the effect executed by the effect execution means is determined based on the determination result by the prior determination means for the information, Production content determination for determining production content to be executed by the production execution unit based on a determination result other than the specific determination result when the acquisition condition is satisfied and the information acquisition unit has not acquired the information. A gaming machine J5 having means.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J3, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player play the game as if information has been acquired.

  In the gaming machine J5, the effect content determining means determines an effect period together with the effect content, and the determined effect period elapses in the output area where the output of the effect is executed by the effect executing means. The game machine J6 is characterized by having an ending means for forcibly ending the effect that is being executed when the effect that has not been executed is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J5, it is possible to suppress a problem that different effects are output in the same output area, and it is possible to provide a game that is easily understood by the player.

  In the gaming machine J5, the effect content determining means determines an effect period together with the effect content, and the effect executing means executes the effect period in the output area for executing the output of the newly determined effect. The game machine J7 is characterized in that when the effect that has not elapsed has been executed, the effect newly determined is executed by overwriting the effect being executed.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J5, it is possible to suppress a problem that different effects are output in the same output area, and it is possible to provide a game that is easily understood by the player.

<Characteristic K group> (actually operating an accessory is operated under one operating condition)
First movable means movable in the first movable range, second movable means different from the first movable means movable in the second movable range, and first movable relative to the first movable means The first movable setting means for setting a pattern, the second movable setting means for setting a second movable pattern with respect to the second movable means, and the operation of the first movable means movable by the first movable pattern And when the operation condition corresponding to the operation of the second movable means that is movable by the second movable pattern is not satisfied, the first or second movable pattern is set so that the operation condition is satisfied. Determining means for determining correction data for correcting at least one of them, and correcting means for correcting at least one of the first or second movable patterns based on the correction data determined by the determining means; Gaming machine K1, characterized in that it comprises.

  Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member that is variable by a motor or the like in its configuration. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can perform a wide variety of performance operations by changing a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the number of variable members is increased, it may be difficult to appropriately set the operation. In addition, some of the above-described gaming machines can change a plurality of variable members in a single effect, and can execute more various effects. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of variable members are combined and changed, the variable modes may deviate from each other, and the operation quality may deteriorate.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the first movable means is moved within the first movable range, and the second movable means different from the first movable means is moved within the second movable range. The first movable pattern is set by the first movable setting means for the first movable means, and the second movable pattern is set by the second movable setting means for the second movable means. The operation condition seems to be satisfied when the operation condition according to the operation of the first movable means that moves according to the first movable pattern and the operation of the second movable means that moves according to the second movable pattern is not satisfied. Further, correction data for correcting at least one of the first and second movable patterns is determined by the determining means. Based on the correction data determined by the determining means, at least one of the first and second movable patterns is corrected by the correcting means.

  Thereby, since it can suppress that the operation | movement contrary to an operating condition is performed, there exists an effect that a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means can be moved suitably.

  The gaming machine K1 includes an effect executing means for executing a predetermined movable effect, wherein the first movable means and the second movable means are movable at least in the predetermined movable effect. A gaming machine K2.

  According to the gaming machine K2, a predetermined movable effect is executed by the effect execution means. The first movable means and the second movable means are moved at least in a predetermined movable effect.

  Thereby, the 1st movable means and the 2nd movable means which are moved in a predetermined movable production can be operated according to operation conditions. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the operation that is contrary to the operation condition in the predetermined movable effect, it is possible to improve the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means in the predetermined movable effect. There is.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the second movable means is configured to accompany the first movable means and is configured to be movable together with the first movable means.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the second movable means is configured to accompany the first movable means and is movable together with the first movable means. There is an effect that an operation with a sense of unity can be performed with the operation of the second movable means.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a storage unit that stores a plurality of different correction data determined by the determination unit, and the first movable unit and the second unit when the operation condition is not satisfied. Information discriminating means for discriminating information necessary for establishing the operating condition based on respective movable positions with respect to the movable means, and the determining means is based on the information discriminated by the information discriminating means. The gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the correction data is determined from the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a plurality of different correction data determined by the determining unit is stored in the storage unit. When the operating condition is not satisfied, the information determining means determines information necessary to establish the operating condition based on the respective movable positions of the first movable means and the second movable means, and the information determination Based on the information determined by the means, correction data is determined from the storage means by the determining means.

  As a result, when the operating condition is not satisfied, the movable pattern can be corrected by a process with a relatively light processing load, in which correction data is determined from the storage means, so that the processing load can be reduced. There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the determination unit corrects the movable pattern of the second movable unit so that the operation satisfies the operation condition when the operation condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine K5, which determines data.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the operation condition is not satisfied, the correction data for correcting the movable pattern of the second movable means is determined by the determination means so that the operation satisfies the operation condition. Therefore, the second movable means is corrected. Thus, there is an effect that the operation quality can be improved.

  The gaming machine K5 includes period setting means for setting a charging period for confirming operation contents of the first movable setting means and the second movable setting means based on power-on of the gaming machine, and the determining means Determines the correction data for correcting the second movable pattern so that the operation condition is satisfied when the operation condition is not satisfied in the charging period, and the correction means A gaming machine K6, which corrects a movable pattern set after the insertion period ends based on the correction data determined by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K5, the following effects are produced. In other words, the period setting unit sets an insertion period for confirming the operation contents of the first movable setting unit and the second movable setting unit based on the power-on of the gaming machine, and the operation condition is satisfied in the charging period. If not, correction data for correcting the second movable pattern is determined by the determining means so that the operating condition is satisfied. Based on the determined correction data, the movable pattern set after the insertion period is corrected by the correction means.

Thereby, after the closing period is completed, it is possible to set the movable pattern corrected to the state where the operation condition is satisfied. That is, there is an effect that the first movable means and the second movable means can be moved in a state where the operation condition is satisfied during most of the time when the gaming machine is operating.
<Characteristic L group> (Move the action of one accessory to the other)
A first movable means movable within a first movable range; a second movable means different from the first movable means movable within a second movable range; the first movable means and the second movable means; And a movable control means for moving the first movable data corresponding to a predetermined first movable pattern with respect to the first movable means. 1 movable setting means, and determining means for determining movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means that is movable in the first movable pattern according to the set first movable data, A gaming machine L1 comprising: second movement setting means for setting the second movement means to move by the movement control means based on the movement data determined by the determination means.

  Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member that is variable by a motor or the like in its configuration. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can perform a wide variety of performance operations by changing a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the number of variable members is increased, it may be difficult to appropriately set the operation. In addition, some of the above-described gaming machines can change a plurality of variable members in a single effect, and can execute more various effects. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of variable members are combined and changed, the variable modes may deviate from each other, and the operation quality may deteriorate.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the first movable setting means sets the first movable data corresponding to the first movable pattern predetermined for the first movable means. Based on the set first movable data, the movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means that moves in the first movable pattern is determined by the determining means. The second movable setting means is set so that the second movable means can be moved by the movable control means based on the movable data determined by the determining means.

  Thereby, since the second movable means can be moved by an operation corresponding to the operation of the first movable means, there is an effect that the first movable means and the second movable means can be suitably moved.

  The gaming machine L1 includes an effect executing means for executing a predetermined movable effect, wherein the first movable means and the second movable means are movable at least in the predetermined movable effect. A gaming machine L2.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a predetermined movable effect is executed by the effect executing means. The first movable means and the second movable means are moved at least in a predetermined movable effect.

  Thereby, the second movable means can be moved by an operation corresponding to the operation of the first movable means in a predetermined movable effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be improved in a predetermined movable effect.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the second movable means is attached to the first movable means, and is configured to be movable together with the first movable means. .

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the second movable means is configured to accompany the first movable means and is moved together with the first movable means. There is an effect that an operation with a sense of unity can be performed with the operation of the second movable means.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the determining means is moved in the first movable pattern based on the end of the operation of the first movable means that is movable in the first movable pattern. A gaming machine L4 characterized in that it determines movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the first movable pattern is movable based on the end of the operation of the first movable means that is movable according to the first movable pattern. Since the movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means determined is determined by the determining means, it is possible to determine the movable data taking into account the operation of the series of first movable patterns. Therefore, since the second movable means can be operated in a manner more suitable for the operation of the first movable means, there is an effect that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be further improved.

  The gaming machine L4 includes period setting means for setting an initial setting period for performing an initial setting based on power-on of the gaming machine, and the first movable setting means is based on the setting of the initial setting period. A gaming machine L5 that sets the first movable data.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L4, the following effects are produced. That is, an initial setting period for performing an initial setting based on power-on for the gaming machine is set by the period setting means. Then, the first movable data is set by the first movable setting means based on the setting of the initial setting period.

  As a result, the movable data corresponding to the operation of the first movable means moved by the first movable pattern in the initial setting period can be determined. Therefore, after the initial setting period, the second movable means is moved to the first movable means. There is an effect that it can be moved by an operation corresponding to the moving means.

  In the gaming machine L5, when it is determined that the first movable means is moved by the movable determination means and the movable determination means for determining whether or not the first movable means is movable after the end of the initial setting period. Specific movement setting means for setting specific movement data corresponding to a predetermined specific movement pattern, and the determination means sets the second movement for setting an operation corresponding to the specific movement pattern. A gaming machine L6 characterized by determining movable data of means.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first moving means is moved after the initial setting period is determined by the movement determining means, and it is determined by the movement determining means that the first movable means is moved, the predetermined identification is performed. Specific movable data corresponding to the movable pattern is set by the specific movable setting means. Movable data of the second movable means for setting an operation corresponding to a specific movable pattern is determined by the determining means.

  As a result, the second movable means can be moved by an operation corresponding to a specific movable pattern, so that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the determination means includes a timing at which the operation of the first movable means at which the first movable pattern is set ends, and a timing at which the operation of the second movable means ends. The game machine L7 is characterized in that the movable data is determined so as to match.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the timing at which the operation of the first movable means having at least the first movable pattern is set and the operation of the second movable means are completed. Since the movable data is determined by the determining means so as to match the timing to perform, the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means is determined at the operation end timing which is one of the timings most noticed by the player. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the motion determination unit has a predetermined movable amount of the first movable unit that is movable in the first movable pattern according to the set first movable data. Based on the above, the gaming machine L8 is characterized in that the operation of the first movable means is discriminated.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L1 to L3, the movable amount of the first movable means that is movable in the first movable pattern according to the set first movable data becomes the predetermined movable amount. Based on the above, the operation of the first movable means is discriminated by the operation discriminating means, so that the operation of the second movable means can be made to correspond more finely to the operation of the first movable means.

  In the gaming machine L8, the determining means can move the second movable means corresponding to an operation from when the movable amount of the first movable means reaches the predetermined movable amount until the first movable pattern ends. A gaming machine L9, which determines data.

  According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L8, the second movable means corresponding to the operation from when the movable amount of the first movable means becomes a predetermined movable amount until the first movable pattern is completed. Since the movable data is determined by the determining means, the operation of the second movable means after the predetermined movable amount can be made to correspond to the operation of the first movable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L10, second movable data corresponding to a second movable pattern predetermined for the second movable means based on the first movable data set by the first movable setting means. A gaming machine L11 comprising a movable setting means for setting the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine L11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L10, the second movable means predetermined for the second movable means based on the first movable data set by the first movable setting means. Since the second movable data corresponding to the pattern is set by the movable setting unit, the second movable unit is operated with the second movable pattern before the movable amount of the first movable unit reaches the predetermined movable amount. be able to. Therefore, since it can suppress that the 2nd movable means will be in a stop state until it becomes predetermined | prescribed movable amount, there exists an effect that it can suppress making a player feel uncomfortable.

<Characteristic M group> (Lighting control of accessory LED)
A movable means having a plurality of visual recognition parts that are movable within a predetermined movable range and configured such that a light emission mode from the back side is visible from the front side, and provided on the back side of the movable means, the back side of the movable means Further, at least a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern that is movable by the movable control unit, a light-emitting unit that has a light-emitting unit that can emit light in a predetermined light-emitting manner, A movable pattern determining means that can be determined, and when the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means, the movable portion is located at a light emitting position that is a position facing the light emitting portion of the light emitting means. The light emitting unit is caused to emit light when it is located, and at least a specific light emission pattern that is turned off when the movable means is moved a predetermined amount from the light emitting position. Gaming machine M1, characterized in that it comprises a light emission controllable light emission control means.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include variable means that operates with a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can perform a wide variety of performance operations by operating a plurality of variable means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, with the diversification of the variable means, it may be difficult to suitably move each variable means in the variable means having a complicated configuration. In addition, among the conventional gaming machines described above, there are those that change the light emission mode of a light emitting device constituted by LEDs or the like in accordance with the movement of the variable means. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute an effect operation with a stronger impact by causing the light emitting device to emit light in accordance with the operation of the variable means. However, in this conventional gaming machine, there is a case where the operation of the variable means and the light emission mode of the light emitting device are deviated. In such a case, the visual quality of the rendering operation may be degraded.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine M1, the movable means is movable within a predetermined movable range. The movable means includes a plurality of visual recognition parts configured such that a light emission mode from the back side is visible from the front side. On the back side of the movable means, there is provided a light emitting means having a light emitting portion capable of emitting the visual recognition portion in a predetermined light emission mode. The movable means is moved and controlled by the movement control means, and a specific movable pattern is determined at least by the movable pattern determining means as a movable pattern moved by the movement control means. When the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining unit, the light emitting unit is caused to emit light when the movable unit is positioned at the light emitting position that is a position opposite to the light emitting unit of the light emitting unit. The light emission is controlled by at least the light emission control means with a specific light emission pattern that emits light when moved by a predetermined amount from the light emission position.

  Thereby, since it can suppress that a light emission part light-emits in the state which the visual recognition part and the light emission part shifted | deviated, the appearance quality of a movable means can be improved in the state which the light emission means light-emitted. Therefore, there is an effect that the light emitting means and the movable means can be suitably operated.

  In the gaming machine M1, the movable means is constituted by a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2, the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis. And the arrangement other than the light emission position are repeated alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be operated with a good appearance every time at a light emitting position where there is a possibility of being arranged a plurality of times.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the movable pattern determining means can determine one movable pattern from a plurality of movable patterns including at least the specific movable pattern as the movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. The light emission control means controls light emission of the light emission means with a predetermined light emission pattern different from the specific light emission pattern when the predetermined movable pattern is determined. M3.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the following effects are produced. That is, the movable pattern determining means determines one movable pattern from a plurality of movable patterns including at least a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. When the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emission means is controlled to emit light with a predetermined light emission pattern different from the specific light emission pattern.

  Thereby, since it is possible to control light emission with different light emission patterns according to the movable pattern, it is possible to change the appearance of the movable means more greatly according to the light emission pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily discriminate from which the movable pattern is moved.

  In the gaming machine M3, the predetermined movable pattern has a moving speed set faster than the specific movable pattern.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3, the predetermined movable pattern is set so that the movable speed is faster than the specific movable pattern, so that the movable pattern of the movable means can be easily determined from the movable speed. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine M3 or M4, the predetermined light emission pattern is a light emission pattern that causes the light emitting means to emit light even when the movable means is located at a position other than the light emitting position.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3 or M4, when the light emission is controlled with a predetermined light emission pattern, the light emission means emits light even when the movable means is located other than the light emission position. There is an effect that the player can more easily recognize the difference in the light emission mode of the light emitting means between the specific light emission pattern and the predetermined light emission pattern.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M5, the movable means is configured by a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis, and the visual recognition unit is on a predetermined circumference around the predetermined rotation axis. The movable means has rotational symmetry according to the number of locations of the visual recognition portion, and the light emitting portion is the same as the number of locations of the visual recognition portion. The gaming machine M6 is characterized in that it is provided in a number of places.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, the following effects are produced. That is, the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis. And the visual recognition part is provided in the multiple places at equal intervals on the predetermined periphery centering on a predetermined rotating shaft. Moreover, the movable means has rotational symmetry according to the number of locations of the visual recognition part. And the light emission part is provided in the same number of places as the number of places of a visual recognition part.

  Thereby, when the variable means is rotating, the light emitting position is set at every fixed rotation angle, so that the appearance quality before and after the specific rotation pattern becomes a fixed rotation angle can be improved.

  In the gaming machine M6, the light emission control means, as the specific light emission pattern, each time the rotating body is in the light emission position, the light emission control means is equal to or more than the number of places of the light emitting units that were emitted when the light emission position was last set. A gaming machine M7 that controls the number of the light emitting units to emit light.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M6, the following effects are produced. That is, as the specific light emission pattern, each time the rotator is in the light emission position, the light emission control means is configured so that the number of light emission parts equal to or greater than the number of light emission parts that were emitted when the rotator was in the previous light emission position is emitted. Controlled by

  Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily recognize that the movable pattern and the light emission pattern are switched according to the change in appearance.

  In any one of the gaming machines M3 to M7, the movable pattern determined by the movable pattern determining means includes a high-speed movable pattern in which a movable speed is set faster than the predetermined movable pattern, and the light emission control means The gaming machine M6 is configured to control the light emitting unit to emit light at each predetermined period when the predetermined movable pattern is shifted to the high speed movable pattern.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M3 to M7, the following effects are produced. That is, the movable pattern determined by the movable pattern determining means includes a high-speed movable pattern in which the movable speed is set faster than the predetermined movable pattern. When shifting from the predetermined movable pattern to the high-speed movable pattern, the light emitting means controls the light emitting section to emit light at predetermined intervals.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that it can be made to recognize more easily that it became a high-speed movable pattern with the period which a light emission part light-emits.

  In the gaming machine M6, the predetermined period is shorter than a period in which the movable unit in which the high-speed movable pattern is set becomes the light emission position, and is a middle period until the light emission position is moved to the next light emission position. A gaming machine M7, which is longer than the time until the point is reached.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M7, the predetermined period is shorter than the period in which the movable means in which the high-speed movable pattern is set becomes the light emitting position, and it moves from the light emitting position to the next light emitting position. Since it is configured to be longer than the time until it reaches the midpoint until the rotation, the rotation relative to the arrangement of the visual recognition part before rotation is compared with the rotation angle at which the visual recognition part moves by rotation during a predetermined period. The angle of the position where the visual recognition part adjacent on the opposite side to the direction is arranged by rotation during a predetermined period becomes smaller. That is, since the visual recognition part adjacent to the direction opposite to the rotation direction every predetermined cycle can be mistaken for the visual recognition part recognized before the predetermined period elapses, can do. Therefore, it is possible to make the appearance in which the rotation direction is changed without changing the operation of the variable means, so that it is possible to reduce the load on the variable means.

  In the gaming machine M7, the light emission control means causes the light emitting means to emit light in a third light emission pattern that causes the light emitting units to emit light in a predetermined order.

  According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M7, the following effects are produced. That is, since the light emission means emits light by the light emission control means in the third light emission pattern in which each light emitting portion emits light in a predetermined order, light can be emitted in a more interesting manner. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K6, L1 to L11, A gaming machine Z1 according to any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K6, L1 to L11, The gaming machine Z2 according to any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K6, L1 to L11, A gaming machine Z3 according to any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
810 Lighting device (light emitting means)
811a-811f Circular lighting area (light emitting part)
820 Rotating member (movable means)
821a to 821f Through-hole (viewing part)
S1552 Light emission control means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include variable means that operates with a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can perform a wide variety of performance operations by operating a plurality of variable means.

JP 2008-012194 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, with the diversification of the variable means, it may be difficult to suitably move each variable means in the variable means having a complicated configuration.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably setting the operation of the variable means.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is movable within a predetermined movable range and has a plurality of visual recognition parts configured such that the light emission mode from the back side is visible from the front side; A light emitting means provided on the back side of the movable means, and having a light emitting part capable of emitting the visual recognition part in a predetermined light emission mode from the back side of the movable means; a movable control means capable of controlling the movable means; A movable pattern determining means capable of determining at least a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern moved by the movable control means, and when the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means, the movable means is at a predetermined movable position. in response to that is movable, the light emitting unit is operated in a first aspect, in response to said movable means is a predetermined amount movable from the movable position, with the first aspect And a controllable light emission control means at least the light emitting means in a particular emission pattern for operating the light emitting portion at different second aspect.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the movable position is arranged such that at least one of the visual recognition parts faces the light emitting part of the light emitting means.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, wherein the movable means is constituted by a rotating body rotatable about a predetermined rotation axis.
A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the movable means is constituted by a rotating body that is rotatable about a predetermined rotation axis, and the plurality of visual recognition parts are: The predetermined movable pattern is provided at regular intervals on a predetermined circumference centered on the predetermined rotation axis, and the specific movable pattern rotates the rotating body at a specific period around the predetermined rotation axis. A movable position setting means that is a movable pattern and sets a position at which a rotation angle in the rotation direction of the rotating body is a predetermined first angle, starting from the previously set movable position as the movable position. The first angle is formed by a straight line connecting the one visual recognition part and the central axis, and a straight line connecting the visual recognition part adjacent to the first visual recognition part and the central axis. Less than the second angle and half of the second angle. It is greater than the angle.
In the gaming machine according to claim 5, in the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, the light emission control unit causes the light emitting unit to emit light with a predetermined specific light amount as the first aspect, As the second aspect, the light emitting means is controlled to turn off the light emitting portion.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the movable means is movable within a predetermined movable range. The movable means includes a plurality of visual recognition parts configured such that a light emission mode from the back side is visible from the front side. On the back side of the movable means, there is provided a light emitting means having a light emitting portion capable of emitting the visual recognition portion in a predetermined light emission mode. The movable means is moved and controlled by the movement control means, and a specific movable pattern is determined at least by the movable pattern determining means as a movable pattern moved by the movement control means. If the specific movable pattern determined by the moving pattern determining means, a light emitting portion in response to the movable means is movable to a predetermined movable position is operated in a first aspect, the movable means is a predetermined amount movable from the movable position As a result, the light emission is controlled at least by the light emission control means with the specific light emission pattern operated in the second mode different from the first mode .

As a result, the first mode and the second mode can be switched in conjunction with the position of the movable means, so that the visual quality of the movable means is improved when the movable means is movable in a specific movable pattern. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the operations of the light emitting means and the movable means can be set appropriately.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the movable position is arranged such that at least one of the visual recognition parts faces the light emitting part of the light emitting means. Is. Accordingly, the light emitting unit can be operated in the first mode at the position where the viewing unit and the light emitting unit are opposed, and the second mode can be operated at the position where the viewing unit and the light emitting unit are shifted. There is an effect that it can be improved .

According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the movable means is constituted by a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis. is there.

Thereby, while the movable means rotates, the movable position and the arrangement other than the movable position are alternately repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be operated with a high-quality appearance each time in a movable position where there is a possibility of being arranged a plurality of times .
According to the gaming machine of claim 4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of claim 1, the movable means is constituted by a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis, The plurality of visual recognition parts are provided at equal intervals on a predetermined circumference centered on the predetermined rotation axis, and the specific movable pattern has the rotating body centered on the predetermined rotation axis. A position where the rotation angle in the rotation direction of the rotating body is a predetermined first angle with the previously set movable position as a starting point. Movable position setting means for setting, wherein the first angle includes a straight line connecting the one visual recognition part and the central axis, a visual recognition part adjacent to the first visual recognition part, and the central axis. Less than the second angle formed by the connected straight line and the front It is an angle greater than half of the second angle.
Thereby, the visual recognition adjacent to the rotation direction opposite to the rotation direction with respect to the arrangement of the visual recognition part before the rotation compared to the rotation angle at which the visual recognition part moves by rotation between the first aspect of the previous time and the first aspect of the current time. The angle of the position where the part is arranged at the new movable position becomes smaller. That is, since the visual recognition part adjacent to the opposite side to the rotation direction can be misidentified as the visual recognition part recognized when the first aspect was set last time, the rotation direction of the movable means is set to look reverse. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the appearance of the rotation direction can be changed without changing the operation of the variable means.
According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, the light emission control means specifies the light emitting unit as the first aspect. The light emitting means is controlled so that the light emitting unit emits light and the light emitting unit is turned off as the second mode. As a result, the light emitting unit can emit light only when the predetermined movable position is reached, so that the operation of the light emitting means and the movable means can be suitably set.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a board surface and a board surface lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a board surface lower unit. (A) is a front view of a base member, a 1st out port, a 2nd out port, a lower left board member, and a lower right board member, (b) is a base member in the XVb-XVb line of Drawing 15 (a). It is sectional drawing of a lower left board member. It is a front perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a back perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a back perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an expansion-contraction production apparatus. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of an expansion-contraction production apparatus. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. It is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. It is a graph showing the distance from the reference | standard horizontal line of a projection part. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a back perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a slide operation unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a slide operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting operation unit. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a tilting operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an effect member and the 2nd drive. (A) And (b) is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (A) And (b) is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the swing angle of the effect member with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member. It is a front view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a front view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of the transmission member and torsion spring in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (A) And (b) is a front view of the transmission member and torsion spring in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a back surface perspective view of the transmission member in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a back surface perspective view of a movement contact member. (A) And (b) is a back surface perspective view of a transmission member, (c) And (d) is a top view of a transmission member. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the main body member of the production member typically. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a front view of the compound operation unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) is the fragmentary front view of the rotation arm member in 6th Embodiment, (b) is the fragmentary top view of the rotation arm member in the arrow LXIXb direction view of Fig.69 (a), (c) ) Is a partial front view of the rotating arm member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a switching device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of the tilting operation unit in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in a 1st control example, a special symbol reservation ball storage area, a special symbol reservation ball execution area, and a normal symbol reservation ball storage area. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) shows typically the content of RAM of the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed the 1st random number table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is set to ROM of the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the 1st type selection table, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed the 2nd random number table set to ROM of the main controller in the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller in the 1st control example, (b) was set in the fluctuation pattern selection table, It is the figure which showed typically the variation pattern table for jackpots, (c) is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation pattern table for deviation (normal), (d) is the fluctuation pattern for deviation (probability change). It is the figure which showed the table typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is typical about the content of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is the figure which showed typically the content of the entrance effect selection table in the 1st control example. It is the block diagram which showed typically the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the work RAM of the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is the figure which showed typically the content of the correction information table in a 1st control example. is there. It is the figure which showed the setting coordinate of the display area in a 1st control example. (A)-(c) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of power-on in the first control example. (A) to (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A in a 1st control example, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the display data table in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the transfer data table in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the drawing list | wrist in the 1st control example. It is an example of the timing chart of the fluctuation | variation display mode in the time-short game in the 1st control example. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the time shortening in a 1st control example. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the time shortening in a 1st control example. It is a timing chart in which the time effect in the first control example is set. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern reception process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production management process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the extended production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the specific time effect process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the entrance effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which shows the V interruption processing. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the special effect correction process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed round number command processing. (A) is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed notice command processing. (A) is the flowchart which showed the entrance effect command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the specific time production command processing which is done. (A) is the flowchart which showed the presentation mode change command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart showing stop command processing executed by the process. It is the flowchart which showed the error command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the presentation information correction process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) to (b) is an explanatory view of the control of the stepping motor in the first control example. (A) to (b) is a diagram showing whether or not detection by a slide position detection sensor is possible for each positional relationship between the slide position detection sensor and the light shielding plate. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a positional relationship between a tilting origin sensor and a sensor shielding unit when the effect member is at the origin position. (A) is the figure which showed the positional relationship of a tilting origin sensor and a sensor shielding part in case a production member performs a head swing operation | movement to the left direction of a front view, (b) is a figure where a production member is a front. It is the figure which showed the positional relationship of a tilt origin sensor and a sensor shielding part at the time of performing a head swing operation | movement to the visual right direction. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is typical about the content of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown in. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the operation scenario table prescribed | regulated to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the operation scenario table in a 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the included slide operation | movement table, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the tilting operation table contained in the operation scenario table in a 2nd control example. is there. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the initial stage operation table contained in the operation | movement scenario table in a 2nd control example, (b) is in ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the prescription | regulation of the prescription | regulation swing table. It is the figure which showed the correspondence of the number of operation steps of the slide operation | movement in the 2nd control example, and the swingable direction of an effect member. It is the figure which showed the correspondence of the number of operation steps of the swing operation | movement in the 2nd control example, and the number of operation steps of a slide operation | movement. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the origin return process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the execution command processing which is executed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the initial stage operation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the initial stage operation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the additional operation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the inclination direction setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the abnormality detection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the slide operation | movement process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) is typical about the content of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the timing production | presentation selection table prescribed | regulated to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the pressing-down period table prescribed | regulated to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the table for early stage difficulty level 3 contained in the pressing period table in a 3rd control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the sub display device during the timing effect, and (b) shows an example of the display contents when the player has successfully pressed the frame button in the timing effect. It is a figure. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content when a player fails to press a frame button in a timing production, (b) is a case where the production aspect of high difficulty is selected as a timing production. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the sub display apparatus in. (A) is the figure which showed the display content of the sub-display apparatus when a player achieved norm in a timing effect, (b) is the sub in the case where a player has not achieved norm in a timing effect. It is the figure which showed the display content of the display apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the change of the aspect of the fluctuation production in which the timing production in the 3rd control example was set. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the timing effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the middle panel setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the end stage setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the alerting | reporting mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary lighting unit in the fourth control example, and (b) is a side view of the rotary lighting unit in the fourth control example. (A)-(c) is the figure which illustrated the lighting state in which the visual quality deteriorates in the case of a 4th control example, when a rotating member is a low-speed rotation state. (A)-(c) is the figure which illustrated the lighting state with a good appearance quality in the case of a 4th control example, when a rotation member is a low-speed rotation state. (A)-(e) is the figure which showed an example of the lighting control in case the rotation member is a high-speed rotation state in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the lighting control process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of low speed performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the rotational speed identification process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of the acceleration performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of high speed performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine when the rotation lighting unit is in the retracted position in the fourth control example. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine when the rotation lighting unit is in the extended position in the fourth control example.

<First Embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 57, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first prize opening 64, a second prize opening 640, a first variable prize winning device 65, a second variable prize winning device 650, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, 13 is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG. The first variable winning device 65 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base member 310 of the board surface lower unit 300 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), jackpot B (short jackpot at 16R time), and jackpot C (short and short jackpot when 2R probability variation is present) are provided. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “16R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 16 rounds and becomes a short time state of a normal symbol. “Short-term jackpot with probability variation” is a jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol after a jackpot of two rounds, but the short-time state of a normal symbol is not granted. In addition, “16R short-time jackpot” is a state in which the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 16 rounds and then shifts to a low probability state of a special symbol, and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment) It is a big hit.

  In addition, the “high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol” indicates a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, a so-called probability variation state (probability variation state), in other words, a special gaming state. It is the state of the game that is easy to shift to. The high probability state (probability variation state) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which a hit probability of a normal symbol (second symbol) described later is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “special symbol low probability state” means a state where the probability variation state is not established, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state. The normal symbol time-short state (short time medium) means a game state in which the normal symbol (second symbol) is more likely to win and the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, the normal state of the pachinko machine 10 is a state of a game that is neither in the probability state of the special symbol nor in the short-time state of the normal symbol (the special symbol jackpot probability or the normal symbol (second symbol) is neither up nor hit probability) ).

  During the short time state of the normal symbol, not only the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is changed. A long opening time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the short-time state, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, in the short time state of the normal symbol, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 640a opens rather than usual. In addition, the normal symbol (second symbol) does not change the probability of hitting the normal symbol during the short time state of the normal symbol, and the electric combination is recovered at the time and once the electric combination 640a attached to the second winning prize opening 640 is opened. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count that the thing 640a opens. In addition, during the short time state of the normal symbol, the normal time (the first symbol) is not used for the time that the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released per time. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of 2 symbols) is increased as compared with the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays a normal symbol (second symbol) in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball of the through gate 67 The 2nd symbol display apparatus (not shown) comprised by these is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 12-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set to be shorter during the probability change or the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the short time state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal time. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the short-time state.

  It should be noted that the ball wins the second prize opening 640 during the time-shortening state by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning during the time-shortening state or increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per time When it is in the easy state, the time required for the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if the time required to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set shorter in the normal symbol than in the normal state in the short-time state, the normal symbol hit probability is made constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) winning lottery is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the first winning port 64 does not have the electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and the ball is in a state where the ball can always be won. On the other hand, the second winning opening 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a, and the electric accessory 640a is difficult to be opened in a normal time (when the time is not short), and a game ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening 640. Is in a difficult state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, so the first winning opening 64 without the electric winning combination 640a is present. Toward the left of the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball passes through the left side (so-called “left-handed”). It is advantageous for the player to aim to become.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory 640a. It is advantageous for the player to set a state and obtain a lot of jackpot lottery opportunities by winning at the second winning opening 640 and aiming to win the jackpot.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning port 64, and a first specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A second variable prize-winning device 650 is disposed on the left side of the variable display device 80, and the second variable prize-winning device 650 is formed in a circular shape having the same size as the other prize-winning holes 63, 64, 640 in the substantially central portion thereof. A specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning openings 65a and 650a that are normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning ports 65a and 650a are closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning ports 65a, 650a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid 65b (for opening and closing rightward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis). FIG. 15 shows only the outer shape). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid 65b is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the front side, and an open state in which the ball is likely to win the first specific winning opening 65a is temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

  Specifically, the second variable prize-winning device 650 is opened / closed to the left by using a front-opening triangular opening / closing plate disposed on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a and the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And a large opening solenoid (not shown). The second specific winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the small opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open / close plate to the left, and the ball is temporarily formed in an open state in which it is easy to win the second specific winning port 650a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the state.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to cause the second variable prize-winning device 650 to win a ball by making a left strike, eliminating the troublesomeness of switching between left strike and right strike each time the gaming state changes. can do.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are set for a predetermined time. A large opening provided separately from the specific winning ports 65a and 650a is triggered for a predetermined time when the ball wins into the specific winning ports 65a and 650a while the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are opened. A gaming state that is released a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, the number of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of plural (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, Not only on the left side of the variable display device 80, for example, it may be below the first winning port 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 314 and a second out port 315. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out port 314 or the second out port 315 (not shown). Guided to the road. The first out port 314 is disposed on the lower left side of the first winning port 64, while the second out port 315 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning port 64. That is, the second out port 315 is disposed on the opposite side of the first out port 314 with the first winning port 64 interposed therebetween.

  Therefore, a sphere that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end (the inner rail 61 or the outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side (right side in FIG. 2) in front of the first winning port 64 is the inner rail 61. Alternatively, it flows down along the inclination of the outer edge member 73 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second out port 315, while at the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area on the left side of the first winning port 64 in front view. The reached ball flows down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 314.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 102), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 100) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a vertical drive motor 431, an opening / closing drive motor 466, and other drive motors 531, 561, 631, 661, and 751.

  Here, various drive motors (vertical drive motor 431, open / close drive motor 466, and other drive motors 531, 561, 631, 661, 751) will be described. These various drive motors are composed of, for example, known stepping motors, and a plurality of these drive motors are provided in association with each accessory in order to operate each accessory mounted on the pachinko machine 10. These various drive motors are driven by corresponding motor control ICs (motor drivers). Specifically, a command including at least the number of rotation steps, the rotation direction (positive direction or negative direction), and the rotation speed from the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 to the motor control IC (motor driver). Is output. The control IC (motor driver) drives the corresponding drive motors based on the output command. The motor control IC (motor driver) may be a single IC that can set the operation for a plurality of drive motors, or a plurality of motor control ICs (motor drivers) may be provided. Alternatively, the drive motors corresponding to the different actors may be operated. When a motor control IC (motor driver) that can set the operation for a plurality of drive motors is adopted, information for specifying the type of the drive motor is included in the command for transmitting the number of rotation steps and the like. And output it.

  Here, the operation of the drive motor will be described using the vertical drive motor 431 as an example. When the control IC (motor driver) operates the vertical drive motor 431 based on the set command, the operation is performed on the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 each time the operation of one step is performed. A signal (execution signal) for notifying that it has been made is output. With this execution signal, the MPU 221 can grasp the progress of the set operation. The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a step counter (not shown). This step counter is provided for each accessory, and is a counter that counts how many steps each accessory has operated from the origin (retreat) position. That is, the origin (retreat) position is set to a 0 step position, and the value is updated by 1 each time an execution signal is received from the control IC. More specifically, the value is incremented by 1 each time the accessory moves one step in the direction (positive direction) from the origin (retreat) position to the end point (extension) position. Further, the value is subtracted by 1 every time one step operation is performed in the direction (negative direction) from the end point (extension) position to the origin (retraction) position. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the operation position of each accessory based on the value of the step counter.

  Here, the origin position refers to a specific arrangement that is set for each accessory, and is a position that shifts in origin return based on power-on. Specifically, each accessory is provided with an origin sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not it is the origin position. If the origin sensor is not on when the power is turned on, the origin sensor is turned on. The accessory is varied until it is detected (that is, various drive motors are driven). This origin position becomes the reference position for the operation of each accessory. Note that the above-described step counter is reset to 0 when the accessory reaches the origin position by the origin return (that is, when the origin sensor detects ON). As described above, the value of the step counter is updated one by one based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

  Next, an example of control of various drive motors (here, the vertical drive motor 431) by the motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. In order to make the explanation easy to understand, a stepping motor that rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, rotates once in four steps) will be described as an example. However, an actual vertical drive motor 431 has one step. The rotation angle can be set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once in one step.

  First, FIG. 135 (a) is a diagram showing an outline of a vertical drive motor 431 composed of a stepping motor. The vertical drive motor 431 is configured such that a portion corresponding to the excitation control data is excited by sending excitation control data from the sound lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC. Specifically, excitation is performed by the motor control IC by excitation control data constituted by a 4-digit binary number corresponding to “A, B, C, D” shown in FIG. Specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part of the vertical drive motor 431 (that is, any one of A, B, C, and D) is “1”, the excitation is performed and the excitation control data is “0”. If so, it is not excited. For example, if the excitation control data is “1100”, A and B are excited, and C and D are not excited. This excitation control data is defined in an excitation table (see FIG. 135 (b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 has an excitation counter used for selecting and setting one excitation control data from a plurality of excitation control data defined in the excitation table (see FIG. 135 (b)). Is provided. This excitation counter can be updated one by one in the positive direction starting from “0”, and when the value of the excitation counter becomes “3”, the value returns to “0” when the value is updated. It has become. Each time this excitation counter value is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, excitation of each part based on the excitation control data is immediately performed (that is, the vertical drive motor 431 operates without a time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). Furthermore, the excitation counter can also be updated in the negative direction. That is, the value can be updated in the order of “0” → “3” → “2” → “1” → “0” starting from “0”. In the case of updating in the negative direction, the rotation direction of the vertical drive motor 431 is opposite to that in the case of updating in the positive direction. The direction in which the excitation counter is updated (whether the direction is positive or negative) and the update frequency of the excitation counter are determined in advance for each type of accessory for which an operation is set. Note that the maximum value of the excitation counter changes according to the number of steps of the drive motor. Specifically, for example, in the case of a drive motor that rotates once in one step (that is, it takes 360 steps for one rotation of the motor), the excitation counter is updated in the range of “0” to “359”. It becomes a loop counter.

  Next, a specific example of excitation control data for exciting each part of the vertical drive motor 431 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 (b) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between an excitation table defining excitation control data and the state of the vertical drive motor 431 excited based on the excitation control data defined in the excitation table. As shown in FIG. 135 (b), excitation control data is defined for each excitation counter value in the excitation table.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), excitation control of “1100, 0110, 0011, 1001” in the order of excitation counters “0” to “3” as sequence data corresponding to the vertical drive motor 431. Each data is defined. Further, when “1100” that is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “0” is set, the positions of A and B of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited. Further, when “0110” which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “1” is set, the positions of B and C of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, so the excitation counter value is “0”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from this state. In addition, when “0011” that is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “2” is set, the positions of C and D of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, and the excitation counter value is “1”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise. When “1001”, which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “3”, is set, the positions A and D of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, so the excitation counter value is “2”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from this state. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 135, every time the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 in the positive direction, the vertical drive motor 431 rotates 90 degrees clockwise. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter is updated in the negative direction, the vertical drive motor 431 rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise.

  As described above, the control of the vertical drive motor 431 has been described with a simplified operation model. However, in the vertical drive motor 431 actually used in the present embodiment, the excitation counter is set to 1 every step (ie, the excitation counter is 1). It can be rotated by 1 degree (every update). That is, when changing each accessory, the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 as many times as the number of steps to be changed, and the excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter is set every time the excitation counter is updated. Each accessory can be varied accurately.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by setting a command to the motor driver, various drive motors can be driven at the rotation speed, the rotation direction, and the number of rotation steps specified by the command. Therefore, it is possible to realize a variety of performance operations using an accessory.

  Note that a unique operation pattern corresponding to the production is set for each accessory. This operation pattern defines a command to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) described above for each elapsed time.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the various drive motors have been operated is determined based on the number of steps in which the various drive motors are operated based on a command set for the motor driver. That is, based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of times the execution signal received from the motor driver is received each time one step of operation is set by the motor driver, has the operation set for each drive motor been completed? It is determined whether or not, but is not limited to this. For example, an elapsed time after setting a command for operating various drive motors may be measured, and it may be configured to determine whether the operation of the various drive motors has been completed based on the elapsed time. .

  Here, control of the vertical drive motor 431 and the open / close drive motor 466 controlled in cooperation with each other in the present embodiment will be described. Although details will be described in a first control example described later, in this embodiment, the vertical motion unit device (falling material) 400 is used as an effect (falling material scenario) in which the vertical motion unit device (falling material) 400 is movable. An effect is provided in which the lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved in the front view downward direction (falling direction) by the drive of the vertical drive motor 431. In the effect (falling combination scenario), after the lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved in the front downward direction (falling direction), the door member 470 is opened by the opening / closing drive motor 466, and the opening is performed. Production that is not done is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with an opening / closing drive motor 466 for opening and closing the door member 470 when the effect of opening the door member 470 is executed in the effect (falling combination scenario). On the other hand, control (energization stop control) is performed so that excitation for all positions A to D is turned off (see S1706 in FIG. 108). When the excitation for all positions is OFF, the static torque (so-called detent torque) of the opening / closing drive motor 466, that is, the torque for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is minimum. In this case, when the vertical drive motor 431 is driven and the slide member 450 is moved in the dropping direction, and the movement is finished, an inertial force downward in front view is generated on the door member 470.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the above-described torque for maintaining the door member 470 in a closed state (static torque) is configured to be smaller than the inertial force generated in the door member 470. Accordingly, when the slide member 450 is moved in the front downward direction (falling direction) without driving the opening / closing drive motor 466 to open the door member 470, the inertial force acting on the door member 470 causes the door to move. The member 470 can be opened. That is, when the door member 470 has finished moving in the front view downward direction together with the slide member 450 (that is, when the arm member 440 and the lens member 460 are disposed at the extended position), the door member 470 is viewed from the front view. Directional inertia force (that is, force that continues to move downward in the front view) acts to open the door member 470. Therefore, power consumption for driving the opening / closing motor 466 can be reduced.

  If the inertial force generated in the door member 470 due to the movement of the slide member 450 is not sufficient to open the door member 470, the opening / closing drive motor 466 may be driven to open. In this case, by using the inertial force generated in the door member 470 as the slide member 450 moves, the driving torque of the opening / closing drive motor 466 can be reduced, thereby reducing power consumption and opening / closing drive motor. The size of 466 can be reduced.

  Further, the case where the door member 470 is opened by driving the opening / closing motor 466 and the case where the door member 470 is opened without driving the opening / closing motor 466 may be switched according to the effect pattern. For example, when performing an effect pattern with a high degree of expectation, the door motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 in order to reliably open the door member 470, while opening and closing is performed when an effect pattern with a low degree of expectation is performed. The door member 470 may be opened without driving the motor 466 for use. Thereby, the malfunction that the door member 470 is not open | released can be suppressed in spite of a high expectation production pattern.

  Further, when the vertical drive motor 431 is driven and the slide member 450 is not movable in the dropping direction, that is, when the inertia force does not act on the door member 470, the torque for maintaining the door member 470 in a closed state (static torque) ) Is configured to have a torque sufficient to maintain the door member 470 in the closed state. For this reason, it is not necessary to excite the opening / closing drive motor 466 and maintain the door member 470 in the closed state even during a period when the falling combination scenario is not executed, and power consumption can be reduced. In addition, when the torque required to maintain the door member 470 in the closed state (static torque) is insufficient for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state, for example, a magnet is applied to the distal end portion of the door member 470. By providing, you may comprise so that the torque required in order to maintain the door member 470 in a closed state may decrease.

  On the other hand, when an effect in which the door member 470 is not opened is performed as an effect (falling combination scenario), excitation control is performed so that the opening / closing drive motor 466 for opening and closing the door member does not rotate. Specifically, the opening / closing drive motor 466 is stopped by continuing to excite the corresponding part (A to D) in the excitation table (FIG. 135B) based on the current excitation counter for a certain period of time. Torque to maintain the position (so-called holding torque) is generated, and the door member 470 is maintained in the closed state, whereby the slide member 450 is produced despite the effect that the door member 470 is not opened. It is possible to reliably prevent (suppress) the door member 470 from being opened by the momentum (inertia force) when the is moved in the dropping direction.

  In addition, when the opening / closing control of the door member 470 described above does not match the opening / closing state of the door member 470 controlled by the opening / closing control, an effect to be executed thereafter may be changed.

  Specifically, when an effect based on a dropped actor scenario in which the door member 470 is opened is performed, the opening / closing drive motor 466 is controlled to stop energization, and then the door member 470 is opened, The lens member 460 located on the back side of the door member 470 becomes visible. Then, the player can visually recognize the characters “Gekiatsu” displayed on the third symbol display device 81 through the lens member 460. By visually recognizing the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the lens member 460, the display is enlarged and displayed, and the player can feel the display more impressively.

  On the other hand, when the opening / closing drive motor 466 has been controlled to stop energization, but the door member 470 has not been opened, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is displayed with the letters “Gekiatsu”. Even though the door member 470 is opened and the lens member 460 can be visually recognized, an impression that a problem has occurred that the door member 470 is not opened is given. Therefore, in the production, the opening / closing drive motor 466 is controlled to stop energization, but the door member 470 is detected not to be opened by an origin sensor or the like that can detect the state. Thereafter, the effect is changed so that the characters “Gekiatsu” are not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, even if the door member 470 is not opened, the characters “Gekiatsu” are not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can recognize that the effect that the door member 470 is not opened is executed. It is possible to avoid giving the impression that the above-mentioned problem has occurred. In this case, a specific LED may be lit or notified to the hall computer through an external output terminal to notify the employee that the problem has occurred.

  Further, as a scenario in which the lens member 460 and the door member 470 of the vertical movement unit device (falling object) 400 are dropped, a scenario in which the lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved from a retracted position to a protruding position in one operation, and a plurality of operations (for example, 2 And a scenario for moving from the retracted position to the overhanging position. As a result, even if the door member 470 is not opened after the opening / closing drive motor 466 is controlled to stop energization, even if the door member 470 is opened by the second operation, By the operation, the door member 470 can be felt as an effect of moving from the retracted position to the extended position, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  Further, the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is changed by changing the driving speed of the vertical drive motor 431 between the falling combination scenario in which the door member 470 is opened and the falling combination scenario in which the door member 470 is not opened. You may comprise as follows. Specifically, in a falling combination scenario where the door member 470 is opened, the driving speed of the vertical drive motor 431 is increased so that the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is increased, while the door member 470 is opened. In the scenario where the falling combination is not performed, the driving speed of the vertical drive motor 431 is decreased so that the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is reduced. Thereby, opening and closing of the door member 470 can be controlled with high accuracy. It is not limited to changing the driving speed of the vertical drive motor 431 according to the scenario of the falling combination. For example, in the same falling combination scenario, the movement is made upward and the movement downward. The drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 may be changed.

  Further, the case where the door member 470 is opened by driving the opening / closing motor 466 and the case where the door member 470 is opened without driving the opening / closing motor 466 may be switched according to the effect pattern. For example, when performing an effect pattern with a high degree of expectation, the door motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 in order to reliably open the door member 470, while opening and closing is performed when an effect pattern with a low degree of expectation is performed. The door member 470 is opened without driving the motor 466. Thereby, the malfunction that the door member 470 is not open | released can be suppressed in spite of a high expectation production pattern.

  An RTC (real time clock) 292 is connected to the input / output port 225 in the present embodiment. The RTC 292 is used as a time measuring means for measuring time, and is provided with a dedicated internal power source (in this embodiment, a battery), so it can keep time even when no power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. Can continue. Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, it is possible to obtain the same time information in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 by setting the same time (for example, current time) in the time measuring means and manufacturing the pachinko machine 10. .

  By configuring in this way, in addition to the normal performance, regardless of the game situation of each pachinko machine 10, the performance (time) of a special mode according to the elapsed time periodically (5 minutes every hour) Production) can be executed synchronously by a plurality of pachinko machines 10. Further, during a specific time (every minute elapsed from the start of the time effect) in a period (hereinafter referred to as a time effect period) in which this time effect is executed (displayed), the specific time effect suggesting the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Is executed. Specifically, the specific time production (countdown production) is a total of 4 countdown characters ("3", "2", "1", "0"), one character at a time for 3 seconds each (12 seconds in total) After being displayed, a character image (such as a girl's image) is displayed for 8 seconds in total for 20 seconds, and a display (effect) mode is set according to the elapsed time from the start of the effect. For example, a display (effect) mode in which “3” is displayed as the countdown character at the start time of the effect (at the time when 0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect) is set. In addition, a display (production) mode in which “1” is displayed as a countdown character is set when 6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production. In this specific time effect (countdown effect), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state and not in a short time state (a so-called latent probabilistic state), a countdown character (“3, 2, 1 ... ") is displayed in red (if not in the latent probability changing state, it is displayed in black). Details will be specifically described in the first control example.

  Here, a state in which the gaming state is a probabilistic state and is not a short-time state (a so-called latent probability varying state) is a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, and a state of a game that is easy to shift to the special gaming state (that is, gaming This is an advantageous state for a person. On the other hand, since the latent probability changing state is not a short-time state, the normal symbol hit probability is the same as the normal state, and as described above, when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning prize opening 640 is in the closed state In many cases, it is difficult to win the second prize opening 640. In this case, as in the normal state, the ball is fired toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory 640a so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”). ) It is more advantageous for the player to aim at winning big wins by obtaining many opportunities for winning big wins by winning at the first winning opening 64. In this way, the latent probability changing state is the same operation (gaming method) as the normal state except that the probability of being a big hit as the internal state of the pachinko machine 10 is up, so that the player has the current gaming state It is difficult to determine whether it is a normal state or a latent probability changing state. Although the details will be described later, in the latent probability changing state, the same effect as in the normal state is selected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is difficult to determine whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability changing state from the displayed effect.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the countdown character (“3, 2, 1,...”) That is displayed is usually displayed in the specific time effect that is executed when the latent probability change state is present in the time effect period. It is displayed in a different color (red) from the state. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the gaming state is a latent probability changing state that is advantageous for the player in the specific time effect. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the contents of the specific time effect, and to improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, in order to improve the time measurement accuracy by the time measurement means (RTC), a correction means (such as a GPS or a radio timepiece) for correcting time information from the outside may be provided.

  Further, every time power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started up), the time information is corrected by a correction means for correcting the time information from the outside (for example, a GPS or a radio clock). Also good. Thereby, the time information by the time measuring means can be updated every time power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started up) without providing a dedicated internal power supply (battery in this embodiment). In addition, it is possible to reduce manufacturing costs and maintenance costs (such as replacement costs due to deterioration of the internal power supply) of the time measuring means. The correction of the time information by the correction means is not limited to every time power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started up), but may be executed periodically (for example, every hour).

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  Here, the display content displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 by the display control apparatus 114 is demonstrated. The third symbol is composed of the main symbols of the numbers “0” to “9”. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of special symbols performed by the main controller 110 described later is a big win, the variation display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured to generate a jackpot after it is over. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the special symbol lottery result is “big hit A” or “big hit C”, a variable display is displayed in which the main symbols of “1, 3, 4, 7, 9”, which are odd numbers, are aligned and stopped. Is called. Further, if “big hit B”, the variable display in which the main symbols of “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” which are even numbers are aligned is performed.

  The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts vertically, the upper 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and the lower third is the notice effect. The sub display area Ds displays the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The approximate center of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 (reserved balls), and the small area Ds2 is The area for displaying the notice effect image, and the small area Ds3 is the area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the second winning opening 640. It is.

  On the actual display screen, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbols displayed at the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbol are displayed so as to be visible, so a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub display area Ds, one “●” symbol is displayed for one reserved ball, and the reserved symbols corresponding to up to four reserved balls for each of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are displayed. Is displayed. That is, a maximum of eight reserved symbols are displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In the present embodiment, the same reserved symbol (design) is used for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, but this is not restrictive. The symbol 2 may be configured to be displayed as a white square symbol).

  Thereby, the reserved balls of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640, that is, the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be displayed easily. In addition, since the display mode of the holding ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is displayed differently depending on the type of the normal symbol, the player can easily determine that the holding ball has been generated for a long time. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 include not only the above-described main symbols, reserved symbols, etc., but also a notice display such as a character display or a character, A display of the number of fluctuations is displayed as appropriate. In addition, when the reserved symbol is not displayed, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds3, the reserved ball number is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the reserved ball number. You may make it display in the aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern) which changes only by the part. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Further, a sub display device 690 is connected to the display control device 114. The sub display device 690 is a display device (for example, a liquid crystal panel) having a resolution different from that of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, the resolution of the third symbol display device 81 is (horizontal 800 pixels (pixels) × vertical 600 pixels (pixels)), and the resolution of the sub display device 690 is (horizontal 400 pixels (pixels) × vertical). 300 pixels (pixels)) (see FIG. 82). The resolutions of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 may be different from those described above, and the resolution of the sub display device 690 and the third symbol display device 81 are the same resolution. Alternatively, the resolution of the sub display device 690 may be higher than that of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the display method that can be adopted as the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 is not limited to the method using the liquid crystal panel, and any type of display (for example, PDP method, CRT method, organic display) EL method, MEMS shutter method, etc.) may be employed.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 81, but the display control device 114 in this embodiment is different from the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. Display control is performed using one piece of image data including images to be displayed (image data with a resolution of 1200 pixels (pixels) × 600 pixels (pixels) in the present embodiment). Among the image data, image data of a portion corresponding to the resolution of the third symbol display device 81 (region of 800 pixels (pixels) × 600 pixels (pixels) in width) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image data (region of 400 pixels (pixels) × 300 pixels (pixels) in the horizontal direction) corresponding to the resolution of the sub display device 690 in the remaining portion is displayed on the sub display device 690. Note that the remaining data (region of 400 pixels (pixels) × 300 pixels (pixels) in length) is unused.

  This makes it easy to synchronize the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, and the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 are shifted. Can be suppressed.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, a housing structure for the units 300 to 700 in the back case 210 will be described.

  FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 as viewed from the front. FIG. 7 illustrates a state where the composite operation unit 500 is mounted on the back case 210.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 200 is opened on one side (the front side in FIG. 6) from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 211a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 thereof. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The operation unit 200 includes a vertical operation unit 400, a composite operation unit 500, a tilt operation unit 600, and a slide operation unit 700 that are housed in the internal space of the back case 210.

  Specifically, the composite operation unit 500 is disposed at the upper right portion of the region formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210 (see FIG. 7). In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700 are disposed below the region formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210. In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the vertical operation unit 400 is disposed on the front side of the composite operation unit 500 in a stacked state and accommodated in the back case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the combined operation unit 500) is disposed in a stacked state in which another operation unit (for example, the vertical operation unit 400) is superimposed on the front side. Therefore, the predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit in the front view.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the player can visually recognize the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13, a predetermined operation unit is provided. It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize only the necessary part and to shield the other part from the player by another operation unit. Thereby, since it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, an outline of operation modes of the vertical motion unit 400, the composite motion unit 500, the tilt motion unit 600 and the slide motion unit 700 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 are appropriately referred to.

  8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 8 shows a state in which the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) of the vertical operation unit 400 is arranged at the extended position, and in FIG. 9, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 26) of the combined operation unit 500 shows the extended state. FIG. 10 shows the state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the substantially center in the width direction.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the vertical movement unit 400 moves the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 440 is retracted above the opening 211a of the back case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 440 is lowered, and the lens member 460 (see FIG. 18) is in the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (ie, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). ).

  As shown in FIG. 9, the composite operation unit 500 is arranged at a projecting position where the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 22) projects downward, and the front plate member 546 is located at the center of the opening 211 a of the back case 210 (that is, The extended state disposed on the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and the revolving position in which the rotating arm member 550 is retreated upward, and the front plate member 546 of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 A reduced state (see FIG. 5) retracted upward can be formed. In the contracted state shown in FIG. 5, the front plate member 546 is retracted above the opening 211a of the back case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 10, the tilting operation unit 600 is configured such that the support member 720 (see FIG. 47) of the slide operation unit 700 is slid left and right, and the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhang shown in FIG. It is possible to move between positions. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the tilting operation unit 600 is retracted to the right outside the opening 211a of the back case 210 and is visually recognized by the player inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhang position shown in FIG. 10, the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

  FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 46) are opened and the internal sub display device 690 is visually recognized. That is, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the state of FIG. 10, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) visually recognized through the opening 211a and the sub display inside the tilting operation unit 600 are displayed. The player can visually recognize both the effect displayed on the device 690.

  Each of these operation units 400 to 700 is formed so as to be able to operate independently, and as described above, the operation units 400 to 700 are arranged in a stacked state (stacked). Those having different layers may be operated at the same time even if the operating member projects inward from the opening 211a of the back case 210. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 8 to FIG. 10, the operation units 400 to 700 are not only operated individually but also can be combined with each other, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 11, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the combined operation unit 500 is in the extended state, the arm member 440 and the lens member 460 of the vertical operation unit 400 are disposed at the extended position, and the door member 470. Is formed in an open state.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the front plate member 546 of the composite operation unit 500 is visually recognized through the lens member 460 of the vertical operation unit 400. Since the lens member 460 is subjected to magnifying lens processing, as will be described later, the front plate member 546 is enlarged.

  That is, from the state shown in FIG. 11, the rotary plate 520 (see FIG. 24) of the combined operation unit 500 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24), and the front plate member 546 is moved up and down. When the front plate member 546 is moved to a position away from the lens member 470 in front view (see FIG. 39), the front plate member 546 is visually recognized in a normal size. Thereby, the state in which the front plate member 546 is visually recognized in a normal size and the state in which the front plate member 546 is enlarged (see FIG. 11) can be switched, and the production effect can be improved.

  FIG. 12 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 12, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the combined operation unit 500 is in the extended state, the tilting operation unit 600 is placed in the retracted position and in the tilted state, and the tilting operation unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are placed. A state immediately before the contact is illustrated. When the tilting operation unit 600 is further tilted, the tilting operation unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are brought into contact with each other. In this case, by swinging the composite operation unit 500 clockwise in front view (see FIG. 39), it is possible to produce an effect that makes it appear as if force is applied from the tilt operation unit 600 to the composite operation unit 500. (The operations of the units can be linked to create a more complicated performance). Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  Next, the panel surface lower unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface 13 and the board surface lower unit 300. As shown in FIG. 13, a receiving opening 13 a that is opened along the lower edge of the inner rail 61 and through which the board surface lower unit 300 is inserted is formed in the lower part of the game board 13.

  FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the board surface lower unit 300. As shown in FIG. 14, the board surface lower unit 300 includes a base member 310 that is fitted and fixed in the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13, and a ball that is disposed on the lower left side of the base member 310 when viewed from the front. A lower left plate member 320 for guiding to 314, a lower right plate member 330 for guiding a sphere to the second out port 315 disposed at the lower right of the base member 310 when viewed from the front, and a lower left plate fixedly fastened to the base member 310 from the front. The member 320 and the lower right plate member 330 mainly include a front lid member 340 that is pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 343.

  The base member 310 has a plate-like main body 311 that is substantially the same shape as the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13 and has a slightly smaller cross-sectional shape than the receiving opening 13a, and a front side of the main body 311. The decorative front plate portion 312 formed in a thin plate shape in a covering manner, the movable effect member 313 attached to the substantially central portion in the width direction of the decorative front plate portion 312, and the left side of the movable effect member 313 in front view. A first out port 314 that is a rectangular hole, and a second out port 315 that is a rectangular hole formed on the right side of the movable effect member 313 when viewed from the front.

  The movable effect member 313 includes a rotation effect member 313a that is disposed at the center lower edge in the width direction of the game board 13 and is rotated by a driving device (not shown). Here, when the out port is disposed at the lower center edge of the game board 13 in the width direction, the movable effect member 313 cannot be disposed at the lower center edge of the game board 13 in the width direction. In the present embodiment, the first outlet 314 and the second outlet 315 are disposed at positions spaced left and right from the center of the game board 13 without arranging the outlet at the center lower edge in the width direction of the game board 13. Thereby, the space which arrange | positions the movable production | presentation member 313 in the width direction center lower edge of the game board 13 is securable.

  With reference to FIG. 15, the shape of the 1st out port 314, the 2nd out port 315, the lower left board member 320, and the lower right board member 330 is demonstrated. FIG. 15A is a front view of the base member 310, the first out port 314, the second out port 315, the lower left plate member 320, and the lower right plate member 330, and FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the base member 310 and the lower left plate member 320 taken along line XVb-XVb. In FIG. 15A, the outer shape of the front lid member 340 fastened and fixed to the base member 310 and the nail formed above the first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are illustrated.

  The first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are openings through which balls are discharged from the game area. Compared to the first out port 314, the second out port 315 has a shorter length in the width direction. The reason will be described later. In addition, a guide rib 315a extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the upper inner surface of the second out port 315. By the guide rib 315a, the sphere flowing into the second out port 315 splashes high, and the resistance applied to the sphere when colliding with the upper bottom surface of the second out port 315 can be suppressed. Moreover, the flow of the sphere discharged from the second out port 315 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction, and variations in the direction of the discharged sphere can be suppressed.

  Further, a buffer rib 322 of the lower left plate member 320 described later is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 13) (see FIG. 15A). Thereby, also in the present embodiment in which the vertical width of the game area increases toward the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the effect of suppressing the rebound of the ball falling on the lower left plate member 320 is not impaired. That is, the closer to the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the higher the falling height of the ball, so that the impact when the dropped ball collides with the lower left plate member 320 may increase. On the other hand, since the buffer rib 322 is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the cushion rib 322 is bent closer to the center in the width direction of the game board 13, so that the cushioning effect is reduced. The degree can be increased.

  Here, the relationship between the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 and the landing frequency of the falling sphere will be described. For example, if the falling height of a sphere landing on the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is high, but the frequency of the sphere reaching the position is extremely low, obstacles to the discharge of other spheres without bothering the bounce of the sphere. It may not be. In this case, if the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is increased, the space of the game area is unnecessarily suppressed. Therefore, it is preferable that the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is set not only by the drop height of the sphere, but also by the relationship between the drop height and the frequency at which the sphere lands at that position.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the sphere flowing down above the buffer ribs 322 and 332 starts to flow along paths c1 and c2, and then reaches a landing area z0 to z4 via a plurality of branches b1 to b10. In the following description, the probability that the sphere will flow down is equal (1/2) between the paths c1 and c2, and the probability of branching left and right at the branches b1 to b10 is equal to the left and right (1/2). Will be explained. It is assumed that the sphere never flows down from the upper right.

  The probability that a sphere will reach the landing area z0 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z0, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b5 and reach the path c11. It can be considered that the branch b5 is reached from the route c1 via the branch b1 and the route c2 is reached. Therefore, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c11 and the sphere reaches the landing area z0 is the probability of the sphere flowing down from the path c1 1/8 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 2), Since it is expressed by the sum of the probability of a sphere flowing down from the path c2 and 1/4 (= 1/2 × 1/2), it is 3/8 (“^” means a power). That is, the respective probabilities are the product of the probability 1/2 that the sphere will flow down the paths c1 and c2 and the number that is a power of 1/2 by the number of branches b1 to b10 through which the sphere passes before reaching the landing area z0. It is represented by

  The probability that a sphere will reach the landing area z1 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z1, the branch b3 flows down the left side to reach the path c15, the branch b4 flows down the left side and reaches the path c16, or the branch b6 flows down the right side to reach the path c14. Or it is necessary to flow down the right side at the branch b7 to reach the path c13.

  Up to the branch b3, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered. Since there are three branches before the sphere reaches the path c15, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c15 is 1/16 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 3). Also, until the branch b4, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered, and there are four branches until the sphere reaches the path c16, so the probability that the sphere reaches the path c16 is 1/32 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 4). Further, until the branch b6, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered. Since there are three branches before the sphere reaches the path c14, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c14 is 1/16. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 3).

  Up to the branch b7, both cases where the sphere flows down from the path c1 and the path c2 are conceivable. There are four branches and three branches before the sphere flowing down from the path c1 reaches the path c13. May exist. There are two branches until the sphere flowing down from the path c2 reaches the path c13. Therefore, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c13 is 3/32 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 4 + 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 3), which is the probability of the sphere flowing down from the path c1. This is 7/32 because it is expressed by the sum of the probability of the sphere flowing down from the path c2 and 1/8 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 2).

  Here, the probability that the sphere reaches the landing region z1 is 12/32 because it is the sum of the probability that the sphere reaches the paths c13 to c16 described above.

  The probability that a sphere will reach the landing area z2 will be described. The probability that the sphere reaches the landing area z2 can be expressed by the probability that the sphere reaches the route c12, which is equal to the probability that the sphere that reaches the branch b7 reaches the route c13. Therefore, the probability that the sphere reaches the landing area z2 is 7/32.

  The probability that a sphere will reach the landing area z3 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z3, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b9 to reach the path c17, or flow down the left side at the branch b10 to reach the path c18.

  Up to the branch b9, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 can be considered. Since there are six branches before the sphere reaches the path c17, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c17 is 1/128 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 6). Further, until the branch b10, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 is considered. Since there are seven branches before the sphere reaches the path c18, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c18 is 1/256. (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 7).

  The probability of the sphere reaching the landing area z3 is 3/256 because it is the sum of the probability of the sphere reaching the paths c17 and c18 described above.

  The probability that a sphere will reach the landing area z4 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z4, it is necessary to flow down the right side at the branch b10 to reach the path c19. It is assumed that all the spheres that have flowed down on the right side of the branch b10 flow down along the path c19. The probability that the sphere reaches the path c19 is equal to the probability that the sphere that reaches the branch b10 reaches the path c18. Therefore, the probability that the sphere reaches the landing area z4 is 1/256 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 7).

  From these facts, the rate at which the sphere reaches each landing area z0 to z4 is (z0: z1: z2: z3: z4) = (96: 96: 56: 3: 1). This ratio has a correlation with the buffer ribs 322 and 332.

  For example, when comparing the landing area z1 and the landing area z3, the heights of the spheres falling on the landing areas z1 and z3 are the same, but the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is the landing area z3. It is smaller than z1. This is because the rate at which the sphere reaches the landing region z3 is 1/32 of the rate at which the sphere reaches the landing region z1. That is, even if the bounding of the falling sphere is not suppressed as much as the landing area z1, there is little possibility that the discharge of the sphere is delayed in the landing area z3. Therefore, in the landing region z3, the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward by reducing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 as compared with the landing region z1.

  For example, when comparing the landing area z2 and the landing area z4, the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is greater than the falling distance of the sphere to the landing area z2, but the falling distance of the sphere to the landing area z4 is longer. The landing area z2 is larger than the landing area z4. This is because the rate at which the sphere reaches the landing region z4 is 1/56 of the rate at which the sphere reaches the landing region z2. That is, even if the bounding of the falling sphere is not suppressed as much as the landing area z2, there is little possibility that the discharge of the sphere will be delayed in the landing area z4. Therefore, in the landing region z4, the position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward by reducing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 as compared with the landing region z2.

  In the above description, the probability of branching of the spheres of the branches b1 to b10 is equal to the left and right (1/2). However, by changing the width of the nail, the spheres at the branches b1 to b10 are changed. It is possible to adjust the probability of branching. For example, by reducing the distance between the nails in the flow path through which the left arrow of the branch b1 passes to the same extent as the diameter of the sphere, the probability of the sphere flowing down along the right arrow at the branch b1 is greater than ½. can do. In the other branches b2 to b10, the probability of branching of the sphere can be adjusted similarly.

  Thereby, the frequency with which a sphere reaches the paths c11 to c19 can be adjusted, and the degree of freedom in designing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 can be improved.

  Further, the buffer rib 322 is formed so as to be inclined downward as the upper surface goes rearward (see FIG. 15B). Thereby, the ball flow to the 1st out mouth 314 can be made quick.

  Returning to FIG. The lower left plate member 320 includes a long plate-like main body portion 321, buffer ribs 322 in which thin plates connected in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 321 extend in the front-rear direction, and the buffer ribs 322, a front plate 323 formed in a manner to connect the front surface of 322, a step portion 324 formed to protrude upward at the left end of the main body portion 321 when viewed from the front, and extends from the step portion 324 leftward when viewed from the front. And a shaft support hole 326 drilled in the front-rear direction at the right end of the main body 321 when viewed from the front.

  The buffer rib 322 is a portion through which a sphere toward the first out port 314 passes, and suppresses the rebound of the sphere falling in the vertical direction in the vertical direction. That is, since the buffer rib 322 is formed from a thin plate that is continuously provided in the left-right direction, the impact of the collision can be reduced by bending in the thickness direction when the buffer rib 322 is collided with the falling ball. Further, when the ball moves in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the buffer rib 322, the ball is braked by being caught between the buffer ribs 322. In addition, the buffer rib 322 has a formation height and an aspect ratio that increase toward the inner side in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) to the right of the front view.

  The connection front plate 323 improves the strength of the buffer rib 322 by connecting the buffer rib 322.

  The stepped portion 324 is a raised portion for dropping the sphere flowing down from the sphere flow rail portion 325 in the vertical direction. Thereby, it can suppress that the load of the left-right direction is applied to the buffer rib 322 from the ball | bowl which flows down the ball | bowl flow rail part 325. FIG. Thereby, it can prevent that the buffer rib 322 receives the load of the left-right direction, and bends in the left-right direction.

  That is, since the buffer rib 322 is formed from a thin wall portion extending in the front-rear direction, the buffer rib 322 may be broken when a load in the left-right direction is applied. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a ball that rolls on the upper surface of the ball flow rail 325 that has a speed in the left-right direction and that may apply a load in the left-right direction to the buffer rib 322 moves up and down from the step portion 324 to the buffer rib 322. It is formed so as to fall in the direction. Thereby, the position where the sphere lands on the buffer rib 322 can be moved to the right in the width direction as the speed of the sphere in the left-right direction increases.

  Accordingly, the load applied to the buffer rib 322 in the left-right direction when the ball lands on the buffer rib 322 can be reduced toward the left (outside) in the width direction. For this reason, as the shock absorber rib 322 moves to the left in the width direction, the risk of bending due to the load in the left-right direction of the sphere decreases, and the aspect ratio of the shock absorber rib 322 can be made smaller than that on the right in the width direction. . In this case, since the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 can be formed along the curved surface formed on the lower surface of the game board 13, the buffer rib 322 is disposed as compared with the case where the buffer rib 322 has the same length in the width direction. The position can be lowered downward.

  Here, with the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 kept constant at the left and right positions in the width direction (with the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 formed with the same curve as the lower surface of the buffer rib 322), the lower surface of the game board 13 It is also conceivable to form the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 along the curved surface. However, in this case, the arrangement position of the step portion 324 is increased, and the arrangement position of the ball flow rail portion 325 formed to be inclined downward toward the step portion 324 is also increased. In this case, the dead space between the ball flow rail portion 325 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 13) is increased, and the game area is suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 is larger, the action of reducing the momentum of the sphere (deceleration action) becomes larger. Therefore, the buffer rib 322 is formed in such a manner that the aspect ratio increases from the vicinity of the step portion 324 toward the center of the game area.

  The upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed with the same curve as that of the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 until the front of the step portion 324 so as not to affect the formation height of the step portion 324 (in the middle of the buffer rib 322 in the horizontal direction). It is also possible that the maximum height is formed. However, in this case, the sphere that has reached the landing area z1 is prevented from rolling to the left. For this reason, the sphere is likely to stay in the landing area z1, and it becomes difficult to smoothly discharge the sphere.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the height of the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 in the width direction of the buffer rib 322 is small, the sphere that has reached the landing region z1 is easily turned to the left (landing region z2 side). Move. Accordingly, since the sphere can flow to the landing area z2 before the sphere stays in the landing area z1, the discharge of the sphere can be made smooth.

  Further, the step portion 324 has a function of blocking a sphere that flows down the buffer rib 322 and flows to the left. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from bouncing back beyond the lateral width of the first out port 314 after colliding with the front lid member 340 (see FIG. 13).

  The shaft support hole 326 is a portion that is inserted and supported by the insertion shaft 343 of the front lid member 340.

  The lower right plate member 330 includes a long plate-like main body portion 331, buffer ribs 332 each having a thin wall portion extending in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 331, and extending in the front-rear direction. A connecting front plate 333 formed in a manner to connect the front surfaces of the buffer ribs 332, a recessed portion 324 formed to be depressed downward at the right end of the main body portion 331 when viewed from the front, and a right side when viewed from the recessed portion 324 A ball flow rail portion 335 extending to the front and a shaft support hole 336 drilled in the front-rear direction at the left end of the main body portion 331 when viewed from the front.

  The configuration of the lower right plate member 330 and the configuration of the lower left plate member 320 are common in many parts. That is, the main body 331 is the main body 321, the buffer rib 332 is the buffer rib 322, the connection front plate 333 is the connection front plate 323, the ball flow rail portion 335 is the ball flow rail portion 325, and the shaft support hole 336 is the shaft support hole 336. Since the technical idea is common to each of the support holes 326, the description of the common parts is omitted.

  The buffer ribs 332 are formed with shorter left and right widths than the buffer ribs 322. As a result, the left and right formation widths of the second out port 315 can be shortened, and the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward compared to the first out port 314, and accordingly, the first variable. The space for disposing the large opening solenoid 65b of the winning device 65 can be secured (the disposing position of the first variable winning device 65 can be lowered).

  Here, the reason why the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be made shorter than that of the buffer rib 322 is that the flow path of the sphere to the second out port 315 is restricted. That is, as shown in FIG. 14, the first variable winning device 65 is arranged at the upper right of the second out port 315 when viewed from the front, so that the ball flows into the first specific winning port 65a when the opening / closing plate is opened, When the opening / closing plate is closed, the ball is dropped vertically downward on the front side of the first variable winning device 65. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the sphere from flowing down from the upper right in the front view to the second out port 315. In other words, a non-flowing region where the flow of the sphere is restricted is formed in the upper right part of the second out port 315.

  Therefore, the flow direction of the sphere to the lower right plate member 330 is limited only to the vertical drop and the flow from the width direction (from the sphere flow rail portion 335) (flow from the diagonally upper right is restricted). . Therefore, since there is no inflow of the sphere from the upper right side, the direction in which the sphere jumps can be restricted, the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be reduced, and the formation width of the second out port 315 can be reduced. As a result, an arrangement space for the first variable winning device 65 can be secured.

  The recessed portion 334 is a recess for causing the ball that has flowed down the ball flow rail portion 335 to splash. Therefore, the formation width of the recessed portion 334 is a width that allows the ball to be placed without contacting the adjacent buffer rib 332.

  The sphere that has flowed down the ball flow rail portion 335 is dropped into the recessed portion 334, rebounds by contacting the upper surface of the recessed portion 334, and falls onto the buffer rib 332. Thereby, it can prevent that a load is applied to the buffer rib 332 from the width direction, and it can prevent that the buffer rib 332 breaks.

  The recessed portion 334 is formed in front of the fastening hole B through which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the base member 310 to the game board 13 is inserted. This makes it easier to use a fastening tool such as a screwdriver when screwing a fastening screw into the fastening hole B in order to fasten and fix the board surface lower unit 300 to the game board 13. That is, the recessed portion 334 has both an effect of preventing the buffer rib 332 from being broken and an effect of facilitating the fastening and fixing of the base member 310.

  The front lid member 340 has a plate-like main body part 341 in which the first winning opening 64 is formed at the uppermost part, an opening part 342 that is formed in the center of the main body part 341 and makes the rotation effect member 313a visible. It mainly includes a pair of insertion shafts 343 that are inserted through the shaft support holes 326 and 336.

  The main body portion 341 is formed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the flow direction of the sphere is limited by the side wall portion. That is, a sphere that has collided with the main body 341 from the right cannot penetrate to the left, while a sphere that collided with the main body 341 from the left cannot penetrate to the right.

  The insertion shaft 343 is a portion inserted through the shaft support holes 326 and 336. Therefore, the diameter of the insertion shaft 343 is slightly smaller than the shaft support holes 326 and 336.

  Next, the vertical operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 21. 16 is a front perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. 16 and 17 show a state in which the arm member 440 of the vertical operation unit 400 is disposed at the retracted position.

  18 is a front exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 19 is a rear exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the vertical motion unit 400 includes a base member 410 that includes a vertical groove 414 that is recessed from the back side to the front side on the right side in the rear view and that the recess extends in the vertical direction. The rotating crank member 420 rotated around the connecting hole 413 of the base member 410, the driving device 430 for generating the driving force of the rotating crank member 420, and the driving force transmitted from the rotating crank member 420 to the base member 410. The arm member 440 swings around the shaft portion 412 and the upper and lower grooves 414 of the base member 410 are arranged on the opposite side of the base member 410 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swing of the arm member 440. The slide member 450 and the slide hole 443 formed at the tip of the arm member 440 are suspended in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swing of the arm member 440. A lens member 460 is slidably formed mainly includes a pair of door member 470 which is respectively pivotally supported on the lens member 460, a.

  The base member 410 has a main body portion 411 that is formed in a plate shape that is long on the left and right sides, and a columnar projection that protrudes from the right end portion of the main body portion 411 toward the front side. A shaft portion 412 that is supported, a connecting hole 413 that is formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction and that connects the rotating crank member 420 and the transmission gear 432, and is formed from the back side to the front side on the right side of the main body portion 411 when viewed from the back side. The upper and lower groove portions 414 in which the hollows to be formed extend in the vertical direction, and the concave portions 415 that are recessed from the front to the back side on both right and left outer sides of the upper and lower groove portions 414 are mainly provided.

  The upper and lower groove portions 414 are portions in which the expansion / contraction effect device 540 of the composite operation unit 500 is accommodated on the back side in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). As will be described later, since the swinging angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is suppressed as the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves toward the contracted state, the combined operation unit 500 oscillates the expansion / contraction effect device 540, thereby Colliding with the left and right inner surfaces is prevented. The recessed portion 415 is a portion where the slide guide portion 452 of the slide member 450 is guided.

  The rotating crank member 420 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 421, a sliding protrusion 422 that protrudes in a columnar shape from one end of the main body portion 421 to the front side, and is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440. And an engagement portion 423 that is engaged with the fitting portion 432a of the transmission gear 432 and disables relative rotation between the transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420.

  When the sliding protrusion 422 is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440 and rotated, the driving force of the driving device 430 is transmitted to the arm member 440 and the arm member 440 is swung around the shaft portion 412. .

  The drive device 430 includes a vertical drive motor 431 fastened and fixed to the base member 410, a drive gear 431a that is rotationally driven by the vertical drive motor 431, a transmission gear 432 that meshes with the drive gear 431a, The transmission gear 432 mainly includes a fitting portion 432a that is formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connection hole 413 and whose inner side surface is fitted to the engaging portion 423 of the rotating crank member 420. .

  The fitting portion 432a is a portion having a depression having a cross-sectional shape in which a circular shape is arranged at each vertex of a triangle, and is inserted into the connection hole 413 of the base member 410, and at the leading end side thereof, the rotating crank member 420. The engaging portion 423 is fitted so as not to be relatively rotatable. As a result, the main body 411 of the base member 410 is formed so as to be sandwiched between the transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420, and as described above, the transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420 cannot be rotated relative to each other. The transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420 rotate in synchronization. That is, the driving force of the vertical drive motor 431 is transmitted to the rotating crank member 420 via the transmission gear 432.

  The arm member 440 includes a main body portion 441 formed in a long bar shape, a shaft support hole 442 that is drilled on the base end side (right side in front view) and is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 412, and a base end side A sliding hole 443 that is formed as a long hole in the swing end side that is the opposite end of the lens member 460 and the sliding projection 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and the sliding projection 422 of the rotating crank member 420 is inserted. The bottomed hole-shaped insertion portion 444 is mainly provided.

  The shape of the insertion portion 444 is set so that the rotating crank member 420 can rotate once in a state where the sliding protrusion 422 is inserted through the insertion portion 444. Therefore, the arm member 440 can perform a swinging operation regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 420.

  The slide member 450 includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 451, a slide guide portion 452 that extends rearward from the left and right ends of the main body portion 451, and is guided by the recessed portion 415 so as to be vertically slidable. A central guide recess 453 that is a recess extending in the vertical direction formed in the front surface at the center in the width direction of 451 and through which the sliding protrusion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and both left and right ends of the main body 451 And a both-end guide recessed portion 454 that is formed on the front surface and extends in the vertical direction and guides the stable slide portion 464 of the lens member 460.

  The lens member 460 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 461 having a circular opening at the center, a magnifying lens 462 having a magnifying lens process fitted into the opening of the main body portion 461, and the center in the width direction of the main body portion 461. A sliding projection 463 that protrudes toward the back side at the upper end and is slidably inserted into the sliding hole 443 of the arm member 440, and protrudes and slides toward the back side at both ends in the width direction of the main body 461. A stable slide portion 464 that is inserted into the both-end guide recessed portion 454 of the member 450 so as to be slidable up and down, and a lower shaft portion 473 and an upper side of the door member 470 that are rotatably disposed on the lower left side of the main body portion 461 when viewed from the front. A pair of rotary cylinders 465 through which the shaft portion 474 is inserted, and an opening / closing drive motor 466 that rotates the pair of rotary cylinders 465 in opposite directions by a transmission mechanism (not shown). To prepare for.

  With reference to FIG. 20, the moving operation of the vertical operation unit 400 will be described. FIG. 20 is a front view of the vertical operation unit 400. FIG. 20 illustrates a closed state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical operation unit 400 is disposed at the extended position.

  When the arm member 440 is swung from the retracted position (see FIG. 16) to the extended position (see FIG. 20), the sliding of the lens member 460 that is pivotally supported by the sliding hole 443 on the rocking end side of the arm member 440. The moving projection 463 (see FIG. 18) is slid along the central guide recess 453 of the slide member 450. Since the lens member 460 is guided in the vertical direction by the both-end guide recessed portion 454 of the slide member 450, and the slide member 450 is guided in the vertical direction by the recessed portion 415 of the base member 410, the lens is rotated by the swing of the arm member 440. The member 460 is slid in the vertical direction.

  Returning to FIG. 18 and FIG. The door member 470 is configured by splitting a circular plate into two parts, a lower main body part 471 formed on the lower side, an upper main body part 472 formed on the upper side of the lower main body part 471, and a lower side A lower shaft portion 473 that protrudes in a columnar shape on the back side at the lower end portion of the main body portion 471 and is inserted into the rotating cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to rotate relatively, and a circle on the back side at the lower end portion of the upper body portion 472. And an upper shaft portion 474 that protrudes in a columnar shape and is inserted into the rotating cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

  The lower main body 471 includes a guide protrusion 471a that protrudes from a side that is in contact with the upper main body 472, and the upper main body 472 is a side that is in contact with the lower main body 471. The receiving recessed portion 472a is provided to be recessed. By fitting the guide protrusion 471a and the receiving recess 472a, the lower main body 471 and the upper main body 472 can be relatively aligned in the closed state. In the present embodiment, since the guide projection 471a projects in a tapered shape, the guide projection 471a can be received and securely fitted into the recess 472a.

  The operation of the door member 470 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical movement unit 400. FIG. 21 illustrates an open state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical operation unit 400 is disposed at the extended position.

  The lower shaft portion 473 and the upper shaft portion 474 (see FIG. 19) are rotated by the rotation of the rotating cylinder 465 (see FIG. 18) of the lens member 460. Since the pair of rotating cylinders 465 are rotated in opposite directions by the driving force of the opening / closing drive motor 466 (see FIG. 19), the door member 470 is opened from the closed state (see FIG. 20) to the open state (see FIG. 21). In this case, the lower main body 471 and the upper main body 472 can be swung outward (opposite directions). Further, when the door member 470 is changed from the open state (see FIG. 21) to the closed state (see FIG. 20), the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be swung inward.

  Thereby, compared with the case where a single cover member is swung to cover the front side of the lens member 460, the time for rocking the lower main body 471 and the upper main body 472 can be halved.

  Next, the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. The compound operation unit 500 swings the turning arm member 550 from the retracted position (see FIG. 22) to the extended position (see FIG. 9), thereby arranging the expansion / contraction effect device 540 on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. Is a unit. In addition, the expansion / contraction production device 540 is formed to be swingable around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24) of the base member 510.

  22 is a front perspective view of the combined operation unit 500, and FIG. 23 is a rear perspective view of the combined operation unit 500. 22 and 23 show a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at a retracted position that is a terminal position formed outside the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  FIG. 24 is a front exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 500, and FIG. 25 is a rear exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the combined operation unit 500 is a unit that produces an effect by sliding and swinging the expansion / contraction production device 540, and includes a base member 510 that forms a skeleton, and the base member 510. The rotary plate 520 is formed to be rotatable around the first shaft portion 512 of the first, the first drive device 530 is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and generates the driving force of the rotary plate 520, and is fastened to the front of the rotary plate 520. An expansion / contraction effect device 540 that is fixed and formed to be expandable / contractable in the radial direction of the rotating plate 520, and one end portion is connected to the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and the other end on the opposite side is pivotally supported by the base member 510. In addition, a swing arm member 550 that forms a telescopic motion of the telescopic effect device 540 by a swing motion, and a driving force of the rotational arm member 550 fastened and fixed to the base member 510 The second driving device 560 to be generated, the rotating crank member 570 that transmits the driving force of the second driving device 560 to the rotating arm member 550, and the fastening and fixing from the front of the base member 510, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating And a front cover 580 for concealing a mechanism portion on the rotating shaft side such as the crank member 570.

  The base member 510 includes a rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 511, a columnar first shaft portion 512 projecting forward from a substantially central lower portion in the width direction of the main body portion 511, and the first shaft portion 512. Three rows of arc-shaped holes 513 drilled along a central arc, and first through holes 514 drilled adjacent to the second arc-shaped holes 513b of the three rows of arc-shaped holes 513. A cylindrical second shaft portion 515 projecting forward from the main body portion 511 at a substantially intermediate position between the shaft portion 512 and the right end portion of the main body portion 511, and adjacent to the second shaft portion 515. The second through-hole 516 to be drilled, the columnar third shaft portion 517 projecting forward from the lower right end of the main body portion 511 when viewed from the front, and the forward bending from the edge of the main body portion 511 The bent wall portion 518 is mainly provided.

  The first shaft portion 512 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 522 of the rotating plate 520 and serves as the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 520. Therefore, the diameter of the first shaft portion 512 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522 of the rotating plate 520.

  The arc-shaped hole 513 includes a first arc-shaped hole 513a, a second arc-shaped hole 513b, and a third arc-shaped hole 513c from the side close to the first shaft portion 512.

  The first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c are elongated holes through which the insertion shaft 525 of the rotating plate 520 is inserted to guide the rotation of the rotating plate 520. Thereby, the load received by the first shaft portion 512 when the rotating plate 520 is rotated can be reduced, and the durability of the rotating plate 520 can be improved. 24 and 25 illustrate a state in which the collar is fastened to the tip of the insertion shaft 525. The first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c are provided between the collar and the main body 521. Arranged between them (inserted before the collar is fastened).

  The second arc-shaped hole 513b is a long hole in which the arc-shaped rack 526 of the rotating plate 520 is disposed and moved. The upper side of the substantially central part is opened, and the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 is arranged in the opened part. As a result, the meshing portion between the driving motor 531 of the first driving device 530 and the arc-shaped rack 526 of the rotating plate 520 can be disposed in the plate thickness portion of the main body 511, so that the thickness of the composite operation unit 500 can be increased. The vertical dimension (the dimension in the front-rear direction in FIG. 22) can be suppressed.

  The first through hole 514 and the second through hole 516 are through holes into which the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 and the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560 are inserted, respectively.

  The second shaft portion 515 is a columnar portion that serves as a central axis of rotation of the main body portion 571 with the lid portion 575 of the rotating crank member 570 fastened and fixed to the front side. Therefore, the diameter of the second shaft portion 515 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 571 of the rotating crank member 570.

  The third shaft portion 517 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 552 of the rotation arm member 550 and serves as a central axis of rotation of the rotation arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the third shaft portion 517 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550. Around the third shaft portion 517, a torsion spring 517a that generates a biasing force that moves the rotating arm member 550 toward the retracted position is wound.

  The torsion spring 517a is formed in such a manner that the arm portions extend from both ends of the coil portion wound around the third shaft portion 517, respectively. One arm portion is fixed to the lower right portion of the bent wall portion 518 when viewed from the front (near the first stopper portion 518a), and the other arm portion on the opposite side of the one arm portion is engaged with the rotating arm member 550. Locked to the stop 555.

  The bent wall portion 518 includes a first stopper portion 518a adjacent to the third shaft portion 517, a second stopper portion 518b formed on the right side of the first shaft portion 512, and a left side of the first shaft portion 512. And a third stopper portion 518c formed on the main body.

  The first stopper portion 518 a is a portion that restricts the rotation of the rotation arm member 550. That is, when the rotating arm member 550 is lowered to the extended position (see FIG. 9), it comes into contact with the first stopper portion 518a, and the lowering is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the second stopper portion 518b is disposed below the third stopper portion 518c. Since the lower surface of the rotating plate 520 is formed symmetrically with respect to the shaft support hole 522 (see FIG. 37), the rotating plate 520 rotates at a larger rotation angle in the direction of rotation toward the second stopper portion 512b. Can do. That is, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 described later is formed so that the maximum angle of the clockwise rotation of the front view is larger than that of the counterclockwise rotation of the front view.

  The rotating plate 520 includes a fan-shaped main body 521, a shaft support hole 522 formed in a circular shape in the thickness direction at the root of the main body 521, and a width slightly larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522. A rail receiving groove 523 that is linearly recessed on the front surface of the portion 521, a pair of telescopic stoppers 524 that are formed to project forward on both sides of the lower end portion of the rail receiving groove 523, and projecting from the back surface of the main body portion 521 A plurality of (three in this embodiment) insertion shafts 525 and an arc-shaped rack projecting in an arc shape centering on the shaft support hole 522 from the back surface of the main body 521 and gear teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral portion. 526 mainly.

  The shaft support hole 522 is inserted through the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510. Therefore, the rotating plate 520 is swung around the first shaft portion 512.

  The rail receiving groove 523 is a portion to which the slide rail 545 of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is fastened and fixed, and the expansion / contraction production device 540 performs an expansion / contraction operation along the extending direction of the rail reception groove 523. Therefore, the moving direction of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is changed depending on the posture of the rotating plate 520.

  The expansion / contraction stopper 524 is a part that abuts the inner surface of the slide plate 544 of the expansion / contraction production device 540 in the vertical direction and regulates the movement width of the slide plate 544. It is formed on both sides of the rail receiving groove 523, and is in contact with the inner surface of the slide plate 544 on both sides thereof, so that the slide rail 545 is prevented from receiving a load in a direction perpendicular to the expansion / contraction direction, and durability is improved. Can be achieved.

  The insertion shaft 525 is a portion that is inserted into the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c of the base member 510 and guides the rotation of the rotating plate 520, and has a diameter of the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third circle. It is formed slightly smaller than the width dimension of the arc-shaped hole 513c. In addition, a collar member having a diameter larger than the width dimension of the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c is fastened and fixed to the tip, so that the rotating plate 520 is connected to the base member 510 so that it cannot be pulled out.

  The arc-shaped rack 526 is inserted into the second arc-shaped hole 513 b of the base member 510 and meshed with the driving gear 532 of the first driving device 530. Since the engagement portion between the arc-shaped rack 526 and the first driving device 530 is formed in a region including the thickness portion of the base member 510, the dimension in the thickness direction of the combined operation unit 500 can be suppressed.

  The first drive device 530 mainly includes a drive motor 531 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and a drive gear 532 that is inserted into the first through hole 514 of the base member 510 and rotated about the shaft by the drive motor 531.

  Next, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a front exploded perspective view of the expansion / contraction production device 540, and FIG. 27 is a rear exploded perspective view of the expansion / contraction production device 540.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the expansion / contraction production device 540 includes a main body member 541 that forms a skeleton, and a pair of body members 541 that are fastened and fixed to the back surface of the main body member 541. The first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 through which the portion 551 is inserted, and the first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 are disposed so as to be slidable along the extending direction of the insertion holes 542d and 543d. The slide plate 544 is connected to the slide plate 544 and the rotary plate 520, and one end of the slide plate 544 is fitted into the rail receiving groove 523 to be fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member 541. The front plate member 546 fastened and fixed, the connecting sliding member 547 slidably supported by the shaft support portion 546c of the front plate member 546, and the connecting sliding member 547 Mainly includes a decorative member 548 front drooping portion 548b is formed to be movable in the front of the body member 541 is fixed.

  The main body member 541 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 541a that forms a skeleton, a columnar protrusion portion 541b that protrudes toward the back side at the center in the width direction of the main body portion 541a, and a rear surface of the protrusion portion 541b. A first raised fastening portion 541c that protrudes in a pair on the left side of the view, a second raised fastening portion 541d that protrudes in a pair on the right side in the rear view of the protrusion 541b, and a left upper portion in the rear view of the main body portion 541a. A guide fastening portion 541e that protrudes and a fastening hole 541f that is formed in a plurality (three in the present embodiment) on the front side of the main body portion 541a and to which the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed are mainly provided.

  The protruding portion 541 b is a portion that is inserted through the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the protrusion 541b is slightly smaller than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the arcuate hole 554. Further, since the protruding portion 541b is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 554, the main body member 541 can be interlocked when the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

  The first raised fastening portion 541c is a portion for fastening and fixing the first guide member 542, and the second raised fastening portion 541d is a portion for fastening and fixing the second guide member 543. The reason why the second raised fastening portion 541d is longer in the vertical direction than the first raised fastening portion 541c is that a position that does not interfere with the rotating arm member 550 is selected and disposed. Here, in the present embodiment, the rotating arm member does not pass through the lower left portion of the main body member 541 in the rotation locus (see FIGS. 37, 40, and 44). Therefore, it is possible to increase the arrangement interval of the pair of second raised fastening portions 541d as compared to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and the rigidity of the second raised fastening portion 541d can be improved.

  The guide fastening portion 541e is a portion to which the auxiliary fastening portion 542e of the first guide member 542 is fastened and fixed, and is a portion to which the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 is guided in the extended state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540. That is, even if the protrusion 541 b is not guided by the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the guide fastening portion 541 e guides to the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 in order to rotate the rotating arm member 550 upward. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 and the expansion / contraction effect member 540 are operated in conjunction with each other.

  The fastening hole 541f is a through hole to which the fastening portion 546b of the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed.

  The first guide member 542 includes a fastening plate portion 542a fastened and fixed to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and a back regulating portion extending upward from a position where the first guiding member 542 rides on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 542a to the back side. 542b, a guide rail portion 542c that protrudes in a wall shape from the left and right sides of the back surface restricting portion 542b to the back surface, and a portion that protrudes toward the back surface at the upper end portion of the back surface restricting portion 542b are formed to penetrate vertically. And an auxiliary fastening portion 542e that extends from the back surface regulating portion 542b and is fastened and fixed to the guide fastening portion 541e.

  The back surface restricting portion 542b is a portion disposed on the back surface of the rotating arm member 550 and is a portion that prevents the rotating arm member 550 from moving to the back surface and the protruding portion 541b from dropping off from the arcuate hole 554. is there.

  The guide rail portion 542c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 when the expansion / contraction production device 540 performs the expansion / contraction operation, and suppresses the deviation of the posture of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 542.

  The insertion hole 542d is a hole through which the slide bar 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 542d is slightly larger than the diameter of the slide bar 544e, the slide plate 544 is formed to be slidable relative to the first guide member 542.

  The second guide member 543 includes a fastening plate portion 543a that is fastened and fixed to the second raised fastening portion 541d, and a back surface regulating portion that extends upward from a position where the second guide member 543 rides on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 543a toward the back side. 543b, a guide rail portion 543c projecting like a wall from the left and right sides of the back surface restricting portion 543b to the back surface, and a portion projecting to the back side at the upper end portion of the back surface restricting portion 543b are formed to penetrate vertically. The insertion hole 543d is mainly provided.

  The back surface restricting portion 543b is a portion disposed on the back surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the rotating arm member 550 from moving to the back surface and the protruding portion 541b from dropping off from the arcuate hole 554. is there.

  The guide rail portion 543c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 when the expansion / contraction production device 540 performs the expansion / contraction operation, and suppresses the deviation of the posture of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 543.

  The insertion hole 543d is a hole through which the slide bar 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 543d is slightly larger than the diameter of the slide bar 544e, the slide plate 544 is formed to be slidable relative to the first guide member 543.

  The slide plate 544 includes a main body portion 544a formed in a rectangular plate shape, a recessed portion 544b formed with a wide recess extending in the vertical direction on the back surface of the main body portion 544a, and the recessed portion 544b. Both-end recessed portions 544c formed with recesses extending in the vertical direction on the front surfaces on the left and right sides, and rail receivers protruding in a semicircular shape toward the front side at the upper and lower ends of the both-end recessed portions 544c A portion 544d, a columnar slide bar 544e extending in the vertical direction inside the concave portions 544c at both ends, an effect auxiliary wall 544f protruding toward the front at a substantially vertical center of the main body 544a, The upper and lower ends of the recessed portion 544b mainly include stopper portions 544g that protrude toward the back at both left and right ends.

  The recessed portion 544 b is a portion that guides the slide plate 544 with respect to the expansion / contraction stopper 524 of the rotating plate 520. Therefore, the width of the inner surface of the recessed portion 544b is formed slightly larger than the width dimension of the expansion / contraction stopper 524.

  The both-end recessed portion 544c is a portion that accommodates a protruding portion in which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed. Thereby, the projection part by which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are drilled can be guided from the outside.

  The rail receiving portion 544d is a portion accommodated in the guide rail portions 542c and 543c of the guide members 542 and 543. Thereby, the wobbling of the guide members 542 and 543 with respect to the slide plate 544 can be suppressed.

  The slide bar 544e is a columnar bar that is inserted into the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543. As a result, the guide members 542 and 543 are formed to be slidable in the extending direction of the slide bar 544e (the vertical direction in FIG. 26).

  The effect assisting unit 544f is a part that is brought into contact with the rear hanging portion 548c of the decorative member 548 and moves the decorative member 548 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in the extended state. Thereby, the external appearance of the expansion / contraction production apparatus 540 can be changed.

  The stopper portion 544g is a portion that abuts on the expansion / contraction stopper 524 of the rotary plate 520 and defines the vertical movement end of the slide plate 544.

  The slide rail 545 is a commercially available mini rail member. One end is fastened and fixed along the rail receiving groove 523 of the rotating plate 520, and the other end opposite to the one end is fastened and fixed to the recessed portion 544 b of the slide plate 544.

  The front plate member 546 is an effect portion that can be visually recognized by the player, and has a plate-like main body portion 546a formed in substantially the same shape as the main body member 541 in a front view, and the main body portion 546a toward the back side. It mainly includes a fastening portion 546b that protrudes in accordance with the formation position of the fastening hole 541f, and a pair of shaft support portions 546c that protrude from the upper end portion of the main body portion 546a toward the back side.

  The fastening portion 546b is a portion for fixing the front plate member 546 to the main body member 541, and the fastening portion 546b is fastened and fixed by screwing through the fastening hole 541f.

  The shaft support portion 546c is a portion that supports the connecting sliding member 547 in a slidable manner. Therefore, the diameter of the shaft support portion 546c is slightly smaller than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b of the connecting sliding member 547.

  The connecting sliding member 547 is formed in a plate-like body portion 547a, a pair of sliding long holes 547b formed in a vertically extending elongated hole shape and drilled in the front-rear direction, and in the vertical direction. And a pair of insertion holes 547c.

  The sliding long hole 547b is a portion through which the shaft support portion 546c of the front plate member 546 is inserted. Therefore, the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b is formed slightly larger than that of the shaft support portion 546c. A collar member having an outer shape larger than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b is fastened and fixed to the distal end portion of the shaft supporting portion 546c, so that the connecting sliding member 547 is pivotally supported by the front plate member 546 so that it cannot be pulled out. The The insertion hole 547c is a circular hole through which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the decorative member 548 is inserted.

  The decorative member 548 is formed in a plate shape, and a main body portion 548a to which the connecting sliding member 547 is fastened and fixed from below, a front hanging portion 548b formed by hanging downward on the front side of the main body portion 548a, and a main body portion 548a. And a rear drooping portion 548c formed by drooping downward on the rear side of the main body.

  When the connecting sliding member 547 moves relative to the front plate member 546, the front hanging portion 548b is covered with the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43) and is separated from the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43). 37). Thereby, the external appearance of the expansion / contraction production | presentation member 540 can be changed and a production effect can be improved.

  The back drooping part 548c is a part that comes into contact with the effect auxiliary wall 544f of the slide plate 544 by the expansion / contraction operation of the expansion / contraction production device 540, and the decorative member 548 is brought into contact with the effect auxiliary wall 544f by the back dripping part 548c. Is moved relative to the front plate member 546.

  Returning to FIG. 24 and FIG. The rotating arm member 550 has a main body portion 551 that is formed in a long rod shape, a shaft support hole 552 that is formed in one end of the main body portion 551 in the front-rear direction, and a proximity to the shaft support hole 552. Then, the odd-shaped long hole 553 which is a specially shaped bottomed long hole formed on the back side of the main body 551 and the front side of the other end which is the end opposite to the one end. An arc-shaped hole 554 that is an arc-shaped bottomed long hole and a rear end projecting in the vicinity of the shaft support hole 552 of the main body 551, the tip of which is bent into a hook shape, and the other arm of the torsion spring 517a is locked The locking portion 555 is mainly provided.

  The shaft support hole 552 is a circular hole through which the third shaft portion 517 of the base member 510 is inserted. Therefore, the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the third shaft portion 517, thereby forming the rotating arm member 550 so as to be rotatable about the third shaft portion 517.

  The odd-shaped long hole 553 is a portion through which the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is inserted. The shape of the deformed long hole 553 will be described later.

  The arc-shaped hole 554 is a long hole through which the protruding portion 541b of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is inserted. Therefore, the width dimension of the arc-shaped hole 554 is slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 541b. In addition, the arc formed by the arc-shaped hole 554 coincides with the arc formed by the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 in the extended state (FIGS. 37 to 39). Until see).

  The arc-shaped hole 554 includes a mouth portion 554a that is open to the distal end portion of the other end portion of the rotating arm member 550 and has a wide width at the distal end portion.

  The second driving device 560 is a device that generates a driving force for rotating the rotating crank member 570, and is inserted into the driving motor 561 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and the second through hole 516 of the base member 510. And a drive gear 562 that is axially rotated by a drive motor 561.

  The drive gear 562 is meshed with the transmission gear teeth 572 of the rotating crank member 570. Thereby, when the drive gear 562 is rotated, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated accordingly.

  The rotating crank member 570 is a member that transmits a driving force to the rotating arm member 550, and has a ring-shaped main body portion 571 that is pivotally supported by the second shaft portion 515 and an outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 571. The transmission gear teeth 572 provided, the regulating umbrella portion 573 formed in a manner covering the front side of the transmission gear teeth 572, and the sliding projecting to the front side at a position eccentric from the center of the main body portion 571 The projection part 574 and the cover part 575 which is formed with a diameter larger than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body part 571 and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the second shaft part 515 are mainly provided.

  The transmission gear teeth 572 are meshed with the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560. As a result, the driving force of the driving motor 561 is transmitted to the rotating crank member 570.

  The restricting umbrella portion 573 suppresses the drive gear 532 from being displaced to the front side of the transmission gear tooth 572. Thereby, the meshing relationship between the drive gear 532 and the transmission gear teeth 572 can be optimized.

  The sliding protrusion 574 is a portion that is inserted into the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550. In other words, whether or not the transmission of the driving force is formed is determined by the relationship between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shape of the rotating arm member 550.

  The lid portion 575 is a portion for disposing the main body portion 571 on the base member 510 so that it cannot be pulled out.

  With reference to FIGS. 28 to 31, the relationship between the swing of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described. First, the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 (a) and 29 (a).

  FIGS. 28A and 29A are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570. FIG. FIG. 28A illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 29A illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the extended position. 28 (a) and 29 (a), the deformed elongated hole 553 and the sliding projection 574 are shown as hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the projection 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are shown as imaginary lines. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, in a state where the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position, a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding projection 574 and the rotating crank member 570 An upward orthogonal state in which the straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the shaft support hole 552 is orthogonal is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, in a state where the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the extended position, a straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding projection 574, and the rotating crank member 570. It is possible to form a downward orthogonal state in which the rotation axis and the straight line connecting the shaft support holes 552 are orthogonal to each other. FIG. 29 (a) shows a state in which the rotating crank member 570 has been rotated by a predetermined angle counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the downward orthogonal state described above.

  The deformed elongated hole 553 includes a transmission groove portion 553a in which a driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 by the movement of the sliding projection 574, and a first non-transmission wall portion connected from the upper end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a. 553b and a second non-transmission wall portion 553c coupled from the lower end of the transmission groove portion 553a, and a selection wall portion 553d that couples the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Prepare.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, the transmission groove portion 553a is a concave groove extending linearly to the left starting from the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 in the upward orthogonal state. The transmission groove portion 553a is formed with such a length that the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 can move from the upward orthogonal state to the downward orthogonal state, and the inner circumferential surface is formed slightly wider than the diameter of the sliding protrusion 574. Largely formed. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550 while the sliding protrusion 574 moves in the transmission groove 553a.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, the first non-transmission wall portion 553b is a sliding protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570 from the upper wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in the upward orthogonal state. It is a wall formed along the circumscribed circle of the portion 574. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front orthogonal state, the rotating crank member 570 rotates idly with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the driving force is transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm. Not transmitted to member 550.

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state where the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 28A), the first non-transmission wall portion 553b is moved. The direction is directed to the rotational axis of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed opposite to the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, the load applied to the sliding protrusion 574 due to the rotation of the rotation arm member 550 is the rotation of the rotation crank member 570. Directed to the axis. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed opposite to the first non-transmission wall 553b, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the second non-transmission wall portion 553c can be rotated from the lower wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in a state where the rotation arm member 550 is disposed at the extended position. This is a wall portion formed along the circumscribed circle of the sliding projection 574 around the rotation axis of the member 570. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the downward orthogonal state (the state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by a predetermined amount clockwise from the state of FIG. 29A), The rotating crank member 570 idles with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the driving force is not transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550.

  Note that when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise from the state illustrated in FIG. 29A, the moving direction of the second non-transmission wall portion 553 b is directed toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. It is done. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed opposite to the second non-transmission wall 553c (see FIG. 29B), the load applied to the sliding protrusion 574 by rotating the rotating arm member 550. Is directed to the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed opposite to the second non-transmission wall 553c, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating.

  The selection wall portion 553d is a wall portion formed from a smooth curved surface connecting the right end portion in front view of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and the right end portion in front view of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. It is formed above the curve obtained by extending the transmission wall portion 553b.

  The selection wall portion 553d is disposed to face the right portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, and is formed in such a manner that the distance from the second non-transmission wall portion 553c increases toward the left end portion of the selection wall portion 553d. Therefore, for example, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A), the sliding projection 574 exceeds the first non-transmission wall 553b and the second non-transmission. In the surplus portion D (see FIG. 32B) until the wall portion 553c is reached, no driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550, and rotation is not restricted. That is, the driving force is not transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 by the sliding protrusion 574 is not restricted.

  The right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the formation angle with the arc S1 is small), while the right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is The second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed so as to intersect with the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the angle formed between the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1.

  In this case, when the distance between the sliding projection 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 that is necessary to cope with the change amount changes. That is, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount in a state where the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d are in contact with each other is as follows. The swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 is smaller than that when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transmission wall 553c are in contact with each other. Accordingly, the swing arm member 550 swings with respect to the speed of the swing crank member 570 depending on whether the sliding protrusion 574 rotates along the second non-transmission wall portion 553c or the selection wall portion 553d. The speed can be changed.

  Returning to FIG. FIGS. 28 to 31 are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 illustrating the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 in time series. 28A, the above-described upward orthogonal state is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position), and in FIGS. 28 to 31, the rotating crank member 570 is counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The rotated state is illustrated in order, the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotating crank member 570 are illustrated by hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protruding portion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are illustrated by imaginary lines. .

  28 to 31, the expansion / contraction production device 540 detects the posture of expanding and contracting in the vertical direction by a position detection sensor (not shown), and the swinging is stopped in that posture. That is, in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b moves only in the vertical direction. In this case, swinging of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is prevented by resistance with the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 (see FIG. 25).

  In the state of FIG. 28A, the rotating crank member 570 is in an upward orthogonal state. In this case, the reference horizontal line O is set at a position that is vertically downward from the protrusion 541b by the distance h1. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is in the upward orthogonal state, the protruding portion 541b is disposed at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 vertically upward.

  From the state of FIG. 28 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (rotated by the angle T1 counterclockwise from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a))). The sliding projection 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and the projection 541 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2 <h1) (FIG. 28B). ))). During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding projection 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ). That is, the turning arm member 550 is swung.

  From the state of FIG. 28 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)) to the counterclockwise angle T2 (T2≈180 degrees> T1). ), The sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a of the odd-shaped long hole 553 (transmission area), enters the area facing the second non-transmission wall 553c, and the protrusion 541 is the reference. It reaches a state of being arranged at a position separated from the horizontal line O by a distance h3 (h3 <h2) vertically upward (see FIG. 29A). That is, the turning arm member 550 is swung.

  From the state of FIG. 28C, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the orthogonal state upward (see FIG. 28A)) counterclockwise by an angle T3 (T3> T2). ), The sliding protrusion 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and reaches the state of FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward.

  29A and 29B, when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the sliding protrusion 574 is secondly directed toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. It is pushed by the non-transmission wall portion 553c. In this case, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, and thereby the swing of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in front view from the state of FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b).

  Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state of FIG. 29A, it is conceivable to stop the rotating crank member 570. However, if the effect speed of the rotating arm member 550 is increased to a value just before reaching the extended position and the rotating crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second driving device 560, and the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is reduced. If it is moderate, the effect of production cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the rotating crank member 570 is not stopped in the state of FIG. 29A but is rotated to the state of FIG. The rotation of the member 550 can be stopped in the state shown in FIG. 29A (the protrusion 541 can be stopped at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward). Thereby, the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is maintained until the rotating arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotating crank member is moved from the state shown in FIG. 29A to the state shown in FIG. 570 can be decelerated. Therefore, it is not necessary to stop the rotating crank member 570 suddenly. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both improvement in the effect of the rotation arm member 550 and improvement in the durability of the second drive device 560.

  From the state of FIG. 29B, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the orthogonal state upward (see FIG. 28A)) to the angle T4 (T4≈270 degrees> T3 counterclockwise). ), The sliding projection 574 is slid by the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and reaches the state of FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward.

  That is, while the rotating crank member 570 is rotated ¼ turn counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 29A, the rotating arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture, and the protrusion 541b is in the same position. Maintained. In this embodiment, the rotation arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture and the protrusion 541b is maintained in the same position during the rotation of the rotation crank member 570 by 1/4 turn. It need not be limited to that. The length in which the front plate member 546 continues to be disposed at the lower position can be changed by changing the length of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A) of the deformed elongated hole 553. For example, by making the second non-transmission wall portion 553c longer than in the present embodiment, the length of the front plate member 546 that is continuously disposed at the lower position can be made longer than in the present embodiment.

  From the state of FIG. 30A, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the orthogonal state upward (see FIG. 28A)) counterclockwise by an angle T5 (T5> T4). ), The sliding projection 574 pushes up the selection wall 553d of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and the projection 541 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2> h3). (See FIG. 30B). During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding projection 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ).

  That is, when the turning arm member 550 and the turning crank member 570 are rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the selection wall portion 553d and the sliding projection portion 574 are brought into contact with each other, thereby turning the turning arm member. The driving force is transmitted to 550 (transmission region).

  From the state of FIG. 30 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a)), and rotated counterclockwise by an angle T6 (T6> T5). The sliding protrusion 574 enters the region facing the first non-transmission wall 553b of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1> h2). The state (refer FIG. 31) arrange | positioned in the spaced apart position is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding projection 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ).

  31, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the region facing the first non-transmission wall 553b of the deformed elongated hole 553. The state of 28 (a) is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region).

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front in the state shown in FIG. 31, the sliding protrusion 574 is pushed by the second non-transmission wall portion 553c toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570. . In this case, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, and thereby the swing of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG.

  Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state shown in FIG. 31, it is conceivable to stop the rotating crank member 570. However, if the effect speed of the rotating arm member 550 is increased to a value just before reaching the retracted position and the rotating crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second driving device 560, and the decrease in the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is moderated. If it is set, the effect of production cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rotation of the rotation arm member 550 is stopped in the state of FIG. 31 by rotating the rotation crank member 570 to the state of FIG. 28A without stopping in the state of FIG. Can do. Thus, the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is maintained until the rotating arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotating crank member 570 is decelerated from the state of FIG. 31 to the state of FIG. Can be made. Therefore, it is not necessary to stop the rotating crank member 570 suddenly. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both improvement in the effect of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 linked to the rotating arm member 550 and improvement in the durability of the second drive device 560.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, by rotating the rotating crank member 570 once in the same direction, the rotating arm member 550 can be reciprocally swung between the retracted position and the extended position.

  For these reasons, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise at a constant speed as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b is positioned at the reference horizontal line in a half period of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position vertically separated from O by a distance h1 to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3 <h1). The projection 541b is maintained at a position that is vertically separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 in a quarter period of the subsequent rotation cycle, and the projection 541b is maintained in the reference horizontal line O in a quarter period of the subsequent rotation cycle. Is moved upward from a position separated vertically by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3). Thereby, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (the moving speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction) can be doubled.

  Here, at the retracted position of the rotating arm member 550, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 can form an upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A). In the position, the turning arm member 550 and the turning crank member 570 can form a downward orthogonal state (see FIG. 29A). In addition, it is possible to form a downward orthogonal state by rotating the rotating crank member 570 by a predetermined amount clockwise from the state of FIG.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated half a turn (180 degrees) in order to swing the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position to the extended position. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the time required for the rotating arm member 550 to swing from the retracted position to the extended position (from FIG. 28A to FIG. 29A). The time required for swinging from the extended position to the retracted position (see FIG. 29 (a) through FIG. 31 to FIG. 28 (a)) can be made equal.

  With reference to FIGS. 32 to 35, the relationship between the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described. FIGS. 32 to 35 are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 illustrating the swing of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 in time series. 32 to 35 show a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, and the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotating crank member 570 are illustrated by hidden lines and expanded and contracted. The front plate member 546 and the protruding portion 541b of the rendering device 540 are illustrated with imaginary lines.

  32A, the above-described upward orthogonal state is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position), and in FIGS. 32B to 35, the rotating arm from FIG. 32A is used. The state in which the member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 are rotated by a predetermined amount is illustrated in order along the time series.

  In the state of FIG. 32A, the rotating crank member 570 is in an upward orthogonal state. In this case, the protrusion 541b is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 vertically upward.

  From the state of FIG. 32 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (rotated clockwise by an angle T11 from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a))). The protrusion 574 is moved in the region facing the first non-transmission wall 553b of the deformed elongated hole 553, and reaches the state of FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 vertically upward.

  Note that, when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. 32B, the movement of the sliding projection 574 is restricted, so that the swinging of the turning arm member 550 is restricted. The Therefore, the turning arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state of FIG.

  From the state of FIG. 32 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and rotated clockwise by an angle T12 (T12> T11). 33), as shown in FIG. 33 (a), the sliding projection 574 is slightly separated from the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is swung downward by the action of gravity. In this case, in the margin part D from the state of FIG. 32B until the sliding projection 574 reaches the second non-transmission wall 553c beyond the first non-transmission wall 553b, the rotating arm member 550 is provided. No driving force is transmitted (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h4 (h4 <h1).

  From the state shown in FIG. 33 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and rotated clockwise by an angle T13 (T13> T12). 33), the sliding protrusion 574 is brought into contact with the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 that swings downward by the action of gravity, as shown in FIG. The That is, from the state of FIG. 33 (b) to the state of FIG. 34 (a), the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). In the state of FIG. 33B, the protrusion 541 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O vertically upward by a distance h5 (h5 <h4).

  From the state of FIG. 33 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the orthogonal state upward (refer to FIG. 32 (a)) by an angle T14 (T14≈90 degrees> T13). Is rotated), the sliding projection 574 is accommodated in the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and the projection 541 is disposed at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward. This reaches the state (see FIG. 34 (a)). During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is brought into contact with the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, and the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region).

  Here, the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32B to 34A and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. Although the rotational direction of the dynamic crank member 570 is different, the rotational region (phase) of the rotating crank member 570 is the same.

  In this case, in the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32B to 34A, the inner periphery of the deformed elongated hole 553 in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is obtained. While the surface is not in contact, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (non-transmission region), while the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIGS. The driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area).

  Therefore, the mode of transmission of the driving force to the rotating arm member 550 can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570. Thereby, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, two types of effects of the rotating arm member 550 can be formed.

  That is, in this embodiment, when the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 rotates between FIG. 32A and FIG. 34A, the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated, the rotating arm member 550 is oscillated by free fall depending on the gravitational acceleration until the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 (non-transmission region). On the other hand, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the rotating arm member 550 is swung at a speed depending on the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570 (transmission region).

  Thereby, even when the rotation speed of the rotation crank member 570 is constant, the rotation when the rotation crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase by reversing the rotation direction of the rotation crank member 570. Variations in the swing speed of the arm member 550 can be increased.

  Further, the increase in the variation of the swinging speed of the rotating arm member 550 is achieved by the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 (formation of the margin portion D), so that the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550. Other members such as a changeover switch for changing can be made unnecessary, and the member cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the margin portion D is formed on the pivot support hole 552 side of the rotating arm member 550. Therefore, compared with the case where the margin portion D is formed on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552 with respect to the rotation shaft of the rotating crank member 570, the sliding projection portion 574 passes the margin portion D through a predetermined distance. The distance that the protrusion 541b moves downward can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the change in the operation of the rotating arm member 550 remarkable when the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is changed while suppressing the formation range of the margin portion D of the rotating crank member 570.

  From the state of FIG. 34 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)), and rotated clockwise by an angle T15 (T15> T14). ) And the sliding projection 574 is slid by the second non-transmission wall 553c of the odd-shaped long hole 553, and reaches the state of FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward.

  When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 34B, the sliding projection 574 is directed toward the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570 by the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Pressed. In this case, since the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted from moving, the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotation arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in front view from the state of FIG.

  From the state of FIG. 34 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (from an upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) by an angle T16 (T16≈180 degrees> T15). When it is rotated), the sliding projection 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and reaches the state of FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled with respect to the rotating arm member 550, and the sliding projection 574 rotates to the rotating arm. The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 vertically upward.

  From the state of FIG. 35 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32 (a)) and rotated clockwise by an angle T17 (T17> T16). ) And the sliding projection 574 is moved in the transmission groove 553a (transmission region), and the projection 541 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2> h3) (FIG. 35). (See (b)). That is, the turning arm member 550 is swung.

  Here, when the rotation of the rotation crank member 570 and the swing of the rotation arm member 550 are always linked, it is difficult to shift the start timing of the rotation crank member 570 and the rotation arm member 550. . Therefore, when starting the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550, it is necessary to generate a large force corresponding to the rigidity of the force overcoming the inertia of each member. For this reason, a driving device having a large driving force is required, which may increase the size of the driving device.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the starting timing of the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 can be shifted. That is, for example, from the state of FIG. 34 (b) to the state of FIG. 35 (a), only the rotating crank member 570 is rotated until the state of FIG. 35 (a) is reached to the state of FIG. 35 (b). The rotating arm member 550 can be started by interlocking with the rotating crank member 570.

  Thereby, since the momentum of the rotating crank member 570 can be used for starting the rotating arm member 550, the driving force required for the second driving device 560 can be suppressed. Therefore, the second drive device 560 can be reduced in size.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the front in the state shown in FIG. 35B, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a and reaches the state shown in FIG. During this time, since the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 and are in contact with each other, the driving force is transmitted from the sliding projection 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region). ). That is, the turning arm member 550 is swung.

  For these reasons, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed in the clockwise direction as shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the protrusion 541b becomes the reference in a period of 1/4 of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position separated by a distance h1 vertically upward from the horizontal line O to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3 <h1). The projection 541b is maintained at a position separated by a distance h3 vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O in a quarter period of the subsequent rotation cycle, and the projection 541b is vertical from the reference horizontal line O in a half period of the subsequent rotation cycle. The position is moved upward from a position separated by a distance h3 upward to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3). Thereby, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (the moving speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction) can be doubled.

  Further, the moving speed of the rotating arm member 550 is partially increased by the gravitational acceleration when moving downward, and on the other hand, when moving upward, the moving speed is always the same as the rotating speed of the rotating crank member 570. Is done. Thereby, the aspect of the speed change of the projection part 541b (extension / rendering effect apparatus 540) can be changed by the direction of movement of the projection part 541b (extension / rendering effect apparatus 540).

  With reference to FIG. 36, a description will be given of a change in the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b (the expansion / contraction effect device 540) when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise.

  FIG. 36 is a graph showing the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A). In the graph shown in FIG. 36, the horizontal axis indicates the swing angle in such a manner that the upper-right orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A) of the rotating crank member 570 is the left end, and increases in the right direction from there. The distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b is shown.

  In FIG. 36, the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise is indicated by a curve CC1, and the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise. The distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b is indicated by a curve CW1. The curves CC1 and CW1 correspond to the states of the protrusions 541b from FIG. 28 to FIG. 35, respectively. For comparison when the rotating crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase, A curve obtained by horizontally inverting the curve CC1 is shown as an imaginary line as a curve CC2. By comparing the curves CC1 and CW1, as described above, the ascending speed and the descending speed of the protrusion 541b moved up and down by the rotating arm member 550 are changed by reversing the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570. Can do.

  In addition, as a comparison target of the curve CW1, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise, it rotates until the sliding protrusion 574 contacts the second non-transmission wall 553c (see FIG. 28A). A case where the arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A) is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated by a broken line as a curve CW2. This corresponds to the case where the biasing force that causes the torsion spring 517a (see FIG. 23) to swing the rotating arm member 550 upward is set large. In this case, the period during which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position can be further extended.

  In the curves CC1 and CW1, the rotation crank member 570 and the rotation arm member 550 (in the angle range N1 in which the distance from the horizontal reference line O of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A) is maintained unchanged. A non-transmission region in which the driving force is not transmitted is formed between FIG. The width of the angle range N1 can be adjusted by the formation width of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A).

  In addition, in the curve CW1, an angle until the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28A) contacts the deformed long hole 553 (see FIG. 28A) of the rotating arm member 550. In the range N2, a non-transmission region where the driving force is not transmitted is formed between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550. The width of the angle range N2 can be adjusted by the formation width of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b (see FIG. 28A).

  As shown in FIG. 36, a curve between the angle T11 to the angle T14 and the angle T4 to the angle T6, which are cases where the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28A) is arranged in the same phase. The shapes of CW1 and CC1 are different (curve CW1 and curve CC2 obtained by horizontally inverting curve CC1 do not overlap).

  That is, when the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28A) rotates in a manner of lifting the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A) between the angle T4 and the angle T6, the angle is greater. Compared to the case where the rotating crank member 570 rotates in a mode of pushing down the rotating arm member 550 between 11 and the angle T14, the curve becomes gentler.

  This is because, in the curve CW1, the sliding protrusion 574 (see FIG. 28A) abuts on the second non-transmission wall 553c (see FIG. 28A) of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A). 28 (a)) is rotated, and in the curve CC1, the sliding projection 574 abuts against the selection wall portion 553d (see FIG. 28 (a)) of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is rotated. By.

  Returning to FIG. As described above, in the deformed long hole 553, the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the forming angle with the arc S1 is small). Thus, the right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is formed so as to intersect with the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the formation angle between the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1. The

  In this case, when the distance between the sliding projection 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 that is necessary to cope with the change amount changes. That is, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount in a state where the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d are in contact with each other is as follows. The swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 is smaller than that when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transmission wall 553c are in contact with each other.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, even when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the rotating crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase depending on the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570. The moving speed of the protrusion 541b can be changed.

  In FIG. 28 to FIG. 35, the case where the rotating crank member 570 is rotated in one direction has been described. However, the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 can be reversed halfway. As a timing for reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, the sliding projection 574 is disposed opposite to the first non-transmission wall 553b (for example, FIG. 28A, FIG. 31 and FIG. 32A). 32B, the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position), and the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed opposite the second non-transmission wall 553c (for example, FIG. 29A). 29 (b), FIG. 34 (b) and FIG. 35 (a), the rotating arm member 550 is preferably disposed at the extended position.

  In this case, since the rotation arm member 550 is not in contact with the rotation direction of the rotation crank member 570, the resistance loaded from the rotation arm member 550 to the rotation crank member 570 when the rotation direction of the rotation crank member 570 is reversed is reduced. Can be suppressed. Further, in the present embodiment, a position detection sensor (not shown) that detects the state where the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position and the state where it is disposed at the extended position is disposed. It is possible to facilitate the control of reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 while the moving arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position or the extended position.

  By reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, variations in the reciprocating motion of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the vertical direction can be increased.

  For example, from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 28A), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise by half a circle (see FIG. 29A), and then rotated. The case where the rotation arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position by reversing the direction of rotation of the dynamic crank member 570 and rotating it clockwise by a half turn is illustrated (see FIG. 28A). That is, the sliding projection 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552.

  In this case, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 (h3 <h1) from a position separated vertically by a distance h1 from the reference horizontal line O in a half period of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. ) And move down to a position separated by a distance. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) in which the horizontal axis is 0 degrees to 180 degrees. Next, the protrusion 541b extends from a position separated vertically by a distance h3 from the reference horizontal line O to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3) from the reference horizontal line O in a half period of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. Move up. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) with the horizontal axis from 180 degrees to 360 degrees.

  Accordingly, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 is moved upward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and the predetermined distance (h1-h3). The same period can be used.

  Further, for example, from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 32A), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated 1/4 turn clockwise (see FIG. 34A). Next, the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, and the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position by rotating counterclockwise by 1/4 turn (FIG. 32). (See (a)). That is, the sliding projection 574 moves on the side close to the shaft support hole 552.

  In this case, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 (h3) from a position separated vertically by a distance h1 from the reference horizontal line O in a quarter of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. Move downward to a position separated by <h1). In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along a curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) in which the horizontal axis is 0 degrees to 90 degrees. Next, the protrusion 541b is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1> h3) from a position separated by a distance h3 vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O in a quarter of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. Move up to position. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) with the horizontal axis of 270 to 360 degrees.

  Accordingly, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and is increased by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). The moving period can be made the same, and the predetermined period can be shortened as compared with the case where the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552.

  In addition, when the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves downward, it can be partially dropped (from the angle T11 to the angle T13), while the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves upward. When doing so, it is always moved at a speed along the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, even when the rotation speed of the rotation crank member 570 is the same, the movement mode of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 when the rotation crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase according to the movement direction of the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 ( The degree of speed change) can be changed. In other words, the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 in the range from the angle T11 to the angle T13 in FIG. 36 can be made different.

  Next, the difference in swing angle due to the difference in the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction production device 540 will be described. First, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the extended state will be described.

  37 to 39 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 37 to 39 illustrate the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the extended state (when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the extended position). 37 shows a state in which the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. 38, the protrusion 541 starts from the state of FIG. FIG. 39 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved in a clockwise direction from the state of FIG. 37. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIGS. 37 to 39 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIG. Therefore, in FIGS. 37 to 39, the front plate member 546 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the extended state is formed in an arc shape centered on the first shaft portion 512, and is rotated. Along the extending direction of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the arm member 550. In other words, the arc-shaped hole 554 extends along the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the inner surface of the arc-shaped hole 554 is not disposed facing the swinging direction of the protrusion 541b, and the arc-shaped hole 554 does not function as a stopper for stopping the swinging of the protrusion 541b. Accordingly, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b depends on how the rotation of the rotating plate 520 is restricted. That is, the rotary plate 520 can swing until it contacts the third stopper portion 518c, the protrusion 541b can swing counterclockwise to the swing angle θ1, and the rotary plate 520 is in the second position. The protrusion 541b can swing to the swing angle θ2 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, until it comes into contact with the stopper 518b.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 39, when the protrusion 541b is swung to the left in the front view at a swing angle θ2, the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550. In this case, the expansion / contraction production device 540 is moved in the expansion / contraction direction independently of the rotating arm member 550, and the projection 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554, which may cause malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first raised fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e of the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 are provided with the turning arm member even when the protruding portion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 of the turning arm member 550. By being arranged so as to be able to engage with 550, the projection 541b and the arcuate hole 554 can be aligned. That is, it is possible to prevent the expansion / contraction effect device 540 from moving in the expansion / contraction direction independently of the rotating arm member 550.

  Thereby, the length of the rotating arm member 550 can be shortened while eliminating the defect that the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning area | region of the rotation arm member 550 can be suppressed, and the arrangement | positioning area | region of another movable member can be ensured by that much. Further, the material cost of the rotating arm member 550 can be reduced.

  Further, when the rotating arm member 550 swings in a state in which the protruding portion 541b is separated from the arc-shaped hole 554 (see FIG. 39), the positional relationship between the protruding portion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 is shifted, and the protruding portion 541b is circular. It becomes difficult to return to the arc-shaped hole 554, which may cause malfunction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding projection 574 abuts on the deformed elongated hole 553, thereby preventing the swing arm member 550 from swinging (see FIG. 39).

  In addition, the movement trajectory of the point farthest from the rotation axis of the sliding protrusion 574 (the point farthest from the rotation axis) is formed along the side surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 that contacts the sliding protrusion 574. Therefore, the rotating crank member 570 can be rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 39 while maintaining the posture of the rotating arm member 550.

  Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates counterclockwise, immediately after the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the overhanging position (FIG. )), The protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554, and then the protrusion 541b returns to the arcuate hole 554 until the rotating crank member 570 is arranged in the state shown in FIG. think of. Even after the protrusion 541b has returned to the arcuate hole 554, even if the rotating crank member 570 is further rotated and the rotating arm member 550 swings to the state shown in FIG. 30B, the protrusion 541b. Does not fail to return to the arcuate hole 554.

  In this case, when the rotation arm member 550 and the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are respectively swung, the rotation crank member 570 is controlled to stop or start in accordance with the positional relationship between the projection 541b and the arcuate hole 554. There is no need, and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 can be continued. In other words, it is only necessary to control the swinging timing of the expansion / contraction production device 540, and the rotating crank member 570 does not need to be controlled, and may be kept rotating. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a control load of a complicated operation of swinging the expansion / contraction effect device 540 and the turning arm member 550 at different timings.

  In the present embodiment, a tip portion 554a is formed so that the width of the arc-shaped hole 554 is increased toward the opening end portion (left end portion in FIG. 39) of the arc-shaped hole 554. Accordingly, it is possible to tolerate a large displacement (a displacement in the expansion / contraction direction of the expansion / contraction effect device 540) when the protrusion 541b returns to the arc-shaped hole 554, and the first raised fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e A large clearance with the rotating arm member 550 can be secured.

  Next, the swing angle in the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state that is a state between the extended state and the reduced state will be described. From the state in which the expansion / contraction production device 540 is in the extended state (see FIG. 37), the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arcuate hole 554 by swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise. Device 540 forms an intermediate state.

  40 to 42 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 40 to 42 illustrate the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state (when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed between the extended position and the retracted position). In this case, the radius formed by the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is shorter than that when the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 is in the extended state (see FIGS. 37 to 39). That is, the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b is changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction.

  40 shows a state in which the protruding portion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. 41, the protruding portion 541 is the front surface from the state of FIG. FIG. 42 shows a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved in the clockwise direction from the state of FIG. 40.

  The posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 40 to 42 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIG. Therefore, in FIGS. 40 to 42, the front plate member 546 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2.

  At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the movement of the arcuate hole 554 upward by the swinging arm member 550 swinging. Therefore, the arc-shaped hole 554 has a function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b and a function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546, as will be described later. As a result, functions can be consolidated.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 to 42, the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the shape of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the intermediate state are the radius of curvature. Although the central axes of both coincide on the upper side, the radius of curvature and the posture are different from each other. Since the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 intersect at the formation angle α1 (see FIG. 42), the arc-shaped hole 554 serves as a stopper for stopping the swing of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 42). .

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b is not in contact with the arcuate hole 554. That is, since the rotary plate 520 can be swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, the protrusion 541b can be swung counterclockwise to the swing angle θ3 (angle θ3 = Angle θ1).

  As shown in FIG. 42, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the first stopper surface 554b of the arcuate hole 554. In this state, the guide fastening portion 541e is brought into contact with the upper side surface of the turning arm member 550, and the state change in the expansion / contraction direction of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is prevented. The movement is stopped.

  That is, the rotating plate 520 is not swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protrusion 541b can be swung clockwise to the swing angle θ4 (angle θ4 <angle θ2). . Accordingly, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed according to the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction. Thereby, the variation of the swing angle of the expansion / contraction production | presentation apparatus 540 can be increased by making the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction production | presentation apparatus 540 differ. 42, the guide fastening portion 541e is brought into contact with the main body portion 551 of the rotating arm member 550.

  Next, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the reduced state will be described. From the state in which the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in the intermediate state (see FIG. 40), the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arcuate hole 554 by swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise, and the expansion / contraction effect is achieved. Device 540 creates a reduced state.

  43 to 45 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 43 to 45 illustrate a case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms a reduced state (when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position). In this case, the radius formed by the swing trajectory of the protrusion 541b is shorter than when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms the intermediate state (see FIGS. 40 to 42). That is, the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b is changed depending on the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction.

  43 shows a state in which the protruding portion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect producing device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510. In FIG. 44, the protruding portion 541 starts from the state of FIG. FIG. 45 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise from the state of FIG. 43. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIGS. 43 to 45 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIG. Therefore, in FIGS. 43 to 45, the front plate member 546 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

  At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the movement of the arcuate hole 554 upward by the swinging arm member 550 swinging. Therefore, the arc-shaped hole 554 has both a function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b and a function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546. As a result, functions can be consolidated.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b and the shape of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 are different from each other when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms a contracted state. The central axis of curvature radius is reversed. That is, the central axis of the radius of curvature of the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b is below the protrusion 541b, and the central axis of the radius of curvature of the arc-shaped hole 554 is disposed above the arc-shaped hole 554. In this case, the swing trajectory of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 intersect at a formation angle α2 (angle α2> angle α1), and the arc-shaped hole 554 functions as a stopper for stopping the swing of the protrusion 541b ( 44 and 45).

  As shown in FIG. 44, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the second stopper surface 554c of the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the rotating plate 520 is not swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c (see FIG. 41), and the protrusion 541b can be swung counterclockwise to a swing angle θ5. (Angle θ5 <angle θ1 = angle θ3).

  As shown in FIG. 45, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the third stopper surface 554d of the arcuate hole 554. In this case, the rotating plate 520 is not swung until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protrusion 541b can be swung clockwise to the swing angle θ6 (angle θ6 <angle θ4). <Angle θ2). Accordingly, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed according to the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction. Thereby, the variation of the rocking | fluctuation width of the expansion / contraction production apparatus 540 can be increased.

  Here, the formation angle α2 between the movement locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 in the reduced state is larger than the formation angle α1 between the movement locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 in the intermediate state. The

  In the relationship between the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554, if the formation angle is 90 degrees, the protrusion 541b is swung in a manner crossing the arc-shaped hole 554, and the protrusion 541b The rocking angle is minimized. On the other hand, if the formation angle is 0 degree (see FIGS. 37 to 39) in the relationship between the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554, the protrusion 541b extends along the extending direction of the arc-shaped hole 554. Thus, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b is maximized. Therefore, the swing angle of the projection 541b in the reduced state (formation angle α2) can be made smaller than the swing angle of the projection 541b in the intermediate state (formation angle α1) (formation angle α1 <formation angle α2). ).

  As described above, by changing the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction production device 540, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b is changed, and at this time, the inner peripheral surface (the first stopper surface 554b, the second stopper surface 554b) of the arc-shaped hole 554 is changed. The stopper surface 554c and the third stopper surface 554d) function as a stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540. Thereby, the inner peripheral surface of the arc-shaped hole 554 can be used as a part for restricting the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in each case where the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is different. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a space for disposing a stopper that restricts the swing angle of the protrusion 541b.

  In addition, the stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion / contraction production device 540 is retracted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position. Therefore, unlike the case where a fixed stopper is provided on the front side of the 3rd symbol display device 81, the stopper remains on the front surface of the 3rd symbol display device 81 even if the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position. Can be prevented. Thereby, when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position, other members can be disposed on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81, and therefore other movable members (for example, the slide operation unit 700). The overhanging space of the column member 720) can be secured.

  In addition, the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotation arm member 550 functions as a stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 and the second drive of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 by swinging the rotation arm member 550. And a function as a transmission device that transmits the driving force of the device 560 and causes the expansion / contraction production device 540 to perform expansion / contraction operation. As a result, the functions can be consolidated and the number of parts can be reduced.

  The tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. The tilt operation unit 600 is a unit that swings the effect member 620 (tilt operation) (see FIG. 12), and the slide operation unit 700 is a unit that slides the tilt operation unit 600 in the left-right direction. 46 is a front perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 47 is a rear perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700. 46 and 47, a state in which the column members 720 (see FIG. 47) of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 are arranged at the retracted position is illustrated.

  48 is a front exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 49 is a rear exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700. 48 and 49, the tilting operation unit 600 is illustrated without being disassembled for easy understanding.

  The slide operation unit 700 is formed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with one end fastened and fixed to a base member 710 formed in a plate shape elongated in the left-right direction and the slide plate 711 of the base member 710. A column member 720, and a slide rail 730 in which one end portion is fastened and fixed to the column member 720 and the other end portion to which the base member 610 of the tilting operation unit 600 is fastened and fixed is extendable in the vertical direction; A connecting member 740 that is formed to be slidable on the back rail 716 of the main body 710 and is pivotally supported by the pivotal support 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 and a driving force for moving the column member 720 in the left-right direction are generated. It mainly includes a drive device 750 and a back cover member 760 formed on the back side of the drive device 750 and fastened and fixed to the base member 710.

  The base member 710 is a member that forms a skeleton of the slide operation unit 700. The base member 710 is formed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, the slide plate 711 to which the column member 720 is fastened and fixed from the back side, and the back view of the base member 710. A shaft support hole 712 that is recessed in the lower left portion with a circular cross section and is supported by the fixed shaft portion 753a, and a shaft support hole that is recessed in the shape of a long hole extending in the left-right direction in the lower right portion of the base member 710 when viewed from the back. 712 and the slide shaft support hole 713 in which the moving shaft portion 754a is slidably supported, and the solenoid 712 is swingable up and down by a solenoid, and the locking portion 725 of the column member 720 in the left-right direction. A lever member 714 that restricts the movement of the base member 710, and an upper rolling member 742 of the connecting member 740 that rolls upward and protrudes in a cross-section downward arc shape toward the front side at the upper end of the base member 710. A front rail portion 715, a rear rail portion 716 that is recessed from the rear side in a circular arc shape in the front rail portion 715 and through which the insertion plate portion 741 b of the connecting member 740 is inserted, and a shaft that is pivoted on the lower left portion of the base member 710 when viewed from the rear side A slide origin detection sensor 717 disposed at a position on the right side of the shaft support hole 712 at a position where the vertical position coincides with the support hole 712, and a slide shaft support hole 713 and a vertical position at the lower right side of the base member 710 when viewed from the back. And a slide origin detection sensor 718 disposed at a position on the left side of the slide shaft support hole 713.

  Since the lever member 714 regulates the sliding movement of the column member 720 that is fastened and fixed to the slide plate 711 in the left-right direction, the driving force of the driving device 750 is not required when the tilting operation unit 600 is maintained at the retracted position. Can do.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the tilting operation unit 600 is moved along the formation direction (arc trajectory) of the front rail portion 715 and the back rail portion 716, the right and left of the column member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 The sliding movement in the direction can be caused by the action of gravity loaded on the tilting operation unit 600. For example, when the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 46), the moving direction of the tilting operation unit 600 is directed obliquely downward along the shape of the front rail portion 715. Therefore, even if the moving direction of the column member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 is the left-right direction along the moving direction of the slide plate 711, the column member 720 may be moved by gravity. In the present embodiment, the lever member 714 is swung downward to engage with the locking portion 725 of the column member 720 and the movement of the column member 720 in the left-right direction is restricted. Can be maintained in the retracted position. Therefore, the durability of the driving device 750 can be improved.

  The slide origin detection sensor 717 is used to detect whether or not the column member 720 is disposed at the origin position (sliding position) of the slide movement. The slide origin detection sensor 717 has a pair of light emitting units and light receiving units, and these light emitting units and light receiving units are provided side by side in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, the light emitting unit is arranged to emit light from the back side to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light emitting unit is configured to receive (detect) light emitted from the light emitting unit. A light receiving portion is arranged with a 10 mm gap on the front side of the. Although details will be described later, when the column member 720 that is moved in the left-right direction is moved to the origin position (retracted position), the lower end portion of the column member 720 is located between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the slide origin detection sensor 717. Configured to be located. Therefore, when the column member 720 is disposed at the origin position (retracted position), the light traveling from the light emitting unit to the light receiving unit is shielded by the lower end of the column member 720. Thereby, by determining whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting unit to the light receiving unit of the slide origin detection sensor 717 is blocked, it is determined whether or not the column member 720 is disposed at the origin position (retracted position). Can be determined.

  The slide position detection sensor 718 is used to detect whether or not the column member 720 is disposed at the extended position of the slide movement. The slide position detection sensor 718 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit that have the same positional relationship as the slide origin sensor 717. Although details will be described later, when the column member 720 that is moved in the left-right direction is moved to the extended position, the lower end portion of the column member 720 is positioned between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the slide position detection sensor 718. It is configured as follows. Therefore, when the column member 720 is disposed at the protruding position, the light traveling from the light emitting unit to the light receiving unit is shielded by the lower end of the column member 720. Accordingly, it is determined whether or not the column member 720 is disposed at the overhanging position by determining whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting unit to the light receiving unit of the slide position detection sensor 718 is blocked. Can do.

  The column member 720 includes a main body portion 721 formed in a plate shape that is long in the vertical direction, and a slide plate 711 of the base member 710 that is provided in the left-right direction at the lower end portion of the main body portion 721 and drilled in the front-rear direction. A first fastening portion 722 through which a screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted, and a second fastening in which the slide rail 730 is fastened and connected to the left end portion of the main body portion 721 in the front-rear direction and drilled in the front-rear direction. Part 723, a long hole extending in a direction parallel to the connecting direction of the second fastening part 723 and formed on the right side of the main body 721 in the front view, and the right of the main body 721 A hook-shaped locking portion 725 that protrudes upward from the lower end portion and meshes with the lever member 714, and a lower lid portion that is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the main body portion 721 and the belt 755 of the driving device 750 is sandwiched between the main body portion 721. 726 and main body 7 1, a rolling part 727 that protrudes from the rear side of the lower end part 1 and is formed to be able to roll on the inner peripheral surface of the slide recessed part 764 of the back cover member 760, and is suspended downward and forward from the upper end part of the main body part 721. And a coil spring 728 mainly connected to the flange-shaped portion 617 of the base member 610 at the lower end.

  The slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed to the support column member 720 in a posture capable of expanding and contracting in the connecting direction of the second fastening portion 723.

  The slide hole 724 is a long hole extending in a direction parallel to the connecting direction of the second fastening portion 723, and is a long hole through which the auxiliary member 615 of the tilting operation unit 600 is inserted. Therefore, the slide hole 724 can suppress the displacement of the tilting operation unit 600 that moves up and down in the left-right direction (the relative rotation of the tilting operation unit 600 with respect to the column member 720).

  The lower lid portion 726 is formed with a tooth profile extending in the front-rear direction on the upper surface side. This tooth profile is a shape that meshes with a tooth profile formed on the inner peripheral surface of the belt 755 of the driving device 750. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the support member 720 from slipping with respect to the belt 755 of the driving device 750.

  The lower lid portion 726 is provided with a shielding portion 726a on the lower surface side for shielding light emitted from the light emitting portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718. The shielding portion 726a has a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in the sliding direction (left-right direction) of the column member 720 (and the tilting operation unit 600), and the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the movable direction is the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718. It is formed thinner (about 1 mm) than the gap (about 10 mm) between the light emitting part and the light receiving part. The shielding portion 726a is movable between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718 by moving the column member 720 in the left-right direction. When the column member 720 (and the tilting operation unit 600) is at the origin position (retracted position), the shielding portion 726a is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717, and the slide origin Light irradiated from the light emitting unit of the detection sensor 717 to the light receiving unit is blocked. Further, when the column member 720 (and the tilting operation unit 600) is in the extended position, the shielding portion 726a is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide position detection sensor 718, and the slide position detection is performed. Light irradiated from the light emitting unit of the sensor 718 to the light receiving unit is blocked. Thus, when it is detected that the light receiving part (or light emitting part) of the slide origin detection sensor 717 is shielded by the shielding part 726a, the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the origin position (retracted position). Can be determined. Further, when it is detected that the light receiving part (or light emitting part) of the slide position detection sensor 718 is shielded by the shielding part 726a, it can be determined that the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the overhanging position. it can.

  The rolling part 727 is inserted into the slide recessed part 764 of the back cover 760 so as to be able to roll, thereby suppressing the frictional resistance and suppressing the inclination in the front-rear direction around the lower end part of the column member 720. be able to.

  The coil spring 728 is a biasing force that moves the tilting operation unit 600 upward. Since the urging force from the coil spring 728 is always applied to the tilting operation unit 600, the tilting operation unit 600 is suppressed from dropping downward due to gravity.

  The connecting member 740 is pivotally supported by a triangular plate-shaped main body member 741 that is rotatably supported by the shaft supporting protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 and a rolling shaft 741c that protrudes from the main body member 741. A pair of cylindrical upper rolling members 742 rolled on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 of the member 710 and a rolling shaft 741c of the main body member 741 are fastened and fixed from the front side to cover the front side of the front rail portion 715. The front cover member 743 arranged in a mode, and the lower half portion of the front cover member 743 disposed on the back side of the front cover member 743 are fitted and held on the front cover member 743, and the upper half portion rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. And a cylindrical lower rolling member 744 to be moved.

  The main body member 741 is a member formed in a triangular plate shape, and is a circular recess recessed from the back at the upper end, and is a shaft that is rotatably supported by the shaft support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600. A support 741a, a plate-like member projecting to the front side at the lower end, an insertion plate 741b that is slidably inserted into the back rail 716 of the base member 710, and an insertion plate from the shaft support 741a It mainly includes a pair of rolling shafts 741c that project in a columnar shape from the position symmetrical with respect to the perpendicular drawn to 741b to the front side and on which the upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported.

  Since the insertion plate portion 741b is inserted into the back rail portion 716 of the base member 710, the connecting member 740 is formed to be movable along the back rail portion 716. Therefore, the tilting operation unit 600 that is pivotally supported by the pivotal support portion 741a is also formed to be movable along the back rail portion 716.

  A pair of rolling shafts 741c are formed at positions symmetrical with respect to a perpendicular drawn from the shaft support portion 741a to the insertion plate portion 741b. Therefore, when the pair of rolling shafts 741c are brought into contact with the front rail portion 715 formed in an arc shape via the upper rolling portion 742, a load (from the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 to the connecting member 740 ( Force in the normal direction of the arc) passes through the shaft support 741a. Therefore, the shaft support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 can be stably held by the connecting member 740.

  The upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 741a and is in contact with the upper surface of the front rail portion 715. That is, when the connecting member 740 is slid along the front rail portion 715, the upper rolling portion 742 is rolled on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715. As a result, the frictional resistance generated when the connecting member 740 slides can be reduced, and the driving force required for the sliding movement can be suppressed.

  The lower rolling member 744 is externally fitted to the lower portion of the front cover member 743 so that the lower half portion is rotatable, and the upper end portion is in contact with the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. That is, when the connecting member 740 is slid along the front rail portion 715, the lower rolling portion 744 is rolled on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. Thereby, the frictional resistance generated between the connecting member 740 and the front rail portion 715 during the sliding movement can be reduced, and the driving force necessary for the sliding movement can be suppressed.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the upper rolling member 742 rolls with the upper surface of the front rail portion 715, and the lower rolling member 744 rolls with the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. Thereby, the state which pinched | interposed the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail part 715 with the upper side rolling member 742 and the lower side rolling member 744 of the connection member 740 can be maintained, suppressing a frictional resistance.

  Here, since the center of gravity is formed upward as described later, the tilting operation unit 600 may be tilted in the front-rear direction. In this case, since the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 are sandwiched between the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744, the connecting member 740 is against the tilt in both the front and rear directions of the tilting operation unit 600. , Resistance can be generated. As a result, the posture of the tilting operation unit 600 can be easily maintained.

  The front cover member 743 is pivotally supported from the front side of the rolling shaft 741c of the connecting member 740, thereby pivotally supporting the upper rolling member 742 so that it cannot be pulled out.

  The driving device 750 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 and generates a driving force for sliding the support member 720, a driving gear 752 pivotally supported by the driving motor 751, and a driving gear 752. A shaft fixed gear 753 around which the belt 755 is wound, and a shaft moving gear 754 which is disposed apart from the shaft fixed gear 753 and is wound around the belt 755 so that the rotary shaft 754a is slidably movable. The belt 755 wound around the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 and moved by the rotation of the shaft fixed gear 753, and a coil that generates a biasing force that moves the shaft moving gear 754 away from the shaft fixed gear 753. And a spring 756.

  The shaft fixing gear 753 is a columnar member serving as a rotating shaft, and includes a fixed shaft portion 753 a that is inserted into the shaft support hole 712 of the base member 710. The shaft moving gear 754 includes a moving shaft portion 754 a that is a cylindrical member as a rotating shaft and is inserted into the slide shaft support hole 713 of the base member 710.

  The shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 are formed as gears having the same shape. On the inner peripheral surface of the belt 755, a tooth profile that meshes with the gear teeth of the shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 is formed. Accordingly, slip between the belt 755 and the shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 can be suppressed, and the rotation amount of the shaft fixing gear 753 can be reliably transmitted to the belt 755.

  One end of the coil spring 756 is fixed to a bowl-shaped portion formed on the right side of the slide shaft support hole 713n of the base member 710, and the other end is fixed to a case covering the shaft moving gear 754. . As a result, an urging force for moving the shaft moving gear 754 to the opposite side of the shaft support hole 712 can be generated, and an appropriate tension can be applied to the belt 755. Therefore, the belt 755 can move the shaft fixing gear 753 and the shaft moving. It is possible to prevent the gear 754 from falling off.

  The back cover member 760 is a member that covers the driving device 750 on the back surface of the base member 710, and has a main body portion 761 formed in a box shape whose front side is opened, and a fixed shaft portion 753 a on the bottom surface of the main body portion 761. A recessed portion 762 that is a recess for receiving, a moving recessed portion 763 that is extended in the same shape as the slide shaft support hole 713 and that receives a moving shaft portion 754a, and a rolling portion 727 that is extended in the left-right direction. And a slide concave portion 764 which is a depression.

  The slide recessed portion 764 is a recess in which the rolling portion 727 rolls on the upper and lower inner surfaces. While suppressing the frictional resistance of the sliding movement of the support | pillar member 720, it suppresses that the support | pillar member 720 inclines in the front-back direction. That is, when the column member 720 is tilted in the front-rear direction, the rolling portion 727 comes into contact with either the upper inner side surface or the lower inner side surface of the slide recessed portion 764. Thereby, the inclination to the front-back direction of the support | pillar member 720 can be suppressed.

  Next, the tilting operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. 50 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600, and FIG. 51 is a rear exploded perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600.

  The tilting operation unit 600 includes a plate-like base member 610 fastened and fixed to the other end of the slide rail 730, a box-like effect member 620 whose lower end is pivotally supported by the base member 610, A first driving device 630 that generates a driving force for swinging the effect member 620, a transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the first drive device 630 to the effect member 620, and a contact member 640 for transmission. A torsion spring 650 that generates a biasing force that moves the member 640 and a second driving device 660 that generates a driving force that opens and closes the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 of the rendering member 620 are mainly provided. .

  The base member 610 includes a main body 611 that is formed in a vertically long plate shape with the slide rail 730 fastened and fixed, and a shaft support portion of the connecting member 740 that protrudes in a columnar shape from the front side of the main body 611. The shaft support protrusion 612 on which the shaft 741a is supported, and a circular hole drilled in the front-rear direction vertically above the shaft support protrusion 612, and the swing shaft 626 of the effect member 620 are supported in a swingable manner. A first shaft support hole 613 and a circular hole drilled in the front-rear direction vertically above the first shaft support hole 613, and the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable. A biaxial support hole 614, an auxiliary member 615 formed on the back surface of the main body 611 and inserted into the slide hole 724 of the column member 720 so as to be vertically slidable, and an insertion hole through which the drive shaft of the first drive device 630 is inserted 616 and the lower end of the main body 611 It mainly includes a bowl-shaped bowl-shaped part 617 extending toward the surface side, and a tilting origin sensor 618 provided with a pair of light-emitting parts and a light-receiving part disposed on the upper left part of the back surface of the main body part 611. .

  The second shaft support hole 614 includes a lower receiving plate portion 614a that protrudes in a circular arc shape from the lower edge to the front side. The lower receiving plate portion 614a guides the rotation of the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640. The lower receiving plate portion 614a is formed with a left-right width that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 642 (see FIG. 53A).

  Since the auxiliary member 615 is inserted through the slide hole 724, the inclination of the base member 610 in the left-right direction can be suppressed, so that the base member 610 can be smoothly slid in the up-down direction.

  The hook-shaped portion 617 is a portion on which one end of the coil spring 728 is hooked and a biasing force is applied.

  With reference to FIG. 52, the production member 620 and the second drive device 660 will be described. 52 is an exploded front perspective view of the effect member 620 and the second drive device 660. FIG. The sub-display device 690 disposed inside the effect member 620 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are referred to as appropriate for the description of the effect member 620 and the second drive device 660.

  The effect member 620 is a box-like member in which the sub display device 690 is disposed, and extends to the front from the top and bottom of the rectangular plate-shaped main body member 621 and the main body member 621 and covers the main body member 621. An upper and lower cover member 622 that is bent in an aspect, and a left and right cover member 623 that is a plate-like member that is attached from both side surfaces of the upper and lower cover member 622 and forms a rectangular box shape with the upper and lower cover members 622 opened forward; A member that opens and closes the front opening, and is a member that opens and closes the front opening together with the first curtain member 624 connected to the fitting hole 665a of the second driving device 660 and moved. A second curtain member 625 that is moved by being pulled by the first curtain member 624, and a columnar swinging shaft portion that protrudes from the lower back of the main body member 621. 26 and a position on the lower left side of the back surface of the main body member 621, and when the effect member 620 is disposed at the origin position, the tilt origin sensor 618 is disposed at a position that shields light emitted from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion. The center of gravity position G (see FIG. 53) is formed above (higher position) than the swinging shaft portion 626. The center-of-gravity position G is formed on a straight line passing through the sliding shaft portion 621a and the swinging shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53) in the inverted state (see FIG. 53).

  The main body member 621 includes a cylindrical sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 51) that protrudes on the back side vertically above the swing shaft portion 626. The sliding shaft portion 621a is slidably inserted into the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 51).

  The upper and lower cover members 622 are members that accommodate the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 inside in a state where the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are opened by the driving force of the driving device 660. .

  The left and right cover members 623 are provided with slide grooves 623a that are formed in a groove shape on the inner side surface and in which the slide protrusions 625c of the second curtain member 625 can slide.

  The slide groove 623a is connected to a curved groove formed in an arc shape at the upper and lower ends of a linear groove extending vertically. Accordingly, the second curtain member 625 is slid and moved in such a manner that linear movement and curved movement occur in order along the shape of the slide groove 623a.

  The first curtain member 624 is a member that swings in the vertical direction about the opening / closing shaft 664 of the second drive device 660, and a main body 624a having a shape in which a plate material is bent in a C-shaped section, and the main body A fitting portion 624b that protrudes in the left-right direction from the end portion of 624a and is fitted into the fitting hole 665a of the second driving device 660 so as not to be relatively rotatable, and one end portion in the vicinity of the fitting portion 624b is a main body portion. And a connecting member 624c that is pivotally supported by 624 and whose other end is connected to the connecting protrusion 625b of the second curtain member 625.

  The second curtain member 625 is a member that is pulled by the first curtain member 624 and moved in the vertical direction. The main body 625a is formed in a plate shape with a C-shaped cross section, and the cross section of the main body 624a has a C-shaped cross section. A connecting protrusion 625b that protrudes in the left-right direction from the end and is connected to the other end of the connecting member 624c, and a slide groove of the left and right cover member 623 that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the bent portion of the main body 625a. And a slide protrusion 625c inserted through 623a.

  The second drive device 660 includes a drive motor 661 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the effect member 620, a drive gear 662 that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 661, and one gear that meshes with the drive gear 662. A pair of transmission gears 663 that rotate in opposite directions, and an opening / closing shaft that is inserted into the transmission gear 663 so as not to be relatively rotatable and is rotatably supported on the front side of the main body member 621 of the effect member 620 by an unillustrated shaft support mechanism. 664 and a transmission member 665 fixed to both ends of the pair of opening and closing shafts 664 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

  The transmission member 665 includes a fitting hole 665a into which the fitting portion 624b of the first curtain member 624 is fitted so as not to be relatively rotatable. As a result, the first curtain member 624 is swung up and down around the opening / closing shaft 664.

  Returning to FIG. 50 and FIG. The first drive device 630 includes a drive motor 631 that is inserted into the insertion hole 616 of the base member 610 and fastened and fixed to the base member, and a screw gear-shaped worm 632 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631. And a helical gear-shaped worm wheel 633 that meshes with the worm 632.

  The worm 632 is formed by a double thread. In this embodiment, since the number of teeth of the worm wheel 633 that meshes with the worm 632 is about 20, the worm wheel 633 rotates once while the worm 632 rotates ten times. Thereby, the rotation angle of the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 when the drive motor 631 is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution can be greatly reduced.

  The worm wheel 633 protrudes from the center of the rotation shaft, is inserted into the second shaft support hole 614 of the base member 610, and has a locking protrusion 633a that is locked to the tubular portion 643 of the transmission member 640 so as not to be relatively rotatable. Prepare. The transmission of the driving force between the worm 632 and the worm wheel 633 is structurally limited to one direction from the worm 632 to the worm wheel 633 (when the worm wheel 633 is actively rotated, the force is 632 in the axial direction). Thereby, the load which the drive motor 631 receives when stopping the worm wheel 633 can be reduced. Further, the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 can be stopped in a state where the power of the drive motor 631 is cut off, and the power consumption of the drive motor 631 can be suppressed.

  The transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a) and 53 (b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. 53 (a) and 53 (b), the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are appropriately referred to for the description of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. To do. 53A shows an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642. In this state, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 is applied to the transmission member 640. It is balanced in the swing direction. FIG. 53B shows a state in which the transmission member 640 is swung by a predetermined amount counterclockwise from the inverted state of FIG. 53A and the effect member 620 is swung by a predetermined amount.

  The transmission member 640 is a member that is swung by the rotation of the worm wheel 633 (see FIG. 50). A cylindrical portion 642 that extends in the direction and engages with the locking projection 633a of the first drive device 630, and a length that extends in the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 642 at the other end of the main body portion 641. The sliding hole 643 drilled as a hole, the contact part 644 spaced apart on both sides of the swinging direction of the main body part 641, and the contact part 644 and the front side surface of the main body part 641 are connected. And an arc-shaped front arc plate portion 645 having a wide width and an arc-shaped back arc plate portion 646 having an arc-shape having a width that connects the contact portion 644 and the rear side surface of the main body portion 641.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 645, and the back arc plate portion 646 are arranged so as to surround the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the torsion spring 650 from dropping (disengaging) from the transmission member 640.

  The cylindrical portion 642 is pivotally supported in the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) of the base member 610, and is locked to the locking protrusion 633a (see FIG. 50) of the first drive device 630 so as not to be relatively rotatable. The

  The sliding hole 643 is inserted through the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620. Thus, when the transmission member 640 is swung around the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) by the driving force of the first driving device 630 (see FIG. 50), the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is obtained. Is slid about the first shaft support hole 613 while the effect member 620 is slid about the first shaft support hole 613.

  By swinging the effect member 620 in this way, it is possible to suppress the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the drive motor 631 is rotated by the minimum unit of control resolution of the first drive device 630. For example, as a method of swinging the effect member 620, a method of directly connecting a gear to the swinging shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor to the gear can be considered. However, in this case, the angle P0 of the minimum unit of the control resolution of the drive motor (see FIG. 53 (a)) is shown to be several times larger than the actual angle P0 for easy understanding. When the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is shifted from the inverted state to the left and right direction, the amount of movement X1 increases as the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 moves away from the swinging shaft portion 626. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is more difficult to adjust as the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is separated from the swinging shaft portion 626, and the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is disposed directly above the swinging shaft portion 626. It is difficult to make the effect member 620 stationary in the inverted state.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the effect member 620 is coupled to the slide shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620. The length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the cylindrical portion 642 that is the swinging shaft of the transmission member 640 is the length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swinging shaft portion 626 that is the swinging shaft of the effect member 620. It is formed shorter than

  Therefore, even when the effect member 620 is long in the radial direction of the swing shaft portion 626, the angle P0 (see FIG. 53A), which is the minimum unit of the resolution of the control of the first drive device 630. In order to facilitate the operation, the movement amount X2 of the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 when the first driving device 630 is operated at an angle several times larger than the actual angle P0) is suppressed. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the effect member 620 stationary in an inverted state in which the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is disposed directly above the rocking shaft portion 626 that is the rocking shaft.

  Further, as a method of swinging the effect member 620, gear teeth are formed on the effect member 620 on an arc centered on the swing shaft portion 626, and a gear meshing with the gear teeth is rotated by a drive motor. A method of swinging the effect member 620 is conceivable. However, in this case, the greater the swing range of the effect member 620, the greater the range in which the gear teeth on the arc are formed in the left-right direction of the effect member 620. Therefore, when the effect member 620 is formed in a thin shape in the swinging direction, the gear teeth on the arc protrude from the effect member 620, which hinders the effect of the effect. Therefore, the design freedom of the effect member 620 is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the effect member 620 is the swing shaft portion 626 in which the cylindrical portion 642 that is the swing shaft is the swing shaft of the effect member 620. And is connected to the swinging shaft portion 621a at the center of the effect member 620 in the left-right direction. Since the effect member 620 swings following the transmission member 640, the formation range of the transmission member 640 with respect to the swing range of the effect member 620 can be suppressed near the center of the effect member 620 in the left-right direction. Thereby, even if the production member 620 is thin in the left-right direction, the transmission member 640 can be prevented from protruding from the production member 620, and the degree of freedom in design of the production member 620 can be improved.

  The lower surface of the slide shaft portion 621 a of the effect member 620 is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640. Thereby, the weight of the effect member 620 is loaded not only on the swinging shaft portion 626 but also on the transmission member 640. That is, a force that opposes the weight of the effect member 620 can be generated not only from the rocking shaft portion 626 but also from the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640. Therefore, the effect member 640 can be supported at two points of the swinging shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, and the radial force applied to the swinging shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be suppressed. .

  Here, since the inverted state shown in FIG. 53A is the normal state, the effect member 620 can be quickly returned to the inverted state after the transmission member 640 is swung and swung a predetermined amount from the inverted state. Is desirable.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), when the transmission member 640 is swung counterclockwise from the state illustrated in FIG. 53 (a) at a swing angle φ1, the effect member 620 is produced. Is rocked at a rocking angle φ2 (φ2 <φ1).

  That is, the swing angle of the effect member 620 is made smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 640 that is swung by the driving force of the first driving device 630 (see FIG. 50). Therefore, the effect member 620 can be easily returned to the inverted state (see FIG. 53A).

  In the present embodiment, a long-sliding slide hole 643 is formed in the axial diameter direction of the transmission member 640, and the slide shaft portion 621 a of the effect member 620 is inserted into the slide hole 643. The transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 have different swing axes, and the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640 has a shorter swing radius than the slide shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620. As the shaft is swung, the sliding shaft portion 621a moves away from the rocking shaft of the transmission member 640. Therefore, the arm length R1 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state (see FIG. 53A) is swung by a predetermined amount from the inverted state ( 54 (b)), the arm length R2 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is shortened.

  That is, the arm length of the transmission member 640 is shortened as it approaches the inverted state, and the arm length of the transmission member 640 is constant when the transmission member 640 is swung by a predetermined angle. As compared with the case of, it can be made smaller as the inverted state is approached. Therefore, without changing the rotation speed of the drive motor 631, the operating speed of the effect member 620 is increased near the predetermined stop position, while the operation speed of the effect member 620 is decreased near the inverted state, and the effect member 620 is inverted. It is possible to make it easy to stand still in the state (it is possible to easily stop and control the effect member 620 in a state where the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is disposed vertically above the first shaft support hole 613).

  Referring to FIG. 55, the effect member 620 swings with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 by changing the arm length from the sliding shaft portion 621 a of the effect member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640. The change in angle will be described.

  FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the swing angle of the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53A). 55, the rotation axis M1 corresponds to the swinging shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53A) that is the rotation shaft of the effect member 620, and the rotation shaft M2 is the cylindrical portion 642 that is the swinging shaft of the transmission member 640. (See FIG. 53A). The straight lines a1 to a4 are schematic representations of the arrangement of the transmission member 640, are straight lines drawn radially from the rotation axis M2, the straight line a1 passes through the rotation axis M1, and the straight lines a2 to a4 are the straight line a1. Are formed in such a manner that the forming angles are sequentially added by 15 degrees. That is, the angle formed by adjacent straight lines a1 to a4 is 15 degrees.

  An arc drawn with a radius equal to the arm length R1 (see FIG. 53A) around the rotation axis M2 is shown as an arc SR1, and the arm length R2 around the rotation axis M2 (see FIG. 54B) An arc drawn with a radius equal to is shown as arc SR2. The arc SR0 is an arc drawn with the rotation axis M1 as the center, and is an arc having a radius of a length obtained by adding the distance between the rotation axis M1 and the rotation axis M2 to the arm length R1.

  These arcs assume the locus of the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53A). In the present embodiment, a sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 53 (a)) as a connection position protrudes from the effect member 620, and the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR0. . In addition, when the connection position of the production member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR1 or the arc SR2, the production member 620 is formed with an elongated slot in the axial direction, and the transmission member 640 A case where a shaft inserted through the long hole is projected is assumed.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR0 is shown by the intersection point P10, the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR1 is shown by the intersection point P11, and the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR2 is the intersection point P12. Is illustrated.

  Similarly, an intersection point between the straight line a2 and the arc SR0 is illustrated as an intersection point P20, an intersection point between the straight line a2 and the arc SR1 is illustrated as an intersection point P21, and an intersection point between the straight line a2 and the arc SR2 is illustrated as an intersection point P22. An intersection point between the straight line a3 and the arc SR0 is illustrated as an intersection point P30, an intersection point between the straight line a3 and the arc SR1 is illustrated as an intersection point P31, and an intersection point between the straight line a3 and the arc SR2 is illustrated as an intersection point P32. An intersection point between the straight line a4 and the arc SR0 is illustrated as an intersection point P40, an intersection point between the straight line a4 and the arc SR1 is illustrated as an intersection point P41, and an intersection point between the straight line a4 and the arc SR2 is illustrated as an intersection point P42. The intersection point P10 and the intersection point P11 are arranged at the same position, and the intersection point P40 and the intersection point P42 are arranged at the same position.

  As shown in FIG. 55, an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P10 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20 is shown as an angle A10, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P11. The angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P21 is shown as an angle A11, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P12 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P22 is shown as an angle A12. Is done.

  Similarly, an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30 is shown as an angle A20, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P21, the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P31. An angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 is illustrated by an angle A21, and an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P22 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32 is illustrated by an angle A22. An angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P40 is shown as an angle A30, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P31 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P41. Are formed as an angle A31, and an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P42 is shown as an angle A32. Note that these angles correspond to the swing angle of the effect member 620.

  Here, the ratio of (distance between the rotation axis M1 and the rotation axis M2: arm length R1: arm length R2) is (1: 2.32: 2.54) in the present embodiment. When the angle is measured, the angle A32 is 11.07 degrees, the angle A31 is 10.77 degrees, and the angle A30 is 11.37 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a4 and the straight line a3, the swing angle of the effect member 640 is the largest when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are coupled along the arc SR0. When the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are coupled along the arc SR2, the above is formed (the angle A30 is closer to the angle A32 than the angle A31).

  The angle A22 is 10.87 degrees, the angle A21 is 10.59 degrees, and the angle A20 is 10.82 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a3 and the straight line a2, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are coupled along the arc SR0 is along the arc SR2. This is less than the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between the angle A22 and the angle A20 is smaller than the difference between the angle A20 and the angle A21 (the angle A20 is closer to the angle A22 than the angle A21).

  The angle A12 is 10.78 degrees, the angle A11 is 10.50 degrees, and the angle A10 is 10.53 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a2 and the straight line a1, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are coupled along the arc SR0 is along the arc SR1. It exceeds the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between the angle A12 and the angle A10 is larger than the difference between the angle A10 and the angle A11 (the angle A10 is closer to the angle A11 than the angle A12).

  From these, by setting the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) as the arc SR0, for example, when the transmission member 640 is swung at a constant speed, the effect member It can be seen that the degree of freedom in adjusting the angular velocity of 620 can be improved. In other words, the angular velocity when the transmission member 640 is arranged on the straight line a4 approaches the angular velocity (high speed side) when the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the arc SR2, and the transmission member 640 is on the straight line a1. When arranged, the angular velocity can approach the angular velocity (low speed side) when the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the arc SR1.

  Further, when the ratio of the respective angles is calculated, the angle A22 / angle A32 is 0.98, and the angle A12 / angle A22 is 0.99. The angle A21 / angle A31 is 0.98, and the angle A11 / angle A21 is 0.99. That is, when the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) is the arcs SR1 and SR2, the transmission member 640 is swung toward the inverted state at a constant speed. In this case, the reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 is as small as 1 to 2%.

  On the other hand, the angle A20 / angle A30 is 0.95, and the angle A10 / angle A20 is 0.97. That is, when the locus of the coupling position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) is an arc SR0 (an arc centered on the rotation axis M1), the transmission member 640 is inverted at a constant speed. The reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 when it is swung toward the state can be 3 to 5%. That is, the reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 can be increased as compared with the case where the locus of the connection position is the arcs SR1 and SR2 (arcs centered on the rotation axis M2).

  As shown in FIG. 53A, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is brought into contact with the lower end portion of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state. In the inverted state, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is formed vertically above the swinging shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640, so that the force due to the weight of the effect member 620 is the swing shaft portion. 626 and the tubular portion 642 are hung vertically downward. Therefore, since the force of the component in the direction in which the effect member 620 is swung is not generated by the weight of the effect member 620, the posture of the effect member 620 is maintained in the inverted state even when the power of the first drive device 630 is shut off. Can do. Thereby, durability improvement of the 1st drive device 630 can be aimed at.

  Further, since the force due to the weight of the effect member 620 is applied vertically downward to the swinging shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, the rotational resistance of the swinging shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be increased. It is possible to easily maintain the posture of the effect member 620 in the inverted state.

  The torsion spring 650 is an elastic spring in which an urging force is generated in a direction in which the coil portion 651 is rewound (a direction in which the transmission member 640 is pushed back) as the transmission member 640 swings. A coil portion 651 wound around, an urging arm portion 652 extending along both sides of the swinging direction of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640, an end portion of the coil portion 651, and an end portion of the urging arm portion 652 And a connecting arm portion 653 that connects the portion between the cylindrical portion 642 and the swinging shaft portion 626.

  The coil portion 651 is formed with an inner diameter that is approximately three times the diameter of the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620. Therefore, when the urging arm portion 652 is swung to cause a load to reduce the diameter of the coil portion 651, the amount of deformation of the coil portion 651 can be secured, and the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 are deformed. Can be prevented from concentrating.

  The urging arm portion 652 is surrounded by the main body portion 641, the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 645, and the back arc plate portion 646 of the transmission member 640. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the urging arm portion 652 from dropping (detaching) from the transmission member 640.

  Further, the urging arm portion 652 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower receiving plate portion 614a on the plane on which the transmission member 640 swings. Therefore, a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640 is generated from the biasing arm portion 652 disposed in the swinging direction of the transmission member 640, and the biasing arm portion disposed on the opposite side of the swinging direction of the transmission member 640. 652 is prevented from moving to the lower receiving plate portion 614a. Thereby, the torsion spring 650 is formed so as to be able to generate a biasing force in a direction to push back the transmission member 640 regardless of the swinging direction of the transmission member 640.

  A bent portion 653 a that is bent to the opposite side of the transmission member 640 is formed at the connecting portion of the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653. In this case, as described later, the bent portion 653a is expanded by the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 being pressed against the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 (see FIG. 54B). Thereby, the contact position between the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 becomes far from the cylindrical portion 642, and the moment applied to the transmission member 640 from the torsion spring 650 is increased. Can do.

  With reference to FIG. 54, the change in the urging force generated from the torsion spring 650 and pushing back the transmission member 640 will be described. FIGS. 54A and 54B are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are shown in phantom lines, and FIG. 53 is appropriately used to explain the change in the urging force generated from the torsion spring 650. refer.

  Further, in FIG. 54A, from the state of FIG. 53B, the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the urging arm portion 652 on the left side when viewed from the front is the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640. FIG. 54 (b) shows a state in which the inner surface starts to be pressed. In FIG. 54 (b), the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front, and the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pulled. The extended state is illustrated.

  In the state of FIG. 54A, a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640 is generated in the biasing arm portion 652 on the left side of the torsion spring 650 when viewed from the front. This urging force is the sum of the urging force generated from the coil portion 651 and the urging force generated from the bent portion 653a.

  That is, in the state of FIG. 53 (b), the transmission member 640 is not pressed against the bent portion 653a arranged on the left side in the front view among the pair of bent portions 653a. Only a biasing force starting from the coil portion 651 is generated in the portion 652 as a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640.

  On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 54A, in addition to the urging force starting from the coil portion 651, the urging force is generated by the deformation of the urging arm portion 652 starting from the bent portion 653a. Therefore, the spring constant of the urging arm portion 652 can be increased. Note that the deformation of the urging arm portion 652 starting from the bent portion 653a is shorter than the deformation starting from the coil portion 651, so the length of the portion subjected to the deformation is shortened. The urging force generated by the hit can be further increased.

  In the state of FIG. 54 (b), the angle formed by the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 is expanded by pushing the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 by the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640. Accordingly, the contact position length L1 which is the distance between the contact position of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 and the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the cylindrical portion 642 in the state of FIG. Compared to FIG. 54B, the similar contact position length L <b> 2 in the state of FIG. 54B is separated from the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640. That is, the contact position length is extended. Thereby, since the arm length of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is increased, the moment applied to the transmission member 640 from the torsion spring 650 can be increased.

  Therefore, for example, when the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 is substantially the same in the state of FIG. 54A and the state of FIG. 54B, the load on the transmission member 640 is further increased in FIG. The moment that is generated can be increased. Therefore, the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 can be more easily pushed back.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is small when the swing angle from the retracted position of the transmission member 640 (the production member 620) is small, and the swing angle is large. As it is, it is increased elastically, and is increased beyond the elastic increase with the state of FIG. For this reason, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 required when the effect member 620 is at the maximum swing angle (see FIG. 54B) is determined, the torsion spring only increases elastically. Compared to the above, the biasing force when the swing angle is small can be set smaller (a soft spring can be used).

  Thereby, the degree to which the operation speed at the start of the swing of the effect member 620 is decelerated by the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 can be reduced, and the operation speed at the start of the operation of the effect member 620 can be increased. .

  Further, since the urging force is increased beyond the elastic increase with the state of FIG. 54 (a) as a boundary, the swing angle of the effect member 620 is equal to or greater than the state of FIG. 54 (a). The deceleration acceleration of the effect member 620 can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to delay the timing at which the effect member 620 starts to decelerate during the swinging motion of the effect member 620. Therefore, the swing angle at which the effect member 620 can be swung in a high speed state can be expanded, and the effect of the tilting operation unit 600 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the sliding operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 will be described. FIG. 56 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700. In FIG. 56, the state where the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the state where the tilting operation unit 600 is slid by a predetermined amount from the retracted position is illustrated by a solid line.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the connecting member 740 that connects the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700 that are slidably movable in the vertical direction is formed to be movable in the extending direction of the front rail portion 715. . Here, since the weight of the tilting operation unit 600 is loaded on the connecting member 740, when the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position, the tilting operation unit 600 is left in front view along the front rail portion 715 due to gravity. Is biased towards. Therefore, it is conceivable to fix the driving device 750 in order to maintain the tilting operation unit 600 in the retracted position.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lever member 714 is formed so as to be able to swing up and down, and when the lever member 714 is swinged downward, the lever member 714 is engaged with the locking portion 725 of the support member 720 and Slide movement in the direction is restricted.

  As a result, the tilting operation unit 600 can be mechanically maintained at the retracted position. Therefore, when the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position, the tilting operation unit 600 is stopped with the drive device 750 stopped. It can be maintained in the retracted position. Therefore, the durability of the driving device 750 can be improved.

  From the state where the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position, the support member 720 can be moved by swinging the lever member 714 upward and operating the driving device 750, and the tilting operation unit 600 can be moved in the horizontal direction. Can be moved to slide.

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the tilting operation unit 600 is placed in the retracted position in an inverted state, the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 is placed vertically below the center of gravity G of the tilting operation unit 600.

  Here, since the direction of the sliding movement of the tilting operation unit 600 is along the front rail portion 715, in FIG. 56, the tilting operation unit 600 moves while being slid by a predetermined amount from the retracted position (see the imaginary line in FIG. 56). Always has a vertical component.

  Therefore, if the center of gravity G of the tilting operation unit 600 and the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 are displaced in the vertical direction, a load may be applied in the direction in which the tilting operation unit 600 is rotated from the connecting member 740. This is the same when the tilting operation unit 600 is slid in the reverse direction.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 is arranged vertically below the center of gravity G, the vertical component of the force applied to the tilting operation unit 600 from the connecting member 740 and the center of gravity G are It is formed on the same line. Thereby, it can suppress that a load is applied to the direction which rotates the tilting operation unit 600 from the connection member 740, and the attitude | position of the tilting operation unit 600 can be stabilized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the influence of the tilting motion (swinging motion) of the tilting motion unit 600 on the slide motion of the slide motion unit 700 will be described. FIG. 57 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700. FIG. 57 shows a state where the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is swung to the state shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is disposed on the left side of the front view of the connection member 740 in a state where the effect member 620 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Therefore, the acceleration in the leftward direction when viewed from the front, which is applied to the connecting member 740, is increased.

  In this case, since the driving force necessary for sliding the tilting operation unit 600 from the retracted position can be suppressed, the drive motor 751 of the drive device 750 can be reduced in size.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, a tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact surface of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 is a flat surface has been described, but the tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment is the main body portion of the transmission member 2640. 2641 includes an abutting portion 2641a that comes into contact with the distal end portion of the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  58 (a), 58 (b), and 59 are front views of the transmission member 2640 and the torsion spring 650 in the second embodiment. 58A, 58B, and 59, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 58A illustrates an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 2640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 58B illustrates the inverted state of FIG. 58A. The transmission member 2640 is swung by a predetermined amount counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the bottom surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the tip of the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. In FIG. A state in which the transmission member 2640 is further swung counterclockwise as viewed from the front is illustrated from the state of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 58, when the transmission member 2640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 58A), the main body portion 2641 is pressed against the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 2641 is moved. The torsion spring 650 generates a biasing force that swings in the direction of returning to the inverted state. When the transmission member 2640 is swung and the urging arm portion 652 is deformed, the coil portion 651 is deformed to be reduced in diameter by the connecting arm portion 653 connected to the urging arm portion 652 on the deformed side. That is, as the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced, the urging force that swings the transmission member 2640 in the direction of returning to the inverted state is increased.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the contact position between the main body portion 2641 of the transmission member 2640 and the urging arm portion 652 (from the difference in the swing angle between the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the transmission member 2640 ( The tip position of the urging arm 652 is changed by the swinging of the transmission member 2640. That is, as the transmission member 2640 is swung, the distal end portion of the urging arm portion 652 is moved to the distal end side of the main body portion 2641 (the side closer to the sliding hole 643).

  Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 58B, when the transmission member 2640 is further rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front in a state where the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the distal end portion of the urging arm portion 642. The urging arm portion 642 is restricted by the abutting portion 2641a from moving toward the distal end side of the main body portion 2641.

  As shown in FIG. 59, when the transmission member 2640 is swung while the movement of the attached arm portion 642 is restricted by the abutting portion 2641a, the torsion spring 650 is deformed as a whole. That is, the base side (bending portion 653a side) of the urging arm portion 642 is moved downward by the amount that the urging arm portion 642 is restricted from moving toward the distal end side of the main body portion 2641. As a result, the connecting arm portion 653 is moved in the direction of reducing the diameter of the coil portion 651 (the direction in which the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 increases).

  That is, as compared with the case where the abutting portion 2641a is not provided, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 2640 is swung to the state shown in FIG. 59 can be increased. Thereby, the degree of change in the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 (the increasing ratio of the biasing force with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 2640) is increased in the state shown in FIG. 59 compared to the state shown in FIG. Can do. Therefore, when the swing angle of the transmission member 2640 is small, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 is suppressed, and the starting speed of the transmission member 2640 is increased while the swing angle is large (see FIG. 59). The biasing force of the torsion spring 650 can be increased nonlinearly (more than an elastic change), and a biasing force sufficient to return the transmission member 2640 to the inverted state can be obtained.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a tilting operation unit 3600 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact surface of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 has a constant width has been described, but the tilting operation unit 3600 in the third embodiment is the main body portion of the transmission member 3640. 3641 is provided with an inclined side surface 3641a that is inclined in such a manner that the side surface comes into contact with the tip of the torsion spring 650 and becomes wider as it approaches the tip. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 60A and 60B are front views of the transmission member 3640 and the torsion spring 650 in the third embodiment. In FIGS. 60A and 60B, the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 60A illustrates an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 3640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 60B illustrates the inverted state of FIG. 60A. A state in which the transmission member 3640 is swung by a predetermined amount counterclockwise when viewed from the front is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the transmission member 3640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 60A), the main body portion 3641 is pressed against the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 3641 is moved. The torsion spring 650 generates a biasing force that swings in the direction of returning to the inverted state.

  When the transmission member 3640 is swung from the state shown in FIG. 60A to the state shown in FIG. 60B, the difference in the swing angle between the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the transmission member 3640 is caused. The contact position between the main body portion 3641 of the transmission member 3640 and the biasing arm portion 652 (the tip position of the biasing arm portion 652) is changed by the swinging of the transmission member 3640. That is, as the swing angle from the inverted state of the transmission member 3640 (see FIG. 60A) increases, the distal end portion of the urging arm portion 652 moves toward the distal end side of the main body portion 3641 (the side closer to the sliding hole 643). ).

  Therefore, the distal end portion of the urging arm portion 652 slides along the inclined side surface 3641a of the main body portion 3641. That is, when the transmission member 3640 is swung, the torsion spring 650 is deformed by the width of the transmission member 3640 being expanded by the inclined side surface 3641a in addition to the deformation caused by the swing angle of the transmission member 3640. . In this case, since the width of the transmission member 3640 is further increased toward the distal end portion of the transmission member 3640, the inclined side surface 3641a increases as the swing angle from the inverted state of the transmission member 3640 (see FIG. 60A) increases. As a result, the deformation of the torsion spring 650 is increased by increasing the width of the transmission member 3640. Therefore, as the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 increases, the increase rate of the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 (change in biasing force of the torsion spring 650 with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 3640) can be increased.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64, a tilting operation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is fixed has been described. However, in the tilting operation unit 4600 according to the fourth embodiment, the transmission member 4640 is added to the contact portion 644 and the contact portion 644 thereof. A moving contact member 4647 having a shorter width than the portion 644 is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  61A is a rear perspective view of the transmission member 4640 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 61B is a rear perspective view of the moving contact member 4647. FIG. In FIG. 61A, illustration of the moving contact member 4647 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the front circular arc plate portion 4645 of the transmission member 4640 has guide holes 4645a that are arranged symmetrically at intervals shorter than the arrangement interval of the contact portions 644 and drilled in the front-rear direction. Prepare. The guide hole 4645a is a through hole that guides the pair of rear protrusions 4647b of the moving contact member 4647 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the moving contact member 4647 includes a main body portion 4647a formed in a long plate shape, and a pair of rear surface protrusions projecting from both ends of the main body portion 4647a to the back surface side. It mainly includes a portion 4647b and a front protrusion 4647c protruding in a hemispherical shape from the approximate center of the main body portion 4647 to the front side.

  One end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the opposite side of the front projection 4647c of the main body 4647a, and the other end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the main body 641b (see FIG. 62 (c) and FIG. 62 (d)). For easy understanding, the coil spring 4648 is not shown in FIGS. 61 (a), 61 (b), 62 (a), and 62 (b).

  The rear protrusion 4647b is a portion that is inserted from the front side into the guide hole 4645a of the transmission member 4640, and has a sufficient length from the front arc plate portion 4645 (when it contacts with the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650). (Possible length) is formed in a protruding manner. The back projection 4647b is formed to be inclined at an angle that makes contact with the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 at the surface (line) (see FIG. 64B). As a result, the load applied to the urging arm 652 is reduced (stress concentration is suppressed) as compared with the case where the urging arm 652 and the rear protrusion 4647b are in contact with each other at a point, and the urging arm 652 is reduced. The durability of can be improved.

  The front protrusion 4647c is a portion that comes into contact with the main body member 4621 (see FIG. 63) of the effect member 4620, and the moving contact member 4647 is in a relationship with the escape opening 4621a formed in the main body member 4621. The front arc plate 4645 is separated (see FIG. 62C), or the moving contact member 4647 is brought close to the front arc plate 4645 (see FIG. 62D). In addition, since the front-end | tip of the front projection part 4647c is formed in a hemispherical shape, it can make it easy to get the front projection part 4647c on the surface of the main body member 4621 from the escape opening 4621a.

  62 (a) and 62 (b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member 4640, and FIGS. 62 (c) and 62 (d) are top views of the transmission member 4640. FIG. 62 (a) and 62 (c), the state in which the moving contact member 4647 is separated from the front circular arc plate portion 4645 is the moving contact member in FIGS. 62 (b) and 62 (d). The state where 4647 is brought close to the front circular arc plate portion 4645 is illustrated.

  FIG. 63 is a schematic front view schematically showing the main body member 4621 of the effect member 4620. Note that the transmission member 4640 that forms an inverted state with respect to the main body member 4621 is a center state 4640C, the state in which the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front is a counterclockwise rocking state 4640L, and the transmission member 4640 is The state of being swung in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is illustrated as an imaginary line as a clockwise wobbling state 4640R. Further, in the center state 4640C, the counterclockwise swing state 4640L, and the clock swing state 4640R, the illustration of the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 4645, and the rear arc plate portion 646 is omitted for easy understanding. .

  The main body member 4621 includes a relief opening 4621a formed in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 63, the relief opening 4621a has a region (a central state 4640C and a counterclockwise swing) where the front protrusion 4647c (see FIG. 62) moves when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front. In the moving state 4640L).

  When the front projection 4647c of the transmission member 4640 overlaps the relief opening 4621a in front view, the front projection 4647c is inserted into the relief opening 4621a, and the moving contact member 4647 is transmitted by the elastic force of the coil spring 4648. Of the main body 641 (see FIG. 62C). On the other hand, if the front protrusion 4647c does not overlap with the escape opening 4621a (overlap with the main body member 4621), the front protrusion 4647c is brought into contact with the side surface of the main body member 4621 of the effect member 4620, and the moving contact member 4647 is brought close to the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 4640 (see FIG. 62D).

  That is, the rear protrusion 4647b of the moving contact member 4647 protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise from the front side. It is. Therefore, the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 is generated when the transmission member 4640 is swung in the clockwise direction from the inverted state as compared with the case of being swung counterclockwise in the front view. The increase rate of the urging force (the degree of increase of the urging force with respect to the swing angle) can be increased.

  FIGS. 64A and 64B are front views of the transmission member 4640 and the torsion spring 650. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the outer shapes of the base member 610 and the effect member 4620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the main body portion 4647a of the moving contact member 4647 is easy to understand. Illustration is omitted. 64A illustrates an inverted state in which the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 4640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 64B illustrates the inverted state of FIG. 64A. The transmission member 4640 is swung by a predetermined amount clockwise in front view, and the urging arm portion 652 on the left side in front view is in contact with the rear projection 4647b.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (b), while the swinging angle of the transmission member 4640 is small, the biasing arm portion 652 can be contacted from the opposite side (the contact portion 644 side) of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 4640. Thus, the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is rotated clockwise in front view can be increased.

  Thus, the urging force when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise when viewed from the front is improved while the starting speed is increased when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Can do. Therefore, the production member 4620 can be prevented from colliding with the inner surface of the back case 210.

  That is, in the state where the tilting operation unit 4600 is disposed at the retracted position, when the effect member 4620 is turned upside down, the inner surface of the back case 210 is brought close to the effect member 620 (see FIG. 5). Here, if the effect member 4620 is vibrated vigorously from the state of being counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 57) toward the inverted state, the effect member 4620 cannot be fully decelerated, and the rear case 210. There is a risk of the production member 4620 colliding with the inner surface of the.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the back projection 4647b protrudes at the timing when the effect member 4620 swings clockwise from the inverted state (see FIG. 62D), and the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 is increased. Can be increased. As a result, the effect member 4620 is sufficiently used when the effect member 4620 is tilted clockwise from the inverted state while maintaining the operation speed when the effect member 4620 is tilted counterclockwise from the inverted state. Can be slowed down.

  Also, the direction in which the rear protrusion 4647b is pushed back at the contact point between the rear protrusion 4647b and the biasing arm 652 disposed on the opposite side of the swinging direction of the transmission member 4640 (FIG. 64 (b) front view counterclockwise). ) Is energized. As a result, the transmission member 4640 is moved with a larger urging force than when the transmission member 4640 is pushed back only by the urging arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640 (right side in FIG. 64B). Can be pushed back. On the other hand, it is possible to improve the urging force generated by the urging arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 64, the distance from the position where the abutting portion 644 and the urging arm portion 652 arranged on the opposite side of the side close to the transmission member 4640 to the lower receiving plate portion 614a is located. As compared with the above, the distance from the lower receiving plate portion 614a to the bent portion 653a is short. In this case, it is easy to move the bent portion 653a with the force from the contact portion 644 using the lower receiving plate portion 614 as a fulcrum, but the reverse is difficult (the difference in the distance from the fulcrum to the action point is different). Because there is).

  Therefore, the urging force generated by the deformation of the urging arm portion 652 on the left side when viewed from the front when the abutting portion 644 and the urging arm portion 652 are abutted is generated by the deformation of the entire torsion spring 650. That is, the biasing arm portion 652 on the left side when viewed from the front and the rear protrusion 4647b are in contact with each other so that the bent portion 653a on the left side when viewed from the front is the left side when viewed from the front (the inner diameter of the coil portion 651). The deformation that is moved in the direction of narrowing) causes deformation of the connecting arm portion 653, the coil portion 651, and the urging arm portion 652 on the right side of the front view. In this case, since the coil portion 651 undergoes deformation whose inner diameter is reduced, a biasing force is generated in the coil portion 651 and the connecting arm portion 653 to increase the inner diameter of the coil portion 651, and the right side view (transmission member) The urging force of the urging arm 652 on the side of the swinging direction of 4640 pushes back the transmission member 640 can be improved.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the combined operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68.

  In the first embodiment, when the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the extended position, the second non-transmission wall portion 553c has a shape along a circle around the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570. However, the rotating arm member 5550 in the fifth embodiment includes the recessed portion 5556 in which the non-transmission wall portion 5553c is recessed in the direction away from the rotating crank member 570. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  65 to 68 are front views of the combined operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 65, the state where the rotating arm member 5550 is disposed at the extended position and the sliding projection 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is disposed near the left end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is illustrated in FIG. 65, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the first recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c. 67, however, the state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 66 until the sliding projection 574 is disengaged from the recessed portion 5556 is shown in FIG. The state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the sliding projection 574 is accommodated in the two concave portions 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is illustrated. The

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c of the combined operation unit 5550 includes a recessed portion 5556 that is recessed in a direction away from the rotating crank member 570.

  The recessed portion 5556 includes a first wall portion 5556a having an arc shape (about ¼ of a circular shape) formed on the left side when viewed from the front, and an arc shape (about ¼ of the circular shape) formed on the right side when viewed from the front. The second wall portion 5556b of the rotating crank member 570 is configured to be slidable. That is, the recessed depth of the recessed portion 5556 from the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is equal to or less than the radius of the sliding projection 574, and the connecting portion of the recessed portion 5556 and the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is smooth. It is formed from a curved surface.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 65 to the state shown in FIG. 66, a gap is generated between the sliding projection 574 and the second non-transmission wall 5553c, The rotating arm member 5550 is swung until it is brought into contact with the sliding protrusion 574 by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the rotating crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the first recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is slid by the sliding protrusion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

  That is, between the state shown in FIG. 65 and the state shown in FIG. 66, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the urging force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not swung. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is disposed to face the first wall 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating The crank member 570 forms a non-transmission state.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the sliding projection 574 has a first recess from the left end of the second non-transmission wall 5553c. The rotating arm member 5550 is again swung to the extended position (pressed down) by being pressed against the second wall portion 5556b of the installation portion 5556. That is, during the period from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the second wall portion 5556b is pushed and moved by the sliding projection 574, so that the rotating arm member 5550 is swung. The driving force of the second driving device 560 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 5550 via the rotating crank member 570.

  Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is disposed to face the second wall 5556b, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating The crank member 570 forms a transmission state.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. 68, a gap is generated between the sliding projection 574 and the second non-transmission wall 5553c, The rotating arm member 5550 is swung until it is brought into contact with the sliding protrusion 574 by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the rotating crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the second recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is slid by the sliding protrusion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

  That is, between the state shown in FIG. 67 and the state shown in FIG. 68, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the urging force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not swung. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is disposed to face the first wall 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating The crank member 570 forms a non-transmission state.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the sliding protrusion 574 is rotated when it is disposed to face the first wall 5556a. When a non-transmission state is formed between the moving crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 and the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed to face the second wall portion 5556b, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member A transmission state is formed with 5550.

  If the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, the relationship between the first wall portion 5556a and the second wall portion 5556b is reversed. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 are disposed when the sliding protrusion 574 is disposed to face the first wall 5556a. When the sliding projection 574 is disposed opposite to the second wall 5556b, a non-transmission state is formed between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550. The

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, in this embodiment, the rotating arm member 5550 is moved between the retracted position (see FIG. 22) and the extended position without switching the swinging direction of the rotating crank member 570. In addition to the swinging motion that swings between, the rotating arm member 5550 has a small width in the vicinity of the overhang position (the mode in which the lower end of the front plate member 546 is moved between the position U1 and the position U2). A swinging motion that is swung can be formed.

  Thus, the swing arm member 5550 can generate a swinging motion that is difficult to form by switching the driving direction of the driving device 560. That is, it is possible to form the swing arm member 5550 with a small swinging motion near the extended position by repeatedly switching the driving direction of the driving device 560 at short intervals. However, in this case, the width of the swinging operation depends on the switching speed of the driving direction of the driving device 560. Further, even if the driving direction of the driving device 560 is switched while the speed of the swinging operation of the rotating arm member 5550 is high, the inertia of the driving device 560 and the rotating arm member 5550 is large and the driving direction cannot be switched instantaneously. There is a possibility that the time required for switching the driving direction becomes longer.

  On the other hand, in the swinging operation in the vicinity of the extended position of the rotating arm member 5550 in this embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570, so that the time required for switching the driving direction is unnecessary. can do.

  Further, the operation speed of the operation of swinging the rotating arm member 5550 in the clockwise direction (upward swinging operation) depends on the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a, and the rotating arm member 5550 is bent in the direction of the front view. The operation speed of the clockwise swing operation (downward swing operation) depends on the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, by increasing the urging force of the torsion spring 517a and increasing the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570, the swinging speed of the rotating arm member 5550 near the protruding position can be increased.

  Accordingly, it is possible to achieve both speeding up of the swinging operation in the vicinity of the protruding position of the rotating arm member 5550 and shortening of the switching time of the swinging direction.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 69 to FIG. 71, a combined operation unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the turning arm member 550 of the combined operation unit 500 is integrally formed has been described. However, the turning arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment is formed by connecting two members. . By relatively swinging the two members, the posture of the arc-shaped hole 554 formed at the other end is changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  69 (a) and 69 (c) are partial front views of the turning arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 69 (b) shows the turning in the direction of the arrow LXIXb in FIG. 69 (a). It is a partial top view of the arm member 6550. 69A shows a state where a first posture is formed in which the tip of the tip swinging member 6556 is directed upward, and in FIG. 69B, the tip of the tip swinging member 6556 is downward. The state in which the oriented second posture is formed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the rotating arm member 6550 is connected to a main body portion 6551 pivotally supported by the third shaft portion 517 (see FIG. 71) and the other end portion of the main body portion 6551. It mainly includes a tip swing member 6556 and a switching device 6590 that is fixed to the upper surface of the other end of the main body portion 6551 and switches the posture of the tip swing member 6556. An arcuate hole 6554 is formed in the tip swinging member 6556.

  The main body portion 6551 is provided with a shaft support hole 6551a which is formed in the other end portion in the front-rear direction and serves as a swing center of the tip swing member 6556.

  The tip swinging member 6556 is formed in such a manner that the end portion on the side connected to the main body portion 6551 sandwiches the main body portion 6551 in the front and rear, and a shaft support hole 6556a drilled as the swing center of the tip swinging member 6556. The shaft support hole 6556a and a shaft support bar 6556b which is a bar inserted into the shaft support hole 6551a of the tip swinging member 6556, and an extension extending from the shaft support hole 6556a to the opposite side of the arcuate hole 6554. And a sliding shaft 6556c that protrudes in the front-rear direction from the end of the portion and is connected to the guide long hole 6591d of the switching device 6590.

  The arc-shaped hole 6554 includes a return portion 6554a that protrudes from the upper inner surface. The return portion 6554a is a portion that is slid by the projection 541b of the expansion / contraction effect member 6540, and when sliding from the tip end side of the arc-shaped hole 6554, resistance is suppressed, but sliding is performed in the opposite direction. When it is moved, it is a left-right asymmetrical protrusion whose sliding resistance is increased.

  70 (a) and 70 (b) are front perspective views of the switching device 6590. FIG. FIG. 70A illustrates a pushed-up state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed up from the switch member 6592, and FIG. 70B illustrates a pushed-down state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed down with respect to the switch member 6592. Is illustrated. Further, the pushed-up state corresponds to the state of FIG. 69 (c), and the pushed-down state corresponds to the state of FIG. 69 (a).

  The C-shaped member 6591 has an elongated plate-like main body portion 6591a in which a hole having an inner diameter through which the movable cylindrical portion 6592a can be inserted is formed in the center, and the same inner diameter as the inner diameter of the hole formed in the main body portion 6591a. A cylindrical guide portion 6591b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape and has a groove formed on the inner peripheral surface thereof, and extends downward from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6591a and is opposed to the front and rear direction of the main body portion 6551. A pair of arm portions 6591c, and a guide long hole 6591d that is a long hole that is drilled on the tip side of the arm portion 6591c and guides the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip swinging member 6556.

  The groove process formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guide part 6591b is a groove process for forming a knock mechanism in relation to the moving column part 6592a of the switch member 6592. The C-shaped member 6591 is switched between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state each time the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed in the direction in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed against the switch member 6592. In addition, illustration of other members, such as a spring member which forms urging | biasing force required in order to form a knock mechanism, is abbreviate | omitted, and in this embodiment, the cylindrical guide part 6591b is the pushing part 6541a (FIG. 71).

  The switch member 6592 includes a moving column portion 6592a that is inserted into the cylindrical guide portion 6591a and has a projection that is movable from the groove on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guide portion 6591a, and the movable column portion 6592a is a shaft. And a fixed plate portion 6592b that is rotatably connected and fixed to the upper surface of the main body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550.

  Here, in the knock mechanism, the relative positions in the axial direction are switched while the cylindrical member and the columnar member guided on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical member are relatively rotated. That is, when the cylindrical member and the columnar member do not rotate relative to each other, it is difficult to switch the relative position in the axial direction.

  On the other hand, the moving columnar portion 6592a of the switch member 6592 is connected to the fixed plate portion 6592b so as to be rotatable about the shaft. Therefore, when the C-shaped member 6591 is moved in the direction approaching the switch member 6592 (when pushed downward in FIG. 70 (a)), the movable column portion 6592a can rotate relative to the cylindrical guide portion 6591b. And the knock mechanism functions.

  Therefore, it is possible to switch between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state without relatively rotating the fixed plate portion 6592b fixed to the main body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550 and the C-shaped member 6591. Accordingly, the state of the switching device 6590 can be switched between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state while the state where the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip swinging member 6556 is inserted into the guide elongated hole 6591d of the C-shaped member 6591 is maintained. it can.

  71 (a) and 71 (b) are front views of the combined operation unit 6500. FIG. 71A shows a state in which the rotating arm member 6550 is disposed at the extended position and the switching device 6590 is pushed up. In FIG. K4, the rotating arm member 6550 is disposed at the extended position and switched. The device 6590 is shown in a depressed state. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is disposed at a position that is swung to the left end of the swingable range.

  71 (a) and 71 (b), the front view clock of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is obtained by switching the state of the switching device 6590 in a state where the rotating arm member 6550 is disposed at the extended position. The maximum swing angle can be switched.

  That is, when the switching device 6590 forms a pushed-up state (see FIG. 71A), the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 is brought into contact with the upper inner surface of the arcuate hole 6554, and The swing angle is limited.

  At this position, the inner surface of the arcuate hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a function as a stopper, and even when the swinging speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is high, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is arranged in the arrangement shown in FIG. It is possible to stop suddenly (the movement locus RI of the protrusion 541b is in contact with the return portion 6554a).

  On the other hand, when the switching device 6590 forms a pushed-down state (see FIG. 71 (b)), the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 does not collide with the arc-shaped hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a (the protrusion 541b). The movement locus RI is not in contact with the return portion 6554a). Therefore, the projection 541b of the expansion / contraction effect production device 6540 is moved along the arc-shaped hole 6554, and the projection 541b is discharged to the outside from the tip portion 554a of the arc-shaped hole 6554.

  Therefore, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is swung clockwise when viewed from the front until the rotating plate 520 comes into contact with the second stopper portion 518b (see FIG. 71 (b)). At this position, the second stopper portion 518b functions as a stopper, and the expansion / contraction effect device 540 can be stopped suddenly even when the swing effect of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is high.

  Thereby, a plurality of swing angles (two types in the present embodiment) can be formed when the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is swung clockwise in front view and the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is suddenly stopped. The variation of can be increased. The state of the switching device 6590 is switched by the telescopic effect member 6540 being swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that the cylindrical guide portion 6591b of the switching device 6590 is moved from the upper right portion when viewed from the front of the main body member 6541a to the right. It is generated by being pushed by the pushing portion 6541a extending in the direction. Therefore, since the second drive device 560 that causes the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 to swing is also used as a drive device that swings the tip swing member 6556, the number of drive devices disposed can be reduced.

  71 (a) and 71 (b), the swing range of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be changed by slightly swinging the tip swing member 6556. In this case, since the swing angle is small, the change can be made difficult for the player to notice.

  Here, when the turning arm member 6550 is visible to the player (see FIG. 71), if the swing angle of the telescopic effect device 6540 can be grasped from the change in the state of the turning arm member 6550, The feeling of expectation for the operation of the expansion / contraction production device 6540 is reduced, and the degree of attention of the expansion / contraction production device 6540 is reduced.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the angle at which the tip swing member 6556 is swung to change the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is small, and it may be difficult for the player to notice the change. it can. Thereby, the expectation to the operation | movement of the expansion / contraction production apparatus 6540 can be raised, and the attention degree of the expansion / contraction production apparatus 6540 can be improved.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a tilting operation unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the long hole-shaped sliding hole 643 is formed at the end of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is supported in the sliding hole 643 so as to be guided is described. In the tilting operation unit 7600 in the embodiment, a shaft support hole 7643 is formed at the end of the transmission member 7600, and the effect member 620 is supported by the shaft support hole 7643. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  72 (a) and 72 (b) are front views of the tilting operation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment. 72A illustrates an inverted state in which the shaft support hole 7743 of the transmission member 7640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642. FIG. 72B illustrates an inverted state from FIG. 72B. A state where the transmission member 7640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined angle is illustrated. 72 (a) and 72 (b), the outer shape of the effect member 620 is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding, and the transmission member 7640 and the base member 7610 on the back side thereof are visible. In addition, the torsion spring 650 and the shaft support protrusion 612 are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 72A, the base member 7610 includes a sliding hole 7613 formed in the front-rear direction, vertically below the second shaft support hole 614 of the main body 611. The sliding hole 7613 is a long hole through which the swinging shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 is inserted, and the longitudinal direction of the long hole is formed along the vertical direction. The swing shaft portion 626 is supported by the slide hole 7613 so as to be slidable.

  The transmission member 7640 is provided with a shaft support hole 7643 at the end opposite to the end where the cylindrical portion 642 of the main body portion 641 is formed. The shaft support hole 7643 is a portion that pivotally supports the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620, and is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sliding shaft portion 621a.

  The swinging motion of the effect member 620 occurs when the transmission member 7640 swings around the second shaft support hole 614 due to the rotation of the drive motor 631 of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 51).

  In the present embodiment, since the sliding shaft portion 621a is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 7643, when the transmission member 7640 swings, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 follows the swing locus of the transmission member 7640. (The sliding shaft portion 621a does not move in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641). On the other hand, since the swing shaft portion 626 is inserted through the slide hole 7613, when the transmission member 7640 swings, the swing shaft portion 626 slides relative to the base member 7610.

  Here, the difference between the swing angle of the transmission member 7640 and the swing angle of the effect member 620 will be described. As shown in FIG. 72B, when the transmission member 7640 swings from the inverted state by the transmission swing angle φ71, the effect member 620 swings by the effect swing angle φ72 (effect swing angle φ72 <transmission swing). Moving angle φ71). Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is swung in the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631, the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 7640. Thereby, the precision of the adjustment of the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the transmission member 7640 swings from the inverted state by the transmission swing angle φ71 can be made smaller than in the case of the first embodiment. explain.

  A connecting line J1 illustrated in FIG. 72B is a line drawn from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swinging shaft portion 626. The virtual connecting line J2 has the same length as the connecting line J1, and the swinging shaft part 626 is disposed above the sliding hole 7613 from a line drawn through the cylindrical part 642 in the longitudinal direction of the main body part 641. This is a line drawn to the center of the swing shaft portion 626 of FIG. 72 (a). The virtual angle φ73 that is the swing angle of the virtual connecting line J2 is the same as that of the first embodiment when the first shaft support hole 613 of the first embodiment is formed above the sliding hole 7613. This corresponds to the swing angle of the effect member 620 that swings as the transmission member 640 swings by the transmission swing angle φ71.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the effect swing angle φ72 is smaller than the virtual angle φ73, and according to the tilting operation unit 7600 of the seventh embodiment, the effect when the transmission member 7640 is swung by a predetermined angle. The swing angle of the member 620 can be made smaller than in the case of the first embodiment. Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is swung by the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 51), the swing amount of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than that, and the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be adjusted. Accuracy can be improved.

<First control example>
Next, control examples in the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 134. In the first control example, a control process (a process related to game control such as display effects) executed by the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be described. In this control example, control is performed so that the display image used when the power is turned on is corrected and used during normal performance. As a result, a common display image can be used at the time of turning on the power and at the time of normal performance, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 (see FIG. 79) in the display control device 114 can be saved.

  In this control example, in the effect in which a specific accessory (the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9)) is movable, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. It is controlled to correct the contents of the effect to be performed. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 is difficult to visually recognize in the effect that the specific accessory is movable, for example, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the sub display device 690. By doing so, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the display content is easily visible to the player.

  In this control example, inertial force is used to open the door member 470 associated with the vertical motion unit (falling object) 400. Specifically, as will be described later, an opening / closing drive that keeps the door member 470 closed in an effect in which the open state of the door member 470 is formed after the door member 470 associated with the vertical movement unit 400 moves. Control is performed so that the motor 466 is not excited (energization stop control). Then, when the door member 470 attached to the vertical movement unit (falling object) 400 is moved in the dropping direction, the door member 470 is opened by the inertial force generated in the door member 470. Thus, the door member 470 can be opened without driving the opening / closing drive motor 466, so that power consumption can be reduced.

  In this control example, a notice effect indicating the expectation that the variation display is a big hit in the variation display is displayed. This notice effect includes an effect including a display mode (countdown) of the same kind as the specific time effect suggesting the gaming state described above. Specifically, there is a countdown notice effect that is an effect in which an image (such as a girl's image) indicating the degree of expectation that is a big hit is displayed after the countdown character (“3, 2, 1,...”) Is displayed. include. A specific time effect (countdown effect) that suggests a gaming state, which is an effect including such a similar display mode (countdown), and a countdown notice effect that is one effect of a predictive effect that suggests a degree of expectation that will be a big hit If executed repeatedly, the player may be confused.

  Therefore, in this control example, when a countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) as a notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit, the same kind of display is displayed until the variable display in which the countdown notice effect is executed ends. Restriction (avoidance) is performed so that a specific time effect (countdown effect) that is an effect including a mode (countdown) is not executed. Thus, when the countdown notice effect is executed in the time effect period, the specific time effect (countdown effect) including the same display mode (countdown effect) as the countdown notice effect is not executed (displayed). Execution (display) can be restricted (avoided). As a result, in the time effect period, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is confused because the effect including the same type of display mode (countdown) is performed repeatedly.

  In this control example, a pitch effect that is displayed based on the winning ball entering the winning opening is displayed in order in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display area. Thereby, even when the interval between the game balls entering the winning opening is short, the period during which the ball effect is displayed can be lengthened, and the player can easily see the ball effect. be able to.

  The present control example is not limited to the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment, and may be executed by any of the pachinko machines 10 of the above-described embodiments, or a combination of the above-described embodiments. It may be executed by the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Control Example>
First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 73, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 102). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b each composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is synchronized with the timing of entering the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. Are stored respectively. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a sphere is normally used. The value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 102).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 75A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the random number counter C1 of the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). It is divided into two types: for a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the first per-random number table 202a (see FIG. 75 (a)) includes a first per-random number table for low probability and a first per-random number table for high probability, and is included in each table. The number of random numbers that are big hits is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first random number table 202a for the special symbol when the probability is low and the first random number table 202a for the special symbol when the probability is high are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, If the random number is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per-random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0” is the first per-random number table 202a for the low probability time. (See FIG. 75 (a)). In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/400”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a type of special symbol loss, a special symbol winning opening (large opening) 65a that is not a big winning jackpot is provided. When this small hit is made, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 0.2 seconds elapses or until ten balls are won), and then closed and opened twice. Repeated. That is, the same opening / closing operation is performed as in the case of big hit C (2R probability change time short no big hit). Two random numbers “10, 11” are defined in the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 75A) as random numbers (decision values) that are small hits when the special symbol has a low probability. Among the total number of random number values of 400, the total number of random number values that are small hits is 2, so the probability that the first special symbol will be a small hit is “2/400”.

  Note that since the small hit is a kind of loss, the gaming state is not changed before and after the small hit. For example, if a small hit is made during the probability change state of a special symbol, the probability change state of the special symbol continues even after the end of the small hit, and the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) ), The normal state continues even after the end of the small hit. As described above, this small win is the same as the case where the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is a short and big hit at the time of 2R probability change, so it is a small hit in the normal state, and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed. It can be expected that the player who has visually recognized the action has won 2R probability change time short and big hit. Therefore, it is possible to expect a transition to a probable change state of a special symbol that is more advantageous than the normal state every time a small hit is made in the normal state, so that the game in the normal state is prevented from becoming monotonous ( Suppression). Further, even if the special symbol is not a big hit, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is executed with a part of the off (small hit), thereby increasing the chance for the player to win the prize ball. be able to. Therefore, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the player's ball is excessively reduced in a normal state or the like and excessively disadvantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “0-9” are the first random number table 202a (FIG. 75 (a) for high probability. ))). Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/40”. Further, only “10” is defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 75A) as a random number value (determination value) that is a small hit. Among the total number of random number values of 400, the total number of random number values that are small hits is 1, so the probability of hitting a small hit is “1/400”.

  Note that the probability of winning a small hit when the special symbol has a high probability is lower than that when the special symbol has a low probability. It is a big hit with a long opening period of the specific winning opening 65a (16R jackpot that is repeated 16 times until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won) to win a lot of prize balls This is because it is annoying even if it is a small hit to play a game in anticipation. In other words, in the normal state, it is expected that the 2R probability change time may have been short and big in the normal state (it may shift to an advantageous probability change state after the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a). However, in a state that is already in a probable change state, whether it is a small hit or a 2R probable change time short and big hit, almost no prize ball can be obtained, the current state (probability change state) is merely maintained. It is. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is configured so that the probability of winning a small hit in the high probability state of the special symbol is low. Thereby, the interest with respect to a player's game in the high probability state of a special symbol can be improved more.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value in the ROM 202 are provided. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 75B). Specifically, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 39”, the big hit A (16R probability variation big hit) is selected, and when it is “40 to 79”, the big hit B (16R Jackpot C) is selected, and in the case of “80 to 99”, jackpot C (short-to-short jackpot with 2R probability change) is selected.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot type set in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 75B) is three jackpots, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. The above jackpot type may be selected, or two or less types, for example, only one type of jackpot type may be selected. Further, the types and ratios of jackpot types selected for the jackpot of the special symbol 1 and the jackpot of the special symbol 2 may be set differently.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach has occurred, the final stop symbol stops other than the reach symbol. ”(For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and“ stop completely ”(for example, in the range of 0 to 89) that does not generate reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, the RAM 203 It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is 0 to 79 and the probability range is low, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 102) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 76) storing random number values for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Yes.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the variation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 76 (b)) and an out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 76 (c)). And at least a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 76D) is set. Although not shown in the drawing, a variation pattern table in the short-time gaming state is set in addition to this.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot variation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, “0-50” for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), “51-179” for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), various special reach (90 seconds). ) Is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 wins the variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set. It selects from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for use.

  FIG. 76C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place is set. If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set.

  Here, when the variation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  For outreach, “0 to 149” for various types of normal reach (30 seconds) and “150 to 197” for various types of superreach (60 seconds). For various types (90 seconds), “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of play in the normal gaming state, and obtains it from the out (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. Based on the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d2.

  FIG. 76D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be removed when the game state is a probability variation game state. This deviation (probable variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different from the aforementioned variation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” based on the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. , The outreach reach is determined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is prolonged when the probability-changing game state in which a big hit is easily made, and the player feels bored.

  In this control example, the variation pattern table 202d is provided with a variation pattern selection table for time reduction (not shown). The short time variation pattern selection table is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol when the gaming state is the short time gaming state. The variation pattern selection table for time reduction is defined so that a variation pattern of 0.6 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. This variation pattern of 0.6 seconds is composed of a period of 0.125 seconds in which symbols and the like are variably displayed and a period of 0.475 seconds in which the symbols and the like are stopped and displayed. Thus, in the short-time gaming state, one variation display is completed in a short time (0.6 seconds), so that the game turnover rate (efficiency) in the short-time gaming state can be improved. Further, by setting the period during which the symbols are variably displayed to be a very short period (0.125 seconds), it is possible to give the player an impression that the game rotation rate (efficiency) is very good.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. , Stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol is set by a second random number table (see FIG. 75 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is When the value matches the random number value set in the second hit random number table (see FIG. 75C), it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (c), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that a special symbol jackpot is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. In FIG. 5, the normal symbol variation display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second prize opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only once for “0.2 seconds × 1” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. The normal symbol variation display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the normal symbol having a low probability, and the release period of the second prize opening 640 is further reduced. However, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” becomes very long, so that the ball can easily enter the first winning opening 64. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened “only once per second × 2” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 102).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least the first per-random number table 202a, the first per-type selection table 202b, the second per-random number table 205c, and the variation pattern table 202d. Since the contents of each table provided in the ROM 202 are as described above with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol held ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, hour and minute counter 203h, jackpot flag 203i, counter buffer 203y, and other memory area 203z. doing.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1), and includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas stores values of a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball has won (start winning) at the first winning opening 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the big special lottery drawing of the original special symbol is performed. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the special symbol 1 or The special symbol 2 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From this, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is predicted. The prediction (prefetching) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or probability variation gaming state) at the time when the variation corresponding to the start winning is started. . Thereby, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning can be accurately predicted.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second winning port 640 (special symbol 2), and the first winning port 64 (special symbol 1) with respect to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a described above. ) Is changed to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2), and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding number 1). Among the vacant areas of (4 areas), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. As in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in other reserved areas are stored. Is shifted to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is a variable symbol display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (start winning) at the first winning opening 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S504 in FIG. 96). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 93).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 93 and S505 in FIG. 96). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual changed display held ball held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next-holding ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the retained ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls in the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d only in that the first winning opening (special symbol 1) is changed to the second winning port 640 (special symbol 2). Since the other points are the same, the detailed description is omitted. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 by the processing of S510 of FIG. 96, and is subtracted by 1 each time a special symbol variation display is executed (see S205 of FIG. 93). Further, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S206 in FIG. 93, S511 in FIG. 96). reference).

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the number of held balls (standby) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67. This is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The normal symbol retained ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the number of retained balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S804 in FIG. 99). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 98).

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 99). On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S803 in FIG. 99: No).

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol). If the value of the probability variation flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol state. If the value of the probability variation flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). The initial value of the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF. In the jackpot control process, the start timing of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) or the jackpot C (2R probability variation with time short and large jackpot) (the jackpot game of the jackpot game) When it is determined that it is (end timing), it is set to ON (see S1214 in FIG. 103). Then, in the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 95) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 94), it is referred to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probable variation state (S403 in FIG. 95, FIG. 94, see S303), and is set to off when the next jackpot game is started (see S1202 in FIG. 103).

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 95, S213) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 94, S208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 95, S213) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 94, S208), the value of the probability variation flag 203g is referred to. On the other hand, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the random number table 202a per one. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation flag 203g is OFF, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability. Is called.

  The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time-short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time-short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state. At this time, the short / medium counter 203h is set to 100 when the big hit B (short hit big at 16R) is executed at the start timing of the ending effect (ie, the end timing of the big hit game) by the big hit control process (FIG. 103). (See S1215). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the time is shortened in the normal symbol variation process (see S708 in FIG. 98), and is subtracted by 1 every time the variation time elapses in the special symbol variation process. (See S222 in FIG. 93). In addition, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is larger than 0 and the probability variation flag 203g described above is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the certain symbol certain variation state and the time reduction state.

  The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203i is on, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state is executed by the jackpot control process (S1206 in FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  The small hit flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not a small hit has occurred. When the small win flag 203j is turned on, a small hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened by the big hit control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is executed.

  The short time flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a special symbol (a high probability state of a normal symbol). If the value of the hour / short flag 203k is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol time-short state, and if the value of the hour / short flag 203k is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (normal symbol Low probability state). This time-short flag 203k has an initial value set to OFF, and when it is determined in the jackpot control process that it is the start timing of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) (the jackpot game end timing). Is set to ON (see S1214 in FIG. 103). Then, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 98), it is referred to (see S708, S715, and S719 in FIG. 98) to determine whether or not the gaming state is a short-time state, and the next jackpot game is started. In this case (see S1202 in FIG. 103).

  As described above, in the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), both the probability variation flag 203g and the hour / short flag 203k are set to ON, and the hour / short game is given together with the probability variation game. On the other hand, in the big hit C (2R probability change time short and no big hit), although the probability change flag 203g is set on, the time reduction flag 203k remains off and only the probability change game is given. The reason why the hour / short flag 203k is provided separately from the hour / short counter 203h is that the hour / short state of the normal symbol given by the big hit A (16R probability variation big hit) continues at least until the next big hit. is there. In other words, the time-shortening period varies depending on the timing of the big hit, so the time-shortening period is indefinite and the number of times cannot be set for the time-shortening counter 203h. Therefore, the fixed time (100 times) time-short state set after the end of jackpot B is counted by the time-shortage counter 203h, while the time-short state set after the end of jackpot A is set by the time-short flag 203g. It is configured. Thereby, it is possible to more accurately determine the short time state of the normal symbol.

  Here, in the probability variation game (the probability variation state of the special symbol), the probability that a big win is set by the lottery of the special symbol that is executed based on the entry to the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is set to a high probability. It is difficult to determine whether the current game is a normal game or a probable game unless the player suggests that the game is a probabilistic game by changing the production mode. . On the other hand, in the short-time game, since the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 are changed, it is easy to determine whether it is a normal game or a short-time game. .

  Therefore, when a time-short game is given together with a probability change game based on the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), the player can easily recognize that the game is a probability variation game. When only a probability variation game is awarded based on the jackpot), it is difficult to recognize that the game is a probability variation game (so-called latent probability variation state). Thereby, it is necessary for the player to guess whether the game state is a normal game or a probability-changing game, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, since the same winning opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a as in the case of the big win C is provided, the specific winning opening 65a is opened / closed in two rounds. Is not necessarily a big hit C. Therefore, it is possible to expect a big hit C every time two rounds of opening / closing operations are performed, so that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data. An area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the MPU 201 A stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the CPU, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Have.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 102), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 100) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a ballistic effect selection table 222b.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is already well known and will be described briefly. However, the sound lamp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and shows a rough variation indicated by the variation pattern command. More detailed variation content is determined from the variation pattern selection table 222a from the content (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode is determined from among a plurality of types by lottery.

  The entry effect selection table 222b is a table that defines the contents of the effect of the entry effect that is executed based on the game ball entering the second winning port 640 during the short-time game. Here, the entry effect is an effect that is executed in a manner corresponding to the number of fluctuations until the big hit, in order to suggest a degree of expectation that will be a big hit. More specifically, each time a winning information command is received from the main control device 110 during a short-time game, the stored contents of the winning information storage area 223a updated based on the winning information command are used to win a big hit in the reserved ball. Whether there is a corresponding holding ball and if there is a holding ball corresponding to the jackpot, the number of fluctuations until the big hit is determined, and the performance is executed in a manner according to the number of fluctuations until the big hit Is done.

  Also, one entry effect is executed in one display area of the display area in the third symbol display device 81 divided into four. Once the entry effect is started, the display contents of the previous entry effect are displayed. Can be displayed in different display areas corresponding to the new entry. That is, every time a ball enters the second entrance 640, the entry effects are displayed in order in the four display areas provided on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a maximum of four types Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the same time.

  The entry effect selection table 222b is defined in association with the number of fluctuations until the effect content of the entry effect is a big hit. This pitch effect selection table 222b is referred to when the game ball is determined to have entered the second winning opening 640 during the short-time game in the pitch effect setting process (see FIG. 115) described later. It is used to select the production contents of the production (see S2403 in FIG. 115).

  There are six types of entrance effects, from level 0 entrance effects to level 5 entrance effects (see FIG. 78), and as the number of fluctuations until the big hit is reduced, A high-level entry effect is selected. Thereby, the player can predict the number of times until the big hit (expected degree of big hit) by discriminating the level of the pitch effect, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  The display image of the entry effect in this control example is a display of a comment portion that displays a comment (for example, “Hurry”, “Chance?”, Etc.) according to the level, and a predetermined pattern (for example, “star”). It is composed of a level suggesting section for suggesting the level of the current entry effect depending on the number, and the display mode of each part (comment part and level suggesting part) is set according to the level of the entry effect. As comments to be displayed in the comment section, a plurality of comments corresponding to the level of the entrance effect are defined and selected according to the value of the effect counter 223i. On the other hand, in the level suggestion portion, the number of “star signs” symbols corresponding to the level of the pitching effect (that is, the number of times of change until the big hit) is displayed. For example, in the level 0 notice effect, there are zero “stars” (see 81a in FIG. 89 (a)), and in the level 1 notice effect, one “star” (see 81b in FIG. 89 (b)), In the level 2 notice effect, two “stars” are displayed (see 81c in FIG. 89 (b)). This makes it possible for the player to easily determine the level of the entering ball effect being executed. On the other hand, since the comment selected according to the value of the effect counter 223i is displayed in the comment part, the variation of the display mode in the entrance effect can be increased, and the player's interest can be improved. Note that the level suggesting part may not be provided, and the number of changes until the big hit may be suggested only by the comment part. Thereby, since the level of the entrance effect can be estimated only from the display of the comment part, attention can be paid to the display content of the entrance effect.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 78, the detailed content of the entrance effect selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 78 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the entry effect selection table 222b. As described above, in the pitch effect selection table 222b, the effect details of the pitch effect for suggesting the number of times of change until the big hit is determined in association with the number of times of change until the big hit.

  Specifically, when the number of changes until the big hit based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is larger than 4, that is, the lottery result corresponding to the big jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. If not, it is defined that a level 0 entry effect is selected. In addition, when the number of fluctuations to the big hit based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is 4, that is, the big lottery result of the second special symbol is stored in the fourth hold in the winning information storage area 223a. In this case, it is defined that a level 1 entry effect is selected.

  Similarly, if the number of changes to the big hit based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is 3, the level 2 entrance effect is 1 and the level 3 entrance effect is 1 time. If it is, it is prescribed that the level 4 entrance effect is selected, and if it is 0 times (if the change is a big hit), the level 5 entrance effect is selected. In this way, by configuring so as to execute different levels of ball entry effects according to the number of fluctuations until the big hit, it is possible to make the player predict the number of fluctuations until the big hit. Therefore, since the game can be performed while paying more attention to the display effect, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. FIG. 77 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. In the RAM 223, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a display area counter 223f, an effect At least a time storage area 223g, an effect mode storage area 233h, an avoidance flag 233i, an effect counter 223j, a power-off flag 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (the first area to the fourth area for the special symbol 1 and the first area to the fourth area for the special symbol 2). In each of these areas, winning information is stored. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information includes an area number among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area) of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. It is stored in order from the (first to fourth) small areas. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), And a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effect of the special symbol 1 held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of held balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or the main control device 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and holds it. When the number of balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1607 in FIG. 107). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol 1 held ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In addition, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, has the maximum number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect of the special symbol 2 held in the main controller 110 at the maximum. It is a counter that counts up to once. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a special symbol that is different from the reserved ball number symbol display of the special symbol 1 on the third symbol display device 81 by adding the reserved ball number by entering the second winning opening 640. The only difference is that it is used to display the reserved ball number symbol of symbol 2 and the others are the same.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110. , Its value is changed. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 203b of the main controller 110. Can be changed. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on in the variation pattern reception process executed when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1701 in FIG. 108), and the variation display flag in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is turned off when the setting is made (see S1802 in FIG. 109). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1604 in FIG. 107), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1807 in FIG. 109). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The display area counter 223f is used to specify a display area for displaying the above-described entrance effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into four (first area 81a, second area 81b, third area 81c, and fourth area 81d), and for each display area It is comprised so that a separate entrance effect can be displayed. The display area counter 223f determines a display area for displaying the current entry effect from these four display areas (the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d, see FIG. 89 or FIG. 90). Used for. This display area counter 223f is initialized to 1 when the sound lamp control device 113 is started up, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 1 to 4 in the entry effect setting process (see FIG. 115) described later.

  Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. When a new entry effect is selected, the new entry effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the value of the display area counter 223f. The display area is controlled to be displayed. Specifically, when the value of the display area counter 223f is 1, the display of the entrance effect is set in the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. When the value is 2, it is set in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81, and when the value is 3, it is set in the first area 81c of the third symbol display device 81. In some cases, control is performed so as to be set in the first area 81 a of the third symbol display device 81. The value of the display area counter 223f is configured so that the value is updated by 1 in ascending order and reaches the maximum value of 4 and then returns to 1 when it is further updated. Different display areas (first area 81a, second area 81b, third area 81c, and fourth area 81d) can be displayed simultaneously (see FIGS. 89 and 90). Since a plurality of different entrance effects can be displayed simultaneously, the display effects can be diversified.

  The effect time storage area 223g is an area for storing the start time of the time effect described above. Based on the start time of the time effect stored in the effect time storage area 223g and the current time acquired from the RTC 292, a time effect that is periodically executed (5 minutes every hour) and the time effect A specific time effect that is executed during the specific time being executed (from the start of each time effect until the elapse of 5 minutes every 1 minute has elapsed) is executed (see FIG. 91). This effect time storage area 223g is set in the time setting process (see FIG. 105) of the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Information indicating the start time of the time effect and the specific time effect is set relatively with reference to the power-on time. Specifically, when the power of the sound lamp control device 113 is turned on at 9:00, first, the first time effect is 9:55, 55 minutes after the power-on time (9:00). It is set as information indicating the start time of. Then, a time every hour (10:55, 11:55...) From the start time of the first time effect is set for 24 hours as information indicating the start time of the time effect. Also, from the start time of each time production until the lapse of 5 minutes every minute (9:56, 9:57, 9:58, 9:59, 10:56, 10:57 ... ) Is set as information indicating the start time (start timing) of the specific time effect. Furthermore, since the time effect period is 5 minutes, information indicating the time (10:00, 11:00...) 5 minutes after the start time of the time effect is the normal game period (effect mode A). It is set as information indicating the start time (see FIG. 91).

  In this control example, each time effect (time effect, specific time effect) is set to be executed based on the time when the power is turned on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it set the start time of (time production, specific time production). For example, 00 minutes per hour may be set as the start time of the time effect. Thereby, when turning on the power of a plurality of pachinko machines 10, even if the power-on time is deviated, the start time of the time effects is not shifted, and the time effects are executed in synchronization with the plurality of pachinko machines 10. can do.

  The effect mode storage area 223h is an area in which information indicating the current effect period is stored, and an effect corresponding to the effect period is selected and executed (displayed) based on the information in the effect mode storage area 223h. . In this control example, in addition to the time effect period described above, if it is determined that the game will be a big hit after the end of the time effect period as described above (variable display in which the winning prize information held is a big win or a big win) Three effect periods are set, namely, a time effect extension period that shifts to (when the game is being executed) and a normal game period that does not correspond to either the time effect period or the time effect extension period. For the sake of simplification of the following description, the normal game period is described as effect mode A, the time effect period as effect mode B, and the time effect extension period as effect mode C. In the effect mode storage area 223h, when the effect mode A is set as information for identifying these three effect modes, “00H” which is the value indicating the effect mode A is the effect mode storage area 223h. When the production mode B is set, “01H”, which is a value indicating the production mode B, is stored. When the production mode C is set, the value indicating the production mode C is stored. A certain “02H” is stored. Thus, by storing information corresponding to the production period (production mode) in the production mode storage area 223h, it is possible to easily identify which production period is the current production period.

  The avoidance flag 223i determines whether or not a countdown notice effect including a countdown display mode is executed (displayed) as a notice effect (time notice effect) executed (displayed) in the time effect period (effect mode B). It is a flag used to When this avoidance flag 223i is on, it indicates that the countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) as the time notice effect, and when it is off, it indicates that the countdown notice effect is not executed (displayed). When the avoidance flag 223i is on, the specific time effect (countdown effect) that is an effect including the same kind of display mode (countdown) is restricted (avoided). Thereby, when the countdown notice effect is executed as the time notice effect, the execution (display) of the effect can be limited (avoided) so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not executed (displayed). As a result, in the time effect period, it is possible to prevent the effect including the same type of display mode (countdown) from being performed repeatedly, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is confused.

  This avoidance flag 223i is turned on when the countdown notice effect is selected as the notice effect (time notice effect) selected in the effect mode B (time effect period) in the notice selection process (see FIG. 111). It is set (see S2007 in FIG. 111). And when the variable display in which the countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) is finished, it is set to off.

  In addition, without providing such an avoidance flag 223i, it is also possible to select and execute an effect having a different display mode between the normal notice effect and the time notice effect. Specifically, the countdown notice effect is selected in the normal notice effect, but the countdown notice effect may not be selected in the time notice effect. Thereby, it can suppress that the production | presentation including the same kind of display mode (countdown) is performed repeatedly in a time production period.

  The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selection of various effects (variation patterns, notice effects, etc.) and various lotteries in the audio lamp control device 113. Although not shown, the main process ( 106), it is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not an instantaneous power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110 and before the power-off process is executed (see S1518 in FIG. 106). Thereafter, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1308: Yes in FIG. 104) in the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 104), a certain time has elapsed since the power-off flag 223y was set on. This is a case where the voice lamp control device 113 starts up before (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is an instantaneous power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete because only a part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the work area information in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1309 in FIG. 104). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be normally operated.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 107) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S2501 in FIG. 116) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  Furthermore, a correction information table 234a3 is provided in the NAND flash memory 234a (see FIG. 79). In the correction information table 234a3, data (hereinafter referred to as correction) for correcting an image (hereinafter referred to as a power-on image) displayed on the display device (third symbol display device 81, sub display device 690) when the power is turned on. Information) is stored (see FIG. 80B). In this control example, the capacity of the character ROM 234 is reduced by diverting and displaying the power-on image for effects other than when the power is turned on. However, if the power-on image is displayed in the same display mode (position, size) in each effect other than when the power is turned on, the visibility of each effect may be impaired. Therefore, by using the correction information table 234a3, the power-on image is corrected to an appropriate display mode (position, size) in each effect other than when the power is turned on, so that the visibility of each effect is not lost. The time image is used for display.

  The power-on image is composed of three types of images, and the display mode (position and size) can be corrected for each of these various power-on images. Here, three types of images constituting the power-on image (hereinafter referred to as various power-on images) will be described. The power-on image is a main image at power-on, which is an image for notifying a player or the like that initialization processing accompanying power-on is performed, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The power-on variation image that is an image for informing the lottery result and a power-on title image that is an image for enabling the player or the like to easily identify the model of the pachinko machine 10. Has been. These various power-on images are displayed on each display device (the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-display device 690) in a display mode (position and size) predetermined at the time of power-on. This will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The correction information table 234a3 is referred to in the special effect correction process (see FIG. 121) or the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131), and correction information corresponding to the effect currently being executed (displayed) is stored in the correction information storage area 233m. Stored in The correction information stored in the correction information storage area 233m is referred to when the drawing list (see FIG. 87) is generated in the drawing process (see FIG. 134), and is used to set the display mode of various power-on images. Detailed information (display availability, display position (coordinates) or size (enlargement ratio)) is corrected based on the correction information. Thereby, it is possible to correct and display the display modes of various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, and power-on title image).

  Here, the contents of the correction information table 234a3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the correction information table 234a3. This correction information table 234a3 stores correction information corresponding to each effect of various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, and power-on title image), and correction for normal effects. Information, correction information for demonstration effects, correction information for moving an extendable accessory, and correction information for moving a tilted accessory are provided.

  As the correction information for each effect, for each image type of the power-on image, correction information corresponding to display availability (on or off), correction information corresponding to the coordinate correction amount, and correction information corresponding to the enlargement ratio Is prescribed. The correction information corresponding to whether display is possible (on or off) is a value for determining whether or not to display the corresponding image. When the value is on, the corresponding image is set to be displayed. When (corrected) and the value is OFF, the corresponding image is set (corrected) so as not to be displayed. The correction information corresponding to the coordinate correction amount is for correcting the display position (coordinate) of the corresponding image, and the coordinate correction amount is changed from the position (coordinate) where the corresponding image is displayed when the power is turned on. It is set (corrected) to be displayed at the moved position (coordinates) based on the corresponding correction information. Furthermore, the correction information corresponding to the enlargement factor is for correcting the size (enlargement factor) of the corresponding image, and this enlargement is performed in the lower right direction with the upper left corner of the corresponding image as the origin (reference point). Based on the rate, the image is set (corrected) to be enlarged (or reduced in the upper left direction).

  The correction information for normal performance is correction information used when the initialization process at the time of power-on is completed and a normal game is performed in the pachinko machine 10. The demonstration effect correction information is correction information used when the demonstration effect is executed (displayed). Further, the correction information for moving the expansion / contraction accessory is correction information used when an effect (expansion / contraction character scenario) movable by the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is executed (displayed). Further, the correction information for moving the tilting combination is correction information used when an effect (tilting combination scenario) in which the effect member 620 moves in the tilting operation unit 600 is executed (displayed).

  Specifically, in the correction information for normal presentation, the power-on main image and the power-on title image are set to off, and the power-on variation image is set to on. Then, the coordinate correction amount of the power-on variation image is set to (−600, −450), and the enlargement ratio is set to × 1 (same size). As a result, when the normal effect is executed, the main image at power-on and the title image at power-on are corrected so as to be hidden, and the fluctuation image at power-on is displayed at the position (coordinates) displayed at power-on. ) To (−600, −450) so that it is displayed at the same size as the moved position (coordinates). Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, the normal effect is performed on the power-on variation image displayed on the lower right side of the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is displayed in the upper left corner of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 83 (a)).

  Further, in the correction information for the demonstration effect, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are set to off, and the power-on title image is set to on. Then, the correction amount of the coordinates of the title image at power-on is set to (−700, 0), and the enlargement ratio is set to × 2 (2 times). As a result, when the demonstration effect is executed, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are corrected so as to be hidden, and the power-on title image is displayed at the position (coordinates) displayed when the power is turned on. ) To (−700, 0) moved position (coordinates) so that it is displayed in double size. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 to FIG. 83, a demonstration effect is performed on the power-on title image displayed in the center of the sub display device 690 when the power is turned on. Is enlarged and displayed at the center of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 83B).

  Here, the demonstration effect is when the next variation effect associated with entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. This is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in the correction information for moving the extendable accessory, the power-on main image and the power-on title image are set to off, and the power-on variation image is set to on. The coordinate correction amount of the power-on variation image is set to (200, -450), and the enlargement ratio is set to x1 (same size). As a result, when an effect (expandable character scenario) in which the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is executed is corrected so that the power-on main image and the power-on title image are not displayed. Then, the fluctuation image at power-on is corrected so as to be displayed at the same size as the position (coordinates) moved by (200, -450) from the position (coordinates) displayed at the time of power-on. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, a power-on variation image displayed in the upper left corner of the third symbol display device 81 when the normal effect is executed by this correction, When the telescopic combination scenario is executed, it is displayed in the upper left corner of the sub display device 690.

  Further, the correction information for moving the tilting accessory is set to the same information as the correction information for normal performance. As a result, when an effect (tilting role scenario) in which the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is moved is executed, the display modes (positions of various power-on images (positions) are the same as when the normal effect is executed. , Size) is corrected.

  Thus, when an effect other than when the power is turned on is executed, the display mode (position and size) of various power-on images is corrected based on the correction information in the correction information table 234a3 corresponding to the effect. Displayed. As a result, various power-on images can be diverted and displayed at various effects other than when the power is turned on, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, since various power-on images can be corrected and displayed in an appropriate display mode (position, size) for each production, the various power-on images can be used without impairing the visibility of each production. Can be displayed.

  In addition, you may correct | amend so that the position where the image at the time of various power activation is displayed moves according to operation | movement of the accessory moved by each production. Specifically, correction information for various power-on images corresponding to the elapsed time in one effect is defined. For example, when the effect that the fluctuation image at power-on is displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, the effect that the tilting operation unit 600 gradually slides (moves) from the right to the left is executed. Let's say. In this case, the power-on variation image is slide-displayed to the left in accordance with the operation of the tilting operation unit 600, so that the power-on variation image is slid and displayed at a position that does not become the back of the tilting operation unit 600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the fluctuation image at the time of power-on from becoming difficult to visually recognize due to the operation of the tilting operation unit 600. That is, the player can clearly see the power-on variation image. In addition, when the power-on variation image is moved and displayed to the area where the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, the image is moved to the sub display device 690 built in the tilting operation unit 600. The coordinates may be set so as to be displayed. With this configuration, the power-on variation image can be moved and displayed without impairing the visibility of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The object to be moved and displayed is not limited to the power-on variation image, but may be the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol, or the symbol or the like. There may be.

  Further, when various power-on images are moved, they may be moved back and forth between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. In this case, when the image is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, the resolution of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 is different. Adjustment (conversion) may be performed using a scaler (for example, a video scaler). As a result, it is possible to widen the range in which the various images can be moved when the power is turned on.

  Furthermore, correction information may be set so that various power-on images can be moved when the power is turned on. In this case, the correction information used when the power is turned on may be read together with the program in the first program storage area that is read first when the power is turned on. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an origin return operation is performed to move various accessories to the origin position when the power is turned on. Therefore, there are times when it becomes difficult for the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 to be visually recognized because the various accessories move by the return to origin operation. Therefore, by correcting the display position (coordinates) of the various power-on images according to the movable state of the various objects, it is easy to visually recognize the various power-on images even during the origin return operation of the various objects. It can be.

  Next, the image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 87) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 118B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b, a third symbol area 235d, and a power-on title image area 235f are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 receives image data corresponding to the power-on main image, the power-on variation image, and the power-on title image area 235f from the character ROM 234 when the power is turned on. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer to 235a (see FIG. 116).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 81 to FIG. 83, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 and the power-on image displayed in the display area will be described. First, FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between an image drawn by the display control device 114 and the display areas of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example includes a third symbol display device 81 and a sub display device 690, and images displayed on each display device (the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690) are constant. Control for updating every period (for example, 20 milliseconds) is executed by the display control device 114.

  Specifically, the display control device 114 updates (draws) image data of horizontal 1200 pixels (pixels) × vertical 600 pixels (pixels) every predetermined period (for example, 20 milliseconds). By setting these image data in each display device, the images displayed on each display device (the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690) are updated at regular intervals. Also, the image data corresponding to each pixel (pixel) is composed of three data: data corresponding to R (red), data corresponding to G (green), and data corresponding to B (blue). Yes. Each color data is composed of, for example, 8 bits, and the gradation (level) of each color can be set in increments of 8 bits (that is, 256 levels). That is, any of 256 levels from “00H” to “FFH” can be set as the setting value for each color.

  Each pixel provided in each display device is provided with a region capable of developing red, a region capable of developing green, and a region capable of developing blue, and image data is set. Thus, the gradation (level) of each color can be set. Note that each pixel (pixel) constituting each display device is sufficiently fine, and one pixel (pixel) constituting a region capable of developing red, a region capable of developing green, and blue can be developed. It is difficult to distinguish the region with the naked eye. Thus, the naked eye looks like a synthesized color of these three colors.

  The image data set for each pixel (pixel) will be described with a specific example. For example, if the R data is FFH (255 gradations) and the other color data is 00H (0 gradations), the pixel in which the image data is set is the maximum gradation (maximum level) red color. Is displayed (the pixel looks red with the maximum gradation). If R data and G data are 80H (128 gradations) and B data is 00H (0 gradations), 128/255 gradation red and 128/255 gradation green are used. As a result of the synthesis, the pixels for which the image data is set are displayed with the yellow appearance of the maximum gradation. Furthermore, if R data, G data, and B data are all FFH (255 gradations), the three colors R, G, and B are all set to the maximum gradation (255/255 gradations). As a result of combining these three colors, the pixels for which the data is set are displayed with a white appearance. On the other hand, if all the three colors of data are 00H, all the three colors are not displayed. As a result, the pixel for which the data is set is displayed with a black appearance.

  In this way, the display color of each pixel (pixel) constituting the display screen of each display device can be expressed in 256 steps for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). A clear image can be displayed on the apparatus. In this control example, each pixel is provided with a region capable of developing red, a region capable of developing green, and a region capable of developing blue. However, the colors necessary for image display are comprehensive. You may change in the range which can be expressed. For example, instead of the three colors of red, green, and blue, three colors of yellow, cyan, and magenta may be used. In addition to red, green, and blue, a region capable of developing yellow may be provided in each pixel (pixel), and 8-bit data corresponding to yellow may be added to the image data. By adding a region capable of developing yellow, the color expression can be made more vivid. In particular, since a color that contains a lot of yellow components and is frequently used for display effects or the like (for example, gold) can be expressed in a vivid manner, the interest of the display effects can be further improved.

  As shown in FIG. 81, coordinate data is associated with display data of each pixel constituting the image data. Here, the coordinate data is data for specifying a data setting position (setting pixel) in each display device. In the present embodiment, a range of 0 to 1200 can be designated as the horizontal coordinate, and a range of 0 to 600 can be designated as the vertical coordinate.

  In the horizontally long rectangular area shown in FIG. 81, the coordinates of the upper left corner position are defined as origin coordinates (0, 0), and the coordinates of the lower right corner position are defined as (1200, 600). In addition, image data defined in a rectangular area having four points of coordinates (0, 0), (800, 0), (0, 600), (800, 600) as vertexes is displayed in the third symbol display. This is a region (third symbol display device region) defining an image to be displayed on the device 81. Each coordinate is set so that the arrangement of each pixel (pixel) data in this area matches the position where the image data is actually set in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, image data defined in a rectangular area having four points (800, 0), (1200, 0), (800, 300), and (1200, 300) is transmitted to the sub display device 690. This is a region (sub display device region) that defines an image to be displayed. Further, the remaining rectangular areas having the vertices of (800, 300), (1200, 300), (800, 600), and (1200, 600) are spare areas (unused areas). The image data in this area is not used for display.

  As described above, the display control device 114 in this control example draws the image data to be set for the third symbol display device 81 and the image data to be set for the sub display device 690 as one image data, Whether to display on the third symbol display device 81 or on the sub display device 690 is changed according to the coordinates of the image data. This makes it easy to synchronize the images (effects) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, and the images (effects) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. ) Can be suppressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 may be drawn separately.

  Next, referring to FIG. 82, a power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 by the display control device 114 when the power is turned on will be described. Here, the main image when power is turned on is defined as image data of 450 pixels (pixels) × 200 pixels (pixels) in the horizontal direction, and the fluctuation image when power is turned on is equivalent to 100 pixels (pixels) × 100 pixels (pixels) in length. The title image at the time of power-on is defined as image data for 200 pixels (pixels) × 50 pixels (pixels) vertically. In order to simplify the explanation of the display positions (coordinates) of various power-on images, when the display positions (coordinates) of various power-on images are shown, the upper left corner of the image data of the various power-on images is displayed. The coordinates of the pixel (picture element) are representatively indicated (shown). For example, the main image when the power is turned on in FIG. 82 (a) is in a rectangular area with four points (100, 50), (550, 50), (100, 250), (550, 250) as vertices. The image data displayed on the screen. In this case, the coordinates (100, 50) of the pixel in the upper left corner of the image data of the main image when the power is turned on are representatively shown (shown) as the display position (coordinates) of the main image when the power is turned on. And the display position (coordinates) of the main image at power-on is expressed as (100, 50).

  Immediately after power-on, the display control device 114 first transfers image data corresponding to the power-on title image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on title image area 235f. Next, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b, and then stored in the resident video RAM 235. The remaining image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the display control device 114 first displays the power-on title image using the image data stored in the power-on title image area 235g. The display position (coordinates) of the title image at power-on is (900, 100), and the title image at power-on is displayed at the center of the sub display device 690 (see FIG. 82 (a)).

  Next, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. The display position (coordinates) of the main image at power-on is (100, 50), and the main image at power-on is displayed at the center of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 82 (a)). While these displays are being performed, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  Here, since the display screen resolution of the sub display device 690 is lower than that of the third symbol display device 81, the image data set for displaying the image on the sub display device 690 is the third symbol display device. The data amount is smaller than the image data for displaying an image on 81. Therefore, in the display control device 114, an image (title image at power-on) to be displayed on the sub display device 690 with a small amount of data for displaying an image is first stored in the resident video RAM. It is possible to shorten the time from when the image is input until the image is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the third symbol display device 81. A power-on variation image of the “○” symbol at the lower right position (the coordinates of (600, 450)) and a power-on variation image of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. Are repeatedly displayed alternately during the fluctuation period (see FIGS. 82B and 82C). Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", the image showing it will be displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is "out of special symbol", the image showing it will stop the changing effect It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and images indicating “o” and “x” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the main image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. .

  Furthermore, when this power-on variation image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the game that was being executed before the power failure when the power was cut off and recovered due to a power failure or the like during the execution of the game. Since the fluctuation or fluctuation result can be immediately confirmed by a simple fluctuation effect, the dissatisfaction felt by the player can be reduced.

  A simple character image or the like may be provided as an image displayed when the power is turned on and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, even in the simple variation effect displayed at the time of power-on, the variation of the effect can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the simple character image used here may be a character image used in the sub display device 690 during normal performance. As a result, a character image with a small data capacity displayed on the sub display device 690 can be used in common without providing a new simple character image, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved and resident. The image transfer time to the video RAM 235 can be shortened.

  Further, the images that have been transferred to the resident video RAM 235 may be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. As a result, even in the simple production that is executed from when the power is turned on until the normal game can be started, the variation of the production can be increased sequentially, so that the player's interest is improved. Can do.

  In addition, when transferring an image to the resident video RAM 235, an image compressed so as to have a low resolution by a known image compression technique is transferred, and thereafter, the transferred image is decompressed to the resident video RAM 235. May be. Then, when the compressed image is stored in the resident video RAM, the image may be displayed on the sub display device 690. Thereby, even if the image is compressed to a low resolution, the sub display device 690 with a low resolution can display the image without a sense of incongruity, and the time from when the power is turned on until the image is displayed. Can be shortened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, display screens during normal production and demonstration production will be described. FIG. 83 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of normal performance, and FIG. 83 (b) is a display of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of demonstration performance. It is the schematic diagram which showed the screen typically.

  At the time of normal performance, the display coordinates of the power-on variation image are (−600, −450) and displayed based on a correction information table 234a3 described later. Since the display coordinates of the power-on variation image at the time of power-on are (600, 450), the power-on variation image is displayed at the position (0, 0) during the normal performance (FIG. 83 (a). )reference). This power-on variation image is used as an indication of the variation result of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) during normal performance.

  Further, at the time of demonstration production, the display coordinates of the title image at the time of power-on are (−700, 0) and displayed based on a correction information table 234a3 described later. Since the display position of the title image at power-on at the time of power-on is (900, 100), the title image at power-on is displayed at the position (200, 100) at the time of demonstration production (FIG. 83 (b) )reference).

  Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols, which are numbered from “0” to “9” as the third symbol, are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started changing after the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 has entered the ball. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the production is not started immediately.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a correction information storage area 233m, a special effect correction flag 233n, a background image change flag 233p, and an effect mode flag 233r.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to ending effects and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B Or if it is either of big hit C, the stop symbol which shows each big hit will be finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  Further, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters the ball, the electric symbol 640a is opened as a normal symbol, and the ball becomes the second winning ball. As it becomes easier to enter the mouth 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of possessions or a state in which the possession is not decreased even if a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, is prepared with 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table.

  When the MPU 231 specifies to display any one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (in the sea, on the beach, the background for the preparation period, or the background dedicated to the time effect) according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 The rear image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified with the passage of time.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  The “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 85). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 87) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 86 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 86).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 86, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 87) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 86, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 116) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2505 in FIG. 116). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S4805 in FIG. 132 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2801 in FIG. 118B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2809 in FIG. 118 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 118) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 118 (b) S2810) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 119 to 127) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 128 to 130) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4701 in FIG. 132A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 132B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 57), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 87) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 87), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 118 (b)). ) (See S2803)), the pointer update process (see S4305 in FIG. 130) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (Refer to FIG. 87), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 87, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,... For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 ( Each time (see S2803 in FIG. 118B) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4307 in FIG. 128). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4913 in FIG. 133). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4914 in FIG. 133). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 134).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 118B) is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 134).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The correction information storage area 233m is an area for storing the correction information of the correction information table 234a3 described above. Based on the correction information stored in the correction information storage area 233m, various power-on images (main power-on images). The display mode (position, size) of the image, the power-on variation image, and the power-on title image) is corrected and displayed. The correction information storage area 233m is an initial value for all image types when the sound lamp control device 113 is turned on (display enable / disable, coordinate correction amount is (0, 0), and enlargement ratio is x1 (same size). )) Is set, various power-on images are displayed at the initial position (see FIG. 82) when the power is turned on. Then, the correction information in the correction information table 234a3 is set according to the gaming state (displayed effect). For example, if the normal effect is being executed, the correction information for the normal effect in the correction information table 234a3 is set (see S4604 in FIG. 131).

  The special effect correction flag 233n is correction information (expandable accessory) corresponding to the effect (expandable accessory scenario or tilted accessory scenario) of the extendable effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9). This is a flag for discriminating whether or not the correction information for moving or tilting accessory movement) is set in the correction information storage area 233m. When the special effect correction flag 233n is on, it indicates that the correction information for moving the extendable or moving tilted object is set in the correction information storage area 233m. This indicates that the correction information for moving an object or moving a tilted accessory is not set in the correction information storage area 233m. When the special effect flag 233n is on, correction information for normal effect or demonstration effect is not set in the correction information storage area 233m in the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131) (FIG. 131). S4602: See No). As a result, the telescopic accessory movable set in the correction information storage area 233m is movable even though the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is performing. It is possible to prevent the correction information for moving the object or the tilting accessory from being rewritten to the correction information for the normal effect or the demonstration effect by the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131). As a result, the display modes (positions and sizes) of various power-on images are being executed even though the effect of moving the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is being executed. However, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the problem that the display mode (position, size) corresponds to the normal effect or the demonstration effect, and to prevent (suppress) the player from being confused.

  This special effect correction flag 233n is set to ON in the special effect correction process (see FIG. 121) when the correction information for moving the extendable / decreasing feature is set in the correction information storage area 233m. (See S3205 in FIG. 121). Then, it is set to OFF when the variable display (effect) is stopped (see S4101 in FIG. 126 (b)). That is, the special effect correction flag 233n is set off when the movable effect of the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is stopped. By setting the special effect correction flag 233n to OFF, it is possible to set correction information for normal effect or demonstration effect in the correction information storage area 233m by the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131) (FIG. 131). 131, S4602: Yes). As described above, the correction information corresponding to the effect can be set in the correction information storage area 233m, so that various power-on images are corrected and displayed in display modes (position, size) suitable for each effect. Can do.

  The back image change flag 233p is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The rear image change flag 233p is set to ON when a rear image change command or an effect mode change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S4001 in FIG. 126 (a)). Then, it is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S4909 in FIG. 133), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S4910 in FIG. 133). Thereby, the back image corresponding to the back image change command and the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The effect mode flag 233r is a flag that is set and referred to in order to determine the current effect mode (effect period), and the back image is changed based on the effect mode set in the effect mode flag 233r. The effect mode flag 233r is set based on the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 (see S4002 in FIG. 126 (a)), and will be described later based on the set value of the effect mode flag 233r. In the normal image transfer setting process, rear image data is set (see S4911 in FIG. 133). Thus, the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 can be changed according to the effect mode set by the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88 to FIG. 90, the entering effect that is executed during the short-time game of this control example will be described. This entry effect is an effect that suggests the expectation that the change display during execution (change) will be a big hit based on the game ball entering the second prize opening 640. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a timing chart when the ball entering effect is executed. In the short-time game in this control example, the fluctuation display based on the second special symbol is 0.6 seconds (the period of 0.125 seconds in which the symbols are variably displayed, and the period of 0.475 seconds in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. It ends with. In this case, when the expectation level that is a big hit based on the execution of the fluctuation effect is displayed in one display area, the fluctuation effect is finished in a short time (0.6 seconds) (that is, the expectation level that is a big hit is displayed). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the degree of expectation that is a big hit.

  Therefore, in this control example, the ball entering effect indicating the degree of expectation that is a big hit is displayed in the four areas from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81 in order. While displaying the entrance effect in the area 81a, the next entrance effect can be displayed in the second area 81b. Thereby, the display period of the pitching effect indicating the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit can be lengthened, and it is possible to provide a game machine that makes it easy for the player to recognize the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit, that is, easy to understand.

  In addition, the pitching effect indicating the degree of expectation that is a big hit is that a game ball has entered the second winning slot 640 even when the second winning slot 640 has an upper limit (4 in this control example). Is displayed on the basis (so-called entry effect is also displayed at the time of overflow). As a result, even if the second prize opening 640 is held at the upper limit (4), it is possible to make the player want to continuously enter the game ball into the second prize opening 640. Can improve the interest of the elderly.

  Furthermore, the pitching effect indicating the degree of expectation that is a jackpot is an effect corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot. Specifically, as will be described later, based on the decrease in the number of remaining fluctuations until the big hit, the control is performed so as to achieve a high-expected entry effect (high-level entry effect). As a result, the level of the pitching effect (expected degree of jackpot) is gradually increased, so that the player can be gradually predicted that the jackpot will arrive, and the player's interest can be improved.

  Specifically, this will be described with reference to FIG. First, after the jackpot game is over, if the game state shifts to the short-time game state and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is 4 during the jackpot game, the variation based on the oldest winning game among the held balls A variation 1 is started. Here, if there is no jackpot winning information in the winning information of each holding ball, the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot is undecided (greater than 4). In this case, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, a level 0 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, if there is a first ball entering the second prize opening 640 (the lottery result is off) during the execution of the variation 1, the level 0 ball effect is the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. And the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol changes to 4 (see FIG. 89 (a)).

  Next, when the variation 1 ends, the variation 2 based on the reserved ball starts, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 3. If there is a second ball (the lottery result is a big win) at the second prize opening 640 during the execution of the fluctuation 2, the number of remaining fluctuations until the big win is four. In this case, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, a level 1 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, the level 1 entry effect is displayed in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81, and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol changes to four.

  Then, when the variation 2 ends and the variation 3 based on the reserved ball starts, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 3, and the number of remaining variations until the big hit decreases to 3. In this case, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, a level 2 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, if there is a third ball (the lottery result is off) at the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the variation 3, the level 2 ball effect is displayed in the third area 81c of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 89B), the reserved symbol of the second special symbol changes to 4. Further, if there is a fourth ball (overflow) in the second prize opening 640 during the execution of the variation 3, the remaining number of variations until the big hit is three. In this case, the level 2 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, the level 2 entry effect is displayed in the fourth area 81 d of the third display device 81.

  Next, when the variation 3 is finished and the variation 4 based on the retained ball is started, the number of retained balls of the second special symbol becomes 3, and the remaining number of variations until the big hit decreases to 2. In this case, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, a level 3 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). However, if there is no entry to the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the variation 4, the entry effect is not newly displayed, and the variation 4 is finished as it is.

  When the variation 4 is finished, the variation 5 based on the reserved ball is started, the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol is reduced to 2, and the remaining number of variations until the big hit is reduced to 1. In this case, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, a level 4 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Accordingly, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the variation 5, a level 4 entry effect is displayed in the first area 81a of the third display device 81 (see FIG. 90 (a)). ) And the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases to 3.

  When the variation 5 is completed, the variation 6 based on the reserved ball of the jackpot winning information is started, the number of retained balls of the second special symbol is reduced to 2, and the remaining number of variations until the jackpot is 0 (the relevant Fluctuation decreases to jackpot). In this case, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640, a level 5 entry effect is selected as the entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the variation 6, a level 5 entry effect is displayed in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 90 (b)). With reference, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases to 3. Thereafter, when the variation 6 has ended, the jackpot game is executed.

  In this way, in this control example, the type of entry effect is configured to be changed according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot, so the player can play the jackpot before the fluctuation based on the jackpot is executed. Can be recognized in advance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, the level of the pitching effect gradually increases based on the decrease in the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot, so that the player can gradually feel the jackpot arrival, and the player's interest Can be improved.

  In this control example, the turnover rate (efficiency) of the game is improved by shortening (0.6 seconds) the variation time of one variation effect in the short-time game. However, since the variation time is short, the variation effect executed (displayed) in the variation time is also shortened. As a result, unless the game ball is continuously entered into the second winning opening 640, the variation effect is not continuously performed (that is, the period during which the variation effect is not executed (displayed) becomes long), and the game is not boring. There is a risk of becoming. Therefore, in this control example, the expectation level that is a big hit is displayed based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. As a result, the player wants to enter the game ball into the second prize opening 640, and can continuously make the game ball enter the second prize opening 640, so that the fluctuating effect can be achieved. It can be displayed continuously, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In this control example, the ballistic effect is performed according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ballistic effect in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot. May be executed, or the above-mentioned entrance effect may be performed regardless of the number of remaining fluctuations until the big hit. Thereby, the case where it becomes a big hit without predicting the arrival of the big hit can be provided, the game can be given unexpectedness, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, in this control example, the above-described entrance effect is configured to be displayed in order from each of the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the pitching effect based on one pitch is continuously displayed until four game balls enter the second winning port 640, and the gaming ball is displayed at the second winning port 640. Even when the pitching interval is very short, it is possible to secure time for displaying the pitching effect, and to suppress the problem that the player cannot visually recognize (recognize) the pitching effect. In addition, you may make it discriminate | determine the area | region where the entrance effect is not displayed, and display using the area | region which is not displayed preferentially. Thereby, it is possible to secure a longer time for displaying the entrance effect.

  Further, in the present control example, the upper limit is the suspension of the second winning opening 640, and even when a game ball enters the second winning opening 640 (so-called overflow), a ball entering effect is performed. ing. As a result, even if the second prize opening 640 is held at the upper limit, the ball entry effect is displayed based on entering the ball, so the player holds the second prize opening 640 as the upper limit. Even if it is, it can be made to want to make a game ball enter into the 2nd prize opening 640 continuously, and the interest of a player can be improved. In addition, since the pitching effect is displayed more than the number of short-time games that have been given, it is possible to make the player feel that a lot of short-time games have been given.

  In this control example, the entrance effect is configured to be displayed in order (clockwise) in each of the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, it may be configured to display in reverse order (counterclockwise), or may be displayed randomly. Furthermore, the display order may be changed when a specific performance or variation is executed or when there is jackpot winning information. Thereby, the order of the displayed ball effects can be changed, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and prevent the player from getting bored early.

  In addition, the display order of the entrance effect displayed in each area (the first area 81a to the fourth area) of the third symbol display device 81 may be changed according to the degree of expectation that is a big hit. For example, when the expectation level that is a big hit is low, the entrance effect is displayed in order (clockwise) in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d, while the expectation level that is a big hit is high. Are displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise). Thereby, the player can recognize the expectation degree in the display order of the entry effect displayed in each area (the first area 81a to the fourth area), and each area (the first area 81a to the fourth area). It is no longer necessary to look closely at the contents of the pitching effect displayed on the player, so that the burden on the player can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91, each production period (each production mode) set in this control example will be described. In the present control example, as described above, the normal game period (effect mode A) in which the normal effect is executed (displayed) and the effect period set periodically (5 minutes per hour). At the end of the time effect period (effect mode B), which is a period in which the effect (time effect) of a special aspect corresponding to the elapsed time is executed (displayed), and at the end of the time effect period (effect mode B) Thereafter, there is provided a time effect extension period (effect mode C) for shifting to a case where it is determined that the game will be a big win (when the pending winning information is a big win or a variable display that is a big win is being executed). .

  FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing each effect period (normal game period, time effect period, time effect extension period) in this control example. As described above, in this control example, information indicating the start times of the normal game period (effect mode A) and the time effect period (effect mode B) is set in the effect time storage area 223g. This effect time storage area 223g is obtained by the RTC 292 (time measuring means) by the time setting process (see FIG. 105) in the startup process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. ), Information indicating the start time of the normal game period (effect mode A) and the time effect period (effect mode B) is set based on the time information (information indicating the power-on time) acquired from . Each effect period is set based on information indicating the start time of the effect time storage area 223g.

  Specifically, in the effect time storage area 223g, information indicating the time 55 minutes after the power-on time is set as information indicating the start time of the first time effect. As a result, the time effect period (effect mode B) is set 55 minutes after the power-on time. Note that a normal game period (effect mode A) is set for 55 minutes after the power is turned on. Since the time effect period is 5 minutes, information indicating the time five minutes after the start time of the time effect is set as information indicating the start time of the normal game period (effect mode A). As a result, when 5 minutes have elapsed from the start time of the time effect, the normal game period (effect mode A) is set. In this manner, information indicating the start time of the effect time storage area 223g is set so that the normal game period (55 minutes) and the time effect period (5 minutes) are set repeatedly, and 5 minutes every hour. The time production period (production mode B) is set.

  Here, when 5 minutes of the time effect period elapses, it is determined whether or not the reserved memory stored at that time or the special symbol that is changing is set to have a big hit determination result. If it is determined that a jackpot is set, a time effect extension period (effect mode C) is set by the time until the change ends. In this case, when the time effect extension period (effect mode C) ends, the normal game period (effect mode A) is set.

  Further, when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, the third symbol display device 81 is used regardless of whether or not the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is subsequently shifted. Is switched to the sign display mode that suggests the end of the time effect period. By switching to this sign display mode, the variable display of the 3rd symbol that has been executed (displayed) (regardless of whether it is a big hit or missed) is a display mode that is difficult for the player to see. Variable. Specifically, the image is reduced and continuously displayed in the lower right portion of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, regardless of the variation display that has been executed (displayed) until then, the third symbol indicating the disengagement is stopped and displayed at the center of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the third symbol indicating the disengagement in a pseudo manner). The symbol is displayed). Here, the third symbol that is pseudo-stopped in the sign display mode is displayed with a slight shaking, thereby notifying that it is not completely stopped. In this way, by switching to the indication display mode and displaying it as if the third symbol was stopped, the third symbol seems to have stopped and displayed at the same timing as the other pachinko machines 10. Can be made. Thereby, the display mode at the end of the time effect period can be set to the same display mode on the plurality of pachinko machines 10, and it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, even when the variation display of the third symbol is not executed (displayed), the display mode is similarly changed to the sign display mode. Can be switched. Thereby, since the display mode is switched to the precursor display mode regardless of whether or not the variable display is executed (displayed), the display mode at the end of the time effect period is the same as the display mode on the plurality of pachinko machines 10. can do.

  It should be noted that in the precursor display mode, the display mode in which the variation display of the third symbol that has been executed (displayed) is varied, and the display mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize is not limited to that described above. For example, it may be displayed in a manner in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that it is a variable display of the third symbol, or may not be displayed at all. Thereby, it can be made difficult to recognize that the 3rd symbol which shows pseudo detachment is displayed, and the effect of making the 3rd symbol appear as if it has been stopped and displayed can be further strengthened.

  Furthermore, at the timing when the time effect period (effect mode B) ends (that is, the timing of whether or not to shift to the time effect extension period (effect mode C)), the time effect period is indicated as “ After the characters “Super Fish Time”, the characters “End?” (Notification mode) are displayed. After that, when the time production extension period (production mode C) is set, the characters “super fish school time extension!” Are displayed to notify that the time production extension period (production mode C) has been entered. The background image of is displayed again. An effect executed (displayed) in the time effect extension period is called an extension effect.

  When shifting to the time effect extension period (effect mode C), the display of the third symbol that has been changed (reduced) to the display mode that is difficult to visually recognize by the player is switched to the sign display mode. It is changed (enlarged) and displayed in a display form that can be visually recognized again (see FIG. 83). When the change display of the third symbol is changed (enlarged) to a display mode that can be visually recognized again (in an enlarged manner), the player is notified (displayed) as if a new special symbol change has started. (Hereafter referred to as re-variation production). Thereby, in changing (enlarging) the variable display of the third symbol that has been changed (reduced) to the display form that is difficult for the player to visually recognize in the sign display form, it can be changed to a viewable (easy) form again. It can be varied (enlarged) without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is a period until the variable display that is a big hit ends (that is, until the big hit game is started). In the time effect extension period (effect mode C), the remaining time (for example, 115 seconds) of the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the jackpot game is started). Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81).

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the time production extension period (production mode C) is set, the case where the holding storage that is a big hit is set, or the case where the big hit variation has already started (being changed) ). Therefore, shifting to the time effect extension period (effect mode C) will notify the player of the jackpot. Here, in the time effect period, the same effect is executed in synchronism between the same pachinko machines 10, and an effect indicating whether or not to shift to the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is displayed at the same timing. . Thereby, by shifting to the time effect extension period (effect mode C), other (surrounding) players can also determine that the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit (that is, a big hit with the surrounding players) Therefore, the gambling feelings of other (surrounding) players can be beaten.

  On the other hand, when the time effect period (effect mode B) ends and the normal game period (effect mode A) is set, the “super fish school time end” is announced to notify the end of the time effect period (effect mode B)! Characters are displayed. This display is displayed until the variable display of the third symbol changed to the display mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize in the precursor display mode is stopped. Then, from the next variation, the reduced display of the third symbol is canceled, and the third symbol is variably displayed in the normal size. By comprising in this way, even if a time production period (production mode B) is complete | finished and it does not transfer to a time production extension period (production mode C) after that, it will be in a mode which is difficult to visually recognize by switching to a precursor display mode. The variable change display can be stopped without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  On the other hand, when the remaining display of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, if the variation display of the third symbol is not executed (displayed), the normal game period (effect mode A) is set. When set, the characters “Super fish time end!” For notifying the end of the time effect period (effect mode B) are displayed for a predetermined time (3 seconds). From the next variation, the third symbol is variably displayed in the normal size (see FIG. 83 (a)) without being reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the condition for setting the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is set to a big hit after that (the pending winning information is a big win or a variable display that is a big win is being executed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be a case where a holding memory for selecting a fluctuation pattern that becomes a super reach is set, or a lottery unrelated to a special symbol lottery is executed and a predetermined lottery result is obtained. You may comprise so that it may be set when it becomes. Thereby, although it transfers to the time production extension period (production mode C), the case where it is not a jackpot can be provided. Thereby, since the player pays attention to whether or not it is a big hit in the time effect extension period (effect mode C), it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  Here, in the time effect period (effect mode B), a specific time effect (countdown effect) is performed regularly (every minute) (see FIG. 91). Thereby, in the time production period, the same specific time production (countdown production) can be performed in synchronization with other (for example, adjacent) pachinko machines 10 installed, and a plurality of pachinko machines 10 can provide a sense of unity. The effect of the time effect for the purpose of providing a certain effect can be further enhanced.

  The specific time effect (countdown effect) is such that the content of the effect changes based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change state and not in a short-time state (in a so-called latent probability change state), a countdown character (“3, 2, 1 ... ") is displayed in red (if not in the latent probability changing state, it is displayed in black). Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the gaming state is a state of probability change and is not in a time-short state (so-called latent probability change state). Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the contents of the specific time effect, and to improve the interest of the player. In addition, the alerting | reporting aspect which alert | reports that it is a latent probability change state is not restricted to what was mentioned above. For example, you may make it display the design (image) and character for alert | reporting that it is a latent probability change state. In this case, as the symbols (images), various power-on images may be corrected and used. As a result, there is no need to separately prepare a symbol (image) for notifying that the latent probability changing state is present, so that the data capacity (ROM capacity) can be reduced.

  Further, in this control example, in addition to the above-described specific time effect (countdown effect), a countdown notice effect including the same type of display mode (countdown) is executed. This countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) on the basis of entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. That is, it may be executed (displayed) at a timing different from the specific time effect (countdown effect) executed regularly (every minute). Therefore, a countdown notice effect including a specific time effect (countdown effect) and the same type of display mode (countdown) may be executed at a different timing from other (for example, the adjacent) pachinko machine 10 of the same type. is there. Thereby, the game can be provided with unexpectedness, and the interest of the player can be improved. In the countdown notice effect, after the countdown character (“3, 2, 1...”) Is displayed, a character design suggesting a degree of expectation that is a big hit is displayed, or the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit (or This is an effect in which a pattern or a character suggesting a degree of expectation that is a big hit based on repeated hitting (or pressing) of the frame button 22 is displayed.

  In this control example, it is conceivable that the production timing of the specific time production (countdown production) is reached during the execution (display) of the countdown notice production. In this case, there is a possibility that an effect including the same type of display mode (countdown) is displayed in an overlapping manner (or overwritten), resulting in a gaming machine that is difficult for a player to understand. Therefore, in this control example, the avoidance flag 223i described above is set to ON during execution of the countdown notice effect (see S2007 in FIG. 111), and when the avoidance flag 223i is ON, the specific time effect ( The (countdown effect) is configured not to be executed (set) (see S2305: Yes in FIG. 114). Thereby, it can prevent (suppress) that the problem mentioned above generate | occur | produces, and it can be set as the game machine easy to understand for a player.

  In this control example, the countdown mode is taken as an example, and the configuration for avoiding (limiting) the effects including the countdown mode from being displayed redundantly has been described. However, the effect of avoiding (limiting) overlapping display is not limited to the effect including the countdown mode. Of the effects including the same type of aspect, the present invention can be similarly applied to other effects that can be displayed in duplicate. For example, when an effect suggesting that a button is pressed can be displayed in duplicate, it may be avoided (limited) that an effect suggesting that a button is pressed is displayed repeatedly.

  In this control example, if a countdown notice effect is being executed (displayed) in order to prevent duplicate effects (countdown effect and countdown notice effect) including the same type (countdown) from being displayed, Avoided (restricted) the time effect (countdown effect) not to be executed (displayed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the effects including the same type (countdown) may be adjusted (extended or shortened) or the start timing may be changed. For example, when a specific time effect (countdown effect) is executed after 20 seconds, it is assumed that a countdown notice effect (normally, the effect time is 30 seconds) is executed (set). In this case, the production time of the countdown notice effect may be shortened (for example, shortened to 15 seconds). Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the effects including the same type of the effects from being displayed in duplicate without rendering any one of the effects including the same type of effects. As a result, more effects can be displayed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Moreover, you may make it as follows by changing the start timing of any one among the productions containing the same kind of mode (countdown). For example, the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect) may be delayed until the countdown notice effect ends (or until a predetermined time elapses after the end).

  Furthermore, when delaying the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect), the display (effect) mode (that is, the start timing that would have been set (displayed) if not delayed) A specific time effect (countdown effect) may be started (displayed) from the display (effect mode) displayed on the other pachinko machine 10. Specifically, the case where the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed by 5 seconds will be described as an example. As described above, the specific time effect (countdown effect) is an effect in which the countdown character is counted down by 1 every 3 seconds from “3”. Therefore, when the delay time is 5 seconds, the display (production) mode (display (production) mode displayed on the other pachinko machine 10) displayed when the delay is not performed is “2” as the countdown character. Is a display (production) mode. In accordance with this, the specific time effect (countdown effect) started with a delay of 5 seconds is controlled to start from the display (effect) mode in which “2” is displayed as the countdown character. Thereby, the specific time effect (countdown effect) with the delayed start timing can be displayed in synchronization with the specific time effect (countdown effect) being executed (displayed) in the other pachinko machine 10. As a result, since the specific time effect (countdown effect) executed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is executed (displayed) without deviation, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  As a method of delaying the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect), there is provided means (time measuring means) for measuring a period in which the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed, and based on the measurement result There is a method of setting a display (effect) aspect of a specific time effect (countdown effect) that starts after being delayed. As another method, during a period in which the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed, a process (for example, an image display pointer update process) is performed as a control process. Even if it is, the method of processing so as not to output the image and sound related to the specific time effect (countdown effect) (for example, muting only the sound related to the specific time effect) may be mentioned.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 92 to 103. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the third symbol variation pattern and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). A gate passing process is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display or the third symbol performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol and the like performed on the display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Includes during the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. If the aspect is not changing (S202: No), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 2203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (variable display in the special symbol) (N203) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (that is, there is a special symbol 2 reserved memory) (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 102) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. They are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (that is, there is no special symbol 2 reserved ball) (S204: No), It is determined whether the value (N1) of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (that is, the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is stored) (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is not stored) (S209: No), the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 Since both have no holding balls, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and is changed by calculation. Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203e is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

  In the process of S208, a special symbol fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? It is determined whether or not (S213). The variation display variation time executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S214), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the change time of the change display being executed has elapsed (S213: Yes), the stop setting process is executed (S215), and this process ends. The stop setting process (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 93) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery of “special symbol big hit”, “special symbol small hit”, or “special symbol miss” ( This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Each value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 is acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability change is in progress (S302).

  When the probability change is in progress (S302: Yes), whether or not the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. Are obtained from the first random number table (see FIG. 75A) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared one by one with ten random values set in the first per-random number table (see FIG. 75A). As described above, 10 random numbers that are big wins of special symbols are set to “0-9”, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined to be a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random values may be used. By comprising in this way, it is comprised so that the random number value determined to be off in the 1st special symbol may be determined to be a win in the 2nd special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of random values to be set may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of jackpots can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can give you the expectation of jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability change is not in progress (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability game state) of the special symbol, the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 is displayed. Based on the value and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 75A), a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with one random number value stored in the first per-random number table for low probability. As a random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, one of “0” is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that hits this match, the big hit of the special symbol It is determined that If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). A display mode for jackpot time indicating the jackpot is set (S306).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C). In addition, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern for the big hit is determined from the first hit type selection table (see FIG. 75B) (S307). Specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is compared with a random value stored in the first hit type selection table. In this first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is any one of “0 to 39” is the big hit A (16R probability variation big hit), which is one of the values “40 to 79”. In this case, the jackpot type is jackpot B (short jackpot at 16R), and the jackpot type when it is any of “80 to 99” is jackpot C (short hitless at 2R probability change). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S310.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S305 that the symbol is out of the special symbol (S305: No), the display mode at the time of separation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of detachment is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S310.

  In the process of S310, a change pattern command for notifying each determined change pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S310), a stop type command is set (S311), and then this process is ended to display a special symbol. Return to variation processing.

  Next, the stop setting process (S215) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the stop setting process (S215). This stop setting process (S215) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92).

  In the stop setting process (S215), first, a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S261). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) of FIG. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Is called. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot C, the jackpot, or a loss.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on and the jackpot C is reached. In this case, the yellow LED is turned on. In addition, when it is a small hit, a purple LED is turned on, and when it is off, a red LED and a green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops. In addition, as long as it is the lighting mode which can identify not only the above-mentioned display color and lighting mode of LED but each big hit, the type of small hit, and a fluctuation state, other lighting modes may be sufficient.

  After the process of S261 is completed, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S262). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S262: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S263), the jackpot start is set (S264), and then the process proceeds to S265.

  On the other hand, in the process of S262, if the current lottery result is not a big win (S262: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a big hit (S266). If the current lottery result is a small hit (S266: Yes), the small hit flag 203j is set to ON (S267), the start of the small hit is set (S268), and then the process proceeds to S265.

  In the process of S266, if the current lottery result is out (S266: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more (S269). When it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S269: No), the process proceeds to S265. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more (S269: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S270), and the process proceeds to S265.

  In the process of S265, a stop command is set (S265), and this process ends.

  Next, start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 92), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640, and the starting winning is determined. Is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 96, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S502). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S503).

  And, there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S501: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (503: No), the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S501: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (5405).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 102) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the processing of S505, the RAM 203 stores the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a (S506). In the process of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing from S507 to S512, the same processing as that for the processing from S501 to S506 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640. The only difference with respect to the winning of the second winning opening 640 is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed, and the other processes are the same, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. When it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening 640 (S507: No), a pre-read process is executed after the process of S512 (S513). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 97, the pre-reading process (S513) which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 of FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this prefetch process (S513).

  In this prefetching process (FIG. 97, S513), it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 (S601). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S601; No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the change is a certain change (S602), and the gaming state Is a probable variation (S602: Yes), a lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 75A) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. In the process of S602, if the gaming state is not certain (S602: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 75A) (S604), and the process of S605 is performed. Move on to processing. In the process of S605, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the processes of S603 and S604 is set (S605), and this process is terminated. In the prefetch processing (S513), not only in the present embodiment, but also the type of variation pattern to be selected (outreach reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) is discriminated and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a winning information command. May be configured to be notified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 92), and the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device and the electric combination associated with the second winning opening 640 are displayed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 640a.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 98, S106), it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). The normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit, while the second symbol display device is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is performed. In the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S701: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol (S708).

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Includes during the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711.

  In the process of S709, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second per-random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 75 (c)).

  In the process of S708, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 is low. Based on the second random number table for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 75 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is a normal symbol win (S712), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (S712: Yes). The display mode for hitting is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S714). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S714: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit for the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S715). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol falls off The number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S715, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so the second winning opening 640 is obtained. Is set to 1 second and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the short time state of the normal symbol (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  If it is determined in step S712 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S712: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S719). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S719: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is displayed. Is set to 3 seconds (S720), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S719: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this process is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to easily enter the second winning hole 640.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has passed ( S722). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S720 or the processing of S721 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S722 (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S722 (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (refer to S1107) of the main process (refer to FIG. 102) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device is ended. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S713 or S718.

  Next, the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 98, S106) when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started is the normal symbol. It is determined whether it is a win (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S725), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S725, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 102) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S716 or S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the sphere has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 99, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S803: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005). If not stored (S1005: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S1012. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1114 of the main processing (FIG. 102). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), the information on occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Here, when the changing special symbol is stored, the power-on change image (see FIGS. 82B to 82C) is displayed on the display control device 114 in a variable manner with respect to the sound lamp control device 113. You are instructed to do so. Note that this change instruction may be executed, for example, in the initial setting (S1001) in the start-up process, or may be executed in another process. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 102), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 92) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) or the start winning process (see FIG. 96) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 103) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103). The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning apparatus 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). Details of the jackpot control process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 98), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S1106). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 94), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start in devices 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94) is completed, the first symbol display device 37A, The variation display being executed in 37B is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 94). , 37B are stopped (lighted).

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of a 2nd symbol display apparatus is performed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 98) or the process of S721, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 98), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighted display) in the display mode set by the processing of S713 or the processing of S718 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 98). )

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the processes after S1101 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1110, S1111).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1108, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 100 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1112 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1108 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can start from S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1101. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, various effects according to the jackpot are performed, and a special winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 103, S1104), it is first determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1201). Specifically, if the process of S264 of the stop setting process (see FIG. 95) is executed and the start of a special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. When the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1201 (S1201: Yes), both the probability variation flag 203g and the time reduction flag 203k are set to OFF (S1202), an opening command is set (S1203), This process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1201: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1204). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1204, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1204 that the special symbol is a big hit (S1204: Yes), the process of S1205 is executed. In the processing of S1205, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1205). If it is determined in the processing of S1205 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1206), and newly A round number command indicating the number of rounds to be started is set (S1207), and this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1205, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1205: No), whether or not the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied. It is determined (S1208). If the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1209), and then this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1208, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the 15th round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 is closed, and a waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) that is a ball throwing time has elapsed. It is determined as If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210: Yes), the big hit flag 203i is turned off (S1211), and an ending command is set (S1212). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is A or C (S1213). If the jackpot type is not A or C in the processing of S1213 (S1213: No), 100 is set in the hour / minute counter (S1217), and then this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot type is A or C in the process of S1213 (S1213: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is turned on (S1214), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is A (S1215). If the jackpot type is not A (S1215: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1215, if the jackpot type is A (S1215: Yes), the hour / short flag 203k is turned on (S1216), and then this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 115. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, referring to FIG. 104, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current power-off processing in S1514 is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 80). ) Is determined during execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (S1516: Yes in FIG. 106), it executes a power-off process in S1519. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1519 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1302: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1514 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1519, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1519, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1306). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process in S1519 is executed (see S1519 in FIG. 106). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1519 is executed, the process of S1308 with the power-off flag 223y being turned on is the current startup process. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1519 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1309), and the power-off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1310). The initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1311). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (S1312), a time setting process is executed (S1313), and the process proceeds to the main process. Details of the time setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag 223y is turned off, the process of S1308 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example. Or when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1311, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1312), and interrupt permission is set. (S1311), the time setting process is executed (S1313), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1309 is that when the process from S1304 to S1308 is reached via the process in S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1304. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the time setting process (S1313) executed in the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 described above will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the time setting process (S1313). This time effect setting process (S1313) is a process for setting, in the effect time storage area 223g, information indicating the start time at which the normal game period (effect mode A) and the time effect period (effect mode B) are executed. .

  In the time setting process (S1313), first, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1401). As the time information acquired here, a value of “hour, minute” is acquired. The RTC 292 is a time measuring unit having a battery therein, and is configured such that when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years. The RTC 292 also has a calendar function and is configured to be able to determine “year / month / day”. Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to control to change to a background image exclusively for Christmas or to display a special character such as Santa.

  Then, based on the time information (power-on time) acquired in the processing of S1401, the start time at which the normal game period (effect mode A), the time effect period (effect mode B), and the specific time effect are executed (set) is set. Each is calculated and set in the effect time storage area 223g (S1402), and this process is terminated.

  The information set in the effect time storage area 223g in the process of S1402 will be specifically described by taking as an example a case where the power of the sound lamp control device 113 is turned on at 9:00. In the effect time storage area 223g, 9:55, 55 minutes after the power-on time (9:00), is set as information indicating the start time of the first time effect. Then, a time every hour (10:55, 11:55...) From the start time of the first time effect is set for 24 hours as information indicating the start time of the time effect. Also, every minute from the start timing of the time production during the time production (9:56, 9:57, 9:58, 9:59, 10:56, 10:57, ...). It is set as information indicating the start time (start timing) of the specific time effect. Furthermore, since the time effect period is 5 minutes, information indicating the time (10:00, 11:00...) 5 minutes after the start time of the time effect is the normal game period (effect mode A). It is set as information indicating the start time (see FIG. 91).

  In this control example, each time effect (time effect, specific time effect) is set to be executed based on the time when the power is turned on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may set the start time of (time production, specific time production). For example, 00 minutes may be set as the time production start time. Thereby, when turning on the power of a plurality of pachinko machines 10, even if the power-on time is deviated, the start time of the time effects is not shifted, and the time effects are executed in synchronization with the plurality of pachinko machines 10. can do.

  In this control example, the RTC 292 is used as the time measuring means, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a counter may be provided as a time measuring means and the following may be performed. When measuring (clocking) the normal game period (55 minutes), the counter value should be counted up (or counted down) periodically (for example, every second) after the normal game period (55 minutes) is started. Measure (clock) with. Then, when the value of the counter becomes a value indicating 55 minutes (for example, 3300), it is determined that 55 minutes have passed. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide the RTC 292, and the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current process of S1501 was executed (S1501). If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1511 without performing the processes in S1502 to S1510. In S1501, it is determined whether 1 msec has passed or not, because S1502 to S1510 are mainly processes related to display (effects), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1511 and the variable display setting process of S1512 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1502). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1508 described later are set (S1503), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1504). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called.

  Further, when recovering from a power failure due to a power failure or the like, an effect permission command based on the game being executed at the time of power failure is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the startup process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 101). . The voice lamp control device 113 creates a display variation pattern command in the power-on notification process (S1504) based on the reception of the effect permission command including that the special symbol is changing, and the display control device. It transmits toward 114. The display control device 114 discriminates the fluctuation start command of the power-on fluctuation image by the simple command determination process (see FIG. 118B), and uses the power-on fluctuation image based on the fluctuation pattern based on the received command. The fluctuation display is executed (see FIG. 82 (b) or (c)). Since the display variation pattern command created here is for executing variation display using a power-on variation image, which is a simple image as described above, a variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 110) described later. ) Is simpler than the one selected by As a result, the processing load for creating the display variation pattern command can be reduced, and the power-on variation image can be displayed with good response when recovering from a power failure.

  Furthermore, after an effect permission command based on the game that was being executed when the power was turned off is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101), it is executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command for stopping the fluctuation display is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 based on the reception of the stop command. The display control device 114 determines that the display stop command has been received by the simple command determination process (see 118 (b)), and changes the power-on variation image (FIG. 82 (b) or FIG. 82) in the display mode based on the received command. (See (c)).

  Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the processing of S1505, a customer waiting effect processing is executed, and then a hold number display update processing is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number-of-holds ball counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set to the display control device 114.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1509, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1510). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1509 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1511). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S1512. In the process of S1512, a variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the variable display setting process (S1512) is finished, next, a synchronous effect management process for executing an effect based on the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 is executed (S1513), and a specific time in the time effect period (effect mode B). A specific time effect process for executing the effect is executed (S1514). Then, a pitch effect setting process for executing a pitch effect based on the game ball entering the second winning port 640 is executed (S1515), and the process proceeds to S1516. The details of the synchronized effect management process (S1513), the specific time effect process (S1514), and the entry effect setting process (S1515) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112, 113, 114, and 116, respectively.

  When the entry effect setting process (S1515) is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1516). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1516 (S1516: Yes), both the power interruption flag 223y and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1518), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1519). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1520), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1516 (S1516: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1517), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1517: No), the process returns to S1501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1517: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1511). This command determination processing (S1511) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S 1511), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main control device 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation pattern reception process (S1602) is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

  Details of the variation pattern reception process (S1602) will be described here with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern reception process (S1602). In this variation pattern reception process (S1602), a variation pattern is extracted based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, and various types of accessory (vertical motion unit device ( (Dropping object) 400, expansion / contraction production device (expanding / contracting object) 540, tilting operation unit (tilting tool) 600, etc.).

  In the variation pattern reception process, first, the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1701), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1702). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 109) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the extracted variation pattern type includes a falling combination scenario (S1703). If it is determined in the processing of S1703 that there is a falling combination scenario (S1703: Yes), the vertical movement unit apparatus (falling combination) 400 is a case where a moving effect is executed. A falling combination scenario for moving the (falling combination) 400 is set (S1704). The falling combination scenario set in the processing of S1704 defines the operation of the vertical movement unit device (falling combination) 400 for the same time as the variation time of the variation effect set based on the variation pattern type. is there. By driving the up / down drive motor 431 based on the falling combination scenario, the vertical operation unit device (falling combination) 400 and the changing effect can be moved synchronously (linked).

  When the processing of S1704 is completed, it is then determined whether or not there is an opening setting for the door member 470 of the vertical motion unit device (falling object) 400 (S1705). If it is determined in the process of S1705 that the door member 470 is set to be opened (S1705: Yes), the opening / closing drive motor 466 is not excited (off) so that the door member 470 is opened. Set (energization stop control). As a result, the stationary torque (so-called detent torque) of the opening / closing drive motor 466 for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is minimized, and the inertial force that moves the vertical motion unit device (falling object) 400 in the dropping direction. As a result, the door member 470 is opened. Although illustration is omitted, when the door member 470 is not set to be opened, that is, when the door member 470 is kept closed, the opening drive motor 466 is controlled to be excited so that the opening / closing drive motor 466 stops. . As a result, when the opening of the door member 470 is not set, the stationary torque of the opening drive motor 466, that is, the door member 470 is closed even if the vertical movement unit device (falling object) 400 moves in the dropping direction. The door member 470 is maintained in the closed state and is not opened because the excitation is performed so that the torque for maintaining the state (so-called holding torque) is maximized. Note that the torque (holding torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state does not have to be maximized, and the door member 470 is moved when the vertical motion unit device (falling object) 400 moves in the dropping direction. It is sufficient that the torque is such that the door member 470 is not opened by the inertial force generated in the motor. In this case, since the current for exciting the opening / closing drive motor 466 can be made weak, power consumption can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1705 that there is no release setting of the falling combination (S1705: No), the processing of S1706 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1707, and it is determined that there is no falling combination scenario. In this case (S1703: No), the processing from S1704 to S1706 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1707.

  When the processing of S1703, S1705, or S1706 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is an extendable character scenario (S1707). When it is determined in the processing of S1707 that there is an expansion / contraction character scenario (S1707: Yes), the drive motor 561 is configured so that the front plate member 546 of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) can move to the lower position. An expansion / contraction character scenario for performing excitation control is set, and the process proceeds to S1709. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1707 that there is no extendable combination scenario (S1707: No), the process of S1708 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1709.

  In the processing of S1709, it is determined whether or not there is a tilted character scenario (S1709). If it is determined in the processing of S1709 that there is a tilting role scenario (S1709: Yes), the drive motor 631 is subjected to excitation control so that the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) can move to the extended position. A tilted actor scenario is set (S1710), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1709 that there is no tilted-item scenario (S1709: No), the process of S1708 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 107, the description will be continued. If the variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of S1601 (S1601: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1603). When the stop type command is received (S1603: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1604), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1605). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 109) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1603: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1606). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1606: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) and the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the main controller 110 The value of the number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1607). In the processing of S1608, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set. After the process of S1607 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is executed when the ball wins (start winning prize) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, or a special symbol is drawn. Is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is released, so that every time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1607. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main controller 110. The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the special symbol lottery even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. To the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1607 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1606, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1606: No), it is then determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1608). If it is determined in the process of S1608 that a winning information command has been received (S1608: Yes), winning information (such as a special symbol lottery result) based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S1609), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when no winning information command is received (S1608: No), it is determined whether or not a command relating to jackpot is received (S1610). In the process of S1610, when a command related to the jackpot is received (S1610: Yes), a process corresponding to the received command related to the jackpot is executed (S1611), and this process ends. Examples of commands related to jackpots include an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command. In addition, as processing corresponding to the received command relating to the jackpot, for example, there is processing for setting a display opening command, a display round number command, and a display ending command.

  If it is determined in step S1610 that a command related to jackpot has not been received (S1610: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S1612). If it is determined in step S1612 that a stop command has been received (S1612: Yes), the variable display stop process being executed is executed (S1613), and the avoidance flag 223i is set to OFF (S1614). A display stop command is set (S1615), and this process ends.

  The display stop command set by the processing of S1615 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop command, the display control device 114 stops the variation effect being executed in a display mode based on the stop type set by the stop type command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1612 that a stop command has not been received (S1612: No), it is determined whether another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1616), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. Set the command to send to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the variable display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1512). This variable display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1801). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1801: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1806. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1802), and then the variation pattern type based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is set. A variation pattern selection process for selection is executed (S1803).

  Details of the variation pattern selection process (S1803) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1803). In this variation pattern selection process, a variation pattern type corresponding to the production mode is selected based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 and the production counter 223j counted by the sound lamp control device 113. is there.

  In the variation pattern selection process, first, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S1901). Next, it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (normal game period) (S1902). The effect mode is determined with reference to the value in the effect mode storage area 223h. As described above, if the value of the effect mode storage area 223h is “00H”, it indicates the effect mode A, “01H” indicates the effect mode B, and “02H”. It shows that it is production mode C.

  In the process of S1902, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode storage area 223h is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S1902: Yes), it is extracted in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108). Based on the changed variation pattern type and the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S1901, the corresponding change pattern of the normal game period (effect mode A) is selected from the change pattern selection table 222a (S1903). finish. Based on the variation pattern selected here, it is set as a variation pattern command for display in the variation display setting process described later (see S1804 in FIG. 109).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1902 that the current effect mode is not effect mode A (normal game period) (S1902: No), then the current effect mode is effect mode B (time effect period). It is determined whether or not (S1904).

  In the process of S1904, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode storage area 223h is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S1904: Yes), it is extracted in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108). Based on the changed variation pattern type and the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S1901, the corresponding change pattern of the time effect period (effect mode B) is selected from the change pattern selection table 222a (S1905), and this process is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1904, when it is determined that the current effect mode is not effect mode B (time effect period) (S1904: No), the current effect mode is effect mode C (time effect extension period). is there. In this case, based on the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108) and the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S1901, the corresponding time effect extension period (effect mode C) is set. A variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1906), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the variation pattern selection process (S1803), since the variation pattern corresponding to the current effect mode is selected, the variation display corresponding to each effect period (effect mode) is executed (displayed). Can do.

  Returning to FIG. 109, the description will be continued. When the processing of S1803 is completed, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated based on the variation pattern selected in the processing of S1803, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The setting is made (S1804). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started. When the process of S1804 is completed, next, a notice selection process for setting a notice effect based on the determination result (indicating an expected degree of jackpot) is executed (S1805). This notice selection process is also configured so that a notice effect according to the current effect mode is selected.

  Details of the notice selection process (S1805) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the advance notice selection process (S1805). This notice selection process (S1805) is a process for setting a notice effect based on the result of determination of success / failure according to the current effect mode, which is executed in the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 109).

  In the notice selection process (S1805), first, the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2001), and it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S2002). In the process of S2002, when it is determined that the current effect mode (value of the effect mode storage area 223h) is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S2002: Yes), it is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Based on the result of determining whether or not each holding ball is present and the value of the effect counter 223j, a normal notice effect that is a notice effect for the normal game period is selected (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2011.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2002 that the current effect mode is not effect mode A (normal game period) (S2002: No), then the current effect mode is effect mode B (time effect period). Whether or not (S2004).

  In the process of S2004, if it is determined that the current effect mode is effect mode B (time effect period) (S2004: No), the determination result of each holding ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a Based on the value of the effect counter 223j, a time notice effect that is a notice effect of the time effect period is selected (S2005), and the process proceeds to S2006.

  In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the time notice effect selected in the process of S2005 is a notice effect (countdown notice effect) including a countdown display mode (S2006). In the process of S2006, if it is determined that the selected time notice effect is a countdown notice effect (S2006: Yes), the avoidance flag 223i is turned on so as not to execute the specific time effect (countdown effect). (S2007), the process proceeds to S2011. By the process of S2007, the avoidance flag 223i is set to ON, so that it is possible to determine that the countdown notice effect is executed. When the avoidance flag 223i is on, the specific time effect (countdown effect) is controlled not to be executed in the specific time effect process (see FIG. 114) described later (S2305: Yes in FIG. 114). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) duplicate effects (countdown notice effect, specific time effect (countdown effect)) including the same type of display mode (countdown), and to confuse the player Can be prevented (suppressed).

  In the present embodiment, the avoidance flag 223i is set to ON when the countdown advance notice effect is executed based on the entry to the second winning opening 640, and the specific time effect is not executed. It is not limited to. For example, the timing at which the countdown notice effect is executed based on the entry to the second winning opening 640 is pre-read (estimated) based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. That is, the period during which the countdown notice effect is executed is prefetched (estimated). Based on the prefetching (estimation) result, it may be set so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not executed repeatedly during the period in which the countdown notice effect is executed. Thereby, the process for performing a specific time effect can be stopped before the timing when a specific time effect is started. As a result, preparation for executing the specific time effect (for example, image data transfer processing) can be omitted, and the processing load can be reduced.

  Further, preventing (suppressing) duplication is not limited to the display mode, and it may be possible to prevent (suppress) audio and music from duplicating. Furthermore, the sound may be prevented (suppressed) from being different from the display mode. For example, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the output of a voice “Please press the button” even though the button is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to preventing (suppressing) duplication of effects including the same type of display mode, and it is also possible to prevent the effects including the same type of display mode from being executed continuously (or frequently). Specifically, the avoidance flag 223i is set to ON so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not executed in the vicinity of the period during which the countdown notice effect is executed (for example, 1 minute before and after). Thereby, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easier to understand for the player.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2006, when it is determined that the selected time notice effect is other than the countdown notice effect (S2006: No), the process of S2007 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2011.

  In the process of S2004, if it is determined that the current effect mode is not effect mode B (time effect period) (S2004: No), then whether the current effect mode is effect mode C (time effect extension period)? It is determined whether or not (S2008). If it is determined that the current effect mode is the effect mode C (time effect extension period) in the processing of S2008 (S2008: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the change determination result is correct. (S2009).

  In the processing of S2009, when it is determined that the result of the determination of whether or not the change is correct (S2009: Yes), a super fish notice effect that is a notice effect that suggests that the change is a big hit is selected ( S2010) and the process proceeds to S2011.

  When the process of S2003, S2006, S2007, or S2010 is completed, a display notice command indicating the selected notice effect is set (S2011), and this process ends. The display notice command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and displayed in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display notice command, the display control device 114 displays a notice effect according to the command on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2008 that the current effect mode is not the effect mode C (time effect extension period) (S2008: No), or in the process of S2009, whether or not the change is appropriate is determined to be out of effect. If it is determined (S2009: No), since there is no notice effect to be executed, this process is terminated as it is. In the processes of S2003 and S2005, the notice effect may not be selected depending on the value of the effect counter 223j. In this case as well, this process ends without setting the display notice command.

  In this control example, in the time effect extension period (effect mode C), the specific time effect (countdown effect) that is executed periodically (every minute) in the time effect period (effect mode B) is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific time effect (countdown effect) may be executed in the same manner as the time effect period (effect mode B). In this case, the avoidance flag 223i described above may be used so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not performed at the same timing as the countdown notice effect as in the time effect period (effect mode B). Thereby, even during the time effect extension period (effect mode C), it is possible to prevent the countdown notice effect and the like from being executed repeatedly, and it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to understand for the player. Further, the display mode of the specific time effect periodically executed in the time effect extension period (effect mode C) may not include the countdown display mode. Thereby, even if the specific time effect is periodically executed in the time effect extension period (effect mode C), the effect including the same type of display mode (countdown) is not executed. Therefore, an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided for the player.

  Returning to FIG. 109, the description will be continued. When the processing of S1805 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1806). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1806: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1807), and then in the process of S1605 of the command determination process (see FIG. 107), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1808). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1809), and the process proceeds to S1810. In the processing of S1810, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1810). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the synchronous effect management process (S1513) which is one process in the main process (refer FIG. 106) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 is demonstrated. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1513). In this synchronous effect management process (S1513), time information is acquired from the RTC 292, and based on the time information, it is determined whether it is a normal game period, a time effect period, or a time effect extension period, and an effect indicating it. Execute the process to set the mode.

  In the synchronized effect management process (FIG. 112, S1513), first, time information of “hour, minute” is acquired from the RTC 292 (S2101). And it is discriminate | determined whether the value ("00H") which shows production mode A (normal game period) is set to production mode storage area 223h (S2102). When it is determined that the value indicating the effect mode A (“00H”) is set (S2102: Yes), the time data acquired in the processing of S2101 is the transition timing to the effect mode B (time effect period) ( It is determined whether or not the time production period has come (S2103). In the processing of S2103, when it is determined that it is the transition timing to the effect mode B (time effect period), that is, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the time effect (S2103: Yes), the effect mode storage area 223h. Is set to a value ("01H") indicating the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2104), a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode B (time effect period) is set (S2105), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2103 that it is not the time effect period, the processing of S2104 and S2105 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2102, when it is determined that the value (“00H”) indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is not set (S2102: No), the effect mode B ( It is determined whether or not a value ("01H") indicating a time performance period is set (S2106). In the process of S2106, when it is determined that the value ("01H") indicating the effect mode B (time effect period) is set (S2106: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S2101 is the end of the time effect. It is determined whether it is within 3 seconds from the start time, that is, within 3 seconds until the end timing of the time effect period (the start timing of the normal game period) (S2107).

  In the process of S2107, if it is determined that the time until the end timing of the time effect period (the start timing of the normal game period) is within 3 seconds (S2107: Yes), the extension effect for executing (displaying) the extension effect. A setting process is executed (S2108). Thereafter, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 106). The extension effect setting process (S2108) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2107, when it is determined that the acquired time data is not within 3 seconds from the end of the time effect, it is longer than 3 seconds until the end time of the time effect period (the start timing of the normal game period). , S2108 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  In the process of S2106, the value ("00H") indicating the effect mode B (time effect period) is not set in the effect mode storage area 223h, that is, the current effect mode is the effect mode C (time effect extension period). If it is determined that there is (S2106: No), it is determined whether it is outside the time effect extension period, that is, whether it is the end timing of the time effect extension period (effect mode C) (S2109). In the processing of S2109, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect extension period (S2109: Yes), a value (“00H”) indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223h. (S2110), a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S2111), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2109, when it is determined that the acquired time data is not the end timing of the time effect extension period (S2109: No), the processes of S2110 and S2111 are skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the extended effect setting process (S2108) which is one process in the synchronous effect management process (see FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extended effect setting process (S2108).

  In the extended effect setting process (FIG. 113, S2108), it is first determined whether or not a big hit game is being played (S2201). If it is determined that the game is a big hit game (S2201: Yes), a value ("00H") indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223h (S2202). Then, a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S2203), and this process is terminated.

  In the present control example, as described above, when a jackpot game is being executed at the time 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period (effect mode B) (S2201: Yes), it is normal after the jackpot game ends. Although control is performed to shift to the game period (effect mode A) (S2202 and S2203), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if a jackpot game is being executed 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period (effect mode B), if the jackpot game ends before the end of the time effect period (effect mode B) A time production period (production mode B) may be set. In addition, even if the jackpot game is executed at the time 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period (effect mode B), if it is determined that it will be a big hit after that (when the pending winning information is a big win) In other words, after the jackpot game is over, the time production extension period (production mode C) may be entered. Thereby, even if the jackpot game is being executed at the time point 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period (effect mode B), an extended effect or the like can be executed (displayed), so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2201 that the game is not a big hit game (S2201: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the time effect period (effect mode B) (S2204). In the process of S2204, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (effect mode B) (S2204: Yes), it is determined whether or not the re-change effect is set, that is, the extension effect is executed ( It is determined whether or not it is decided to shift to the production mode C (S2205). When the re-changing effect is set, that is, when it is determined that the extended effect is subsequently executed (shift to the effect mode C) (S2205: Yes), the effect mode is stored in the effect mode storage area 223h. A value indicating “C” (“02H”) is set (S2206), a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode C is set (S2207), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2205 that the re-changing effect is not set (S2205: No), then the normal game period (effect mode A) does not shift to the time effect extension period (effect mode C). ), The process proceeds to S2202. Thereby, at the end of the time effect period (effect mode B) (S2204: Yes), if the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is not shifted (S2205: No), the effect mode A (normal game period) is shifted to. (S2202 and S2203).

  In the process of S2204, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the time effect period (effect mode B) (that is, the time effect is continuously executed) (S2204: No), the winning information storage area 223a is hit. It is determined whether or not the winning information is stored, or whether or not the winning determination result in change is a win (S2208). In the processing of S2208, when it is determined that the winning information that is won in the winning information storage area 223a is stored or the winning / no-going determination in change is a winning (S2208: Yes), the winning change ends. The time until this is calculated and set as the production time (extended production time) of the time production extension period (S2209). Then, a re-variation effect is set (S2210), and this process ends.

  Here, the re-variation effect is an effect of notifying (displaying) the player that the transition from the time effect period to the time effect extension period has been made and as if a new special symbol change has started. . Specifically, the display mode in which the display mode of the fish school appears from the right is displayed, and the variable display of the third symbol changed (reduced) to the display mode that is difficult for the player to view is displayed again. It can be varied (enlarged) in a possible (easy) manner. As described above, in the present control example, when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, the display has been executed (displayed) until then by switching to the sign display mode. The variable display of the three symbols is changed to a display mode (reduced display) that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. In the re-variation effect, when changing (enlarging) the variation display of the third symbol that has been changed (reduced) to a display mode that is difficult for the player to view, A display mode in which the display mode of the fish school appears from the right is displayed. Thereby, the player pays attention to the display mode of the school of fish, and therefore, the variable display of the third symbol can be varied (enlarged) without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2208, when it is determined that the winning information that is won in the winning information storage area 223a is not stored and the result of the determination of whether or not the change is in error (S2208: No), the processing of S2209 and S2210 is performed. This process is terminated by skipping the process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the specific time effect process (S1514) which is one process in the main process (refer FIG. 106) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 is demonstrated. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the content of the specific time effect process (S1514). The specific time effect process (S1514) is a process for executing (displaying) the specific time effect in the time effect period (effect mode B).

  In the specific time effect process, first, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S2301). Next, with reference to the effect mode storage area 233h, it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302). In the process of S2302, when it is determined that the current effect mode is not the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302: No), it is not determined that the specific time effect is executed in the subsequent processes. Then, this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2302 that the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302: Yes), then, the time information (current time) acquired in the process of S2301; Based on the information indicating the start time of the specific time effect stored in the effect time storage area 223g, it is determined whether or not it is the specific time effect timing (S2303). In the process of S2303, when it is determined that it is not the specific time effect timing (S2303: No), this process is terminated as it is because the specific time effect is not executed.

  In the process of S2303, when it is determined that it is a specific time effect (S2303: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a demonstration effect is being executed (S2304). In the process of S2304, when it is determined that the demonstration effect is being executed (S2304: Yes), this process is ended as it is. Thus, the demonstration suggests whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation game state (latency probability variation state) during execution of the demonstration effect, that is, when the player is not playing a game. It is possible to prevent the specific time effect from being displayed, and to prevent (suppress) the suggestion of the gaming state to the player who is not playing the game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2304 that the demonstration effect is not being executed (S2304: No), it is then determined whether or not the avoidance flag 223i is on (S2305). If it is determined in the processing of S2305 that the avoidance flag 223i is on (S2305: Yes), it is a case where the countdown notice effect is being executed among the notice effects based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Therefore, in order not to display the specific time effect (countdown effect) that is an effect including the same type of display mode (countdown), this processing is terminated as it is (that is, the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not set). ).

  In the process of S2305, when it is determined that the avoidance flag 223i is off (S2305: No), a specific time effect command for display is set in order to execute a specific time effect (countdown effect). Exit.

  When the countdown notice effect based on the winning to the second prize opening 640 is executed during the execution of the specific time effect by the processing of S2305 (when the avoidance flag 223i is on), the countdown related to the specific time effect is performed. The production is controlled so as not to be executed (S2305: Yes). Thereby, since the countdown notice effect and the specific time effect (countdown effect), which are effects including the same type of display mode (countdown), are not executed redundantly, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115, a description will be given of the entrance effect setting process (S1515) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ball entry effect setting process (S1515). This pitch effect setting process (S1515) is a process for displaying a pitch effect based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 during a short-time game. In this entry effect, the type selected by the remaining number of changes until the big hit is changed. In addition, the area where the entrance effect is displayed is set in order from the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 to the fourth area 81d.

  In the entry effect setting process (S1515), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a time-short game (S2401). If it is determined in the process of S2401 that the game is not in the time-saving game, the ball entry effect based on the game ball having entered the second winning opening 640 is not executed (displayed), so this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the game is a short-time game (S2401: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 (S2402). In this control example, based on the fact that the main control device 110 has entered a game ball into the second winning opening 640, a ball entry command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 stores the fact that there is a ball entering the second winning port 640 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 by receiving the ball entering command, and in the process of S2402, the second winning port is stored. It is determined whether or not a ball has entered 640.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a sound lamp control device that indicates that a game ball has entered the second winning port 640 is provided by providing a ball detection switch that detects that a game ball has entered the second winning port 640. 113 may be detectable. Further, the entrance detection switch may also be used as a switch that detects entry into the second winning opening 640 used in the main controller 110. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of a gaming machine can be reduced.

  In the process of S2402, when it is determined that no game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 (S2402: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when the above-described winning command is received from the main controller 110 and it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the second winning opening 640 (S2402: Yes), the winning information is stored. The winning effect is selected based on the winning information stored in the area 223a and the winning effect selection table 222b (S2403). Then, based on the entrance effect selected in the processing of S2403 and the display area counter 223f, a display entrance effect command is set (S2404). The display entry effect command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display ballistic effect command, the display control device 114 displays the ballistic effect in the display area corresponding to the command (the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display apparatus 81).

  When the processing of S2404 is completed, the value of the display area counter 223f is incremented by 1 (S2405), and it is determined whether or not the value of the added display area counter 223f is 5 (S2406). In the process of S2406, when it is determined that the value of the display area counter 223f is 5 (S2406: Yes), the entry effect in the fourth area 81d (see FIG. 89 or FIG. 90) in the entry effect setting process. In order to set the next area for displaying the entrance effect as the first area 81a (see FIG. 89 or 90), the value of the display area counter 223f is initialized to 1 (S2407). This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2406 that the display area counter 223f is not 5 (that is, any of 2 to 4) (S2406: No), it is necessary to initialize the value of the display area counter 223f. Therefore, the process of S2407 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Here, a ball entry effect can be displayed in the area of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the display area counter 223f by the processing of S2404. Specifically, if the value of the display area counter 223f is 1, it is 3 in the first area 81a of the 3rd symbol display device 81, and 2 is 3 in the second area 81b of the 3rd symbol display device 81. In the case of, the entry effect is displayed in the first area 81 c of the third symbol display device 81, and in the case of 4, the entry effect is displayed in the fourth area 81 d of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the winning effect setting process (S1515) is executed by the processing of S2405 to S2407, and the value of the display area counter 223 can be updated each time the display winning effect command is set. The entrance effect can be displayed in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the display device 81. After the entrance effect is displayed in the fourth area 81d, the entrance effect is again displayed from the first area 81a. They can be displayed in order. As a result, the pitching effect based on one pitch is continuously displayed until four game balls enter the second winning port 640, and the gaming ball is displayed at the second winning port 640. Even when the interval for entering a ball is very short, it is possible to secure a time for displaying the entrance effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player cannot visually recognize (recognize) the entry effect.

  In this control example, the entrance effect is configured to be displayed in order (clockwise) in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to display in reverse order (counterclockwise), or may be displayed randomly. Furthermore, the display order may be changed when a specific performance or variation is executed or when there is jackpot winning information. Thereby, the order of the displayed ball effects can be changed, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and prevent the player from getting bored early.

  In addition, the display order of the entrance effect displayed in each area (the first area 81a to the fourth area) of the third symbol display device 81 may be changed according to the degree of expectation that is a big hit. For example, when the expectation level that is a big hit is low, the entrance effect is displayed in order (clockwise) in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d, while the expectation level that is a big hit is high. Are displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise). Thereby, the player can recognize the expectation degree in the display order of the entry effect displayed in each area (the first area 81a to the fourth area), and each area (the first area 81a to the fourth area). It is no longer necessary to look closely at the contents of the pitching effect displayed on the player, so that the burden on the player can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the ball entering effects are displayed in order from the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 to the four areas of the fourth area 81d, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display area of the third symbol display device may be further subdivided (for example, divided into six regions from the first region to the sixth region) and displayed in order, or the display of the third symbol display device may be displayed. The number of divided areas may be reduced (for example, divided into two areas from the first area to the second area) for display.

  In this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display area (the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d) of the third symbol display device 81 to be displayed. For example, the display control device 114 may be configured to make a selection. Thereby, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 116 to 134, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 116, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2501), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot processing (S2501) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2501) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. A predetermined amount of the control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2601). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2602). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601.

  In addition, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing in S2602, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2602, it is then stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2603). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2604), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S2501 in FIG. 116). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) (S2605), the boot program is finished and this boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2501), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 117, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2602. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S2603 to S2605 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred in the process of S2601 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S2601. The processing of S2603 to S2605 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2602.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2603 to S2605 without performing the processes of S2601 and S2602. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2502). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2503). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2503, then the power-on variation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2504). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2504, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2505). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 132A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S4702 in FIG. 132A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118 (b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (see FIG. 82), which are images when the power is turned on, are simply drawn. Command determination processing (see S2809 in FIG. 118B) and simple display setting processing (see S2810 in FIG. 118B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first winning opening 64, and an instruction to start the changing effect is sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a variation image at power-on (see FIG. 82) is immediately displayed during the variation rendering period to perform a simple variation rendering. Can do. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2505, interrupt permission is set (S2506). Thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2506, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 118B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 118B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 87) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 118B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2801), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2801: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (see FIG. 82 (a)), In order to display a normal effect image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2802) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2803) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2802), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 119 to 127.

  In the display setting process (S2803), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2802) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2804). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2803) or the simple display setting process (S2809). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  When the task process is finished, the effect information correction process is executed (S2805). In this effect information correction process (S2805), among the images for one frame determined in the task process described above, various power-on images (main image at power-on, power-on fluctuations) used for display at power-on. The display presence / absence, the display coordinate position, and the enlargement ratio of the sprite of the image and the title image at power-on are corrected. The effect information correction process (S2805) may be executed within the task process (S2804).

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2806). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2807). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S2804) and the effect information correction process (S2805), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and transfer setting process (S2806) The drawing list shown in FIG. 87 is generated from the transfer instruction set by the step, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2808). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the processing of S2808, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to the missed and chance chances) are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2801: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 82) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2809) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2810) is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 127, details of the above-described command determination process (S2802) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. First, FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 119, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2901), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2901: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2901: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2803) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2902), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S2903).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S2904). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2904: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2905), the process returns to S2901.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S2905) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3001).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3001, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3001 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S3001 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S3003). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S3003, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S3004), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3005). Then, when both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3006), an effect in which the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is moved is executed. A special effect correction process for correcting the effect screen is executed (S3007). When the process of S3007 is completed, the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing in S3005 is updated, and the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing in S3001 is updated. Then, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3002. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S2504, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Details of the special effect correction process (S3007) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing special effect correction processing (S3007). This special effect correction process (S3007) is performed when the effect of moving the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is executed. This is a process for correcting the display mode (position, size) of various power-on images displayed on the sub display device 690).

  In the special effect correction process (S3007), first, it is determined whether or not the effect based on the received variation pattern command is an effect that moves the expansion / contraction effect device (expandable effect object) 540 (whether there is an extendable effect scenario). (S3201). If it is determined in the process of S3201 that there is an expansion / contraction character scenario (S3201: Yes), the front member 546 of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) moves to the lower position in the change, and the third symbol This is a case where an effect that makes the display device 81 difficult to visually recognize (or cannot be visually recognized) is executed. In this case, the correction information for extending / contracting the movable object is set in the correction information storage area 233m from the correction information table 234a3 (S3202), and the process proceeds to S3205. Through the process of S3202, the power-on variation image (see FIG. 83A) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is corrected and displayed on the sub display device 690. Therefore, even when the front member 546 of the expansion / contraction device 540 moves to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily visually recognize the power-on variation image by looking at the sub display device 690. it can. Here, the power-on variation image is a “◯” symbol displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 83 (a). In addition to this “◯” symbol, a “x” symbol is also displayed as a variation image. This variation image notifies that the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is being variably displayed by alternately displaying the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol. Then, when the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed, a special symbol hit is notified, and when the symbol “X” is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is dismissed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that there is no telescopic character scenario (S3201: No), then the effect based on the received variation pattern command is an effect that moves the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9). It is determined whether or not (whether there is a tilted actor scenario) (S3203). In the process of S3203, when it is determined that there is a tilted actor scenario (S3203: Yes), the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) in which the sub display device 690 is provided moves in response to the change. This is a case where an effect that makes the display device 690 difficult to view is executed. In this case, the tilted accessory moving correction information is set in the correction information storage area 233m from the correction information table 234a3 (S3204), and the process proceeds to S3205. Even when the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) provided with the sub display device 690 is moved by the process of S3204 and an effect that makes the sub display device 690 difficult to view is executed, the player is The power-on variation image displayed on the symbol display device 81 can be easily seen.

  Further, in the above-described processing of S3202 and S3204, a display that is easy for the player to visually recognize is set by setting information for correcting the display mode (position, size) of the power-on variation image corresponding to the effect to be executed. It controls to become an aspect. Thereby, it is not necessary to hold an image in a display mode that is easy for the player to visually recognize for each effect to be executed, so the area of the ROM 234 can be saved.

  When the process of S3202 or S3204 is finished, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to ON (S3205), and this process ends. The special effect correction flag 233n that is turned on in the process of S3205 is a display mode (position and size) of various power-on images in accordance with the execution of the telescopic character scenario or the tilted character scenario in the special effect correction process (S3007). This is a flag indicating that information for correcting is set. When the special effect correction flag 233n is set to ON, in the effect information correction process to be described later, the correction information for the normal effect is executed in spite of the fact that the variation based on the expansion / contraction character scenario and the tilting character scenario is executed. Can be prevented (suppressed) from being stored in the correction information storage area 233m. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that there is no tilted character scenario (S3203: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  In addition, as described above, the tilting operation unit (tilting role) 600 includes the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 50), and these curtain members are included in the tilting operation unit. The sub display device 690 provided in the player can be switched between an open state in which the player can visually recognize it and a sub display device 690 in a closed state in which the player cannot easily visually recognize it. Therefore, when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are in the closed state, the image displayed on the sub display device 690 may be corrected to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In addition, whether or not the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are in the closed state depends on whether the first and second curtain members 625 and 625 are in the same manner as in the case of determining the operation of the telescopic and tilting actors. May be determined based on the origin sensor that detects the origin positions of the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625, and determined that these curtain members are the origin positions (closed state). In such a case, the display on the sub display device 690 may be switched to display on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, even when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are closed due to a malfunction or the like, that is, when it becomes difficult to visually recognize the sub display device 690, the display image of the sub display device 690 is corrected. And can be displayed on the third symbol display device.

  Further, in the above-described tilting operation unit (tilting tool) 600 and expansion / contraction effect device (extensible tool) 540, the correction information is changed based on the discrimination result of the origin sensor that detects the origin position. Also good. As a result, even when an accessory is malfunctioning, for example, when the operation is different from the accessory scenario, the state is accurately detected, and various effects are displayed on the game of the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690. Can be displayed at a position that can be visually recognized by a person.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves up and down and the case where the tilting operation unit 600 tilts are described, but the tilting operation unit 600 slides on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. When an operating scenario is set, processing similar to that executed in the special effect correction processing (S3007) may be executed. Even when the tilting operation unit 600 performs a sliding operation, a series of operation scenarios in which the sliding operation is performed is set by the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, since the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the change pattern for executing the slide operation by a display change pattern command, the slide operation correction information is set in the correction information storage area 233m. Here, the slide motion correction information is the power-on variation image (“○” symbol (or “×” shown in FIG. 83A) that is corrected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the slide motion. The display coordinates are set so that the variable display)) moves to a position that is not on the back side of the tilting operation unit 600 that slides. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation image (see FIG. 83A) is displayed on the upper left of the third symbol display device 81. However, when configured to display on the lower right, the tilting operation unit 600 is viewed from the right side. When the slide operation has been performed to the left, the display is set by sliding (moving) gradually to the left in accordance with the operation of the tilting operation unit 600. Such coordinate information is set in the slide motion correction information. Further, when the slide operation is displayed to the left in accordance with the operation of the tilt operation unit 600 and moved to the area where the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, the tilt operation unit 600 is displayed. The coordinates may be set so as to move to the sub display device 690 incorporated in the display. With this configuration, it is possible to display the change image (see FIG. 83 (a)) indicating that the special symbol is being changed by the player in an easy-to-see manner. In the present embodiment, the object to be moved and displayed is the variation image (see FIG. 83A), but it may be the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or may be a reserved symbol. It may be a design such as a character. Note that the above-described slide motion correction information is set in the display control device 114 in advance corresponding to the slide motion motion scenario set in the audio lamp control device 113, and coordinate information according to the slide motion timing. Is set to be variably set.

  In this control example, the display positions of various power-on images are corrected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image (character image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690 during a normal performance. Or a display position such as a variation pattern) may be corrected.

  Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2904 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2904: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2906). If there is a display variation type command (S2906: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2907), and the processing returns to S2901.

  Details of the stop type command process (S2907) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information (any one of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete miss, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command is handled. The stop type table is determined (S3101), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118B) is executed. The stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S3102).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3102 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S3103), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S3102 is described. In the task process (S2804) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S3102 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S3103, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. However, before the drawing on the third symbol display device 81 is performed, the normal video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3101, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S3102.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2906 that there is no display stop type command (S2906: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a jackpot related command among the unprocessed commands (S2908). In the process of S2908, when it is determined that there is a jackpot related command (S2908: Yes), the jackpot related command process is executed (S2909), and the process returns to S2901.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the details of the jackpot related command processing (S2909) will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related command processing (S2909). This jackpot related command processing (S2909) is processing corresponding to various commands (display opening command, display round number command, display ending command) for executing the jackpot effect received from the sound lamp control device 113. This is a process for execution.

  In the jackpot related command processing (S2909), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S3301). If it is determined that there is a display opening command in the process of S3301 (S3301: Yes), the opening command process (S3302) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3303.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S3302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In this opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3401 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3405), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3404, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3401, The drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of one frame image to be displayed next is specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3402. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required after the opening effect is finished until the round effect is started. There is a risk that time will be generated, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for 16 rounds). When image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display ending command is received, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. May occur, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the operation has stopped, and to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in this control example, when a display opening command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that point, and until the jackpot variation display is ended in the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect ends. As a result, when the opening effect is finished on the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately on the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for five rounds). ) Since the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when it is finished, the player will not feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started therefrom, Control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect ends before the variation effect that is a big hit ends in the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 ends, the opening effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so the player is concerned that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 122, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S3301 that there is no display opening command (S3301: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S3303). If there is a round number command for use (S3303: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S3304). This round number command process (S 3304) executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3501, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3505), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 122. If it is determined in the process of S3303 that there is no display round number command (S3303: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3305). If there is an ending command (S3305: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3306), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if there is no display ending command in the process of S3305 (S3305: No), the process of S3306 is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S3306) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124A is a flowchart showing the ending command process (S3306). This ending command process (S3306) executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer 233d. (S3601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3602).

  Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3605), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2908 that there is no jackpot related command (S2908: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notice command among the unprocessed commands (S2910), and the display notice is issued. If there is a command (S2910: Yes), a notice command process is executed (S2911), and the process returns to S2901.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 124B, details of the advance command processing (S2911) will be described. FIG. 124B is a flowchart showing the notice command process. This notice command processing executes a process corresponding to the display notice command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the advance command processing, first, the advance effect display data table indicated by the display advance command is determined, and the determined advance effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S3701). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3702).

  Then, based on the notice effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3705), the notice command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By this notice command processing (S2911), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the notice effect display data table, so that the notice effect set corresponding to the effect mode in the sound lamp control device 113 is the third symbol. It is displayed on the display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2910 that there is no display advance notice command (S2910: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ball effect command among unprocessed commands (S2912). If there is a display pitch effect command (S2912: Yes), the pitch effect command process is executed (S2913), and the process returns to S2901.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 125 (a), the details of the ball effect command processing (S2913) will be described. FIG. 125 (a) is a flowchart showing the incoming ball effect command processing (S2913). This incoming ball effect command process (S2913) is to execute processing corresponding to the incoming ball effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the entry effect command process, first, an entry effect display data table indicated by the display entry effect command is determined. Then, the determined entry effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and displayed in the display area (any one of the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d) indicated by the command. The buffer 233d is set (S3801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3802).

  Then, based on the entrance effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3801, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3805), the ball entering effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By this entry effect command processing (S2913), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the entry effect display data table and the display area indicated by the command, and is selected by the audio lamp control device 113. The entrance effect is displayed in order on each display area (first area 81a to fourth area 81d) of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the entrance effects are displayed in order in the four display areas (the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d) provided on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and up to four types of entrance effects. Can be simultaneously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display ball effect command in the process of S2912 (S2912: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display specific time effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2914). If there is a display specific time effect command (S2914: Yes), the specific time effect command process is executed (S2915), and the process returns to S2901.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 125B, details of the specific time effect command processing (S2915) will be described. FIG. 125B is a flowchart showing the specific time effect command process (S2915). This specific time effect command processing (S2915) is to execute processing corresponding to the display specific time effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the specific time effect command processing, first, the specific time effect display data table indicated by the display specific time effect command is determined, the determined specific time effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3902).

  Then, based on the specific time effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3901, the time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3905), the ball entering effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By the specific time effect command processing (S2915), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the specific time effect display data table, so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) selected in the sound lamp control device 113 is the first. It will be displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2914 that there is no display specific time effect command (S2914: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display effect mode change command among the unprocessed commands (S2916). If there is a display effect mode change command (S2916: Yes), the effect mode change command process is executed (S2917), and the process returns to S2901.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 126A, details of the effect mode change command process (S2917) will be described. FIG. 126 (a) is a flowchart showing the effect mode change command process (S2917). This effect mode change command process (S2917) executes a process corresponding to the display specific time effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the effect mode change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233p is set to ON (S4001), and the effect mode flag 233r corresponding to the effect mode type based on the received command is set to ON (S4002). Exit.

  By the rear image change flag 233p that is set to ON in the processing of S4001, the processing (S4910 to S4915) for changing the rear image in the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 133) described later is executed. Further, the effect mode flag 233r that is set to ON in S4002 is referred to in the process for changing the back image in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) (see S4911 in FIG. 133), and the effect mode flag 233r. The rear image is changed based on the set effect mode type. Thereby, the back image can be changed in accordance with the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113. As a result, the back image can be changed based on the change in the effect mode, and the player can easily recognize that the effect mode has been changed.

  Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2916 that there is no display effect mode command (S2916: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop command among the unprocessed commands (S2918). If there is a use stop command (S2918: Yes), stop command processing is executed (S2919), and the processing returns to S2901.

  Details of the stop command process (S2919) will be described with reference to FIG. 126 (b). FIG. 126 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop command process (S2919). This stop command process (S2919) executes a process corresponding to the display stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop command process, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to OFF (S4101), and this process ends. As described above, the special effect correction flag 233n set to OFF in the process of S4101 is an expansion / contraction effect device in the special effect correction process (S3007) executed when the variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. Correction information corresponding to the correction information storage area 233m when there is a telescopic combination scenario in which 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable or there is a tilting combination scenario in which the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is movable. The correction information of the table 234a3 is stored and set to ON.

  This stop command process is a process executed based on a stop command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 when each variation effect is stopped. Therefore, the special effect correction flag 233n is turned off when the changing effect based on the telescopic character scenario or the tilted character scenario is stopped. Thus, in the effect information correction process (see S2804) executed in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118B), the normal effect correction information or the demonstration effect correction information is set in the correction information storage area 233m. As a result, the image in which the coordinates and the like displayed based on the variation effect of the telescopic character scenario or the tilted character scenario are corrected is corrected to the original coordinates and displayed.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 119. If it is determined in the processing of S2918 that there is no display stop command (S2918: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2920), and there is an error command. If (S2920: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2921), and the process returns to S2901.

  Details of the error command process (S2921) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S4202). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4201, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S4202 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S4202 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 119. If it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of S2920 (S2920: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2922), and the processing returns to S2901.

  Examples of other unprocessed commands include a rear image change command. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  If a back image change command has been received, back image change command processing is executed (S2922). In this back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 223p for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S4703) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command is set to ON. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF, the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 223p set by the back image change command process is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the set back image discrimination flag. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back images A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the current time is determined from the set back image discrimination flag. The rear image type to be displayed is specified, and the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the rear image range is stored (for resident use) Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the back image change command processing, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the process of S2901, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2901: Yes). ), The processing of S2902 to S2922 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2901 to S2922 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S2901 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2809) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary for displaying a power-on image (see FIG. 82) from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, a display variation pattern command and a display command Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 120 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 120 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. For this command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Further, when the power interruption occurs during the change of the special symbol and then recovered, the special transmission transmitted in S1010 of the startup process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 described above when the power is turned on. In the process of S1504 of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the effect permission command including that the design is changing, the display control device When the display control device 114 receives the change start command of the power-on variation image output to 114 (reception processing in S1616 of the command determination processing (FIG. 107, S1511)), the simple command determination processing (S2809) In the simple display setting process (S2810) that is received at Setting the display data table-on change image on the display data table buffer 233 d) is set. It should be noted that at the timing at which the main controller 110 outputs an instruction to start changing the power-on change image corresponding to the special symbol that was changing when the power was turned off, the power-on change image is the power of the resident video RAM 235. Since it has already been transferred to the variation image area 235b at the time of insertion, the start of variation display is immediately executed (starts display) in the third symbol display device 81. In this case, the power-on variation images shown in FIGS. 82B to 82C are alternately displayed.

  It should be noted that an effect permission command based on the game that was being executed when the power was turned off is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101), and then executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command for stopping the fluctuation display is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 based on the reception of the stop command. The display control device 114 determines that the display stop command has been received by the simple command determination process (see 118 (b)), and changes the power-on variation image (FIG. 82 (b) or FIG. 82) in the display mode based on the received command. (See (c)).

  Note that if the display controller 114 completes the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 before receiving the display stop command for stopping the above-described power-on variation image, only the power-on variation image is displayed. Is displayed at the coordinate position for normal performance (see FIG. 83A) of the third symbol display device 81. This is because the display stop command for stopping the power-on variation image defines the stop mode of the power-on variation image, and therefore cannot select the normal effect stop mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display control device 114 may determine and display the stop mode based on the stop mode (big hit or miss) of the power-on variation image. Thereby, even when the fluctuation of the fluctuation image at the time of power-on is being executed, it is possible to switch from the point in time when the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is completed to the normal effect, and to improve the interest of the player. .

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 120A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3001. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3002, a process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2803), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 128, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S4301: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S4302 to S4304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S4302), and S4303 to S4304. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S4303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S4304).

  Details of the warning image setting process (S4304) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S4401).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S4401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 128. After the warning image setting process (S4304) or in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S4303: No), the process proceeds to S4305.

  In S4305, pointer update processing is executed (S4305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4501). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S4501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S4502). As a result, if it is End information (S4502: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4503). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S4503: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4505), and this processing is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a display data table for demonstration (S4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S4506), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 128, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S4306 together with the warning image previously expanded and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4308). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S4308: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S4309).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S4309: Yes), the confirmation display effect has not yet been produced and the decision display effect has been performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S4315 is used to identify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task processing (S2804), the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S4315 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4309, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S4309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S4316). If the demo display flag is off (S4316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S4317), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4318). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4321), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S4316, if the demo display flag is on (S4316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2810) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. 82) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, details of the effect information correction process (S2805), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing effect information correction processing (S2805). This effect information correction process (S2805) corrects the position at which various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, power-on title image) are displayed at the time of normal performance or demonstration performance. It is a process to use.

  In the effect information correction process (S2805), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If it is determined in the process of S4601 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: No), since the simple image at the time of power-on is displayed, the effect information is not corrected and the present information is not corrected. The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the simple image display flag 233c is off (S4601: Yes), the transfer of the resident image is completed in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 132A) described later, Since the normal effect can be executed, it is then determined whether or not the special effect correction flag 233n is off (S4602).

  In the process of S4602, if it is determined that the special effect correction flag 233n is on (S4602: No), the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable in the special effect correction process (see FIG. 121) described above. Since the correction information corresponding to the production based on the telescopic character scenario to be performed or the tilting character scenario in which the tilting action unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is movable is already stored in the correction information storage area 233m. This process is terminated without setting correction information.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4602 that the special effect correction flag 233n is off (S4602: Yes), the demonstration display flag is turned off in order to set correction information according to the currently executed effect. It is determined whether or not (S4603).

  If it is determined in the process of S4603 that the demo display flag is off (S4603: Yes), the demonstration effect is not executed, that is, the normal effect is executed, so the correction information storage area The normal effect correction information is set in the correction information table 234a3 to 233m (S4604), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4603 that the demonstration display flag is ON (S4603: No), this is a case where a demonstration effect is being executed, so that the demonstration is performed from the correction information table 234a3 to the correction information storage area 233m. The effect correction information is set (S4605), and this process is terminated.

  In this way, in the effect information correction process (S2805), correction information for correcting the display position of various power-on images according to the state of the pachinko machine 10 (when the power is turned on, during the normal effect, during the demonstration effect, etc.). Settings are being made. Thereby, in a plurality of states of the pachinko machine 10, a common image can be used to produce an effect, so that the capacity of the ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, since the display mode such as the display position and the enlargement ratio is corrected, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to visually recognize according to each effect.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133, the details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2806), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 132 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4701). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4701: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S4702), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S4701, that is, if it is off (S4701: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4702), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2806) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 132 (b). FIG. 132 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4702).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S4801), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S4801: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S4802). In the process of S4802, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S4802 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4802: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4802: Yes), the process proceeds to S4803. Also, as a result of the process of S4801, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4801: No), the process proceeds to S4803.

  In the process of S4803, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4803). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S4804), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing in S4803 (S4803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4805), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2809 in FIG. 118B) and the simple display setting process (see S2810 in FIG. 118B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 119 to 127) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 128 to 130) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) (see S4701: No in FIG. 132A).

  The MPU 231 executes the resident image transfer setting process to the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image, the power-on variation image, and the power-on title image that have already been transferred in the main process. All the resident object image data to be resident can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In this control example, various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, power-on title image) displayed when the power is turned on are corrected for normal display by correcting the display position. Also configured to be available. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare images to be used when the power is turned on and at the time of normal performance, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved.

  Further, in this control example, image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 is handled as one image data, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the coordinates or the sub display device. Whether to display to 690 is controlled. This eliminates the need to separately control (transfer, etc.) the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, thereby reducing the control load. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 may be provided.

  Further, since the sub display device 690 has a lower resolution than the third symbol display device 81, the data amount of the image displayed on the sub display device 690 is the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Less than the amount. Therefore, in the display control device 114, the image (title image at power-on) to be displayed on the sub-display device 690 having a small amount of image data is first stored in the resident video RAM. The time from when the image is displayed until the image is displayed can be shortened.

  Here, the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 is composed of one image data as described above. Therefore, when the power-on title image (see FIG. 82A), which is a power-on image, is first displayed on the sub display device 690 when the power is turned on, the area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 ( For the data in FIG. 81 (region of width 800 × length 600), 0 data may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the power is turned on, first, image data to be displayed on the sub display device 690 is matched with the resolution of the sub display device 690 (see FIG. 81, 400 × 300 image data). May be used to display on the sub-display device 690. In this case, when the images for displaying on the third symbol display device 690 (main image at power-on, fluctuation image at power-on, etc.) are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 and Using the image data to be displayed on the sub display device 690 (see FIG. 81, horizontal 1200 × vertical 600), the display is switched to the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. Thus, the data amount of the image set to be displayed on the sub display device 690 when the power is turned on can be reduced. Thus, the power-on image (power-on title image) is displayed on the sub display device 690 after the power is turned on. Can be shortened.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S4703), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2806) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4703).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4305) of the display setting process (S2803) executed previously is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4902). If it is transfer data information (S4902: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S4903, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S4904), and the process proceeds to step S4905.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data in the process of S4902 (S4902: No), the processes of S4903 and S4904 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4905. In the process of S4905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S4905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4905: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S4906).

  In the process of S4906, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S4906 (S4906: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4906: Yes), the process proceeds to S4907. Also, as a result of the process of S4905, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S4905: No), the process proceeds to S4907.

  In the process of S4907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4907). If the transfer start flag is on (S4907: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. (S4908), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4903 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S4913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4907: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag 223p is on (S4909). If the back image change flag 223p is not on but off (S4909: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change 223r flag is on (S4909: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 223p is set to off (S4910), it is provided for each back image type. Among the back image discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S4911). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The head address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4912), and the process proceeds to S4913.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S4909, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S4913, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4913). The determination in the process of S4913 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S4913 (S4913: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4913 (S4913: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S4914). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S4914, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4915), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, when the normal image transfer process is executed, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the back image is displayed. The image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, details of the above-described drawing process (S2807), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2804) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S2806), the drawing list shown in FIG. 87 is generated (S5001). That is, in the process of S5001, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2804). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2806), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S5002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S5002, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S5003). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 118B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the first control example, control is performed so that the display image used when the power is turned on is corrected and used during normal performance. As a result, since a common display image can be used at the time of power-on and at the time of normal production, the capacity of the ROM can be saved.

  Further, in the present control example, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 are provided in the effect that a specific accessory (the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9)) is movable. Control is performed so as to correct the content of the effect displayed on the screen. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 is difficult to visually recognize in the effect that the specific accessory is movable, for example, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the sub display device 690. By doing so, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the display content is easily visible to the player.

  Further, in the effect that the vertical movement unit 400 is movable and the door member 470 is opened, when the door member 470 is moved down, the opening / closing drive motor 466 for maintaining the door member 470 in a closed state is not excited. Control (energization stop control). Accordingly, the door member 470 is opened by the inertial force that acts on the door member 470 when the door member 470 is dropped and moved without driving the opening / closing drive motor 466, so that power consumption can be reduced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when a specific notice effect is executed based on a ball entering a winning opening in a time effect period that is periodically executed, the effect executed in the time effect period is limited. You are in control. Thereby, when the countdown effect which is a specific notice effect is executed, the countdown effect executed in the time effect period can be limited. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused by overlapping the countdown effects during the time effect period.

  In addition, the pitching effect displayed based on the winning ball entering the winning opening is sequentially displayed in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display area. Thereby, even when the interval between the game balls entering the winning opening is short, the period during which the ball effect is displayed can be lengthened, and the player can easily see the ball effect. be able to.

  The present control example is not limited to the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment, and may be executed by any of the pachinko machines 10 of the above-described embodiments, or a combination of the above-described embodiments. It may be executed by the pachinko machine 10.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 156. In the first control example described above, a ballistic effect that is executed in a short time state of a normal symbol, a time effect period (effect mode B) that is periodically (five minutes every hour), and the time effect period. The player's interest has been improved by executing various display effects such as a specific time effect performed during (effect mode B). In the first control example, the time production period and the start time of the specific time production are set when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Thereby, since each production | presentation (time production, specific time production, etc.) can be started at the same timing with respect to the several pachinko machine 10 which turned on the power collectively at the same timing, several pachinko machine 10 It is possible to perform a production with a sense of unity.

  In addition, in the second control example, a technique that can suitably control the operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and the like will be described. Here, as described above, the accessory such as the tilting operation unit 600 is driven by the drive motor constituted by a stepping motor or the like. It is known that this drive motor is more likely to cause individual differences and more likely to deteriorate over time, as compared with a display device (third symbol display device 81, sub display device 690). In other words, when image data is set for the display device, there is almost no problem such as display delay, but when operation data is set for the drive motor, the drive speed decreases due to deterioration over time. (Torque is reduced) and step-out may occur. That is, even if the same operation scenario is set, there may be variations in the number of operation steps and the operation speed, and therefore different operations may be executed in each pachinko machine 10.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, the operation status of the tilting operation unit 600, the slide operation unit 700, etc. is checked every time the power is turned on, and if there is a deterioration or the like, a correction value for correcting the operation scenario is obtained. Configured to set. Thereby, in each pachinko machine 10, operation | movement of the various accessories driven with a drive motor can be performed suitably.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. And a part of processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 for detecting the slide operation position of the slide operation unit 700 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the base member 710 of the slide operation unit 700 has a slide origin sensor 717 for detecting whether or not the column member 720 is at the origin position (retracted position), and whether or not it is at the extended position. A slide position sensor 718 for detection is provided (see FIG. 49). Since these are composed of the same type of sensors, only the slide position detection sensor 718 will be described here, and the description of the slide origin detection sensor 717 will be omitted.

  FIG. 136 (a) shows the positional relationship between the light shielding plate 726a and the slide position detection sensor 718 when the slide operation unit 700 is sliding in the direction from the origin (retracted position) to the extended position. FIG. As shown in FIG. 136 (a), the slide position detection sensor 718 is provided with a light shielding detector 718a. The light shielding detection unit 718a shows both the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit described above, and the light shielding plate 726a depends on whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the light shielding detection unit 718a is received by the light receiving unit. Whether or not is in the overhang position can be determined.

  In the example of FIG. 136 (a), the light shielding plate 726a is disposed in the right direction in front view with respect to the light shielding detection unit 718a. That is, the arrangement of the light shielding detector 718a and the light shielding plate 726a is shifted. In this case, since there is nothing to block between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the light shielding detection unit 718a, the light from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit. While the light receiving unit is receiving light, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is in the L (low) state. The output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is received by the sound lamp control device 113. If the output is L (low), it is determined that the column member 720 has not reached the overhang position.

  On the other hand, when the left end of the light shielding plate 726a hits the right end of the light shielding detection unit 718a, light emitted from the light emitting unit starts to be shielded by the light shielding plate 726a (see FIG. 136 (b)). As shown in FIG. 136 (c), when the light shielding plate 726a is disposed so as to completely overlap with the light shielding detector 718, the light emitted from the light emitting part of the light shielding detector 718a is completely shielded. . That is, the light receiving unit cannot receive light. In this case, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is set to H (high). When the sound lamp control device 113 detects that the output from the slide position detection sensor 718 is H (high), it determines that the column member 720 is in the extended position. Here, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is H (high) or L (low) based on the voltage value of the output signal. That is, if the voltage output from the slide position detection sensor 718 is 5V, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is determined as H (high). If the voltage is 0V, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is L. Is determined.

  Since the slide origin sensor 717 has the same configuration, the output is set to H (high) if the column member 720 is at the origin position (retreat position), and the output is L if it deviates from the origin position (retreat position). Set to (low). The sound lamp control device 113 only determines whether the output of each sensor is H or L, and the rough arrangement of the column member 720 (whether it is the origin position or the overhang position, or between these positions) Can be easily grasped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137 and FIG. 138, a tilt origin sensor 618 for detecting whether or not the effect member 620 of the tilt operation unit 600 is in the origin position (inverted state) will be described. The tilt origin sensor 618 is composed of the same kind of sensors as the slide origin sensor 717 and the slide position sensor 718 described above.

  FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a case where the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is at the origin position (inverted state). As shown in the figure, when the effect member 620 is in the origin position (inverted state), the sensor shielding part 627 provided on the effect member 620 side is the light emitting part of the tilt origin sensor 618 provided on the base member 610 side. The light emitted from the light emitting unit is blocked and does not reach the light receiving unit. That is, the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 is set to H (high). By outputting this H (high) signal to the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to notify that the effect member is at the origin position (inverted state).

  FIG. 138A is a diagram showing a positional relationship between the tilt origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding unit 627 when the effect member 620 tilts (swings) in the left direction when viewed from the front. FIG. 138 (b) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the tilt origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding unit 627 when the effect member 620 tilts (swings) in the right direction when viewed from the front. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (a), when the effect member 620 tilts (swings) in the left direction when viewed from the front, the sensor shielding portion 627 provided on the effect member 620 is also linked to the effect member 620. Variable in the upper left direction. As a result, the tilt origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding unit 627 are displaced from each other, so that the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the tilt origin sensor 618 can be received by the light receiving unit. As with the other sensors described above, while the light from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit, the output of the tilting origin sensor 618 is set to L (low). By outputting this H (high) signal to the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to notify that the effect member 620 has deviated from the origin position (inverted state).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 138 (b), when the effect member 620 tilts (swings) in the right direction when viewed from the front, the sensor shielding unit 627 provided on the effect member 620 also becomes the effect member 620. Interlocks with the lower right direction. As a result, the tilt origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding unit 627 are displaced from each other, so that the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the tilt origin sensor 618 can be received by the light receiving unit. Therefore, also in this case, the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 is set to L (low), and the sound lamp control device 113 is notified.

  In this manner, by using the tilt origin sensor 618, it is possible to easily detect whether or not the effect member 620 is at the origin position (inverted state) and notify the sound lamp control device 113.

  In this control example, the single tilt origin sensor 618 is used to determine whether or not the effect member 620 is at the origin position. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. Sensors for detecting whether or not the effect member 620 is at the maximum movable position when the tilting operation (swinging operation) is performed on the right side and the left side may be provided. With this configuration, when the tilting motion (swinging motion) reaches the maximum movable position, the swinging motion can be reliably stopped and the swinging direction can be reversed in the reverse direction (origin direction). it can. Therefore, since it can prevent (suppress) operating beyond the movable range of the production | presentation member 620 when performing swinging operation | movement, possibility that a failure and abnormal operation | movement will generate | occur | produce can be reduced.

<Electric Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 142. First, FIG. 139 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example.

  As shown in FIG. 139, in this control example, various sensors 230 are electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. Specifically, the various sensors 230 are provided with at least the tilt origin sensor 618, the slide origin detection sensor 717, and the slide position detection sensor 718 described above. In addition to these, various sensors such as a sensor for detecting the origin position of the vertical operation unit 400 and a sensor for detecting the origin position of the combined operation unit 500 are provided. Since the operation status of each accessory can be accurately grasped by the various sensors 230, the operation of the accessory can be suitably controlled.

  In this control example, as the other devices 228, the slide drive motor 751 for causing the slide operation unit 700 to perform the slide operation and the tilt operation (swinging operation) of the tilt operation unit 600 are performed. A tilting drive motor 661 is provided. Each motor can be driven by these motors.

  Next, the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 140A, in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example, an operation scenario table 222c and a swing area table 222d are added. Has been.

  The operation scenario table 222c is a data table that defines the operation content when performing an effect using each accessory. More specifically, it is a data table in which setting values (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction, etc.) set for various drive motors corresponding to each accessory are defined. Details of the operation scenario table 222c will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142 (a).

  FIG. 141 (a) is a block diagram showing the operation scenario table 222c. The operation scenario table 222c stores data for each type of accessory that can be driven (variable). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 141A, for example, when an effect for driving the slide operation unit 700 is set, a motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the slide drive motor 751 is set. When the slide operation table 222c1 that defines the setting value to be set or an effect for driving the tilting operation unit 600 is set, the setting is made for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the tilting drive motor 661. A tilting operation table 222c2 and the like defining the set values to be set are provided.

  These will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. 141 (b) and (c). FIG. 141 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the slide operation table 222c1 described above. As shown in FIG. 141 (b), the slide operation table 222c1 includes setting values set for the motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223n indicating the setting progress based on the operation scenario. (Operation speed, number of operation steps, and operation direction) are defined.

  Here, the operation speed indicates the frequency with which the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) for setting the operation of one step to the slide drive motor 751, and is a signal output per second ( Number of pulses) (pps, pulses per second). For example, if the operation speed is 100 pps, it means that a signal (pulse) is output 100 times per second from the motor driver to the slide drive motor 751. That is, the slide drive motor 751 is driven at a speed of 100 steps per second. The number of operation steps indicates the number of operations performed by the slide drive motor 751. In other words, a signal (pulse) for setting a one-step operation from the motor driver to the slide drive motor 751. ) Is output. For example, the number of operation steps 120 means that one step of operation is set 120 times for the slide drive motor 751. Furthermore, the operation direction means the drive direction of the slide drive motor 751 (motor rotation direction), and two types of directions, a positive direction and a negative direction, can be set. In the slide drive motor 751, the direction from the retracted position (origin position) to the extended position is a positive direction, and the direction from the extended position to the retracted position (origin position) is a negative direction. By setting these set values for the motor driver for driving the slide drive motor 751, the corresponding operation can be executed accurately.

  As shown in FIG. 141 (b), the value “01H” of the motion pointer 223n indicates that the strut member 720 of the slide motion unit 700 is slid from the retracted position (origin position) to the extended position (outward path). Motion). Specifically, 100 pps is defined as the operation speed, 120 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when it is time to drive the slide operation unit 700 in the production.

  120 steps means a design value of the number of steps up to the overhang position. That is, it means that the support member 720 reaches the detection position of the slide position detection sensor 718 (see FIG. 136 (c)) when the slide drive motor 751 is driven 120 steps in the designed operation. Here, the operation as designed means that the sliding drive motor 751 accurately executes the same operation without step-out or idling, and various gears for transmitting the driving force of the motor to the column member 720. It means the operation when etc. are rotated accurately.

  The value “02H” of the motion pointer 223n is associated with an operation (return path operation) for sliding the column member 720 of the slide operation unit 700 from the extended position to the retracted position (origin position). Specifically, 100 pps is defined as the operation speed, 120 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when it is time to retract the slide operation unit 700 to the origin position (retreat position) in the production. The timing of the retreat is defined in advance according to the type of effect.

  FIG. 141 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the tilting operation table 222c2 described above. Similarly to the slide operation table 222c1, the tilt operation table 222c2 has set values (operation speed, number of operation steps, and operation direction) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223n. It is prescribed. The operation pointer values “01H” and “02H” are associated with setting values for tilting (swinging) the effect member 620 leftward as viewed from the front. In other words, the motion pointer value “01H” includes a motion speed of 100 pps, a motion step number of 10 steps, and a forward motion direction as set values for tilting from the home position (inverted state) to the left in the front view. It is prescribed. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates 10 steps to the left in the front view at an operation speed of 100 pps.

  In addition, the operation pointer value “02H” includes a setting value for returning the effect member 620 tilted leftward in the front view to the origin position (inverted state), an operation speed of 100 pps, an operation step number of 10 steps, and a negative direction. The operation directions are respectively defined. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates 10 steps to the left in the front view at an operation speed of 100 pps. By setting a setting value corresponding to the operation pointer value “01H” and setting a setting value corresponding to the operation pointer value “02H” after the setting operation is completed, the effect member 620 is seen from the origin position to the right in the front view. After performing a tilting operation (swinging motion) of 10 steps in the direction, a returning operation to the home position (inverted state) is performed.

  Furthermore, setting values for tilting the head member 620 in the right direction in front view (swinging motion) are associated with the motion pointer values “03H” and “04H”. In other words, the operation pointer value “03H” includes an operation speed of 100 pps, an operation step number of 10 steps, and an operation direction in the positive direction as set values for tilting from the origin position (inverted state) to the right in the front view. It is prescribed. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates 10 steps to the right in the front view at an operation speed of 100 pps.

  In addition, the operation pointer value “02H” includes a setting value for returning the effect member 620 tilted leftward in the front view to the origin position (inverted state), an operation speed of 100 pps, an operation step number of 10 steps, and a negative direction. The operation directions are respectively defined. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates 10 steps to the left in the front view at an operation speed of 100 pps. By setting a setting value corresponding to the motion pointer value “03H” and setting the setting value corresponding to the motion pointer value “04H” after the setting operation is completed, the effect member 620 is moved from the origin position to the right in the front view. After performing a tilting operation (swinging motion) of 10 steps in the direction, a returning operation to the home position (inverted state) is performed.

  In this way, by defining the setting contents for the motor driver in association with the value of the operation pointer 223n, the value of the operation pointer 223n is updated, and only the setting value corresponding to the updated value is set. The operation of the effect member 620 can be easily set.

  In addition to the above-described slide motion table 222c1 (see FIG. 141 (b)) and tilting motion table 222c2 (see FIG. 141 (c)), the action scenario table 222c includes a driving accessory (vertical motion unit 400, A dedicated data table is defined for each type of composite operation unit 500 (not shown). By referring to the table corresponding to each accessory defined in the operation scenario table 222c and outputting the set value to the corresponding motor driver, the same operation can be executed every time in the corresponding rendering.

  In actuality, motors, gears, and the like may vary in operation due to individual differences, aging deterioration, and the like. Therefore, even if the set values defined in the operation scenario table 222c are set at the same timing, the target operation is performed. It may not be possible. Although details will be described later, in this control example, in order to absorb the influence of the above-described variation, the amount of movement of the accessory at the time of power-on is measured (analyzed) and the analysis result is obtained. Accordingly, the slide operation set value is corrected (corrected). That is, it is configured such that a correction value for correcting individual variation or the like is added (or subtracted) to the setting value defined in the operation scenario table 222c. Thereby, the operation | movement of the accessory in each pachinko machine 10 can be performed without a sense of incongruity even under the influence of individual difference and aged deterioration.

  Furthermore, in the operation scenario table 222c of this control example, an initial operation table 222c5 in which the setting contents for the motor driver corresponding to each accessory in the initial operation executed based on power-on of the pachinko machine 10 is specified. (See FIG. 141 (a)). By executing the initial operation based on the initial operation table 222c5, it is possible to determine whether or not each accessory operates normally. Further, when the initial operation is executed, the contents of the tilt operation (swing operation) of the tilt operation unit 600 and the slide operation of the slide operation unit 700 are analyzed, and a correction value for correcting the operation according to the analysis result. Is identified. Details of the initial operation table 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 142 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the initial operation table 222c5. As shown in FIG. 142 (a), the initial operation table 222c5 is associated with the value of the operation pointer 223n, and the type of the accessory for which the operation is set, and the motor driver corresponding to the accessory are set. Setting values (operation speed, number of operation steps, and operation direction) are defined.

  More specifically, the value “01H” of the action pointer 223n is associated with the slide action unit 700 as the type of the accessory, and the action content of 100 pps in the forward direction is defined as the action content. The number of operation steps is not determined, and the slide operation is repeated in the forward direction (the direction of the overhang position) until it is detected that the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 has become H (high). That is, the flow of setting one step operation, checking whether the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is H (high), and setting the one step operation again if the output remains L (low). The operation is repeated. The number of operation steps set until the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 becomes H (high) is counted by the correction counter 223w. After the operation is completed, the number of operation steps from the origin position to the overhang position is designed. The difference from the 120 step value is analyzed. A correction value for correcting the set value of the slide operation is calculated according to the analyzed difference. Here, when the operation of one step is repeatedly set, for example, a delay of, for example, 10 milliseconds is made with respect to the operation of one step so that the operation speed is the same as that when the operation of a plurality of steps is set during the normal game. Is set. In other words, one step operation is set every 10 milliseconds (at an operation speed of 100 pps). Thereby, since it can be set as the operation | movement aspect same as during a normal game, it can prevent misunderstanding that abnormality has generate | occur | produced from the appearance of operation | movement. In the following description, when an operation is set for each step toward various sensors, a delay is set so that the operation speed is the same as that during the normal game.

  The tilting motion unit 600 is associated with the values “02H” to “05H” of the motion pointer 223n as the type of the accessory for setting the initial motion. As the operation content corresponding to the value “02H” of the operation pointer 223n, an operation with 10 operation steps at an operation speed of 100 pps in the forward direction is defined. Further, as the operation content corresponding to the value “03H” of the operation pointer 223n, an operation until the tilt origin sensor 618 is detected at an operation speed of 100 pps in the negative direction is defined. Further, as the operation content corresponding to the value “04H” of the operation pointer 223n, an operation of 10 steps is defined in the negative direction at an operation speed of 100 pps, and as the operation content corresponding to the value “05H” of the operation pointer 223n, In addition, an operation that is continued until the tilt origin sensor 618 is detected at an operation speed of 100 pps is defined.

  To summarize the initial motion set for the tilting motion unit 600, when the slide motion unit 700 operates to the extended position and the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the initial motion is updated to “02H”, first, The effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is moved 10 steps to the left in the front view. When the operation of 10 steps is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the initial operation is updated to “03H” and the operation in the origin direction (that is, the operation in the right direction in the front view) is set. . This operation is repeatedly executed step by step until it is detected that the output of the tilting origin sensor 618 has become H (high), similar to the operation executed at the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223n.

  When it is detected that the output of the tilting origin sensor 618 has become H (high), the value of the action pointer 223n is updated to “04H”, and at the same time, a 10-step action (that is, the origin position) Is set in the direction in which the tilting operation is further performed after passing. When the operation of 10 steps is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223n is updated to “05H”, and the operation toward the origin (that is, the operation toward the left in the front view) is set. This operation is also repeatedly executed step by step until it is detected that the output of the tilting origin sensor 618 has become H (high), similarly to the operation executed at the value “03H” of the operation pointer 223n. By executing these operations, it is easy to determine whether or not the tilting operation (swinging operation) in the right direction in the front view and the left direction in the front view in which the effect member 620 can be driven in the normal gaming state can be normally executed. Can be confirmed.

  In the initial operation of the tilting operation unit 600, the number of operation steps until the effect member 620 that has moved away from the origin position by returning to the origin position by executing the tilting operation (swinging operation) is the correction counter 223w. After being returned to the origin position, the difference from the design value is analyzed. A correction value for correcting the set value of the slide operation is calculated according to the analyzed difference. That is, in this control example, when it is determined that any of the actual operation and the design operation is out of the tilt operation and the slide operation, the set value (operation speed) for the slide operation unit 700 is corrected. Is configured to do.

  The value “06H” of the action pointer 223n is associated with the slide action unit 700 as the type of the accessory, and the action at the action speed of 100 pps in the forward direction is defined as the action content. Similar to the operation when the value of the operation pointer 223n is “01H”, the operation of one step is repeatedly set until it is detected that the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 becomes H (high).

  Although illustration is omitted, the initial operation table 222c5 also defines initial operations corresponding to the other objects. By executing the initial operation using the initial operation table 222c5, it is possible to easily determine whether or not there is a defect in the accessory performing the effect operation in various effects when the power is turned on. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent (suppress) a game from being performed on the pachinko machine 10 in which a problem has occurred, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with peace of mind.

  In this control example, while the initial operation based on the initial operation table 222c5 is being executed, the initial operation is executed and the correction value for correcting the operation speed of the slide operation table 222c1 is calculated. The slide motion table 222c1 need not be defined in the motion scenario table 222c. Instead of calculating a correction value for correcting the operation speed, an operation scenario of the slide operation during the normal game is created based on the number of operation steps of the slide operation and the swing operation during the initial operation, and stored in the RAM 223. You may comprise so that it may store. In order to describe this modification more specifically, it is assumed that the number of operation steps to the extended position of the slide operation in the initial operation is 125 steps, and the number of operation steps required for one cycle of the swing operation is 45 steps. Assume the case where it is determined. In this case, first, the actual number of operation steps up to the overhang position determined by the initial operation is set as the number of operation steps of the slide operation. Then, the operation speed of the slide operation for executing the swing operation (3 × 45 steps) of 3 cycles (3 times) just before executing the slide operation of 125 steps is set as the operation speed during the normal game. Set. That is, 100 pps × 125 steps / (3 × 45 steps) = 93 pps is set as the operation speed. Then, when an effect that is executed in combination with a sliding motion and a swing motion during normal game is set, the number of motion steps calculated in the initial motion is 125 steps and the motion speed is 93 pps. What is necessary is just to set every time with respect to a slide operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably perform the specified number of times (three times) of swinging motion until the column member 720 slides to the extended position. Further, the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced as compared with the case where the slide operation table 222 c 1 is defined in the ROM 222.

  In this control example, the correction value is calculated based on the number of operation steps in the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the operation time required for the slide operation and the operation time required for the swing operation, a deviation from the design operation time is determined, and a correction value for correcting the deviation is calculated. May be. Further, in the above-described modified example, the setting content of the sliding motion is calculated based on the number of motion steps in the initial motion, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the operation time required for the slide operation and the operation time required for the swing operation, the number of operation steps of the slide operation so as to reach the extended position of the slide operation at the timing when the swing operation is completed three times. And the operation speed may be determined.

  Returning to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. The head swing area table 222d is a data table that is referred to when the effect member 620 of the tilting accessory 600 is tilted (swinged), and defines a direction in which the tilting operation is possible. Here, in this control example, the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the effect member 620 and the sliding operation of the support member 720 are executed in conjunction with each other. More specifically, while the support member 720 is performing a slide operation from the origin position to the extended position, the effect member 620 performs three reciprocating tilting operations (swinging operation) above the support member 720. It is controlled so that it is performed (the swinging motion in the left direction and the swinging motion in the right direction are performed three times each alternately). That is, the position at which the effect member 620 performs the swing motion varies according to the transition of the slide motion.

  Further, as described above, the tilting operation unit 600 including the effect member 620 is disposed in a lower portion of a region formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210 (see FIG. 5), and the column member 720 is the origin. In the state at the position or overhang position, the effect member 620 and the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212 are configured to be close to each other. Therefore, for example, the effect member 620 swings in the right direction in the front view near the origin position of the slide operation, or the effect member 620 swings in the left direction in the front view near the extended position of the slide operation. When the operation is performed, there is a possibility that the effect member 620 and the outer wall portion 212 collide with each other. Therefore, in this control example, by defining an operation direction in which the effect member 620 can execute the swing operation in the swing area table 222d, a collision (interference) between the effect member 620 and the outer wall portion 212 can be prevented. ing. When the sliding operation of the support member 720 and the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the effect member 620 are both regular operations (operations as designed), the effect member 620 and the outer wall 212 are An operation scenario is defined so that there is no possibility of collision (interference). The swing area table 222d is useful when, for example, an irregular situation occurs in which the slide operation stops midway due to a malfunction or the operation speed changes midway.

  Here, first, see FIG. 144 for the operation mode when the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the effect member 620 and the sliding operation of the column member 720 both perform regular operations (operations as designed). To explain. FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship between the number of operation steps of the swing operation of the effect member 620 and the number of operation steps of the slide operation of the column member 720. In this figure, the number of steps “0” indicates the origin position of each accessory (effect member 620, support member 720). Further, the range in which the number of steps of the swing motion is positive means that the effect member 620 is disposed on the left side of the front view from the origin position, and the range in which the number of steps is negative is from the origin position. Also means that the effect member 620 is arranged on the right side of the front view.

  As shown in FIG. 144, until the slide operation is performed for 10 steps, the swing operation to the left is performed for one step every time the slide operation is performed for one step. That is, a swinging motion in a direction away from the outer wall portion 212 arranged on the right side of the origin position of the sliding motion is executed. If the number of steps of the slide operation becomes 10 and the number of steps of the swing operation becomes 10 steps in the positive direction (see position a in FIG. 144), the direction of the swing operation is reversed and the negative direction Switch the direction of the swing motion. This swinging motion in the negative direction is executed beyond the origin position of the effect member 620. When the number of steps of the slide operation becomes 30, and the effect member 620 has reached the position advanced 10 steps in the negative direction (rightward in front view) from the origin position (see the position b in FIG. 144), the head swings again. Invert the direction of movement and switch to swinging movement in the forward direction.

  Thereafter, the slide operation proceeds while the direction of the swing operation is reversed every 20 steps (see positions c, d, and e in FIG. 144). Based on the fact that the number of operation steps of the slide operation becomes 120 steps (reaches the extended position of the slide operation) and the effect member 620 reaches the origin position from the negative direction (right side of the origin position). Is stopped. Even when returning to the origin position, the column member is returned to the origin position of the slide operation while maintaining the relationship shown in FIG.

  By executing the slide operation and the swing operation shown in FIG. 144, the same swing operation can be executed every time without causing the effect member 620 to collide with other components. On the other hand, since the effect member 620 and the column member 720 are driven by the drive motor, even if the same operation scenario is set due to individual differences of the drive motor and gears and aging deterioration, the correspondence relationship in FIG. there is a possibility. In addition, the slide operation and the swing operation may be temporarily stopped due to the influence of a failure or noise. Even in such a case, if the same set values (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction) as in normal operation are set, the effect member 620 collides (interferences) with the outer wall portion 212. May occur. Therefore, in this control example, by providing the swing region table 222d that defines the motion direction in which the swing motion can be performed according to the number of steps of the slide motion, it is possible to suppress problems that the effect member 620 interferes with other configurations. It is configured to do.

  Details of the swing area table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the swing area table 222d in this control example. In this control example, whenever the effect member 620 reaches the origin position of the swing motion, this swing area table 222d is referred to and the direction of the swing motion is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), the swing area table 222d has a direction (necking) in which the swing motion can be performed in association with the number of motion steps of the support column 720 (the progress of the slide motion). Swingable direction) is defined. In addition, the relationship between the number of slide operation steps and the swingable direction is a sliding motion in the direction from the origin position to the overhang position (outward path) or the direction from the overhang position to the origin position (return path) ) Is specified to distinguish whether it is a sliding motion.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the forward slide operation (the slide operation corresponding to the value “01H” of the operation pointer), the range of the operation step number “0-14” of the slide operation The swingable direction “left side” is associated. In other words, when it is detected that the effect member 620 has reached the origin position in an operation range that is relatively close to the origin position of the slide operation (the number of operation steps is 0 to 14), the effect member 620 is viewed from the front. Swinging to the right is prohibited (restricted). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the portion of the outer wall portion 212 on the right side of the origin position of the sliding operation from colliding with the effect member 620 and damaging the outer wall portion 212 and the effect member 620.

  Further, “both sides” is associated with the range of the number of operation steps “15 to 104” of the slide operation as the swingable direction. That is, when it is detected that the effect member 620 has reached the origin position within the range of the number of operation steps “15 to 104”, the swinging operation is performed without limitation on either the right side or the left side of the front view. Can be set. This is because, in the range of the number of operation steps, the outer wall portion 212 and the effect member 620 are sufficiently separated from each other, and there is no possibility of collision (interference) regardless of the operation direction.

  Further, the swingable direction “right side” is associated with the number of operation steps “105 to 120” of the slide operation. That is, when it is detected that the effect member 620 has reached the origin position in an operation range relatively close to the extended position of the slide operation (the number of operation steps is 105 to 120), the effect member 620 is moved to the front. Swinging to the left side of the view is prohibited (restricted). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the portion of the outer wall portion 212 on the left side of the protruding position of the sliding operation from colliding with the effect member 620 and damaging the outer wall portion 212 and the effect member 620.

  On the other hand, in the forward sliding motion (sliding motion corresponding to the motion pointer value “02H”), the swingable direction “right” is associated with the range of the number of motion steps “0 to 14”. The swingable direction “both sides” is associated with the number of motion steps “15 to 104”, and the swingable direction “left side” is associated with the number of motion steps “105 to 120”. Even during the forward slide operation, the direction member 620 can be operated without colliding with the outer wall 212 by setting the operation direction of the swing operation with reference to these correspondences.

  Summarizing the swingable directions, as shown in FIG. 143, an area for 15 steps (0 step to 14 steps) including the origin position of the slide operation (detection position of the slide origin detection sensor 717) is on the left side (front view). It is possible to set the swing motion only in the left direction. On the other hand, the region for 15 steps (104 steps to 120 steps) including the extended position of the slide operation (detection position of the slide position detection sensor 718) sets the swing operation only on the right side (right direction in front view). It becomes possible. And in the area | region other than the above, it is comprised so that a swing operation | movement can be set without the restriction | limiting of a direction. As described above, by defining the direction of the swing motion in correspondence with the number of steps of the slide motion, it is possible to prevent the effect member 620 from interfering with the other configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example, the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example includes a step counter 223k, an operation scenario flag 223m, an operation pointer 223n, and a swing direction flag. 223o, correction value storage area 223p, additional operation flag 223q, origin returning flag 223r, initial operation flag 223s, slide standby flag 223t, swing standby flag 223u, swing counter 223v, correction Counter 223w is added.

  The step counter 223k is a counter for counting the number of operation steps of each accessory driven by the drive motor. The count reference (position where the number of operation steps is 0) is set to the origin position of each accessory. The step counter 223k is configured to separately count the number of operation steps for each type of accessory. That is, the step counter 223k is the same as the counter for counting the number of operation steps of the effect member 620, the counter for counting the number of operation steps of the column member 720, etc. Separate counters are provided.

  Each time the step counter 223k receives an execution signal indicating that the operation of one step has been executed from any of the various drive motors provided in the pachinko machine 10, the step counter 223k sets the type of the drive motor that has output the execution signal. The corresponding counter value is updated by one (see S1622 in FIG. 149). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, an origin return operation is performed to return the various accessories to the origin position. When the various accessories return to the origin by the origin return operation, the step counter 223k 0 is set for the value. By this origin return operation, the position where the value of the step counter 223k becomes 0 can be reliably set as the origin position of each accessory, so that the operation status (drive position) of each accessory can be accurately grasped. it can.

  The operation scenario flag 223m is a flag indicating which operation scenario is set among the operation scenarios corresponding to the rendering operation of each accessory specified in the operation scenario table 222c. The operation scenario flag 223m is composed of, for example, 1 byte (8 bits), and the type of the operation scenario is associated with each bit. For example, the 0th bit of the motion scenario flag 223m corresponds to the slide motion table 222c1, and if this 0th bit is 1 (on), it means that the slide motion table 222c1 is set as the motion scenario. If 0 (off), it means that the slide operation table 222c1 is not set. Similarly, for the other bits, if the operation scenario corresponding to each bit is set, the corresponding bit is set to 1 (on), and if the corresponding operation scenario is not set, the corresponding bit is 0. Set to (Off).

  In the operation scenario flag 223m, when an operation scenario is specified based on the variation pattern command in the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108), the bit corresponding to the scenario is set to 1 (ON) ( (See S1704, S1708, and S1710 in FIG. 108). In addition, each time the variation effect for which the operation scenario is set ends, the bit corresponding to the set scenario is set to 0 (off). With this operation scenario flag 223m, it is possible to easily determine the type of operation scenario currently set.

  The action pointer 223n is a pointer used to identify the progress status of the set action scenario. As described above, each data table constituting the operation scenario table 222c is defined in association with the value of the operation pointer 223n and the operation content to be set (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction). In this control example, the operation with the set content of 1 is set in the drive motor, and when the operation according to the set content is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223n is updated.

  The operation pointer 223n can update the pointer value separately for each set operation scenario. That is, the operation pointer 223n is a generic name for different pointers provided for each operation scenario. Each pointer constituting the operation pointer 223 is set to “01H” as a corresponding operation scenario is newly set. Thereafter, each time the operation content corresponding to the pointer value is completed, the pointer value is updated (see S5312 in FIG. 150, S5411 in FIG. 151, S5505 in FIG. 152, S5710 and S5711 in FIG. 154), and after the update. The operation content corresponding to the pointer value is set. In addition, when the variation effect in which the corresponding operation scenario is set ends, the pointer value is reset to “00H”. By using the operation pointer 223n, the set operation scenario can be accurately grasped.

  The head swing direction flag 223o is a flag indicating the direction of the head swing operation. If the value of the swing direction flag 223o is on, it indicates that the swing operation in the positive direction (left direction in the front view) is being executed. If the value is off, the swing direction flag 223o is in the negative direction (right direction in the front view). This indicates that the head swing operation is being executed. The swing direction flag 223o corresponds to the action content indicated by the updated value of the action pointer 223n when the action scenario corresponding to the tilting action is set and the value of the action pointer 223n is updated. The value is updated (see S5507 in FIG. 152). That is, when the swinging motion in the positive direction is set as the operation content, the swinging direction flag 223o is set to ON, and when the swinging motion in the negative direction is set, the swinging direction flag 223o is set. Set to off. When the origin position is reached in the swing operation, the direction of the swing operation is specified with reference to the swing direction flag 223o. Then, based on the swing area table 222d, it is determined whether or not there is no problem even if it passes through the origin while maintaining the same swinging direction.

  The correction value storage area 223p is a storage area for storing a correction value for correcting variations in the action of an accessory due to aging deterioration or individual differences. More specifically, a correction value for correcting the operation speed of the column member 720 in accordance with the actual operation of the effect member 620 is stored. The correction value stored in the correction value storage area 223p is calculated during the execution of the initial operation that is executed based on the power being supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and is stored in the correction value storage area 223p. (See S5406 and S5409 in FIG. 151). The correction value is broadly divided into at least a correction value according to the actual swing motion status of the effect member 620 and a correction value according to the actual slide motion status of the column member 720. The number of steps of the slide operation can be corrected according to the correction value.

  The correction value according to the actual swinging motion of the effect member 620 is a design value of the number of steps when the effect member 620 swings the head from the origin position to the right in the front view and the left in the front view. (Since the swinging motion of the forward 10 steps and the backward 10 steps is performed in the left and right directions, a total of 40 steps) and the number of steps actually required to set a series of motions and return to the origin is there.

  On the other hand, the correction value according to the actual swinging motion of the support member 720 is the design value (120 steps) of the number of steps when the support member 720 performs the slide operation from the origin position to the overhang position. This is a ratio to the number of steps required to operate from the origin position to the overhang position in the sliding operation. By correcting the setting contents of the operation scenario with these correction values, the mode of the sliding motion of the support member 720 can be matched to the mode of the actual swinging motion of the effect member 620. In other words, when the actual number of steps required for the swing operation is larger than the design value, it is necessary to set a larger number of steps than the design value, and thus the execution period of the swing operation becomes longer. Even in this case, the correction value for delaying the operation speed of the slide operation is stored in the correction value in order to match the timing at which the three-way swing motion is completed with the timing at which the slide operation is extended. Stored in area 223p.

  On the other hand, when the actual number of steps required for the swing motion is smaller than the design value, the swing motion is completed with the number of steps smaller than the design value, and the execution period of the swing motion is shortened by mi. Even in this case, in order to match the timing at which the three reciprocating swing motion is completed and the timing at which the slide motion is reached, a correction value for increasing the slide motion speed is stored as a correction value. Stored in area 223p.

  When setting the slide operation, the swing operation is performed by setting a value obtained by multiplying the correction value stored in the correction value storage area 223p by the operation speed specified in the slide operation table 223c1 as a new operation speed. The completion timing can coincide with the timing to reach the extended position of the slide operation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operation quality when the effect member 620 and the column member 720 are operated simultaneously.

  The additional operation flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not it is an additional operation period that may be set after the number of operation steps specified in the operation scenario table 222c is exhausted. Here, in this control example, even when the number of operation steps specified in the operation scenario table 222c is exhausted, the corresponding sensor output does not become H (high), and additional operation is performed in the sensor direction. Is configured to set. This additional operation is repeatedly set step by step until the output of the corresponding sensor becomes H (high). The period during which this additional operation is set is called an additional operation period. By setting this additional operation period, even if the number of steps until the sensor is detected is deviated due to aging or individual differences, it is possible to move in the sensor direction without notifying the error immediately. it can. This additional operation flag 223q is an abnormality detection process executed when the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H (high) even after the number of operation steps specified in the operation scenario table 222c has elapsed (see FIG. 155). Is turned on, and when it is detected that the output of the corresponding sensor has become L (low) by the additional operation, it is set to off (see S5604 in FIG. 153).

The origin return in-progress flag 223r is in the process of performing an origin return operation (an operation for returning an accessory that has deviated from the origin position to the origin position) that is executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It is a flag indicating whether or not. If this origin return flag 223r is on, it indicates that the origin return operation is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the origin return operation is not being executed. The origin returning flag 223r is set in the origin returning process (see FIG. 146).
When the origin return operation is set, it is set to ON (see S5103 in FIG. 146). On the other hand, in the return to origin operation, it is set to OFF when it is determined that all the objects have returned to the origin position (see S5304 in FIG. 150). By using the origin returning flag 223r, it can be easily determined whether or not the origin returning operation is being performed.

  The initial operation in-progress flag 223s is a flag that indicates whether or not an initial operation that is executed to determine whether or not each accessory operates normally after the return to origin operation is completed. . If the initial operation flag 223s is on, it indicates that the initial operation is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the initial operation is not being executed. The initial operation in-progress flag 223s is set to ON after the origin return operation is completed (see S5304 in FIG. 150), and is set to OFF when all operations specified in the initial operation table 222c5 are completed. . By using the initial operation flag 223s, it can be easily determined whether or not the initial operation is being executed.

  The slide standby flag 223t is an effect in which the effect member 620 and the support member 720 operate in conjunction with each other, and the slide operation of the support member 720 to the protruding position ends before the swing operation of the effect member 620. This is a flag for determining whether or not the slide standby period is set. This slide standby period is a period for waiting for the slide operation until the swing operation is completed. When performing the operation of returning the slide operation from the extended position to the origin position, the swing operation of the effect member 620 is performed. And the sliding operation of the column member 720 are set at the same time.

  If the slide standby flag 223t is on, it indicates that the slide standby period is in progress, and if it is off, it indicates that the slide standby period is not in progress. This slide standby flag 223t is set to ON when it is determined in the slide operation process (see FIG. 156) that the slide operation has been completed and the swing operation has not been completed (see S5909 in FIG. 156). ). On the other hand, when both the sliding operation and the swinging operation are completed and an operation for returning from the overhang position to the origin position is set, it is set to OFF (see S5706 in FIG. 154).

  The swing standby flag 223u indicates that, in the effect in which the effect member 620 and the column member 720 operate in conjunction with each other, the swing operation of the effect member 620 ends before the slide operation to the protruding position of the column member 720. This is a flag for determining whether or not the swing waiting period is set in the case of being closed. The swing waiting period is a period for waiting for the swing operation until the slide operation is completed. When performing the operation of returning the slide operation from the extended position to the origin position, the swing of the effect member 620 is performed. It is set to start the operation and the sliding operation of the column member 720 simultaneously.

  If the swing standby flag 223u is on, it indicates that the above-described swing standby period is in progress, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not in the swing standby period. The swing standby flag 223u is set to ON when it is determined that the swing operation (tilt operation) is completed and the slide operation is not completed in the tilt direction setting process (see FIG. 154). (See S5703 in FIG. 154). On the other hand, when both the sliding operation and the swinging operation are completed and the operation for returning from the overhang position to the origin position is set, it is set to OFF (see S5910 in FIG. 156).

  The head swing counter 223s is a counter for counting the number of executions when the head swing operation is executed. This control example is configured to repeat the operation of returning to the original position three times after performing the swinging operation by 10 steps from the original position in the left-right direction based on the tilting operation table 222c2. However, if exactly the same operation is defined three times for the tilting operation table 222c2, the capacity of the ROM 222 may be compressed. Therefore, in this control example, only the operation content for one swing motion is defined in the tilt motion table 222c2, and one swing motion is completed (that is, the motion pointer defined in the tilt motion table 222c2). Each time the operation corresponding to the values “01H” to “04H” of 223n is completed), the number of swings is counted using the swing counter 223s. Then, when the number of counts is 3, the swing motion is finished, and when the number of counts is less than 3, the value of the operation pointer 223n is returned to “01H”, and “01H” to “ The operation corresponding to “04H” is sequentially set. As a result, the swinging motion can be repeated the same number of times (3 times) each time while reducing the data amount of the tilting motion table 222c2.

  The correction counter 223w is a counter for counting the number of steps of the actual swinging operation of the effect member 620 and the number of steps of the actual sliding operation of the column member 720 in the initial operation. By comparing the number of steps counted by the correction counter 223w with the design value of the number of steps, it is possible to analyze (determine) how much the actual operation deviates from the design value. That is, it is possible to analyze (discriminate) the influence of individual differences and aging degradation. A correction value for correcting the operation speed of the sliding operation is calculated according to the number of steps of each accessory counted by the correction counter 223w (see S5406 and S5409 in FIG. 151).

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 156. First, FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example. This start-up process is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, as in the first control example.

  Among the startup processes, the same processes as S1301 to S1313 executed in the startup process (see FIG. 104) in the first control example are executed in the processes of S1301 to S1313. The start-up process in the second control example is different in that an origin return process (S1321) is executed in addition to the start-up process in the first control example.

  This origin return process (S1321) is executed after the processes of S1301 to S1312 are executed as in the first control example, and is a process for returning an accessory that has deviated from the origin position to the origin position. Then, after the origin return process (S1321) is executed, a time setting process (S1313) is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 146, details of the above-described origin return processing (S1321) will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the origin return process (S1321). This origin return process (S1321) is a process for moving (moving) an accessory that is not at the origin position to the origin position when the power is turned on among the various accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the origin return process (S1321), first, is there an origin sensor (for example, slide origin detection sensor 717, tilt origin sensor 618, etc.) whose output is L (0 V) (that is, the light receiving portion of the sensor is not shielded). It is determined whether or not (S5101). If it is determined in step S5101 that there is an origin sensor with an output of L (0 V) (S5101: Yes), one of the objects (the production member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600, the column member of the slide operation unit 700). 720) is not at the origin position. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to S5102 in order to return (movable) the accessory that is deviated from the origin position to the origin position.

  In the process of S5102, the operation in the origin direction (movable) is set for the accessory corresponding to the sensor whose output is L (0 V) (S5102). Then, the origin returning flag 223r is set to ON (S5103), and this process is terminated. In the process of S5102, for example, an operation with the number of steps twice as many as the number of steps from the origin position to the overhang position in each accessory is set so as to surely return to the origin position.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5101 that there is no origin sensor with an output of L (0 V) (S5101: No), it means that all the features have already been in the origin position when the power is turned on. To do. That is, since there is no need to return (move) the accessory to the origin position, the processes of S5104 and S5105 for setting the initial operation of each accessory are executed.

  In the process of S5104, the start of the initial operation is set for various types of accessories (S5104), the initial operation in-progress flag 223s is set to ON (S5105), and this process ends. As described above, the initial operation is performed in order to check whether or not various accessories are operating normally. Since it is possible to check whether or not the various items are operating normally every time the power is turned on, it is possible to detect abnormalities of the various items at an early stage.

  By executing this origin return processing (S1321), all the objects can be returned (moved) to the origin position. When the return to the origin position is triggered, the step counter 223k of the corresponding accessory can be reset to 0, so that the number of operation steps of all the accessories can be accurately grasped after the origin return. Further, since the initial operation can be executed after the origin return, the same operation can be performed every time in the initial operation. Therefore, whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the initial operation can be easily determined from the appearance.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the main processing. This main process is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113, as in the first control example.

  Among the main processes, the processes of S1501 to S1520 are the same as the processes of S1501 to S1520 executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) in the first control example. The main process in the second control example is different in that an accessory action setting process (S1531) is executed in addition to the main process in the first control example.

  This accessory action setting process (S1531) is executed after the processes of S1501 to S1515 are executed as in the first control example. Then, after the execution of the accessory operation setting process (S1531), each process of S1516 to S1520 is executed. This accessory action setting process (S1531) is a process for setting the action of each accessory based on the selected variation pattern.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the details of the above-described accessory operation setting process (S1531) will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the accessory operation setting process (S1531). This accessory action setting process (S1531) is a process for setting the actions of various accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 as described above.

  In the accessory operation setting process (S1531), first, it is determined whether or not it is the operation start timing of the accessory (S5201). Here, the operation start timing of the accessory and the type of the accessory to be operated are defined for each variation pattern. In the process of S5201, it is determined whether or not the operation start timing has come based on the progress of the fluctuation pattern.

  In the process of S5201, if it is determined that it is not the operation start timing of the accessory (S5201: No), it is not necessary to set the operation of the accessory, so this process ends and returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5201 that it is the operation start timing of the accessory (S5201: Yes), the process proceeds to S5202 in order to set the operation of the accessory at the start timing.

  In the process of S5202, the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the operation to be started (slide operation, tilting (swinging) operation, initial operation, etc.) is set to “01H” (S5202). Then, the operation content corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223n is read from the table corresponding to the accessory to be operated this time in the operation scenario table 222c (S5203). Next, it is determined whether or not the operation content read in the process of S5203 is a slide operation of the support member 720 (S5204).

  In the process of S5204, when it is determined that the read operation content is a slide operation (S5204: Yes), the read operation content is stored in the correction value storage area 223p for the operation speed (pps). A value obtained by multiplying the correction value (both the correction value corresponding to the sliding motion and the correction value corresponding to the swing motion) is set as the operation speed (S5205), and the process proceeds to S5206. As described above, this correction value is a value calculated based on the actual number of operation steps of the swing motion of the effect member 620 in the initial operation and the actual number of operation steps of the column member 720. By correcting the operation speed of the slide operation with this correction value, the end timing of the swing motion can be matched with the operation end timing of the slide operation.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5204, when it is determined that the read operation content is not a slide operation (S5204: No), it is not necessary to correct the operation, so the process of S5205 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5206. .

  When the process of S5204 or S5205 is completed, an operation command is set based on the read operation content (or the corrected operation content) (S5206), and this process ends. The operation command set by the processing of S5206 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 223. In the command output process (S502) of the main process (see FIG. 147) executed by the MPU 221, various motors (vertical drive motor 431, open / close drive motor 466, slide drive motor 751, It is transmitted toward a control IC (not shown) of the tilting drive motor 661). Various motor control ICs (not shown) drive and control the various motors based on the received operation commands. As a result, various accessories corresponding to the various motors are moved.

  Next, a command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 147) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, as in the first control example, and as described above, the main control device 110 is a process for determining a command received from 110 and executing the corresponding control.

  Of the command determination processing (S1511), in each processing of S1601 to S1616, the same processing as the processing of S1601 to S1616 executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 107) in the first control example is executed. . The command determination process (S1511) in the second control example is different in that the process from S1621 to S1623 is executed in addition to the command determination process (S1511) in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same parts as those in the command determination process (see FIG. 107) in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the command determination process (S1511) in the second control example, first, the processes from S1601 to S1615 are executed as in the first control example. If it is determined in step S1612 that a stop command has not been received (S1612: No), various motors (vertical drive is also 431, opening / closing drive motor 466, slide drive motor 751, tilt drive) It is determined whether or not an execution signal (execution command) output from a control IC (not shown) of the motor 661) has been received (S1621). If it is determined in step S1621 that an execution command has not been received from the motor driver (control IC) corresponding to each accessory, the process of step S1616 is executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1621 that an execution command has been received from any of the motor drivers (control ICs) (S1621: Yes), the motor driver (object) that has output the operation command is associated. The step counter 223k is updated (S1622), an execution command process for controlling the operation of each accessory is executed according to the execution command (execution signal) (S1623), and this process ends. By updating (adding) the step counter 223k corresponding to the operation by the processing of S1622, the state (number of operation steps) of each operation (slide operation, swing operation, etc.) can be accurately determined.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 150 to 156, the details of the execution command process (S1623) will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing an execution command process (S 1623. This execution command process (S 1623) includes various motors (upper / lower drive 431, opening / closing drive motor 466, slide drive motor 751, tilting drive). This process is executed when an execution signal (execution command) transmitted from a control IC (not shown) of the drive motor 661) is received.

  In the execution command process (S1623), first, it is determined whether or not the origin returning flag 223r is on (S5301). In the process of S5301, if it is determined that the origin return flag 223r is on (S5301: Yes), the origin return process (see FIG. 145) executed in the above-described startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 145). In FIG. 146), this means that the origin return operation is being executed. Therefore, in this case, in order to determine whether or not the origin return operation has been completed, it is determined whether or not there is an origin sensor whose output is L (0 V) (that is, the light receiving portion of the sensor is not shielded). It is determined (S5302).

  If it is determined in the processing of S5302 that there is an origin sensor whose output is L (0 V) (S5302: Yes), one of the objects is deviated from the origin position (that is, returning (movable). ), And since the process of returning (moving) the accessory to the origin position is continued, this process is terminated as it is. When a plurality of accessories are returning to the origin, the operation stop is set in order from the accessory determined to have returned to the origin position in the process of S5302. Also, if there is an accessory that does not return to the home position even after the set number of home-return operations has elapsed, it is likely that the drive motor is not operating normally due to a failure, etc., so an error is reported. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5302 that there is no origin sensor with an output of L (0 V) (S5302: No), all the objects are at the origin position (that is, the return (movable) is finished). Since this is the case, the process of returning (moving) the accessory to the origin position is ended, and the start of the initial operation of various accessories is set (S5303). Then, the return-to-origin flag 223r is set to off, the initial operation in-progress flag 223s is set to on (S5304), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5301 that the origin returning flag 223r is not on (S5301: No), this is a case where all the objects have been returned (moved) to the origin position, and then the initial operation is in progress. It is determined whether or not the flag 223s is on (S5305). In the process of S5305, if it is determined that the initial operation flag 223s is on (S5305: Yes), it means that the initial operation of various types of accessories is being executed, and therefore the setting during the initial operation is performed. The initial operation process is executed (S5306), and this process ends. Details of the initial operation processing (S5306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5305 that the initial operation flag 223s is off (S5305: No), it is then determined whether or not the received execution command is a command corresponding to the tilting operation (S5307). ). In the process of S5307, when it is determined that the received execution command is a command corresponding to the tilting (swinging) operation (S5307: Yes), the tilting (swinging) operation is executed (the tilting drive motor 661 is turned on). In order to drive), a tilting operation process is executed (S5308), and this process ends. Details of the tilting operation processing (S5308) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 152 to 155.

  In the process of S5307, if it is determined that the received execution command is not a command corresponding to the tilting (swinging) operation (S5307: No), then, whether the received execution command is a command corresponding to the sliding operation or not. Is discriminated (S5309). In the process of S5309, when it is determined that the received execution command is a command corresponding to the slide operation (S5309: Yes), the slide operation is performed in order to execute the slide operation (drive the slide drive motor 751). The process is executed (S5310), and this process ends. Details of the slide operation processing (S5310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5309 that the received execution command is not a command corresponding to the slide operation (S5309: No), it is a case where an execution command for another accessory (motion) is received. In this case, in order to determine whether or not the operation of the accessory corresponding to the received execution command has been completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the accessory has reached the set number of steps. It is determined (S5311). In the process of S5311, when it is determined that the set number of steps has not been reached (S5311: No), this process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5311 that the set number of steps has been reached (S5311: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the received execution command (corresponding to the operation) ( S5312). Then, the operation content corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223n after the addition is read from the operation scenario table 222c (S5313), an operation command is set based on the read operation content (S5314), and this process ends.

  Next, details of the initial operation process (S5306) executed in the execution command process (see FIG. 150) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process (S5306). This initial operation process (S5306) is a process for executing an initial operation of various kinds of accessories.

  In the initial operation process (S5306), first, 1 is added to the value of the correction counter 223w (S5401). As described above, the correction counter 223w is used to count the actual number of operation steps of the column member 720 in the initial operation and the actual number of operation steps of the effect member 620. That is, the number of operation steps of the initial operation with respect to the slide operation executed while the value of the operation pointer 223n is “01H” is counted, and the correction corresponding to the slide operation is performed by the ratio with the design value 120 of the operation step number. Used to calculate a value. In addition, the number of operation steps of the initial operation corresponding to the swing operation performed between the values of the operation pointer 223n between “02H” and “05H” is counted, and the number of operation steps in one cycle of the swing operation is counted. It is used to calculate a correction value corresponding to the swing motion by a ratio with the design value of 40.

  In this control example, the value of the correction counter 223w is updated in each initial operation process (that is, after the initial operation of the swing operation is completed). After the initial operation is finished and the calculation of the correction value is finished, the update processing (S5401) of the correction counter 223w may be skipped. Thereby, the processing load in the initial operation process (S5306) can be reduced.

  When the processing of S5401 is completed, the value of the action pointer 223n corresponding to the initial action is read (S5402), and the action of the corresponding accessory is completed by referring to the initial action table 222c5 based on the read value of the action pointer 223n. It is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied (S5403). In the process of S5403, when it is determined that the condition for completing the operation of the corresponding accessory is not satisfied (S5403: No), an operation for one step is set for the corresponding accessory (S5404). This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5403 that the operation completion condition for the corresponding accessory has been established (S5403: Yes), then whether the value of the operation pointer 223n read in the process of S5402 is 01H or not. Is discriminated (S5405). In the process of S5405, if it is determined that the value of the motion pointer 223n is 01H (S5405: Yes), it means that the forward slide motion of the column member 720 is completed in the initial motion (FIG. 142 (a)). )reference). Therefore, in this case, the ratio of the design value (120 steps) of the number of operation steps of the slide operation to the actual number of operation steps (count value of the correction counter 223w) (the value of the correction counter 223w is divided by 120). (Value) is stored in the correction value storage area 223p as a correction value for the slide operation (S5406). Then, the value of the correction counter 223w is initialized (S5407), and the process proceeds to S5411.

  In the process of S5406, by initializing the correction counter 223w, it can be used to count the actual number of operation steps in the initial operation of the swing operation to be executed next. Therefore, the counter for counting the actual number of operation steps required for the slide operation and the counter for counting the actual number of operation steps required for the swing operation can be covered by a common counter (correction counter 223w). The capacity of the RAM 223 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5405, when it is determined that the value of the action pointer 223n is not “01H” (S5405: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the action pointer 223n is “05H” (S5406). ). In the process of S5406, if it is determined that the value of the action pointer 223n is 05H (S5408: Yes), the initial action of the swing action (the action corresponding to the values “02H” to “05H” of the action pointer 223n) is Since it means that all have been completed, a process of calculating a correction value corresponding to the swing motion is performed. That is, 40, which is the design value of the number of motion steps in one cycle of the swing motion, is actually set to the number of motion steps required for the swing motion in the initial motion (between the values “02H” to “05H” of the motion pointer 223n). The value divided by the counted value of the correction counter 223w) is stored in the correction value storage area 223p as a correction value for the tilting (swinging) operation (S5409). Then, the value of the correction counter value 223w is initialized (S5410), and the process proceeds to S5411.

  In the process of S5408, if it is determined that the value of the action pointer 223n is not “05H” (that is, “06H” or more) (S5408: No), the process directly proceeds to S5411.

  When the processing of S5407, S5408, or S5410 is finished, 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the initial operation (S5411), and the operation corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223n after the addition is set (S5412). This process ends.

  Next, details of the tilting operation process (S5308) executed in the above-described execution command process (see FIG. 150) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the tilting operation process (S5308). This tilting operation process (S5308) is a process for setting the tilting operation of the effect member 620 provided in the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9).

  In the tilting operation process (S5308), first, it is determined whether or not the additional operation flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) operation is on (S5501). As described above, the additional operation flag 223q moves in the sensor direction when the corresponding sensor output does not become H (high) despite the number of operation steps defined in the operation scenario table 222c being digested. It shows whether or not it is an additional operation period in which an additional operation is set.

  In the process of S5501, when it is determined that the additional operation flag 223q for the swing (tilting) operation is ON (S5501: Yes), it means that the additional operation period of the effect member 620 is in progress, so the origin sensor An additional operation process (S5502) for executing an additional operation is executed until (tilt origin sensor 618) is detected, and this process ends. Details of this additional operation processing (S5502) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5501 that the additional operation flag 223q for the swing (tilt) motion is off (S5501: No), then tilt for causing the effect member 620 to tilt (swing). It is determined whether or not the number of steps of the drive motor 661 has reached the set number of steps (S5503). That is, it is determined whether or not the tilting (swinging) operation (forward operation or backward operation) of the effect member 620 is completed.

  In the process of S5503, when it is determined that the number of operation steps of the tilting drive motor 661 has not reached the set number of steps (S5503: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S5505, when it is determined that the number of operation steps of the tilting drive motor 661 has reached the set number of steps (see the tilting operation table 222c2) (S5503: Yes), the operation pointer 223n of 1 is set. This means that the tilting (swinging) operation (outward movement operation or backward movement) of the effect member 620 corresponding to the value has been completed, and then the tilting (swinging) operation of the rendering member 620 is opposite to the origin position (the origin position). It is determined from the value of the current operation pointer 223n (S5504). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation pointer 223n is “01H” or “03H”.

  In the process of S5504, when it is determined that the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 is the forward operation (operation in the direction opposite to the origin position) (S5504: Yes), the effect member 620 is then moved backward. Processing (S5505 to S5507) for (movable operation in the direction of the origin position) is executed.

  In the processing of S5505, 1 is added to the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the tilting (swinging) motion (S5505), and the motion content corresponding to the value of the motion pointer 223n after the addition is stored in the motion scenario table 222c (tilting motion). Table 222c2) is read and set (S5506). Then, the value of the swing direction flag 223o is updated (inverted) to a value corresponding to the swing direction of the return path (S5507), and this process ends. For example, when the processing of S5507 is executed in a state where the value of the swing direction flag 223o is 1 (forward swing operation), the value of the swing motion flag 223o is updated (reversed) to 0, and the value is 0 When the processing of S5507 is executed in this state (forward swing operation), the value of the swing motion flag 223o is updated (reversed) to 1. Accordingly, the swing direction flag 223o can be updated as the operation direction of the swing operation is reversed, so that the operation direction can be accurately grasped.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5504, the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 was a return path operation (operation toward the origin position) (the value of the operation pointer 223 corresponding to the effect member 620 is “02H”, or “ 04H ”) (S5504: No), it is a case where the effect member 620 is moved in the direction of the origin position, and then the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) corresponding to the effect member 620 is output. Is H (5 V) or not (whether the effect member 620 is the origin position) or not (S5509).

  In the process of S5509, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is L (0 V) (S5508: No), the tilt drive motor 661 is not driven as set, the production member Since there is a high possibility that an abnormality such as the 620 being prevented from moving or the number of steps is shifted due to aging or the like, the abnormality detection process is executed (S5510) and the process is terminated. To do. Details of the abnormality detection process (S5510) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is H (5 V) in the process of S5509 (S5508: Yes), the tilt direction setting process is executed (S5509). Exit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 153, details of the additional operation processing (S5502) executed in the above-described tilting operation processing (see FIG. 152) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the additional operation process. This additional operation process (S5502) is moved to the origin position even if the effect member 620 provided in the tilt operation unit 600 completes the set number of operation steps in the tilt operation process (see FIG. 152) described above. This is a process that is executed when there is no possibility (abnormality may have occurred) (S5508: No), and the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position or error notification is performed.

  In the additional operation process (S5502), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is H (5 V) (S5601). In the process of S5601, if it is determined that the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is not H (5 V) (S5601: No), the previous additional operation process (S5502) or an abnormal operation process described later (FIG. This means that the effect member 620 is deviated from the origin position even after the one-step operation set in step 155) is executed. In this case, it is determined whether or not the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the tilting (swinging) operation is 10 or more (S5605).

  If it is determined in step S5605 that the value of the step counter 223k is smaller than 10, an additional operation for one step is set again to move the effect member 620 to the origin position (S5606). This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5605 that the value of the step counter 223k is 10 or more (S5605: Yes), the additional operation process (S5502) is repeatedly executed to return to the origin position, and the process of S5606 is performed. This is a case where the effect member 620 is not moved to the origin position even though the effect member 620 (inclination drive motor 661) is moved by 10 steps or more (added operation). In other words, if it is within the range of the normal operation, it means that the operation having the number of operation steps that can sufficiently reach the origin position is executed. Therefore, in this case, an error command is set (S5607), and this process ends.

  The setting of the error command is not limited to that described above, and the operation of the effect member 620 is a tilting (swinging) operation outside the normal movable (setting) range, and the tilting operation (movable) is further performed. If there is a risk of contact with another accessory, an error command may be set to end the process.

  Further, the number of operation steps determined as an error is not limited to 10 steps, and may be arbitrarily determined according to the type of the accessory or the driving motor. For example, when a driving motor that is relatively easily deteriorated (the number of operation steps is likely to be shifted) is employed, the number of operation steps until an error is determined may be increased (for example, 15 times). On the contrary, when a driving motor having a relatively accurate and long life is adopted, an error may be determined with a smaller number of operation steps (for example, 5 times).

  In the process of S5601, if it is determined that the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is H (5 V) (S5601: Yes), the process of S5606 executed in the previous additional operation process (S5502) ( Alternatively, the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position by the one-step operation set by the abnormality detection process (S5801). In this case, the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the tilting (swinging) motion is updated (S5602), and the motion content corresponding to the updated value of the motion pointer 223n is stored in the motion scenario table 222c (tilting motion table 222c2). Is read and set (S5603). Then, the additional operation flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) operation is set to OFF (S5604), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 154, details of the tilt direction setting process (S5509) executed in the tilt operation process (see FIG. 152) described above will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the tilt direction setting process. This tilt direction setting process (S5502) is executed when the effect member 620 provided in the tilt operation unit 600 reaches the origin position in the swing operation in the tilt operation process (see FIG. 152) described above (S5508: Yes). Process.

  In the tilt direction setting process (S5509), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the swing counter 223v is 3 (or greater than 3) (S5701). The value of the swing counter 223v is updated by the process of S5714 described later, and every time the swing operation of the effect member 620 is performed once (respectively regarded as one in the left and right reciprocations). Is added to 1 (see S5715). Therefore, when the value of the swing counter 223v is 3, it is a case where the swing motion of the effect member 620 is executed three times.

  If it is determined in the process of S5701 that the value of the swing counter 223v is 3 (S5701: Yes), the swinging (tilting) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed the specified number of times (3 times). Therefore, it is then determined whether or not the sliding motion of the column member 720 provided in the tilting operation unit 600 is the forward path (or the forward path) (S5702). In the process of S5702, when it is determined that the slide operation of the support member 720 is the return path (or the return path) (S5702: No), the swinging operation of the effect member 620 is not performed thereafter. This process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the sliding motion of the support member 720 is the forward path (the forward path) (S5702: Yes), the neck of the effect member 620 is completed after the sliding motion (forward path motion) of the support member 720 is completed. In order to execute the swing operation, the process proceeds to S5703.

  In the process of S5703, it is determined whether or not the sliding motion (forward motion) of the column member 720 has been completed (S5703). More specifically, if the slide standby flag 223t is on, it is determined that the slide operation (outward movement operation) of the column member 720 is completed, and if the slide standby flag 223t is off, the slide operation of the column member 720 ( It is determined that the outward movement) has not been completed.

  In the process of S5703, if the slide standby flag 223t is on and it is determined that the slide operation has been completed (S5703: Yes), the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the slide operation is set to 02H and tilted. 03H is set to the value of the action pointer 223n corresponding to the (swing) action (S5705). Then, based on the value of the motion pointer 223n set by the processing of S5705, the operation content is read from the motion scenario table (the slide motion table 222c1 and the tilting motion table 222c2) and set (S5706). By the processing of S5706, the column member 720 of the tilting operation unit 600 is moved in the backward direction, and the effect member 620 is set to swing (tilt) operation (3 reciprocations).

  When the process of S5706 is completed, the slide standby flag 223t is set to OFF (S5707), the value of the swing counter 223v is initialized to 0 (S5708), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5703, when it is determined that the slide standby flag 223t is off and the slide operation is not completed (S5703: No), in order to wait until the slide operation of the column member 720 is completed, The swing standby flag 223u is set to ON (S5704), the value of the swing counter 223v is initialized to 0 (S5708), and this process ends.

  In the process of S5701, when it is determined that the value of the swing counter 223v is not 3 (2 or less) (S5701: No), the process proceeds to S5709 in order to continue the swing (tilt) operation. .

  In the process of S5709, the swing direction before reaching the origin position is specified based on the value of the swing direction flag 223o (S5709). Then, based on the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the sliding operation and the swing area table 222d (see FIG. 142), the swingable direction is specified (S5710).

  When the processing of S5710 is completed, the swinging direction (traveling direction) after passing the origin is specified from the swinging direction before reaching the origin specified in the processing of S5709, and the swinging direction (traveling direction) after passing the origin is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the swingable direction specified in the process of S5710 matches (S5711). In the process of S5711, when it is determined that the swinging direction (traveling direction) after passing through the origin is not the swingable direction (S5711: No), the swinging direction (passing direction) after passing through the origin is the swingable direction. Then, the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swing (tilt) motion is updated three times (S5712), and the process proceeds to S5714.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5711, when it is determined that the swinging (tilting) direction (traveling direction) after passing through the origin is the swingable direction (S5711: Yes), the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swinging motion is set. The value is updated once (S5713), and the process proceeds to S5714.

  Here, the processing of S5712 and S5713 will be specifically described. When the tilt direction setting process (S5509) is executed, the effect member 620 is at the origin position as described above. In this case, the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swing motion is “02H” (when the swing direction is the left side) or “04H” (when the swing direction is the right side). . Therefore, when the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swing motion is updated three times, if 02H (the swing direction is the left side) is set, 01H (the swing direction is the left side) is set, and 04H ( If the swing direction is set to the right side), 03H (the swing direction is the right side) is set. In other words, the value is updated to the value for the forward movement in the same direction as the previously set swinging direction. Thereby, when the swinging (advancing) direction after passing through the origin is not the swingable direction, it is set so that the forward movement is performed again in the same direction.

  On the other hand, when the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swing motion is updated once, if 02H (the swing direction is the left side) is set, 03H (the swing direction is the right side) is set. When “04H” (the swing direction is the right side) is set, “01H” (the swing direction is the left side) is set. In other words, the value is updated to the value for the forward movement in the direction opposite to the previously set swing direction (direction passing through the origin position). As a result, when the swinging (advancing) direction after passing through the origin is a swingable direction, it is set so that the forward movement is performed in the opposite direction (direction passing through the origin position in the opposite direction). The head can be swung (tilted) in the left-right direction as the center.

  Note that the determination of whether or not the swinging (advancing) direction after passing through the origin in the processing of S5711 is a swingable direction is not limited to the above. For example, it is possible to pre-read (estimate) the position at which the column member 720 is moved before the production member 620 reaches the origin position, identify the swingable direction, and determine the swingable direction. Good. With this configuration, the swingable direction can be determined with higher accuracy. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the effect member 620 comes into contact with another configuration (other accessory, outer wall 212, etc.).

  When the processing of S5712 or S5713 is finished, the operation content is read and set based on the operation scenario table (tilting operation table 222c2) based on the updated value of the operation pointer 223n (S5714). Then, the value of the swing counter 223v is updated (S5715), and this process ends. The value of the swing counter 223v in the process of S5715 is incremented by 1 when the effect member 620 reciprocates left and right once (after reciprocating leftward and then reciprocating rightward). It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to add 1 each time the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, details of the abnormality detection setting process (S5510) executed in the above-described tilting operation process (see FIG. 152) will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the abnormality detection process. This abnormality detection process (S5510) is the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor) when the return path operation of the effect member 620 is completed in the tilt operation process (see FIG. 152) described above, that is, when the movement to the origin position is completed. 618) is a process executed when it is determined that the effect member 620 is displaced from the origin position.

  In the abnormality detection process (S5510), first, an operation command corresponding to the operation of one step is set for the accessory (in this case, the production member 620) in which the abnormality is detected (S5801). Then, the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the accessory whose operation has been set by the processing of S5801 is reset to 0 (S5802), the additional operation flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) operation is set to ON (S5803), This process ends. By the processing from S5801 to S5803, in the additional operation processing (FIG. 153) described above, an additional operation for a maximum of 10 steps is executed, and the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position (see S5606 in FIG. 153). Further, in the additional operation process (FIG. 153), even when the additional operation for 10 steps is executed, if the effect member 620 is not moved to the origin position, an error is notified (see S5607 in FIG. 153). .

  Next, the details of the slide operation process (S5310) executed in the execution command process (see FIG. 150) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the slide operation process. In the slide operation process (S5310), in the execution command process (see FIG. 150) described above, the execution command corresponding to the slide operation is received, that is, the operation for one step corresponding to the slide operation of the column member 720 is completed. This process is executed when

  In the slide motion process (S5310), first, it is determined whether or not the additional motion flag 223q for the slide motion is on (S5901). If it is determined in the process of S5901 that the additional operation flag 223q for the slide operation is ON (S5901: Yes), the return path operation of the column member 720 is completed, that is, the movement to the origin position is completed. Regardless, the origin sensor (slide origin detection sensor 717) determines that the column member 720 is not at the origin position, and an additional operation of 10 steps is executed. In this case, the above-described additional operation process (FIG. 153) is executed on the sliding operation object (the strut member 720) (S5902), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5901 that the additional operation flag 223q for the slide operation is OFF (S5901: No), then the number of steps set by the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation (slide operation table 222c1). It is determined whether or not the reference has been reached (S5903).

  If it is determined in step S5903 that the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation has not reached the set number of steps (see the slide operation table 222c1) (S5903: No), the slide operation is continued. This process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5903 that the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation has reached the set number of steps (S5903: Yes), the column member 720 is moved to the origin position or the overhang position. It is. In this case, in order to determine whether or not the column member 720 is moved to the origin position or the overhang position by the corresponding sensor (the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718), It is determined whether or not the output is H (5 V) (S5904).

  In the process of S5904, when it is determined that the output of the corresponding sensor is L (0 V), that is, the column member 720 is not moved to the origin position or the overhang position (S5904), the above-described abnormality detection process (Refer to FIG. 155) is executed for the sliding action object (the column member 720) (S5905), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5904, when it is determined that the output of the corresponding sensor is H (5 V), that is, the column member 720 is moved to the origin position or the overhang position (S5904: Yes), Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the slide motion is 01H (forward motion) (S5906).

  In the process of S5906, when it is determined that the value of the motion pointer 223n is “02H” (return trip operation) (S5906: No), the timing of ending the slide motion of the column member 720 provided in the slide motion unit 700 Therefore, this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5906, when it is determined that the value of the motion pointer 223n is 01H (forward path operation) (S5906: Yes), the process proceeds to S5907 in order to move the column member 720 in the backward path.

  In the process of S5907, it is determined whether or not the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed (S5907). In the process of S5907, it is determined whether or not the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed based on whether or not the swing standby flag 223u is on. Specifically, when the swing standby flag 223u is on, it is determined that the tilting (swing) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed, and when the swing standby flag 223u is off, It is determined that the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 is incomplete.

  In the process of S5907, when it is determined that the swing standby flag 223u is off, that is, the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 is incomplete (S5908: No), the sliding operation is completed. Is set to ON (S5908), and the process is terminated. The slide standby flag 223t set to ON by the process of S5908 is referred to when determining whether or not the slide operation is completed in the tilt direction setting process (see FIG. 154) (see S5703 of FIG. 154). .

  On the other hand, in the process of S5907, when it is determined that the swing standby flag 223u is on, that is, the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 is completed (S5908: Yes), the tilting operation unit 600 In order to perform the return path operation, the process proceeds to S5909.

  In the process of S5909, the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the slide motion is set to 02H (return motion), and the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the tilting (swinging) motion is set to “03H” (swing start motion to the right). The setting is made (S5909). Then, the operation content corresponding to the value of the updated operation pointer 223n is read and set from the slide operation table 222c1 and the tilt operation table 222c2, respectively (S5910). Thereafter, the swing standby flag 223u is set to OFF (S5911), and this process ends.

  As described above, in this control example, when the initial operation based on power-on is executed, the actual number of operation steps of the swing operation of the effect member 620 and the slide operation of the support member 720 is analyzed, and the design value is calculated. It is configured so that the difference can be determined. Then, by correcting the operation speed of the slide operation according to the difference from the design value, it is possible to match the timing at which the tilting operation of the effect member 620 and the slide operation of the column member 720 are finished. That is, it is possible to finish the predetermined operation content (three swinging motions) of the effect member 620 until the sliding motion is finished. Therefore, only the swing motion continues to be executed even when the slide motion ends, or the slide motion does not end even when the swing motion ends, and the slide motion is continued with the effect member 620 stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of variation in operation such as trapping. Therefore, in the case where the swinging motion of the effect member 620 and the sliding motion of the support column member 720 operate in combination, the operation quality can be improved.

  In this control example, the swingable direction in the swing motion is defined according to the number of steps of the slide motion. Then, when the origin position of the swing motion is reached during the execution of the swing motion of the effect member 620, the number of steps of the current slide motion is determined, and the reverse swing motion through the origin is performed. It is configured to determine if it can be executed. As a result, even when the correspondence between the number of operation steps of the sliding motion and the number of motion steps of the swing motion deviates from the correspondence shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the outer wall portion 212 and the like) and the effect member 620 interfere (collision).

  In this control example, the actual operation step number of the slide operation and the actual operation step number of the swing operation are analyzed in the initial operation, and the correction value is calculated. The calculation timing is not limited to this. For example, even when it is determined that the player is not playing a game (during demonstration production), the actual number of motion steps of the slide motion and the swing motion is analyzed and the correction value is calculated. Also good. As a result, even if the number of operation steps of the slide operation or the swing operation changes during the game, the correction value can be calculated in accordance with the changed operation in the demonstration production. In the production operation combined with the operation, the operation quality can be further improved. Further, for example, the operation scenario of the slide operation may be corrected during execution of the effect that is executed in combination with the slide operation and the swing operation. More specifically, for example, when the swing motion and the slide motion are executed in combination, the number of steps required for the first cycle of the swing motion is counted (or the motion time is counted). And the number of remaining operation steps (or operation time) required for performing the swing operation for a total of three periods (three times) may be calculated. Then, based on the remaining number of steps for performing the swing motion of three cycles (three times) (that is, for executing the remaining two cycles of swing motion) and the remaining number of motion steps of the slide motion Alternatively, the operation speed of the slide operation may be corrected. More specifically, for example, when the number of operation steps of the slide operation is 70 steps, when the operation of one cycle of the slide operation is completed, the swing operation remains for 80 steps (two cycles). become. In this case, a value (80 steps / 70 steps) corrected by multiplying the operation speed of the subsequent slide operation by the ratio of the number of remaining operation steps of the slide operation and the number of remaining operation steps of the swing operation. X100pps) may be set as a new operation speed. Further, in the initial operation, the actual operation step number required for the swing operation and the actual operation step number required for the slide operation are discriminated in advance, and the correction value is calculated in consideration of the discrimination result. May be. Specifically, this processing is performed so as to determine whether or not the swing counter 223v is 1 (whether one cycle of the swing operation has ended) in the tilt direction setting processing (see FIG. 154). In this configuration, when it is determined that one cycle is completed, a process for determining the number of remaining operation steps of the slide operation and the swing operation may be executed. Then, the operation speed of the slide operation may be corrected according to the calculated number of remaining operation steps. As a result, the slide operation can be corrected every time an effect is performed in which the slide operation and the swing operation are executed in combination, so that the slide operation can be more reliably reached before reaching the extended position. The swinging motion can be performed a specified number of times (three times). Further, in the above-described case, the slide operation table 222c1 may be eliminated. Then, based on the number of operation steps (or operation time) of the effect member 620 at the end of one cycle of the swing motion, the operation content of the column member 720 is calculated so as to match the remaining operation of the effect member 620. You may comprise as follows.

  In this control example, the operation speed of the slide operation is corrected based on the correction value. However, the operation speed of the slide operation and the operation speed of the swing operation may be corrected. good. Specifically, for example, the ratio of the actual number of operation steps of the slide operation to the design value is multiplied by the operation speed as the correction value of the slide operation, and the overhang position is reached when the operation as designed is executed. You may make time correspond with the time which reaches | attains an overhanging position by actual operation | movement. Specifically, for example, when the number of operation steps is 10% higher than the design value, the operation speed is increased by 10% to absorb (cancel) the increase in the number of steps with the operation speed, and the operation time as designed. You may comprise so that it may reach to an overhanging position. Similarly, a correction value may be calculated from the actual number of motion steps of the swing motion, and the time until the swing motion is reciprocated three times may be matched with the motion at the design value. Thereby, operation | movement of an accessory can be complete | finished in the same operation time every time, and the same number of swinging operations can be performed reliably.

  In this control example, when correcting the operation speed of the slide operation, the correction value is calculated based on the ratio between the number of design operation steps and the actual number of operation steps, but instead of calculating the correction value. Thus, a plurality of operation scenarios may be prepared in accordance with the deviation width between the design operation step number and the actual operation step number. The operation scenario corresponding to the deviation width may be selected by determining the deviation width between the design operation step number and the actual operation step number. Thus, when the slide operation is executed, it is not necessary to recalculate the operation speed from the correction value every time, and the operation scenario corresponding to the deviation width may be read and set. The load can be reduced.

  In this control example, the correction value for correcting the operation content of the slide operation is calculated. However, a selectable correction value may be defined in advance in the ROM 222 or the like. Then, a correction value corresponding to a deviation width between the designed number of operation steps and the actual number of operation steps may be selected and used as a correction value when the slide operation is set. Thereby, instead of the process of calculating the correction value, the correction value can be selected by a relatively light process of selecting the correction value corresponding to the deviation width, so the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reduced. be able to.

  In this control example, the correction value is calculated based on the ratio between the actual number of steps required for the slide operation and the swing operation and the design step number (Typ value). However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, the time required for the slide operation and the swing operation may be measured, and the correction value may be calculated based on the ratio to the design operation time. For example, while the design operation time of the sliding operation from the origin position to the overhang position by the support member 720 is 1.2 seconds (120 steps / 100 pps), it is 1 to actually reach the overhang position. When .5 seconds are required (when the required time is 1.25 times), 1.25 may be stored in the correction value storage area 223p as the correction value for the slide operation.

  In this control example, the swingable direction defined in the swing area table 222d is determined every time the origin position of the swing motion is reached in accordance with the number of steps of the sliding motion of the support column member 720. Although the configuration is such that the swing direction is determined, the configuration is not limited to this configuration. For example, for each step of the swing motion, the position coordinates of the effect member 620 taking into account the slide position are calculated, and it is determined whether or not the effect member 620 fits in the region between the origin position and the overhang position. You may comprise. More specifically, for example, when the effect member 620 performs a swinging motion in the right direction when viewed from the front, the horizontal coordinate (coordinate of the slide operation direction) of the end point of the upper right end of the effect member 620 disposed on the rightmost side. May be calculated for each step. When the calculated horizontal coordinate matches the horizontal coordinate of the right end (10 cm from the origin position to the right) of the effect member 620 when both the effect member 620 and the column member 720 are at the origin position, the right direction The head swinging direction may be closely watched, and the head swinging direction may be reversed in the direction of the origin (the left direction of the front view). Similarly, when the effect member 620 performs the swinging motion in the left direction when viewed from the front, the horizontal coordinates (coordinates of the slide operation direction) of the left end point of the upper surface of the effect member 620 disposed on the leftmost side are one step. You may comprise so that it may calculate for every. When the production member 620 matches the horizontal coordinate of the left end of the production member 620 (10 cm to the left from the overhang position) when the production member 620 is at the origin position and the column member 720 is in the overhang position, the head swings leftward. You may comprise so that a head swing direction may be reversed to an origin direction (front view right direction), paying attention to operation | movement.

  Hereinafter, the calculation method of a horizontal coordinate is demonstrated more concretely. In this modification, the width of the effect member 620 is 20 cm, the operation radius of the swing motion is 15 cm, and the rotation angle of the effect member 620 by swinging the motion in one step of the effect member 620 is 6 degrees ( That is, 60 degrees in 10 steps), and the horizontal distance from the origin position to the overhang position is 60 cm (that is, 1 step 0.5 cm). In this case, for example, when the 5-step effect member 620 is operated in the right direction, the effect member 620 is rotated 30 degrees (6 degrees × 5 steps). Thereby, the midpoint of the top surface of the effect member 620 is changed by 7.5 cm (15 steps as horizontal coordinates) in the right direction in the front view (15 cm × sin 30 °). The horizontal coordinate of the right end point on the top surface of the effect member 620 is about 8.7 cm (18 steps as horizontal coordinates) on the right side of the front view from the center of the top surface (10 cm × cos 30 °). That is, the right side of the rendering member 620 is the right side of 33 steps as the horizontal coordinate. Therefore, taking into account that the width of the right half of the effect member 620 at the origin position (inverted state) is 20 steps (10 cm), to the right when the number of operation steps of the slide operation is 13 steps or less from the origin position. It is only necessary to cancel the swinging motion and reverse the swinging direction to the left.

  In this way, the number of motion steps of the sliding motion and the number of motion steps of the swing motion are converted into horizontal coordinates, and the swing direction is compared with the left and right horizontal coordinate thresholds (limit coordinates that do not interfere with the outer wall 212). Thus, even when the swinging motion and the sliding motion are deviated from the designed motion, the swinging motion can be operated in a marginal range in which interference can be prevented (suppressed). Therefore, since the swinging motion with a more dynamic feeling can be realized, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the present control example, the effect member 620 is provided above the support member 720, and the correction method of the action scenario of the accessory in which the swinging operation and the sliding operation are performed integrally has been described. However, the present invention can be applied. The accessory is not limited to this configuration. It can be applied as long as it is a plurality of actors that operate in conjunction with each other. For example, the same members as the effect members 620 are provided on the right side and the left side of the game board 13, respectively, and these do not slide. You may comprise so that a head swing operation | movement may be performed synchronizing with each other.

  In this control example, the swingable direction is defined, and control is performed so that other components such as the production member 620 and the outer wall portion 212 do not collide (interference), but the swing motion is changed during the operation. The condition to do is not limited to this. For example, it may be determined whether or not the timing at which the slide member moves to the overhang position and the timing at which the effect member 620 reaches the origin position from the right side when viewed from the front are shifted. Then, when the timing is likely to deviate, the operation content (setting value) of the swing motion is corrected, the timing when the slide member reaches the overhanging position, and the effect member 620 reaches the origin position from the right side when viewed from the front. The timing to perform may coincide. More specifically, for example, the number of remaining steps until the end of the swing motion is determined at a predetermined position between the origin position of the slide operation and the overhang position (for example, 10 steps before the overhang position). To do. And you may comprise so that it may correct | amend to the operation speed which a swing operation | movement completes with the number of remaining steps. For example, if it is determined that there are only 5 steps left until the origin position of the swing motion with the remaining 10 slide operations, the motion speed of the swing motion is set to half (100 pps → 50 pps). Alternatively, correction may be made so that the swinging motion is performed for exactly 5 steps while the sliding motion is performed for 10 steps. Further, when the remaining number of steps of the swing operation is small with respect to the slide operation, a weight may be inserted instead of changing the operation speed. The weight may be put only once or may be put in a plurality of times. On the other hand, if it is determined that 20 steps of swinging motion to the origin position of the swing motion remain with the remaining 10 steps of slide motion, the motion speed of the swing motion is doubled (100 pps → By setting to 200 pps), the swinging motion may be corrected to be executed just 20 steps while the sliding motion is executed 10 steps. Further, instead of determining the timing for correcting the operation content of the swing motion based on the number of operation steps of the slide operation, it may be determined whether or not to correct the swing motion by determining the slide position with a sensor or the like. . Thus, by matching the timing at which the slide operation ends with the timing at which the swing operation ends, it is possible to improve the visual quality when the effect member 620 and the column member 720 operate in combination. it can. As another example of changing the swing motion during the operation, the slide motion position (number of remaining motion steps) and the number of swing motions are determined during the slide motion, and the remaining motion is determined. It may be determined whether or not the predetermined number of swings (three times) can be completed by the number of steps. If it is determined that the predetermined number of swings is not reached, the operation speed of the swing operation may be varied to correct the operation to achieve the predetermined number of swings. Note that the process for determining the number of remaining operation steps and the number of swings, and the process for correcting the motion speed of the swing motion are performed by setting the additional motion flag 223q in the process of S5901 in the slide motion processing (see FIG. 156). It may be executed after it is determined to be off (S5901: No).

  In this control example, in the additional operation processing (see FIG. 153), if the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H even if an additional one-step operation is performed in the sensor direction, an error command is set and an error is generated. Although it has been configured so as to notify, the method of notifying an error is not limited to this. For example, while displaying an image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality on the third symbol display device 81, the accessory that has detected the abnormality is operated in an operation mode dedicated for a certain period (for example, for 10 seconds) (for abnormality detection). It may be configured to stop the operation of the accessory that has not been detected other abnormalities. By comprising in this way, it can be discriminate | determined easily from the appearance which abnormalities generate | occur | produced to which role. That is, when an error is notified, a hall clerk or the like can easily determine that some abnormality has occurred in the accessory that continues to operate.

  In the present control example, it is assumed that the actors (the production member 620 and the column member 720) operate in combination, but instead of this, or in addition to this, the column member 720 and other configurations May be controlled in conjunction with each other. For example, the strut member 720 may be configured to switch the lighting pattern of the electrical decoration units 29 to 33 in conjunction with the slide operation. In this case, a lighting pattern may be set in accordance with the sliding operation of the column member 720. Moreover, you may comprise so that a lighting aspect may be switched whenever the support | pillar member 720 returns to an origin position. For example, every time the origin position and the overhang position are reciprocated once by a slide operation, the lighting colors of the electric decoration units 29 to 33 may be switched in the order of red → green → blue → red. By configuring in this way, the lighting color set at the time of the previous slide operation is simply stored and switched in accordance with the start of the slide operation, thus simplifying the lighting control of the lighting units 29 to 33 can do. Further, as compared with the case where the lighting pattern is switched in accordance with the progress of the slide operation, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the progress of the slide operation and the switching timing of the lighting pattern. Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance quality during the sliding operation. In addition, since it is sufficient to switch the lighting color in response to the return to the origin position, the sliding motor is changed by changing the driving motor for sliding the support member 720 or changing the mechanism such as the gear ratio. Even if the round-trip time is changed, the lighting control data before the change can be used as it is. That is, the step of changing the lighting pattern according to the changed configuration can be omitted, so that the work of the designer can be reduced.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 173. In the first control example described above, when displaying images on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690 during a normal game, the capacity of the character ROM 234 is increased by using various power-on images. The technology to reduce was explained.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, a control method that can further increase the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect that is one of the entertainment effects executed in the sub display device 690 will be described. Although details will be described later, the timing effect is an effect that suggests the timing of pressing (operating) the frame button 229 provided on the front frame 14 by the image displayed on the sub display device 690. This is a type of entertainment effect that is executed while the special symbol variation display is being executed. In this timing effect, points are added every time the timing suggested in the sub display device 690 matches the timing at which the player actually operates the frame button 229, and is acquired until the timing effect ends. If the score is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value (norm), the effect is to give a privilege to the player.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that a frame button 229 is provided instead of the frame button 22, and the sound lamp control device 113 is different. The configuration of the provided ROM 222 and RAM 223 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. is there. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 157, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, a frame button 229 is provided on the left side in front of the lending operation unit 40, and the frame button 22 is deleted. The frame button 229 is composed of four types of buttons: an upper button UB, a right button RB, a left button LB, and a lower button DB. These four types of buttons are used for timing effects. That is, the timing effect is configured to indicate the pressing (operation) timing of the frame button 229 and the type of button to be pressed (operating) (see FIGS. 163 and 164). Then, when both the timing suggested by the effect and the type of button match, the effect is such that points are added.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 163 to 165, the display mode of the timing effect will be described. First, FIG. 163 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the sub display device 690 when the timing effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 163, when the timing effect is executed, a plurality of display areas (display areas 901, 902, 903, 904a, 904b, 904c, 904d, 905) are displayed on the sub display device 690.

  Display areas 904a, 904b, 904c, 904d, and 905 displayed in the lower half of the display area of the sub display device 690 indicate to the player the timing of pressing (operating) the frame button 229 and the button type to be operated. This is a display area in which display is performed. As shown in FIG. 163, the display area 905 is composed of a vertically long rectangular-shaped pressing suggestion area 911a and four horizontally long rectangular scroll display areas 911b to 911e. The scroll display areas 911b to 911e are displayed vertically in this order.

  Each of the scroll display areas 911b to 911e is configured such that various images can be scroll-displayed in the left direction in the front view (the direction of the pressing suggestion area 911a). As various types of images to be scroll-displayed, as shown in FIG. 163, for example, scroll bars 912a to 912e, a continuous hitting bar 913a, and the like are provided. Points are added by pressing the corresponding type of button at the timing when the various scrolled images are scrolled to a position where the various images are overlapped with the pressing suggestion region 911a. The scroll bar is configured such that the corresponding point (10 points or 50 points) is added when the corresponding button type is pressed once at the timing when the scroll bar overlaps with the pressing suggestion area 911a. On the other hand, the continuous hitting bar is configured such that the corresponding point (50 points) is added when the corresponding button is pressed 10 times while it overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a.

  A balloon-type display area 901 pointing to the press suggestion area 911a is displayed above the press suggestion area 911a. In this display area 901, the characters “PUSH button at the timing when the bars overlap and aim for 1000 points!” Are displayed. Depending on the display contents of this display area 901, if the various buttons scroll-displayed in the scroll display areas 911b to 911e are scrolled to the position of the press suggestion area 911a, the point is added if the frame button 229 is pressed. The player can be easily understood.

  In addition, a substantially rectangular display area 902 is displayed on the upper right of the sub display device 690. This display area 902 is acquired when the type of image that can be scroll-displayed in each of the scroll display areas 911b to 911e, and when the corresponding type of button is pressed (operated) at the timing when the image overlaps the press suggestion area 911a. Correspondence with possible points is displayed. Specifically, the white scroll bar is displayed as 50 points, the hatched scroll bar is displayed as 10 points, and the scroll bar displaying the characters “continuous hit!” Is displayed. 50 points are displayed. By clearly indicating the correspondence between images and points in the display area 902, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having doubts regarding the increase or decrease in points, so that the player can perform timing performance with peace of mind. The game inside can be performed.

  A horizontally long display area 903 is displayed below the display area 902. In this display area 903, the total points acquired in the current timing effect and the norm are displayed. In the example of FIG. 163 (a), while the quota is 1000 points, 100 points have been acquired so far, so the display area 902 has the characters “point: 0100/1000”. Is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the current point with respect to the quota. Therefore, a game can be performed aiming at a quota, so that the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  In this control example, when the quota is achieved in the timing effect, the current gaming state is notified as a privilege. In this control example, as in the first control example, 2R probability variation jackpot is provided as the jackpot type. Also, as a kind of losing, the same opening operation as the 2R probability variation jackpot is provided, and it is not possible to identify whether the 2R probability variation jackpot is won or not based on the direction and the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a It is configured as follows. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize the gaming state after the 2R opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is executed. Therefore, in this control example, if the quota is achieved at the end of the timing production, the current gaming state (whether it is a special symbol probable state or a low-probability state) is reported as a timing production privilege. It is configured as follows. Thereby, a player who wants to know the current gaming state can be actively involved in the timing performance. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In addition, whether or not a privilege is given by skill of the player's pressing (operation) timing by making the privilege when the timing presentation is successful have no effect on the game result (notification of the current gaming state) Can decide. On the other hand, if a result (for example, jackpot) that has already been determined at the start of the change (before the timing effect is started) is set as a privilege, the timing effect is started. Before, the result of the timing effect (whether or not the mode for achieving the quota can be displayed) is determined. If there is a timing effect in which the quota cannot be achieved, the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect may be reduced. On the other hand, in this control example, the privilege given when the quota is achieved in the timing effect is set to “notification of gaming state” that does not affect the game result. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant a privilege purely according to the skill of pressing the frame button 229. That is, when a privilege is granted, it is possible to make the player feel more strongly that the player has acquired the privilege by himself. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  On the left side of the display area 905, circular display areas 904a to 904d are displayed vertically. The display areas 904a to 904d are displayed so that their vertical positions are substantially the same as the scroll display areas 911b to 911e, respectively. In addition, characters “upper”, “right”, “left”, and “lower” are displayed inside these display areas 904a to 904d, respectively. With these characters, the player can easily recognize the button type corresponding to the scroll display areas 911b to 911e whose vertical positions are substantially the same as the display areas 904a to 904d. That is, it is recognized that the scroll display area 911b whose vertical position is substantially the same as the display area 904a on which the characters “up” are displayed is a display area for indicating the timing of pressing (operating) the upper button UB. Can do. Similarly, the scroll display area 911c indicates the pressing (operation) timing of the right button RB, the scroll display area 911d indicates the pressing (operation) timing of the left button LB, and the scroll display area 911e indicates the down button DB. It is possible to easily recognize that the timing of pressing (operation) is suggested.

  By executing the timing effect, the frame button 229 can be operated with the aim of achieving the quota, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 163 (b) and FIG. 164 (a), a display mode when the operation of the frame button 229 is detected in the timing effect will be described. First, FIG. 163 (a) shows a display mode when the frame button 229 can be pressed (a point can be acquired) at the timing when the image scrolled in the timing effect overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a. ing.

  FIG. 163 (b) shows the display contents when the player presses the upper button UB at the timing when the white scroll bar 912a scroll-displayed in the slide display area 911b overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a. . As shown in FIG. 163 (b), when it is detected that the player has pressed the upper button UB, the display area 904a with the letters “up” (corresponding to the upper button UB) is turned on. This allows the player to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 has normally detected the player's operation (pressing), so that the game during the timing effect can be performed more safely.

  Further, on the left side of the display areas 904a to 904d, a display area 921 is formed to indicate that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 229 in a timely manner. Since the character “GREAT” is displayed in the display area 921, the player can easily recognize that the operation timing of the frame button 229 is correct. Further, below the display area 921, a character 922 indicating a point given as a result of successful pressing is displayed. With this character 922 of “+50”, the player can easily recognize the acquired points. In addition, the display of the display area 903 is updated according to the acquired points (0100/1000 → 0150/1000). With these display contents, the player can recognize that both the timing of pressing the frame button 229 and the button type match (successfully pressed). In addition, the earned (granted) points and the total points to date can be easily confirmed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 164 (a), a description will be given of display contents when the timing of pressing a button deviates from the suggestion display area 911a. FIG. 164 (a) is a diagram showing display contents when the pressing of the upper button UB is detected before the scroll bar 912a reaches the pressing suggestion area 911a. Also in this case, in order to notify that the depression of the upper button UB has been detected normally, the display area 904a with the letters “up” (corresponding to the upper button UB) is turned on.

  Further, on the left side of the display area 904a, a display area 921 is formed to indicate that the player has failed to press (operate) the frame button 229. Since the characters “BAD” are displayed in the display area 921, the player can easily recognize that the timing of pressing (operating) the frame button 229 is incorrect. Further, below the display area 921, a character 924 indicating that a penalty has been imposed due to the failure to press is displayed. The character “924” of “−10” makes it easy to recognize that the point has been subtracted due to a failure in pressing. Therefore, since the frame button 229 can be operated more carefully, the player's willingness to participate in the timing performance can be improved. In addition, the display of the display area 903 is updated in accordance with the subtracted point (0100/1000 → 0090/1000). With these display contents, it is possible to make the player recognize that the press of the frame button 229 has failed. Also, the subtracted points and the total points up to the present can be easily confirmed.

  Next, examples of modes with different difficulty levels will be described. Although details will be described later, in this control example, when the timing effect is executed, the difficulty level of the timing effect to be executed this time can be determined from a plurality of difficulty levels. Further, the determined difficulty level is not fixed, and may be reviewed in the middle of the production depending on the progress of the timing production, the participation situation of the player in the timing production, and the like.

  FIG. 164 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing effect with a high difficulty level. As shown in FIG. 164 (b), in this modified example, when the difficulty level is high, the appearance ratio of scroll bars with few points that can be acquired (scroll bars 915a to 915e to which 10 points are given when the pressing is successful) is high. Become. In other words, the quota cannot be achieved unless the frame button 229 is accurately pressed more times. Further, the scroll speed is increased as the difficulty level increases. Thus, it is difficult to match the timing of pressing the frame button 229. By providing a timing effect with a different degree of difficulty, it is possible to deal with both players who are good at pressing the frame button 229 at the same time, and players who are not good at it. That is, the difficulty level can be varied according to the skill of the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 165, a display mode when notifying the result of the timing effect will be described. FIG. 165 (a) shows a display that is displayed on the sub display device 690 when 1000 points that are the norm is achieved (for example, 1200 points are acquired) in the timing effect executed during the probabilistic state of the special symbol. It is the figure which illustrated the contents. As shown in FIG. 165 (a), when it is determined that the timing effect is completed and the quota is achieved, a result notification area 916 for notifying the result of the timing effect is formed inside the display area 905. Is done. As a result, in the notification area, the text “Normal has been achieved! This display allows the player to recognize that the current gaming state is a special symbol probability changing state. In the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the characters “Current state is low probability ...” are displayed instead of the characters “Current state is probable!”.

  On the other hand, FIG. 165 (b) exemplifies display contents displayed on the sub display device 690 when the timing effect is less than the normal 1000 points (for example, only 600 points can be obtained). FIG. As shown in FIG. 165 (b), even when it is determined that the timing effect has ended and the quota has not been achieved, a result notification area 916 for notifying the result of the timing effect is displayed inside the display area 905. It is formed. As a result, in the notification area, the characters “No quota has not been achieved ...” are displayed. That is, only the fact that the quota could not be achieved by the timing effect is notified, and the current gaming state is not notified (no privilege is given).

  As described above, by achieving the quota in the timing effect, the current game state is notified in the result notification area 916, so that a player who wants to know the current game state is actively involved in the timing effect. Can do.

  In this control example, when the score is achieved, the gaming state notification is set as a privilege, but the privilege in the timing effect is not limited to this. Any privilege that does not depend on the game result determined before execution of the timing effect is determined. For example, by achieving the quota, the display mode of the subsequent display effect (variation pattern effect) is special. You may comprise so that it may change into an aspect. By comprising in this way, in order to see the display effect of a special aspect, it can be made to participate in a timing effect actively.

  In this control example, when the difficulty level is changed, the type and number of scroll bars and the scroll speed are changed. However, the method of changing the difficulty level is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that the point of a norm may become high as difficulty becomes high. Further, for example, the button types to be used may increase as the difficulty level increases.

  In this control example, the point is added by detecting 10 presses while the continuous hitting bar overlaps with the press suggestion area 911a. However, the number of presses is not limited to 10 times. Absent. The number may be set to less than 10 times or may be set to a larger number. Further, the number of times of pressing may be changed according to the degree of difficulty. For example, the number of times of pressing may be increased as the degree of difficulty increases. Thereby, diversity can be given to the change method of a difficulty level.

<Electric Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 158 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 158, in this control example, a frame button 229 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. The frame button 229 is provided with four types of button types: an upper button UB, a right button RB, a left button LB, and a lower button DB. As described above, these four types of buttons are used for timing effects (see FIGS. 163 and 164).

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. In addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example, the ROM 222 in this control example is provided with a timing effect selection table 222d and a pressing period table 222e.

  The timing effect selection table 222d is a data table in which an aspect of a timing effect, which is a type of interest effect executed during the special symbol variation display, is defined. When executing the timing effect, the timing effect selection table 222d is referred to, and the display mode (degree of difficulty) of the sub display device 690 during the timing effect is set. The difficulty level refers to the ease of timing adjustment when the frame button 229 is pressed (operated) in accordance with the timing and button type suggested in the sub display device 690. The higher the difficulty level is, the more severe the timing of pressing (operating) the frame button 229, or the instruction of pressing (operating) more button types in a short period (see FIG. 164 (b)).

  Moreover, the timing effect of this control example is divided into three types of periods (an early period, a middle period, and an end period), and is configured so that a display mode can be set at a separate timing for each period. . More specifically, at the start of the timing effect, the mode of the early period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d, and the early period of the timing effect is started. Then, at the end of the early period, the mode of the middle period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d, and the middle period of the timing effect is started. Furthermore, the end stage period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d at the end of the middle period, and the end stage period of the timing effect is started.

  Details of the timing effect table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 160, in the timing effect table 222d, an effect mode of the timing effect is defined in association with the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ indicating the difficulty level of the timing effect. More specifically, as an aspect of the early period, the difficulty level counter 223γ value “4” is associated with the difficulty level 5 early stage effect, and the difficulty level counter 223γ value “3” is the difficulty level 4 The early stage production is associated. Although illustration is omitted, similarly, the difficulty level counter 223γ value “2” is associated with the difficulty level 3 early stage effect, and the difficulty level counter 223γ value “1” is the difficulty level 2 value. The opening stage effects are associated with each other, and the difficulty level counter 223γ is associated with the difficulty level 1 opening stage effect. In addition, it shows that difficulty is so high that the number of difficulty is large. That is, the difficulty level 5 opening effect is the most difficult mode, and the difficulty level 1 opening effect is the least difficult mode.

  The aspect of the middle period is defined similarly. That is, as an aspect of the middle period, a difficulty level counter 223γ value “4” is associated with a difficulty level 5 medium stage effect, and a difficulty level counter 223γ value “3” is a difficulty level 4 medium stage effect. The difficulty level counter 223γ value “2” is associated with the difficulty level 3 medium stage effect, and the difficulty level counter 223γ value “1” is associated with the difficulty level 2 medium stage effect. The difficulty level 1 middle board effect is associated with the value “0” of the difficulty level counter 223γ.

  Furthermore, the mode of the end period is similarly defined. That is, as an aspect of the middle period, an end stage effect for difficulty level 5 is associated with the value “4” of the difficulty level counter 223γ, and an end stage effect for difficulty level 4 is associated with the value “3” of the difficulty level counter 223γ. The difficulty level counter 223γ value “2” is associated with the difficulty level 3 end stage effect, and the difficulty level counter 223γ value “1” is associated with the difficulty level 2 end game effect. The difficulty level counter 223γ is associated with the difficulty level 1 end stage effect for the value “0”.

  Although details will be described later, the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is updated in a timely manner according to the game situation of the player. For example, when setting the aspect of the middle period, if it is determined that the player has acquired relatively few points (for example, less than 200) in the early period, the value of the difficulty counter is decremented by 1, and subtracted. An effect mode of difficulty corresponding to the later value is set. As a result, the mode of the mid-period can be set to a mode that is less difficult than the initial period, so that the player cannot acquire points for a long time, so participation in the production in the middle of the timing production It is possible to prevent (suppress) giving up. On the contrary, when it is determined that the player has acquired a relatively large number of points in the early period, 1 is added to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ. Thereby, when a player who is good at timing effects plays a game, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from continuing in a mode having a low difficulty level and extending the game.

  In this way, since it is possible to select effects with different difficulty levels from the timing effect selection table 222d according to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, the timing effect modes can be diversified. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved. Further, by providing different difficulty levels, it is possible to set a difficulty level suitable for the skill level of each player, so that the player's willingness to participate in timing effects can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 159 (a), the description will be continued. The pressing period table 222e indicates whether or not it is determined that when the frame button 229 is pressed, it is determined that the image such as the scroll bar has been pressed (successfully pressed) at the timing 911 that overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a. Is a data table defined in association with the elapsed time since the start of. When any button (up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, down button DB) constituting the frame button 229 is pressed during execution of the timing effect, the pressing period table 222e is referred to and this time It is discriminated whether the button is pressed successfully or unsuccessfully. If it is successful, an effect in which points are added is executed (see FIG. 163 (b)), and if it is unsuccessful, an effect in which points are subtracted (a penalty is imposed) is executed (FIG. 164 (a)). )reference). Details of the pressing period table 222e will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. FIG.

  FIG. 161 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the pressing period table 222e. As shown in FIG. 161, a plurality of data tables corresponding to the set period and the difficulty level are defined as the pressing period table 222e. For example, an opening difficulty level 1 table 222e1 is provided as a table corresponding to the opening degree effect for difficulty level 1 set in the opening period. When the difficulty level 1 opening effect is set, the opening level difficulty level 1 table 222e1 is set as the corresponding pressing period table. Similarly, the same applies to the initial stage effect for the difficulty level 2 to the initial stage effect for the difficulty level 5, and a table 222e2 for the initial difficulty level 2 and a table 222e5 for the initial difficulty level 5 are defined as the corresponding pressing period tables. ing.

  Further, the middle period is the same as the early period. Specifically, as the pressing period table corresponding to the difficulty level 1 middle stage production to the difficulty level 5 middle stage production, the middle stage difficulty 1 table 2226 to the middle stage difficulty level. 5 table 222e10 is provided.

  On the other hand, the end period has a different structure from the early period and the middle period. In other words, a plurality of pressing period tables are associated with one rendering mode for the last stage period. Here, the plurality of pressing period tables mean tables having different widths (period lengths) of ranges detected as successful. Even if the effect for the end stage period in the same mode is displayed, the difficulty level can be made different by changing the period in which the success is detected. That is, since the difficulty can be varied without increasing the display form of the timing effect, the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be reduced.

  Note that a table with a wide range in which success is detected is selected when it is determined that the player has acquired a small number of points (for example, less than 600 points) before reaching the final stage. If there are too few points earned by the end of the game, there is a risk that the player will give up on achieving the quota with the timing effect. Therefore, in this control example, when setting the end stage period, it is determined whether or not the point is less than 600 points, and if it is less than 600 points, a pressing period table with a wide range for detecting success is selected. It is configured. Thereby, since the player can acquire points more easily by widening the range to detect success, it is possible to participate in the timing performance without giving up until the end.

  On the other hand, a table with a narrow range in which success is detected is selected when it is determined that the player has acquired many points (for example, 900 points or more) before reaching the final stage. If there are too many points acquired until the end of the period, the player may feel a margin and the operation of the frame button 229 during the end of the period may be complicated. Therefore, in this control example, by selecting a table with a narrow range where success is detected, the operation of the frame button 229 can be executed while keeping a sense of tension until the end of the timing effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  When an effect in the final period corresponding to difficulty level 1 to difficulty level 3 is selected, a pressing period table in which the range where success is detected is a normal area and a pressing range where the range where detection is successful is relatively wide A period table may be selected. For example, when the end stage effect for difficulty level 1 is selected as the effect mode for the end stage period, either the end stage difficulty level 1 normal range table 222e13 or the end stage difficulty level 1 wide range table 222e18 is selected as the pressing period table. Selected.

  On the other hand, when the production of the end stage period corresponding to the difficulty level 4 and the difficulty level 5 is selected, the range where the success is detected is a normal-sized press period table and the range where the success is detected. In addition to a relatively wide pressing period table, there is a possibility that a pressing period table having a relatively narrow range where success is detected is selected. For example, when the end stage production for difficulty level 5 is selected as the production mode of the end stage period, the end stage difficulty level 5 narrow range table 222e13, the end stage difficulty level 5 normal range table 222e17, and the end stage difficulty level are used as the pressing period table. There is a possibility that the 5 wide range table 222e22 is selected.

  The timing effect is configured so that the pressing period table with a narrow range detected as a success is selected only when an effect in the end stage period corresponding to the difficulty level 4 or the difficulty level 5 is selected. This is because there is a high possibility that a good player is playing a game. When a player who is good at timing effects is playing a game, there is a risk that the timing effects in the normal detection range may be too easy. Therefore, in this case, in addition to displaying in a mode with a high degree of difficulty, the range for detecting success is narrowed so that even players who are good at timing effects can enjoy. Thereby, the willingness to participate with respect to a player's timing production can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the specific prescribed contents of each table constituting the pressing period table 222e will be described by taking the early difficulty level 3 table 222e3 as an example. In accordance with the setting of the opening difficulty level 3 table 222e3, the difficulty level 3 opening effect is set as an effect mode. The display mode of the difficulty level 3 opening effect is shown in FIG. The display mode shown in FIG. Therefore, the description of the opening difficulty level 3 table 222e will be made with reference to FIG. 163 as appropriate.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the early difficulty level 3 table 222e3. 162, in the early difficulty level 3 table 222e3, the type of pressing period (corresponding to the elapsed time since the start of the timing effect (the value of the timing effect pointer 223δ updated periodically) ( Whether it is a success period, a failure period, or a continuous hit period). The types of pressing periods are defined as a pressing period for the upper button UB, a pressing period for the right button RB, a pressing period for the left button LB, and a pressing period for the lower button DB, respectively.

  Specifically, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for all button types in the range of elapsed time from the start of the timing effect to 0 milliseconds to 1499 milliseconds (1.499 seconds). . If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined to have failed. Further, a success period is associated with the elapsed time in the range of 1500 milliseconds to 1699 milliseconds as a pressing period for the upper button UB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for other button types. Therefore, during this period, when the upper button UB is operated, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when other buttons are operated, it is determined to be failed. Note that the display content of the sub display device 690 during this period includes only the scroll bar scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911b (the scroll bar 912a in FIG. 163) overlaps the press-indication area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911b. The state where the scroll bar that is scroll-displayed in ˜911e does not reach the press suggestion area 911a is displayed.

  Further, in the range of elapsed time from 1700 milliseconds to 2199 seconds, failure periods are associated as pressing periods for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined to have failed. A success period is associated with the elapsed time in the range of 2200 milliseconds to 2399 milliseconds as a pressing period for the down button DB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for other button types. Therefore, during this period, when the lower button DB is pressed, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when another button is pressed, it is determined to be failed. Note that the display contents of the sub display device 690 during this period include only the scroll bar scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911e (the scroll bar 912e in FIG. 163) overlaps with the press-indicating area 911a, and other scroll display areas 911a. The state in which the scroll bar that is scroll-displayed in ˜911d does not reach the press suggestion area 911a is displayed.

  In the range of elapsed time from 2400 milliseconds to 2999 seconds, failure periods are associated as pressing periods for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined to have failed. A success period is associated with the elapsed time of 3000 milliseconds to 3199 milliseconds as a pressing period for the right button RB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the right button RB is pressed, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when another button is pressed, it is determined to be unsuccessful. Note that the display content of the sub display device 690 during this period is such that only the scroll bar scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911c (the scroll bar 912b in FIG. 163) overlaps the press-indication area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911b. , 911d and 911e are displayed in a state where the scroll bar that has been scroll-displayed does not reach the press-indicating area 911a.

  In the range of elapsed time from 3200 milliseconds to 3799 seconds, failure periods are associated as pressing periods for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined to have failed. In the range of elapsed time from 3800 milliseconds to 4999 milliseconds, a continuous hitting period is associated as a pressing period for the upper button UB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the upper button UB is pressed 10 times, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when other buttons are operated, it is determined to be unsuccessful. Note that the display content of the sub display device 690 during this period includes only the continuous hitting bar (the continuous hitting bar 913a in FIG. 163) scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911b, and the other scroll display area 911c. The state where the scroll bar that is scroll-displayed in ˜911e does not reach the press suggestion area 911a is displayed.

  In the range of the elapsed time from 5000 milliseconds to 5199 milliseconds, a continuous hitting period is associated as a pressing period for the upper button UB, and a successful period is associated as a pressing period for the right button RB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for other button types. Therefore, during this period, when the upper button UB is pressed down a total of 10 times or when the right button RB is pressed down, it is determined as successful and points are added, and when other buttons are operated, it is determined as failed. The Note that the display content of the sub display device 690 during this period includes a continuous hitting bar (the continuous hitting bar 913a in FIG. 163) scroll-displayed in the scroll display area 911b and a scroll bar (see FIG. The scroll bar 912c) in 163 overlaps with the press suggestion area 911a, and the scroll bar scroll-displayed in the other scroll display areas 911d and 911e is not in the press suggestion area 911a.

  Although not shown in the figure, a pressing period corresponding to the button type is defined for the subsequent elapsed time. By using this early difficulty level 3 table 222e3, the pressing period can be updated in synchronization with the display form of the timing effect. Since the other tables defined in the pressing period table 222e have the same configuration, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (b). In the RAM 223 in this control example, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example, a timing effect permission flag 223α, a latent probability variation flag 223β, a difficulty counter 223γ, a timing effect pointer 223δ, and a repeated hit counter 223ε, A continuous hitting flag 223ζ and a score counter 223η are provided.

  The timing effect permission flag 223α is a flag indicating whether or not it is possible to set a timing effect as an entertainment effect when selecting a variation display mode. If this timing effect permission flag 223α is on, it indicates that the timing effect can be set as a variation effect mode, and if it is off, it indicates that the timing effect cannot be set.

  Here, as described above, in this control example, it is difficult to identify from the outside (from the player's perspective) whether the 2R probability variation big hit or the small win has come. In other words, when the specific winning opening 65a performs the 2R opening operation, the game state is not changed because the 2R probability change big hit and the special symbol is changed to the probability change state of the special symbol or only a small hit. I can't identify it. In other words, if the 2R opening operation by the specific winning opening 65a has not been executed once after the big hit A or the big win B is finished, the current gaming state is clear to the player. Therefore, even if the timing effect is executed in this case, there is a possibility that the player does not want to obtain a privilege of notifying the gaming state and does not participate in the timing effect. Therefore, in this control example, after the jackpot A or jackpot B is executed, if the 2R opening operation by the specific winning opening 65a has never been executed, the timing effect is set by setting the timing effect to OFF. It is configured not to be selected (see S1827 in FIG. 173).

  Further, the timing effect permission flag 223α is set to ON when the 2R probability variation big hit or the small hit is made (see S1824 in FIG. 173). Once the timing effect is executed, the timing effect permission flag 223α is reset to OFF (see FIG. 6412). Thereby, the opportunity that a timing effect is performed can be limited to only once for 2R opening operation by one specific prize opening 65a. Therefore, since it is possible to make the timing effect more seriously, the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect can be improved.

  The probability variation state flag 223β is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol has a high probability state. If the probability variation state flag 223β is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in a certain variation state, and if it is off, it indicates that the probability variation state is not established. The probability variation state flag 223β is set to ON when a variation pattern command corresponding to a 16R probability variation jackpot (big hit A) or a 2R probability variation jackpot (big hit C) is received (see S1823 and S1826 in FIG. 173), and the 16R time is shortened. When the variation pattern command corresponding to the big hit (big hit B) is received, it is set to OFF (see S1826 in FIG. 173). When the quota is achieved in the timing performance and the current gaming state is notified, the gaming state is notified with reference to the probability variation state flag 223β.

  The difficulty level counter 223γ is a counter for identifying the difficulty level of the effect set in each period of the timing effect (the early period, the middle period, and the final period). If the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 0, an effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 1 is selected. If the value is 1, an effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 2 is selected. The production mode corresponding to the difficulty level 3 is selected. If the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 3, an effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 4 is selected, and if the value is 4, an effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 5 is selected.

  The difficulty counter 223γ has an initial value set to 0. That is, it is reset to 0 when the power is turned on. Also, in the case of setting the production mode of the middle stage period of the timing production, when it is determined that the player has acquired a relatively large number of points (the difficulty level is too low for the player who is currently playing), 1 is added to the counter value (see S6203 in FIG. 170). Thereby, a difficulty level can be made higher than the production | presentation aspect of an early stage period as a production | presentation aspect selected in a middle stage period. On the other hand, in the case of setting the production mode in the middle period, the counter value is decremented by 1 when it is determined that the number of points acquired by the player is small (the difficulty level is too high for the player who is currently playing). (See S6207 in FIG. 170). Thereby, a difficulty level can be made lower than the production | presentation aspect of an early stage period as the production | presentation aspect selected in a middle stage period. As described above, by using the difficulty level counter 223γ, the difficulty level can be varied according to the skill level of the player, so that it is possible to match the difficulty level more suitable for the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  The timing effect pointer 223δ is a pointer for indicating an elapsed time since the start of the timing effect, and is updated every 1 millisecond. During execution of the timing effect, the timing effect pointer 223δ is referred to, and the type of the pressing period is determined. This timing effect pointer 223δ is periodically updated in the main process, for example.

  The repeated hit counter 223ε is a counter for counting how many times the corresponding button is pressed in the repeated hit period of the timing effect. It is determined whether or not consecutive hits are successful according to the value of the repeated hit counter 223ε. This repeated hit counter 223ε is incremented by 1 every time an operation of the corresponding button is detected in the consecutive hit period (see S6007 in FIG. 168), and is reset to 0 when the predetermined number of consecutive hits is reached in the repeat hit period (see FIG. S6011). It is also reset to 0 at the end of the continuous hit period. The number of consecutive hits can be accurately determined by this repeated hit counter 223ε.

  The consecutive hit success flag 223ζ is a flag indicating whether or not the predetermined number of consecutive hits has been reached in the consecutive hit period, and if it is on, it indicates that the number of consecutive hits has been reached. On the other hand, if it is OFF, it indicates that the number of repeated hits has not been reached or it is not the repeated hit period. The success flag 223ζ is set to ON when it is determined that the predetermined number of consecutive hits has been reached (see S6011 in FIG. 168), and is set to OFF when the continuous hit period ends. While the continuous hit success flag 223ζ is on, control is performed such that even if the button corresponding to the set continuous hit period is continuously pressed more than the specified number of times, it is not determined as a failure. As a result, the player can be struck repeatedly without worrying about the number of repeated strikes.

  The score counter 223η is a counter for counting the points (scores) acquired by the player in one timing effect. At the end of the timing effect, the value of the score counter 223η is compared with the norm of 1000 points to determine whether or not the norm has been achieved. The score counter 223η is updated every time the pressing of the frame button 229 is detected during the timing effect (see S6010, S6014, and S6016 in FIG. 168).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 166, a description will be given of a time change in the display mode when the variation pattern in which the timing effect is set is executed. First, as a premise, the timing effect has a certain probability (for example, 10) when the timing effect permission flag 223α is on and a variation effect (a variation effect in which reach occurs) having a variation time of 30 seconds or more is selected. % Probability).

  As shown in FIG. 166, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variation effect in which the timing effect is set, the reach effect is generated in the third symbol display device 81. Then, at the time when 5 seconds have elapsed from the occurrence of the reach effect (at the time when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation), the effect mode of the early stage period is selected, and the timing effect of the selected effect mode is started on the sub display device 690. Is done.

  When 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the timing effect (when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation), the early period ends, and the effect mode of the middle period is selected, and the intermediate period is started based on the selected content. . Furthermore, when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the mid-period period (when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of variation), the mid-period period is ended, and an effect mode of the end-period period is selected, and the end-period period is started based on the selected content. . Then, when 2 seconds elapse from the start of the end period, the end period is ended, and a notification of the result of the current timing effect (whether or not the quota is achieved) is set. This notification is performed for 1 second.

<Electric Configuration of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Control Example>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 173. First, FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example.

  Among the main processes, the processes of S1501 to S1511 and S1513 to S1520 are the same as the processes of S1501 to S1511 and S1513 to S1520 executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) in the first control example, respectively. Processing is executed. Further, in the main process in the third control example, when the process of S1510 ends, a timing effect process (S1541) for performing various settings during the timing effect is executed, and the process proceeds to S1511. In the process of S1511, the same process as the command determination process (S1511) in the first control example is executed. Next, instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 109) in the first control example, the variable display setting process 2 ( S1542 is executed. When the variable display setting process 2 is completed, the processes after S1513 are executed as in the first control example.

  Details of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1507) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Although the frame button input monitoring / production process itself was also executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) in the first control example, the detailed description thereof has been omitted, and will be described again.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1507), first, it is determined whether or not the timing effect is being performed (S6001). finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing effect is being performed (S6001: Yes), it is then determined whether or not pressing of the operation button (frame button 229) is detected (S6002). If it is determined that the pressing of the operation button (the frame button 229) has not been detected (S6002: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6002 that the pressing of the operation button (the frame button 229) has been detected (S6002: Yes), the pressing period table 222e corresponding to the button type in which the pressing has been detected is read (S6003). Thereafter, the pressing period type is specified based on the read pressing period table 222e and the value of the timing effect pointer 223δ (S6004).

  When the processing of S6004 is quantified, it is next determined whether or not it is a continuous hitting period (S6005). If it is determined that it is a continuous hitting period (S6005: Yes), then whether or not the continuous hitting success flag 223ζ is on is determined. Is discriminated (S6006). If it is determined that the consecutive hit success flag 223ζ is on (S6007: Yes), it means that the frame button has been pressed a predetermined number of times (10 times) during the consecutive hit period, and it is necessary to count the number of consecutive hits. Since there is no data, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6006 that the consecutive hit success flag 223ζ is off (S6006: No), 1 is added to the consecutive hit count counter 223ε (S6007), and whether or not the value after the addition is 10 or more. Is discriminated (S6008). That is, it is determined whether or not the predetermined number of times (10 times) has been achieved in one continuous hit period. In the process of S6008, when it is determined that the value of the repeated hit counter 223ε after the addition is smaller than 10 (S6008: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the updated number of consecutive hits counter 223ε is 10 or more (S6008: Yes), it means that the predetermined number of repeated hits has been achieved, and therefore a successful display command for display is set. As a result (S6009), an effect corresponding to success of successive hits is set, and 50 is added to the score counter 223η as a point (score) corresponding to success of consecutive hits (S6010). Thereafter, the repeated hit counter 223ε is reset, the consecutive hit success flag 223ζ is set to ON (S6011), and this process ends.

  In the process of S6005, when it is determined that it is not a continuous hit period (S6005: No), it is then determined whether or not it is a pressing success period (S6012), and it is not a pressing success period (a pressing failure period). If it is determined (S6012: No), a display failure effect command is set (S6013). With this display failure command, an effect is displayed that informs the player that the pressing timing of the frame button 229 has deviated from the timing suggested in the sub display device 690 (see FIG. 164 (a)). By notifying the pressing failure, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to correct the pressing timing of the frame button 229 and to make the next pressing more carefully. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved. When the processing of S6013 is completed, 10 is subtracted from the score counter 223η as a penalty for pressing failure (S6014), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S6014, if the score counter value is already 0, the points are not subtracted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6012 that the pressing has been successful (S6012: Yes), a successful display command for display is set (S6015) to notify the player that the pressing has been successful (see FIG. 163 (b)). By this notification, the player can recognize the successful timing, so that the frame button 229 can be operated at the same timing next time. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved. Then, a point (score) corresponding to the type of the bar that overlaps with the pressing suggestion area 911a when the pressing is successful is added to the success score counter 223η (S6016), and this processing is terminated.

  Next, details of the timing effect process (S1541) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This timing effect process (S1541) is a process for making various settings during the timing effect as described above.

  In this timing effect process (S1541), first, it is determined whether or not the timing effect is set (S6101). If it is determined that the timing effect is not set (S6101: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing effect is set (S6101: Yes), it is then determined whether 15 seconds have elapsed since the start of fluctuation (S6102), and it is determined that 15 seconds have elapsed. (S6102: Yes) means that it is the start timing of the timing effect, so in order to determine the timing effect mode this time, first, the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is read (S6103).

  When the process of S6103 is completed, an effect mode (degree of difficulty) corresponding to the read counter value is then selected from the timing effect selection table 222d (see FIG. 160) (S6104). For example, if the difficulty level counter 223γ is 4, the introductory effect for difficulty level 5 is selected as the effect mode, and if the difficulty level counter 223γ is 1, the introductory effect for difficulty level 2 is selected. Then, a display early stage mode command for notifying the display mode 114 of the effect mode selected in the process of S6104 is set (S6105). The display control device 114 starts the timing effect of the corresponding difficulty level in the sub display device 690 by receiving the display early stage mode command.

  When the processing of S6105 is completed, a table corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ read in S6103 is read from the pressing period table 222e (S6106), and the read table is stored in the pressing period storage area (S6107). This process ends. This pressing period storage area is provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (not shown). In the process of S6004 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 168), the pressing period table 222e stored in this pressing period storage area is referred to and it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 229 has been successful. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6102 that 15 seconds have not elapsed since the start of change (S6102: No), it is determined whether or not 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of change (S6108). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to shift to the middle stage period of the timing effect. In the process of S6108, when it is determined that 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change (it is a timing to shift to the middle period) (S6108: Yes), the middle stage setting process for setting the aspect of the middle period is executed. (S6109), this process is terminated. Details of the middle setting process (S6109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6108, when it is determined that it is not the timing when 20 seconds have passed since the start of the change (no timing for shifting to the middle period) (S6108: No), then, it is the timing when 25 seconds have passed since the start of the change. It is determined whether or not (S6110). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the transition timing from the middle period to the end period. In the process of S6110, when it is determined that 25 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation (S6110: Yes), an end stage setting process for setting the effect mode of the end stage period is executed (S6111), and this process ends. Details of the final stage setting process (S6111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6110, when it is determined that it is not the timing when 25 seconds have elapsed since the start of change (S6110: No), it is then determined whether it is the timing when 27 seconds have elapsed since the start of change (S6112). . That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to set a notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect. In the process of S6112, when it is determined that it is a timing when 27 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (S6112: Yes), a notification mode setting process for setting a notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect is performed. Execute (S6113), and this process is terminated. Details of the notification mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing when 27 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation (S6112: No), it is then determined whether it is the end timing of the continuous hitting period (S6114). When it is determined that it is not the end timing of the continuous hitting period (S6114: Yes), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the continuous hitting period (S6114: Yes), the continuous hitting success flag 223ζ is set to OFF (S6115), and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the details of the mid-board setting process (S1507) executed in the timing effect process (S1541, see FIG. 169) will be described. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing this mid-board setting process (S1507). In the middle setting process (S6109), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read (S6201), and it is determined whether or not the value of the score counter 223η is larger than 600 (S6202).

  When it is determined that the read value is larger than 600 (S6202: Yes), a relatively large number of points have been acquired in the early period, and there is a possibility that the difficulty level is too easy for the player who is currently playing. . Therefore, in this case, by adding 1 to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ (S6203), control is performed such that an effect having a higher difficulty level than the opening period is set as the effect mode of the middle period. Thereby, since it can change to the production mode (degree of difficulty) matched with the skill of the player in the middle of the timing production, the player's willingness to participate in the timing production can be improved. After the process of S6203 is completed, the process proceeds to S6209.

  If it is determined in the process of S6202 that the value of the score counter 223η is 600 or less (S6202: No), it is then determined whether the value of the read score counter 223η is less than 50 (S6204). When it is determined that the read value is smaller than 50 (S6204: Yes), it indicates that the player has extremely few points in the early period. That is, there is a possibility that the difficulty of the timing effect in the early stage period is too difficult, and the player cannot follow the timing effect or abandon the timing effect itself. In this case, by setting the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ to 0 (S6205), control is performed so that the production mode having the lowest difficulty level is selected as the production mode set after the middle period. As a result, players who were too difficult to match the timing of pressing due to the difficulty of the early period, or received an impression that would be difficult just by looking at the stage of the early period, abandoned the timing stage. It is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the timing production for the player who has been killed. When the process of S6205 ends, the process proceeds to S6209.

  In the process of S6204, when it is determined that the value of the read score counter 223η is 50 or more (S6204: No), it is then determined whether the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 200 (S6206). In the process of S6206, if it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 200 (S6206), the difficulty level is too high for the player, and the game will end at a point that is significantly lower than the norm at this pace. It means that the possibility is high. In this case, in the middle of the timing effect, the player may determine that the quota cannot be achieved and give up participation in the timing effect. In addition, although the timing presentation of this time has been participated until the end, there is a possibility that the acquired points are too low for the quota, and the participation in the timing presentation will be given up next time. Therefore, in order to prevent these situations, 1 is subtracted from the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ in the process of S6207 (S6207). Thereby, since the difficulty level after a middle stage period can be made easy, the willingness to participate with respect to a timing effect can be improved with respect to the player who could not acquire many points in the early stage period. When the process of S6207 ends, the process proceeds to S6209.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6206 that the read score counter 223η is 200 or more (S6206: No), the difficulty counter 223γ is read (S6208), and the process proceeds to S6209.

  In the process of S6209, based on the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, a middle stage effect mode is selected from the effect selection table 222d (S6209), and a display opening mode command for notifying the display control device 114 of the selected mode. Is set (S6210). Then, a data table corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e (S6211), the read table is stored in the pressing period storage area (S6212), and this process ends.

  By performing this mid-game setting process, the production mode after the mid-game period can be changed to a mode of difficulty more matched to the skill of the player according to the points acquired by the player in the early game period. The player's willingness to participate in the timing performance can be improved.

  Next, details of the end stage setting process (S6111) executed in the timing effect process (S1541, see FIG. 169) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This end stage setting process (S6111) is a process for setting the effect mode of the end stage period of the timing effect as described above.

  In the final stage setting process (S6111), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read (S6301), and it is determined whether or not the value is larger than 900 (S6302). That is, it is determined whether or not 900 points or more have been acquired before the end of the middle period. If it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is greater than 900 (S6302: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is greater than 3 (S6303).

  When it is determined that the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 3 or less (S6303: No), a table with a normal success period is read from the pressing period table 222e, and the process proceeds to S6309. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is greater than 3 (S6303: Yes), a table for a narrow range with a narrow success period corresponding to the value of the difficulty counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e ( (S6304) and the process proceeds to S6309.

  As described above, the table having different success period lengths according to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is set to match the difficulty level with the player. That is, if a relatively high difficulty production mode (difficulty level 4 or difficulty level 5) is set even after the middle period, the player is highly likely to have a high skill level. Then, since the process moves to the process of S6303 when a relatively large number of points have been acquired, there is a possibility that the current difficulty level is too easy for the player. Therefore, in order to make the difficulty level more difficult for a player with high skill, the success range is configured to be narrower than the early period and the middle period. Thereby, since a highly difficult timing effect can be provided to a highly skilled player, the player's interest in the timing effect can be improved.

  On the other hand, if the difficulty level counter 223γ is 3 or less and the process proceeds to the process of S6303, there is a possibility that a lot of points are obtained in spite of a relatively low skill level. In this case, if the degree of difficulty is increased, there is a possibility that pressing of the frame button 229 will fail continuously in the final stage, and there is a possibility that a bad impression may be held for the timing effect. In particular, even if the quota of 1000 points was exceeded at the start of the final stage production, it failed continuously in the final stage period, and if the quota was divided at the end of the production by penalty accumulation, There is a possibility that the motivation for the timing effect is greatly reduced. Therefore, in this control example, when the difficulty level counter 223γ, which is assumed to be low in skill, is 3 or less, the range of the success period is kept normal even if a relatively large number of points are acquired. doing. Thereby, the motivation with respect to a timing effect can be improved with respect to the player with low skill.

  If it is determined in the process of S6302 that the value of the score counter 223η is 900 or less (S6302: No), it is then determined whether the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 600 (S6306). In the processing of S6305, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 600 (S6206: Yes), a table for a wide range corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e (S6307), The process proceeds to S6309. This is because when the score counter 223η is smaller than 600, the player has a relatively small number of points acquired by the middle period, and therefore it is highly likely that the level of difficulty is too high for the player. Therefore, in this case, by selecting a pressing period with a wide success period, there is a high possibility that the frame button 229 is determined to be successful when the frame button 229 is pressed. That is, the difficulty level can be matched to the player. In addition, by widening the success period in the final stage, it becomes easier to press down, so that the player can be given an illusion that he / she is in trouble (having a knack). Therefore, even if the quota is not reached, it is possible to make an illusion as if more points can be acquired next time from the response in the final period. Therefore, the willingness to participate in the next timing effect can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6306, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is 600 or more (S6305: No), the normal range table corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e, The process proceeds to S6309. In the process of S6309 executed after any of the processes of S6104, S6105, S6107, and S6108 is executed, the data table read from the press period table 222e is stored in the press period storage area (S6308), and this process is performed. Exit.

  By this end stage setting process, the range of the success period of the end stage period can be changed to a size more matched to the skill of the player according to the points acquired by the player before the end of the middle stage period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 172, details of the notification mode setting process (S6113) executed in the timing effect process (S1541, see FIG. 169) will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the notification mode setting process (S6113). This notification mode setting process is a process for setting a notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect as described above.

  In the notification mode setting process (S6113), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read (S6401), and it is determined whether or not the value is 1000 or more (S6402). That is, it is determined whether or not 1000 points that are the norm are achieved in the timing effect. In the process of S6402, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 1000 (that is, the normal cannot be achieved in the current timing effect) (S6402: No), the display control device 114 is then checked. A notification mode at the time of failure (see FIG. 165) is set (S6403).

  When the processing of S6303 ends, it is then determined whether or not the value of the score counter 223η is 50 or less (S6404). When the value of the score counter 223η is 50 or less (S6404: Yes), the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is set to 0 (S6405), and the process proceeds to S6412. When the value of the score counter 223η is 50 or less, there is a high possibility that the player has given up quickly just by visually recognizing the aspect of the early period. Therefore, in this case, in the next timing effect, the effect mode with the easiest difficulty level is selected, and it can be felt that the quota is likely to be achieved. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved in the next timing production.

  On the other hand, when the value of the score counter 223η is larger than 50 (S6404: No), 1 is subtracted from the value of the difficulty counter 223γ (S6406), and the process proceeds to S6412. If the value of the score counter 223η is larger than 50, it means that the quota was not satisfied after participating in the timing effect as such. Therefore, in this case, the player's willingness to participate is improved by lowering the difficulty level selected in the next timing effect by one step.

  In the process of S6402, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is 1000 or more (the timing production quota has been achieved), the probability variation state flag 223β is read (S6407), and the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol. Or not (whether or not the probability variation state flag 223β is on) is determined (S6408). If it is determined that the state is the probability variation state (S6408: Yes), the notification mode for notifying the display control device 114 of the probability variation state is set, and the process proceeds to S6411. On the other hand, in the process of S6408, when it is determined that the probability of the special symbol is not changed (the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S6408: No), a notification for informing the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol. A mode is set (S6409), and the process proceeds to S6411.

  In the process of S6411, 1 is added to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, and the process proceeds to S6412. When the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 4, which is the maximum value, the value is kept at 4. In the process of S6412, by setting the timing effect permission flag 223α to OFF, it is set so that the timing effect is not selected until the next 2R probability variation big hit or small hit (S6412), and this process ends. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the details of the variable display setting process 2 (S1542) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1542) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Of the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S1542), the processes of S1801 to S1810 are the same as the processes of S1801 to S1810 executed in the fluctuation display setting process (S1512, see FIG. 109) in the first control example. Processing is executed.

  Further, in the variation display setting process 2 (S1542) in this control example, when the processing of S1805 is completed, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command is notified by the variation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot). It is determined (S1821). In the processing of S1821, when it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to the jackpot C (S1821: Yes), it means that the special symbol is shifted to the probability variation state, so the probability variation state flag 223β is set to ON ( The process proceeds to S1823) and S1824.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1821 that the variation pattern does not correspond to the big hit C (S1821: No), it is then determined whether or not the variation pattern corresponds to the small hit (S1822). If it is determined that the corresponding variation pattern is present (S1822: Yes), the process proceeds to S1824. In the process of S1824, the timing effect permission flag 223α is set to ON so that the timing effect can be selected as an interesting effect in subsequent variable effects (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1806.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1822 that the variation pattern does not correspond to the small hit (S1822: No), it is then determined whether the variation pattern corresponds to the big hit A or the big hit B (S1825). In the process of S1825, when it is determined that neither the variation pattern corresponding to jackpot A nor the variation pattern corresponding to jackpot B (S1825: No), the process proceeds to S1806. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to either big hit A or big hit B (S1825: Yes), the probability variation state flag 223β is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit type (S1826). That is, if the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), the probability variation state flag 223β is set to ON, and if the jackpot B (16R time short hit), the probability variation state flag 223β is set to OFF. Next, the timing effect permission flag 223α is set to OFF (S1827), and the processes after S1806 are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, a timing effect that can acquire points by operating a plurality of types of buttons with good timing is configured to be executable, and when a quota is achieved, The game state is informed. Thereby, since the player who wants to know the present game state can be actively participated in the timing performance, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, whether or not a privilege is given by skill of the player's pressing (operation) timing by making the privilege when the timing presentation is successful have no effect on the game result (notification of the current gaming state) Can decide. On the other hand, if a result (for example, jackpot) that has already been determined at the start of the change (before the timing effect is started) is set as a privilege, the timing effect is started. Before, the result of the timing effect (whether or not the mode for achieving the quota can be displayed) is determined. If there is a timing effect in which the quota cannot be achieved, the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect may be reduced. On the other hand, in this control example, the privilege given when the quota is achieved in the timing effect is set to “notification of gaming state” that does not affect the game result. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant a privilege purely according to the skill of pressing the frame button 229. That is, when a privilege is granted, it is possible to make the player feel more strongly that the player has acquired the privilege by himself. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  Further, in the present control example, the difficulty level can be varied according to the player's point acquisition situation during execution of the timing effect. That is, it is configured to determine the skill of the player from the point acquisition situation, and to change to an effect mode with a difficulty level that matches the player more. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difficulty level from being too difficult, or conversely, the difficulty level from being too easy to reduce the willingness to participate in the timing performance. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  Further, in the present control example, when the timing effect ends, the difficulty level of the next timing effect is changed to a difficulty level that matches the player more according to the player's point acquisition situation. . By comprising in this way, the player's willingness to participate with respect to timing production can be improved more.

  In this control example, when three types of periods, an early period, a middle period, and an end period, are set, the production mode is selected according to the skill level of the player and the participation situation in the timing production. However, the period is not limited to three types. For example, you may comprise so that an effect aspect may be set with respect to five types of periods, respectively. By increasing the period, it is possible to more accurately determine the player's skill and the like, and provide an effect mode that matches the skill. Conversely, the period may be reduced. As a result, the number of processing times for determining the skill and the like of the player can be reduced, so that the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced.

  In this control example, when three types of periods, an early period, a middle period, and an end period, are set, the production mode is selected according to the skill level of the player and the participation situation in the timing production. However, the difficulty level of one or more periods may be fixed, and only the difficulty level of a part of the period may be variable according to the skill of the player. More specifically, for example, the difficulty level of the early period may be set to an effect mode that is relatively easy. As a result, the player who visually recognizes the aspect of the early stage period can have an impression that the quota can be easily achieved by the timing effect, so that the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect can be improved. .

  In this control example, it is configured that it is determined that consecutive hits are successful based on the operation of the 10-time frame button 229 during the consecutive hit period, and points are added. The determination criterion is not limited to 10 operations. An arbitrary value can be set according to the length of the continuous hit period and the length of the continuous hit bar. Further, the number of times that it is determined that consecutive hits are successful may be varied according to the set production mode. For example, in the case of a production mode with a low difficulty level (for example, a difficulty level of 1), the number of times that it is determined that consecutive hits are successful is set to a number less than 10 times (for example, 6 times), and conversely In the case of a production mode having a relatively high difficulty level (for example, difficulty level 4 or 5), the number of times that it is determined that consecutive hits are successful is set to a number more than 10 times (for example, 15 times). May be. As a result, not only the display pattern of the scroll bar and the range of the success period, but also the number of times that it is determined that consecutive hits were successful, the difficulty can be differentiated. Can be given.

  In this control example, it is determined that the consecutive hit is successful based on the operation of the frame button 229 a predetermined number of times (10 times) during the continuous hit period, and points are added. You may comprise so that it may also discriminate | determine from operation | movement with repeated hits. For example, by continuously pressing a button of a corresponding type for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds or more) between consecutive hit periods, it is determined that consecutive hits are successful, as in the case of repeated hits a predetermined number (10 times). Also good. Thereby, even a player who is not good at consecutive hits can be determined as consecutive hits simply by continuously pressing (holding down) the frame button 229, and points can be obtained, so the burden on the player can be reduced. . In this case, points given by performing a predetermined number of times (10 times) of continuous hits during the continuous hit period are simply points given when the frame button 229 is continuously pressed (long press) during the continuous hit period. Also, it may be configured to increase. By configuring in this way, high-skilled high-level players are aggressively hit repeatedly, and low-skilled players who are not good at continuous hits are long-pressed to earn even a few points. Can be made. That is, since various participation methods for the continuous hitting period can be provided according to the skill of the player, the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect can be improved.

In this control example, a plurality of periods are set as periods for setting the difficulty level of the timing effect. Instead, the difficulty level is set according to the number of times the frame button 229 has failed or succeeded. It may be configured to be fluidly variable. Thereby, the operation state of the player can be reflected in the difficulty level in real time.
Although the effect mode of the early period is configured to be set to the effect mode of the difficulty level corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, it is not limited to this. For example, in the early period, the difficulty counter 223
In this control example, the notification of the gaming state is a privilege for the timing effect, but is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that the lottery result of a special symbol may be alert | reported by a timing effect. In other words, the jackpot may be notified when the quota is achieved in the timing effect. In this case, when the timing effect is selected because the special symbol is not selected, the timing effect may be selected in the effect mode in which the quota cannot be achieved. More specifically, for example, in the case where the timing effect is executed in the case of a special symbol deviating, the total points that can be obtained by the scroll bar and the continuous hit bar that are scroll-displayed from the beginning period to the end period are It may be configured to be 900 to 990 points at maximum, and in the case of a special symbol, for example, a pattern that can acquire 1000 points to 1200 points at maximum may be selected. That is, as the effect mode defined for the timing effect selection table 222d, the jackpot effect mode corresponding to each period and each difficulty level and the off-line effect mode may be separately defined. In the timing effect process (see FIG. 169), when setting the effect mode of each period (S6104 in FIG. 169, S6209 in FIG. 170, S6104, S6105, S6107, S6108 in S of FIG. 171) You may comprise so that the effect aspect may be selected by discriminating the result of the fluctuating effect (whether it is a big hit or missed). By configuring in this way, the difficulty level in the timing effect can be matched with the skill of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect can be improved. In addition, by changing the upper limit of points that can be acquired in the mode for jackpots and the mode for losing, it is possible to prevent the quota from being achieved despite the fact that the special symbol lottery result is out ( Suppression). Therefore, even though the quota is achieved, the jackpot is not started, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust and to participate in the timing performance with peace of mind.

  In the present control example, the timing effect is configured to be set only after the jackpot A or the jackpot B is reached at least once after the jackpot or jackpot C, but the execution condition of the timing effect is as follows: It is not limited to this. For example, the ease of selecting a timing effect may be changed according to the number of reserved balls. Specifically, the timing effect may be more easily selected as the number of reserved balls increases, and may be configured to be less likely to be selected as the number of reserved balls decreases. As described above, in the timing effect of this control example, it is necessary to press a plurality of buttons (up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, and lower button DB) constituting the frame button 229 with good timing. For this reason, it is difficult to participate in the timing effect with one hand, and it is configured to make it easier for the person who participates using both hands to press down. That is, there is a possibility that a player who intends to achieve the quota with the timing effect will temporarily take his hand off the operation handle 51 and participate in the timing effect. Therefore, if you participate in the timing effect with a small number of reserved balls, you cannot increase the number of reserved balls during the timing effect, so there is a risk that the lottery of the special symbol will be interrupted after the end of the variable effect where the timing effect is set. is there. In other words, there is a possibility that the gaming efficiency will deteriorate. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which it is difficult to set the timing effect in a situation where there are few reserved balls, it is possible to cause the player to launch a ball in a situation where there are few reserved balls, so that the reserved balls can be easily stored. Therefore, game efficiency can be increased. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls is large, the number of held balls may further increase by continuously striking the ball during the fluctuation, and there is a possibility that a number of balls exceeding the upper limit of the number of held balls will be detected. is there. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of reserved balls from overflowing by increasing the frequency of occurrence of a timing effect that easily achieves a quota by participating with both hands.

  In the present control example, the timing button is configured such that an effect of pressing a plurality of buttons (up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, and lower button DB) constituting the frame button 229 with good timing is executed. However, the number of buttons is not limited to four. For example, an effect of pressing a single frame button with good timing may be executed as the timing effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to participate in the timing effect with the other hand while operating the handle 51 with one hand, so that it is possible to participate in the timing effect without reducing the game efficiency. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect. Further, by reducing the types of buttons operated in the timing effect, it is possible to make the game characteristics easier to understand. On the other hand, the types of buttons to be operated may be larger than in this control example. As the number of buttons to be operated increases, the difficulty level of the timing effect can be increased, so that a player having a high skill of the timing effect can be satisfied. It should be noted that the player's skill may be determined from the point acquisition status, the total points acquired in the previous timing effect, and the like, and the number of buttons used may be increased or decreased according to the skill. That is, when it is determined that the skill level is low or it has not participated at all in the previous time, for example, it is configured to execute a timing effect in a mode in which one type of button can participate, and for other players May set a mode of timing effect using four types of buttons. By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize that the difficulty level is clearly reduced from the appearance, so that it is possible to improve the willingness to participate for players with low skills.

  In the present control example, when a fluctuating effect with a timing effect set is executed, the timing effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed since the occurrence of reach, and is configured to be executed for 14 seconds. However, the start period and duration of the timing effect are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily set. For example, you may comprise so that a timing effect may be performed using all the fluctuation time. Even if the timing effect is executed on the sub display device 690, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, even if the timing effect is executed by spending all the variation time, It is possible to prevent (suppress) missing the lottery result. Therefore, since a longer period timing effect can be executed, the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In this control example, the timing effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect, but the execution period of the timing effect is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that a timing effect may be performed during a jackpot (special game state). In this case, it may be configured to notify the transition to the probable change state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends by achieving the quota with the timing effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the jackpot is a mere work for obtaining a prize ball, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the game with the jackpot. In this case, if the player is unable to achieve the quota regardless of the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), for example, the low probability state of the special symbol is reported during the timing effect notification period. You may comprise so that a reverse effect may be performed by jackpot ending and the probability change state of a special symbol may be alert | reported. Thereby, even when the quota cannot be achieved by the timing effect, the game can be performed in the hope that the reverse effect will occur in the ending period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .

<Fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 175 to 186, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described. In the first control example, the control example has been described in which each accessory performs a variable operation independently or in combination. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, a suitable control method of the accessory performed by combining the variable operation and the lighting operation will be described.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in terms of configuration is that a rotating lighting unit 800 is added as an accessory that performs a moving effect in a variable effect or the like. On the other hand, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. It is a point that has been. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, a front view of the game board 13 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186. FIG. 185 is a front view of the game board 13 when the above-described rotation lighting unit 800 is in the retracted position, and FIG. 186 is a front view of the game board 13 when the rotation lighting unit 800 is in the extended position. . When the rotating lighting unit 800 is outside the execution period of the effect of performing the variable operation, it is arranged at the retreat position shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the effect that the rotary lighting unit 800 performs the variable operation is set, the rotary lighting unit 800 is arranged at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 186 and the operation according to the effect (rotation operation and lighting operation). Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 185, the retracted position of the rotary lighting unit 800 is the lower left of the third symbol display device 81 as viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 185, when the rotary lighting unit 800 is arranged at the retracted position, the upper right part of the rotary lighting unit 800 is only slightly visible, and the majority is hidden behind other configurations and cannot be seen from the front. Become. On the other hand, the overhang position of the rotary lighting unit 800 is below the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. In this case, the player can visually recognize most of the rotary lighting unit 800 from the front.

  Next, the configuration of the rotary lighting unit 800 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 178. First, FIG. 175 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rotary lighting unit 800 in this control example, and FIG. 175 (b) is a side view of the rotary lighting unit 800 from the left side.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the rotary lighting unit 800 is provided with a substantially circular rotating member 820 that can rotate around the rotating shaft 822 on the front side, and on the back side thereof, the lighting that can be turned on and off. An apparatus 810 is provided. The rotating member 820 is provided with six through holes 821a to 821f. These through holes 821a to 821f are all formed in a circular shape having the same diameter, and are arranged at equal intervals (every 60 degrees) on the circumference centering on the rotation shaft 822. Thereby, every time the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees, the same shape (appearance) is obtained (symmetry is 6 times). The rotating member 820 is made of a translucent material (for example, PS material). For this reason, even when parts other than the back side of the through holes 821a to 821f are lit, a rough lighting state can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The lighting device 810 is provided with an insertion port 812 for inserting the rotating shaft 822 of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 175 (b)). Through this insertion hole 812, the rotating shaft 822 is physically connected to a drive motor for rotating the rotating member 810. That is, only the rotating member 810 is rotated by the drive motor, and the lighting device 810 is not rotated.

  The lighting device 810 includes a light guide plate on the front side, and an LED is provided on the back side of the light guide plate (inside the lighting device 810). By turning on the internal LED, the player can visually recognize the light of the LED through the light guide plate. Further, the LEDs are evenly arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so that all of the front side can be illuminated. By turning on all the LEDs, the front side of the lighting device 810 looks evenly illuminated.

  In addition, on the front side of the lighting device 810, a plurality of regions that can emit light in a circular shape locally are provided. That is, six circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are provided. The shapes of these circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are configured by circles having substantially the same diameter as the through holes 821a to 821f. Moreover, it arrange | positions at equal intervals (every 60 degree | times) at the circumference shape centering on the penetration hole 812. FIG. Since the circumference in which the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are arranged and the circumference in which the through-holes 821a to 821f are arranged have substantially the same diameter, any one of the rotation members 820 can be When the through-holes reach the front side of any of the circular lighting areas, all the through-holes are configured to completely overlap on the front side of all the circular lighting areas.

  In order to locally emit light from the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f, for example, the light guide plate is divided from the other regions at the circumferential portions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f, and the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are divided. A partition may be provided in the interior so that the light from the LED provided in is not leaked to other areas. And what is necessary is just to comprise LED provided in circular lighting area | regions 811a-811f so that lighting control is possible separately. With this configuration, if all the LEDs are turned on, the front side of the lighting device 810 looks as if it is turned on as a whole, while the LEDs provided in any one of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are independent. By turning on the light, it can be seen that only the area is lighted in a circle.

  Here, the LEDs provided in the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are configured by red LEDs and white LEDs, and the LEDs provided in other regions are configured by only white LEDs. . When the lighting device 810 is turned on as a whole, all the white LEDs are turned on so that the whole lighting device 810 looks white. On the other hand, when only part or all of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are lit, the red LED provided in the corresponding area is set to be lit.

  Next, a lighting control method of the lighting device 810 for each rotation speed of the rotating member 820 will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 178. Here, first, an outline of effects using the rotary lighting unit 800 will be described. In this control example, as an effect using the rotary lighting unit 800, each time the rotating member 820 rotates and the through-holes 821a to 821f and the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f overlap each other in the front and rear directions (that is, There is an effect that the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are turned on in red one by one every time the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees. In this effect, the degree of expectation that is a big hit in the variable effect is suggested by the number of circular lighting regions that are in the red lighting state. For this reason, the player can check the state of the rotary lighting unit 800 in expectation that as many circular lighting areas as possible will be lit. During this period, the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 is relatively slow (for example, a rotational speed that rotates 60 degrees per second) so that the number of circular lighting areas in which the player is lit can be easily recognized. ) Is set (low-speed rotation state is set).

  The low-speed rotation state described above continues until the rotation member 820 makes one rotation. When the rotating member 820 makes one rotation, the rotation speed is accelerated. When the rotation speed becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined speed (for example, one rotation or more per second), the lighting device 820 is switched to a fully lit state. Note that the rotation speed continues to be accelerated after the rotation speed becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined speed (for example, one rotation or more per second). When it is determined that the rotation speed has reached a relatively high speed (speed of 3 rotations per second) (high speed rotation state), intermittent lighting in the same phase on the front surface is set for the lighting device 810. (That is, it is set to repeat turning on and off at a constant frequency for all white LEDs). Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 178, the lighting frequency and the lighting period of this intermittent lighting are such that the rotating direction of the rotating member 810 that is rotating looks like reverse rotation due to the so-called wagon wheel effect. Is set.

  Then, after the appearance of reverse rotation, the number of circular lighting areas that are lit in the low-speed rotation state is turned on again according to the lighting frequency of intermittent lighting. Even in this high-speed rotation state, the number of lighting in the circular lighting area may be increased. Therefore, since the player can confirm the production until the end, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In the present control example, as the operation of the rotary lighting unit 800, only the rotation operation of the rotation member 820 is defined in the operation scenario. The lighting device 810 is configured to determine the rotation speed from the actual rotation operation of the rotating member 820 and switch the lighting mode. More specifically, in the operation scenario corresponding to the effect of operating the rotary lighting unit 800, first, an operation of moving the rotary lighting unit 800 from the retracted position (see FIG. 185) to the extended position (see FIG. 186). It is prescribed. As an operation when the movement to the overhanging position (see FIG. 186) is completed (the sensor detects that the overhanging position has been reached), the operation scenario includes a rotation operation of the rotating member 820 in a low-speed rotation state. Is stipulated. Further, an operation for accelerating the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is defined as an operation when a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed since the low-speed rotation state was set. Then, as an operation to be set after the operation of accelerating the rotation speed, an operation to decelerate the rotation speed and stop the rotation of the rotation member 820 when a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed in the high-speed rotation state is defined. As the subsequent operation, an operation for moving the rotary lighting unit 800 to the retracted position is defined. As described above, only the operation of the rotating member 820 is defined in the operation scenario, and the lighting operation of the rotating member 820 and the lighting device 810 are changed by changing the lighting mode of the lighting device 810 according to the speed of the rotating member 820. It is possible to suppress the deviation from the lighting control. That is, when the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 is changed, the lighting mode can be changed more reliably, so that the appearance quality of the rotary lighting unit 800 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, a lighting control method in a low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation) will be described. First, FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example of lighting control in which the visual quality is deteriorated in a low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation), and FIG. 177 is a diagram of low-speed rotation (during low-speed operation) in this control example. It is the figure which showed the lighting control example. That is, a control method that prevents the appearance as shown in FIG. 176 during low-speed rotation (during low-speed operation) and makes the appearance as shown in FIG. 177 will be described.

  FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating the lighting control that deteriorates the visual quality in the low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation) as described above. In this example, in the low-speed rotation state, it is a diagram illustrating a case where the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees with two circular lighting areas turned on.

  When the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f overlaps the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f, the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f can be visually recognized through the through holes 821a to 821f. FIG. 176 (a) shows a state in which the through-holes 821e and 821f overlap two circular lighting areas that are set to the lighting state, respectively.

  FIG. 176 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the rotation member 820 rotates and the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are shifted. In this bad example, since the next lighting position is turned on before the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f coincide with each other, it is halfway through the through holes 821a, 821e, and 821f. The red light in the circular lighting area leaks out at the half end. Therefore, the visual quality has deteriorated. This is because the through holes 821a to 821f continuously change according to the amount of rotation of the rotating member 820, whereas the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are fixed in position. That is, since the lighting position of each circular lighting region cannot continuously follow the through holes 821a to 821f, in the state where the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are shifted, The visual quality will deteriorate.

  In FIG. 176 (c), while the lighting state of each circular lighting area is maintained in the state of FIG. 176 (b), the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees, the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f, and the circular lighting areas 811a to 811a. The case where the position of 811f coincides again is shown. In this case, as in FIG. 176 (a), since the arrangement of the two circular lighting areas set in the lighting state and the through holes 821e and 821f overlap, the light from the circular lighting area is clearly cleaned from the front. It can be visually recognized. As described above, when one or a plurality of circular lighting regions are turned on at a rotational position where the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f do not coincide with each other, the visual quality deteriorates. (See FIG. 176 (b)). Therefore, in this control example, lighting control is performed so as to achieve the lighting state shown in FIG. 177 in order to improve the visual quality.

  FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating a lighting control method in a low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation) in the present control example. As shown in FIG. 177, in the present control example, control is performed so that the corresponding circular lighting areas are lit only when the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f match. (See FIGS. 177 (a) and (c)), and at other intermediate positions, all the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are set to the extinguished state. By constituting in this way, one or a plurality of circular lighting areas are turned on in a state where the positions of the through holes 821a to 821f and the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are shifted from each other, thereby preventing a halfway appearance. (Suppressed). Therefore, the appearance quality in the low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation) can be improved.

  In addition, it is comprised so that it can detect by the rotation sensor which is not shown in figure whether the arrangement | positioning of the through-holes 821a-821f and the position of circular lighting area | region 811a-811f correspond. This rotation sensor is configured such that the output becomes H every time the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees. For example, whether the through hole 821a matches (overlaps) the position of the circular lighting region 811a, or matches (overlaps) the circular lighting region 811b, matches the circular lighting region 811c. Whether it is in an overlapping (overlapping) state, coincident with (overlapping with) the circular lighting region 811d, or coincident with (overlapping with) the circular lighting region 811e, it coincides with the circular lighting region 811f. The output is set to H in the same manner even in the state of being overlapped (overlapped). On the other hand, when the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are shifted, the output is set to L.

  Next, a lighting control method in a high-speed rotation state (during high-speed operation) will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, at the time of high-speed rotation, settings are made so that all white LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off at a constant frequency (24 Hz). Also, the length of one lighting period is configured to be extremely short (for example, ON DUTY 0.5%), and the length of the arrangement of the rotating member 810 at the moment of lighting can be visually recognized (it cannot be recognized that it is rotating). It is comprised so that it may become this period.

  As shown in FIG. 178, in the high-speed rotation state, every time the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees, the entire lighting device 810 instantaneously lights in white (all lights up). In the high-speed rotation state, the rotating member 820 rotates three times per second (1080 degrees per second), whereas the lighting frequency is set to 24 Hz (24 times per second) (1080 degrees ÷ 24 = 45 degrees). On the other hand, since the lighting device 810 is turned off during a period other than the moment when it is lit momentarily, the appearance of the rotating member 820 is also invisible. Therefore, the rotating member 820 that is rotating cannot be continuously viewed from the player's line of sight, and is recognized as an appearance like a frame feed of 24 Hz.

  With reference to FIG. 178, the appearance of the rotary member 820 from the player's perspective will be described more specifically. When the lighting device 810 is momentarily fully lit in the arrangement shown in FIG. 178 (a), FIG. ) Is recognized by the player, but since the lighting period is instantaneous (ON DUTY 0.5%), the player can only recognize the arrangement of the rotating member 820 and cannot recognize the direction of rotation. . Thereafter, since the lighting device 810 is set in the extinguished state until the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees (see FIG. 178 (b)), the player cannot visually recognize the appearance of the rotating member 820 during this period.

  In the next 24 Hz period (that is, in the arrangement of FIG. 178 (b)), the lighting device 810 is instantaneously fully turned on again. Also in this case, since the lighting period is sufficiently short as in the arrangement of FIG. 178 (a), the player can recognize only the arrangement of the rotating member 820. Then, the light is turned off again until the next 24 Hz period (see FIG. 178 (d)). When the next 24Hz period is reached, all lights are instantaneously set and the player recognizes the arrangement of FIG. 178 (e). Is done. Thereafter, the arrangement of the rotating member 820 is recognized at 24 Hz by the same control.

  Here, as described above, the rotating member 820 is configured to have the same shape (appearance) every time it rotates 60 degrees (six-fold symmetry). Therefore, as shown in FIG. In particular, by recognizing only the arrangement of the rotating member 820, the rotational direction can be misidentified. In other words, the through hole 821a to the through hole 821f are rotated 45 degrees clockwise (in the positive direction) from the arrangement shown in FIG. 178 (a) to reach the arrangement shown in FIG. 178 (c). Regardless, the rotating member 820 can be recognized as if it rotated 15 degrees counterclockwise. This is because the through-hole 821a and the through-hole 821f cannot be distinguished from each other in appearance, so that it is closest to the position where the through-hole 821a is arranged in FIG. 178 (a) (different by 15 degrees). This is because the through-hole 821f in () can be recognized (misidentified) as the through-hole 821a.

  Similarly, by continuing to recognize that the rotation is in the direction with the smallest amount of apparent rotation, the original rotation direction and the rotation direction recognized by the player can be reversed. As described above, the configuration in which the rotation direction is changed only by switching the lighting control can change the rotation direction of the rotating member 820. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an excessive load from being applied to the drive motor by performing a sudden stop or a reversal in order to change the rotation direction, so that the drive motor is less likely to fail. it can. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 that can operate stably for a longer time can be provided.

  In this control example, every time the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees in the high-speed rotation state (that is, at 24 Hz), the lighting device 810 is set to full lighting. However, the frequency for lighting the lighting device 810 is limited to this. It is not a thing. In a high-speed rotation state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 820 from one full lighting to the next full lighting is larger than 30 degrees (that is, half of 60 degrees that is the interval between adjacent through holes) and 60 degrees It can be arbitrarily determined within a range smaller than (ie, the interval between adjacent through holes). That is, the angle when comparing the arrangement before rotation of one through hole and the arrangement after rotation of the through hole adjacent to the one through hole opposite to the rotation direction (that is, the left side) is It is only necessary that one through hole is smaller than the actual rotation angle. By configuring in this way, it can be mistaken for movement (rotation) in the direction of a small movement angle (movement distance is small), so every time the lighting device 810 is instantaneously set to full lighting, It can be seen as if the hole has moved to the position of the adjacent through hole adjacent to the opposite side. Therefore, since it can be made to feel that it is rotating reversely only by lighting control, without changing a rotation speed or a rotation direction, it prevents (suppresses) that an excessive load is applied to a drive motor. The pachinko machine 10 that can operate stably for a longer time can be provided.

<Electric Configuration in Fourth Control Example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 174, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example, the RAM 223 in this control example has a lighting state counter 223θ, a lighting position storage area 223ι, a lighting set flag 223κ, and an initial identified flag 223λ. In addition, a speed identification timer 223μ, a previous value storage area 223ν, and a speed storage area 223ξ are added.

  The lighting state counter 223θ is a counter indicating the type of lighting state of the lighting device 810, and can indicate different lighting states according to the counter value. Specifically, “01H” means a lighting state (see FIG. 177) for performing lighting control in a low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation), and “02H” indicates high-speed rotation from the low-speed rotation state. Meaning that the lighting state (all lighting state) at the time of acceleration of the rotational speed that transitions to the state, “03H” is the lighting state (see FIG. 178) in the high speed rotation state (at the time of high speed operation). Means. On the other hand, if the counter value is “00H”, it means that lighting control of the lighting device 810 is not performed. The lighting state counter 223θ is updated at the timing of switching the lighting state (see S6613 in FIG. 181, S6805 in FIG. 183, and S6909 in FIG. 184). The lighting state counter 223θ is referred to in a lighting control process (see FIG. 180) executed in the main process, and lighting control corresponding to the counter value is set.

  The lighting position storage area 223ι is an area in which information indicating the lighting state of each of the circular lighting areas 821a to 821f is stored. The lighting position storage area 223ι is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the 0th to 5th bits correspond to the circular lighting areas 821a to 821f, respectively. Each bit constituting the lighting position storage area 223ι indicates that the corresponding circular lighting area is in a lighting state if the value is 1 (on), and indicates that it is in a light-off state if it is off. The information stored in the lighting position storage area 223ι is obtained every time it detects that the output of the rotation sensor becomes H in the low-speed rotation state or the high-speed rotation state (the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the circular shape). Each time the positions of the lighting regions 811a to 811f overlap), the value is updated (see S6608 and S6610 in FIG. 181 and S6911 and S6912 in FIG. 184). Further, all values are cleared at the timing when the effect using the rotary lighting unit 800 ends.

  The lighting setting completion flag 223κ is a flag indicating whether or not the lighting state has been updated based on the output of the rotation sensor becoming H. If the lighting set flag 223κ is on, it indicates that the lighting state has been updated based on the output of the rotation sensor being H, and if it is off, the lighting state has not been updated. It shows that. When the H output of the rotation sensor is detected while the lighting setting flag 223κ is off, the lighting state is updated and the lighting setting flag 223κ is set to on (S6612 in FIG. 181 and FIG. 184). (See S6913). Further, when the L output of the rotation sensor is first detected after the lighting state is updated, it is set to OFF (see S6604 in FIG. 181 and S6910 in FIG. 184). By controlling the lighting state to be updated with reference to the lighting set flag 223κ, the lighting state is prevented from being updated a plurality of times while the output of the rotation sensor is H. be able to.

  The first identified flag 223λ is a flag indicating whether or not a reference value (the value of the speed identifying timer 223μ) for identifying the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 has been acquired. If the initial identification flag 223λ is on, it indicates that the reference value (the value of the speed identification timer 223μ) has been acquired to identify the rotational speed, and if it is off, the reference value has not been acquired. It shows that. If the first identified flag 223λ is on, the rotation speed is calculated based on the already acquired reference value (see S6701 in FIG. 182). On the other hand, if the initial identification flag 223λ is off, the flag is set on after the reference value for identifying the rotation speed is acquired (see S6703 in FIG. 182). By using the first identified flag 223λ, the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 can be accurately determined.

  The speed identifying timer 223μ is a timer used for calculating the rotational speed of the rotating member 820. The speed identification timer 223μ is updated periodically (every millisecond) in the main process, for example. The rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is calculated by determining the time from when the output of the rotation sensor becomes H until the next output becomes H based on the difference between the values of the speed identification timer 223μ.

  The previous value storage area 223ν is a storage area for storing the value of the speed identification timer 223μ at the time when the H output of the rotation sensor is detected. Next, when the rotation sensor becomes H output, the time required to rotate 60 degrees depending on the difference between the value stored in the previous value storage area 223ν and the current value of the speed identification timer 223μ. Is calculated. Based on the calculated time, the rotation speed is calculated (S6706 in FIG. 182). The data stored in the previous value storage area 223ν is overwritten with the current value of the speed identification timer 223μ after the rotation speed is calculated every time the rotation speed identification process (see FIG. 182) is executed. .

  The speed storage area 223ξ is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the rotational speed of the rotating member 820. The data stored in the speed storage area 223ξ is overwritten every time the rotational speed is calculated in the rotational speed identification process (see S6706 in FIG. 182). Based on the information corresponding to the rotational speed stored in the speed storage area 223ξ, the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 is determined, and lighting control of the lighting device 810 according to the rotational speed is performed.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 179 to 184, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. First, FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing a main process of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example. Of these main processes, the same processes as S1501 to S1520 in the first control example are executed in S1501 to S1520.

  In the main process in this control example, when the liquid crystal effect execution management process of S1510 is completed, the speed identification timer 223μ is updated by adding 1 (S1551), and the process proceeds to S1511. The speed identification timer 223μ is a timer used to calculate the speed of the rotating member 820 as described above.

  Further, in the main process in this control example, when the entrance effect setting process in S1515 is completed, a lighting control process for controlling the lighting state of the lighting device 810 is then executed (S1552). And after execution of lighting control processing (S1551), processing of S1516-S1520 is performed and this processing is ended.

  Next, the details of the lighting control process (S1552) will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 184. FIG. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the lighting control process (S1552). This lighting control process (S1552) is a process for controlling the lighting state of the lighting device 810 according to the speed of the rotating member 820.

  In the lighting control process (S1552), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the lighting state counter value 223θ is “01H” (S6501). When it is determined in the processing of S6501 that the lighting state counter value 223θ is 01H (S6501: Yes), the low-speed processing for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the low-speed rotation state. Is executed (S6502), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6501 that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not “01H” (S6501: No), then it is determined whether or not the value 223θ of the lighting state counter is “02H”. (S6503). If it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is “02H” (S6503: Yes), the lighting state in the acceleration state during the transition of the rotating member 820 from the low speed rotation state to the high speed rotation state is set. Acceleration processing for executing the processing is executed (S6504), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6503, when it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not “02H” (S6503: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is “03H” ( S6505). In the process of S6505, when it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is “03H” (S6505: Yes), high-speed processing for setting the lighting state of the rotating member 820 in the high-speed rotation state is executed. (S6506), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not “03H” (S6505: No), the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is “00H”, and it is not necessary to control the lighting device 810. This process is terminated.

  Next, details of the low-speed processing (S6502) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the low speed process (S6502). This low speed process (S6502) is a process for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the low speed rotation state as described above.

  In the low speed process (S6502), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the rotation sensor is H (high) (S6601), and when it is determined that the output is not H (output is L) (S6601). : No), next, it is determined whether or not the lighting set flag 223κ is ON (S6602). In the process of S6602, when it is determined that the lighting set flag 223κ is off (S6602: No), the through holes 821a to 821f are arranged at positions shifted from the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f. In addition, this means that the lighting device 810 has already been set to the extinguished state, and thus this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6602, when it is determined that the lighting setting flag 223κ is on (S6602: Yes), the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are in a state where any of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f is lit. This means that the through holes 821a to 821f are arranged at positions shifted from each other, so that all the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are turned off (S6603). This prevents the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f from being displaced from the through holes 821a to 821f in the state where the circular lighting region set to the lighting state exists (see FIG. 176 (b)). Since (suppression) can be performed, the quality of appearance can be improved. When the process of S6603 ends, the lighting set flag is set to OFF (S6604), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6601, when it is determined that the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lighting set flag 223κ is on (S6605), and the lighting set flag is set. If it is determined that 223κ is on (S6605: Yes), the lighting state has already been set, and it is not necessary to set the lighting state again.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lighting set flag 223κ is not on (that is, off) (S6605: No), the output of the rotation sensor is at the H position (the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f). It means that the positions of the through holes 821a to 821f overlap each other), but the lighting state is not set. Therefore, in this case, first, a rotational speed identification process for identifying the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 is executed (S6606). Details of this rotational speed identification processing (S6606) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S6606 is completed, it is determined whether or not the rotation speed is higher than one rotation per second (S6607). If it is determined that the rotation speed is one rotation per second or less (S6607: No), the range of the low-speed rotation state In order to set the lighting state illustrated in FIG. 177, first, the data of each bit in the lighting position storage area 223ι is shifted to the upper bit side (S6608), and then the shifted data Among these, it is determined whether or not the number of bits whose value is 1 (ON) matches the target value (expectation) of the current performance (S6609).

  In the process of S6609, when it is determined that the number of bits having a value of 1 (on) is less than the target value (S6609: No), the bit having the highest one of the bits having a value of 0 (off) is 1 Is set to 1 (S6610), and the process proceeds to S6611. By the processing of S6610, the number of circular lighting areas set in the lighting state can be increased by one. On the other hand, if the number of bits whose value is 1 (ON) matches the target value (expectation), the process of S6610 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6611.

  In the processing of S6611, the lighting position (circular lighting area) corresponding to the ON bit among the respective bits of the lighting position storage area 223ι is set to light red, and the lighting setting flag 223κ is set to ON. (S6611), this process ends.

  Further, in the process of S6607, when it is determined that the rotation speed is higher than one rotation per second (S6607: Yes), the rotation member 820 enters an acceleration state in the middle of transition from the low-speed rotation state to the high-speed rotation state. This means that all the white EDs provided in the lighting device 810 are set to the lighting state (S6612). Then, “02H” is set to the value of the lighting state counter 223θ (S6613), the first identified flag 223λ is set to OFF (S6614), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this low-speed processing, the lighting state described above with reference to FIG. 177 can be set in the low-speed rotation state, so that the visual quality can be improved.

  Next, the above-described rotational speed identification process (S6606) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This rotational speed identification process (S6606) is a process for identifying (calculating) the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 as described above. In this rotational speed identification process (S6606), first, it is determined whether or not the first identified flag 223λ is on (S6701).

  In the process of S6701, when it is determined that the first identified flag 223λ is not on (that is, off) (S6701: No), the value of the speed identification timer 223μ is stored in the previous value storage area 223ν ( (S6702), the first identified flag 223λ is set to ON (S6703), and this process ends. As described above, by storing the value of the speed identification timer 223μ in the previous value storage area 223ν, the time required for the rotating member 820 to rotate 60 degrees is easily calculated in the next rotational speed identification process. be able to.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6701 that the initial identification flag 223λ is on (S6701: Yes), the value of the speed identification timer 223μ is read (S6704), and the read value and the previous value storage area The difference from the value stored in is calculated (S6705). This difference represents the time from when the output of the rotation sensor becomes H last time until it becomes H again this time. That is, it means the time required for the rotating member 820 to rotate 60 degrees. When the processing of S6705 is completed, the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 is then calculated from the calculated difference (time required to rotate 60 degrees), stored in the speed storage area (S6706), and this processing is completed. To do. An appropriate lighting state can be set according to the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 calculated by this processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the above-described acceleration process (S6504) will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the acceleration processing (S6504). This acceleration process (S6504) is a process for setting the lighting state in the acceleration state during the transition from the low-speed rotation state to the high-speed rotation state.

  In the acceleration process (S6504), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6801), and if it is determined that the output is not H (that is, L) (S6801: No). ), This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the output is H in the process of S6801 (S6802: Yes), the above-described rotation is performed to determine whether or not the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 has reached the high-speed rotation speed. A speed identification process (S6802) is executed. Since this rotational speed identification process is merely the same process as the rotational speed identification process described with reference to FIG. 182, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the processing of S6802 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the calculated rotation speed is 3 rotations per second (S6803), and it is determined that the rotation speed is not 3 rotations per second (1 rotation per second or more and less than 3 rotations). (S6803: No), since it has not shifted to the high-speed rotation state, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6803 that the rotation speed of the rotating member is 3 rotations per second (S6803: Yes), it means that the high-speed rotation state has been entered. Switch. That is, a command for setting a lighting mode with a lighting frequency of 24 Hz and an on-duty of 0.5% is set for the LED driver of the lighting device 810 (S6804). Thereafter, by setting “03H” as the value of the lighting state counter 223θ, it indicates that the state has shifted to the high speed rotation state (S6805), the initial identified flag 223λ is set to OFF (S6806), and this processing is terminated. To do. By this acceleration processing, the transition to the high-speed rotation state can be immediately identified and the lighting state can be switched.

  Next, the high-speed processing (S6506) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This high speed process (S6506) is a process for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the high speed rotation state as described above. In this high-speed processing, first, it is determined whether or not the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6901). If it is determined that the output is not H (that is, L) (S6901: No), then Then, it is determined whether or not the lighting set flag 223κ is on (S6902).

  In the process of S6902, when it is determined that the lighting setting flag 223κ is off (S6902: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6902 that the lighting setting flag 223κ is on (S6902: Yes), the lighting state of the circular lighting area where the red LED lighting is set is canceled (turned off) (S6903). ), The lighting set flag 223κ is set to OFF (S6904), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6901 that the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6901), it is determined whether or not the lighting setting flag 223λ is ON, and the lighting setting flag 223λ is ON. If this is the case (S6905), it means that the lighting state has already been set, and it is not necessary to set the lighting state to be overlapped, so this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lighting set flag 223λ is not on (that is, off) (S6906: No), the lighting period in the high-speed rotation state (24 Hz, on-duty 0.5% period) (S6906). If it is not the lighting period (S6906: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the process of S6906 that the lighting period is in the high-speed rotation state (24 Hz, ON DUTY 0.5% period) (S6906: Yes), then the high-speed rotation state is completed from the rotation speed of the rotating member 820. In order to determine whether or not, a rotational speed identification process is executed (S6907). Since this rotation speed identification process (S6907) is the same as the rotation speed identification process (S6606) described above with reference to FIG. 182, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the rotational speed identification process (S6907) ends, it is then determined whether or not the calculated rotational speed is less than 3 revolutions per second (S6908), and if it is less than 3 revolutions per second (S698: Yes), This means that the high-speed rotation state has ended based on the operation scenario, and that the rotating member 820 has started to decelerate toward the stop of rotation, so the processing of S6909 to S6911 for setting the end of the lighting state is executed. That is, all the LEDs are set to be turned off (S6909), and “00H” is set to the lighting state counter 223θ to indicate that the lighting control state of the lighting device 810 has ended (S6910). Then, the lighting set flag 223κ is set to OFF and all the data in the lighting position storage area 223ι are cleared to 0 (S6911), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6908 that the rotation speed is not less than 3 rotations per second (the rotation speed in the high-speed rotation state is maintained) (S6908: No), first, the lighting position storage area The data of each bit of 223ι is shifted to the lower bit side (S6912). That is, data is shifted in the opposite direction to the low-speed rotation state. Then, with reference to the data after the shift, the red LED provided at the lighting position (circular lighting region) corresponding to the bit whose value is 1 (ON) is set to the ON state (S6913). Then, the lighting set flag 223κ is set to ON (S6914), and this process is terminated.

  By executing the processing of S6913, the red LEDs provided in the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are controlled separately from the white LEDs controlled in the lighting state illustrated in FIG. The expectation degree of jackpot can be displayed again. Further, since the red LED is in the lighting period of the white LED and is turned on only when the output of the rotation sensor is H, the red LED is turned on every time the rotating member 820 rotates 180 degrees. Is set. This is because the rotation angle of the rotating member 820 in one lighting cycle is 45 degrees, whereas the circular lighting areas are arranged at intervals of 60 degrees, and these least common multiples are 180 degrees. Here, as described above, when the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees clockwise in the high-speed rotation state, it looks like the player rotates 15 degrees counterclockwise. Therefore, when the rotating member 820 rotates 180 degrees clockwise, it looks like it has rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the player's perspective. Therefore, by executing the processing of S6912 and S6913, each time the appearance of rotation of one circular lighting area is advanced counterclockwise, the lighting position of the red LED is made to follow the appearance of the player counterclockwise. It can be moved around one piece. Therefore, in the high-speed rotation state, it is possible to make the appearance as if the rotation direction has been changed only by lighting control without changing the rotation direction or rotation speed of the rotation member 820. Moreover, the lighting effect of red LED which shows an expectation can also be performed according to having become the appearance which began to rotate to the opposite direction. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, the rotary lighting unit 800 that performs the combined rotation operation and lighting operation is added to the configuration. The rotating lighting unit 800 includes a rotating member 820 that rotates and a lighting device 810 having a fixed orientation, and the lighting device 810 has a circular shape through through holes 821a to 821f provided in the rotating member 820. An effect is provided in which the player visually recognizes the red light emitted from the lighting areas 811a to 811f, and notifies the degree of expectation for the jackpot according to the number of light emitting points. However, if one or a plurality of circular lighting regions are lit with the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f shifted, there is a possibility that a halfway appearance may occur. Therefore, in this control example, control is performed so that the corresponding circular lighting areas are lit only when the positions of the through holes 821a to 821f and the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f coincide with each other. The entire 810 is turned off. By configuring in this way, the appearance quality of the rotary lighting unit 800 can be improved.

  Further, in this control example, the rotation speed of the rotation member 820 can be determined according to the detection frequency of the rotation sensor, and the lighting control of the lighting device 810 can be changed according to the rotation speed. Rather than setting the rotation control of the rotating member 820 and the lighting control of the lighting device 810 independently according to the elapsed time, the lighting control of the lighting device 810 is changed by determining the actual rotation speed of the rotating member 820. Thus, lighting control that matches the actual operation of the rotating member 820 can be executed.

  In this control example, the lighting device 810 is disposed on the back side of the rotating member 820, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be disposed on the back side of the rotating member 820, and an image indicating the degree of expectation for jackpots may be displayed for each through-hole position. Thereby, compared with the case where the lighting device 810 is arranged, an effect with a higher degree of freedom can be executed, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In this control example, six through holes 821a to 821f are provided in the rotating member 820, but the number of through holes can be arbitrarily determined. Moreover, the structure which can visually recognize the lighting mode of the lighting device 810 from the front side of the rotating member 820 is not limited to the through-hole penetrating to the back side. For example, instead of the through hole, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or the like may be arranged so that the lighting state on the back side can be visually recognized. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may become easy to visually recognize the lighting mode of the back side rather than another part by making thickness thin compared with the other position of the rotation member 820. FIG.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front rail portion 715 is formed from a single arc shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the front rail portion 715 may be formed from a plurality of arcs, and the direction of the adjacent arcs may be reversed (wave shape). In this case, since the slide movement speed of the effect member 620 is intermittently changed and the posture of the effect member 620 is unstable, it is possible to perform an effect of rattling the effect member 620.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is vertically above the first shaft support 613 when the effect member 620 forms an inverted state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the center of gravity may be disposed obliquely above the first shaft support 613.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 of the lower left plate member 320 is horizontal in the left-right direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 may be inclined downward as it approaches the outside in the width direction. In this case, the speed of the sphere flowing into the upper surface of the lower left plate member 320 from the outside in the board surface width direction can be decelerated by the acceleration in the gravity direction, and the deceleration time of the sphere can be shortened.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is formed as a long hole has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sliding hole 643 may be formed in a circular shape, and the displacement of the sliding hole 643 and the sliding shaft portion 621a may be adjusted by extending and contracting the transmission member 640. In this case, the arrangement range of the transmission member 640 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the position of the contact part 644 can be switched between two positions has been described in the fourth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the position of the contact portion 644 may be continuously changed (movable). In this case, the change rate of the urging force of the torsion spring 650 can be continuously increased.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the posture of the tip swinging member 6556 changes at two positions has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the posture change of the tip swinging member 6556 may be caused in a plurality of stages. In this case, a plurality of types of swinging amounts of the expansion / contraction production device 6540 can be formed, and variations in production can be increased.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  In addition, you may naturally comprise each embodiment mentioned above, each control example, or it combining the part. Furthermore, although comprised with the some control apparatus, you may comprise with one integrated control apparatus or the control apparatus which integrated several.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<An example of the technical idea of changing the driving force transmission by the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550>
A crank member that is rotated about the first axis and has a protruding portion protruding from the first axis, and an insertion portion through which the protruding portion is inserted, and is spaced apart from the first position and the first position. An arm member formed to be movable between a second position and a driving device that generates a driving force for rotating the crank member around the first axis, wherein the insertion portion is inserted The driving force is transmitted to the arm member when the protruding portion comes into contact with an inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion facing the moving direction of the protruding portion, and the arm member is moved to the first position and the second position. A gaming machine comprising: a transmission area formed to be movable between positions; and a non-transmission area that is connected to the transmission area and that blocks transmission of the driving force. A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a crank member provided with a projecting portion protruding at a position eccentric from the rotation shaft, and an arm member provided with an insertion portion through which the projecting portion of the crank member is inserted are provided. There is a gaming machine in which an arm member operates in conjunction with rotation of a crank member (see, for example, JP 2009-000306 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the crank member and the arm member are always interlocked. For this reason, the arm member is driven from the start of the crank member, and the start timing of the crank member and the timing of driving the arm member cannot be shifted. In this case, when the crank member is started, a large force is required to overcome the inertia of the crank member and the arm member, and there is a problem that the drive device becomes large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the insertion portion of the arm member includes a transmission region and a non-transmission region coupled to the transmission region, the crank member is inserted into the non-transmission region. By starting the member, the timing for driving the arm member and the timing for starting the crank member can be shifted. That is, even if the crank member is started, the driving force is not transmitted to the arm member until the protrusion enters the transmission region from the non-transmission region. Thereby, the driving force required at the time of starting of a crank member can be suppressed, and size reduction of a drive device can be achieved.

  Note that the arm member may be stopped or moved while the protrusion moves in the non-transmission region. For example, when the arm member is moved, a case where the arm member is moved by gravity or an elastic force generated by an auxiliary elastic spring is exemplified.

  In addition, as an insertion part, the hollow of a bottomed recessed shape, the penetrated long hole, etc. are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A1, the crank member is formed so as to be able to rotate more than one rotation, and the insertion portion serves as the transmission region when the crank member is rotated in one rotation direction, while the crank member is A gaming machine A2 comprising a selection area that becomes the non-transmission area when rotated in another rotation direction opposite to the one rotation direction.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the crank member. Thus, by changing the direction of the driving force of the driving device without changing the rotation speed of the crank member, two speed modes of the arm member when the crank member is arranged in the same phase can be formed. The variation of the speed of the arm member can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A2, the insertion portion is separated from the projection portion and the inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion facing the movement direction of the projection portion when the crank member is rotated in the one rotation direction. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the selection area is formed by providing a margin part.

  In the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A2, the selection area is formed by providing the insertion part with a margin part, so that other modes for changing the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member are provided. A member can be made unnecessary and material cost can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, at least one of the first position or the second position is formed as an end position of the movement range of the arm member, and the first position or the When the arm member is disposed at one of the second positions, the arm member facing the other of the first position and the second position, which is formed as the terminal position, is opposite to the other of the first position and the second position. A gaming machine A4, wherein a bounce suppression mechanism that suppresses movement is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, when the arm member is disposed at either the first position or the second position formed as the terminal position of the movable range of the arm member, In order to suppress the movement of the arm member toward the other side on the opposite side, it is possible to suppress the driving force that the driving device needs to generate. Therefore, the durability of the drive device can be improved.

  In addition, as a bounce suppression mechanism, when using the magnetic attraction force, when the movement is suppressed by a claw-shaped member, and the load received by the projection of the crank member from the arm member is directed in the axial direction of the crank member. The case where the insertion part of a member is formed is illustrated.

  When attracted by a magnet, the magnet is necessary as a separate member, but various attractive forces can be generated depending on the internal composition of the magnet, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

  In order to suppress the movement with the claw-shaped member, a drive device that operates the claw-shaped member is necessary, but the movement of the arm member can be mechanically stopped with the claw-shaped member.

  When the insertion part of the arm member is formed in such a manner that the load received by the projection of the crank member from the arm member is directed to the axis of the crank member, there is no need to provide another member for suppressing the movement of the arm member, The bounce of the arm member can be mechanically suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A4, when the arm member is disposed in at least one of the first position or the second position, the outer shape of the insertion portion in the vicinity of the connection position of the non-transmission area with the transmission area is The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the bounce suppressing mechanism is formed by being substantially the same as a circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the crank member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the bounce suppression mechanism is formed by continuing the rotation of the crank member after the arm member is disposed at the first position or the second position. Thereby, the change from the moving state of the arm member to the stopped state can be formed smoothly.

  In the bounce suppression mechanism, the load applied from the insertion part to the protrusion is directed to the rotation shaft of the crank member, so that it is possible to suppress the load from being applied in the rotation direction of the crank member, and the load applied to the drive device is suppressed. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is disposed at the first position, the outer shape of the insertion portion near the connection position of the non-transmission area with the transmission area is It is substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis, and is loaded with an urging force that moves the arm member from the first position toward the second position, and the non-transmission region of the insertion portion At least one of an inner depression projecting inside the insertion section or an outer depression projecting outside the insertion section with a size capable of accommodating the projection is formed on the side surface on the first position side. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is disposed at the first position, the outer shape near the connection position of the insertion portion with the transmission area of the non-transmission area However, it is substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the crank member, and an urging force for moving the arm member from the first position toward the second position is loaded on the arm member. In this case, the protrusion of the crank member is disposed in the non-transmission region of the insertion portion, so that the movement of the arm member is prevented by the protrusion and the arm member is stopped. When the crank member is rotated and the protrusion is moved in the non-transmission region, the arm member is moved when the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess are arranged to face each other. That is, when the protrusion is disposed opposite to the inner recess, the inner recess is pushed out by the protrusion, and the arm member is moved to the opposite side of the crank member. Further, when the protruding portion is disposed opposite to the outer depression, the protruding portion is accommodated in the outer depression, and the arm member is moved to the crank member side.

  As a result, the movement of the movement of the crank member is different from the movement of the arm member that occurs when the protrusion of the crank member moves in the non-transmission area and the protrusion moves through the transmission area by rotating the crank member. Can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both the improvement of the durability of the driving device and the change in the movement width of the arm member.

  That is, in order to change the movement width of the arm member, it is necessary to reverse the direction of the driving force of the driving device in accordance with the movement width of the arm member. In this case, the control burden of the driving device becomes large, and it is difficult to perform an operation with a small movement width such as vibration.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, the protrusion of the crank member is moved in the non-transmission area, and the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess are arranged to face each other, so that the movement of the arm member having a different movement width is formed. The Therefore, the movement width of the movement of the arm member can be changed without reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device. Further, by narrowing the interval between adjacent inner dents or outer dents, the arm member can be operated with a small movement width such as vibration.

  In addition, the aspect which can accommodate a protrusion part may be an aspect in which the entire protrusion part is included in the recessed part, or an aspect in which a part of the protrusion part is included in the recessed part.

<An example of a technical idea for limiting the swinging width of the expansion / contraction production device 540 with the arc-shaped hole 554>
A movable member that is movable along a predetermined movement trajectory and can be arranged at a first position and a second position that are different from each other, moves corresponding to the movable member, and contacts the movable member to move the movable member. A stopper member that limits a movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the member and changes a movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or the second position. A gaming machine B1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a movable member formed to be movable and a stopper member that limits a movement width of the movable member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-016623). reference). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the stopper member is fixed so as not to move, the stopper member is prepared separately for the case where the movable member is arranged at the first position and the case where the movable member is arranged at the second position. There is a problem that the space for disposing the stopper member becomes wide.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the stopper member moves corresponding to the movable member, the movable member is disposed at the second position when the movable member is disposed at the first position. It can also be used as a stopper member. Thereby, the space which arrange | positions a stopper member can be suppressed.

  Moreover, since the stopper member changes the movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or the movable member is arranged at the second position, the variation of the movement width of the movable member is increased. be able to.

  Examples of the stopper member include a protruding portion that protrudes from the transmission member and contacts the movable member, an inner wall portion of a recess that is recessed in the transmission member and accommodates a part of the movable member, and the like.

  Examples of movement modes include linear movement, curved movement, meandering movement, vibration, swinging, and rotational movement. The movement width in each movement mode means, for example, an actual movement distance or a linear distance between two points in the case of linear movement, curved movement, meandering movement, vibration, and the like. Or the like means an actual moving distance, a moving angle, or the like.

  In the gaming machine B1, the movable member includes an intermediate member that is pivotally supported by the first shaft and that expands and contracts in the radial direction of the first shaft, and the first position and the second position are The extension length of the intermediate member is different, the predetermined movement trajectory is formed in an arc shape centered on the first axis, and the stopper member is formed when the intermediate member is in a predetermined extension / contraction state. A gaming machine B2 that extends along the predetermined movement locus of the movable member.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the movable member is pivotally supported about the first axis so as to be able to swing and can be extended and contracted in the radial direction of the first axis. A member is provided. Therefore, the curvature radius of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member around the first axis can be changed depending on the length of the intermediate member in the expansion / contraction direction.

  Here, the stopper member is extended along a predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member when the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion / contraction state (the curvature in the extending direction of the stopper member and the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion / contraction state). The curvature of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member is the same). In this case, when the intermediate member is in a predetermined stretched state, the movable member is moved along the stopper member, and the movable member can be moved in the extending direction of the stopper member. Therefore, the movement width (swing angle) of the movable member can be maximized.

  On the other hand, when the intermediate member is in an expanded / contracted state different from the predetermined expanded / contracted state, the curvature of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member and the curvature in the extending direction of the stopper member can be made different. The trajectory and the extending direction of the stopper member can be crossed. Therefore, the movement width of the movable member can be shortened. Therefore, the movement width of the movable member can be changed by changing the expansion / contraction state of the intermediate member.

  In the gaming machine B2, the movable member includes a protrusion protruding toward the stopper member, the stopper member includes an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted, and the protrusion is connected to the insertion portion. In the inserted state, the movable member and the stopper member are interlocked with the expansion / contraction direction of the intermediate member, and the movable member is brought into contact with the insertion portion.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, since the protrusion of the movable member is inserted into the insertion part of the stopper member, the movable member and the stopper member are interlocked with the expansion / contraction direction of the intermediate member. The drive device that expands and contracts the movable member and the drive device that moves the stopper member can be combined. Further, the insertion portion regulates the movement of the movable member by being in contact with the movable member. That is, the insertion portion of the stopper member has a function as a stopper for restricting the movement of the movable member and a function for interlocking the movable member and the stopper member. As a result, functions can be consolidated.

  In the gaming machine B3, when the intermediate member expands and contracts, the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the intermediate member is expanded and contracted, so that the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side. Thereby, the movement width of a movable member can be changed with the case where a 1st axis | shaft is arrange | positioned at the inner peripheral side of an insertion part, and the case where a 1st axis | shaft is arrange | positioned at the outer peripheral side of an insertion part.

  That is, when the first shaft is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement locus of the protrusion when the movable member is moved along the predetermined movement locus follows the shape of the insertion portion), The movement locus and the shape of the insertion portion are approximated, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be widened. On the other hand, when the first shaft is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement locus of the protrusion when the movable member is moved along the predetermined movement locus is substantially reversed from the shape of the insertion portion), the protrusion The angle formed by the movement locus and the inner wall surface of the insertion portion is increased, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the insertion portion is formed so that the posture can be changed while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member, and the contact position between the movable member and the insertion portion when the insertion portion is changed in posture. Is changed, and the moving width of the predetermined moving locus of the movable member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3 or B4, the contact position between the movable member and the insertion part is changed by changing the posture of the insertion part while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member. In this case, the movement width of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member can be changed while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the insertion portion includes a groove portion that allows the protrusion portion to enter and exit along the movement locus, and the protrusion portion is separated from the insertion portion via the groove portion. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that a state can be formed, and the movable member includes a positioning auxiliary portion that is engaged with the stopper member in the separated state.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines B3 to B5, it is possible to form a separated state in which the protruding portion is separated from the insertion portion through the groove portion, and the movable member is in the separated state A positioning auxiliary portion engaged with the stopper member is provided. Therefore, compared to the operation range of the movable member, the formation range of the stopper member can be reduced, the material cost of the stopper member can be reduced, and the displacement between the movable member and the stopper member in the separated state can be reduced. Can be prevented. That is, even if the protrusion is separated from the insertion portion of the stopper member, the positioning assisting portion suppresses the relative movement of the movable member with respect to the stopper member, so that the protrusion can be returned to the insertion portion again.

<An example of the technical idea of supporting the two-stage production member 620 supported upside down>
A base member, a movable member supported by a support portion formed on the base member so as to be displaceable and moving upward from a predetermined position, a driving device for generating a driving force for displacing the movable member, and a connection to the movable member And a transmission member that transmits the driving force generated from the driving device to the movable member, and the transmission member is pivotally supported by a shaft support portion formed on the base member, A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the length from the shaft support portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmission member is shorter than the length from the support portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmission member. .

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that drives a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on a base member and moves upward from a predetermined position by transmission of driving force by a gear (for example, JP, 2011-120640, A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the moving amount of the center of gravity of the movable member when the drive device is operated in the minimum unit of resolution of the control of the drive device (for example, one step in the case of a stepping motor) is the support portion of the movable member. To the center of gravity of the movable member. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity of the movable member becomes more difficult as the center of gravity of the movable member is separated from the support portion in the radial direction.

  In addition, when the center of gravity of the movable member is shifted to one side from the inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed directly above the support portion, the movable member is inverted by generating a driving force that displaces the movable member in the opposite direction. Even if the state is maintained, if the center of gravity shifts to the other side due to the driving force, the direction of the driving force and the direction of gravity coincide with each other, and the movable member is greatly displaced.

  Therefore, as the movable member becomes longer in the radial direction of the support portion, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to make the movable member stationary in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged right above the support portion.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving device to the movable member to move the movable member upward is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion of the base member and connected to the movable member. The length from the connection position of the movable member and the connection member to the shaft support portion is formed shorter than the length from the connection position of the movable member and the connection member to the support portion. Therefore, even when the movable member is elongated in the radial direction of the support portion, it is possible to suppress the movement amount of the center of gravity of the movable member when the drive device is operated with the minimum unit of resolution of control of the drive device. it can. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the movable member stationary in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed directly above the support portion.

  As a mode in which the movable member is supported by the base member, a mode in which the movable member is pivotally supported by the base member, a mode in which the movable member is slidably supported by the base member, A compound aspect etc. are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmission member has a shorter arm length from the shaft support portion to the connection position with the movable member as the movable member moves upward from the predetermined position. Machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, as the movable member displaced about the support portion moves upward from a predetermined position, the transmission member from the shaft support portion to the connection position with the movable member is improved. Arm length is shortened. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved as compared with the case where the arm length of the transmission member is constant.

  For example, when the rotational speed of the drive device that rotates the transmission member operates at a constant speed, the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at a predetermined first length, and the arm length of the transmission member is first. A description will be given assuming that the second length is fixed to be shorter than the first length. When the rotational speed of the driving device is constant, the transmission member is fixed at the first length compared to the case where the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at the second length. The moving speed of the center of gravity of the movable member is increased when the member is arranged in a predetermined phase.

  Here, in the vicinity of the predetermined position, the movable member is quickly operated at a speed generated when the transmission member is the first arm length, and the speed generated when the transmission member is the second arm length near the inverted state. Consider the case where you want to move the movable member slowly. As a method for that purpose, a method of changing the rotational speed of the driving device in the middle is conceivable, but it cannot be adopted when it is difficult to change the rotational speed of the driving device. In addition, even if the rotational speed of the drive device can be changed, a detection sensor for detecting the timing of the change is necessary to change the rotational speed in the middle, which increases the cost. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the arm length from the shaft support portion on which the transmission member is pivotally supported to the connection position between the transmission member and the movable member is determined so that the transmission member is at a predetermined position. It is formed in such a manner that it is shortened as it moves upward. Therefore, the transmission member can be set to the first arm length in the vicinity of the predetermined position, and the transmission member can be set to the second arm length in the vicinity of the inverted state, so that the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved. .

  The configuration in which the arm length from the shaft support portion to the connection position of the transmission member and the movable member is fixed is exemplified by a case where a protrusion protruding from the transmission member is inserted and connected to the movable member. The The arm length can be changed by forming a long hole in the transmission member, and when the protrusion protruding from the movable member is slidably inserted into the long hole of the transmission member. Examples include a case where a long hole is provided in a portion where the member is supported by the support portion, and an insertion shaft rod is formed through the long hole from the base member.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the movable member includes a protruding portion that protrudes in a direction parallel to the support portion, and the transmission member is a long hole that extends in a radial direction of the shaft support portion. A gaming machine C3 comprising an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted.

  In the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the insertion portion extends in the radial direction of the shaft support portion, and the projection portion of the transmission member is inserted into the insertion portion, whereby the transmission member and the movable member Are connected, the moving direction of the connecting position is limited to the radial direction of the shaft support portion. Therefore, as the transmission arm swings, the length from the shaft support portion to the connecting position of the transmission member with the movable member can be mechanically changed.

  In addition, as an insertion part, the elongate hole formed by penetration, the recessed part formed as a bottomed hollow, etc. are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C3, the shaft support portion is disposed vertically above the support portion, and the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed on a straight line connecting the support portion and the projection portion.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C3, when the movable member takes a posture in which the protruding portion is arranged vertically above the supporting portion, the center of gravity of the supporting portion, the shaft support portion, the protruding portion, and the movable member is It is formed on the vertical line. In this case, gravity applied to the center of gravity of the movable member is loaded vertically downward with respect to the support portion and the shaft support portion. For this reason, no force in the rotational direction is applied to the movable member, so that the posture of the movable member can be maintained even when the power of the driving device is interrupted. Thereby, the burden of a drive device can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C4, a gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the driving device, and the rotation of the driving device is decelerated by the worm gear.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the driving device, and the rotation of the driving device is decelerated by the worm gear. The movement width of the movable member when operating with the minimum unit of resolution can be greatly reduced. In addition, since the transmission direction of the force via the worm gear is limited to one direction from the drive device side to the transmission member side, it is possible to prevent the worm gear from rotating due to the load from the transmission member side. It is possible to reduce the load applied to the drive device when the vehicle is stopped.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the game machine includes an urging device that generates an urging force for moving the center of gravity of the movable member above the support portion in both directions in the displacement direction of the movable member, and the urging force is A gaming machine C6, wherein the center of gravity of the movable member is balanced in the displacement direction in an inverted state in which the movable member is disposed vertically above the support portion, and becomes larger as the movable member is displaced from the inverted state.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the biasing device generates a biasing force that moves the center of gravity of the movable member above the support, and the biasing force is based on the center of gravity of the movable member. It becomes larger as the movable member is displaced from the state (inverted state) arranged vertically above the support portion. That is, the urging force can be minimized in the inverted state.

  Therefore, when the movable member is moved upward from a predetermined position, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive device that moves the movable member upward from the state where the movable member is disposed at the predetermined position by increasing the biasing force.

  Further, the urging force is generated in both directions in the displacement direction of the movable member, and is balanced in the displacement direction in the inverted state. Therefore, when the movable member is moved up from a predetermined position and the drive device is controlled to stop, the posture of the movable member is inverted by the biasing force even if the movable member does not reach the inverted state or passes the inverted state. Can be directed to. Thereby, it can be made easy to stop a movable member in an inverted state.

  In the gaming machine C6, the movable member can form a first state in which the center of gravity is displaced by a predetermined amount from vertically above the support portion, and a second state in which the center of gravity is displaced by a predetermined amount or more. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that in the second state, the rate of change in the urging force when the displacement is the same is greater in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6, the movable member is larger than the predetermined amount from the inverted state than the first state on the inverted state where the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged vertically above the support portion. In the displaced second state, the rate of change of the urging force when the displacement is the same is larger. In this case, when starting the movable member from the state in which the movable member is arranged in the second state, it is possible to suppress a burden at the time of starting the drive device. Moreover, since the acceleration of a movable member when a movable member is arrange | positioned near an inverted state can be reduced, it can be made easy to stop a movable member in an inverted state.

<An example of a technical idea in which the spring constant of the torsion spring 650 changes during swinging>
A movable member formed to be movable between the first position and the second position, a drive device for generating a drive force for moving the movable member, and an urging force for returning the movable member to the first position. And a biasing device for generating the movable member, wherein the movable member is movable with respect to a change rate of a biasing force generated when the movable member is disposed in a first biasing region from the first position to a predetermined position. The rate of change in biasing force that occurs when the member is disposed in a second biasing region that is connected to the first biasing region and is formed away from the first position is increased. A gaming machine D1 characterized by that.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that uses an urging force of an urging device such as an elastic spring as an auxiliary force when the movable member is moved by the driving force generated by the driving device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-2011). -1264040). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the urging force of the urging device is proportionally increased by the amount of displacement of the movable member, and it is difficult to change the purpose of the urging device by the arrangement of the movable member. There was a problem that. That is, it is difficult to make the movement of the movable member smooth by suppressing the urging force in a certain area, and to improve the urging force and make the movement of the movable member abrupt in another area.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the change rate of the urging force urged toward the first position is such that the movable member is attached to the second portion as compared with the case where the movable member is disposed in the first urging region. The case where it is arranged in the force area is enlarged. That is, for example, when the movable member stopped at the second position is started toward the first position (second urging region), a sufficient urging force can be obtained by the urging device, while the movable member is in the first position. When arranged in the urging region, the change in the urging force is suppressed, and the operation of the movable member can be performed smoothly (slowly).

  In addition, as a mode in which the change rate of the urging force of the urging device is changed by the arrangement of the movable member, the number of urging devices that cause the movable member to generate an urging amount increases in the middle, A case where the spring constant of the elastic spring is changed by the arrangement of the movable member is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine D1, the biasing device is a pair of long members that intersect with the moving direction of the movable member and are respectively disposed on a pair of surfaces that sandwich the movable member in the moving direction. And the other end portion, which is an end portion on the opposite side of the one end portion, is formed from an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed, and the movable member is A main body sandwiched between a pair of long members; and formed on the opposite side of the main body portion with respect to the pair of long members and in contact with at least one of the pair of long members in the moving direction of the main body portion. An abutting portion formed so as to be able to come into contact, and the abutting portion is connected and fixed to the movable member, and when the movable member is disposed in the first urging region, the movable member is Among the long members, the movement of the movable member A biasing force is applied by being brought into contact with one long member on the side closer to the movable member, and the movable member has a biasing force due to a contact between the other long member and the contact portion. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being given.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the change in the change rate of the urging force by the urging device is shifted for each long member with respect to the contact timing between the movable member and the pair of long members. Can be formed. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the urging force of the urging device by the control or to prepare another member for improving the urging force.

  That is, since the other end of the pair of long members is restricted from moving, the one long member on the side closer to the movable member due to the movement of the movable member is pressed against the movable member and moved. The other long member on the opposite side does not receive a force from the movable member. Therefore, in the first urging region, when the movable member moves, the other long member disposed on the side opposite to the moving direction of the movable member remains in place.

  On the other hand, in the second urging region, the other long member is brought into contact with the contact portion by moving the movable member. Thereby, a biasing force is also generated from the other long member. Therefore, the biasing force applied to the movable member in the second biasing region can be increased.

  Examples of the elastic spring include a coil spring, a torsion spring, and a leaf spring.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging device is a pair of long members that intersect with the moving direction of the movable member and are respectively disposed on a pair of surfaces that sandwich the movable member in the moving direction. And the other end, which is an end opposite to the one end, is formed from an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed, and the movable member is A body portion sandwiched between the pair of long members; and at least one of the pair of long members formed on the opposite side of the body portion with respect to the pair of long members and moving in the body portion An abutting portion formed so as to be abuttable, and the abutting portion is connected and fixed to the movable member, and when the movable member is disposed in the first urging region, the movable member is Of the pair of long members, the movable member When the movable member is brought into contact with one long member that is closer to the movable member due to the movement and applied with an urging force, and the movable member is disposed in the second urging region, the one long member is disposed. The game machine D3 is characterized in that an intermediate portion of the game machine is pressed against a contact portion disposed on one long member side with respect to the main body portion.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the change in the change ratio of the urging force is formed by pressing the middle part of one long member against the contact part. That is, one of the long members that has already been deformed by the movement of the movable member is further deformed starting from the intermediate portion that is pressed against the contact portion, thereby causing a change in the change rate of the biasing force. Here, in the deformation starting from the intermediate portion, the length of the portion subjected to the deformation is shorter than the deformation starting from the other end, so the ratio of the change in the biasing force with respect to the moving amount of the movable member is Increase. Thereby, in the 2nd energizing field, change of energizing force to the amount of movement of the movable member can be increased. Therefore, the change rate of the urging force can be increased.

  In the gaming machine D3, the one long member includes a first bending point that is bent toward the abutting portion that is disposed to face the one long member, and the one long member is the first bending point. A gaming machine D4, which is pressed against the contact portion.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, since one long member is brought into contact with the contact portion disposed oppositely at the first bending point, the one long member is brought into contact. It is extended by contact with the part. Therefore, the tip portion of the urging device that applies the urging force to the movable member can be separated from the other end of the long member that is the starting point of the urging force and the first bending point. Therefore, the moment that the movable member is loaded from the urging device in the second urging region can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine D4, the movable member includes a tip enlarged region that is enlarged in the moving direction as the distance from the other end of the elongated member increases, and one of the movable member and the elongated member is expanded in the tip enlarged region. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the end of the game machine abuts against the game machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the movable member has a tip enlarged region, and the movable member and one end of the long member are brought into contact with each other in the tip enlarged region. Therefore, when one long member is extended by pressing one long member against the contact portion, the contact position between the movable member and the long member is separated from the other end of the long member. The amount of deformation of the long member is increased. Therefore, the urging force loaded from the urging device to the movable member can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D5, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that an arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D2 to D5, variations in the change in the biasing force generated by the long member can be increased. That is, for example, when the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion is narrowed, the timing at which the rate of change in the biasing force of the long member increases can be set earlier.

<An example of a technical idea in which a plurality of out openings are provided and the buffer rib 322 is formed on the lower plate 320>
Inside the game area in which the ball is allowed to flow down, the in-board role arranged in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the ball formed on one side in the width direction of the in-board role A first out port which is an opening for discharging from the area, and a second out port which is an opening formed on the other side in the width direction of the in-board accessory which is opposite to the one side in the width direction and which discharges a ball from the game area The first out port and the second out port include a lower plate portion extending from the lower surface of the opening to the front surface and having a guide surface on the upper surface, and the guide of the lower plate portion. The surface includes buffer ribs extending in a rib shape in the opening direction on the corresponding side in the first out port or the second out port, and is formed to be raised from the guide surface on the outer side in the width direction. The buffer rib has an aspect ratio that goes outward in the width direction. Gaming machine E1, characterized in that it is formed smaller.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of outlets are arranged (see, for example, JP-A-9-192301). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is preferable to reduce the size of each out port as the number of out ports increases. There was a problem that the discharge of game balls could be delayed.

  For example, when the height at which the sphere bounces up and down on the front side of the out mouth becomes equal to or greater than the vertical width of the out mouth, the sphere stays in front of the out mouth. Further, for example, when a side surface is disposed on the side surface in the width direction of the out port to form a wall, the ball that has flowed from the width direction to the front side of the out port collides with the side surface of the role and rebounds in the width direction. At this time, if the amount of rebounding in the width direction is equal to or greater than the lateral width of the out port, the ball stays in front of the out port.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the buffer rib is formed on the guide surface formed on the lower plate part, it is possible to suppress the rebound of the ball or to decelerate the ball. In other words, when the ball collides from the up and down direction, the buffer rib is bent and deformed, so that the buffer rib becomes a cushion and the rebound of the ball can be suppressed. Further, when the ball collides from the left and right direction, the ball is braked by being caught in the buffer rib.

  Here, the buffer rib extending in the opening direction is vulnerable to a load from the left-right direction and may be damaged by a collision of a ball from the left-right direction.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the guide surface includes the step portion on the outer side in the width direction, the sphere that flows down from the left and right direction toward the buffer rib falls from the top of the step portion to the buffer rib. . In this case, the vertical component of the direction of collision of the sphere with the buffer rib can be increased, and damage to the buffer rib can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the step portion has a function of stopping a sphere that moves in the left-right direction on the guide surface, it is possible to prevent the sphere that moves on the guide surface from bouncing over the lateral width of the out port.

  Since the buffer rib is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game area, a large rebound suppressing effect can be obtained in the vicinity of the center in the width direction of the game area where the falling balls tend to concentrate. Thereby, a ball | bowl can be discharged | emitted smoothly from an out port. Moreover, the arrangement | positioning position of an out port can be corrected below by match | combining the curve of the lower side of a game area | region, and the lower surface of a buffer rib.

  Here, the higher the formation height of the buffer ribs, the greater the effect of suppressing the ball rebound is because the amount of deflection of the buffer ribs increases. That is, the greater the amount of deflection of the buffer rib, the more effective the cushion effect is, and the bounce can be easily suppressed. For this reason, it is preferable for the bounce suppression effect to make the aspect ratio of the buffer rib constant in the left-right direction (the length in the vertical direction is constant).

  On the other hand, if the aspect ratio of the buffer rib is constant (the length in the vertical direction is constant), it is necessary to increase the height of the stepped portion, and the path of the sphere leading to the stepped portion is also upward As a result, the game area is narrowed, which is not preferable in terms of space efficiency.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the aspect ratio (length in the vertical direction) of the buffer ribs is reduced on the outer side in the width direction of the gaming area where the falling balls are difficult to concentrate, and the center in the width direction of the gaming area where the falling balls are likely to concentrate. Then, the aspect ratio (length in the vertical direction) of the buffer rib is increased. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both the improvement of the ball discharge efficiency and the securing of the game area.

  In addition, extending in the opening direction is not particularly limited, and means extending in the opening direction in a shape such as a straight line, a waveform, and a mountain shape.

  In the gaming machine E1, the guide surface includes an outer inclined portion that is inclined downward toward the outer side in the width direction of the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the guide surface has an outer inclined portion, so that the speed of the sphere flowing into the guide surface from the outside in the width direction can be decelerated by gravity acceleration. Deceleration time can be shortened.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a gaming machine E3 is characterized in that a non-flowing region where a ball cannot flow down is formed obliquely above at least one of the first out port and the second out port.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the flow of the sphere flowing in the diagonally downward direction from the non-flowing area toward the guide surface is limited, so the sphere flow down to the guide surface The number of paths can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to narrow the direction in which the ball that has flowed down bounces back. Thereby, the external shape of at least one of a 1st out port or a 2nd out port can be narrowed.

  In the gaming machine E3, in the non-flowing area, an opening / closing device disposed in the gaming area and capable of opening and closing to the front side is disposed above at least one of the first out port and the second out port. The gaming machine E4 is formed on the front side of the opening / closing device.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, a non-flowing region is formed by the opening / closing device. Thereby, the space which arises by suppressing the opening dimension of the direction desired to the non-flowing area | region side of a 1st out port or a 2nd out port can be utilized as an installation space of an opening / closing device.

  In the closed state, the opening / closing device causes the ball flowing down in front of the opening / closing device to flow downward in the gaming area, and in the open state, the ball flowing down in front of the opening / closing apparatus is moved backward in the gaming area. Has the function of flowing down. Therefore, it is possible to reliably form the non-flowing region as compared with the case where the ball flows down irregularly by colliding with a nail or the like.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the gaming machine E5 is provided with a direction adjusting rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction on the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, a direction adjusting rib extending in a rib shape in the opening direction is provided on the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port. The resistance to the sphere flowing down while colliding with the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port can be suppressed.

<Characteristic F group> (The image when the power is turned on is also used during normal operation)
Display means capable of displaying a predetermined display form; display control means for causing the display means to display the display form; and storage means for storing display data corresponding to the display form displayed by the display control means. And setting means for reading the display data from the storage means and setting the display data as display data to be displayed on the display means by the display control means, and initial setting of the game is executed in the storage means The initial display data corresponding to the initial image to be displayed is stored, and the setting means reads the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting and sets it as display data to be displayed on the display means. In the effect executed after the completion of the initial setting, the display means reads the initial display data read in the initial setting. Gaming machine F1, characterized in that it is to be used as display data to be displayed.

  Here, conventionally, in gaming machines, various effect images are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. In such a gaming machine, generally, image information of an image to be displayed on a display device is stored in advance in a storage unit, and when displaying an image, the corresponding image information is read from the storage unit, and image processing is performed. In addition, the display device is configured to display the image (for example, JP-A-2006-223598). However, in the above-described gaming machine, the image information increases, so that the amount of image data used in the gaming machine increases, and the load due to the increase in the capacity of the storage means for storing and the processing to read out increases. There was a bug. Due to such problems, improvement in image display control has been demanded.

  According to the gaming machine F1, since the initial display data displayed at the time of initial setting is also used for effects after completion of the initial setting, the display data can be shared, the amount of display data can be reduced, and the image display There is an effect that control can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, the display means includes first display means and second display means different from the first display means, and the display control means is the first display means or the second display means. The display unit displays the display mode, and the setting unit reads the initial display data from the storage unit in the initial setting, and displays the display data on the first display unit and the second display unit. In the effect executed after the initial setting, the initial display data read in the initial setting is set as display data to be displayed on either the first display means or the second display means. A gaming machine F2 that is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, display data can be shared for the display means constituted by the first display means and the second display means, and display control can be performed. There is an effect that the load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the initial display data is set with a display area of the first display means and the second display means as one display area.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, the first display means and the second display means can be set as one display data, so that the display control can be simplified.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, an acquisition unit that acquires information, a determination unit that determines information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a determination result determined by the determination unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information, and the identification information is displayed as initial identification information displayed in the initial image and dynamic display after completion of the initial setting. A gaming machine F4 characterized by comprising normal identification information.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the initial identification information displayed in the initial image and the normal identification information. Since it is comprised, there exists an effect that it can be made to recognize that it is an initial setting by a player.

  In the gaming machine F4, the initial image includes a display image including the initial identification information displayed on the first display means and a game information image indicating a game content displayed on the second display means. A gaming machine F5 characterized by comprising at least an image.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F4, the initial image is composed of initial identification information displayed on the first display means and a display image including the game information image displayed on the second display means. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of the game content and the determination result at the same time during the initial setting.

  In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the initial identification information displayed during the initial setting on the first display means is configured with a data amount smaller than the normal identification information. F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, since the initial identification information is composed of display data smaller than the normal identification information, the control load at the time of initial setting can be reduced, and the initial identification information can be read and displayed quickly. effective.

  In any of the gaming machines F4 to F6, the second display means is configured with a display area smaller than the first display means, and when the game is not performed for a predetermined period, the second display means A game machine F7, wherein a display image including the game information image displayed as the initial image is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F4 to F6, when the game is not performed for a predetermined period, the display including the game information image on the second display means using the initial display data Since the image is displayed, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced and the game content can be notified.

  In the gaming machine F7, when the game is not performed for the predetermined period, the display data corresponding to the display image displayed on the first display means among the initial images is set to non-display. A gaming machine F8 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F7, the initial image displayed on the first display means is set to non-display, so that the first display means can display differently. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines F2 to F8, the setting means sets the initial display data read in the initial setting for the first display means in the effect executed after the initial setting. When the display data corresponding to the second display means is set to non-display and set to the second display means, the display data corresponding to the first display means is set to non-display. A gaming machine F9 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F2 to F8, the first display means and the second display means can independently display using the initial display data. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine F9, when the setting means sets the initial display data read in the initial setting for the first display means in the effect executed after the initial setting, A gaming machine F10 that is set to be displayed at a different display position.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F9, it can be shown to the player as if the display is different from the display displayed in the initial setting, and the initial display data can be used in a wide variety of ways. There is an effect that can be done.

<Characteristic G group> (Change the position of XX depending on the fluctuation contents between the shutter and the main liquid crystal)
First display means capable of displaying identification information, second display means different from the first display means, and the identification information displayed on the first display means or the second display means are dynamically displayed. Dynamic display means for displaying, privilege granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to a player when the specific identification information is displayed on the first display means or the second display means, and the dynamic A gaming machine G1 having switching display means for switching and displaying the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means between the first display means and the second display means.

  Here, for example, by providing a plurality of display means for effecting a gaming machine and performing a variation effect and a jackpot effect on each display means, a player can perform a synergistic effect using a plurality of display means. There is known a gaming machine that aims to improve the interest of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-081256). However, the above-described gaming machine has been required to improve convenience by using a plurality of display devices. Due to such problems, improvement in convenience has been demanded.

  According to the gaming machine G1, an effect (dynamic display of identification information) displayed on the first display means or the second display means is applied to either the first display means or the second display means by the switching display means. It can be switched and displayed. Thus, the identification information can be displayed at a position that is easily visible to the player according to the game state, and the convenience can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, first driving means that can be driven to a first position, which is a position that makes it difficult to visually recognize the identification information that is dynamically displayed on the first display means, and dynamic display on the second display means. Second switching means that can be driven to a second position, which is a position that makes it difficult to visually recognize the identification information, and the switching display means is configured such that the first driving means is at the first position. In this case, the identification information is displayed on the second display means, and when the second driving means is at the second position, the identification information is displayed on the first display means. A gaming machine G2 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, there is an effect that the first driving means and the second driving means can suppress a problem that prevents the identification information from being visually recognized.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the second display means has a moving means capable of moving on the front side of the first display means, and the second display means is moved by the moving means in the switching display means. The game machine G3 is switched so that the identification information is displayed on the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that prevents the identification information from being visually recognized by the second display means.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the display data of the display mode displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit is the display data displayed on one display area as the first display unit. A gaming machine G4, which is composed of composite display data corresponding to the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the display data of the first display means and the second display means can be set with the composite display data, so that the control load can be reduced. is there.

  In the gaming machine G4, coordinate information for setting each display area of the first display means and the second display means as one display area is set, and the composite display data is the A gaming machine G5 characterized by comprising display data displayed for each coordinate corresponding to the coordinate information.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4, there is an effect that display data to be displayed on the first display means and the second display means can be easily set.

<Feature H group> (drop control)
In the gaming machine, comprising: a movable member having a movable portion that is movable at least between the first position and the second position; and drive means for driving the movable member to the third position and the fourth position. A restricting means for restricting the movement from the position to the second position, and the movable from the third position to the fourth position in a state where the restriction by the restricting means is released based on the establishment of the first condition. The member is driven by the driving unit, and the movable member is driven from the third position to the fourth position in a state of being regulated by the regulating unit based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. A gaming machine H1 having drive control means to be driven by the means.

  Here, for example, by moving a movable accessory provided in the gaming machine, an indication of an expected degree of winning is made. In such a gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that improves the interest of the player by increasing the movable pattern of the movable accessory (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-079697). In this case, in order to increase the movable pattern of the movable accessory, it is necessary to use a large number of drive devices (for example, a motor), which causes a problem that power consumption increases. Due to such a problem, suppression of power consumption has been demanded.

  According to the gaming machine H1, by driving the driving means, the movable part can be moved by its driving vibration or the like, so that the power consumption is increased compared to the case where the movable part is moved electrically. There is an effect that can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine H1, the gaming machine H2 includes a moving means for moving the movable portion from the second position to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the movable member is driven to the fourth position by the driving means, so that even when the movable portion is moved to the second position, There is an effect that it can be returned to one position. In this case, the movable portion may be moved to the first position by inertia force (acceleration) that drives the movable member from the fourth position to the third position without providing the movable means.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player, and an effect that indicates whether or not the privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit is predetermined. And an effect execution means that executes in an effect period, and the drive control means moves the movable member to the third position when a move condition is established during a period in which the effect is executed by the effect execution means. To the fourth position, and when the effect indicating that the privilege is given by the privilege granting unit is executed, it is easy to drive in a state where the regulation by the regulation unit is released. A gaming machine H3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H1 or H2, in the effect that a privilege is easily given, the movable member is easily driven to the fourth position in a state where the regulation is released, so the movable part is the second. There is an effect that the player can be expected to receive a privilege when moving to a position.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the drive control means moves the movable member in the same operation in a state where the restriction by the restriction means is released and a state where the restriction is restricted. A gaming machine H4.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the determination as to whether or not the movable member is regulated by the difference in the operation of driving. Here, the operation refers to a difference in speed, drive pattern, drive direction, or the like.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the drive control means is a position between the third position and the fourth position when the movable member is driven from the third position to the fourth position. A gaming machine H5 that is temporarily stopped at a midway position for a predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the temporary stop makes it possible to easily move the movable portion to the second position by inertial force or the like when not excited. There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the fourth position is configured at a position below the third position, and the driving means reciprocates between the third position and the fourth position. A gaming machine H6 that is configured to be possible.

  According to the gaming machine H6, the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5 has an effect that the movable part can be easily moved by the lowered gravity.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the movable means is constituted by a stepping motor, and the restricting means energizes the stepping motor in a stopped state.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H6, the movable means and the regulating means can be configured by stepping motors, and the configuration can be simplified.

<Characteristic group I> (Avoid execution of similar effects)
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect, a specific period setting means for setting a specific period during which a specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, and the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, A specific condition determining means for determining whether or not a specific condition that can be executed is satisfied according to the execution period of the effect, and the effect executing means is controlled by the specific condition determining means. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied.

  Here, for example, when a certain amount of time has elapsed since turning on the power supply of the gaming machine, by shifting to a specific effect different from the normal general effect, by displaying a periodic effect that is periodically executed, A gaming machine aimed at improving the interest of a player has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252534). In this case, it is difficult to determine whether or not the regular production is being executed when the production with the sound and image similar to the regular production is executed in the regular production that is periodically executed. There was a defect that the player would be confused. Due to such problems, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand.

  According to the gaming machine I1, in the period of executing the specific effect, whether or not the execution is possible is determined before the execution, so that the confusion of the player due to the defect in the execution timing of the effect can be suppressed, and the game is performed in an easy-to-understand manner There is an effect that can be made.

  The gaming machine I1 has time measuring means capable of timing time information, and the specific period setting means starts the specific period based on the fact that the predetermined time information has been timed by the time measuring means. A gaming machine I2 which is at least set.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I1, the start of a specific period is set based on the timing of predetermined time information, so the specific period is also set at the same time for other gaming machines. There is an effect that it can be easily configured.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the effect executing means executes a normal effect other than the specific effect during the specific period, and the specific condition determining means is based on the normal effect being executed. A gaming machine I3 characterized by determining whether a specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, since the establishment of the specific condition is determined based on the normal performance, the specific performance is performed in consideration of the relationship between the specific performance and the normal performance. There is an effect that it can be executed.

  The gaming machine I3 has operation means that can be operated by the player and detection means for detecting that the operation means has been operated, and at least one of the specific effect and the normal effect is And an operation effect that causes the player to operate the operation means, and the specific condition is established when the operation effect of the specific effect and the normal effect are not synchronized. A gaming machine I4.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I3, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the specific production and the operation production of the normal production are executed at the same time, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, dynamic display executing means for performing dynamic display of identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the specific identification that gives a privilege advantageous to the player Special game state setting means for setting a special game state that is a game state in which information is easy to be displayed, and the specific effect includes a suggestion effect indicating whether or not the special game state is set. A gaming machine I5 that is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, it is possible to recognize that a special gaming state is set by a specific performance, and to be interested in a specific performance. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the specific period setting means sets the specific period for a predetermined period every time a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on. The execution means is for executing the specific effect when the specific condition is satisfied for each predetermined period based on the specific period being set, and the specific condition determining means performs the specific condition. The gaming machine I6 is characterized by having delay means for delaying the specific effect and executing the effect by the effect execution means when it is determined that is not established.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I2 to I5, even if the specific condition is not satisfied, the specific presentation is executed with a delay, so the player is confused There is an effect that can be suppressed.

<Feature J group> (0.125 seconds production)
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on establishment of the acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and storage means based on establishment of the start condition A discriminating unit for discriminating stored information; a display unit for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result discriminated by the discriminating unit; and an identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display unit. Based on the fact that information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the benefit granting means for giving a benefit that is advantageous to the player, the effect mode output means for outputting a predetermined effect, and before the start condition is established A pre-discriminating means for discriminating the acquired information, and an effect execution means for executing an output of the effect based on the discrimination result of the prior discriminating means to the effect mode output means. In the aspect output means, a plurality of output areas in which the output of the effect is set are set, and when the effect execution means executes the output of the new effect, the output that has output the effect first. A gaming machine J1 that outputs the new effect to the output area different from the area.

  Here, for example, in a pachinko machine, when the game ball wins the starting opening and the reserved memory number increases, the reserved random number information is determined in advance (prefetching), and the determination result is a predetermined result (big hit) A gaming machine is known that aims to increase the player's expectation as to whether or not the variable display corresponding to the hold will be a big hit by performing an effect suggesting that For example, JP2012-16499). In such a gaming machine, there is a problem that if the game time is increased by configuring the variation time to be short, the effect period such as the lottery result is shortened and it becomes difficult for the player to understand. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand even when the variation time is short.

  According to the gaming machine J1, a plurality of output areas in which an effect based on the determination result of the prior determination means (an effect that suggests the determination result of the hold) is set, and the output areas are set in advance. The next effect is output to an output area different from the output area from which the effect is output. As a result, even when the determination result of the prior discrimination means is newly acquired during the execution of the effect, the effect based on the determination result of the prior determination means is displayed in a different output area, so that the effect being executed is displayed. An effect based on the determination result of the new prior determination means can be executed without ending. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused.

  In the gaming machine J1, a predetermined order is set in the plurality of output areas, and when the effect execution means executes the new effect, the output area that has output the effect first is next. The game machine J2 is characterized in that the output of the new effect is executed for the output areas in the order corresponding to.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine J1, the effects are sequentially output according to the order set in the output area, so the output area of the latest effect and the new effect overlaps. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the effect mode output means is configured by display means for displaying a predetermined display mode as the predetermined effect, and the display area of the display means is divided into a plurality of small areas as the output area. A gaming machine J3 characterized in that an area is set.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are produced. That is, it is possible to display a plurality of effects simultaneously by effectively using the display area. Therefore, there is an effect that the production period can be set longer.

  In the gaming machine J2 or 3, the storage means is configured to be able to store the information up to a predetermined number, and the information acquisition means is stored in the storage means when the acquisition condition is satisfied. If the information is less than the predetermined number, the information is acquired, and the effect execution means first also applies when the acquisition condition is satisfied and the information is not acquired by the information acquisition means. The game machine J4 is characterized in that an effect output is executed for the output area corresponding to the next order of the output areas that have been output.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J2 or J3, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player think as if more information is acquired.

  In the gaming machine J3 or J4, when the information is acquired by the acquisition means, the content of the effect executed by the effect execution means is determined based on the determination result by the prior determination means for the information, Production content determination for determining production content to be executed by the production execution unit based on a determination result other than the specific determination result when the acquisition condition is satisfied and the information acquisition unit has not acquired the information. A gaming machine J5 having means.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J3, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player play the game as if information has been acquired.

  In the gaming machine J5, the effect content determining means determines an effect period together with the effect content, and the determined effect period elapses in the output area where the output of the effect is executed by the effect executing means. The game machine J6 is characterized by having an ending means for forcibly ending the effect that is being executed when the effect that has not been executed is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J5, it is possible to suppress a problem that different effects are output in the same output area, and it is possible to provide a game that is easily understood by the player.

  In the gaming machine J5, the effect content determining means determines an effect period together with the effect content, and the effect executing means executes the effect period in the output area for executing the output of the newly determined effect. The game machine J7 is characterized in that when the effect that has not elapsed has been executed, the effect newly determined is executed by overwriting the effect being executed.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J5, it is possible to suppress a problem that different effects are output in the same output area, and it is possible to provide a game that is easily understood by the player.

<Characteristic K group> (actually operating an accessory is operated under one operating condition)
First movable means movable in the first movable range, second movable means different from the first movable means movable in the second movable range, and first movable relative to the first movable means The first movable setting means for setting a pattern, the second movable setting means for setting a second movable pattern with respect to the second movable means, and the operation of the first movable means movable by the first movable pattern And when the operation condition corresponding to the operation of the second movable means that is movable by the second movable pattern is not satisfied, the first or second movable pattern is set so that the operation condition is satisfied. Determining means for determining correction data for correcting at least one of them, and correcting means for correcting at least one of the first or second movable patterns based on the correction data determined by the determining means; Gaming machine K1, characterized in that it comprises.

  Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member that is variable by a motor or the like in its configuration. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can perform a wide variety of performance operations by changing a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the number of variable members is increased, it may be difficult to appropriately set the operation. In addition, some of the above-described gaming machines can change a plurality of variable members in a single effect, and can execute more various effects. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of variable members are combined and changed, the variable modes may deviate from each other, and the operation quality may deteriorate.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the first movable means is moved within the first movable range, and the second movable means different from the first movable means is moved within the second movable range. The first movable pattern is set by the first movable setting means for the first movable means, and the second movable pattern is set by the second movable setting means for the second movable means. The operation condition seems to be satisfied when the operation condition according to the operation of the first movable means that moves according to the first movable pattern and the operation of the second movable means that moves according to the second movable pattern is not satisfied. Further, correction data for correcting at least one of the first and second movable patterns is determined by the determining means. Based on the correction data determined by the determining means, at least one of the first and second movable patterns is corrected by the correcting means.

  Thereby, since it can suppress that the operation | movement contrary to an operating condition is performed, there exists an effect that a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means can be moved suitably.

  The gaming machine K1 includes an effect executing means for executing a predetermined movable effect, wherein the first movable means and the second movable means are movable at least in the predetermined movable effect. A gaming machine K2.

  According to the gaming machine K2, a predetermined movable effect is executed by the effect execution means. The first movable means and the second movable means are moved at least in a predetermined movable effect.

  Thereby, the 1st movable means and the 2nd movable means which are moved in a predetermined movable production can be operated according to operation conditions. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the operation that is contrary to the operation condition in the predetermined movable effect, it is possible to improve the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means in the predetermined movable effect. There is.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the second movable means is configured to accompany the first movable means and is configured to be movable together with the first movable means.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the second movable means is configured to accompany the first movable means and is movable together with the first movable means. There is an effect that an operation with a sense of unity can be performed with the operation of the second movable means.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a storage unit that stores a plurality of different correction data determined by the determination unit, and the first movable unit and the second unit when the operation condition is not satisfied. Information discriminating means for discriminating information necessary for establishing the operating condition based on respective movable positions with respect to the movable means, and the determining means is based on the information discriminated by the information discriminating means. The gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the correction data is determined from the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a plurality of different correction data determined by the determining unit is stored in the storage unit. When the operating condition is not satisfied, the information determining means determines information necessary to establish the operating condition based on the respective movable positions of the first movable means and the second movable means, and the information determination Based on the information determined by the means, correction data is determined from the storage means by the determining means.

  As a result, when the operating condition is not satisfied, the movable pattern can be corrected by a process with a relatively light processing load, in which correction data is determined from the storage means, so that the processing load can be reduced. There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the determination unit corrects the movable pattern of the second movable unit so that the operation satisfies the operation condition when the operation condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine K5, which determines data.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the operation condition is not satisfied, the correction data for correcting the movable pattern of the second movable means is determined by the determination means so that the operation satisfies the operation condition. Therefore, the second movable means is corrected. Thus, there is an effect that the operation quality can be improved.

  The gaming machine K5 includes period setting means for setting a charging period for confirming operation contents of the first movable setting means and the second movable setting means based on power-on of the gaming machine, and the determining means Determines the correction data for correcting the second movable pattern so that the operation condition is satisfied when the operation condition is not satisfied in the charging period, and the correction means A gaming machine K6, which corrects a movable pattern set after the insertion period ends based on the correction data determined by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K5, the following effects are produced. In other words, the period setting unit sets an insertion period for confirming the operation contents of the first movable setting unit and the second movable setting unit based on the power-on of the gaming machine, and the operation condition is satisfied in the charging period. If not, correction data for correcting the second movable pattern is determined by the determining means so that the operating condition is satisfied. Based on the determined correction data, the movable pattern set after the insertion period is corrected by the correction means.

Thereby, after the closing period is completed, it is possible to set the movable pattern corrected to the state where the operation condition is satisfied. That is, there is an effect that the first movable means and the second movable means can be moved in a state where the operation condition is satisfied during most of the time when the gaming machine is operating.
<Characteristic L group> (Move the action of one accessory to the other)
A first movable means movable within a first movable range; a second movable means different from the first movable means movable within a second movable range; the first movable means and the second movable means; And a movable control means for moving the first movable data corresponding to a predetermined first movable pattern with respect to the first movable means. 1 movable setting means, and determining means for determining movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means that is movable in the first movable pattern according to the set first movable data, A gaming machine L1 comprising: second movement setting means for setting the second movement means to move by the movement control means based on the movement data determined by the determination means.

  Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member that is variable by a motor or the like in its configuration. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can perform a wide variety of performance operations by changing a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the number of variable members is increased, it may be difficult to appropriately set the operation. In addition, some of the above-described gaming machines can change a plurality of variable members in a single effect, and can execute more various effects. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of variable members are combined and changed, the variable modes may deviate from each other, and the operation quality may deteriorate.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the first movable setting means sets the first movable data corresponding to the first movable pattern predetermined for the first movable means. Based on the set first movable data, the movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means that moves in the first movable pattern is determined by the determining means. The second movable setting means is set so that the second movable means can be moved by the movable control means based on the movable data determined by the determining means.

  Thereby, since the second movable means can be moved by an operation corresponding to the operation of the first movable means, there is an effect that the first movable means and the second movable means can be suitably moved.

  The gaming machine L1 includes an effect executing means for executing a predetermined movable effect, wherein the first movable means and the second movable means are movable at least in the predetermined movable effect. A gaming machine L2.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a predetermined movable effect is executed by the effect executing means. The first movable means and the second movable means are moved at least in a predetermined movable effect.

  Thereby, the second movable means can be moved by an operation corresponding to the operation of the first movable means in a predetermined movable effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be improved in a predetermined movable effect.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the second movable means is attached to the first movable means, and is configured to be movable together with the first movable means. .

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the second movable means is configured to accompany the first movable means and is moved together with the first movable means. There is an effect that an operation with a sense of unity can be performed with the operation of the second movable means.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the determining means is moved in the first movable pattern based on the end of the operation of the first movable means that is movable in the first movable pattern. A gaming machine L4 characterized in that it determines movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the first movable pattern is movable based on the end of the operation of the first movable means that is movable according to the first movable pattern. Since the movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means determined is determined by the determining means, it is possible to determine the movable data taking into account the operation of the series of first movable patterns. Therefore, since the second movable means can be operated in a manner more suitable for the operation of the first movable means, there is an effect that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be further improved.

  The gaming machine L4 includes period setting means for setting an initial setting period for performing an initial setting based on power-on of the gaming machine, and the first movable setting means is based on the setting of the initial setting period. A gaming machine L5 that sets the first movable data.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L4, the following effects are produced. That is, an initial setting period for performing an initial setting based on power-on for the gaming machine is set by the period setting means. Then, the first movable data is set by the first movable setting means based on the setting of the initial setting period.

  As a result, the movable data corresponding to the operation of the first movable means moved by the first movable pattern in the initial setting period can be determined. Therefore, after the initial setting period, the second movable means is moved to the first movable means. There is an effect that it can be moved by an operation corresponding to the moving means.

  In the gaming machine L5, when it is determined that the first movable means is moved by the movable determination means and the movable determination means for determining whether or not the first movable means is movable after the end of the initial setting period. Specific movement setting means for setting specific movement data corresponding to a predetermined specific movement pattern, and the determination means sets the second movement for setting an operation corresponding to the specific movement pattern. A gaming machine L6 characterized by determining movable data of means.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first moving means is moved after the initial setting period is determined by the movement determining means, and it is determined by the movement determining means that the first movable means is moved, the predetermined identification is performed. Specific movable data corresponding to the movable pattern is set by the specific movable setting means. Movable data of the second movable means for setting an operation corresponding to a specific movable pattern is determined by the determining means.

  As a result, the second movable means can be moved by an operation corresponding to a specific movable pattern, so that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the determination means includes a timing at which the operation of the first movable means at which the first movable pattern is set ends, and a timing at which the operation of the second movable means ends. The game machine L7 is characterized in that the movable data is determined so as to match.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the timing at which the operation of the first movable means having at least the first movable pattern is set and the operation of the second movable means are completed. Since the movable data is determined by the determining means so as to match the timing to perform, the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means is determined at the operation end timing which is one of the timings most noticed by the player. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the motion determination unit has a predetermined movable amount of the first movable unit that is movable in the first movable pattern according to the set first movable data. Based on the above, the gaming machine L8 is characterized in that the operation of the first movable means is discriminated.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L1 to L3, the movable amount of the first movable means that is movable in the first movable pattern according to the set first movable data becomes the predetermined movable amount. Based on the above, the operation of the first movable means is discriminated by the operation discriminating means, so that the operation of the second movable means can be made to correspond more finely to the operation of the first movable means.

  In the gaming machine L8, the determining means can move the second movable means corresponding to an operation from when the movable amount of the first movable means reaches the predetermined movable amount until the first movable pattern ends. A gaming machine L9, which determines data.

  According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L8, the second movable means corresponding to the operation from when the movable amount of the first movable means becomes a predetermined movable amount until the first movable pattern is completed. Since the movable data is determined by the determining means, the operation of the second movable means after the predetermined movable amount can be made to correspond to the operation of the first movable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L10, second movable data corresponding to a second movable pattern predetermined for the second movable means based on the first movable data set by the first movable setting means. A gaming machine L11 comprising a movable setting means for setting the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine L11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L10, the second movable means predetermined for the second movable means based on the first movable data set by the first movable setting means. Since the second movable data corresponding to the pattern is set by the movable setting unit, the second movable unit is operated with the second movable pattern before the movable amount of the first movable unit reaches the predetermined movable amount. be able to. Therefore, since it can suppress that the 2nd movable means will be in a stop state until it becomes predetermined | prescribed movable amount, there exists an effect that it can suppress making a player feel uncomfortable.

<Characteristic M group> (Lighting control of accessory LED)
A movable means having a plurality of visual recognition parts that are movable within a predetermined movable range and configured such that a light emission mode from the back side is visible from the front side, and provided on the back side of the movable means, the back side of the movable means Further, at least a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern that is movable by the movable control unit, a light-emitting unit that has a light-emitting unit that can emit light in a predetermined light-emitting manner, A movable pattern determining means that can be determined, and when the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means, the movable portion is located at a light emitting position that is a position facing the light emitting portion of the light emitting means. The light emitting unit is caused to emit light when it is located, and at least a specific light emission pattern that is turned off when the movable means is moved a predetermined amount from the light emitting position. Gaming machine M1, characterized in that it comprises a light emission controllable light emission control means.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include variable means that operates with a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can perform a wide variety of performance operations by operating a plurality of variable means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, with the diversification of the variable means, it may be difficult to suitably move each variable means in the variable means having a complicated configuration. In addition, among the conventional gaming machines described above, there are those that change the light emission mode of a light emitting device constituted by LEDs or the like in accordance with the movement of the variable means. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute an effect operation with a stronger impact by causing the light emitting device to emit light in accordance with the operation of the variable means. However, in this conventional gaming machine, there is a case where the operation of the variable means and the light emission mode of the light emitting device are deviated. In such a case, the visual quality of the rendering operation may be degraded.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine M1, the movable means is movable within a predetermined movable range. The movable means includes a plurality of visual recognition parts configured such that a light emission mode from the back side is visible from the front side. On the back side of the movable means, there is provided a light emitting means having a light emitting portion capable of emitting the visual recognition portion in a predetermined light emission mode. The movable means is moved and controlled by the movement control means, and a specific movable pattern is determined at least by the movable pattern determining means as a movable pattern moved by the movement control means. When the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining unit, the light emitting unit is caused to emit light when the movable unit is positioned at the light emitting position that is a position opposite to the light emitting unit of the light emitting unit. The light emission is controlled by at least the light emission control means with a specific light emission pattern that emits light when moved by a predetermined amount from the light emission position.

  Thereby, since it can suppress that a light emission part light-emits in the state which the visual recognition part and the light emission part shifted | deviated, the appearance quality of a movable means can be improved in the state which the light emission means light-emitted. Therefore, there is an effect that the light emitting means and the movable means can be suitably operated.

  In the gaming machine M1, the movable means is constituted by a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2, the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis. And the arrangement other than the light emission position are repeated alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be operated with a good appearance every time at a light emitting position where there is a possibility of being arranged a plurality of times.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the movable pattern determining means can determine one movable pattern from a plurality of movable patterns including at least the specific movable pattern as the movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. The light emission control means controls light emission of the light emission means with a predetermined light emission pattern different from the specific light emission pattern when the predetermined movable pattern is determined. M3.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the following effects are produced. That is, the movable pattern determining means determines one movable pattern from a plurality of movable patterns including at least a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. When the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emission means is controlled to emit light with a predetermined light emission pattern different from the specific light emission pattern.

  Thereby, since it is possible to control light emission with different light emission patterns according to the movable pattern, it is possible to change the appearance of the movable means more greatly according to the light emission pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily discriminate from which the movable pattern is moved.

  In the gaming machine M3, the predetermined movable pattern has a moving speed set faster than the specific movable pattern.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3, the predetermined movable pattern is set so that the movable speed is faster than the specific movable pattern, so that the movable pattern of the movable means can be easily determined from the movable speed. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine M3 or M4, the predetermined light emission pattern is a light emission pattern that causes the light emitting means to emit light even when the movable means is located at a position other than the light emitting position.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3 or M4, when the light emission is controlled with a predetermined light emission pattern, the light emission means emits light even when the movable means is located other than the light emission position. There is an effect that the player can more easily recognize the difference in the light emission mode of the light emitting means between the specific light emission pattern and the predetermined light emission pattern.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M5, the movable means is configured by a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis, and the visual recognition unit is on a predetermined circumference around the predetermined rotation axis. The movable means has rotational symmetry according to the number of locations of the visual recognition portion, and the light emitting portion is the same as the number of locations of the visual recognition portion. The gaming machine M6 is characterized in that it is provided in a number of places.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, the following effects are produced. That is, the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis. And the visual recognition part is provided in the multiple places at equal intervals on the predetermined periphery centering on a predetermined rotating shaft. Moreover, the movable means has rotational symmetry according to the number of locations of the visual recognition part. And the light emission part is provided in the same number of places as the number of places of a visual recognition part.

  Thereby, when the variable means is rotating, the light emitting position is set at every fixed rotation angle, so that the appearance quality before and after the specific rotation pattern becomes a fixed rotation angle can be improved.

  In the gaming machine M6, the light emission control means, as the specific light emission pattern, each time the rotating body is in the light emission position, the light emission control means is equal to or more than the number of places of the light emitting units that were emitted when the light emission position was last set. A gaming machine M7 that controls the number of the light emitting units to emit light.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M6, the following effects are produced. That is, as the specific light emission pattern, each time the rotator is in the light emission position, the light emission control means is configured so that the number of light emission parts equal to or greater than the number of light emission parts that were emitted when the rotator was in the previous light emission position is emitted. Controlled by

  Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily recognize that the movable pattern and the light emission pattern are switched according to the change in appearance.

  In any one of the gaming machines M3 to M7, the movable pattern determined by the movable pattern determining means includes a high-speed movable pattern in which a movable speed is set faster than the predetermined movable pattern, and the light emission control means The gaming machine M6 is configured to control the light emitting unit to emit light at each predetermined period when the predetermined movable pattern is shifted to the high speed movable pattern.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M3 to M7, the following effects are produced. That is, the movable pattern determined by the movable pattern determining means includes a high-speed movable pattern in which the movable speed is set faster than the predetermined movable pattern. When shifting from the predetermined movable pattern to the high-speed movable pattern, the light emitting means controls the light emitting section to emit light at predetermined intervals.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that it can be made to recognize more easily that it became a high-speed movable pattern with the period which a light emission part light-emits.

  In the gaming machine M6, the predetermined period is shorter than a period in which the movable unit in which the high-speed movable pattern is set becomes the light emission position, and is a middle period until the light emission position is moved to the next light emission position. A gaming machine M7, which is longer than the time until the point is reached.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M7, the predetermined period is shorter than the period in which the movable means in which the high-speed movable pattern is set becomes the light emitting position, and it moves from the light emitting position to the next light emitting position. Since it is configured to be longer than the time until it reaches the midpoint until the rotation, the rotation relative to the arrangement of the visual recognition part before rotation is compared with the rotation angle at which the visual recognition part moves by rotation during a predetermined period. The angle of the position where the visual recognition part adjacent on the opposite side to the direction is arranged by rotation during a predetermined period becomes smaller. That is, since the visual recognition part adjacent to the direction opposite to the rotation direction every predetermined cycle can be mistaken for the visual recognition part recognized before the predetermined period elapses, can do. Therefore, it is possible to make the appearance in which the rotation direction is changed without changing the operation of the variable means, so that it is possible to reduce the load on the variable means.

  In the gaming machine M7, the light emission control means causes the light emitting means to emit light in a third light emission pattern that causes the light emitting units to emit light in a predetermined order.

  According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M7, the following effects are produced. That is, since the light emission means emits light by the light emission control means in the third light emission pattern in which each light emitting portion emits light in a predetermined order, light can be emitted in a more interesting manner. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K6, L1 to L11, A gaming machine Z1 according to any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K6, L1 to L11, The gaming machine Z2 according to any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

Gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K6, L1 to L11, A gaming machine Z3 according to any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include variable means that operates with a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can perform a wide variety of performance operations by operating a plurality of variable means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, with the diversification of the variable means, it may be difficult to suitably move each variable means in the variable means having a complicated configuration.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably setting the operation of the variable means.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is movable within a predetermined movable range, and a movable means having a plurality of visual recognition parts configured such that a light emission mode from the back side is visible from the front side; A light emitting means provided on the back side of the movable means, and having a light emitting part capable of emitting the visual recognition part in a predetermined light emission mode from the back side of the movable means; a movable control means capable of controlling the movable means; A movable pattern determining means capable of determining at least a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern moved by the movable control means; and when the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining means, the visual recognition unit The light emitting unit emits light when the movable unit is located at a light emitting position that is opposite to the light emitting unit, and the movable means is movable by a predetermined amount from the light emitting position. And at least emission controllable light emission control means in a particular emission pattern for turning off if it.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is the gaming machine of technical idea 1, wherein the movable means is constituted by a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the movable pattern determining means includes the specific movable pattern as the movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. One movable pattern can be determined from a plurality of movable patterns including at least, and when the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emission control unit emits the light with a predetermined light emission pattern different from the specific light emission pattern. The means controls light emission.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the movable means is movable within a predetermined movable range. The movable means includes a plurality of visual recognition parts configured such that a light emission mode from the back side is visible from the front side. On the back side of the movable means, there is provided a light emitting means having a light emitting portion capable of emitting the visual recognition portion in a predetermined light emission mode. The movable means is moved and controlled by the movement control means, and a specific movable pattern is determined at least by the movable pattern determining means as a movable pattern moved by the movement control means. When the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining unit, the light emitting unit is caused to emit light when the movable unit is positioned at the light emitting position that is a position opposite to the light emitting unit of the light emitting unit. The light emission is controlled by at least the light emission control means with a specific light emission pattern that emits light when moved by a predetermined amount from the light emission position.
Thereby, since it can suppress that a light emission part light-emits in the state which the visual recognition part and the light emission part shifted | deviated, the appearance quality of a movable means can be improved in the state which the light emission means light-emitted. Therefore, there is an effect that the operations of the light emitting means and the movable means can be set appropriately.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the movable means is constituted by a rotating body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis. While is rotating, the light emission position and the arrangement other than the light emission position are repeated alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be operated with a good appearance every time at a light emitting position where there is a possibility of being arranged a plurality of times.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, the following effects are produced. That is, the movable pattern determining means determines one movable pattern from a plurality of movable patterns including at least a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. When the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emission means is controlled to emit light with a predetermined light emission pattern different from the specific light emission pattern.
Thereby, since it is possible to control light emission with different light emission patterns according to the movable pattern, it is possible to change the appearance of the movable means more greatly according to the light emission pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily discriminate from which the movable pattern is moved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
810 Lighting device (light emitting means)
811a-811f Circular lighting area (light emitting part)
820 Rotating member (movable means)
821a to 821f Through-hole (viewing part)
S1552 Light emission control means

Claims (3)

Movable means that is movable within a predetermined movable range and has a plurality of visual recognition parts configured such that the light emission mode from the back side is visible from the front side;
A light emitting means provided on the back side of the movable means, and having a light emitting part capable of emitting the visual recognition part in a predetermined light emission mode from the back side of the movable means;
A movable control means capable of controlling the movable means;
Movable pattern determining means capable of determining at least a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern moved by the movable control means;
When the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determining unit, the light emitting unit is triggered by the fact that the movable unit is located at a light emitting position where the visual recognition unit is opposed to the light emitting unit of the light emitting unit. And a light emission control means capable of controlling light emission at least with a specific light emission pattern that is turned off when the movable means is moved by a predetermined amount from the light emission position.   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the movable means is constituted by a rotating body that is rotatable about a predetermined rotation axis. The movable pattern determining means is capable of determining one movable pattern from a plurality of movable patterns including at least the specific movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern as the movable pattern,
The said light emission control means controls the light emission of the said light emission means by the predetermined light emission pattern different from the said specific light emission pattern, when the said predetermined movable pattern is determined, The Claim 1 or 2 characterized by the above-mentioned. Game machines.

Images